Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D10-317 - TARGET - REMODELTARGET 301 STRANDER BL D10 -317 City oftukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: ht4,://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Parcel No.: 2623049005 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Suite No: Project Name: TARGET DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Permit Number: D 10 -317 Issue Date: 05/06/2011 Permit Expires On: 11/02/2011 Owner: Name: TARGET CORPORATION T 0627 Address: C/0 PROPERTY TAX/TPN 0950 , PO BOX 9456 55440 Contact Person: Name: DAVID CONTRERAS Address: 601 SW 2 AV - SUITE 1200 , PORTLAND OR 97204 Contractor: Name: SKANSKA USA BUILDING INC Address: 1633 LITTLETON ROAD , PARSIPPANY NJ 07054 Contractor License No: SKANSUB985RT Phone: 971- 998 -1451 Phone: 973 - 753 -3500 Expiration Date: 01/12/2013 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: REMODEL OF AN EXISTING STORE FOR A NEW LINE OF MERCHANDISE. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN FREEZER AND COOLER IN STOCK ROOM WITH FREEZER/COOLER FIXTURES ON SALES FLOOR. THE SCOPE FURTHER INCLUDES ARCHITECTURAL WORK FOR SUPPORT OF MODIFICATIONS AND REMODEL OF FINISHES, THE ADDITION OF ROOFTOP CONDENSING UNITS, THE REPLACEMENT OF AN EXISTING TRASH COMPACTOR WITH A NEW UNIT, NEW SHELVING AND RACKS, AND ASSOCIATED PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. Value of Construction: $743,250.00 Fees Collected: $10,664.99 Type of Fire Protection: SPRIN LERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2009 Type of Construction: II -B Occupancy per IBC: 0019 Electrical Service Provided by: * *continued on next page ** doc: IBC -7/10 D10 -317 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 • Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: N N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Start Time: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. End Time: Fill 0 c.y. Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non - Profit: N Water Main Extension: Private: Public: Water Meter: N Permit Center Authorized Signature: - .. / / Date: 7 (ii I hereby certify that I have read and examined this p 'i't and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Print Name: M• Date: -/(04I This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 6: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. doc: IBC -7/10 D10 -317 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 7: A final report documenting required spe nspections and correction of any discrepanenoted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 8: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 9: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. 10: Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 11: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 12: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 13: All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated wood. 14: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 15: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 16: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 17: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 18: Ventilation is required for all new rooms and spaces of new or existing buildings and shall be in conformance with the International Building Code and the Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Code. 19: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 20: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 21: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 22: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 23: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 24: The installation of the racking is NOT APPROVED. Rack installation requires a separate building permit submittal and will be reviewed at that time. 25: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1) 26: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 doc: IBC -7/10 D10 -317 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 27: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 28: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 29: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 30: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 31: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (EEC Chapter 10) 32: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 33: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 34: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 35: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (EEC 1011.5.1) 36: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (EEC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 37: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 38: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot -candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot -candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot -candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot -candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to- minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1006.4) 39: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4) 40: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 41: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2050). 42: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2051. doc: IBC -7/10 D10 -317 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 43: Maintain square foot coverage of detec er manufacturer's specifications in all area�luding: closets, elevator shafts, top of stairwells, etc. (NFPA 72- 5.5.2.1 44: Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding automatic fire detectors. 45: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 46: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 47: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this project. 48: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 49: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 50: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 51: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) 52: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 53: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. 54: ** *PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 55: Prior to final Public Works permit sign -off the applicant shall apply for a separate PW permit to install an RPPA for premise isolation on domestic water supply and submit backflow test reports for 2" irrigation Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) and 1/2" RPPA on carbonated beverage dispenser; both were last tested in 2009. 56: ** *PLANNING DIVISION CONDITIONS * ** 57: Rooftop mechanical equipment will be required to be screened if visible from the adjacent right of way. doc: IBC -7/10 D10 -317 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 • CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us ►. Building Permit No. Di° - 317 Mechanical Permit No. VIL Q J to L) Plumbing /Gas Permit No. Public Works Permit No. Project No. v& to- is (For office use _only) Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** SITE LOCATION Site Address: 301 Strander Blvd - Tukwila, WA 98188 Tenant Name: Target Store T -0627 Property Owners Name: Target Corporation Mailing Address: 1000 Nicollet Mall King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 2623049005 Suite Number: - Floor: New Tenant: ❑ Yes m .. No Minneapolis City IJ State. 55403 Zip CONTACT PERSON — who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued Name: David Contreras - MulvannyG2 Architecture Mailing Address: 601 SW 2nd Ave., Suite 1200 Day Telephone: (971) 998-1451 Portland OR 97204 E -Mail Address: david.contreras @mulvannyg2.com City State Fax Number: (971) 217 -0122 Zip GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION — (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5)) Company Name: Skanska USA Building, Inc. Mailing Address: 221 Yale Ave., North #400 Contact Person: TBD E -Mail Address: 11'' r p� q� Contractor Registration Number: �V �7 v1,I(j 1 1/> pc- Seattle City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: WA State 98109 Zip ARCHITECT OF RECORD — All plans must be stamped by Architect of Record Company Name: MulvannyG2 Architecture Mailing Address: 601 SW 2nd Ave., Suite 1200 Contact Person: Brian R. Fleener Portland OR 97204 E -Mail Address: City State Zip Day Telephone: (503) 223 -8030 Fax Number: ENGINEER OF RECORD — All plans must be stamped by Engineer of Record Company Name: Myers Houghton & Partners Mailing Address: 4500 E Pacific Coast Hwy., Ste 100 Contact Person: Garry D. Myers Long Beach CA 90804 City Statc Zip Day Telephone: (562) 985 -3200 E -Mail Address: Fax Number: H:\Application,Forms- Applications On Line \2010 Applications \7 -2010 - Permit Applicatwn.doc Revised: 7-2010 hh Page 1 of 6 • BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 -431 -3670 • Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 2423:6E-43 6.---0.°4') Existing Building Valuation: $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Installation of walk -in coolers /freezer in stock room. Part of the project will include decor upgrades to match the revised store layout. Will there be new rack storage? m Yes 0.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be reciuired. 5CE 1 1-41 5RA , ST-sti 5R52, SZ53 Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below . Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC l" Floor 113,588 10,436 0 0 2 -N M 2 "d Floor 3`d Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: m.. Sprinklers ❑ . Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ . ..None ❑ ...Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? lr Yes ❑ No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on u separate 8- 1 /2 " .v 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEE P- 0,...v0acr SHee s F911 1 F S. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Ii:'.A ppIlea,ions; Forms -Appl ical ions On Li ne'2010 Applicalions',7 -20I 0 - Permit Applicnlwn.doc Re, iced• 7- 2010 hh Page 2 of 6 PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 433 -0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Installation of walk -in coolers /freezer in stock room. Part of the project will include decor upgrades to match the revised store layout. Call before you Dig: 1- 800 - 424 -5555 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District El ...Tukwila El ... Water District #125 El ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District m ...Tukwila ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate ❑ .. l- lighlme ❑ ... Valley View ❑ .. Renton E l ... Sewer Availability Provided ❑ .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle Septic System: ❑ On -site Septic System For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34 ") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right -of -way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right -of -way Use - No Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right -of -way ❑ Non Right -of -way ❑ ...Total Cut ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards cubic yards ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑ ...Traffic Control ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection Irrigation Domestic Water ❑ . ❑ . ❑• ❑ . ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑ . Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ... Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ Hold Harmless (SAO) ❑...Ilold llarmlcss (ROW) ❑ .. Right -of -way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right -of -way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ .. Storm Drainage . Abandon Septic Tank . Curb Cut . Pavement Cut . Looped Fire Line ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... " ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size .. ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension Public ❑ ...Water Main Extension Public WO# WO # WO# Private ❑ Private ❑ ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑...Deduct Watcr Meter Size FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) ❑ ...Water ❑ ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Mailing Address: City State Zip Day Telephone: City Stale Zip F1:\ Applications \Forms-Applications On Lme\2010 Applications \7 -2010 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 7 -2010 hh Page 3 of 6 MECHANICAL PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 431 -3670 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: TBD Mailing Address: City statc Zip Contact Person: Day Telephone: E -Mail Address: Fax Number: Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date: Valuation of Mechanical wor contractor's bid price): S 52,900 Sc•pe of Work (please pr•vide .t- tail information): ne Use: Residential: New .... ❑ Commercial: New .... enlacement .... ❑ cement .... ❑ Fuel T pe: Electric ❑ Gas ....m Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the a ity below: Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: • ci Unit Type: Qty Boiler /Compressor: Qty Furnace <I00K BTU Air Handling Unit >1 tt 100 CFM / �t� Fire Damper 0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU Furnace >I00K BTU Evaporator Cooler 20 4'Miser 3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU Floor Furnace Ventilation Fair onnccted to Single Dui/ 4 Thy . ostat 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU Suspended/Wall/Floor Mounted 1- leater Ventilation; stem ,` Wood /Oks Stove e 30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU Appliance Vent Hood at +r Duct �d Emergenc; Generator 50+ 1 -IP /1,750,000 BTU Repair or Addition to 1- leat/Refrig /Cooling System 4 Inch ator - Domestic Other Meehan' at Equipment Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM cinerator — Comm/Ind 0:',4pplicationlForms- Applications On Line20I 0 Applicaiionl7 -20111 - Permit Application.doc Revised 7 -2010 bh Page 4 of 6 • PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justiliable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT 1 HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND 1 AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Signature: Print Name: David Contreras Mailing Address: 601 SW 2nd Ave., Suite 1200 Date: / // / 7/ /O Day Telephone: (971) 998- 1451 Portland OR 97204 City State Zip Date Application Accepted: 1 lk(_' ( Date Application Expires: - Staff Initials: vii0 n:\Applications \ror - Applications On Line \2010 Applications \7-2010 - Pemiii Applicalion.dnc Revised: 7 -21110 bh Page 6 of 6 • • PLUMBING AND GAS PIPING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 431 -3670 PLUMBING AND GAS PIPING CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: TBD Mailing Address: City State Zip Contact Person: Day Telephone: E -Mail Address: Fax Number: Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date: Valuation of Plumbing w rk (contractor's bid price): $ 47,725 Valuation of Gas Piping wt •k (contractor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please provi detailed information): Building Use (per Intl Building Code): Occupancy (per Int'l Building Code): Utility Purveyor: Water: Sewer: Indicate type of plumbing fixtures and /or gas piping outlets • =mg installed and the quantity below: Fixture Type: Qty Fixture Type: t'Qty Fixture Type: Qty Fixture Type: Qty Bathtub or combination bath /shower 0 Bidet ;1 °':, Clothes washer, domestic Dental unit, cuspidor Dishwasher, domestic, with independent drain 0 Drinking fountain o water cooler (per ad) '^ Food -waste grinder, commercial 0 Floor Drain 2 Shower, single head trap 0 Lavatory 1 0 1Wash fountain Receptor, indirect waste 3 Sinks 3 Urinals f / 0 W. r Closet 0 Building sewer and each trailer park sewer 0 Rain water system — per dram (inside building) 0 Water -'rter and /or vent ,F' JF Indust \ waste treatment interceptkt including trap and vent, '''t\ ept for kitchen type grease i' -rceplors 0 Each grease trap (connected to not more than 4 fixtures - <750 gallon capacity) 0 Grease interceptor for commercial kitchen ( >750 gallon capacity) 0 � `" pair or alteration of 'water piping and /or water treatment equipment 5 Repair or alter' on of drainage or vent "ht, Mg ;1 '1, Medical gas piping system serving 1 -5 inlets /outlets for a specific gas 0 Each additional medical gas inlets /outlets greater than 5 r' 0 Backflow protective device other than atmospheric -type vacuum breakers 2 inch (51 nun) diameter or smaller 1 Back flow protective d"s'ce other than almospheric-t °14, vacuum breakers over 2 ''`,t inch (51 mm) diameter Each lawn sprinkler system on any one meter including backflow protection devices 0 Atmospheric -type va a im breakers not includ- +' in lawn sprinkler ba . ° ow protections (1 -5).' Atmospheric -type vacuum breakers not included in lawn sprinkler backflow protections over 5 Gas piping outlets H ppl icationsFo'', -. 1 .\rnccali.,n<`.7.2n In- Permit .\ppl iction.doe Revised- 7 -20Ia bh Page 5 of 6 City of Tukwila Department of Conmumity Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: ht0://www. RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2623049005 Permit Number: D10-317 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 11/19/2010 Applicant: TARGET Issue Date: Receipt No.: R11 -00911 Initials: User ID: Payee: TLS 1670 Payment Amount: $6,465.40 Payment Date: 05/06/2011 02:04 PM Balance: $0.00 USA BUILDING INC TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 430619 6,465.40 Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts BUILDING - NONRES 000.322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 640.237.114 Total: $6,465.40 6,460.90 4.50 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 05 -06 -2011 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tulcwila.wa.us Parcel No.: 2623049005 Address: 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Suite No: Applicant: TARGET RECEIPT Permit Number: D10-317 Status: PENDING Applied Date: 11/19/2010 Issue Date: Receipt No.: R10 -02359 Initials: User ID: Payee: WER 1655 Payment Amount: $4,199.59 Payment Date: 11/19/2010 03:14 PM Balance: $6,465.40 TARGET TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 1298004 4,199.59 Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts PLAN CHECK - NONRES 000.345.830 4,199.59 Total: $4,199.59 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 11 -19 -2010 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION .6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 g. (206) 431 -367 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 1)/6-.317 Project: Type of Inspection: I--; Address: J. /�! /� 4jv I .5TKr7 1)C Date alled: Special' Instructions: Date Wanted:. Requester: Phone No: --r- ,z06- -tea - 5/77 -r NApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspec Date: 1 NSPECTION FEE REQ IRED. Pr'or to next inspection, fee must be aid at 6300 Southcenter = lvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Oto -30 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 g(206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: Type f Inspection: A3eo:' S ` 1 1 Aid Date Called: Special Instructions: 0 S-1333 —4a % / Date Wanted: . l^ I l i "{% .. '. '.... '. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECT IN NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF' TUIKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 2/Q J/7 Project: -7-14/7 /07r e d / /F/s, /ei 0 9N7vpd 4/' 4 , , r Type of Inspection: P.�I14`.- Address: Jvi s; 47Akt/A Date Called: Special Instructions: eA rf Date Wanted:. �m; cg-3 / / / p.m. Requester: Phone No: a76 - 5 5 2 - y7.7 j JApproved per applicable codes. aCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: e d / /F/s, /ei 0 9N7vpd 4/' 4 , , r - ' 2 h #9 / : ell 1 - / ; t 1 . 4 r 3 " J I ' A / 4 _ _ - - /1.4 cd aFF/ie ,fXeV J,-c /Pr 0 ,4,iv e'y 1;g 4445 - Alp/wove lDa? 0 I Q. . �/a d at 6300 SPECTION Southcenter FEE Rt Blvd.. UIRED Suite P or 100. to next Call to inspection schedule reinspection. fee must be INSPECTION RECORD _ Retain a copy with permit INSPECT4 NO PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 A (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: A Cl. 6 F.— Type of Inspection: .L Lilo t 1 Address: 301 ,a11b1Q Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted:. -3a -1 I a.m Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Date: 127— RE S ° ECTION FEE R 9UIRED. P for to next inspection. fee must be paid a, 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. t 10 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF' TUIKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 g (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 b0-31-7 Project: Type of Inspection: f L 1 7..i 1.J 6 -r C- P i Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: . gil- 3a -1 1 Requester: Phone No: �O 52 ^u *77 Approved per applicable codes. E Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 0 &I-AZ tr Jb — IA PPdu i. el) 4i.t5p *�U nn -t��. NC., ATV a✓.■J� C .� (dP - ADp/ rf Date: 3 R , N - PECTION FEE REQUIRED. P for to next inspection. fee must be p. d at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Ut d -3 V7 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 (206) 431 -3670 Projct �_ t A.l6l� C Type of Inspection; i , Sc rew•}'6 - F-tmA P Address: , *A/0-.../. .1C SteN it Date Called: Special Instructions: , Date Wanted: 2,--4 - '( p.m• Requester: Phone No: 17 I 9 Approvedper applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: A ; Date: r7 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. t INSPECTION 0. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION C 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 ifs_ (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Pro ect: Type of Inspection: 1 1 Ad ress: Date Called: Special Instructions: , Date Wanted: a.m. ( t f( Requester: Phone No. 7,0 Co — cg 2.- -1 f) riej ❑ Approved per applicable codes. ['Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: A ?A-M/0 i FC LA -el ,Su Gj e G` to t . - It Sp r) niref- 6 : e-,A4 pkm--1r,---- ____ ,. it Inspector: 1Date:, ri REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRE nor to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. !(O INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit )'L- 3ir] PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: 1-A9.667-- Type o . Inspection: 1rAJ'A(A6 . Sitv34Ec TO eLRiRittolL nct/-R - - Address: 3d ( STNIAiJOE& Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted � ` �-d (r 1 'p m Requester: Phone No(0 - CS" a -4411 9 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: A. 6.) tT_Q.. APFA t= 1)4,►1dvG rAPP12014./G.6 Sitv34Ec TO eLRiRittolL nct/-R - - Mf2G(A.,04 Ll6H u.1c REcp4+R 45 `, Inspect : a,4w, 1 / 0(.4 REJNSPECTION FEE RE UIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be p fd at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: 7- 2.8- if ...! • • • • p. INSPECTION FEE REWIRED. Priorj. next inspection;; €eCmust =be : - id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 10. Call to schedule reinspec�ians` INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD (0, 30 Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 11206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project—, _6 Type of I spectitA ( Address: p `AA/Af 30 ( 5Tt & Date Called: Specia Instructions: ©5 05 q 3 _ O i Date Wanted: / (0 /1-2- - ' (I P.m. Requester: Phone No: f j Approved per applicable codes. Ei Corrections required prior to approval. c COMMENTS: p r� S (13-3(-1Z- Q- ��,- 20 e)-1-2_ E -31-32 C,-33 `i O 4 6-4-12 � 1- (Z -67 nspe r: Date. —ZZ -t INSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to -xt inspection. fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. all to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD r-� Retain a copy with permit £( 0 _3 1 L— INSPECTION NO. PERMIT Na. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 iZ+ Project: Type of Inspection: Addre`s�s: �,�) 6 3 VI SW` yviL& Date Called: Special Instructions: _ d c` 0S J ? 1Z. INSPECTION RECORD' Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 . (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 rl0 -3 i "7 Project: j fkfLGE -1 Type of Inspection: r 12 AAA cx.1 L . Address: (9B12 TSB Date Called: � - \ Special Instructions: Date Wanted: G -c-1 - It a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: 2� 1-; i it,„ 5 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: � r�,.1U�F �, � - \ AL'u - z'� - Nr ' 2� 1-; i it,„ 5 A- - t rL "tl .A- ?-, --- Alp, ixtZ t • ..5 SPECTION FEE REQ RED. Pri • r to next inspection, fee must be • • '. �'•`> at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suit- 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. ato �,o -317 CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 • 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Project: % #2C Type of Inspection: F.-PA/PI/A/6 /) r/), hifec (1- 3 Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Co - L — / / t= -3v - a.m. P.m. Requester: Phone No: .t —c,/7- 6252 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. OCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS? 4 /) r/), hifec (1- 3 --- e -Iz - 4 l•iv / 7---0(.11( ifs �� - t= -3v - .- 1,��✓N-c7 ....0 Insp to ,AAAJ1 i 1 Date: ('-2 - PECTION FEE REQI}TED. Prior to/iext inspection. fee must be at 6300 Southcenter BWd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ' :4 %`C•%'177 —: 7'.;a`S'r..-rni. y: w.;eT °tis r'$".:i _' a'Y "�y�%1... --y,,. ^'op�.. ;sM1 /" sr''iX. x`.!r °'r"p.r°R'!N. rei • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. '✓10.3( 7 PERMIT NO. CITY OF. TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project—. 6 • Type /nspection: 4-6 Address: 0 I Special Instructions: (� `j q 1 S-v DtA Date Called: .6 — — 6 IX Date Wanted: �j ..... .p.m.. l • p.m. + Requester: Ph a No• /\ f �D -5S2 —417 '71._ ElApproved per applicable codes. 1 aCorrections required prior to approval. %.."--w .; COMMENTS: R4. 'x�,�iS - d 6- Z 4 3 - C —Z3 — JtAffa �0/ 2 !.i a/j,/>, s .6 — — 1b /O — AO _, AAA; V" / ss-N, R P NSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to net inspection. fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. • -J • i 1`L°f`n ria^tir- °r t�i�' ?!c'. ?` +. -"! =• 3r.. .�.., ,: ter- 3 x '•'��: v 'tom h i .. _ .. .- , f., .. :.n /"' (.::. .. ,,..• .;.� .. � .�.1' � H •INSPECTION RECORD' • Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. • CITY OF TUIKWILA BUILDING DIVISION g- 10-317 - 10 -3 7 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 . `. Project: `irkC G,� i — Type of Inspection: F"2 �rar+ Address: Ot 5112,14:0c re. QL Date Called: Special Instructions: L+ 05-0 /1 0 i'I I Date Wanted: 5 -27 -i �-p -� Requester: Phone No: j��w'J,� aa(•i -s2 !LI77 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. E1 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: C-13 e ter: Date: 5 -27-(1 NSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection: • . :, p5id at 6300 Southcente Y • INSpATION RECORD: i Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. ../..)/6.3/ CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: /09Rger Type of Inspection: ‘..5" i/...5 PF-A/t)04 Oew_/,v Address: 30 / c 5 77 M Akve 4 z.... Date Called: Special Instructions: ; 74 41 p 41 9tWo Date Wanted: Omi p. II. Requester: Phone No 02 4 6- --55 2 4/ 7 ElApproved per applicable codes. DCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 7.7 £,-f/ 700,2iter 52153Aw4 _ 4,,v01641( Ins 7 tck , Pate:. INSPECTION F E REQUIR D. Pillar to next inspection, fee must be aid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ,.! '..,:.••;• • • :. • , ::VL, ; :.' , },- ,f‘'....,'-' .�; • INSPECTION. RECORD , V Retain a copy with permit INSPECT] NO. PERMIT NO. 1� CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION •• 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: ( 3 ) (3- P - w B - 2 1- y 2 s z Type of Inspection: zi kovk t l c, ?tlw ,-S r (sal - tog Address: 30 1 S i RAte) bFR R L Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 5— ..2L(- I1 a. m. Requester: ........., Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. aCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p A - ( 3 ) (3- P - w B - 2 1- y 2 s z 2.7 2S zi kovk t l c, ?tlw ,-S r (sal - tog ........., Dates: ^�j I/ SPECTION FEE ° EQUIRED. Pri r to next inspection. fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suit 100. Call to schedule reinspection. • iv` ' 71.1r, INSPECTION RECORD- • 7 - • Retain a copy with permit )103 i 7 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION P4"" 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: --1---Occlloil- Type of Inspection: rz a Awk 1 ki 6 Address: .301 S7-62. Ai0 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: in - czo - I P.m. Requester: Phone No: (9.040-S 6 2 - L-1779 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: f> 4 0 (1,1 4115 —4,/fotitt/ (1/41/11/ r3S -35 410 4 V- 45 14 1 — I spe o : p...4, Date: — I REJ1SPECTION FEE REQU\I ED. Prior to /ext inspection, fee must be p id at 6300 Southcenter Blv . Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. rwal aunt. .• S° ` ` - -;sz"u5 ' 4 •4' sh T.7 ..i. INSPECTION RECORD ' ' • • 0 Retain a copy p with ermit AO -31 7 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY. OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION Q- • . 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: Type of Ins ection: /-i14.7•7/4/ Date Called: �. 47/26 Fi-` Address: ?0 / S � ,4? aA/Je/L Special Instructions: �,t� 4 4 /4V52 -a/ Date Wanted: �— /7— 1/ Ca,_p1.. p.m. Requester: Phone No: C›?0 6-51 -0/57 Approved per applicable codes. O Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p. A ( j,t // A:7_ 7 2 p / d✓� Spector Date: ,,, REI SPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to ne t inspection. fee must be pa' . at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ;"!-"trf7". j7rtirsaliar..s• - • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA q8188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: _...202:5■)(r____ Special Instructions: 0 4/Ge4g -0 / Date Called: Date Wanted: a. Requester: Phone No: c2/1 6 —SS — — zr7 ? F ElApproved per applicable codes. Ei Corrections required prior to approval. • COMMENTS: it) -•1 - Fa, s)() (lo„,/ 17 ,type wriv Date: / 4 / REI S CTION FEE REQUIRE'. Prior to ext inspection fee.must be pai 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.. •• • .• ... •5•:-1. ..y•'..•'q:. • ...'4..-.. y: .4'.. .. R.i':. • }'. . • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit- !WE TION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWI.LA BUILDING DIVISION OM 7 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 (206) 431 -3670 Project: T i?r 7 Type of Inspection: F27'*' 7 .. Address: ' ,3a / sT,74..v )i Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: —/2 —// Requester: Phone No: .2 o G- 77g-7352 IDApproved per applicable codes. ElCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p 4 i 3 -i -/7 sue', /I /le / - r /ArzieES _? A? na -e2 l — 1-174-h,,, 6 _ A ;oi' -G,sp . (nspe Date: • REI SPECTION FEE REQU .RED. Prior to next inspection; fee must pe -'' •; :: p d at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection;Z.t • ' !: � !T'-. ! - F•O +- -.= 9 :"71471" :CY°Y"'vS7 .: •- ='?cP'�:::, • -•,�s. , -- • •; ,�,.. - .i- ::#c•v; . _--rT- - •.F�- •r•-•- fix•.-- srr..:,. zw - :,.:,� . 1 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Pio -319 .PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUIKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 981'88 (206) 431-3670. •.: Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 • . Project, Type of Inspection: ...s(4..2/3 Address: ; ( _cif w _ ,i1� Date Called: Special Instructions: �j D� "1 Cr= 4 -- � Date Wanted: / I p Requester: Phone No: r� 7 2 D(o- $S2.mil f�. LApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. 45 COMMENTS: or: Date: r dINSPECTION FEE QUIRED. Pr'or to next inspection. iegrust .be • . id at 6300 Southcente Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. . • • •':a • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 7f1,?e'i - •Project: Typ! Inspection: f"9077/NC Address: . ?ca / .S'TdQAAJ J F12 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: n — 9 - // p.m. Requester: Phone No: . D -52/77S TMApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. ; COMMENTS: (') , 17 '2O - roar/ AIA _ 4;0aeverl pect o : Date: E NSPECTION FE ' EQUIR D. Prior to next inspection, fee must be aid at 6300 Southce ' ter Bl d., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. �'a INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD r, Retain a copy with permit ] i 0 --! 7 PERMIT NO. ,q6 CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: /! Type of In•1ecctiojn: Ad ress: t t `i 1 L/' • `t,, tl ate Call d: ,,c) V e IS Special nstructions: Date Wanted: ILI� Requester: .J Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: - P '(�uu +7 fcert iiceTued nAc Inspector: os Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. • • 1 INSPECTION NUMBER _:.ar.. - .--- C • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit //- 5 - /6 7 0r©- 3/7 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Project: -- "i Sprinklers: Type of Inspection: e �a Address: 3v1 Suite #: ,- �� Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: nApproved per applicable codes. o rections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: . Permits: Occupancy Type: 1A-11> '54 g-0.1-p Ed.. t 1 � -s`.r c.. c. r pS f ps r l•-ro� o Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: . Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: 5--,.1.-- Date: 9?/ ei/l Hrs.: 1 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: I Zip: Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 6/11/10 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 • • INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ,1 -- S 010 ►_�] PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Project: � l Sprinklers: Ty o5Inspection: nt Address: `� 3 � \ Suite #: s� �-2 rgwc� e � Contact Person: Contact Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: KApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: SP wtia -L - c� Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: . Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: /D S d— Date: 373 / /, ( Hrs.: I $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: 1 Company Name: Address: State: 1 Zip: Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 6/11/10 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 • • ' 2Y • TARGET FILE COPY Pere Rt: ". pin_ ►n.�' ... T0627 Recycling Program pveryiew Located at the front of the T0627 store, three recycling stations will offer guests a convenient way to recycle aluminum, glass and plastic beverage containers, plastic bags, MP3 players, cell phones and ink cartridges. A full description of recyclables that are accepted is available at Target.com /eco- friertdly. The guest= facing containers are only a component of this store's overall recycling program: T0627 also has recycling programs that responsibly dispose bf "corrugated cardboard, plastic shrink wrap, office paper, and bottle /can recycling for team members. Office paper is removed from the pharmacy and office area and recycled using a 3rd party service provider. The store's pharmacy has two 32 gallon secure containers for recycling. T0627 has a 32 gallon secure container in the office for paper recycling and a 23 gallon bottle /can recycling bin in the break room for team members. Target leverages at least one baler per store for baling corrugated cardboard in the backroom. Additionally, each store has two pallet spaces dedicated to staging the recycled bottles /cans and the shrink wrap /plastic shopping bags. These materials are removed from the store using Target's reverse supply chain, consolidated at a Target Distribution Center and then recycled leveraging a variety of vendors depending on the recyclable material type. This constant removal of recycled material from our store allows Target to avoid having any significant dedicated space in the backroom for storage of recycled material: As previously mentioned, Target has 3 containers dedicated at the front of each store that offer guests a place to recycle plastic shopping bags, cans /bottles, and small electronics including ink cartridges. The containers are each approximately 24" square and 34" tall and hold approximately 35 gallons of material. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED kilt 05 2611 Please direct any questions regarding the recycling program at this Target location to; Brock Burkett Resource Recovery Manager 612.761.2140 Brock.Burkett@Target.com CORRECTION LTR# - 11 1,0°- 3,1 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403 Target • Targetcom • Target Financial Ser vices • ICI • Target Sourcing Ser vices City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION +DECEIVED APR 2.1 2011 PERMITCENTER 0- • 0- Eirsarer...412■- 1 T I T I l! TT "°1° r'T r ' I ! 1■11 fiffE I 111 1 ..111.-21j1 I ij nig = •••-•"'" 11 01114:;110 0 41 111-41 11 PP 10 0 I 4 i II i11 n I 4 11 PP 1 11 n".47" 1111111Ellf AIPRIPAIFINIIIIIPALAIRFAINIVIIIIIIIPOTP[11111 OM 1 ri PPEPP PP Pe cp PP AP flP.OrrgratiTraLnP 711 II 11 1 U PPIPPIIPPIPPIPPIPIDPIPIOP PP OP rn OP PP PPIPPOPP 11 '11 11 111 PPEPP PP p PP lip PP HEAP Pa PP Pii pa 6P EPIIPP ..1.P• 11 11 " 111 PP1IPP PP PP P4 PP OP PREP PH OP PP pa PP RCP 141-=-Wil 11 PRI-PAT-PP i PP i PPTPP iPPIPP;IIPIPP i PP i PP iPPIT,,PPTPP OP 1 1 1 - 1 M - 1 El PP' PP PP' Pe pg' PP PP PP PP PP P111111 PP PP PP PP " 11 111 PP PP PP co PP PP DP PP OP NI OP PP OP PP pn PH 03 II 1 ti .P PP 't/ PP 41 1 PP .11 FM '11 i '11 PP '11 PM 41 MEI +41P.: Malt:. IIMM MC ;!'1,71 OW1 NW:, WC. 1.1 Min :Jr: gliallIllnALSIW:.ii 11111V•IIIIndlirtilHE{.1111•USIIK1.113%.111110. INC: &I r,.... lila Illezl 1I.. kilt irirririrm inv. '4~1 •• - 0' 1611■11■111heii 1 111111E1 :fig MAW= 1110[Alr = N, \ F" sic, akt g-ttiriamiiaii.: ,,III, ..1.... I ]‘ Mli INMIIMII MIS Ikt- ■:'.-. -0 *Recycling areas within T-0627 are Hatched in Red: - Cardboard Baler & Storage (apprx 460 sf) - Guest Recycling Bins (apprx 75 sf) 0- • MOP uiiuI - 11 II II Iiii iii il 11 11 Al II J0,111 MI ,2111 1111 040-1••11111332T=EMEN • .•,••■•••■••,,,,,T7•1111MTINI itgaGaGIA''iliGAGAGilP AZ:aro:Z.= •ae--• II II 11 II II II 11 II II= 11 11 11 11 ill 11 11 1111 11 i ■ , , , I ■ , , 1 7 , i ■ 0 0 o 6 0 0 0 CORRE_UON LTR# iEGEIVED APR 2 132011 PERMIT CENTER re T -0627 TARGET SOUTH CENTER, WA STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS C� EVIL�wED FOR Kyle White, Structural Contact OE COMPLIANCEEL. (562) 985 -3200 APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 C Of TUMN BUILDING nvv,qIIa , , pY 1 r T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd Tukwila, WA Project Code No: 270627 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 18 April 2011 Prepared by: MHP, Inc. Circle Business Center 1 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy. Suite 100 Long Beach, CA 90804 CORRECTION p RECEIVED APR 212011 PERMIT CENTER MHP JN: 10- 0494 -001 MI STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SUBJECT: T -0627 South Center, WA CALCULATION SHEET DATE: Nov -10 JOB NO: 10- 0494 -001 BY: KDW SHEET: Table of Contents Section Analysis of Existing Framing Elements at (N) RTCR Units H:\201 0\ 1004941E ngineering \TOC. xl s Page No. Al -A 14 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy., Suite 100, Long Beach. CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F www.mhpse.com 01/09 0 ) (9)._ Q.2 . .. , --,—g0' •f.1:1:-N ,,..., • ktr.gzi va • AI,. ......rrJ_ nrzwg . - 4--- .. ...... c11: , ,...,1/4., 1 .'-'21.1 -..g-^: ,.... .<11:-., '"'"' I '...,' :1.>" / ....... ,....... u 4 / cf-73:J 0 0 0-; 4t 0 ,, yY -Al , ; r r,t,i, A i• L...-in'., ::. ::,------ '7 Z - ';' 1...;;;., , , \ p,..,... "' • 11 ..,...• I :. II 1.\ \ .:.6._.0. .1 1 ; \ \A..— PtIre.k. 1 N : N '•:, n:•.::.1 7 1 i 11 941/,‘ Ci 7 111 ' __1..,..e.,., ... „ OM 42 hIrla W: V : ® an . 0 ; NW i il 1 ii, . 1 : :iill - Pilbl u lir • 1 . ' ■,,T1 I , , is at-fli, 111,11 1 L „-.‘,; .t:# .5., e : l: 4 1 garet UPatr, f•MqVf...4' 1,%•irr rit-Am I ..> , ...... .,, • 5 if g: : -g ii ih ' . ...i.1 1 IS "TKIS g. - 111C rPAZZ-7 . .. _ • ."S' . itii ■11 , x .x., -4; wi. • z , i,, 1 i ■ 2 ; i ;!'• ''' • Ela:FrA- , !;',;/--*c-L- 1 __. . Pi.% 0^ LA&IrrY 31:11:0 - .• J4ZAT - %.4.1,0' , 1 11..., 1 / 1 4 • 6"; . _ i • I 0 :4ALWAII ______ ....." SOUTHCENTER • 1 • H I '—'4'•••••• . pr1-1'1'.:"'j•"',:: elp• • ' '' ; . . r ,••• '•,••••■• : ..i Oa "...• . ; . L. . I ••••• • ir:17":".E... ROOF FRAMING PLAN ,.. MO' •'-r- — ' ... 1 . . , Fir s u ■ im r 3 II wiz L; . ic.:.— ' illiNIMIIENIIM■11 110 • 1;4 I :''''' ": • , ,.., ... :Th!. ....'•" 1 - - 0 sla==- =3.m., a s ra_ n t i5r rI in ni... n‘...? r . • r ..".. . . ., ., : .U.= . . ......."r.. 'F1 ''.' •15 , .fi 011111■•5 ' ...•:3.: . .. .• - -- .--• 7 41! -5V. 4 .Vi.P . ,- 1' . •nl f e 4 ' 4, ° 1 . ,L. , :,,, - -•, -1-48 [, _ 1 . ' i - —74g1)9;:3, .) _. r.4)• 1 • A itj..:,:v.„\;,1 ....„., ; \=u1 I ''''''' [ ..„..... Anilillainglillin. SkiNEN11111■91 r4Vrrl'it;11%,41.,M.F41.. ' +Warr Wi■ :..." `"°'. rpre=4., liWcr.e.)...... , re...r. ow ..r.‘ .• ma. xt ' ilicr4ZegralettiZ.1.‘ ' ' '''.....*44,' 3'. '"'''''' ''..41"rmr‘ -6....:,.,-1=7......:., nt Uri,. MN% Magni 1 - ,e_k, .., N V) 0 . , AI Aflb L _ . ' - 1.. L.., 0 0 PACK 3 0 re. CO.U,1 CO.UVC,10. 1.(04,0.0.3 ...0 30,1151DIS 41 .1..041,0 WAD MD ...Cu•GES. (--)" ro4P.• me. -4- , .N.3, Z ROOF FRAMING PLAN. 0 s 4C 8 41 1 ..i. - • • — .:1 (111.4 VI 001 /OW NOY Vi WV. u/sat. ME MINK 1141 4/1100 T*4 ANCHOR EOLT SA4rE It • ctla.4 0!f -------0:r=2? • • afte. rar Sto 0141.11 1LL ••• •■ eV, IN aft fvf leo •••O•al r Id NW.. Tft • Nur* r), •ot.l 1p K • . t nt ./.• Ott E. .1 ;of Iry veot. BM, WV P....Tr trr 0! Am E 30 10 '.11f 1 CO1AI(Nt tIK !Z 1 CO1IME.I.J5 • **" 02 0.t• .77 00.33 wur 11, 0.0 Ow. 0 2 1)1. 10iS SO.F.OULE 30 P..I . 5,1! Mit)ENTS KW, .''' 't ".', I.ts&t,g,• It3pl_______. ,.... • • ,.. -:', ....,.;. L.',....•..,.,. _ ..7 [...ZIE-qt.D • um .... ...I • Nof 113E)- .). : .2“ IrliC COOL/COW> .. __ _ -- ----- of : e:i• I "e. • tila• na . E00.151011,. i‘ Vs lap • 1.0.2 . kof U!iD • •Ort err: Sr! (.04.1)1. • f. trttr O. • OF kou L,D • I Slet■I r .00E4 V.••■ilnit.F Y•1 r r. "..7. " h I Vq:%fsT1',171 r,P3rr ;•.'...--N1111-11 tt Pa !Art 17 00/14., tU ■01124 ITt NUL WI • .ttWtIItfrIttt*SP,!T.Itlt. •,) MA fat IT SOS. lfat • at • t . trat. ©DE TA :L. Scom. / 1. 70.,S.0 • drs■ ■••■■■•• e ;04..0.) 6. top Mel 1 ,•• •OuT01:1.1,, • • • • (OIL [PUT tO Fr■11617E151:" (0•111.10.5 &lee OK N.J. MOO WU LIM. Y 0041.$ rte %et •ft. J.7 tA,CIN MO (OS Jrast 0 rtECH, EQUIP SUPPORT FRAMING ....t .•,.. - . •:•• • „..„•• [-- ,•t-tti.:7-,-, - •••:,';,-;:- - 0,:tii„., • ., pt.' 'I A IL ..•••••• nu, ..20a3 DETAIL re star .tit vac a Fotre .• • !...)e".)VIatt''''''' ...6.0110.11/1, ONEP. 'LA IS (ONTROL JUT a.t.“ 4 1 ate tt• DETAIL r LT'S 4.400.0 — • ...••.; • ! ,Ll7 u.a. Araew, Of...rotoa ..04 or :..•7 T., 0000 0,,V.IT:42 711,4 tf, • fooff!0.1. L!LI —:747,°49•=g-' of to. at ttall, • .3 UFER GROUND —4 ci)07%;, • "-.1!nt!: f127,'ZZ ( . SIE ,4a - 9ETA,L. •of t".'4=4*.x:•„. • •• • :.11.41::Ti7 ■ • co A ' STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SUBJECT: T -0627 South Center, WA CALCULATION SHEET DATE Nov -10 JOB NO: 10- 0494 -001 (E) Gravity Loading BY: KDW SHEET: A3 Loading Criteria - Gravity Roof Loading: Dead Load Weight Roofing & Waterproofing (& Re- roofing) 3.0 psf Metal Deck 1.9 Joists 1.7 Girders 0.7 MEP 3.0 Ceiling 1.0 Miscellaneous 0.7 Snow / Live Load Total: 12.0 psf (to girders, say 11 psf to joists) Flat Roof Slope 20.0 psf Total Roof Loading (DL + LL) 1 32.0 psf H:\2010\100494\Engineering\GravityLoading.xls 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy., Suite 100, Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F www.mhpse.com 01/09 NH STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SUBJECT: T -0627 South Center, WA CALCULATION SHEET DATE Nov -10 JOB NO: 10- 0494 -001 RTCR Loading BY: KDW SHEET: Ay RTCR & Condensing Unit Weight Summary RTCR Unit Weight RTCR Short Dim RTCR Long Dim. Live Load RTCR Wt. - Live Load 4800 lbs. 7.33 ft. 14.83 ft. 20 psf 2625 Ibs. 4800 Ibs. 7.33 ft. 14.83 ft. 12 psf 3495 Ibs. 3800 Ibs_ 7.33 ft. 13.50 ft. 20 psf 1821 Ibs. 3800 Ibs. 7.33 ft. 13,50 ft. 12 psf 2613 Ibs. 3000 Ibs. 7.33 ft. 9.00 ft. 20 psf 1681 Ibs. 3000 Ibs. 7.33 ft. 9.00 ft. 12 psf 2208 Ibs. irur l4��1 5 1. o-lok-A- 4- 11-"- ek _ 644%1oa,(�4 1 s 1 21 z .s l 4A( wt.,' ruF)(z1 f e9 ‘tt:- oc, ( KI W RT zrc L t' a c1 a k 2. pp ( 1.10 tc-Cf e" ) /G 1'OS'C� To b ‘te_we -1e-. PANE►. Pa1►4r t19 c 4 Cnt o = m, k- -.4- .1_1 c�) ,•wetGR --S env✓ cik5e6 1`1/ H:\2010\100494\Engineering\RTCRSummary.xls 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy., Suite 100, Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F www.mhpse.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CALCULATION SHEET SUBJECT: T -0627 South Center, WA DATE Nov -10 JOB NO: 10- 0494 -001 BY: KDW SHEET: IN 5 EXISTING FRAMING ANALYSIS PUNIT W W W Y/ W WWDL +WLL T\ (E) Joist NOTE: Per chapter 34 section 3402.3, additions or alterations are permitted to increase the force in an existing structural element by a maximum of 5 %. DESIGN CHECKS GRID REFERENCE All Joists between 8 & F, 7 & 9 EXISTING JOIST CAPACITY Joist Span Tributary Width Original Design wDL Original Design wLL Incidental Point Load? Tributary Area Original Design Moment Original Design Shear* 44.0 4.8 116.0 109.0 212.5 54.5 5.0 (* Includes incidental point load where occurs) NEW LOADING DUE TO CU Dead Load = Live Load = PUNIT Point Load = PUNIT Location, a = LLR Factor = Reduced Live Load = Right Reaction, R2 = Left Reaction, R1 = (N) Location of Max Moment, x = (N) Max Moment = (N) Max Shear 12 20 800 3.3 1.00 20.0 3.46 4.14 21.6 38.7 4.1 (N) Max Moment / Original Max Design Moment = 38.7 k -ft / 54.5 k -ft = 71% (N) Max Shear / Original Max Design Shear = 4.1 kips / 5.0 kips = 83.6% Location of Max Moment Shifted by = 21.6 ft. VS. 22.0 ft. = 0.4 ft. H:\2010\100494\Engineering\RoofJoistCheck.xls 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy.. Suite 100, Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F www.mhpse.com OK OK OK ft. ft. plf plf I bs. sf k -ft. kips psf psf Ibs ft. psf kips kips ft. k -ft. kips For Joist Depths 18" to 22" inclusive AG Joist Designation 18115 18H6 18117 18118 18H9 181110 18H11 20H5 20116 2097 20118 20119 201110 201111 22116 22117 22H8 22119 221110 221111 Nominal *Depth (in.) 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 22 22 22 22 22 22 ' Resist. Moment (in.-lbs.) 325,000 383.000 466.000 540,000 627,000 705,000 814,000 365,000 406.000 499,000 602,000 701,000 789.000 912.000 422.000 526,001 653,000 76,000 873,000 .009.000 Mao. End React. (lbs.) 4500 4800 5200 5400 5900 6600 7600 4880 5100 5400 5600 6400 7000 7900 5400 5600 5800 6700 7200 8100 fApprox. Wt. (Ibs. /f L) 8.0 9.2 10.4 11.6 12.6 14.0 15.8 8.4 9.6 10.7 12.2 13.2 14.6 16.4 9.7 10.7 12.0 13.8 15.2 16.9 Span in Feet w 18 500 533 578 600 19 474 505 547 568 621 20 450 480 520 540 590 480 510 540 560 640 21 429 409 457 495 514 562 629 457 486 514 533 610 22 409 356 436 420 473 491 536 600 436 464 491 509 582 636 491 509 5 609 23 391 312 417 368 452 441 470 513 574 417 380 443 434 470 487 557 609 470 487 5 583 626 24 375 274 400 324 433 388 450 444 492 484 550 546 633 619 400 335 425 382 450 467 533 583 450 446 467 4 558 600 25 347 243 384 286 416 343 432 393 472 428 528 483 608 548 384 296 408 338 432 411 448 512 560 632 432 395 448 4 536 576 648 26 321 216 369 1 255 400 305 415 349 454 380 508 429 585 487 360 263 392 300 415 365 431 492 476 538 608 415 351 431 426 4 515 554 623 27 297 193 350 227 385 272 400 312 437 340 489 383 563 435 334 235 371 268 400 326 415 392 474 425 519 480 585 545 386 313 415 380 4 496 533 600 28 276 173 326 204 371 244 386 280 421 305 471 344 543 390 310 211 345 240 386 292 400 352 457 381 500 431 564 488 359 281 400 341 4 479 468 514 579 29 258 155 304 184 359 220 372 252 407 274 455 309 524 351 289 190 322 216 372 263 386 317 441 343 483 388 545 440 335 253 386 307 4 31R 462 421 497 473 559 539 30 241 140 284 166 345 199 360 227 393 248 440 280 507 317 270 301 195 360 238 373 286 427 310 467 350 527 397 313 228 373 277 3 3i 447 381 480 428 540 487 31 225 127 266 150 323 180 348 206 381 224 426 253 490 287 t�171 1 253 I 155 282 117 346 215 361 259 413 281 452 317 510 360 293 207 361 251 3 3 432 345 465 387 523 441 32 212 116 209 137 303 164 3.38 187 369 204 413 230 475 238 261 141 260 161 325 196 350 236 400 255 438 288 494 327 275 188 342 228 3 210 419 314 450 352 506 401 33 199 106 234 125 285 149 327 171 358 186 400 210 461 238 223 129 249 147 305 178 339 215 388 233 424 263 479 298 258 172 322 208 3 2 406 286 436 321 491 366 34 187 96 221 114 269 136 311 156 347 170 388 192 447 210 218 118 234 134 288 163 329 196 376 213 412 240 f 465 I 273 I 243 157 303 190 3 2 394 261 424 294 476 335 35 177 88 208 104 254 125 294 143 337 156 377 176 434 200 199 108 221 123 272 150 320 180 366 195 400 220 451 250 230 144 286 175 3. 2 383 240 411 269 463 307 36 167 81 197 96 240 115 278 132 323 143 363 162 419 183 188 99 209 113 257 137 310 166 356 179 389 203 439 230 217 132 271 160 372 220 400 247 450 282 37 178 198 243 293 341 378 427 206 256 362 389 438 91 104 127 152 165 187 212 122 148 203 228 260 38 169 181 230 278 324 364 416 195 243 3 353 319 426 84 96 117 141 153 172 195 112 136 1 187 210 240 39 160 178 219 264 307 346 400 185 231 2 ' 340 369 415 78 89 108 130 141 159 181 104 126 1 173 195 222 152 169 208 251 292 329 380 176 219 2 323 360 405 72 82 100 121 131 148 168 96 117 1 ( 161 180 205 41 167 209 308 346 395 89 109 149 167 191 42 159 199 293 330 381 83 10! 139 156 177 43 I T 152 190 , 280 315 364 78 94 129 145 165 44 225 267 301 347 n' 109 121 136 154 'Indicates Nominal Depth of steel joists only. tApproximate Weights per Linear Foot of steel joists only. Acces- sories and nailer strip not included. 'fSee manufacturers catalog for detailed information on specific joist types. "Section 5.9 of the "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists. J- and H- Series" limits the design LIVE load deflection as follows: FLOORS. 1/360 span. ROOFS. 1/360 of span where a plaster ceil- ing is attached or suspended: 1/240 of span for all other cases. feZ. WI til l 13 283 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SUBJECT: T -0627 South Center, WA CALCULATION SHEET DATE Nov -10 JOB No: 10- 0494 -001 RTCR Loading BT: KDW SHEET: A �' RTCR & Condensing Unit Lateral Loading Summary Seismic Loading, Per ASCE 7 -05 Ch. 13 Where: 0.4•a Fp = ° •S °S W ° C1 + 2 Z CRXD ap = SDS Rp = Ip = z= h= 1.00 0.947 2.50 1.00 h Fp = 0.455 Wp at Strength Level Wind Loading, Per ASCE 7 -05 Ch. 6 F =qz -G -Cf •Af -(1.9) Calc for 85 MPH, Exposure C at 30' -0" Where: qz = 16.31 psf G= Cf = h/D < 1.0, Af < 0.1bh 0.85 1.30 F= 34.3 Af at ASD psv- 1c �C,t �a\w .( L4.'631 v../r2ktys Pocov H:\2010\100494\Engineering\RTCRSummary.xls 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy., Suite 100. Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F www.mhpse.com 31211 44' /pos r MHP Structural Engineers P: 562.985.3200 JN: 08- 0038 -001 KDW Steel, Beam Design Title : Dsgnr: Project Desc.: Project Notes : Description : Cx RTCR Base Frame Beam (at roof) Material Properties Analysis Method : Allowable Stress Design Beam Bracing : Completely Unbraced Bending Axis : Minor Axis Bending Load Combination 2006 IBC & ASCE 7 -05 Job # As Printed'. 6 AUG 2010, 9 32AM File H: 2010t100i771Engineering1100177001 .ec6 ENERCALC, INC. 1983 - 2008, Vec & 0.221 License Owner : MYERS, HOUGHTON PARTNERS design for loads resulting from 0.8k W or 1.15k E on posts. Calculations per IBC 2006. CBC 2007, 13th AISC Fy : Steel Yield : 36.0 ksi E: Modulus : 29,000.0 ksi Applied !.Dads Load(s) for Span Numb Moment : W - E = 2.30 k -ft, Location = 0.5850 ft from left end of this span Moment : W = 1.60, E = 2.30 k -ft, Location = 7.915 ft from left end of this span DESIGN SUMMARY Maximum Bending Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Mu : Applied Mn / Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs Maximum Deflection Max Downward L +Lr +S Deflection Max Upward L +Lr +S Deflection Live Load Deflection Ratio Max Downward Total Deflection Max Upward Total Deflection Total Deflection Ratio C6X8.2, Span = 8.50 ft ciok 1'T )> 381 *x'2 Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. 0.987: 1 C6X8.2 1.385k-ft 1.403 k -ft +D+0.70E +H 7.905ft Span # 1 tl;MaximJm Deflections - Unfactored;Loads Load Combination Span Max. ' " Deft Location in Span Load Combination 1.870 E Only 0.000 in 0.000 in 0 <360 0.213 in -0.222 in 460 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Vu : Applied Vn /Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs E Only 1 0.2125 Maxitnitmti Vertical Reactions- Unfactored Support & Load Combinatib Support 1: (E Only) Support 2, (E Only) Steel Section Properties Depth = Web Thick Flange Width Flange Thick Area = Weight Kdesign = C6X8.2 6.000 in 0.200 in 1.920 in 0.343 in 2.390 in ^2 8.200 ptf 0.813 in its = 0.643 in Ycg = 3.000 in Xcg = 0.512 in Xp = 0.199 in Eo = 0.599 in Ixx Sxx R xx Zx Iyy Syy R yy Zy Support Reaction -0.541 k 0.541 k 13.10 in "4 4.35 in "3 2.340 in 5.160 inA3 0.687 in "4 0.488 inA3 0.536 in 0.987 in ^3 Cw Ro H Wno Sw Qf Ow Wn2 Sw2 Sw3 Desl • n OK 0.044: 1 C6X8.2 0.3788 k 8.518 k +D+0.70E +H 0.000 ft Span # 1 Max. " +" Dell Location in Span - 0.2217 6.673 0.074 in ^4 4.70 in"6 2.650 in 0.824 in 3.170 in ^2 0.610 in "4 1.720 in "3 2.620 inA3 1.980 0.370 0.190 MHP Structural Engineers P: 562.985.3200 JN: 08-0038-001 KDW Steel Column, Title : Dsgnr: Project Desc.: Project Notes : Lie. # : KW- 06002754 Description : RTCR Frame Post for MAX 2.5k W or 3.6k E (both unfactored) General Information Steel Section Name Analysis Method : Steel Stress Grade Fy : Steel Yield E : Elastic Bending Modulus Load Combination : Applied Loads Column self weight included : 18.240 Ibs • Dead Load Factor AXIAL LOADS... Axial Load at 2.0 ft, D = 1.20, W = 1.0, E = 1.0 k BENDING LOADS .. . RTCR Lateral Rxn: Lat. Point Load at 2.0 ft creating Mx -x, W DESIGN SUMMARY Bending & Shear Check Results t'ASS Max. Axial +Bending Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are Pu : Axial Pn / Omega : Allowable Mu -x : Applied Mn -x / Omega : Allowable Mu -y : Applied Mn -y / Omega : Allowable Pipe3 -1 /2STD 2006 IBC & ASCE 7 -05 35.0 ksi 29,000.0 ksi Allowable Stress PASS Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are ... Vu : Applied Vn / Omega : Allowable Ictions Unfactored' Job # Primed. 6 AUG 2010, 9 33AM File: H: i201011001771Engineering1100177001 .ec6 ENERCALC, INC. 1983.2008, Ver: 6.0.221 License Owner : MYERS, HOUGHTON PARTNERS Code Ref : 2006 IBC, AISC Manual 13th Edition Overall Column Height 2.0 ft Top & Bottom Fixity Top Free, Bottom Fixed Brace condition for deflection (buckling) along columns : X -X (width) axis : Fully braced against buckling along X -X Axis Y -Y (depth) axis :Fully braced against buckling along Y -Y Axis E =3.60k 0.9706 : 1 +D +0.70E +H 0.0 ft 1.918 k 52.605 k 5.040 k -ft 5.292 k -ft 0.0 k -ft 5.292 k -ft 0.1597 : 1 +D +0.70E +H 0.0 ft 2.520 k 15.781 k Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Maximum SERVICE Load Reactions . . Top along X -X 0.0 k Bottom along X -X 0.0 k Top along Y -Y 0.0 k Bottom along Y -Y 3.60 k Maximum SERVICE Load Deflections ... Along Y -Y - 0.1259 in at for load combination :E Only Along X -X 0.0 in at for load combination : 2.0ft above base 0.Oft above base Note: Only non -zero reactions are listed. Load Combination X -X Axis Reaction @ Base @Top Y -Y Axis Reaction @ Base @ Top D Only W Only -W Only E Only -E Only Max mum Deflections for Load Cornbinatians -- Unfactared:10 Load Combination Max. X -X Deflection Distance D Only 0.0000 in W Only -W Only E Only -E Only 0.0000 in 0.0000 in 0.0000 in 0.0000 in Steel Section Properties : Pipe3 -1 /2STD 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 0.000 ft 2.500 -2.500 3.600 -3.600 Max. Y -Y Deflection Distance 0.000 in 0.000 ft -0.087 in 0.087 in -0.126 in 0.125 in 2.000 ft 2.000 ft 2.000 ft 1.987 ft MHP Structural Engineers P: 562.985.3200 JN: 08 -0038 -001 KDW Steet: Columi lic. # : KW- 06002754 Description : RTCR Frame Post for MAX 2.5k W or 3.6k E (both unfactored) Title : Dsgnr: Project Desc.: Project Notes : Job # e ( 0 Printed: 6 AUG 2010, 9 33AM 1k i: 120101100 1771Engineenngg10017I0ot.ec6_ ENERCALC, INC, 1983,2008, Ver:6.0.221 license Owner : MYERS, HOUGHTON PARTNERS Steel Section Properties ' Pipe3- 112STD Depth = 4.000 in I xx Web Thick = 0.000 in S xx Flange Width = 4.000 in R xx Flange Thick = 0.227 in Area = 2.510 in "2 1 yy = 4.520 inA4 Weight = 9.120 plf S yy = 2.260 in "3 R yy = 1.340 in 4.52 in"4 2.26 in "3 1.340 in Ycg 0.000 in 4.00in M. loads Loads are total entered value. Arrows do not reflect eosolute dnectiort 9.040 in "4 T -0627 TARGET SOUTH CENTER, WA SALES FLOOR AND STOCK ROOM STRUCTURAL FIXTURE CALCULATIONS .. Opy TI-0627:Targe °S ore" :f.gb pM } _ 301 Strande`r Blvd ''' Tukwila, WA 98188 • Project Code No: for TARGET STORES A Division of Target Corporation 50 South 10th Street Suite 400, TP3 -1020 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 2 November 2010 Prepared by: ()TARGET Property Development 50 South 10th Street Suite 400, TP3 -1020 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 FAX (612) 761 -3323 REVI8WED FOR ODE COMPLIANCI 4 A loptRoveD MAY 05 2011 City of Tukwila R 11r1.0iNG DIVISION Siobhan Dvergsten, :Structural Contact TEL. (612) 761 -1646 RECEIVE NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER TARGET. STRUCTURAL FIXTURE AND RACKING CALCULATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS - GROUND LEVEL 0.0 Index Pages 1 to 4 1.0 General Information Pages 5 to 8 1.1 Drawings 1.2 Loadings 1.2.1 Gravity Loadings 1.2.2 Loading Plaque 1.2.3 Lateral Loadings 1.2.4 Dynamic Amplification - Not Used for Slab on Grade 2.0 Light Duty Shelving 2.1 Description 2.2 Loading Criteria and Material 2.3 Shelf Beams Design 2.4 Post Design 2.4.1 Allowable Axial Loading 2.4.2 Allowable Moment 2.5 Transverse Lateral Seismic Design 2.5.1 Base Shear 2.5.2 Design Forces 2.5.3 Combined Stresses at Post 2.5.4 Spreader Connection 2.5.5 Shear Values of SMS 2.6 Longitudinal Lateral Seismic Design 2.6.1 Base Shear 2.6.2 Shear Panel 2.6.3 Back Brace 2.6.4 Biaxial Bending in Post 2.7 Stability 2.7.1 Anchorage to Slab 2.7.2 Back to Back Attachment Pages 9 to 16 Index T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 1 TARGET. 3.0 Sales Floor Gondolas 3.1 Description 3.2 Loading Criteria/Material 3.3 Shelf Design 3.4 Post Design 3.4.1 Loading to Post - Gravity 3.4.2 Fundamental Period of Shelving 3.4.3 Transverse Seismic Loading 3.5 Capacity of Posts 3.6 Combined Stresses at Post 3.7 Base Design 3.7.1 Base Capacity and Buckling Check 3.7.2 Connection to Post 3.8 Transverse Overturning 3.8.1 Base Anchorage 3.9 Alternate Attachment to Wall 3.9.1 Verify Blocking 3.9.1.1 Blocking 3.9.1.2 Fixture to Blocking 3.9.1.3 Blocking to Stud 3.9.2 Stud Design 3.10 Longitudinal Seismic Design 3.11 Longitudinal Seismic Connection to Wall 3.12 Anchorage to Slab 3.13 Stability of Gondolas under 8' -0" tall Pages 17 to 30 4.0 Heavy Duty Pallet Rack Shelving Pages 31 to 56 4.1 Description 4.2 Loading Criteria/Material 4.3 Wire Decking 4.4 Beam Design 4.4.1 4" Deep Beam 4.4.2 6" Deep Beam 4.5 Beam Connections 4.5.1 Pin Capacity 4.5.2 Two Pin Capacity 4.5.3 Four Pin Capacity 4.5.4 Uplift Resistance 4.6 Standard Frame Post Capacity 4.6.1 Allowable Axial Load 4.6.2 Allowable Bending Moment 4.7 Unbraced Frame Post Capacity - Not Used Index T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 2 TARGET 4.8 Over Conveyor Post Capacity 4.8.1 Allowable Axial Load 4.8.2 Allowable Bending Moment 4.8.3 Verify Flare Bevel Weld 4.9 Strut Capacity 4.9.1 Allowable Axial Load 4.9.2 Allowable Bending Moment 4.9.3 Allowable Tension 4.10 Double Strut Capacity 4.10.1 Allowable Axial Load 4.10.2 Allowable Bending Moment 4.11 Unbraced Frame (Reinforced) Post Capacity - Not Used 4.12 Over Conveyor Beam /Strut Capacity 4.12.1 Allowable Axial Capacity 4.12.1 Allowable Bending Capacity 4.12.2 Allowable Tension Capacity 4.13 Standard Frame Transverse Seismic Design 4.13.1 Base Shear 4.13.2 Design Forces 4.13.3 Verify Post Capacity 4.13.4 Verify Brace Capacity 4.13.5 Frame Loading at Top Tier only 4.13.5.1 Verify Post Capacity 4.13.5.2 Verify Brace Capacity 4.13.6 Verify Frame Analysis for 12' -0" Span 4.14 Standard Frame Longitudinal Seismic Design 4.14.1 Base Shear and Fundamental Period 4.14.2 Design Forces 4.14.3 Base Shear Distribution 4.14.4 Verify Post Capacity 4.14.5 Verify Beam Connection 4.15 Unbraced Frame Transverse Seismic Design - Not Used 4.16 Unbraced Frame Longitudinal Seismic Design - Not Used 4.17 Over Conveyor Transverse Seismic Design 4.17.1 Base Shear and Distribution 4.17.2 Verify Post Capacity 4.17.3 Verify Brace Capacity 4.17.4 Verify Bottom Tube Tension 4.17.5 Verify Frame Spacer 4.17.7 Overturning 4.18 Over Conveyor Longitudinal Seismic Design 4.18.1 Base Shear and Fundamental Period 4.18.2 Design Forces 4.18.3 Verify Post Capacity 4.19 Weld Capacity Calculations 4.20 Base Plate Analysis Index T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 3 TARGET Page Not Used Index T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 4 TARGET. General Information 1. General Information The enclosed calculations correspond to Target Corporation's Store and Stockroom Fixtures. These calculations are provided for Building Official Plan Review. All components are shop fabricated. All welding is performed in a certified fabrication shop with no field welding. Design Code = 2009 IBC Additional reference to the 2008 RMI 1.1 Drawings SRI 1 Fixture Anchorage Plan SR51 Heavy Duty Stockroom Racking SR52 Light Duty Stockroom Shelving SR53 Gondola Sales Floor Shelving 1.2 Loading 1.2.1 Gravity (Vertical) All permissible loading is governed by Target Store Operations and verified through these calculations. design loading used in these calculations are a conservative when compared to the actual static loading typically experienced in normal Store operations. Pallet Rack Loading: Pallet design load = # of Loaded Tiers = 2 Light Duty Shelving: Shelf storage volume = Storage unit volume = Gondola Loading: Shelf storage volume = Single sided storage = The 2050 lbs (4' wide x 4' high x 4' deep) - Includes 50# additional pallet DL 2' deep * 4' wide * 30" tall * 5 pcf = 100 lbs. Say 2' deep * (12' tall) * 4' wide x 5 pcf = 480 lbs. Say 2' deep * 4' wide * 30" tall *7. 5 pcf = 150 lbs. Say 2' deep * 94" tall * 4' wide x 7.5 pcf = 470 lbs. Say 120 lbs 560 lbs 150 lbs 900 lbs 1.2.2 Loading Plaque A plaque denoting the following design capacities will be posted in the Target Store. See sheet SRI 1 for exacting wording, size and placement location. Tier Tie! v. 1 VID < -- Bay - -> Pallet Rack Longitudinal elevation L - - - - - - - - -- Pallet Rack and Gondola Transverse elevations T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls H Page 5 Maximum Load (lbs) Type of Unit Per Tier Per Bay Heavy Duty Pallet Rack, Two Tier (8' -0) 4100 8200 Heavy Duty Pallet Rack, Two Tier (12' -0) 6200 8200 Heavy Duty Pallet Rack, Over Conveyor 4100 8200 Light Duty Shelving 120 560 Sales Floor Gondolas 150 900 v. 1 VID < -- Bay - -> Pallet Rack Longitudinal elevation L - - - - - - - - -- Pallet Rack and Gondola Transverse elevations T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls H Page 5 TARGET. 1.2.3 Lateral (Seismic) Designed for 2009 IBC Seismic Category D* Where: R = 4.0 Rack with Diagonal Bracing 4.0 Rack with Moment Frame Action 2.9 Gondola W = 0.67 *PLrf*PL +DL +0.25 *LL *Downward Case* DL = (1.0 + 0.14SDS) *Uplift Case* DL = (0.6 - 0.14SDS) Elevated Store (Y or N) = N Importance Factor I = 1.0 IBC Seismic Use Group = 1 Site Class = D Short Period Ss = 1.421 g One Second Period S1 = 0.486 g Site Coefficient Fa = 1.000 Sms= Fa"Ss= 1.421 Site Coefficient Fv = 1.514 Sm1 = Fv" S1 = 0.736 General Information Sds= 0.67 *Sms= 0.952 Sd1= 0.67 *Sm1 = 0.493 Site Coefficient Fa (2009 IBC) Site Class Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods A 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 B 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 C 1.20 1.20 1.10 1.00 1.00 D 1.60 1.40 1.20 1.10 1.00 E 2.50 1.70 1.20 0.90 0.90 F Site Coefficient Fv (2009 IBC) Site Class Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at 1 Second Period A 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 B 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 C 1.70 1.60 1.50 1.40 1.30 D 2.40 2.00 1.80 1.60 1.50 E, 3.50 3.20 2.80 2.40 2.40 F Short Period Seismic Design Category (2009 IBC) Value of Sds Seismic Use Group Sds <0.167g 0.167g<Sds<0.33g 0.33g <Sds <0.50g 0.50g <Sds A B C D* A B C D* A C D D* 1 Second Period Seismic Design Category (2009 IBC) Value of Shc Seismic Use Group Shc <0.067g 0.067g<Shc<0.133g 0.133g<Sdl<0.20g 0.20g <Shc A B C D* A B C D* A C D D* T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 6 1 TARGET Minimum Lateral Loading = 1.5 %W per RMI Section 2.7 Seismic Loadings governing design by inspection General Information RMI Section Seismic Response Coefficient Cs= (1.2 *Sd1) /(R *T ^0.67) 2.7.3 Max. Seismic Response Coefficient Csmax= (2.5 *Sds) /(2.5 *R) 2.7.3 Min. Seismic Response Coefficient Csmin= 0.14 *Sds 2.7.3 Base Shear Equation V = Cs *Ip *Ws V design braced action Vmax braced Vmin braced V moment action direction Vmax moment Vmin momen Pallet Rack and Light Duty Shelving Cs *Ip *Ws = Csmax *Ip *Ws = Csmin *Ip *Ws = 0.148 *W/T ^0.67 0.238 *W 0.133 *W Cs *Ip *ws = 0.148 *W /T ^0.67 Csmax *Ip *Ws = 0.238 *W Csmin *Ip *Ws = 0.133 *W Design Seismic Base Shear Forces (Pallet Rack and Light Duty) V Braced action *0.7* = 0.104 *W/T ^0.67 V Moment action *0.7 * = 0.104 *W/T "0.67 * Design Forces can be multiplied by 0.7 per ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3. Not reduced if using the Minimum Lateral Loading of 1.5 %W T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 7 TARGET. Gondola Vdesign Vmax Vmm Design Seismic Base Shear Forces (Gondola) Cs *Ip *Ws = Csmax *Ip *Ws = Csmin *Ip *Ws = V *0.7 *= 0.143 *W /T ^0.67 General Information 0.204 *WIT ^0.67 0.328 *W 0.133 *W * Design Forces can be multiplied by 0.7 per ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3. Not reduced if using the Minimum Lateral Loading of 1.5%W 1.2.4 Lateral (Dynamic Amplification) - Not Used Rack/Shelving Type on T .5 E ail a, Fixture Period Q w ' 0. ` 2 x a P 0 / x o Std. Pallet Rack Transerve 0.00 0.41 1.00 111144440t #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Longitudinal ♦ #4#114# #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Over Conveyor Pallet Rack Transerve 0.75 11#114t# #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Longitudinal 1.00 141111414 #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Light Duty Transerve 0.45 1111### #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Longitudinal 0.23 1111#4;14 #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Gondolas Transerve • 0.18 11#1141:# #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! Longitudinal 0.00 0.11 11##11# #DIV /0! #DIV /0! #DIV /0! x ap = X 1 2 ::2F + 2,Q S2 co T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 8 TARGET. 2.0 Light Duty Shelving 2.1 Description Light Duty Shelving Light duty shelving consists of 5/8" wood shelves supported on metal beams that span between two sets of uprights. Beam span is always 4' -0 ". An upright is comprised of two vertical posts with metal spreaders between them yielding a depth of 2' -0 ". These uprights form a moment frame that is simply anchored to the floor at the base — no moment transfer. A design load of 5 pcf is utilized for the entire structure. Each shelf is checked to a slightly higher load to account for variable loading patterns. In Target Stores, these units are typically stocked sporadically with relatively light loads that seldom approach 5 pcf. 2.2 Loading criteria and material Shelf storage volume = 2' deep * 4' wide * 30" tall * 5 pcf = 100 lbs. Say Storage unit volume = 2' deep * (12' tall) * 4' wide x 5 pcf = 480 lbs. Say Material: A653 ASLAII Grade 50. Fy = 50 ksi. Fu = 60 ksi. % elongation: 22% in 2" 2.3 Shelf beam design - Detail 7/SR52 5/8" particleboard simply supported by two steel beams. Strength O.K. by inspection. Section properties: 120 Ibs 560 Ibs A = 0.1339 in rxx = 0.3055 in S2 = 1.67 fs t = 0.0625 in` ryy = 0.2498 in w = W/(4' *2) 15 plf Ixx = 0.012 in4 Sx = 0.0333 in3 1= 4 ft lyy = 0.008 in4 fy = 50 ksi AISI C3.1.1 a M„ = Se•fy Mail = 1.00 k * in — w12 Mact — 8 0.36 k * in Verify deflection: 11�n Se * fy M all = SZ SZ 30Ib *ft = 0.36 k *in 1.00 k *in Mact < Mall - Design O.K. Amax= I/180 = 0.27 in Aact = 0.25 in Iprov > Iregd Beam O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 9 TARGET. 2.4 Determine post capacity - Detail 3/SR52 Gross section properties t= 0.0625 in As = 0.2287 in` Sxx = 0.0599 in.' Syy = 0.0637 in' rxx = 0.4786 in ryy = 0.3244 in = 0.052 in4 Iyy = 0.024 in4 2.4.1 Determine P allowable Ix = ly = Kx = Ky = AIS/ C4 Find F„ Net section properties t= 0.0625 in An= 0.1579 in` S. = 0.0469 in' Syy = 0.0411 in' rxx= 0.5375 in ryy = 0.3138 in lx„ = 0.046 in4 lyy = 0.016 in C2= 1.8 fs Verify K value used 24 in klx /rx = 76 24 in kly/ry = 130 1.7 1.7 Pa = 8.84 `Aa 4P F _ Pa = 0.0877 Fn= Fa = Fa = 1.40 K 1.01 Fn= .658 ^(Ic ^2)*Fy Fn= 32.76 ksi Where: p = o- o- �P° P U, + t2T Given: and: or C 2 kr1 \2 1 .2 *E *C,v 0- = [G*J� 2 2 Aro VCat 6 P y 7I 2 * E kXIX G = 11300 ksi kt = 1 J = 0.0028 in4 It = 20 in ro = J/A '" ( ) 0.1106 in CW = 0.005 E = 29000 ksi at = 12577.76 aey = 49.67451 Fe = 49.479101 Fe = 49.674513 Use Fe = 49.48 24.35 ksi 8.84 ksi Light Duty Shelving T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 10 TARGET. Pa = 0.0877 Fn = 2.87 K Use Pa = 1.40 K 2.4.2 Determine M allowable AISI C3.1.1a Nominal Strength Mallxx = Mallyy = AISI C3.1.2 Lateral Buckling x -axis 1.40 k*in 1.23 k * in Mn = Sefy My = Fy * Sfxx = 3.00 K Sf = Sfxx = 0.0599 in' Sc = Sc. = 0.0469 in° Mallxx = Mallyy = Me = Cb ro *A *(Qey 6et)2 Mc = My 1.40 k *in 1.16 k*in 70 M all n/1 Mn S, * ✓Y SZ S2 S M * ScJ M„ r f ]C full cross section reduced cross section = 20.00 k in Mc = 2.995 k in Lateral Buckling does not control Lateral Buckling controls Mallxx = Mallyy = 1.40 k * in 1.16 k* in 2.5 Transverse seismic design 2.5.1 Base shear From Section 1.2.3 V post = V= P= W= 0.12 W 280 lbs/post 194.60 lbs/post Light Duty Shelving 24.32 Ibs Include Dynamic Multiplier when applicable T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xIs Page 11 TARGET. 2.5.2 Design forces Distribute lateral forces in proportion to distribution of mass V2 --► v� 2.5.3 Combined stresses at post AISI C5.2.1 -1 P= H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 280 Ibs Mmax = 0.24 K in reduces to: �c + nb * Cms * MA P„ M„ * aA. Light Duty Shelving Height Weight wxhx Fi Vi 144 82.8 11923.2 0.301 7.31 109 122.8 13385.2 0.337 8.20 74 122.8 9087.2 0.229 5.57 39 122.8 4789.2 0.121 2.94 4 122.8 491.2 0.012 0.30 574 39676 1.000 24.32 Vmax = Pmax = 24.32 Ibs /post 360 lbs for: OPc 0.15 Pn P M — 0.47 < =1.0 Say O.K. P� M „ 2.5.4 Spreader connection - Detail 6 /SR52 Mreqd 0.652 k in fsspreader= 1.506818 O.K. e.\ Mcap = (1"-- 5231b +I3 " -- e� 523zbs= 2.03 k in 2, 2) where e--2t= 0.125 in SxspreadeF 0.4327 In alt Mcap = 3" *523 Ibs *1.33 = 2.09 kin Use Mcap = 2.03 k in <= Mreqd O.K. See 6/SR52 for Spreader Configuration T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 12 TARGET 2.5.5 Shear value of sheet metal screws #8 sheet metal screws d= 0.164 in Fu = 65 ksi per AISI E4.3 Spreader t� = t2 = Brace 0.0625 in 0.0625 in Since t2 /t, = 1.0 Pns = 4.2 *(t23 *(1) 5Fu2 = Pns = 2.7 *t1 *d *Fu1 = Pns = 2.7 12 *d *Fu2 = t� = t2 = Pns = Pa = 0.0673 in 0.0625 in Since t2 /t1 < 1.0 Pns = 4.2 *(t23*d) 5Fu2 = Pns = 2.7 *tt *d *Fut = Pns = 2.7 12 *d *Fu2 = Back panel ti = t2 = Pns = 16 ga post 16 ga spreader 1.73 K 1.80 K 1.80 K 1.73K 52 =3 0.58 K 15 ga brace 16 ga post 1.73 K 1.94 K 1.80 K 1.73 K S2 = 3 Pa = 0.58 K 0.0239 in 0.0625 in 24 ga panel 16 ga post Since t2 /t> > 2.5 Pns = 2.7 *ti *d *Fui = 0.69 K Pns = 0.69 K Q = 3 0.23 K Pa = Light Duty Shelving T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 13 TARGET. 2.6 Longitudinal seismic design 2.6.1 Base shear From Section 1.2.5 V unit = V= P= W= 0.125 W 560 Ibs /unit 389.2 Ibs /unit Light Duty Shelving 48.63 Ibs Includes Dynamic Multiplier when applicable 2.6.2 Shear panel scenario - Detail 2B /SR52 See Detail 2B /SR52 for details 24 ga panel w /#8 sms @ 24" o.c. t = SZ = AISI C3.2 length a = 148 in h/t = 2008.3682 depth h = 48 in E* k, F = 57.80339 y where: k„ = 5.76 Since h/t = 2008.37 > 81.7918 Va= V,/S2= 0.905 *E *ky *13 h *S2 Screw shear governs @ 114.65 lb/ft Vfeqd = 12.15853 plf / unit Vreqd < Vail O.K. 2.6.3 Back brace - Detail 2A/SR52 See Detail 2A/SR52 P= 2 units * 48.63412 Ibs = Tbrace 96 Ibs Tan = A"Fv = S2 1007 Ibs > 0.0239 in 1.67 fs 308.99 lb/ft 97.27 lbs per brace 15ga x 3/4" strap bracing Ag = 0.0505 in2 An = 0.03365 in2 1.01 K 96 lbs Tbrace < Tall O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 14 TARGET. verify #8 screw at brace Vregd= Vag = 96.29 Ibs 575.82 Ibs 2.6.4 Verify post bending in leg at brace Screw O.K. Paxiai = 280 Ibs Mbending = ( 97.27 * 3.5" arm)/ 4 posts = Combined interaction P„,, + '"- ac,l Pan Mall 0.27 <= 1.0 O.K. 0.09 K in 2.7 Overturning stability ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per "Eq. 5" (Gravity) "Eq. 8" (Uplift) h =144" VeQ h' h =144" Peq Peq Peq Peq h'= 1.15 *h /2= 82.8 in 0.7 *V q *h' Peg = i = 58.73 Ibs 48 Peq PA.a; y ± P y = 71.95 Ib downward 376.05 Ib downward h' = 144- (20 "/2) = 134 in Weq = 120 Ibs 0.7 * VeQ * h' 24" = 58.61 Ibs P grimly ± Peg = -1.30 Ib uplift 97.30 Ib downward Governs Light Duty Shelving T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 15 TARGET. Use 3/8" diameter x 3" anchor. Simpson Titen HD Screw Anchor ICC ESR- 2713 /LARR 25741. Allowable value in fc'= 2500psi in accordance with ACI D.3.3.3: Tall = 602 Ibs 2.7.1 Anchoring pattern T= Light Duty Shelving -1.30 Ibs Tali > T - -> O.K. Anchor all perimeter legs of shelving to floor. At back -to -back units, screw adjacent uprights together at 24" o.c. with #8 sms. Moment o.k. by inspection and overturning tension = 0 (4' base for double units). Shear is resisted by 2 anchors: V * w * 2 units V = = 48.61bs 2 anchors Vall = 1284 Ibs Vall > V - -> O.K. 2.7.2 Back -to -back attachments In back -to -back configurations, the posts are screwed together with a #8 sms at 24" o.c. for the full height of the upright. ShearFlow = Q 1 ShearFlow = V = 139.9543 Ibs Q= A'Ybar 7.5792 in' A'= 0.3158 in` I = LI,, + Ad,') + (I,, + Ad,' )]*2 I = 728.93 in4 1.46 Ibs /in 34.92 Ibs /2 ft =(2 *Anet) < 5231bs O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA- ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 16 TARGET. 3.0 Sales Floor Gondolas 3.1 Description Gondolas Sales floor gondolas are floor mounted display shelving for general merchandise. The gondolas analyzed here are only units 96" in height or greater On drawing sheet SR11, all gondolas 96" and higher are identified. 3.2 Material Properties and Load Factors Material: Misc. Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 50 ksi Material: Shelf Fy = Fu = 90 ksi 100 ksi Material: Post Fy = Fu = 65 ksi 75 ksi Material: Base Shoe Fy = Fu = 45 ksi 50 ksi Material: Base Shoe Hook Fy = Fu = 80 ksi 107 ksi S2 to be used for beam tension design > S2 to be used for beam flexure design > f2 to be used for column design > 4-beam = 4-beam = column = 1.67 fs 1.67 fs 1.80 fs T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 17 TARGET. 3.3 Check shelf beam - Detail 7 /SR53 htab Iin P150lbs 1 d Fi 12 014 See Detail 7/SR53 for shelf detail. Section properties: Net section Gauge htab d 18.4 = d3= bmin = 12 ga t= 0.75 in2 An = 3.41 in S18,4 = 4.92 in S3 = 0.1046 in 0.07845 in` 0.203 in (two per shelf) 0.422 in (two per shelf) 0.188 in (Minimum thickness of tab hook to support shelf) Fb = 0.6 *Fy = 54 ksi Mact =P *a = 1.8 k in Sxreqd = 0.033 in (per shelf) Sxreqd < Sxprov Shelf design O.K. 3.3.1 Determine allowable tension Toad T Q = A n F V = 4.23 kip Q Mnci _ d —h /2 0.59 kip Tact < Tallow Shelf design O.K. 3.3.2 Determine allowable shear capacity Fv = 0.4 *Fy = 36.0 ksi Gondolas Va = Fv *A = 2.82 kip (based on full tab - Vertical Shear) 0.71 kip (based on min tab hook burin - Tab shear induced by Momen Vact < Vallow Shelf design O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 18 TARGET 3.3.3 Determine allowable shelf capacity Tab hook shear governs, Thus: 2.14 k in 179 Ibs (Per beam capacity) Moap= P„ *(d -h /2) = Pcap = Map /a = Pmax = 357 Ibs 3.4 Determine loading to post < - - -- max shelf capacity, governed by bmin Pact < Pcap Shelf design O.K. 3.4.1 Loading to post - Gravity D= 18 in or 22 in Hmax 94 in* W= 48 in w= 10 pcf L D H Elevation of gondola One sided post P,,,, = w *D *H *W one 0.92 K D 2.5" Mone P(2 + 2 ) Mone= 11.30 Kin Single Side Governs Design Two sided post P 2 P one Ptwo= M nvo = 2 M one Gondolas 1.85 K Mto= 0 Kin (balances) T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 19 TAROT. 3.4.2 Determine period of shelving T =27t Using Method B (Rayleigh Method) Iwi * (5i 2 g *I ✓. *Ui where: Si = elastic deflection w; = weight at level i f; = force at level i g = 386 in /sect E = 29000 ksi = 0.87 in2 4 3 EI Level w; (Ibs) haul f; (Ibs) earl' w.A.2 f;0; 5 54.5 84 28.17 0.221 2.6515 6.21286 4 89.5 60 33.04 0.094 0.7957 3.11533 3 179.5 42 46.39 0.045 0.3700 2.10609 2 264.5 24 39.06 0.007 0.0135 0.27862 1 334.5 6 12.35 0.000 0.0000 0.00044 922.5 159.00 0.37 3.8307 11.7133 T =27-c\ 2 1wi *8i 0.183 sec Gondolas T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 20 TARGET 3.4.3 Determine seismic loadings to Post - transverse From Section 1.2.5 Typical Loading Criteria 1/3 Load 1/2 Hei ht '- - -__ -_ 2/3 Load V= 0.17W For shelving spaced at D = 18 in Level Weight Height wxhx Fi M 5 54.5 84 4578 0.177 2.366 4 89.5 60 5370 0.208 1.982 3 179.5 42 7539 0.292 1.948 2 264.5 24 6348 0.246 0.937 1 334.5 6 2007 0.078 0.074 Sum: 922.5 25842 1.00 7.31 Where: Mdouble Mgravity 2 P M eq = H Fi *V 900 Ibs V =1 F, = 159.O Ibs 22.5 Ibs 922.5 Ibs 8.30 k in * (1 +0.14Sds) per ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 = 9.41 k in 7.31 k in * 0.7 per ASCE 7 -05 1.2.4.2.3 = 5.12 k in PL = DL= Pgravity = Mgravity = Meq = Gondolas M sin gle = M gravity + M eq = = M gravity — M gravity + 2 M eq 14.52 K in 10.23 K in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 21 TARGET 3.5 Determine capacity of post - Detail 6SR53 1" J 2.875" rf- AS = Sx = Sy = 3.5.1 Determine allowable axial load Effective length analysis not ideal for this analysis: 0.7402 in` 0.6206 in' 0.2226 in /// K =1.0 4. 1 4. l l / // K= ? Gondolas rxx = 1.0842 in ryy = 0.3992 in Ixx = 0.87 in4 lyy= 0.118in4 Use AISI C4 - very conservative lumped mass assumption derivation of column capacity Find F, F 2 = Al F K = 2.1 L= 84 inches Location of last shelf z* E 2.45 F =� = 10.81 ksi e (kl/r)2 Since lc > 1.5 : Fn= .658 "(IO2)*Fy Fn= 9.48 ksi AISI C4 P a = A F Pa= 3.9 K 3.5.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a Mn = Se Fy M all = Se * Fy Mxall = 24.16 K in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 22 TARGET. 3.6 Combined stresses at post One sided - Static P= M= 0.92 K 9.41 K in P /Pa + M /Ma = 0.84 <= 1.0 O.K. Two sided - Static P= M= 1.85 K 0 K in P /Pa + M /Ma = 0.90 <= 1.0 O.K. 3.7 Base shoe analysis - 8 /SR53 r t= 14 ga d Gauge 14 ga t = 0.0747 in As = 0.702 in` d = 5.875 in w= 1.25 in J = 0.00017 in4 CW - 0.211 inb Seismic P= Ms = Seismic P= Ms = Gondolas OK 5.12 Kin OK 10.23 K in Ixx = 3.44 1n4 yy = 0.035 in° Sx = 1.171 in' Sy = 0.0532 in' rxx = 2.2131 in ryy = 0.2247 in r, = 0.272 in w Mbase = 14.52 k in (one base take all load - no tensior fb= Fy /52b= 26.9 ksi Ma = 31.6 kin M /M, = 0.46 <= 1.0 O.K. single or double sided AISI C3.1.1 strength analysis of base Procedure 1 Mn = Se *Fy Ma = MKS b Se = Sx T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 23 TARGET. Procedure 2 - Lateral buckling strength Mn = (Sc *Mc) /Sf Me = Cb ro A bey 6e bey = 71" 2 * E 2 rkyly \ G = 14457 ksi Gondolas Ma = (Sc *Mc) /(Sf n) Sc = Sr Ma = Mc /f 78.94 si 29.86 ksi Ky = ly = 1 22 in ry kf = 0.65 11= 22 in rc = 2.22 in 6 = 1 G *J+ E C" _ Ai; Fe = Fy = 67.4 ksi 45.0 ksi Me = 85.53 ksi Me = Sf *Fe = 78.9 K in My = Sf *Fy = 52.695 K in 1.50 My 2.78My > Me > 0.56 My When Me < 0.56My - -> Mc = Me When 2.78My > Me > 0.56My - - -> M . = 10 M 9 y When Me > 2.78My - -> Mc = My 10 *My" 36M, Mc = 47.69 K in - - - -> Ma = 28.56 K in Section limited by buckling 3.7.1 Verify local buckling of web (flange not limited by inspection) h/t = 76.65 compact criteria = (640/(Fy) ^.5) = 95.4 Compact O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 24 TARGET. 3.7.2 Base shoe connection to upright I • I C 1 -4 1.12" T Locking device 5.875" tbot plate = Min hbot plate = C = bearing of flange = T = tension in tab = Gondolas Ma= Cd =Td= 26.97 K in M reed = 14.52 Kin Top resistance = Bearing on flange Bottom resistance = 11 ga steel strap w/ 5 spot welds 0.1196 in 0.995 in verify spot welds per AISI E2.2.1 da /t = 0.9 *Fy *Aflange = An *Fy/S2 = d weld = 0.375 in 7ICll e 2 .7 5 r' 70 = Pn = 4 5.02 < 0.815 *(E /Fu) ^.5 = 16.6 Pn = 2.2 *t *d *F„ _ Pa /weld = Pn /S2 = 3.00 K 2.27 K Pa assembly = Mall > Mreqd O.K. h1 = d�= 5.67 K 5.70 K 2.27 K 1.12 in 4.755 in 5.70 K Tab tension controls T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 25 TARGET. 3.8 Overturning - transverse direction Moo = 0.7 *(h /2) *V = 5.23 K in V= 159.O Ibs 159.00 Ibs Mres = (0.6- 0.14Sds)Pgravity *D /2 = 4.74 K in Net overturning = 0.50 K in 3.8.1 Base anchorage See Detail 9/S53 d = 12 in (very conservative d value) Manchors = Tanchor *d Tanchor reqd = Mnet ovt / d = Use 3/8" x 3" Simpson Titen HD Screw Anchor capacities for fc' = 2500 psi concrete Certifications: ICC ESR- 2713 /LARR 25741 Tall = Vail = 602 Ibs 1284 Ibs 5 5 /T 13 /V I T'J + J a v� Gondolas (includes dynamic amplification) 41.26 Ibs 0.13 < 1.0 Anchor O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA- ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 26 TARGET 3.9 Attachment to wall in lieu of self resisting overturning - Detail 13 and 14/SR53 AF Gondolas Target Corporation anchors the single sided units along perimeter walls to blocking with in the wall framing. That design is analyzed here: • 1 4 h= Vblocking = 58.12 Ibs 7.5 ft V= M =Vh'= Vblocking = Mnet /h = Vanchor = V- Vblock= Vanchor = 100.88 Ibs 3.9.1 Verify blocking connection 1 x 6 blocking 6" 20 ga sheathed steel studs full height to structure 3.9.1.1 Fixture connection to blocking Treqd = 58.12 Ibs 2 -1/4" lag screw provided 159.00 Ibs 5.23 K in 58.12 Ibs 100.88 Ibs Gdg fir = 0.42 Tan' 173 Ibs (per NDS Table 9.2A) = 346 Ibs Treqd < Tall Connection O.K. 3.9.1.2 Blocking connection to studs Treqd = 58.12 Ibs 1 -1/4" lag screw O.K. by inspection T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 27 TARGET. 3.9.2 Verify stud design Gondolas 20 ga stud = 1.29 pif aP= 2.5 spacing = 16 in oc Sds= 0.952 gyp bd = 3.33 pif Ip= 1 Rp= 3 hx= 7.5 ft hr 16 ft [ 0. 4ap*Sds *Wp /(Rp /Ip)]*(1 +2(z/h))= 2.84 pif Wp= 4.62 pif M1 = 5 psf partition load span = 16.8 ft wpart = 6.7 pif M1 = 233.80 lb ft M2 = seismic dead load + 2/3 seismic fixture load M2 = 260.12 lb ft weq = 2.8 plf M2 governs Ma stud = 1016 lb ft Mall > Mact Stud design O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 28 TARGET 3.10 Longitudinal Seismic From Section 1.2.3 V= 0.17 W One shear panel on one sided gondolas and two panels on two sided '"max = Pmax = Vmax = v= Gondolas 0.92 K pnl width= 48 in 0.159 K 39.75 plf Use analogies from posted calculations for hardboard shear wall elements minimum particle board capacity = 120 plf (t =3/8 ") Per 25 -1 minimum drywall capacity = 100 plf (t =1/2 ") By analogy, hardboard siding values @ 7/32 ": particle board: 70 plf drywall: 43.75 plf avg = 56.875 plf Shear panel analysis O.K 3.11 Longitudinal Seismic to wall 4/3 avg = 75.83 per connection in section 3.9, Vmax to wall = 58.12 Ibs Vbase = 100.88 Ibs 1/4" lag screw in shear = 210 Ibs NDS Table 9.3B 1 -1/4 Iaq screw O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 29 TARGET. 3.12 Anchorage to slab - Detail 9, 10 and 11/SR53 V max = Tmax = 116.25 Ibs 41.26 Ibs Number of unit trib to bolts = 2 Number of bolts = 1 Use 3/8" x 3" Simpson Titen HD Screw Anchor capacities for fc' = 2500 psi concrete Certifications: ICC ESR- 2713 /LARR 25741 Van = 602 Ibs 1284 Ibs 5 5 "T �3 V. �s s + , Tai V ) 0.16 < 1.0 Anchor O.K. 3.13 Stability of Gondolas under 8' -0" tall; ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 Eq. 8 (Uplift) P = 0.9225 K 0.9225 K 14.95 K in d d1 } 22.5 in 25.0 in Movt = 0.7 *V * h/2 (Seismic) Movt = 10.46 Kin Mresist = (P *d + P *d1) *(0.6- 0.14Sds) Mresist = 20.45 K in FS = Mresist/Movt FS = 1.95 > 1.O OK Gondolas T0627_South_Center, WA- ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 30 TARGET. 4.0 Heavy Duty Pallet Rack Shelving 4.1 Description Pallet Rack Heavy duty shelving consists of wire shelving supported on rolled metal beams that span between two sets of uprights. Beam spans vary from 8' -0" to 12' -0 ". An upright is comprised of two vertical posts with welded struts spanning between the posts to create a braced frame in the transverse direction. The beam to post connection in the longitudinal direction creates a moment frame. A design pallet load of 2050 Ibs and 50 Ibs dead load is utilized for our design criteria. This equates to roughly 33 pcf storage density. In actuality, Target typical pallet load is approximately 850 Ibs or 41% utilization. Target has multiple profiles, as shown on Sheet SR51. The governing case is analyzed in these calculations. This governing case is the two tier profile (largest loading sceranio combined with longest unbraced column length). The three to five tier loadings will have shorter unbraced column lengths and less loadings, at approximately 10 pcf storage density. 4.2 Material Properties and Load Factors Material: Beams A1011 HSLA Grade 55 Class II Fy = 55 ksi Fu = 65 ksi Material: Columns A1011 HSLA Grade 55 Class II Fy = Fu = 55 ksi 65 ksi Material: Beam Pins Grade 50 Fy = Fu = 50 ksi 70 ksi Material: Weld E70XX electrodes Fxx = 70 ksi S2 to be used for beam design > 1-2 to be used for column design > QRMI to be used for column design - - - -> kX to be used for column design (Down Aisle) - - - -> ky to be used for column design (Cross Aisle) - - - -> Column plate buckling coefficient - - - -> Pallet load reduction factor (Cross Aisle) - - - -> Pallet load reduction factor (Down Aisle) - - - -> Obeam = °column = QRMI = kx = ky = k= PLrf = PLrf = 1.67 fs 1.80 fs 1 1.7 Per RMI 6.3.1.1 1 Per RMI 6.3.1.2 4 Per AISI B2.1 1.0 Per RMI 2.7.2 0.41 Per RMI 2.7.2 T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 31 TARGET. 4.3 Wire decking beams - Detail 3A/SR51 4 - 1" wide x 1 1/2" tall x 14 ga channels per 42" width Wire decking beams span 4' -0" typically between primary beams See Detail 3A/SR51 for beam detail. Section properties: Sx = 0.1231 in' Impact loading = 25% * one pallet = Ppallet = M act wl 2 8 Ptotal = Pchannel = wchannel = wchannel = 512.5 lbs 2050 Ibs 2562.5 Ibs 640.625 lbs 160 plf 13.35 pli 3.38 K in L = 4 ft Sprov > Sreqd Channel O.K. Pallet Rack 'S _M act = 0.103 Ina regd ✓a T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 32 TARGET. Pallet Rack 4.4 Beam Loading 4.4.1 4" deep beam - Detail 5A/SR51 4" Beams span 8' -0" Typical 1= 8 ft See Detail 9/SR51 for beam detail. Section properties: t= 0.0598 in As = 0.7774 in` Sxx = 0.8451 Syy = 0.5196 in' Impact loading = 25% * one pallet = Ptier = 2 pallets = w12 M act = 8 Ptotal = Wbeam Wbeam = 27.00 K in 500 lbs 4000 I bs 4500 I bs 2250 I bs 281 plf rxx = 1.444 in ryy = 0.9611 in Ixx = 1.621 in4 lyy = 0.718 in4 97% utilization Sprov > Sreqd Beam O.K. Verify deflection: Amax = 1/180 = 0.53 In Iprov = Iregd Beam O.K. Mact 0.820 in3 S,.egd = f = G 'act = 0.55 in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 33 TARGET. Pallet Rack 4.4.2 6" deep beam - Detail 5B /SR51 6" Beams span 12' -0" Typical 1= 12 ft See Detail 9 /SR51 for beam detail. Section properties: t= 0.0747 in A9 = 1.275 in` S� = 1.7907 in'' Syy = 0.9884 in'' Impact loading = 25% * one pallet = Ptier = 3 pallets = M act = w12 8 Ptotal = Wbeam = Wbeam = 58.50 K in 500 Ibs 6000 Ibs 6500 Ibs 3250 Ibs 271 plf r.= 2.0944 in ryy = 1.0267 in I = 5.593 in4 lyy = 1.344 in4 99% utilization Sprov > Sreqd Beam O.K. Verify deflection: Amax = 1/180 = 0.80 in Iprov > Iregd Beam O.K. M Sreqd = act = 1.776 in3 fa Aact = 0.78 in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 34 TARGET. 4.5 Beam connections 2 2 1 0 0 O 4.5.1 Pin capacity dia. = Area = Shear 0.4 in 0.13 in2 F„ = 0.4 *Fy = Va = Fv*A = Bearing at Column Pallet Rack 20 Ksi 2.51 K 14 Gauge column governs over 3/16" plate by inspection t col = Rau brg = 1.2 *F„ *d *t = 0.0747 in 2.33 K Allowable shear Toad at rivet = 2.3 K 4.5.2 Standard three -pin connection capacity - Detail 5A/SR51 7.0 K —11*. 2' —Or, 2' 2" —IF, 1' 0 0 0 0 Man = 1 *F3 +3 " *F2 +5"*F1= where: F2 = 3/5F1 where: F3 = 1/5F1 Ract = Ract = 13.52 K in 1.1 K @ 8' long beam Gravity Loads O.K. 1.6 K @ 12' long beam Gravity Loads O.K. 4.5.3 Standard four -pin connection capacity - Detail 5B/SR51 Rail = 9.3 K Mall = 1 *F4 +3 " *F3 +5"*F2 +7 " *F1= where: F2 = 5/7F1 F3 = 3/7F1 F4 = 1/7F1 27.97 K in Gravity Loads O.K. all spans T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 35 TARGET. 4.5.4 Uplift resistance Per RMI: Pupi;ft = 1000 Ibs Mact = PL = 3.00 k ft 4 M act "Sregd f, 0.39 in3 Pallet Rack Sprov < Sreqd Beam O.K. Connection - per detail 5/SR51 - each beam connection is provided with a spring clip. This clip provides a rivet similar to that calculated in Section 4.5.1. Uplift is less than capacity of pin O.K. 4.6 Post capacity - Standard frame - all profiles - Detail 6A and 81SR51 D ■I • See Detail 1/SR51 and 13 to 15/SR51 for Column detail. Section properties: ' ) -14 W r — Gross section Gauge (Column) = 14 ga Ag = 0.7844 in` Sxx = 0.8496 In' Syy = 0.5976 in3 Net section t= An= Sxx= Syy = 0.0747 in 0.7003 in` 0.743 in 0.5603 in3 rxx = r Ixx l yy = rxx = ryy = _ Iyy= 1.2748 in 1.1412 in 1.275 in4 1.022 in4 1.2533 in 1.1168 in 1.115 in4 0.873 in4 W = 3.00 in D = 3.00 in L = 0.75 in r = 0.25 in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 36 • TARGET. 4.6.1 Determine allowable axial load Maximum column height between tier beams (X -X Axis) = 60 in Maximum column height between tier beams (Y -Y Axis) = 36 in kLx = kLy = AISI B1.1 AISI B2.1 102 in 36 in klx /rx = 81.4 kly/ry = 32.2 w/t = 33.467202 < 60 O.K 2 f Fcr ,r2E Fcr = k * *(tt ) 2 = 12(1 —,u2) w When X <= 0.673 b = w When X > 0.673 b = pw beff front face = beff-dhole = beff sides = beff - dhole = beff back face =bell = Find F„ 1.33 in 1.83 in 0.47 in _ Fy F e 0.767 93.60 ksi (1 0.22 J 0.93015 1.13 Since lc < 1.5 : Fn= .658 ^(IO2) *Fy Fn= 32.29 ksi AISI C4 P 4e Fig a b= dhote = Ae = .2 *E Fe (kl /r)2 2.33 in 0.5 in 0.56 in` Pallet Rack 43.21 ksi Pa = 10.0 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 37 0 TARGET, 4.6.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a Mn - e y Se *Qznil *F Mall = Mxall = 22.70 K in Mvall = 17.12 K in 4.7 Post capacity - Unbraced pallet racks - Detail 7B /SR51 - Not Used 4.8 Post capacity - Over conveyor pallet racks - Detail 7A/SR51 Gauge (Column 1) = W1 = D1 = L1 = r1 = Net sections 10 ga 3 in 3 in 0.75 in 0.25 in Column 1 Column 1 t= 0.1345 in Art= 1.2609 in` Sxx = 1.2994 i n' Syy = 0.9848 in' rxx = 1.2352 in ryy = 1.103 in Ixx = 1.949 in4 lyy = 1.534 in4 Gauge (Column 2) = W2 = D2 = L2 = r2 = 10 ga 3 in 3 in 0.75 in 0.25 in Column 2 4■W-►I Column 2 I I t= 0.1345 in 'k 111 An = 1.2609 in` D r Sxx = 1.2994 in' Syy = 0.9848 in' rxx = 1.2352 in ryy = 1.103 in Ixx = 1.949 in4 lyy = 1.534 in4 Combined Properties A„ = 2.5218 in Sxx = 2.5180 in Syy = 2.6172 in' rxx = 1.2610 in ryy = 1.8890 in Ixx = 3.7770 in4 Ivy = 8.4730 in4 Pallet Rack T0627 South Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 38 TARGET 4.8.1.1 Determine allowable axial load - Column 1 Maximum column height between tier beams (X -X Axis) = Maximum column height between tier beams (Y -Y Axis) = klx = kly = AISI B1.1 AISI B2.1 163.2 in 84 in klx /rx = 129.4 kly /ry = 44.5 w/t = 18.587361 < 60 0.K f Fcr = 0.426 2 z Fcr = k* E *(t) = 303.46 ksi When X <= 0.673 When X > 0.673 beff front face = betrdhole = beff sides =bell dhole = beff back face =bell = Find F„ 12(1 —p2) w b =w b = pw 1.50 in 2.00 in 0.50 in Fj, A� _ — F (1 0.22 1.00000 1.794 Since lc > 1.5 : Fn= .877 /Ic ^2) *Fy Fn= 14.99 ksi AISI C4 P Ae Fn n 0 b= dhole = Ae = 71.Z *E F _ e (kl /r)2 96 inches 84 inches 2.50 in 0.5 in 1.09 in Pallet Rack 17.09 ksi Pa= 9.0 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 39 TARGET 4.8.1.2 Determine allowable axial load - Column 2 Maximum column height between tier beams (X -X Axis) = Maximum column height between tier beams (Y -Y Axis) = klx = kly = AISI 81.1 AISI 82.1 142.8 in 84 in klx /rx = 113.2 kly/ry = 44.5 w/t = 18.587361 < 60 O.K 2 f Fcr = 0.426 2 2 Fcr =k* E *(t) — 303.46 ksi When . <= 0.673 When X > 0.673 beff front face = berr -dhole = beff Sides= beff.dhole = beff back face =bell = Find F„ 12(1 —,u2) w b =w b = pw 1.50 in 2.00 in 0.50 in (1 0 .22 1 2 J 1.00000 b= dhole = Ae = 84 inches 84 inches 2.50 in 0.5 in 1.09 in Pallet Rack 2* E 1.570 F = = 22.32 ksi e (kl / r) 2 Since lc > 1.5 : Fn= .877 /IO2) *Fy Fn= 19.57 ksi AISI C4 P Ae * n a Q Pa = 11.8 K Upper Tier Pa = 9.0 K Lower Tier Pa = 20.8 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMl- 2001AISI.xls Page 40 TARGET. 4.8.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a Mxall = 76.94 K in MYall = 79.97 K in 4.8.3 Verify Flare bevel weld between uprights ShearFlow = Q 1 Weld size = 0.1875 in Weld length = 1.5 in V= Q= A'Ybar= A'= 183.032 Ibs 0.945675 in' 0.63045 in` I = LI,.I +Ad12) +(Ii.2 +Ad22)j *2 1= 20.56 in4 ShearFlow = 8.42 Ibs /in 101.04 Ibs /ft Based on weld size @ 0.928 K/in /16th - - - -> 2784 Ibs /in - - - -> Based on mateial thickness, Section 4.19.2 2769 Ibs /in - - - -> Welded Connection O.K. 4.9 Strut capacity (Typical) - Detail 10A/SR51 Net section Gauge 16 ga D t= 0.063 in rxx = 0.9718 in A n = 0.5313 in` rri = 0.8626 in — Sxx = 0.3704 in' Ixx = 0.502 in4 Sri = 0.3833 in' l = 0.395 in4 4.9.1 Determine allowable axial load 47 in 47 in Maximum unbraced length (X -X Axis) = Maximum unbraced length (Y -Y Axis) = klx /rx = 48.4 kly /ry = 54.5 w/t = 31.746032 < 60 0.K Pallet Rack =(1 /2 *Anet) 4176 Ibs 4154 Ibs W • r )41 W = 2.50 in D = 2.00 in r = 0.25 in L = 0.75 in 47 inches 47 inches T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 41 TARGET. AISI B2.1 2 f Fcr 0.727 2 2 Fcr =k* E *(t) = 104.03 ksi 12(1 — f.12) w) When k <= 0.673 When X. > 0.673 beff front face =bell = beff sides =beff = Find F„ 2 0.22 1 2 0.95918 b =w b = pw 1.38 in 2.16 in F Fe 2 0.755 Since lc < 1.5 : Fn= .658 ^(Ic ^2) *Fy Fn= 43.32 ksi AISI C4 Ae F„ 4.9.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a Mn= e Fy b= Ae = 1.44 in 0.521 in` 7t2 *E F _ e (kll r)2 Pallet Rack 96.41 ksi Pa = 12.5 K Se *f) *F Ma11— Mxall = 11.32 K in Myall = 11.71 Kin 4.9.3 Determine allowable tension load To = An y 17.5 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 42 TARGET. 4.10 Strut capacity (Over- conveyor) - Detail10B /SR51 Net section Gauge = 14 ga t= 0.0747 in rxx = An = 0.4482 in` ryy = Sxx = 0.2136 in' Lc= Syy = 0.2136 i n' I yy = 4.10.1 Determine allowable axial Toad klx = kly = AISI 81.1 AISI 82.1 48 in 48 in 0.6126 in 0.6126 in 0.168 in4 0.168 in4 Maximum unbraced length (X -X Axis) = Maximum unbraced length (Y -Y Axis) = klx /rx = 78.4 kly/ry = 78.4 w/t = 7.0224719 < 60 O.K f AlFcr n2 Fcr =k* E it \z 12(1 — µZ) w, When X. <= 0.673 b = w When , >0.673 b =pw beff front face =bell = beff Sides =beff = 1.00 in 1.25 in = 0.161 = 2125.97 ksi CI 0.22 J 1.00000 b= Ae = Pallet Rack r /II D W= 1.50 in D= 1.50 in r = 0.25 in L = 0.75 in 48 inches 48 inches 1.00 in 0.758 in` T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 43 TARGET Find F„ Pallet Rack 72.2 E 1.086 F = = 46.62 ksi (kll r)z Since lc < 1.5 : Fn= .658 ^(Ic ^2) *Fy Fn= 33.57 ksi AISI C4 PQ = AQ Fn 4.10.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a M „ = Se* F; L Pa = 14.1 K S *nn MI *F a= e QR y ll 0 Mxall = 6.53 K in Myall = 6.53 K in 4.10.3 Determine allowable tension load 4.11 Not Used T a An FY 14.8 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 44 • TARGET. 4.12 Over conveyor beam /strut capacity - Detail 4 /SR51 TS 4x3 Gauge = 14 ga t= 0.0747 in An = 1.0458 in` Sxx = 1.2712 Syy = 1.2712 In' 4.12.1 Determine allowable axial load klx = kly = AISI B1.1 AISI B2.1 39 in 39 in rxx = ryy = Ixx lyy = 1.5737 in 1.2678 in 2.59 in4 1.681 in4 Maximum unbraced length (X -X Axis) = Maximum unbraced length (Y -Y Axis) = klx /rx = 24.8 kly/ry = 30.8 w/t = 3.8248231 < 60 O.K Fcr = k When X <= 0.673 When X. > 0.673 beff front face =bell = beff sides =bell = f Fcr = 0.088 2 2 * E * t - 7166.62 ksi 12(1 —p2) w b = w b = pw 3.50 in 2.50 in (1 0.22 A J = 1.00000 b= Ae = D Pallet Rack r W = 3.00 in D = 4.00 in r = 0.25 in 39 inches 39 inches 3.50 in 1.014 in' T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 45 4 TARGET. Find F„ Fy Fe 0.426 F = .2 *E e (kl /r)2 Since lc < 1.5 : Fn= .658 ^(Ic ^2) *Fy Fn= 50.97 ksi AISI C4 p _ A F „ a 4.12.2 Determine allowable bending moment AISI C3.1.1a Ma = Se* F, Pallet Rack 302.46 ksi Pa = 28.7 K _ Se* QR *F MI Ma11 Q Mxall = 38.84 K in MvaII = 38.84 K in 4.12.3 Determine allowable tension Toad T Art F Q 34.4 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 46 TARGET. 4.13 Transverse seismic design (Cross - Aisle) - standard pallet rack 4.13.1 Determine allowable bending moment From Section 1.2.3 - Max Base Shear Limit - - - -> From Section 1.2.3 - Design Base Shear - - - -> 0.125 *W 0.104 *W/T ^0.67 Pallet Rack Use Max Base Shear > 0.125 *W Includes Dynamic Multiplier when applicable 4.13.2 Determine design forces Two tier configuration is worst case design - all other configurations do not control # of Tiers to evaluate= 2 Lenth of beam to evaluate (8 ft or 12 ft)= 8 ft Pupright = 8200.0 Ibs Wupright = 5594.0 Ibs Vtrans• = 699 Ibs 160 Tier 2 80 Tier 1 P 1 P 1 P l P 4 P 1 Longitudinal elevation 466 233 Transverse elevation 0.67 *PL + DL Tier PL w, (K) ',Liltn i w 4h Kin w.h. /Ew.h. Vti., (Ibs) 1 4.1 2.8 60 167.8 0.333 233 2 4.1 2.8 120 335.6 0.667 466 3 0.0 0.0 0 0.0 0.000 0 E 503.5 1.000 699 From frame analysis, post loadings: ASCE 7 -05 Eq. 5 12.4.2.3 (Utilizing Unreduced Seismic) Top of post Mpost Ppost = 3.402 K in 5.30 K Bottom of post Mpost = Ppost = Uplift = 0.00 K in 6.137 K 0 Ibs T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 47 TARGET. 4.13.3 Check post capacity from 4.6 Pallet Rack Ppost Mposr Pa„ and Ma„ see 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 + allowable Mallowable Maddl = 1 .48 K in (from eccentric panel point at post) Top of post : 0.529 + 0.199 0.727 < 1.0 O.K. Bottom of post : 0.613 + 0.087 0.699 < 1.0 O.K. 4.13.4 Check brace capacity from 4.9 Pmax = 1.4 K < Struct capacity O.K. = 16.7 K Weld size = 0.1250 in Weld length = 3 in Based on weld size @ 0.928 K/in /16th - - - -> Based on base mateial thickness, Section 4.19.2 - - - -> 1856 Ibs /in - - - -> 1632 Ibs /in - - - -> Welded Connection O.K. 4.13.5 Design forces with loading only at top tier P 1 Pupright = Wupright = Vtrans• = P 1 4100 Ibs 4200 Ibs 525 Ibs Longitudinal elevation 522 3 5568 Ibs 4896 Ibs Transverse elevation PL +DL Tier PL w; (K) h in w h• Kin w;h; /Ew;h; V};a, (Ibs) 1 0 0.1 60 3.0 0.006 3 2 4.1 4.2 120 498.0 0.994 522 3 0 0.0 0 0.0 0.000 0 E 501.0 1.000 525 T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis Page 48 TARGET. Pallet Rack From frame analysis, post loadings: ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per "Eq. 5" (Utilizing Unreduced Seismic for Gravity) "Eq. 8" (Uplift) Mp0St = Ppost = 4.12 K in 2.969 K in Maddi = 1.14 Kin (from eccentric panel point at post) Uplift = 0 Ibs 4.13.5.1 Check post capacity from 4.6 1 post Mpost Pa„ and Ma„ see 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 1 allowable Mallowable Post analysis: 0.296 + 0.241 0.537 < 1.0 O.K. 4.13.5.2 Check brace capacity from 4.9 Pmax = 1.078 K < Struct capacity O.K. = 16.7 K 4.13.6 Verify desiqn for 12' Ionq beams Upright capacity is the same for either 8' -0" span pallet rack or 12' -0" pallet rack. Target Team Members are instructed through signage to limit the maximum loading to a frame accordingly. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 49 TARGET 4.14 Longitudinal seismic design (Down - Aisle) - standard pallet rack 4.14.1 Determine base shear and fundamental period - Rayleigh Fundamental Period of Pallet Racking per FEMA 460 Section 6.5.1 T = 211 NL i�T 7 YY pihpi 2 i =l g(Nc(kk kckbe ) +Nb(kb +kce) c be b ce Step 1 Step 2 kc = Mmax /®max = Kbe = Kce 400 K/in Wp; = 1.37 K hp 1st level = 60 In hp 2nd level = 120 in hp 3rd level = 0 In g = 386 in /sect NL = 2 k� = 400 K /in kb = 400 K /in Nb = 8 Nb = 4 6EIb /L = 2938.0625 lb = 1.621 ln4 L= 96 in 4EIc /H = 2465 lc = 1.275 4'14 H= 60 in E = 29000 K /in2 N1 pi h pi 2 = 49446 K in2 i =i Nc( kckbe ) = 2816.544 kc + kbe 1376.6143 Nb( kbkbe _ k, + kce Pallet Rack T= 1.10 sec Use - - - -> 1.00 sec T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 50 1 TARGET. From Section 1.2.3 - Max Base Shear Limit - - - -> From Section 1.2.3 - Design Base Shear - - - -> From Section 1.2.3 - Min Base Shear Limit - - - -> Since T = 1.00 sec 4.14.2 Design forces Wframe = W post= 4.14.3 Base shear distribution 2.3 K 1.2 K Pallet Rack 0.125 *W 0.104 *W/T ^0.67 0.070 "W > 0.104 W Includes Dynamic Multiplier when applicable PLrf*0.67 *PL + DL Tier PL w; (K) &Dill w h Kin 1 4.1 1.16 60 69.6 2 4.1 1.16 120 139.2 3 0.0 0.00 0 0.0 Vframe = Vpost = 0.240 K 0.120 K w;h; /Ew;h; V,;a, (Ibs) 0.333 80 0.667 160 0.000 0 208.8 1.000 240 4.14.4 Post combined stresses From frame analysis, post loadings: ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per Eq. 5 (Utilizing Unreduced Seismic) Ppost Pallowable Mpost = + lVl post Mallowable 3.60 K in Post analysis: 4.14.5 Beam connection Mconn = Vconn = Vconnt Rallow able M corm 0.488 <_ 1.0 Ppost = Pail and Maii see 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 + 0.159 4.10 K / 4 connections Mallowable 0.110 + 0.215 4.9 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xis 0.646 < 1.0 O.K. 6.00 K in 1.025 K 0.325 < 1.0 O.K. Page 51 0 TARGET. 4.15 Transverse seismic design - Unbraced pallet rack - Not Used 4.16 Longitudinal seismic design - Unbraced pallet rack - Not Used 4.17 Transverse seismic design (Cross - Aisle) - Over conveyor pallet rack From Section 1.2.3 - Max Base Shear Limit - - - -> 0.125 *W From Section 1.2.3 - Design Base Shear - - - -> 0.104 *W/T ^0.67 Pallet Rack Use Max Base Shear > 0.125 W Includes Dynamic Multiplier when applicable 4.17.1 Determine design forces Two tier configuration is worst case design - all other configurations do not control # of Tiers to evaluate = 2 Length of beam to evaluate (8 ft or 12 ft) = 8 ft Pupright = 2 pallets = 4600.0 Ibs Wupright = 2 pallets = 3182.0 Ibs 398 Ibs —0' Tier 3 165 _11. Tier 2 18 —÷ Tier 1 P l Vtrans• = 1P W W W W Longitudinal elevation 0 358 39 Transverse elevation 0.67 *PL + DL Tier PL w; (K) h• in will, (Kin) w;h; /Ew;h, V,; >, (Ibs) Vr,„, (Ibs) 1 0.5 0.39 96 37.0 0.099 39 20 2 4.1 2.8 120 335.6 0.901 358 179 3 0 0.0 0 0.0 0.000 0 0 E 372.6 1.000 398 199 From frame analysis, post loadings: ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per Eq. 5 (Utilizing Unreduced Seismic) Bottom of post Mpost = 14.074 K in Ppost = 5.906 K T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 52 • } TARGET 4.17.2 Check post capacity Ppost + M post Pallowable Mallowable <_ 1.0 Pall and Mal, see 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 Pallet Rack Bottom of post : 0.283 + 0.176 0.459 < 1.0 O.K. 4.17.3 Check brace capacity Pmax = 6.242 K O.K. < Struct capacity = 18.79 K 3" of 1/8" weld O.K. by inspection 4.17.4 Verify bottom tube Taxiai = 5.102 K O.K. < Tube capacity = 34.4 K check four bolt connection see 4/SR51 Tbolt = 1.2755 K Bolts O.K. A 325 5/8" diam. Bolt in tension = 13.5 K 4.17.5 Verify frame spacer Paxial = M= Strut is a 1/8" channel 5.179 K 0 K in A= Sx = fa = fb = 0.6 in2 0.420 8.63 ksi 0.00 ksi Moment resolved by bolt - O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 53 { TARGET 4.17.7 Verify overturning Utilizing ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per Eq. 8 h' IP/2 1P/2 P= W= h' = M0,t = Peq = Pii = Pallet Rack 9200.0 Ibs 6364.0 Ibs 795 Ibs 117.6 in 65 K in - - -> 0.7 *V *h' 641.9 Ibs - - - -> Movt/(Unit Width) 1531.7 Ibs - - - -> (0.6- 0.14Sds) *W P uplift = No uplift - unit stable 4.18 Longitudinal seismic design (Down - Aisle) - Over conveyor pallet rack 4.18.1 Determine base shear and fundamental period - Rayleigh Fundamental Period of Pallet Racking per FEMA 460 Section 6.5.1 T =217 NL IWp,hp,. 2 g(Nc(kc kkk )+Nb(kb +k„) be b ce Step 1 Step 2 kc = Mmax / ®max = Kbe = Kce = W pi = hp 1st level = hp 2nd level = hp 3rd level = g= NL = k� = kb = N0 = Nb = 6EIb/L = lb = L= 4E1, /H = I, _ H= E_ 400 K/in 1.37 K 96 in 120 in 0 in 386 in /sect 2 400 K/in 400 K/in 8 4 2938.0625 1.621 in4 96 in 2355.0417 1.949 in4 96 in 29000 K/in2 T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xls Page 54 TARGET Ew `pi 2 Nc( k )= ke + kbe Nb( kbkbe )= ke + kce 43104.96 K in2 2816.544 1367.6986 Pallet Rack T= 1.03 sec Use - - - -> 1.00 sec From Section 1.2.3 - Max Base Shear Limit - - - -> From Section 1.2.3 - Design Base Shear - - - -> From Section 1.2.3 - Min Base Shear Limit - - - -> 0.125 *W 0.104 *W/T ^0.67 0.070 *W Since T = 1.00 sec > 0.104 W Includes Dynamic Multiplier when applicable 4.18.2 Design forces Wframe = Wpost= 4.18.3 Base shear distribution 6.4 K 6.4 K Vframe = Vpost = 0.183 K 0.183 K PLrf*0.67 *PL + DL Tier PL w; (K) ILILIki. will; (Kin) w;h; /Ew;h; V,;., (Ibs) 1 0.5 0.16 96 15.3 0.099 18 2 4.1 1.2 120 139.2 0.901 165 3 0 0.0 0 0.0 0.000 0 E 154.5 1.000 183 4.18.4 Post combined stresses From frame analysis, post loadings: ASCE 7 -05 12.4.2.3 per Eq. 5 (Utilizing Unreduced Seismic) post + Mpost <1.0 Pa„ and Mali see 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 Pallowable Mallowable Mpost = 8.8 K in Mbase = Ppost = 8.79 K in 5.48 K Post analysis: 0.263 + 0.114 0.377 < 1.0 O.K. T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RMI- 2001AISI.xls Page 55 TARGET 4.19 Weld Capacity Calculations 4.19.1 Transverse Fillet Welds AISI E 2.4b P = t *L *Fu Fu= n Q SZ = 0.75 *t,v *L *Fxx F,, = P„= 16 oa material t = 0.059 in 14 ga material t = 0.0747 in 11 (la material t= 0.1196 in 10 ga material t = 0.1345 in 4.19.2 Flare Groove Welds AISI E 2.5b 0.75 *t,v *L *FXC Fu= P,— _ 10 qa material t= 0.1345 in 4.19.3 Weld Material Limitation AISI E 2.4 0.75 *tw *L *F70 = PG JL 1/8" weld t„, = 0.0884 in 3/16" weld tW = 0.1326 in F70 = SL 65 ksi 2.35 FS 70 ksi 2.55 FS Pallet Rack Values for base metal < 0.10 in Values for base metal >0.10in Pa = 1.63 K /in Pa = 2.07 K /in Pa = 2.46 K /in Pa = 2.77 K /in 70 ksi 2.55 FS Values for base metal > 0.10 in Pa = 2.77 K/in 70 ksi 2.55 FS Pa = 1.82 K /in Pa = 2.73 K /in T0627_South_Center, WA -ICC -RACK CALCULATIONS- ASD- 2002RM1- 2001AISI.xis Page 56 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 27 TARGET SOUTH CENTER, WA I REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE t APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER 311 PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the rePc e1' ,,,t',, pry 1 T -06 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 08 November 2010 Prepared by: MULVANNYG2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 10- 0285 -01 Richard Peske, Design Project Manager Contact David Contreras Architectural Contact TEL: 971.998.1451 William Keefer, Project Manual Nimesh Parikh, Structural Contact TEL: 562.985.3200 Doug Scott, Mechanical Contact TEL: 206.436.0427 Tony Ytuarte, Refrigeration Contact TEL: 208.343.3531 Charlie Musser, Electrical Contact TEL: 206.859.5382 1 t 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f t 1 Architecture Division 0 thr Division 14, 31 and 32 Date PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the remodel of T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 08 November 2010 Prepared by: MULVANNY<G2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 10- 0285 -01 Richard Peske, Design Project Manager David Contreras Architectural Contact TEL: 971.998.1451 EXPIRES Z elZO/ I Struct 31 r. Po ions Date Divisions 3, 4, 5 and PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the remodel of T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tuckwila, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 08 November 2010 Prepared by: MULVANNY <G2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 10- 0285 -01 Kyle White, Structural Contact TEL: 562.985.3200 Mechanical Divisions 20, 21, 22, and 23 Date PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the remodel of T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 08 November 2010 Prepared by: MULVANNY<G2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 10- 0285 -01 Doug Scott, Mechanical Contact TEL: 206.436.0427 1,- S--/o. efrigeration Date Refrigeration Portions of Divisions 11, 13, and 24 PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the remodel of T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 05 November 2010 Prepared by: I. MULVANNYG2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 # 10- 0283 -01 Richard Peske, Design Project Manager Contact Tony Ytuarte, Refrigeration Contact TEL: 208.577.5638 PROJECT MANUAL for PERMIT SET for the remodel of T -0627 TARGET STORE 301 Strander Blvd. Tukwilla, WA 98188 for TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 08 November 2010 Prepared by: MULVANNY <G2 MulvannyG2 Architecture 601 S.W. Second Avenue Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 MG2 10- 0285 -01 Charlie Musser, Electrical Contact Electrical Date TEL: 206.859.5382 Divisions 26, 27 and 28 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 00 0117 (00040) PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST / TABLE OF CONTENTS Check each spec Section that is required for this project. If additional information is requested check the blanks with a "®" at yes & no items and fill in information at "blank" questions. General Project Information Project Name: SOUTH CENTER, WA T- Number: T -0627 Store Type: Address: 301 Strander Blvd City / State: Tuckwilla, WA 98188 Issue Date: 08 November 2010 Cycle: 2010_08 Name Design Project Manager Target Richard Peske Project Arch.: Struct. Eng.: Mech. Eng.: Elec. Eng.: Spec. Coord.: David Contreras Nimesh Parikh Doug Scott Carlie Musser Building Code Requirements Model Code: ❑UBC ❑ BOCA ® IBC ❑ SBC Year Enforced : 2009 State Code: Washington Ammendment Construction Type: 2 -N (Existing) Seismic: ❑ UBC (0 -4): (Fill in level) ❑ BOCA/SBC (A -D): (Fill in level) ® IBC (A -F): D (Fill in level) ❑ Seismic Requirements Exempt per Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) The General Contractor (GC) will be responsible for making project specific spec interpretations concerning the RED Italic underlined paragraphs in individual specification Sections (Examples: 08 1113, 21 1313, etc.). Those interpretations will determine if the requirements are either "in (required)" or `but (not required) ". The GC will make their interpretation decisions based on information provided in this Project Specification Checklist / Table of Contents 00 0117. Items used for interpretations are as follows: r National Building Code -a State Building Code -a Seismic Zone Individual Spec Section Requirements General Project Information Is this store currently a LEED Project? nYes FiNo If the answer is Yes, the specification used should be Version 08b, with appropriate LEED requirements noted. If the answer is No, proceed with this document and use the 2009 Right Sizing /Merchandise Remodel Master Specification. The Following specification Sections will be in every the 2009 Right Sizing / Merchandise Remodel Master Specification: 00 0101 00 0105 00 0117 00 2113 00 3110 ® 00 6279 ® 00 6519 ® 00 7200 01 1100 01 3300 01 3516 01 4200 014300 01 5000 01 6000 ® 01 7123 01 7700 01 9100 ►1 00010 Title Page 00020 Certification Page 00040 Project Specification Checklist / Table of Contents 00120 Instructions to Bidders 00215 Owner Supplied Information 00350 Stored Material Payment Form 00330 Receipt and Waiver of Lien Rights 00701 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Version: December 2005 01010 Summary of Work 01300 Submittal Procedures 01120 Alteration Project Procedures 01090 References 01400 Quality Assurance 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01050 Field Engineering 01700 Closeout Procedures 01810 Commissioning Procedures PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Z Section 02 4110 (02050) — Selective Demolition ® General Contractor (GC) to submit form: "National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Demolition/Renovation Notification" before mobilization. ® Section 03 0130 (03350) — Concrete Repair Work Will expansion or remodeling require new under slab alterations, (i.e. new underground electrical or plumbing work in existing slabs). ® Yes ❑ No ® Section 03 0140 (03945) - Concrete Floor Preparation ® Section 03 2000 (03200) - Concrete Reinforcing Z Section 03 3000 (03300) - Cast -In -Place Concrete ® Section 03 5416 (03542) - Hydraulic Cement Underlayment Fl Section 04 2000 (04200) - Unit Masonry USE ONLY FOR MERCHANDIZING REMODELS & WHEN A NEW SECTION OF WALL IS ADDED AT COMPACTOR: Block Types Required: C• MU-1: Smooth Faced ❑ O• ther: ❑ Section 051222 (05122) - Structural Steel Framing Retrofit ❑ Section 05 2122 (05222) - Steel Joist and Joist Girder Retrofit ❑ Section 05 4000 (05400) - Cold Formed Metal Framing ® Section 05 5000 (05500) - Metal Fabrications Steel Pipe Bollards: ® Yes ❑ No Misc. Steel components at Openings: ❑Yes ® No Galv. Sheet Metal False Column Covers for Refrigeration Piping Drops: Yes ❑ No Installation of Owner Furnished Stainless Steel Bumpers: Z Yes ❑ No Other Items: ®Section 06 1000 (06100) - Rough Carpentry Select actual systems required for Project: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ❑ Yes ® No Tempered Hardboard: ❑ Yes ® No Fire Treated Wood required: ❑ Yes ® No Hardware Cloth required: ® Yes ❑ No ® Section 07 2100 (07200) - Insulation Z Insul 2 Freezer Floor ❑ Insul 3 Wall: Thickness:1 -1/2" Standard. ZInsul 5 Wall: Fire Sating Insul. (deck flutes @ fire rated wall) ® Insul 6 Batt: Thickness: Up to 6" Thick. ❑ Insul 6 Acoustical Insulation. ❑ Insul 7 Fiber Glass Bd.:1 -1/2" Standard. ® Section 07 5419 (07500) - Membrane Roofing System ( No Section 07 5419, see Section 01 3516, Article 1.3 for requirements) ❑ Section 07 8400 (07840) - Fire Stopping ❑ Yes ❑ No (Section 20 0050) ® Section 07 9200 (07900) - Joint Sealants Select actual systems required for Project: ® SNLT -1 (Ext Building sealant) ® SNLT -2 (Self - leveling slab sealant) ® SNLT -3 (Int. door & frame sealant) Z SNLT -4 (Silicone sealant @ food & bathroom) ❑ SNLT -5 (Bldg. sealant @ flues & vents) Z SNLT -7 (Roofing sealant) ® SNLT -9 (Setting bed at ext. thresholds & sills) Z Other SLNT -12 Z Section 08 1113 (08110) — H.M. Doors /Frames Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Required ?: Interior Doors & Frames Required? ® Yes ❑ No Exterior Doors & Frames Required? ❑ Yes ® No ❑ Section 08 3324 (08331) - Fire Rated overhead Coiling Shutters Fire Rated O.H. coiling shutters Required? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Section 08 3326 (08332) - Overhead Coiling Grilles (Owner Furnished) Optical O.H. Coiling Grilles Required? ❑ Yes ❑ No PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) ® Section 08 3800 (08355) — Traffic Doors Traffic Doors and Frames Required ?: ® Yes ❑ No ❑ TD -1 (Red) ® TD -2 (Beige) If Yes: Check Door Locations: ® Door 184 ❑ Other ❑ 102.2 ❑ 102.3 ❑ 102.4 ❑ 102.5 ® Section 08 7100 (08700) — Door Hardware Single Doors Doors, Frames & Hardware for Single Doors is part of the "EZ -Set Program" (door, frame, and all hardware except closer are assembled in factory), for hardware Groups noted below: Check Hardware Groups Required: ® Group 17 ❑ Group 58 ❑ Group 64 ❑ Group 68 ❑ Group 71 ❑ Group ❑ Photo Lab Closure Projects — Provide new Door 169 (verify this Door #), and provide and enhance hardware Group 68 with this upgrade: 36" Armor Plate in lieu of Kickplate; and add 1 Edge Protector, and add 1 Trim Protector. Pairs of Doors Doors, Frames & Hardware for Pairs of Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and "Doors & Frames" are set individually and all hardware is provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program as noted below: Check Hardware Groups Required: ❑ Group 81 ❑ Group 83 ❑ Group ® Group 63 ❑ Group 70 Special Doors Doors, Frames & Hardware for special Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and all hardware is either provided by the manufacturer or provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program (see schedule) & as noted below: ® Group 91 ® Group 96 ❑ Group ® Section 08 8800 (08800) — Glazing Glazing Required: ® Yes ❑ No If Yes: Check Glazing Types Required: ® GL-5 ® GL -7 ❑ Type ® Section 09 2116 (09250) - Gypsum Board Firestopping at Partitions Req'd: ❑ Yes ❑ No ® Section 09 3000 (09300) - Tile Select actual systems required for Project: QT -1 (Quarry tile floor, w/ abrasive unglazed finish) n 0T-1(S) (LA County - Smooth Quarry tilefloor) ® QT -5 (Quarry tile base) ❑ CT -15 (urban abuse floor tile for Fitting Rooms) ® FTS -6 (Floor Transition at non- recessed coolers) ['Dressing Room Floor Transition (Floor Transition between CT -15 and carpet at urban abuse Fitting Rooms) ® Quarry Tile Installation (Repurposing Options) ® (New Quarry Tile over existing sealed concrete) ❑ (New Quarry Tile over existing Quarry Tile) ® Section 09 5100 (09510) - Acoustical Ceilings Select actual systems required for Project: Z ACT -1 (Sales floor) ® ACT -3 (Dry Produce Labeling Room) ❑ Other Refurbish existing Grid: ❑ Yes ® No Refurbish existing ceiling Tile: ❑ Yes ® No • Section 09 6500 (09650) — Resilient Flooring Select actual systems required for Project: Z RF -1 (Remodel VCT floor tile) • RF -3 (Remodel Red feature strip) RB -1 (Coved Resilient Base - VCT) ❑ RB -2 (Straight Resil. Base - @ WC -6 &@ Jwlry Boat) ❑ FTS between VCT & concrete slab- see Section 03 5416 ❑ Other . ® Section 09 6800 (09680) - Carpeting Determining the Type of carpet required for Projects: For stores with total replacement, use CPT -10. For stores with partial carpet replacement the existing carpet type must be identified from the Video Survey / Pictures and checked on the Checklist [either CPT -10; or CPT -1 (Grey) J. Select actual systems required for Project: • CPT -1 (Grey) (Softlines, Offices, & Optical) ❑ CPT -1A (Infant Furniture Flat) ❑ CPT -3 (Entry Carpet Tile) ® CPT -6 (Electronics Boat) CPT -10 [Previously CPT -1 (Brown)] ( Softlines, Offices, & Optical) ❑ CPT -10A (Infant Furniture Flat) PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Z Section 09 6800 (09680) — Carpeting (Continued) ❑ MT -1 (Entry Carpet Mat) • FTS -1 Transition VCTBroadloom Carpet ® FTS-4 Transition Entry Carpet Ti1eNCT ❑ FTS -5 Transition Entry Carpet Tile/MT-1 ( FTS -5 is now 2" replace all existing 1" vinyl) ❑ Other Z Section 09 7200 (09950) — Wall Covering Select actual systems required for Project: ® WC -3 (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic - FRP) ❑ WC -6: ❑ WC -6A (Red); ❑ WC -6B (Beige) ❑ K -3 ( "Beige ", acrylic PVC sheet). ® K-4 ( "Red ", acrylic PVC sheet). ❑ Other . ® Section 09 9100 (09900) - Painting Select actual paint systems required for Project: Interior Paint Systems used: ® 1PS -1 Gyp Board; Eggshell Finish ❑ IPS -5 Gyp Board; Flat Finish ® IPS -6 H.M. doors & frames ❑ IPS -8 Int Floor Stripping; Traffic Paint ® IPS -15 Cooler/Dry Produce Curb Paint ❑ IPS -16 Epoxy Column Paint ® Other IPS -11. Exterior Paint Systems used: ® EPS -1 Ext. Ferrous Metal ❑ EPS -2 Ext Galv. Metal & H.M. doors & frames ® EPS -7 Exterior Decorative Steel / Galvanized Steel - (RTCR-Roof Top Compressor Rack, paint system) ❑ EPS -10 Re- Painting Ext. Canopy/Fascia/Fixtures ❑ Canopy— existing Blue/Green to C -20. ❑ Fascia — existing Red to C -20. ❑ Elect. Fixtures — existing color to C -20. ❑ Other fl Section 09 9700 (07176)- Exterior Finish Systems USE ONLY FOR MERCHANDIZING REMODELS & WHEN A NEW SECTION OF WALL IS ADDED AT COMPACTOR: Select actual paint . ystems required for Project: EFS -1 Split face & smooth face CMU, n EFS -3 Red Accent Band; n EFS-5 Ext Insulation & Finish System (EIFS) fl EFS -7 Precast or Tilt -up wall panels; Fl Other ❑ Section 10 0010 (10100) — Miscellaneous Specialties S. S. Corner Guards Required: ® Yes ❑ No Lexan Corner Guards Required: ❑ Yes ® No S. S. Caps & Wall Edges Required: ® Yes ❑ No ❑ Small Wall Clusters ® Large Wall Clusters ❑ Other . ® Section 10 2813 (10800) — Toilet Accessories (Owner Furnished) ❑ Other Soap Dispensers & TD -7 Required: ® Yes ❑ No Z Section 11 4125 (13040) — Walk -in Coolers and Freezers — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers / Freezers Required ® Yes ❑ No If Yes: Check the following Items: 1) Verify Cooler Locations: ® Stockroom Freezer (typ.) ® Stockroom Cooler (typ.) ❑ Other 2) Is a Fire -Rated Design is Required: El Yes (typ. @ CA only) ® No PI Section 12 9300 (02840) — Site Furnishings MERCHANDIZING REMODELS ONLY Concrete Spherical Bollards: M Yes n No Bike Stand: n Yes M No Benches: n Yes No Waste Container.. n Yes No Ash Container: n Yes M No Tree Grates: n Yes No FOR PROJECTS THAT ARE A 'PHOTO LAB CLOSURE PROJECT'; "CHECK" THE FOLLOWING SECTION AND REQUIRED COMPONENTS: ❑ Section 08 4100 (08400) - Aluminum Framing Sys Photo Lab Closure Projects Framing Req'd? ❑Yes ❑ No Other Alum Framing Required? ❑ Yes PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) `REVISED FOOD SERVICE' PROJECTS "CHECK" PRODUCTS & MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR YOUR PROJECT AS LISTED BELOW: ❑ Section 06 4000 (06400) — Architectural Woodwork ❑ Corian; Color: Sahara (partial height walls). ❑ Section 08 3800 (08355) — Traffic Doors (Owner Furnished) ❑ TD -1 - "Red" ❑ TD -2 - `Beige" ❑ Section 09 3000 (09300) — Tiling ❑ CT -2 Wall Tile - No. TYG -33, Target Blend ❑ CT -3 Wall Tile - No. TGY -88, Khaki ❑ CT -4 Wall Tile - No. TGY -28 Crystal White (Starbucks only) ❑ CT -9 Wall Tile- No.U- 074- S4269, Biscuit Bright ❑ CT -11 Floor Tile - No. TYG -65, Grain El CT -12 Floor Tile - No. TYG -27, Walnut (Starbucks only) ❑ CT -21 Base Tile - No. TYG -65, Grain ❑ CT -22 Base Tile - No. TYG -27, Walnut (Starbucks only) ❑ Section 09 5100 (09510) — Acoustical Ceilings ❑ ACT -2- 24" x 24" color: Sandstone. ❑ Section 09 6500 (09650) — Resilient Flooring ❑ RB "Cool White" (partial ht. walls). ❑ Section 09 7200 (09950) — Wall Covering ❑ WC -3 — FRP, color: White. ❑ WC -6A (partial height walls), Marmoleum Real, No. 3131, Scarlet. ❑ Section 09 9100 (09900) — Painting C -6 - Ben. Moore Color No. 869, Oxford White. C -9 — TK Color No. TK- 380 -211 Neon Red C -17 (Starbucks only), Sherwin Williams, Sepia. C -19 - Ben. Moore No. BM 1075, Fairway Oak. C -30 - Ben. Moore: HC -79, "Greenbrier Beige ". IPS -1 - Interior Gypsum Board, Eggshell Finish. 1PS -2 - Interior Gypsum Board, Epoxy Finish. IPS -9 - Interior Steel, Epoxy Finish. `PHARMACY' PROJECTS — "CHECK" PRODUCTS & MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR YOUR PROJECT AS LISTED BELOW: ❑ Section 08 1113 (08110) — H.M. Doors /Frames ❑ Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ❑ Section 08 7100 (08700) — Door Hardware Check Hardware Groups Required: ❑ Group 63 ❑ Group 94 ❑ Group ['Section 08 3323 (08330) — Overhead Coiling Doors (Owner Furnished) ❑ Pharmacy Coiling Door. ❑ Section 09 3000 (09300) — Tiling ❑ CT- 15: Floor Tile "Moon Glow" abrasive surface. ❑ CT -26: Cove Base; "Moon Glow ". ❑ Section 09 5100 (09510) — Acoustical Ceilings El ACT -5. ❑ Section 09 6800 (09680) — Carpeting ❑ CPT -6 (Pharmacy) ❑ Section 09 9100 (09900) — Painting ❑ C -9 — TK Color No. TK- 380 -211 Neon Red ❑ C -19 - Ben. Moore No. BM 1075, Fairway Oak. ❑ Section 10 2813 (10800) — Toilet Accessories (Owner Furnished) ❑ Mirror, Grab Bars, Soap Dispenser & TD -7. PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 'OPTICAL' PROJECTS - "CHECK" PRODUCTS & MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR YOUR PROJECT AS LISTED BELOW: ❑ Section 08 1416 (08210) - Flush Wood Doors (Owner Furnished) ❑ Factory Finished Wood Doors for Optical Dept. ❑ Section 08 3326 (08332) - Overhead Coiling Grilles (Owner Furnished) ❑ Optical Department O.H. Coiling Grille. ❑ Section 08 4100 (04100) - Aluminum Framing Systems (Owner Furnished) ❑ Manual Aluminum Door & Hardware Group 8. ❑ Aluminum Window. ❑ Section 08 7100 (08700) — Door Hardware Check Hardware Groups Required: ❑ Group 63 ❑ Group 64 ❑ Group 94 ❑ Group ❑ Section 08 8800 (08800) — Glazing ❑ GL-2 Tempered Glass. ❑ GL-11 Clear Insulated Glass w/ Low -E Coating. ['Section 09 5100 (09510) — Acoustical Ceilings ❑ ACT -1. ❑ ACT -5. UNIQUE ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS NOT PROVIDED IN PROTOTYPICAL MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATIONS, AS LISTED BELOW (These Sections will be located between "SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12" & "20 0020 Mechanical Demolition" in your spec) : ❑ Section OX X000 (0)0(O0) - ❑ Section OX X000 (030(OO) - ❑ Section OX X000 (0)0(00) - ['Section OX X000 (0)0000) - ❑ Section OX X000 (0)0000) - ❑ Section X0 X000 (0)0(00) - ❑ Section X0 X000 (0XX00) - 'HEALTH CLINIC' PROJECTS "CHECK" PRODUCTS & MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR YOUR PROJECT AS LISTED BELOW: ❑ Section 06 4000 (06400) - Architectural ❑ Clinic Chair Rail. Woodwork ['Section 08 3326 (08332) - Overhead Coiling Grilles (Owner Furnished) El Health Clinic O.H. Coiling Grille. ❑ Section 08 1416 (08210) - Flush Wood Doors (Owner Furnished) El Factory Finished Wood Doors for Clinic. ❑ Section 08 4100 (04100) - Aluminum Framing Systems (Owner Furnished) ❑ Aluminum Window(s). ❑ Section 08 7100 (08700) — Door Hardware Check Hardware Groups Required: ❑ Group 61 ❑ Group 64 ❑ Group ❑ Section 08 8800 (08800) — Glazing ❑ GL-2 Tempered Glass. ❑ Section 09 3000 (09300) — Tiling ❑ CT- 15: Floor Tile "Moon Glow" abrasive surface. ❑ CT -26: Cove Base; "Moon Glow ". ❑ Section 09 5100 (09510) — Acoustical Ceilings ❑ ACT -5. ❑ Section 09 6500 (09650) — Resilient Flooring ❑ RF -8. ❑ Section 09 6800 (09680) — Carpeting ❑ CPT -10 ❑ Section 09 9100 (09900) — Painting ❑ C -5 - Benjamin Moore No. BM 974, "Muskoka Trail" ❑ C -19 - Ben. Moore No. BM 1075, Fairway Oak. ❑ Section 10 0010 (10010) - Miscellaneous Specialties ❑ S.S. corner guards & Privacy Window Film. ❑ Section 10 2813 (10800) - Toilet Accessories (Owner Furnished) ❑ Specimen Cabinet & Coat Hooks. PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) ® Section 20 0020 (15010) — Mechanical Demolition ® Section 20 0050 (15050) — Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Fire Rated Penetrations (07 8400) ® Yes ❑ No ® Section 21 1313 (15300) — Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems Earthquake Protection for Piping: ® Yes ❑ No ® Section 22 0700 (15250) — Plumbing Insulation ® Section 22 1000 (15410) — Plumbing Piping Systems and Equipment Trap Primers: Yes ❑ No Domestic Water Heaters: ❑ Yes ® No Domestic Water Expansion Tank: ❑ Yes ® No Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pump: ❑ Yes ® No Interior Grease Interceptor: ❑ Yes ® No Exterior Grease Interceptor: ❑ Yes ® No Sump Pump: ❑ Yes Z No Grinder /Slicer Pump (below Floor): ❑ Yes ® No Grinder Pump (on Floor): ❑ Yes ® No Corrosion Protective Wrapping: ❑Yes ® No Vacuum Condensate Collection Sys: ® Yes ❑ No Flexible Expan. Joint (below grade): ❑ Yes ® No Flexible Expan. Loop (above grade): ® Yes ❑ No Other plumbing items not listed above still apply: Yes ❑ No ® Section 22 4000 (15440) — Plumbing Fixtures Janitor's Sink: Yes ❑ No ® Section 22 9000 — Startup Plumbing Section 23 0593 (15993) — Testing, Adjusting and Balance for HVAC (Owner Furnished) ® Section 23 0700 (15250) — HVAC Insulation Project Under 2006 IECC: ❑ ® Section 23 0900 (15950) — Controls and Instrumentation (Owner Furnished) ® Section 23 1100 (15410) — Fuel Piping Natural Gas Piping: ZYes ❑ No L.P. Gas Piping: ❑Yes ® No ® Section 23 3000 (15880) — HVAC Air Distribution ® Section 23 3700 (15850) — Air Handling Transfer Fans: ❑Yes Z No ® Section 23 7400 (15780) — Mechanical HVAC Equipment (Owner Fumished) ® Section 23 7500 (15853) — Rooftop HVAC Equipment (Supermarket) (Owner Furnished) ® Section 23 9000 — Startup HVAC ® Section 24 0110 (15600) — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 0120 (15602) — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 0130 (15603) — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements ® Section 24 0150 (15601) — Refrigeration Equipment Recovery [and Demolition Instructions] (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 0529 (15607) — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 0553 (15610) — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation (Owner Furnished) PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Z Section 24 0554 (15010) - Minimum requirements for Commercial and Other Duty Refrigerant Containing Appliances and Systems (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 0719 (15620) - Commercial Refrigeration Insulation (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 0930 (15682) - Field Refrigeration Control Terminations (Owner Furnished) ® Loop Piping Design. Z Section 24 0935 (15683) - Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 2315 (15630) - Commercial Refrigeration Piping (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 3623 (15615) - Installation of Walk -in Cooler and Freezer Boxes (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 3823 (15641) - Installation of Grocery Display Cases (Use with 24 3824 and 24 3825) Z Section 24 3824 - Tyler 5153270 (Use with Section 24 3823) (Select when existing Tyler cases are re- used.) ® Section 24 3825 - Tyler P5FG Defrost Conversions (Use with Section 24 3823) (Select when existing Tyler cases are re- used.) Z Section 24 3826 - Tyler R22 to R404 Conversion Instructions (Use with Section 24 3823) (Select when existing Tyler cases are re- used.) ® Section 24 6212 (15661) - Installation of Condenser /Compressor Units (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 6213 (15660) - Condenser/Compressor Units (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 6312 (15663) - Installation of Air Cooled Condensers (Do not select for evaporative condenser projects.) ® Section 24 6313 (15662) - Air Cooled Condensers (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 6332 (15667) - Installation of Evaporative Condensers (Owner Furnished) (Ambient design > 100 deg. F) Z Section 24 6333 (15665) - Evaporative Condensers (Owner Furnished) (Ambient design > 100 deg F.) ® Section 24 6422 (15653) - Installation of Rooftop Compressor Racks (Owner Furnished) ❑ Loop Piping Design. Z Section 24 6423 (15652) - Rooftop Compressor Racks (Owner Furnished) El Loop Piping Design. ❑ Remote Header. Z Section 24 7312 (15645) - Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils (Owner Furnished) ® Section 24 7313 (15644) - Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils (Owner Furnished) Z Section 24 9000 - Startup Refrigeration PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Z Section 26 0020 (16020) — Electrical Demolition ® Section 26 0500 (16050) — Basic Materials and Methods ® Section 26 0519 (16120) — Conductors and Cable Z Section 26 0526 (16450) — Secondary Grounding ® Section 26 0529 (16190) — Supports for Electrical Systems ® Section 26 0533 (16111) — Raceway and Boxes (includes Sections 1611, 16112, 16130) ® Section 26 0553 (16195) — Identification for Electrical Systems ® Section 26 0923 (16951) — Occupancy Sensors (Owner Furnished) ® Section 26 0924 (16952) — Occupancy Sensors Installation ® Section 26 2200 (16460) — Dry Type Transformers (Owner Furnished) ® Section 26 2201 (16461) — Dry Type Transformers Installation ® Section 26 2416 (16470) — Panelboards (Owner Furnished) ® Section 26 2417 (16471) — Panelboard Installation ® Section 26 2726 (16141) — Wiring Devices ® Section 26 2727 (16180) — Electrical Connections for Equipment ® Section 26 2816 (16440) — Disconnect Switches (Owner Furnished) ® Section 26 2817 (16441) — Disconnect Switch Installation ® Section 26 2913 (16480) — Motor Control ® Section 26 2914 (16485) — Contactors ® Section 26 3353 (16260) — Uninterruptible Power Supply (Owner Furnished) ❑ Section 26 3354 (16261) — Uninterruptible Power Supply Installation ® Section 26 5100 (16511) — Lighting Fixtures (Owner Furnished) ® Section 26 5101 (16512) — Lighting Fixtures Installation • Section 26 5500 (16515) — Neon Interior Signage ® Section 27 0528 (16741) — Telephone Raceway System ® Section 27 4100 (16780) — AudioNideo Distribution system (Owner Furnished) ® Section 27 4101 (16781) — AudioNideo Distribution System Installation ® Section 31 2333 (02220)- Trench Excavation and Backfilling Will Right Sizing require trenching to occur, if so answer `Yes': ® Yes ❑ No END OF SECTION PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK PROJECT SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST/TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0117 (00040) - 10 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) DOCUMENT 00 2113 (00120) INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Include Instructions to Bidders, sample bidding and including A- Change Modifications issued prior to receipt o: Bi , and the proposed Contract Documents Electronic Project Documents, Drawings and Specifications, are available for General Contractors and Vendors at the ProLog Website; http : / /p4zone.target.com 1. Electronic editable copies of Architectural Floor Plan(s), Reflected Ceiling Plan(s), Mechanical Building Plan(s) and Roof Plan(s) and Structural Roof Framing Plan in Microstation and AutoCAD formats are available at the Prolog Website. These drawing sheets are located under the specific project directory in the 4. Architecture and Engineering\2. Construction Documentt\5. CAD Plans folder. 1.2 A- CHANGE MODIFICATIONS A- Change Modifications: Written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to or any time after receipt of Bids which modify or interpret Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. A. A complete and properly signed Bid to do the Work or desii supported by data required by the Bidding Documents. 1.4 BASE BID A. The sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. ted portion thereof for the suns stipulated, 1.5 ALTERNATE BID (OR ALTERNATE) A. An amount stated in the Bid to be added to or de d change in the Work as described in the Bidding 1.6 UNIT PRICE ducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding currents is accepted. A. An amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Bidding documents. Unit prices do not substantially change scope and general character of Work. Unit prices shall be based on labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary for complete installation of Work described. BIDDER A. One who submits a Bid for a contract with the Owner for the SUBBIDDERS A. One who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor 1.9 OTHER DEFINITIONS A. Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Co: applicable to the Bidding Documents. ork described in the Bidding Documents. or a portion of the Work. for Construction or in other Contract Documents are INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113 (00120)`- 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION BIDDERS AND SUBBIDDERS A. By submitting a Bid, Bidder and Subbidder represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his Bid is made in accordance therewith; he has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, including but not restricted to, those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and conditions of the surface and subsurface conditions of the site, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during execution of the Work, and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the Bidding Documents; and his Bid is based upon materials, systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents. DOCUMENT USE AND AVAILABILITY A. Subbidders may obtain Documents from Contractor. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. The issuing party or Owner, in making copies of the Bidding Documents available, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the Work and does not confer a license for, or grant any other use of, the documents. INTERPRETATIONS /CORRECTIONS A. Bidders and Subbidders shall promptly notify Target's Project Architect in writing of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions, codes and regulations. Bidders and Subbidders requiring clarification or interpretations shall make a written request to Architect, to reach Architect at least ten days prior to date for receipt of Bids. Any interpretations, corrections or changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by A- Change Modification. Interpretations, corrections, or changes made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURE PRE -BID MEETING A. A "Pre-Bid Conference" may be held by the Owner prior to the Bid date to review the Project, the bidding, the award procedures and to answer questions by the Bidders. The location and time, if a meeting is to be held, will be announced to all Bidders of record. FORM OF BIDS A. Enter the Schedule of Values into Prolog Manager. FORM OF SUBBIDS A. The Owner has pre - selected the Contractor for Complete Construction who will receive subbids. B. Submit Subbids in the form prescribed by Contractor.' 4.4 BID OPENING TIME/PLACE A. The Contractor for Complete Construction shall determine the time and place to receive subbids. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113 (00120) - 2 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 4.5 BID MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL A. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the 30 day period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bids submitted may be withdrawn or modified only by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. The notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of Bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. B Withdrawn Bids may not be. resubmitted 4.6 CONTRACT ASSIGNMENT A. Bidders for Complete Construction shall, by submitting a Bid, agree to accept as Subcontractors, by contract assignment, the firms to which the Owner has separately awarded Contracts and which may be identified in the Bidding Documents: 4.8 REJECTION OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and Subbids. 4.9 ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid or Subbid. 4.11 CONSIDERATION OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Prices, when required as a part of a Bid or Subbid, may be considered in award. B. Any quantities shown or specified are approximate. Each Bidder or Subbidder shall be responsible for the estimate of quantities used in submitting Unit Prices. 4.12 CHANGE ORDER MARK- UPS/MARK -DOWNS A. Percentage amounts quoted in the Bid for mark -up /mark -down on Project Change Orders may be considered in award. ARTICLE 5 - POST -B{D INFORMATION 5.1 BIDDER SUBMISSIONS A. The successful Bidder shall submit the following in compliance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements within ten calendar days (or at earlier times specified elsewhere) after date of the fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever is earliest: 1. A Certification indicating the Contractor has recorded the Contract with any city, county, or state agency, if such action is required by law. 2. A Proposed Construction Progress Schedule. 3. A Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. 4. A Certificate of Insurance indicating compliance with the insurance requirements. 5. Subcontractors list, including names, addresses, telephone numbers, and trade classification of each. END OF DOCUMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113 (00120);- 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET INSTRUCTIONS TO SIDDE: 002113(00120) -4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) DOCUMENT 00 3110 (00215) OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Refer to Drawings, Sheet A601, Owner Furnished Material and Equipment Schedule for materials and equipment: 1. Furnished by Owner, Installed by Owner. 2. Furnished by Owner and Installed by Contractor. B. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific information on Owner Furnished Materials and Equipment. 1.2 REMODEL PROCESS MANUAL A. An electronic copy of the Remodel Process Manual is available for General Contractors and Vendors at the ProLog Website; http: / /pdzone.target.com. On the Projects screen select the Submit button and go to the _PD Reference Material project. 1. This document is located in the Project Documents\Document Management\Procurement\Manuals\ Construction Process folder. 1.3 REMODEL RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS A. The recycling requirements for all Target projects are found on the ProLog Website: 1. This document is located in the Project Documents\Document Management \Construction\Documents\ Procedures \Construction Recycling Guide folder. B. From the electronic copy of the "Construction Recycling Guide" make a paper copy for your records to verify the scope of your work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION 00 3110 (00215) - 1 TARGET STORES MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION 00215 - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) DOCUMENT 00 6279 (00350) STORED MATERIAL PAYMENT FORM Project Progress Payment Number: 1. The following items have been included in the above noted request for payment even though not yet incorporated into the Work: Value Item Stored At Per Attached 2. The total value of the above items per the attached invoice(s): 3. In addition to any insurance(s) the Owner may carry, the undersigned states that the above items are covered by Contractor's property insurance against all risks and that said insurance will remain in effect until final acceptance of the completed project by the Owner. 4. The undersigned hereby represents and guarantees that full payment has been made for the above items, and by signature below, contingent upon receipt of payment on account of the above items, the Contractor hereby transfers title to the above items to the Owner of the project. 5. Receipt of payment on account of the above items shall in no manner or in any degree relieve the Contractor of any obligation under its contract, particularly, but not limited to, its obligations with regard to warranties and guarantees. The below signature is by member of firm or corporation entitled to sign contract documents for the Contractor. Contractor: Signed by: Title: Date: END OF DOCUMENT STORED MATERIAL PAYMENT FORM 00 6279 (00350) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK STORED MATERIAL PAYMENT FORM 00 6279 (00350) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) DOCUMENT 00 6519 (00330) RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIEN RIGHTS FROM: (Contractor) TO: (Owner) PROJECT: (Name) (Location) 1. The undersigned does hereby waive, release and surrender any claim, lien or right of lien resulting from labor, skill, and/or materials, subcontract work, equipment or other work, rent, services or supplies heretofore furnished in and for the construction, improvement, alteration or additions to the above described project prior to the date hereof. 2. This release is given for and in consideration of the sum of $ and other good and valuable consideration received inhand from 3. In further consideration of the payment made as above set forth, and to induce the Owner to make said payment, the undersigned agrees to defend and hold harmless the Owner or Lender, and/or the principal and surety from any claims hereinafter made by the undersigned and/or its material suppliers, subcontractors or employees, servants, agents or assigns of such persons against the project. 4. It is acknowledged that the designation of the above project constitutes an adequate description of the property and improvements for which the undersigned has received consideration for this release. 5. This instrument shall constitute a full, final and complete release of all rights and claims of the undersigned, for the work completed to date. DATED this day of , 20_ By (Officer) (Partner) STATE OF Address COUNTY OF The foregoing receipt and waiver of Lien Rights was subscribed and sworn to me this _ day of , 20, by , as (Title) of (Company name) as a true and complete act of said Corporation. WITNESS MY HAND AND OFFICIAL SEAL. My Commission expires NOTARY PUBLIC, in and for County, END OF DOCUMENT RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIENS 00 6519 (00330) - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Target Corporation Version: December 2005 1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 Agreement. ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents for the Work are identified in the 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction (the "Contract "). The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the Work to be performed by the Contractor with respect to the Project and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral with respect to the Work. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. A Modification is a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, a Change Order or a Directive. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor, but the Architect/Engineer shall be entitled to performance of obligations intended for its benefit and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner or the Architect/Engineer and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, or between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. 1.1.3 THE WORK. The Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT. The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS. The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents. The Drawings show the design, location and dimensions of the Work, and generally include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS. The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, performance of related services and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 1.1.7 CHANGES. Changes are written or graphic instruments prepared by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner and issued after the execution of the Agreement. Changes modify or interpret the Contract Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Items of Work described in a Change shall become a part of the Contract Documents only upon the issuance of a Change Order or Directive authorizing such changes in the Work. 1.1.8 PROJECT MANUAL. The Project Manual is the volume or volumes, if any, identified in the Agreement that may contain the bidding requirements, sample forms and certain of the Contract Documents, such as the Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents shall be required to the extent it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations that have well -known technical or trade meanings are used in•the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 1.2.2 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, and the arrangements of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 The Specifications contain incomplete sentences. Words that do not contribute to clear and concise directions have been omitted ( "The Contractor Shall," "Shall Be," "As Noted on the Drawings," and similar words). Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. The words "Shall Be" and "Shall" may be indicated by a colon (:), e.g., "Color: Brown." 1.2.4 As used in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified, "Provide" or "Provided" shall mean fumish and, install and includes, without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services and other items required to complete the specified Work. 1.2.5 As used in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified, "Install" or "Installed" shall mean unload, unpack and uncrate materials or equipment; remove packing materials from the site; store, protect, assemble, move to area of use, set in place and connect to services. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications, plans and other documents prepared or furnished by the Owner or the Architect/Engineer in connection with the Project are the property of the Owner and not the Contractor. They are to be used by the Contractor only with respect to the Project and are not to be used on any other project, and the Contractor shall take such steps as the Owner may reasonably request to protect the Owner's rights therein and to prevent their unauthorized use. With the exception of one set of Contract Documents for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner on request at the completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of any copyright or other reserved rights of the Owner. ARTICLE 2. ARCHITECT /ENGINEER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Architect/Engineer is the professional architect, engineer or consultant identified as such in the Agreement. The term Architect/Engineer means the Architect/Engineer or its authorized representative. 2.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2.2.1 To the extent directed to do so by the Owner, the Architect/Engineer will provide administration of the Contract as hereinafter described. 2.2.2 The Owner may appoint the Architect/Engineer to serve as the Owner's representative. The Architect/Engineer will advise and consult with the Owner as requested by the Owner. The Architect/Engineer will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents or in a written instrument executed by the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. 2.2.3 The Architect/Engineer will not be. responsible for and will not have control of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and it will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.4 The Architect/Engineer will advise the Owner conceming the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents and will advise the Owner in evaluating the performance thereunder by both the Owner and the Contractor. 2.2.5 The Owner may initially refer claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents to the Architect/Engineer for decision, which it will render in writing within a reasonable time. If the Document #: 130736 Version:v4 Owner does refer a claim, dispute or other matter to the Architect/Engineer, the rendering of a decision by the Architect/Engineer will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Contractor of any rights or remedies it may otherwise have with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter. 2.2.6 If the Owner concurs, the Architect/Engineer will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in its opinion, the Architect/Engineer considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, it will have authority with the Owner's approval to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents whether or not such Work is then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither the Architect/Engineer's authority to act hereunder, nor any decision made by it in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect/Engineer to the Contractor or to any other person or entity. 2.2.7 The Architect/Engineer will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon those Contractor's submittals (such as Shop Drawings and Product Data) referred to the Architect/Engineer for review by the Owner. Such review shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Architect/Engineer's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.2.8 The Architect/Engineer, when requested by the Owner, will assist the Owner in conducting inspections of the Work. 2.2.9 In the case of the termination of the employment of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner may appoint a replacement Architect/Engineer, in which case the Owner shall advise the Contractor of the identity of such replacement. ARTICLE 3. OWNER 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Owner is the entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner or its authorized representative. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE OWNER 3.2.1 If required to perform the Work, the Owner shall fumish a legal description of the site, a soils report for the site, and surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site. 3.2.2 Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. If so directed by the Owner or required by govemmental authorities, the Contractor shall secure the same at the Owner's expense. 3.2.3 Upon receipt of a written request therefor from the Contractor, information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3.2.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be fumished, free of charge, all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO,STOP THE WORK 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct the Work as required by Paragraph 13.2 or fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written notice to the Contractor, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. This right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3.4.1 If the Contractor defaults under any provision of the Contract Documents or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case there shall be deducted from the payments then or thereafter due to the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, which shall include compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. This right of the Owner to carry out the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. 3.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT THE WORK 3.5.1 The Owner will have the right to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. The Owner will also have the right to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, whether or not such Work is then fabricated, installed or completed. Neither the Owner's right to act under this Subparagraph nor any decision made by it either to exercise or not to exercise such right shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Owner to the Contractor or to any other person or entity. 3.6 OWNER'S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS 3.6.1 The Owner will have the right to review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. The Contractor acknowledges that any such review, approval or other action by the Owner shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Neither the Owner's right to act under this Subparagraph nor any action taken by the Owner with respect to any submittal shall relieve the Contractor from its ultimate responsibility to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall act upon submittals with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Owner's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 3.7 OWNER'S SITE REPRESENTATIVE (OSR) 3.7.1 The Owner may appoint to the Project an Owner's Site Representative (OSR) who shall represent the Owner. The OSR shall at all times have access to the Work and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. The OSR may schedule and conduct periodic Project meetings at the site, which the Contractor shall attend as requested. If an OSR is appointed, the Owner's instructions to the Contractor may be issued through the OSR and Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for Owner- supplied equipment may be forwarded to the Contractor by the OSR. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACTOR 4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term Contractor means the Contractor or its authorized representative. 4.2 AGREEMENTS OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.2.1 The Contractor acknowledges that it is an independent contractor and not an agent of the Owner. 4.2.2 The Contractor acknowledges the position of trust it occupies and that the Owner will rely upon the Contractor for the proper performance of the Work. 4.2.3 The Contractor acknowledges that, except as specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner, by supplying maps, drawings, data or other technical information makes no representations as to the accuracy of such maps, drawings, data or technical information and that it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify all conditions. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 4.2.4 The Contractor represents that it has: (a) visited the site, (b) taken such other steps as may be necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work and the general and local conditions which affect the Work or the cost thereof, and (c) examined the site, the obstacles which may be encountered and all other conditions (including without limitation, the availability of labor and any potential labor difficulties) having a bearing upon the performance of the Work, the superintendence of the Work, the time of completion and all other relevant matters. The Contractor acknowledges that, except as specifically provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner has no responsibility for understandings or representations conceming conditions made by any of the Owner's agents, representatives or employees. 4.2.5 The Contractor acknowledges its responsibility to coordinate its Work with that of separate contractors for the installation of other work within the Project. The Contractor expressly promises to schedule and coordinate its Work with such separate contractors so as to assist them and permit the Project to be completed on schedule. 4.2.6 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it shall have no right to additional compensation or a time extension for or on account of 1) labor disputes, or 2) preexisting conditions of the site, unless such conditions could not reasonably have been discovered by the Contractor in the course of a diligent and prudent investigation of the'site in accordance with Subparagraph 4.2.4. The Contractor expressly waives its right to make claims for such matters. Moreover, the Contractor agrees to work overtime and accelerate its performance to deal with such matters in order to achieve the Construction Schedule and to permit the Project to be completed on schedule. 4.2.7 The Contractor agrees that no payment or compensation of any kind shall be made to it for any damages that may arise out of or be caused by any delay from any cause in the progress of the Work, whether such delay be avoidable or unavoidable, and the Contractor waives any right to claim such damages. The foregoing does not affect the Contractor's ability to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum to the extent and in the manner permitted elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4.3 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.3.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with any technical information fumished by the Owner and shall at once report to the Owner any error, inconsistency or omission it may discover. The Contractor shall not be liable for any damage resulting from any such error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from its failure immediately to report any such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions that it may discover, or resulting from the performance of any construction activity which it knows, or reasonably should have known, involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved submittals for such portion of the Work. 4.4 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.4.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using its best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. 4.4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of the Contractor and the Contractor's agents and employees. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees from any claims, damages, losses, costs, penalties and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of, caused by, or incurred in connection with such acts or omissions. 4.4.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of the Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, their agents and employees, anyone acting on behalf of any of them, and any other persons performing any of the Work. directly or indirectly under a contract with the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees from any claims, damages, losses, costs and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of, caused by, or incurred in connection with such acts or omissions. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 4.4.4 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees and other persons performing the Work and shall not employ or permit the employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in the task assigned to them. 4.4.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved from its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Architect/Engineer in its administration of the Contract, or by the activities or duties of the OSR or other representatives of the Owner, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 4.5 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.5.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 4.5.2 In the case where the Owner undertakes the procurement and supply of equipment or materials ( "Owner Fumished Materials "), the following terms shall apply: .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the delivery of the Owner Fumished Materials to the site at a time that is mutually agreeable to the manufacturer or distributor of the Owner Furnished Materials and the Contractor. The Contractor shall confirm the agreed -upon delivery dates by facsimile or email to the manufacturer or distributor. The Contractor must take delivery of all Owner Furnished Materials on the agreed upon delivery date unless the Contractor gives the manufacturer or distributor of such materials at least 21 days notice. Any costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's failure to notify the manufacturer or distributor of a change in the delivery date with at least 21 days notice shall be bome solely by the Contractor. .2 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take delivery of all Owner Fumished Materials and arrange for the unloading of the Owner Fumished Materials at the site. At the time of delivery, the Contractor shall perform a reasonable visual inspection of the physical condition and quantities of the Owner Fumished Materials. If Owner has provided Contractor with specific written instructions regarding the inspection of certain Owner Fumished Materials or the manner in which defects or shortages should be reported, Contractor shall follow such instructions. The Contractor shall store all Owner Furnished Materials in an appropriate manner to ensure that such materials are not damaged and remain in working order. .3 The Owner Fumished Materials shall only be used for incorporation in the Project. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any remaining Owner Fumished Materials and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Owner's directions. The Contractor shall at all times maintain a listing of all Owner Furnished Materials at the site. .4 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the ownership of all Owner Fumished Materials shall at all times be and remain in the Owner. 4.6 WARRANTY 4.6.1 The Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment fumished under this Contract will be of good quality and will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, shall be considered defective. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall fumish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment incorporated in the Work. This warranty is not limited by any other provision of the Contract Documents. 4.7 TAXES 4.7.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor, which taxes are legally enacted at the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 4.8 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.8.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for construction permits and for all other permits and govemmental fees, licenses, approvals and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 4.8.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work, and in the event of an allegation that the Contractor has failed to do so, the Contractor shall pay any fines or penalties imposed upon the Owner, and shall reimburse the Owner for any expenses (including attorneys' fees) incurred by the Owner, as a result of such allegation. 4.8.3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, it shall promptly give written notice thereof to the Owner. If the Contractor performs any Work which it knows, or reasonably should have known, to be contrary to such laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, delays and damages attributable thereto. 4.9 ALLOWANCES 4.9.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom it makes a reasonable objection. 4.9.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the materials and equipment required by the allowance delivered at the site, and shall include all applicable taxes; .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance; .3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will take into consideration changes, if any, in handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses. 4.10 SUPERINTENDENT 4.10.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent ( "Superintendent ") and necessary assistants in connection with the Project who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the Superintendent shall be binding upon the Contractor. Upon the Contractor's written request in each case, the Owner shall confirm important communications in writing. 4.11 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.11.1 The Contractor, with the assistance of the Owner, shall develop and maintain a construction progress schedule. The Contractor shall update and distribute the progress schedule as required to inform all parties of the status of the Work. 4.12 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain in good order at the site for the Owner one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 4.13 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.13.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4.13.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4.13.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.13.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents. 4.13.5 No portion of the Work requiring submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner as provided in the Contract Documents. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 4.13.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals the Contractor represents that it has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or that it will do so, and that it has checked and coordinated the information contained in such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner Shop Drawings and Product Data of all Owner- supplied equipment. The Contractor shall review and retum a copy thereof to the Owner with comments and approval. Approval by the Contractor shall represent that field conditions have been or will be coordinated to receive the Owner- supplied equipment. 4.13.7 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation. from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect/Engineer's or Owner's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Owner has specifically approved such deviation by Change Order. The Contractor shall specifically inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, if such submittal is to be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, in writing of such deviation at the time of submission. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect/Engineer's or Owner's approval thereof. 4.13.8 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or noted on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner on previous submittals. 4.13.9 The Contractor shall fumish copies of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals to separate contractors and to Subcontractors as may be necessary to coordinate their work or upon their request. 4.14 USE OF SITE 4.14.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. 4.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.15.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by excavation or by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the Document #: 130736 Version:v4 written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 4.15.3 Cutting shall be accurately located and neatly done. Unnecessary cutting shall be avoided. Patching shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Patching work shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, such work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. Finished patching work shall be acceptable to the contractor whose work has been patched. 4.15.4 The Contractor shall leave all holes, chases and other openings in its construction required by other contractors for the installation of their work, provided such openings are accurately located by the party requiring them before the execution of the construction. The Contractor shall afford other contractors a reasonable opportunity to locate such openings. 4.16 CLEANING UP 4.16.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove all of its waste materials and rubbish from and about the site as well as all of its tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.16.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the completion of the Work, and the Contractor does not correct such failure within three days after receipt of written notice from the Owner, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor and may be deducted from any amounts then or thereafter due to the Contractor. 4.17 COMMUNICATIONS 4.17.1 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or as otherwise directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit those Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples which are to be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer directly to the Architect/Engineer, and shall direct all other communications to the Architect/Engineer or the Owner through the OSR or, if no OSR has been appointed, through the project manager identified by the Owner. If the Contract Documents require written notice, it shall be given in accordance with Paragraph 7.3. 4.18 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.18.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, trademark, trade secret, copyright or other intellectual property rights, and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, it shall be responsible for such loss unless it promptly gives such information to the Owner. 4.19 INDEMNIFICATION 4.19.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor agrees to assume entire responsibility and liability for all damages or injuries to all persons, whether employees or otherwise, and to all property, arising out of, resulting from, or in any manner connected with the execution of the Work. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the agents and employees of each of them, and any other person or entity designated as an Indemnified Party in the Contract Documents (collectively the "Indemnified Parties ") from and against all claims, losses, damages and expenses (including court costs, attorneys' fees and investigative and discovery costs) which (1) arise out of, result from, or are in any manner connected with the Contractor's operations, the execution of the Work or the Contractor's failure to perform its obligations under the Contract Documents, and which are attributable to personal or bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of property (other than the Work itself), including Toss of use resulting therefrom, or (2) arise out of, result from or are caused by (in whole or in part) the acts, errors, omissions, negligence or fault of the Contractor or any Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone acting on behalf of any of them. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the foregoing assumption of liability and indemnity shall apply regardless of whether or not such claims, losses, damages, injuries or expenses are ones for which any Document #: 130736 Version:v4 of the Indemnified Parties may be or may be claimed to be liable, as a result of negligence, gross negligence or otherwise. The Contractor agrees to obtain, maintain and pay for liability insurance coverage and endorsements to insure the provisions of this paragraph. The foregoing indemnity obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.19. The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 4.19 shall survive the expiration or termination of the Contract and shall extend to claims, losses, damages and expenses asserted or arising after completion of the Work as well as during the Work's progress. 4.19.2 In any and all claims against any of the Indemnified Parties by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone acting on behalf of any of them, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4.19 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor or other party under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.19.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 4.19 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect/Engineer, its agents or employees, arising out of, (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect/Engineer, its agents or employees, provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 4.19.4 The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against any assertion of claims for mechanics' liens or other encumbrances by Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors or material suppliers and against any assertion of security interests by suppliers of goods or materials. 4.20 ACCESS TO THE WORK 4.20.1 The Contractor shall allow the Architect/Engineer, the Owner and the Owner's representatives, agents and consultants free access to the site and to the Work wherever located at all times. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 4.21 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS 4.21.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, identifying and collating the following materials from Subcontractors, and shall deliver one copy to the Owner at the time of Final Completion: .1 Complete equipment diagrams, operating instructions, maintenance manuals, parts lists, wiring diagrams, pneumatic and /or electrical control diagrams, test and balance reports, inspection reports, guarantees and warranties, as applicable, for each piece of fixed equipment fumished under the Contract, together with specific information regarding manufacturer's name and address, nearest distributor, service representative's name, address, office and home phone number, make and model numbers, operating designs and characteristics, and the like. These materials shall be supplied in a ring binder, hard -cover book, properly indexed for ready reference. .2 Name and address of all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors (including equipment and material suppliers), together with their respective areas of work, materials or equipment furnished. .3 Complete list of all materials and equipment utilized, together with the respective location in the Work. .4 Complete operating instructions for each equipment system. .5 Complete parts lists, together with recommended spare parts for each type and model of equipment installed. 4.22 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 4.22.1 At the time of Final Completion, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of as -built drawings to the Owner. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 4.23 FIELD OFFICE 4.23.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary field office at the site that is suitably equipped. The field office is to be located on the site at a location acceptable to the Owner and removed when the Work is completed. If the Owner has appointed an OSR, sufficient space, including desk, chair and table, is to be provided for the OSR. 4.24 MAINTENANCE AND ACCESS TO RECORDS 4.24.1 The Owner shall have access at all reasonable times to the Contractor's records and other documents of any kind which relate to the Contract and the Project including, without limitation, all subcontracts, purchase orders, receipts, accounting records, cancelled checks, vouchers and correspondence. All such records and other documents shall be preserved by the Contractor, and the Owner shall have access to them, for not less than three (3) years after final payment to the Contractor with respect to the Project or such longer period required by law. The Owner may conduct periodic audits of the Contractor's records and other documents, and the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in conducting such audits. 4.25 STORM WATER DISCHARGE COMPLIANCE. 4.25.1 The Contractor hereby designates the Contractor's Superintendent as its "Storm Water Coordinator" and agrees that the Superintendent, as Storm Water Coordinator, shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan applicable to the site and for ensuring compliance with any and all laws, rules, regulations and orders relating to storm water discharge including, but not limited to, the Clean Water Act's National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (33 U.S.C. Section 1251 et seq.). For purposes of the Contract Documents, "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" shall mean any plan regarding storm water discharge with respect to the Project required by any permit, rule, regulation or order of a govemmental entity. Upon its completion, the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents as a Specification. ARTICLE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or its authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or its subcontractors. 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Sub - subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative thereof. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.2.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner copies of all bids and other proposals from potential Subcontractors, and shall advise the Owner which Subcontractors it proposes to use. In addition, the Contractor will provide such, information as the Owner may require from time to time regarding each potential Subcontractor, including whether or not the potential Subcontractor is minority-owned or women- owned. The Contractor shall also submit a bid for each portion of the Work which the Contractor proposes to perform with its own forces. The Owner may determine which portions of the Work will be performed by Subcontractors. The Owner may require the Contractor to obtain multiple bids for any portions of the Work. The Owner may designate entities from whom the Contractor shall solicit bids, and the Owner may require that additional bids be obtained if it determines the initial bids to be unsatisfactory. The Owner will determine with the advice of the Contractor which bids will be accepted. The Contractor shall not contract with anyone who is not acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. If a Subcontractor is selected to do a portion of the Work who is different from the person or entity proposed by the Contractor, and if the bid of such person or entity was the basis upon which the Contract Sum was determined, then the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in Document #: 130736 Version:v4 cost occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued, provided that the person or entity proposed by the Contractor was qualified to do the proposed portion of the Work. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected without the prior approval of the Owner. The Owner may require the .Contractor to change any Subcontractor previously approved, in which case the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these documents, assumes toward the Owner. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with its Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Subparagraph 5.3.1 and shall identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor similarly to make copies of such documents available to its Sub - subcontractors. 5.3.2 The Contractor shall not award a subcontract on the basis of the cost of the work plus a fee without the Owner's prior consent. In addition, the Contractor shall not award a subcontract that provides that the allowance for overhead and profit payable to the Subcontractor with respect to changes in the Work is greater than the following: 1) with respect to those portions of such Work performed by such Subcontractor, the allowance shall not exceed 15% of the cost of such portions of the Work, 2) with respect to those portions of such Work performed by any lower tier Sub - subcontractor, the allowance shall not exceed 5% of the amount paid to such lower tier Sub - subcontractor as a result of such change. 5.3.3 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that such assignment is effective only after the termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause and provided that such assignment is effective only as to those subcontracts which the Owner specifically accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing. The Contractor agrees to execute such additional documents as the Owner may request to confirm such assignments. The Contractor shall insure that each subcontract agreement recognizes the rights of the Owner pursuant to the foregoing contingent assignment. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of each subcontract agreement upon request. 5.3.4 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relations between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractors. ARTICLE 6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner shall have the right to perform work related to the Project with its own forces and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site. 6.1.2 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the work of its own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in the Contract Documents. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate its Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to Document #: 130736 Version:v4 the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects which were not reasonably discoverable but which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage. 6.2.5 Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall promptly attempt to settle with such separate contractor or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been .caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the parties responsible therefor as the Owner shall determine to be just. ARTICLE 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 The Contract shall be govemed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to it under the Contract without the previous written consent of the Owner. 7.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 7.3.1 Any written notice required to be given by either party shall be given in the manner set forth in the Agreement. The Contractor shall give a copy of all notices to the Owner to the OSR or, if no OSR has been appointed, to the project manager identified by the Owner. 7.4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.4.1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of its employees, agents or others for whose acts it is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury or damage. 7.5 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 7.5.1 The Owner may require that the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a performance bond or a payment bond if and as required in the bidding documents or in the Contract Documents. If such bonds are required, they shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding company licensed to transact such business in the state in which the Project is located and acceptable to the Owner. The bond shall have affixed to it a certified and current copy of a power of attorney for the attorney in fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety. If at any time a surety on any such bond is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the Work is to be performed or is removed from the list of surety companies accepted on Federal bonds, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after notice from the Owner to do so substitute an Document #: 130736 Version:v4 acceptable bond (or bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other surety or sureties as may be satisfactory to the Owner. No further payments from the Owner shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety or sureties shall have fumished an acceptable bond to the Owner. 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder are cumulative and are in addition to, and not a limitation on, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 7.6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect/Engineer or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically provided in the Contract Documents or agreed in writing. 7.6.3 Subparagraphs 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 shall not permit the Contractor to assert a claim which has not been timely made or has otherwise been waived under the terms of the Contract Documents. 7.6.4 The Owner shall be entitled to recover from the Contractor all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees, incurred to enforce any provision of this Contract. In connection with the Contractor's obligation to provide a legal defense to the Owner or other Indemnified Parties pursuant to any provision of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to select counsel to provide such defense. 7.7 TESTS 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents or the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness so that the Owner or Architect/Engineer may observe such inspection, testing or approval. Where initial test or inspection reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs of additional tests and inspections necessary to determine compliance, including compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure. 7.7.2 If the Owner or the Architect/Engineer determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Subparagraph 7.7.1 does not include, the Owner will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness so that the Owner or the Architect/Engineer may observe such inspection, testing or approval. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise, the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.7.3 Reports of tests, inspections and approvals performed by an independent testing agency engaged by the Owner may be submitted to the Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor directly from the testing agency. All other required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by it to the Owner. 7.7.4 The Contractor shall make all arrangements, fumish all samples and materials to be tested, and perform all related work necessary for the inspections, tests and approvals of the Work required under Subparagraph 7.7.1 or Subparagraph 7.7.2. 7.8 CONTINUATION OF WORK 7.8.1 The Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Construction Schedule during all disputes and disagreements with the Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements. 7.9 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO TURNOVER 7.9.1 The Owner shall have the right to install its fumishings and equipment within the Work prior to Tumover. Such installation shall not constitute occupancy or use by the Owner. The Contractor shall have the responsibility to protect such fumishings and equipment. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 7.9.2 The Owner shall have the right to use or occupy the Work, or a portion thereof, prior to Tumover under the following conditions: .1 The Owner shall give the Contractor at least ten days prior written notice of its intention to use or occupy the Work, or a portion thereof. Prior to use or occupancy, the Owner, accompanied by the Contractor, will conduct an inspection of the area to be used or occupied; based on this inspection, the Owner will prepare a list of work to be completed or corrected. Prior to use or occupancy, the Owner and the Contractor shall agree in writing on their individual responsibilities for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance for the area to be used or occupied. .2 After occupancy, the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable access to the occupied area to complete and correct the Work. .3 The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of the Work resulting from the Owner's use or occupancy. .4 Use or occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of any claims the Owner or Contractor may have against each other. ARTICLE 8. TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 The time allotted for the completion of the Work, or designated portions thereof, as provided in the Construction Schedule is the Contract Time. The Construction Schedule is set forth in the Agreement and may be adjusted only by Change Order in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.1.2 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall employ sufficient forces and take all other steps necessary to achieve each of the dates set forth in the Construction Schedule. In the event any delays are experienced in the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall accelerate its performance, employ overtime, cause the Subcontractors to employ overtime, and take such other steps as are necessary to meet the Construction Schedule. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 An "Excusable Delay" is a delay in the progress of the Work caused by the act or neglect of the Owner or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably foreseeable, damage to the Work by fire or other casualty, or other similar causes beyond the Contractor's control. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the Contractor and are not Excusable Delays. An Excusable Delay does not include delays (1) due to events or causes described in Subparagraph 4.2.6, (2) due wholly or in part to the fault, act, omission, neglect, imprudent management or default of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone acting on behalf of any of them,. or (3) due to events or causes reasonably foreseeable to the Contractor at the time the Contractor submitted its bid for the Work, such as weather patterns reasonably to be anticipated during the period of construction of the Work. 8.3.2 Any claim of an Excusable Delay shall be made by written notice to the Owner not more than ten days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress and cost of the Work. 8.3.3 In the event of an Excusable Delay, the Contract Time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner may determine. Delays affecting events not on the critical path will not be cause for a time extension. In lieu of granting an extension of time, the Owner may issue a Change Order or a Document #: 130736 Version:v4 Directive directing the Contractor to accelerate its performance to meet the Construction Schedule, in which case the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents for a change in the Work to reflect the actual increase, if any, in the cost of performance as a result of such acceleration, except that there shall be no additional fee or allowance for overhead and profit payable to the Contractor for such change. The Owner shall have the right to determine in its discretion whether to handle an Excusable Delay by extending the Contract Time or by directing the Contractor to accelerate its performance, or by a combination of both. 8.3.4 If an event which would constitute an Excusable Delay causes an unanticipated increase in the cost of performance beyond the additional cost due to the acceleration of the Contractor's performance, the Contractor may make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum in accordance with Subparagraph 12.2.1. 8.4 DAMAGES FOR DELAY 8.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for damages and expenses incurred by the Owner and any separate contractors for delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time or resulting from the progress of the Work failing to conform to the Construction Schedule. ARTICLE 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, together with authorized adjustments thereto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The Contract Sum will be paid in periodic progress payments following the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Schedule of Values for the Work including quantities, when required, and submit two copies to the Owner for approval at the time required by the Owner. . The Schedule of Values shall be submitted on a form designated or approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit such data as required to substantiate the correctness of the Schedule. The Contractor's fee, if applicable, shall be listed separately. Figures should be rounded to the nearest ten dollars. The total of all values on the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Sum. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 The Contractor shall submit itemized Applications for Payment to the Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Application for Payment shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner may require, and shall reflect the retainage provided in the Agreement. The Application for Payment shall not include any amount relating to a change in the Work until a Change Order has been issued by the Owner with respect to such change. Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payments of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Application for Payment shall constitute a representation by the Contractor to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated, that the quality of the Work covered by the Application is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount requested. 9.3.4 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in, the construction or upon the receipt of Document #: 130736 Version:v4 payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances (hereinafter referred to in this Article as "liens ") and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor or by any other person performing Work at the site or fumishing materials and equipment for the Work subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or imposed by the Contractor or by such other person: 9.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.4.1 After receipt of an Application for Payment, the Owner will pay those amounts which are properly owed within the time provided in the Contract Documents, provided that the Application meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. There shall be deducted from each progress payment the retainage provided in the Agreement. The retainage will be paid at the time of final payment and shall not be eamed by the Contractor nor owed by the Owner until the Final Completion of the Work. 9.4.2 Promptly upon receipt of payment from the Owner, the Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 9.4.3 The Owner shall have no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any Subcontractor. 9.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 9.5.1 The Owner may decline to approve or pay the Contractors Application for Payment in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner if, in the Owner's reasonable opinion, the Work has not progressed to the point indicated on the Application for Payment or the quality of the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may also decline to approve or pay any Application for Payment or nullify the whole or any part of any Application for Payment previously approved to such extent as may be necessary, in the Owner's reasonable opinion, to protect the Owner from loss because: .1 the Work, or any portion of the Work, is defective; .2 third party claims have been filed or there is reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; .3 the Contractor has failed to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 the Contract Sum has been reduced by Change Order, or there is reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 the Owner or a separate contractor has incurred damage for which the Contractor is responsible; .6 there is reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or .7 the Contractor has persistently failed to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contracts Document or has failed to adhere to the Construction Schedule. 9.5.2 In the event any liens are filed by any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material supplier, the Owner may withhold from amounts otherwise due the Contractor an amount equal to 150% of the amount of such liens until such liens are resolved. The foregoing is in addition to the Owner's rights under Subparagraph 9.5.1 and any other provisions of the Contract Documents. 9.5.3 When the above reasons for withholding payment are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 9.6 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.6.1 If the Owner does not pay the Contractor within fifteen days after the date established in the Contract Documents any amount then due, then the Contractor may, upon fifteen additional days' written notice to the Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount due has been received. If the Owner disputes that such amount is then due, the Contractor shall carry on the Work as provided in Subparagraph 7.8.1, provided the Owner has paid the amounts not in dispute. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 9.7 FINAL COMPLETION AND TURNOVER 9.7.1 Final Completion is achieved when the Contractor has fully performed the Contract and completed the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall achieve Final Completion prior to the date established for Tumover in the Construction Schedule. 9.7.2 Tumover is the time at which the Contractor delivers the completed Work to the Owner. Upon Tumover, the Owner assumes responsibility for security, maintenance, heat and utilities. The Owner shall acknowledge its acceptance of Tumover in writing. Turnover shall occur on the date set forth in the Construction Schedule, provided that the Owner shall not be required to accept Turnover on that date if the Contractor has not achieved Final Completion. The Owner's decision to delay the acceptance of Tumover does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to achieve the Construction Schedule, and does not constitute a waiver of any claim by the Owner relating to the failure to achieve the Construction Schedule. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Tumover, provided Final Completion has been achieved. 9.7.3 When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially complete, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing and shall submit to the Owner a comprehensive list of items to be corrected or completed. The Contractor shall correct or complete all items on the list prior to the date established for Tumover in the Construction Schedule. The failure to include an item on such list does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may conduct such inspections of the Work as the Owner deems appropriate. If the Owner determines that any items (whether or not on the Contractor's list) are not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall complete or correct such items prior to the date established for Turnover in the Construction Schedule. Neither the failure of the Owner to conduct inspections nor the failure of the Owner to notify the Contractor of items not in accordance with the Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8 FINAL PAYMENT 9.8.1 After the Owner has accepted Tumover and after the Contractor has achieved Final Completion and delivered all manuals and instructions, insurance certificates, bonds and other documents required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may submit its Final Application for Payment, following the procedure set forth in the Agreement. 9.8.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall be eamed by the Contractor or owed by the Owner until the Contractor submits to the Owner: (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or its property may in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied; (2) other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated or required by the Owner; (3) consent of surety, if any, to final payment; and (4) the manuals and instructions, certificates of insurance and all other documents required to be submitted by the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 If any Subcontractor refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may fumish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.8.4 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the Final Application for Payment. 9.9 NO WAIVER BY OWNER 9.9.1 The Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither the approval of any Application for Payment, the making of any payment, the giving of any approval, the use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof, the acceptance of Tumover, the making of final payment, nor any other action on the part of the Owner shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner or an acceptance of any Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 1 1 ARTICLE 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work including compliance with the requirements of OSHA. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and by performance of the Contract, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other wamings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to in Subparagraphs 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone acting on behalf of any of them. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to its obligations under Paragraph 4.19 and any other provisions of the Contract Documents. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's Superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.2.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages, death or injury of any kind to any persons, whether employees or otherwise, and for any damage to property, resulting from the failure to maintain adequate safety precautions and programs or from the failure to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property, and the Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees, from and against any claims, fines, penalties, losses, damages and expenses (including court costs and attorneys' fees) suffered or incurred as a result of such failure. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at its discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 12 for changes in the Work and in Article 8 for Excusable Delays. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 10.4 HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAMS 10.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in accordance with the requirements of OSHA and other applicable Taws and regulations. ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain (in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located and rated no less than A- in the current edition of Best's Insurance Reports) such insurance as will protect the Contractor and the Owner to the extent required herein from claims, which, may arise out of, result from or may be in any manner connected with the execution of the Work or the operations under the Contract by any person or entity, regardless of whether such claims are ones for which the Owner may be or may be claimed to be liable, including without limitation, the following: .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other employee benefit acts; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage that are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor; or (2) by any other person for any other reason; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage resulting from or arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 contractual liability claims involving the Contractor's obligations under any indemnification provision in the Contract. 11.1.2 The Contractor's liability insurance as required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits of liability and include the following minimum coverages: .1 Workers' Compensation Insurance as required by any applicable law or regulation. .2 Employer's Liability Insurance in the amounts of: $ 1,000,000 each accident; $ 1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit; and $ 1,000,000 Disease -Each Employee. .3 Commercial General Liability Insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of the Contractor including, without limitation, coverages for Premises and Operations, Elevators and Escalators (if applicable to the Project), Products and Completed Operations (which shall be maintained for three years after Final Completion), Contractual Liability (including the indemnity obligations assumed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents), Independent Document #: 130736 Version:v4 Contractors, Broad Form Property Damage (including completed operations), Explosion, Collapse and Underground, and Personal Injury and Advertising Liability: $ 2,000,000 each occurrence $ 5,000,000 general aggregate $ 5,000,000 Products /Completed Operations aggregate $ 2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury combined single limit per occurrence .4 Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance (including owned, non -owned and hired vehicle coverage) in the amount of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury and Property Damage each occurrence. .5 Aircraft Public Liability Insurance if aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor or by anyone else on their behalf, insuring against personal injury, bodily injury, property damage and passenger liability with limits of $5,000,000 combined single limit for any occurrence, each aircraft. 11.1.3 Commercial General Liability, Employer's Liability and Automobile Liability Insurance may each be arranged under a single policy for the full limits required, or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy. 11.1.4 The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on an occurrence basis. The Contractor's Commercial General Liability insurance shall include an endorsement in a form acceptable to the Owner whereby the Owner and its subsidiaries are named as additional insureds for liability arising out of or related to the Work and all operations performed for the Owner and /or any of its subsidiaries by or on behalf of the Contractor, including completed operations coverage. At the direction of the Owner, other Indemnified Parties shall also be included as additional insureds. The Contractor's insurance shall also include an endorsement providing that there shall be severability of interests with respect to the additional insureds and that all of the coverage afforded to the Owner through the Contractor's insurance shall be primary and not contributory to any coverage available to the Owner under any other insurance held by the Owner. The policies shall contain a provision that coverage will not be canceled, allowed to expire, reduced or, materially altered until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Certificates of insurance showing required coverages and all material endorsements in force shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the commencement of the Work. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall submit copies of the insurance policies to the Owner. 11.1.5 It is the obligation of the Contractor to provide insurance that complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's agreement to provide insurance is a material part of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. The parties intend that the Contractor shall provide the required insurance and that such insurance shall protect the interests of the Contractor and the Owner notwithstanding any assertion or determination that any indemnity provision of the Contract Documents is void or unenforceable. The obligations of the Contractor under the Contract Documents with respect to insurance shall not be waived by the Owner's failure to request evidence of insurance or to enforce any of the other provisions of the Contract Documents respecting insurance, or by the Owner's failure to respond to or object to any submission by the Contractor respecting insurance. The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for all damages incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor's failure to carry the required insurance. The Owner does not represent that the above limits and coverages are adequate to protect the Contractor's interests and assumes no.responsibility therefor. 11.2 SUBCONTRACTORS' LIABILITY INSURANCE. 11.2.1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the appropriate types, level and extent, of insurance coverage provided by its Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors; provided, however, all Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors must carry workers' compensation insurance as required by any applicable law or regulation and Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner against any Subcontractor's or sub - Subcontractor's failure to do so. 11.3 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE. 11.3.1 The Owner may, at its option, obtain liability insurance to protect the Owner against claims that may arise from operations under the Contract. Such insurance shall be solely for the benefit of the Owner and Document #: 130736 Version:v4 shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the Contractor's obligations to the Owner under the Contract Documents. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum for the Work at the site on a replacement cost basis. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or unless otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities that are beneficiaries of such insurance, until Tumover. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work. .1 Such property insurance shall be on an "all- risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, false -work, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation. for Architect/Engineer's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. .2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. .3 In the event of a loss which is covered by such property insurance, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles, except the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles if the loss is caused by the fault of the Contractor or those for whom the Contractor is responsible, including Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors, up to $25,000 per loss. .4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site and also portions of the Work in transit. .5 This property insurance to be obtained and maintained by the< Owner will NOT cover and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance covering, losses to any tools owned by the workers and any vehicles, tools, equipment, scaffolding, stagings, towers or forms owned, rented or used by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor. The Contractor's property insurance shall cover 100% of the replacement value of the insured items, shall be provided by a company licensed in the jurisdiction(s) in which the insured items are located, and shall be in a form satisfactory to the Owner. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certificate of insurance evidencing that the foregoing insurance is in full force and effect. The Contractor hereby waives all rights and all causes of action against the Owner for any losses to the extent that such losses are actually covered by the property insurance maintained and also for any losses to the extent they should have been covered by the property insurance required to be maintained by the Contractor pursuant to this clause 11.4.1.5. The Contractor shall obtain for the benefit of the Owner a waiver of subrogation from the Contractor's. insurer. 11.4.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until Turnover; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, the Subcontractors and sub - Subcontractors in the Work. 11.4.3 Upon request, the Owner shall provide the Contractor with a certificate evidencing the insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. 11.4.4 Waivers of Subrogation: The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Document #: 130736 Version:v4 Architect/Engineer, the Architect /Engineer's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.34or other property insurance obtained by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or sub - Subcontractor covering the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect/Engineer, the Architect /Engineer's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. The Owner's waiver under this Subparagraph does not apply to any loss to the Owner's property other than the Work, or to any loss that occurs after Tumover. 11.4.5 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner on behalf of the insureds and made payable to the Owner for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub - Subcontractors in a similar manner. 11.4.6 The Owner shall have sole power to adjust and settle any loss with its insurers. ARTICLE 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS AND DIRECTIVES 12.1.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions by way of Directives and Change Orders. 12.1.2 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor modifying the Contract by authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Orders. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates agreement therewith including the adjustment in the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 12.1.3 A Directive is a Modification of the Contract and constitutes a written order to the Contractor to proceed with the Work described in the Directive prior to final approval of a Change Order relating thereto. A Directive has the same effect as a Change Order except that it does not change the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Upon receipt of a Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the changes in the Work involved. A Change Order will be issued by the Owner with respect to each Directive indicating the adjustments, if any, to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time resulting from work performed pursuant to the Directive. 12.1.4 The increase or decrease in the Contract Sum resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined as provided in the Agreement. 12.1.5 In the event of an adjustment of the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. If the parties have agreed upon a guaranteed maximum price with respect to a change in the Work, the amount of the increase in the Contract Sum with respect to such change shall not exceed the agreed guaranteed maximum price. 12.1.6 Any change in the Work that affects the Contract Time shall require the prompt notification by the Contractor as to the time impact of such change. In computing the cost of such changes for submission to the Owner, the Contractor shall altemately compute costs on the basis of completion of the Work within the existing Contract Time and on the basis of completion on an extended Contract Time. 12.1.7 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed Document #:•130736 Version:v4 unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12.2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS 12.2.1 If the Contractor is permitted by the Contract Documents to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall give the Owner written notice thereof within ten (10) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim, or the claim shall be waived. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed as provided in Paragraph 10.3. There will be no change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim until authorized by a Change Order. 12.2.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (2) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.3, or (3) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.6, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.1. 12.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.3.1 The Owner shall have the right to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be affected by written field orders and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out field orders promptly. 12.4 INACCURACIES IN THE SOILS REPORT 12.4.1 If the Owner has provided a soils report, and the information contained therein is materially inaccurate, the Contractor shall give the Owner written notice of such inaccuracy as soon as the Contractor becomes aware of such inaccuracy. The Owner shall determine how to proceed and any necessary changes shall be handled as provided in this Article 12 for changes in the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from its failure promptly to report any such inaccuracies that it may discover or reasonably should have discovered. ARTICLE 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Owner, be uncovered for the Owner's observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 13.1.2 If any portion of the Work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it is found that this condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Final Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work. 13.2.2 As used in this Subparagraph' 13.2.2, the term "Correction Period" means one year after Tumover, or if the Owner accepts Turnover prior to Final Completion, one year after Final Completion. If, within the Correction Period or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a Document #: 130736 Version:v4 written notice from the Owner to do so. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected, unless removal is waived by the Owner. 13.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non - conforming Work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Subparagraph 3.4.1. 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed promptly and diligently with the correction of defective or non - conforming Work, the Owner may remove it and may store any salvageable materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at a private sale. The Owner shall account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all costs that should have been borne by the Contractor. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have bome, the difference shall be deducted from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by correction or removal of defective or non-conforming Work. 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including. Paragraph 4.6 hereof. The establishment of the time period set forth in Subparagraph 13.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which its obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to its obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON - CONFORMING WORK 13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non - conforming Work, it may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 If, through no act or fault of the Contractor or its agents or employees, or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work directly or indirectly under a contract with the Contractor, the Work is stopped 1) for a period of thirty days by the Contractor in accordance with Subparagraph 9.6.1 because the Owner has not made payment as required by the Contract Documents, or 2) for a period of sixty days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of govemment, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract. In that case the Contractor may recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 14.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and its surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor with respect to the Project in the event of any of the following: (1) the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; (2) the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; (3) the Contractor persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; (4) the Contractor fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor; (5) the Contractor persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having Document #:'130736 Version:v4 1 jurisdiction; or (6) the Contractor otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents. In such case, the Owner may: (1) take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; (2) in the Owner's discretion, accept assignment of some or all of the subcontracts as provided in Subparagraph 5.3.3; and (3) finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, the payments between the parties shall be determined in accordance with the Agreement and the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.2 Where the Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies due the Contractor by the Owner will not release the Contractor from liability. 14.2.3 If the Owner terminates this Contract pursuant to this Paragraph 14.2, and such termination is determined to be improper or without proper grounds, such termination shall be deemed to be a termination for convenience and the provisions of Paragraph 14.3 shall apply. 14.3 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 Upon written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, the Contractor shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. 14.4 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER 14.4.1 Upon written notice to the Contractor, the Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. In that case, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents for a change in the Work to reflect the actual increase, if any, in the cost of performance caused by such suspension, delay or interruption, subject to the following: (1) there shall be no increase in the Contract Sum as a result of costs incurred by the Contractor which could have been avoided using reasonable diligence, (2) there shall be no additional fee or allowance for profit payable to the Contractor with respect to such change, and there shall be no additional allowance for overhead unless the Contractor can substantiate increased overhead costs. Document #: 130736 Version:v4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 1100 (01010) SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project identification and Contract summary. 2. Work awarded separately. 3. Owner - furnished material and equipment. 4. Project scheduling and coordination. 5. Contractor use of premises and existing facilities. 6. Owner occupancy. 1.2 PROJECT A. Project consists of construction of: T-#### Target Store [SuperTarget] # Street Address # City, State 1.3 OWNER A. Owner of Project is: TARGET 1000 Nicollet Mall Minneapolis; Minnesota 55403 1.4 ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS A. Architects and Engineers for Project are: PROPERTY DEVELOPMENT 50 South 10`s Street Suite 400 — TP3 ' Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 -2054 John Doe, Architectural Contact (612) 761-#### John Doe, Project Manual (612) 761 -#### John Doe, Structural Contact (612) 761 -#### John Doe, Mechanical Contact. (612) 761 -#### John Doe, Electrical Contact. (612) 761-#### John Doe, Alarm Contact. (612)761 -#### SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100 (01010) - 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.5 CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Owner will award a Contract for Complete Construction to include General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction Work. 1.6 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices are defined as prices per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in Bidding Documents for use in computing cost of work added to, or deducted from, the Contract Documents. B. A "Schedule of Unit Prices ", if applicable, is included in the Bid Form. Each unit price is defined by abbreviated language, recognizing that Drawings and Specifications sections document the requirements. 1.7 WORK AWARDED SEPARATELY A. Contract documents for work awarded separately may be examined at the office of Target Stores. B. Work which will be executed prior to, or in conjunction with, work under these documents may be included for reference in Section 00 3110, Owner Supplied Information. 1.8 FUTURE CONTRACTS A. Owner reserves the right to award future separate contracts for Project. 1.9 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to "Owner Furnished Material and Equipment Schedule" on Drawings for list of items and division of Owner's and Contractor's responsibilities. Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, and individual Specification Sections for Owner furnished items affecting each unit of Work. B. Certain Owner furnished items require installation as Work of this Contract. C. Certain other items furnished and installed by Owner are not in Contract, but have requirements in Specification Sections and Drawings for related work, including hook up, rough -in services, blocking, preparatory" work to receive items, or anchorage devices. D. Drawings may show items furnished and installed by Owner requiring no work under this Contract except for cooperation with Owner's workers or separate contractors. 1.10 OWNER'S PROJECT MILESTONE DATES A. Project Milestone Dates will be determined and announced by the Target Project Manager prior to bid due date. 1.11 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Refer to General Conditions, Article 4, for securing and payment of permits and fees. 1.12 PROJECT MEETINGS A. OSR will schedule periodic coordination meetings to discuss progress, coordination between Contractor and Owner's separate contractors, and problems that may have arisen. Each contractor performing Work at Site shall attend each meeting. Subcontractors and material suppliers shall attend upon request of OSR. Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other interested parties may attend. 1.13 INSPECTION OF WORK NOT IN CONTRACT A. Inspect work not in contract which is to receive or is adjacent to work of Contract before commencing Work. Do not proceed until conditions which would result in an inferior installation are satisfactorily corrected. Commencing Work shall be construed as acceptance of work not in Contract as satisfactory to receive Work. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100 (01010)-2 ' 0 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.14 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Coordinate use of premises under direction of OSR. Confine operations and storage of material to areas assigned by OSR. B. Conduct operations to permit public access to existing attached and/or adjacent businesses occupied or under construction during the term of this contract. C. Cooperate with OSR in scheduling, executing Work and Site usage. Notify OSR as far as possible in advance of commencing Work which may interfere with use of attached and/or adjacent buildings. D. Maintain public walks, driveways, and entrances in safe condition, free of equipment, material, and debris. 1.15 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Refer to Document General Conditions, Article 7, for requirements for Owner use or occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of Project. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Remove, cut, fit, and/or patch old work as required to join new Work to existing attached and/or adjacent construction. B. Remove and replace existing construction to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of Work and is unsuitable for use intended. C. Patch existing defective or incomplete surfaces caused or exposed by work to match adjacent materials. Perform patching using skilled mechanics experienced in type of Work involved. Conform to standards of Contract Documents where applicable; where not specified, conform to highest standards of the trade. D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, underpinning and support during demolition, cutting, remodeling and new construction as necessary for execution of the Work and protection of persons and property. Provide protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing construction to remain. E. Salvage and material not specifically designated otherwise shall become property of Contractor, and shall be removed promptly from Site. Remove trash, debris and other waste material promptly from Site. 1.17 WORK ON OTHER PROPERTY A. Correct damage to existing property on or adjacent to Site, including, but not limited to, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures, and utilities cut or damaged by construction and not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement during construction. B. Construct Work occurring on public property according to governing laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100 (01010) - 3 4 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100 (01010) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 3300 (01300) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures and review action. 2. Construction progress schedules. 3. " Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. 4. Submittals to the Architect. 5. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, test reports, mix designs, certificates, calculations, and miscellaneous items. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Documents 00 7200 - General Conditions; for progress schedule and submittals. B. Section 01 3300 - Product Requirements; for product substitution submittals and Owner- supplied equipment and material submittals. C. Section 01 4300 - Quality Assurance; for testing and inspection report submittals. D. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures; for contract closeout submittals. E. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning Procedures. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Prepare a preliminary Construction Progress Schedule for Work and submit two copies for review to OSR within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice To Proceed, whichever is earliest. Relate schedule to Work of entire Project. C. Develop schedule using Contractor's proposed plan of action, sequence of construction, and activity duration times. Comply with Owner's Project Milestone Dates. D. Upon approval by Owner and Contractor, preliminary schedule will be the final Construction Progress Schedule. E. Contractor to issue two copies to OSR, and perform the following: 1. Maintain the Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Provide pertinent information related to status of Work of Subcontractors for construction progress meetings. 3. Submit schedule updating reports to OSR in two copies upon request. 1.4 PROCUREMENT AND SHOP DRAWING SCHEDULE A. Prepare a Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule and submit two copies to OSR and one to Architect within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever is earliest. B. Promptly revise Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule to meet Project completion date and to conform to the current status of the Work. Furnish two revised schedules to OSR and one to Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS TO THE ARCHITECT A. Make submittals for the following specification sections directly to ARCHITECT or ENGINEER with a copy of transmittal only to the OSR: 1. Divisions 03, 04, 05 and 06: a. Submittals as defined in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. 2. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: a. Product data. b. Proposed UL system drawings. 3. Section 13 2612 - Prefabricated Electrical Distribution Center (Owner Furnished). 4. Section 13 2616 - Prefabricated Utility Center (Owner Furnished). SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES 01 3300 (01300) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 5. Section 26 2816 - Disconnect Switches. 6. Section 26 2200 - Dry Type Transformers. 7. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards. B. Make other submittals directly to OSR or Owner's Project Architect as indicated herein. 1.6 CODE ACCEPTANCE SUBMITTALS A. California 2008 Acceptance Requirements For Code Compliance: General Contractor to submit completed and signed forms indicated below to the .authorities having.turi.cdiction as a condition of receipt of building's Certificate of Occupancy. B. General Contractor to complete and sign Mech -Inst !Mechanical Installation Certificate. C. All acceptance forms listed below shall be completed and signed by their-respective responsible contractors and delivered to the General Contractor. 1. Mech -2 -A Ventilation Systems — Variable Air and Constant Volume Systems. 2. Mech -3 -A Constant Volrwne, Single -Zone Unitary A/C and Heat Pumps. 3. Mech -4 -A Air Distribution Systems. 4. Mech -5 -A Air Economizer Controls. 5. Mech -6 -A Demand Control Ventilation (DVC). 6. '/tech -7 -A Supply Fan Variable Flow Controls (VPQ, 7. A'Iech -11 -A Automatic Demand Shed Control Acceptance. 8. Mech -12 -A Fault Detection & Diagnostics for DX Units. 9. Mech -13 -A Automatic Fault Detection & Diagnostics for Air Handling & Zone Terminal Units. 10. LTG -2A Lighting Controls and Automatic Davlighting. 11. OLTG -2A Outdoor Motion Sensor and Lighting Shuto ff Controls. D. Forms are available online at http : //www.energy.ca.govltitle24/ 2008. standard s /nonresidential manual.html #forms. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit Shop Drawings requested under Article above to the Architect, with copy of transmittal to the OSR. Shop Drawings not requested by the Architect under Article above shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor. B. For Work by separate contractors not assigned to Contractor, OSR will review and submit Shop Drawings to Contractor. Refer to Section 01 6000 for additional requirements related to Owner- supplied material and equipment. C. Shop Drawings submitted by Contractor not bearing Contractor's review action will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor for review and resubmission. D. Clearly identify Shop Drawings as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and item submitted. SUBMIT IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. E. Number and Type of Copies: Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one (1) electronic copy, (pdf or tiff format), and two (2) printed copies of each Drawing, unless otherwise specified. Each Drawing shall have a clear space of not less than 20 square inches on the right hand side for approval stamp. F. Make submissions of Shop Drawings of related items or individual items of an assembly in a package to permit coordinated review. Shop Drawings will be reviewed in the sequence submitted unless written request is submitted to the contrary, or submittals are components of an assembly not submitted as a package. Wiring diagrams shall be complete composite drawings specially prepared for Project, showing color coding, terminal markings and locations. Manufacturer's typical wiring diagrams will not be accepted, unless specified otherwise. G. After Architect has reviewed Shop Drawings he will retain at least one Shop Drawing print for his record and will return transparency to Contractor. Architect will send a copy of transmittal to OSR. For Shop Drawings returned requiring a resubmittal, Contractor shall make revisions and submit one new transparency and two prints marked "Resubmittal" to Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 (01300) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit two copies of Product Data to Architect as required. B. Submittals to Architect: Architect will review, retain one copy for his record, and return remaining copy to Contractor. Submit one additional copy of Product Data for structural, mechanical, and electrical work for engineering department's records. C. Clearly mark each copy of Product Data as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and item being submitted. SUBMIT IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA REVIEW A. Submittals will be reviewed and returned by the Architect/Engineer within 10 working days of receipt by the reviewer. Submittals will be reviewed with following actions: 1. APPROVED: Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication. 2. APPROVED AS NOTED: Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication subject to noted corrections, if corrections are accepted without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Indicates submittal must be revised, resubmitted, and approved before fabrication is authorized. 4. REJECTED: Indicates unspecified material, insufficient information, unapproved system or similar inadequacies. Additional information must be submitted and approved before fabrication is authorized. B. Shop drawings are reviewed only for conformance with design concept of Project and general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for quantities, dimensions, coordinating all work and trades, and for fabrication and construction techniques. C. Direct specific attention in writing to deviations from Contract Documents and to revisions of resubmitted Shop Drawings and Product Data other than those revisions requested by Architect or OSR on previous submittals. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Submit, unless otherwise specified, two samples of each item required to Owner's Project Architect with a transmittal to OSR. Do not use samples in Work. One approved sample will be retained by Owner's Project Architect, and other approved sample will be forwarded to OSR to be retained at Site. Where Contractor requires approved samples to be returned, submit additional samples as required. C. Clearly identify samples as to product, type, color range, texture, finish, and other pertinent data. Submit with samples a Letter of Transmittal indicating Contractor's approval and other supporting information as may be necessary, with a copy to OSR. D. Provide mock -ups and field samples of finishes at Project as required by individual Specification Sections. Install sample complete and finished. Acceptable samples in place may be retained in completed Work if use is approved by OSR. 1.11 CERTIFICATES A. Submit two copies of Certificates of Compliance required by the Contract Documents to Architect or OSR, unless specified otherwise. 1.12 CALCULATIONS A. Submit design calculations as required by Contract Documents. Calculations are. for Owner and Architect's records and not for review. Submit one copy to Architect and one copy to OSR. 1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01 7700, Closeout Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES 01 3300 (01300) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 (01300) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 3516 (01120) ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedural requirements. 2. Rehabilitation and renovation of existing spaces and materials. 3. Installation of products removed in Section 02 4110. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 02 4110 — Selective Demolition: removal and storage of products to be reinstalled in this Section. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Leave items indicated to "remain" in their present condition. B. Restore items indicated to be "repaired ", not replaced, following the general guidelines of Part 3 of this Section, and any more specific guidelines specified in Sections governing work of the respective materials. C. Follow the more specific guidelines specified in Sections governing work of the respective materials for items indicated to be "replaced." D. Notify Architect if items indicated to "remain" or be "repaired ", appear to need "replacement." Beginning replacement work without prior approval may result in loss of compensation for additional work. E. Work on Existing Roof: 1. Obtain Target Roofing approval to perform any work on existing roof to preserve original roofing contractor's warranty or use the services of the existing roofing contractors to perform the work. a. To obtain information regarding the existing roofing system call Target Roofing at 1- 800 - 694 -4733 option, 0. State your project as: "2010 Right Sizing project, give your project's T- number, and your project location ". To determine approved roofing contractors for your project visit Target's Prolog site for Roofing. 2. All work to be completed with material compatible with existing system, i.e. PVC to PVC; TPO to TPO; EPDM to EPDM. Verify material type with Target Roofing contact. 3. Work on the existing roof includes but is not limited to the following items: a. Install new roofing membrane (Owner Furnished) and components (Owner Furnished) as required by project specification for area(s) on the existing roofs. b. Provide new walkway pads (Owner Furnished) as designated on the Drawings, and install per Target's recommendations. 4. All insulation material required for the roofing work on the existing roof must be provided by the Contractor (Contractor Furnished), that includes but is not limited to the following: fill insulation, tapered insulation, Densdeck, or other insulation types as required to match existing conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. B. Obtain approval of Architect/Engineer of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: 1. Cold rolled metal framing. 2. Miscellaneous structural metals. 3. Equipment supports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 3516 (01120) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET STORES C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent with specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. F. Provide temporary shoring, bracing and structural supporting members of work to be cut to carry existing and imposed loads as required. G. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. H. Maintain all means of egress and exit ways from space and adjacent spaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION , A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy. B. Project rooms shall be complete in all respects including operational mechanical and electrical systems. C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning and electrical systems. F. Install products as specified in individual Sections. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where a change of plane of 1/8 inch or more occurs, submit recommendations for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. B. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas. C. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces. 3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.7 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean daily the Owner- occupied areas of work in which Contractor is working or traversing. END OF SECTION 1 1 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 3516 (01120) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 4200 (01090) REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applicability of reference standards. 2. Provision of reference standards at Site. 3. Acronyms used in Contract Documents for reference standards, and source of standards. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions; for requirements related to compliance with governing regulations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. By Owner: Items that will be ordered, paid for and shipped to Project by Owner. Contractor to receive, unload, unpack or uncrate, protect, move into place, install and connect these items as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Furnish: Pay for, deliver (or receive), unload, inspect, and store as specified or directed while retaining care, custody and control until received for installation by others. C. Herein: As used in the Contract Documents refers to the contents of a particular Section, of the contents within parts of the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplemental Conditions), and Division 1 - General Requirements. D. Install: Receive, set or place in position, make required connections, adjust and test for satisfactory performance and operation. E. Not In Contract (N.I.C.): Products not in the Contract, but which may require provisions in the construction for future installation by Others. F. Product: Materials, systems, and equipment incorporated in or to be incorporated in the Project. G. Provide: Furnish and install, including without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services, and other items required to complete referenced tasks. H. Remove: Take away and dispose of products, assemblies, or appurtenances as noted or indicated in the Contract Documents. I. Remove and Verify Use: Remove items and verify with OSR disposition of use; item salvaged and reused, or item becomes the Contractor's property and is disposed of in a lawful manner off site. J. Replace:. Reinstallation of removed items. K. Replace and provide new: Remove existing items, furnish and install new items in their place. L. Reuse: Remove items and store, reinstall stored items as indicated. M. Work: Construction and services required by Contract Documents, whether completed of partially completed, and includes labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, Federal Standards, or other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing regulations. REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Standard Dates: Where no specific date of standard is specified, the date is that in effect as of the Bid date, date of Owner - Contractor Agreement when there are no bids, or date specifically required by local code requirements. C. When required by individual Specification Sections or otherwise needed for proper performance of Work, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy of standard at Site during submittals, planning, and progress of the affected work, until Substantial Completion. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES A. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate as of date of Contract Documents: AA Aluminum Association 900 -19th Street N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 202/862 -5100 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K St., NW, Suite 503 Washington, DC 20005 202/737 -0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4268 847/303 -5664 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol St. NW, Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 202/624 -5800 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333 -9094 248/848 -3700 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 800/872 -2253 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 703/841 -8400 AIA The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue Northwest Washington, DC 20006 -5292 202/626 -7300 AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers (merged with IEEE) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601 -2001 312/670 -2400 or 800/644 -2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th St. NW, Suite 1300 Washington, DC 20036 -4700 202/452 -7100 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Pkwy., Suite 140 Englewood, CO 80112 303/792 -9559 AJCHN American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature (See USDA; committee convenes intermittently.) AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 -1893 847/394 -0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 -8002 212/642 -4900 or 800/267 -4783 ANSI/ Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Assoc. BHMA 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 -6603 212/661 -4261 APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 -0700 253/565 -6600 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 4301 Fairfax Dr., Suite 425 Arlington, VA 22203 703/524 -8800 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE Atlanta, GA 30329 -2305 404/636 -8400 or 800/527 -4723 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 -2392 212/705 -7722 or 800/843 -2763 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210 Westlake Village, CA 91362 -3649 805/495 -7120 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Dr. West Conshohocken, PA 19428 -2959 610/832 -9500 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 1952 Isaac Newton Square West Reston, VA 20190 703/733 -0600 or 800/449 -8811 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association P.O. Box 5690 Granbury, TX 76049 817/326 -6300 AWS American Welding Society 550 Northwest LeJeune Road Miami, FL 33126 305/443 -9353 or 800/443 -9353 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 303/794 -7711 or 800/926 -7337 BIA Brick Industry Association 11490 Commerce Park Dr, Reston, VA 22091 -1525 703/620 -0010 BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International 4051 W. Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60477 312/799 -2300 CABO Council of American Building Officials 507 Three Skyline Place 5201 Leesburg Pike Falls Church, VA 22041 703/931 -4533 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 (usually first published in Federal Register) CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Rd., Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 423/892 -0137 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1111 18th Street Northwest Washington, DC 20207 202/634 -7700 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758 847/517 -1200 CS Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept of Commerce) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Drive Chantilly, VA 20151 -2223 703/222 -2010 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street Southwest Washington, DC 20460 202/829 -3535 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M Street Northwest Washington, DC 20554 202/632 -7000 FM FM Global P.O. Box 7500 Johnston, RI 02919 401 - 275 -3000 FS Federal Specification (General Services Administration) Obtain from your Regional GSA Office, or purchase from: GSA Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Streets Southwest Washington, DC 20406 202/472 -2205 or 2140 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street NE, Suite 510 Washington DC 20002 202/289 -5440 GANA Glass Association of North America 2945 Southwest Wanamaker Dr., Suite A Topeka, KS 66614 913/266 -7013 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5630 So. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 213/699 -0541 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 -2394 212/705 -7900 or 800/678 -4333 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 120 Wall St., 17th Floor New York, NY 10005 -4001 212/248 -5000 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council P.O. Box 9 Henderson Harbor, NY 13651 315/938 -7444 IRI HSB Industrial Risk Insurers P.O. Box 5010 85 Woodland St. Hartford, CT 06102 -5010 860/520 -7300 or 800/520 -7300 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park St. NE Vienna, VA 22180 -4602 703/281 -6613 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Michigan Ave., Suite 1000 Chicago, IL 60603 312/322 -4055 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310 Alexandria, VA 22314 703/684 -0084 NBHA National Builders Hardware Association (Now Part of DHI) NB National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 301 /921 -1000 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 2302 Horse Pen Rd. Herndon, VA 20171 -3499 703/713 -1900 NCPWB National Certified Pipe Welders Bureau 5410 Grosvener Lane, Suite 120 Bethesda, MD 20814 301/897 -0070 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street Northwest Washington, DC 20037 202/457 -8400 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1847 Rosslyn, Virgina 22209 703/841 -3200 NFPA National Fire Protection Association One Batterymarch Park. P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269 -9101 617/770 -3000 or 800/344 -3555 NFP National Forest Products Association. 1619 Massachusetts Avenue Northwest Washington, DC 20036 202/797 -5800 NSF NSF International 3475 Plymouth Road Ann Arbor, MI 48105 734/769 -8010 OBBC Ohio Basic Building Code Ohio Board of Building Standards 2323 W. Fifth Ave., Rm. 2120 Box 825 Columbus, OH 43216 614/644 -2613 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) OSH Occupational Safety & Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60604 312/786 -0300 PIMA Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association 1331 F. Street NW. Suite 975 Washington, DC 20004 202/628 -6558 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 SBC Standard Building Code (See SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road Birmingham, Alabama 35213 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25 Fox River Grove, IL 60021 847/462 -1930 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland, OH 44145 -1967 440/899 -0010 SJI Steel Joist Institute 3127 10`h Ave., North Ext. Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 -6760 803/626 -1995 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Drive P.O. Box 221230 Chantilly, VA 20151 -1209 703/803 -2980 SSPC SSPC: The Society of Protective Coatings 40 24`h St., 6th Floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222 -4656 412/281 -2331 or 800/837 -8303 TCA Tile Council of America P.O. Box 1787 Clemson, SC 29633 864/646 -8453 UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICBO) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062 847/272 -8800 or 800/704 -4050 REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET . USDA United States Department of Agriculture Independence Avenue between 12th and 14th Streets, Northwest Washington, DC 20250 202/447 -4929 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION REFERENCES 01 4200 (01090) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 4300 (01400) QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Inspection Reports. 2. Test Reports. 3. Approvals. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Documents 00 7200 - General Conditions; for payment and arrangements for inspections, tests, and approvals. B. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures; for submittals to the Architect. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures; for contract closeout- submittals. D. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning Procedures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E329 - "Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in Construction." 1.4 STANDARDS A. TESTING LABORATORY; shall be qualified by the U.S. Bureau of standards to provide inspection and material testing services for the general construction quality control and which will meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction. B. CERTIFIED PLANTS; Continuous plant inspection is not required at concrete mixing plants, and plants producing prefabricated concrete and steel products which are certified by the building official. C. SPECIAL INSPECTOR; shall be a qualified engineer or technician, who will provide the inspection services and detailed inspection reports on specified construction. Special inspector should be directly supervised by an engineer licensed in the state in which the project is located. 1.5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS - TESTING AGENCY AND SPECIAL INSPECTOR A. General: Testing Agency and/or Special Inspector to be employed by the Owner, directly, and shall provide inspection of work listed below, and make tests required by Building Code and these Specifications. 1. Submit written reports of inspections, tests, and approvals to OSR, Architect and Structural Engineer. 2. Submit non - compliant reports on colored paper to indicate that tests and inspections did not meet specified requirements. Provide copies of reports to General Contractor. 3. Submit a written summary report to OSR, Architect and Structural Engineer at project completion summarizing deficiencies, indicating deficiencies have been corrected, and the project is in conformance with the Owner's standards. B. Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. 1.6 MISCELLANEOUS A. Provide other Special Inspections required by Building Code for Structural Work, or requested by Owner. QUALITY ASSURANCE 01 4300 (01400) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET ' 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS A. RESPONSIBILITY; Inspection will not relieve the contractor from responsibility for correctness, completeness, and quality of work. B. Contractor shall provide the OSR and the Special Inspector with 24 hours advance notice for all on -site work, 48 hours advance notice for all off -site inspections. C. Concrete formwork will not be considered ready for inspection until all reinforcing and miscellaneous embedded items are in their final positions and secured. D. Work hours for the Special Inspector will be according to the need. The Contractor must allow adequate time for inspection and needed corrections before proceeding to the next construction stage. E. Furnish labor as necessary to obtain and handle samples at the project, or at other source of material; repair structures from which samples of solid materials have been taken. F. Protect samples until they are picked up by the laboratory. G. Furnish all electrical power, turning or moving of members, hoisting, staging, and other facilities required for inspection. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION QUALITY ASSURANCE 01 4300 (01400) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 5000 (01500) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Construction heat and ventilation. 2. Temporary light and power system. 3. Construction water. 4. Use of permanent heating, ventilating, electrical, and water service systems. 5. Sanitary facilities and drinking water. 6. Telephone service. 7. Field offices and temporary buildings. 8. Protection of persons and property. 9. Moisture and weather protection. 10. Cleaning public facilities. 11. Temporary signs. 1.2 HEAT AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS A. Heat: The existing building will be enclosed and heated during this work and remodeling work may be heated by the existing heat plant. If additional heating and ventilation work is required as part of this Work coordinate the changeover between temporary and permanent systems. Do not waste the Owner's heat. The Owner reserves the right to backcharge the Contractor for fuel if it is found that the Contractor is wasting heat. B. At locations of the remodeling where the work may be exposed to the elements, protect that work; and each separate contractor or subcontractor shall provide enclosures, temporary heating devices, fuel and other services required to protect their materials and work from damage by dampness and.cold. 1.3 USE OF PERMANENT AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS A. Requirements for Use: 1. Contractor for Complete Construction may request use of permanent air handling systems for construction heat and ventilation from the Owner. Approval for system use is at the option of the Owner. Request should include the following verifications: a. That installation of air handling systems is sufficiently complete for intended use, including utility connections, safety devices, control devices and unit filters. b. That general building construction is sufficiently complete to assure minimal system exposure to dust and dirt. 2. Contractor for Complete Construction shall give written notice of intention to use permanent air handing systems to Owner and Electrical and Mechanical Subcontractors at least 30 days prior to intended start of use. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall complete installation of systems as soon as reasonably possible thereafter. 3. If system will be used prior to final acceptance, Contractor must supply temporary filters for use in lieu of permanent filters. Install permanent filters specified in Division 23 - Mechanical at time of final acceptance. 4. Permanent air handling systems may be used at earlier stages of construction than specified above, upon Owner approval together with the following verifications: a. That return air ductwork is completely blocked off at each air inlet throughout building. b. Final connection of return air ductwork to equipment is left open, and return air is filtered at this point with 2" low efficiency filter media. c. That required electrical service is available to power permanent air handling systems. 5. Replace temporary filters at least every two weeks, and more frequently as necessary to prevent dust and dirt from entering equipment. Vacuum duct work if dirty. 6. Contractor for Complete Construction shall operate and maintain equipment, replace filters and perform final cleaning of system. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 (01500) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Permanent Heating and Ventilation Costs: 1. Contractor for Complete Construction shall pay all costs related to use of permanent heating and ventilation systems prior to Substantial Completion including fuel, system maintenance and utility charges. . 2. Owner will assume responsibility and pay costs for heating and ventilating the Project on date of Substantial Completion of Project. C. Warranties: Use of permanent heating and ventilating equipment prior to date of Substantial Completion of Work shall not alter terms of the warranty required by the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; special warranties, if any, specified in Contract Documents; or correction period required by the General Conditions. D. Existing HVAC to new HVAC changeover: The existing HVAC equipment will be in place and functioning while remodeling work is taking place. New HVAC equipment is going to be installed to replace designated equipment. The new HVAC equipment will be located [at designated new locations, the existing equipment will stay in place lat the .same location as the existing equipment / at a new location, the existing equipment mm, stay in place temporarily %. or [ Some of the existingHVAC equipment will stay in place. Some new HVAC equipment will be located at designated new locations. Some new TIVAC equipment will be placed at the existing HVAC equipment's locations and the existing HVAC equipment will be removed See-Drawings for exact configurations.] The transition between the existing HVAC equipment and the new HVAC equipment shall provide continuous service, and all possible gaps in service shall be covered by appropriate temporary service provided by the Contractor. Remove all existing HVAC equipment that is being replaced or otherwise is designated for removal 1.4 POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. Temporary Electrical Service. The Contractor may use the electrical service available at the existing building for the Work at no charge, subject to provisions of this Article. B. Power Service: 1. Verify that power service is adequate for intended temporary use. 2. Coordinate power use requirements with OSR. C. Power Distribution: Provide power for construction operations including wiring, transformers, connections, and protection for temporary and permanent equipment for environmental control, for temporary use of electrically operated equipment, and for testing. 1. Provide one 20 amp, 120 volt temporary branch circuit with three grounding, duplex receptacles minimum, for . each 7500 square feet of floor area. Locate receptacles to limit maximum extension cord length to 100 feet. Temporary branch circuits may be used for portable tools, portable lights, and other small power loads. Each separate contractor or Subcontractor shall furnish their own extension cords and supplemental lights. D. Lighting: Provide lighting for remodeling and expansion construction operations. 1. Temporary lighting shall consist of minimum one 150 watt incandescent lamp, or equivalent, for each 500 square feet of floor area with minimum one light in each room (excluding closets and utility chases). Provide additional lights in corridors and stairwells to provide adequate illumination for proper performance of Work and safe passage. 2. Provide lamps for temporary lighting system. E. Code compliance: All temporary electrical work shall comply with applicable provisions of Article 305 of the National Electrical Code and more stringent requirements of state and local electrical codes and authorities having jurisdiction. F. Power and Lighting Costs: 1. Owner will pay for energy use costs during construction incurred from use of the project power and lighting systems within the limits specified herein. 2. Do not use the existing building power for resistance heating devices of for the operation of welding machines; make other arrangements if those items are required. 3. Do not waste the Owner's power. The Owner reserves the right to backcharge the Contractor for power use if it is found that the Contractor is wasting power. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 (01500) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.5 USE OF PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. When installation of permanent electrical service, lighting and distribution system is sufficiently complete to be operated safely, system may be used to provide construction light arid power, and testing and operation of permanent equipment. Contractor for Complete Construction 'shall replace equipment damaged or rendered inoperative during construction. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION WATER A. Water. The Contractor may use the water service available at the existing building for the Work at no charge, subject to provisions of this Article. B. Do not waste the Owner's water. The Owner reserves the right to backcharge the Contractor for water use if it is found that the Contractor is wasting water. 1.7 DRINKING WATER A. The Owner will provide drinking water for the Project during construction. 1.8 CONSTRUCTION TOILET FACILITIES A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide and maintain adequate toilet facilities for use of entire Project during construction. Maintain toilets in clean and sanitary condition. B. Temporary toilets shall be enclosed, portable chemical toilets furnished and serviced by a company specializing in required service. C. Do not use permanent toilets during construction. 1.9 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide telephone service to his field office for his own use as he may require. B. The Owner will provide telephone service to his field office for his exclusive use as he may require. 1.10 OWNER'S FIELD OFFICE A. As soon as possible after commencement of Work, Owner will furnish a temporary building approximately 12 feet by 40 feet on Site for exclusive use of OSR. 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide and maintain one temporary building or trailer on Site as a field office. Coordinate location with OSR. B. Remove field office when no longer required. 1.12 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS AND SHEDS A. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall provide and maintain trailers, sheds, and other temporary buildings on site required for storage of materials, tools, and equipment and other purposes in conjunction with his work. Coordinate location with OSR. B. Remove temporary buildings when no longer required. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Comply with provisions of Article 10 of General Conditions. B. Where required by governing regulations, Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide temporary portable fire extinguishers. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 (01500) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.14 CLEANING PUBLIC FACILITIES A. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall keep public sidewalks and streets surrounding Site free from dirt, waste materials, and rubbish caused by his operations. Avoid interference with traffic. 1.15 TEMPORARY SIGNS A. Erect only billboards, advertisements, or similar signs authorized by Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 (01500) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 6000 (01600) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Products. 2. Transportation and handling. 3. Storage and protection. 4: Product options. 5. Owner - furnished material and equipment. 6. Substitutions. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders; for requests for substitutions during the bidding period. B. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions; for quality of substitute products and change of costs in substitutions. C. Section 01' 1100 - Summary of the Work; for Contractor's use of premises and for storage of materials and equipment. D. Section 01 4200 - References. E. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures; for submittal of manufacturer's certificates and product data. F. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures; for operating instructions and maintenance manuals. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Products include material, equipment, and systems. B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. C. Components required to be furnished in quantity within a Specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry, with labels intact. B. Arrange deliveries of products according to construction progress schedule. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at Site, work of separate contractors, and Owner's use of premises. Do not deliver products subject to damage until required in Work, or until suitable storage facilities are available at Site. C. Deliver items for embedment in concrete or masonry to permit building -in as Work progresses. Provide templates showing exact locations. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling or damage. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products according to manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. Protect finished surfaces from scratching and similar damage. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports over ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well - drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 (01600) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 OWNER- FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to "Owner- Furnished Material and Equipment Schedule" on Drawings for list of items and basic division of Owner and Contractor responsibilities. The following detailed division of responsibilities applies except where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents. B. Owner (OSR) Responsibilities: 1. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor. 2. Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. 3. Submit claims for transportation damage. 4. Arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to Contractor. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Notify and arrange for Owner Furnished material suppliers to obtain drawings and specifications within two weeks of receipt of Project Contract Documents. 2. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in Construction Progress Schedule. 3. Arrange for delivery of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, manufacturer's installation instructions, and certificates. 4. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. Submit to OSR with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non - conformance with Contract Documents. 5. Arrange for delivery to Site of Owner Furnished Materials according to Construction Progress Schedule. Owner to pay for delivery costs to jobsite. 6. Receive and unload products at Site. 7. Inspect deliveries, record shortages, and damaged or defective items. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 8. Handle products at Site, including uncrating and storage. 9. Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements. 10. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products as indicated in Contract Documents and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 11. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities, and other testing required by Contract Documents. 12. Arrange for manufacturer's field services. 13. Repair or replace items damaged during construction. 1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Specification Options: 1. Products specified by Reference Standards or by Performance and Descriptive Requirements only: Provide any product meeting those standards or requirements. 2. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 3. Products specified by naming several manufacturers and, where applicable, sample products: Provide products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions allowed. 4. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer: No options, no substitutions allowed. B. Options Incorporated in Work: Products shown on Drawings may be typical of the style and model of one specified manufacturer. Perform changes in Work required to accommodate actual installed products of other acceptable manufacturers, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.8 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern action on requests for substitutions, submitted under requirements specified in this Section. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 15 days of Owner - Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. C. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 (01600) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) E. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. F. Owner's Architect and OSR will determine acceptability of substitutions. G. Products and materials proposed for substitutions shall NOT contain asbestos. • 1.9 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. C. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01 3300. D. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations, and reference to Specifications section and Article numbers. E. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the specified product. F. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and amount of net change to Contract Sum. G. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. H. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it does not contain asbestos, is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product, or that the cost reduction offered is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution. B. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. C. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. D. Contractor certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts. E. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent. 1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit two copies of request for substitution. B. Architect or OSR will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. C. During the bidding period, no action will be taken on requests for substitution. D. After award of Contract, OSR will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution within 30 days. E. For accepted products, submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples under provisions of Section 01 3300. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 (01600) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 (01600) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 7123 (01050) FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Lay out and maintain reference points and additional bench marks necessary to accomplish Work. Lay out partitions and openings in partitions for use of all trades. Provide adequate reference points at all stages of construction to permit accurate placement of Work of trades. Each Subcontractor shall lay out his own Work and be responsible for damage to his Work or Work of others caused by his errors or failure to check properly and verify measurements. B. At time of layout, verify locations and elevations of existing utilities at point of connection with new services, by employing a registered Professional Civil Engineer or registered Land Surveyor, without additional expense to Owner. 1.2 PENETRATION AND ATTACHMENT PROVISIONS A. Make suitable preparations for installation of Work. Include penetration, embedment, and attachment of piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds, supports and similar items in concrete and masonry walls, floors, partitions, or structural members. Provide and install sleeves, boxes, receptacles, chases, and other openings or recesses to receive Work. Locate penetration and attachment provisions accurately and secure firmly in place before erecting masonry or placing concrete. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123 (01050) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123 (01050) - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 7700 (01700) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Operating instructions and manuals. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Substantial completion and final completion. 4. As -built drawings. 5. Final payment. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions; for Contract Closeout. B. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning Procedures. 1.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Prepare and submit operating instructions and maintenance manuals, as required by Specification Sections, and instruct Owner's personnel in use and maintenance of operating equipment. B. Operating Instructions: Permit OSR and maintenance personnel to observe and familiarize themselves with equipment during assembly and installation. After installation is complete, arrange to meet and instruct Owner's designated personnel in use, operation, care, and cleaning of equipment. Instructions shall be given only by qualified personnel, thoroughly familiar with use and maintenance of equipment. C. Operating Manuals: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit operating and maintenance manuals for equipment to OSR in duplicate unless otherwise specified. Neatly edit manuals with similar equipment grouped, pages tabbed and indexed, material printed or typewritten, and individual pages set into plastic page covers. Include the following information: 1.- Complete operating instructions and recommendations for fuel and other materials to be used with each item. 2. Manufacturer's complete data sheets. 3. Complete cleaning instructions including recommended cleaning materials. .4. Complete lubrication data and schedules. 5. Maintenance, repair, and adjustment data including manufacturer's instructions. 6. Parts list with numbers, recommended parts to stock, and nearest parts depot and service organization. 7. Assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, mechanical diagrams, installation diagrams, and instructions. D. Maintenance Tools: Provide special tools furnished with equipment for adjustment during installation, such as closer wrenches. .1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Immediately prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, remove waste materials and rubbish from building and Site. Remove protective coatings, barriers and other protective devices, temporary work, and surplus materials. C. Clean the building and Site. Leave building in neat and orderly condition, ready for occupancy and use by Owner. Wash and polish glass on both faces. Dust and vacuum finished spaces; wash and otherwise clean as necessary to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Leave mechanical rooms and similar unfinished spaces "Broom Clean". D. Clean and sterilize plumbing fixtures. E. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean heaters, grilles and registers, and other mechanical work in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Dust equipment, ducts, pipes, and other mechanical work in mechanical rooms and similar unfinished spaces. construction dirt and debris from interior of ductwork and air handling equipment. Replace filters for air handling equipment or clean thoroughly according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean light fixtures and other electrical work in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Electrical Subcontractor shall remove protective plastic covering from Owner furnished light fixtures, as directed by OSR. Dust electrical equipment in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unfinished spaces. Replace burned out lamps. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 (01700) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET G. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean all owner supplied and installed fixtures in finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. H. Maintain Work in clean condition until OSR determines Work to be Substantially Complete. I. Upon Completion of Work, remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from premises. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL COMPLETION A. Refer to Article 9 of General Conditions for additional information. B. When Work approaches Substantial Completion, submit to OSR a written request for a preliminary inspection for Substantial Completion, including a list of items to be completed or corrected. Submit request approximately 21 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion. If OSR considers Work to be sufficiently complete, OSR will establish a date for preliminary inspection to be held approximately 14 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion or occupancy. C. The OSR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct preliminary inspection for Substantial Completion. Based on preliminary inspection, OSR will prepare a Punch List for Substantial Completion, indicating items which shall be completed or corrected before Work will be determined to be Substantially Complete. Complete and correct items on Punch List before scheduled occupancy date. D. When items on Punch List for Substantial Completion have been completed or corrected, return Punch List to OSR indicating in writing action taken for each item. Include items completed, items not complete, and reasons for not completing remaining items. After returning Punch List, submit to OSR a request for inspection for Substantial Completion. OSR will establish a date for inspection. E. The OSR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct inspection for Substantial Completion. If OSR determines Work to be Substantially Complete, OSR will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion as provided in Article 9 of General Conditions, and a Punch List for Final Completion of items remaining to be completed or corrected before Work will be determined fully complete and ready for acceptance. F. When items on Punch List for Final Completion have been fully completed or corrected, submit to OSR a written indication of action taken for each item, and request Final Inspection. OSR will establish a date for inspection. G. The OSR, accompanied by Target Project Architect and Contractor, will conduct Final Inspection. If OSR determines Work is acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, OSR will notify Contractor in writing. 1.6 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. The contractual obligations of this submission are based on Article 4.22.1 of the General Conditions which states "4.22.1 At the time of Final Completion, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of as -built drawings to the Owner." B. The two copies of as -built drawings identified in the General Conditions are required as part of Project Closeout as follows: 1. One copy to be left at the building (store) in care of the Store Facility Technician (SFT), or if they are not available leave in care of the Store Team Lead (STL). The location the as -built drawings is the drawing rack located at: 1) Janitor/Bag Storage Room or, 2) under stair to EDC or, 3) as independently located in your existing store. 2. The second copy to be sent to the Target Resource Center at the address below: a. John O'Day — PD Resource Center Target Corporation TP3 -1030 50 S. 10`h Street - Suite 400 Minneapolis, MN 55403 -2054 (Ph 612 - 761 -1649) C. Informational Label: Label each set of the as -built drawings with a minimum 3 inch by 5inch self - adhesive label containing the following information: T- NUMBER TARGET STORE NAME Issue Date of Drawings General Contractor's Name General Contractor's Address General Contractor's Phone No. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 (01700) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) General Contractor's Contact Person 1.7 FINAL PAYMENT A. Refer to Article 9 of General Conditions for additional information. B. Upon receipt of written notification from OSR that Work is acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, prepare and submit to OSR a Final Application for Payment with the following attachments, in two copies: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706; Most recent edition. 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A; Most recent edition. 3. Contractor's Lien Waiver in full amount of Contract Sum. 4. Lien waivers from all Subcontractors, Sub - Subcontractors, and major material suppliers who have furnished material for Work under contract with Contractor or Subcontractor. Lien waivers shall total full amount of Contract Sum. 5. Guaranty/Warranty Certifications for Products and Equipment specified with special warranties in the Project Manual. 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707; Most recent edition. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 (01700) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 (01700) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 01 9100 (01810) COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES PART 1.- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commissioning is a systematic process of verifying that select building systems have been installed properly and perform interactively according to design intent and Owner's operational needs; as defined and required by Contract Documents. Commissioning during construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: a. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards as defined in Contract Documents. b. Verify that equipment and systems receive the specified operational checkout by installing contractors. c. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. d. Verify that Operations and Maintenance documentation is complete and meets requirements described in Contract Documents (turnover manuals, as -built drawings, and expectations matrix). e. Verify that all training has been completed and documented in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Systems to Commission: 1. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems to be commissioned include the following: a. Rooftop HVAC Units (25 percent sample — must include front office units, store entry units, checklane units, and grocery unit (SO4 only). b. Variable Air Volume (VAV) terminal units (50 percent sample.— include break room, team meeting space, and bypass VAV systems). c. Exhaust Systems (minimum 2 units). 2. Refrigeration Systems: a. Refrigerated cases and doors (25 percent sample). b. Walk in coolers and freezers (100 percent sample). c. Compressor rack systems (100 percent sample). d. Condensing equipment (100 percent sample). e. Refrigerated Case Door Anti-Sweat Heating System (functional testing). 3. Electrical Systems: a. Interior lighting and controls (including 25 percent sample of office and stockroom occupancy sensors). b. Exterior lighting and controls to include guest and team member parking, security lighting. 4. Control sensors: a. Zone temperature sensor calibration. b. Outside air temperature and humidity sensor placement and calibration. c. Refrigeration case, cooler, and freezer temperature sensor placement and calibration. C. Commissioning requirements for above mentioned mechanical and electrical systems are meant to supplement requirements described in the following Sections: 1. Section 01 3300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01 4300 - Quality Assurance. 3. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 4. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 5. Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). 6. Section 11 2215 - Refrigerated Display Cases. 7. Section 11 4124 - Walk in Coolers and Freezers. 8. Section 11 4125 - Walk in Coolers and Freezers — Stockroom. 9. Section 13 2612 - Prefabricated Electrical Distribution Center. 10. Section 13 2613 - Prefabricated Electrical Distribution Center — Installation. 11. Section 13 2616 - Prefabricated Utility Center (PUC). 12. Section 13 2617 - Prefabricated Utility Center (PUC) — Installation. 13. Section 20 0010 - Mechanical Design Parameters (Owners Project Requirements). 14. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 15. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. 16. Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation. 17. Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation. 18. Section 23 1100 - Fuel Piping. 19. Section 23 3000 - HVAC Air Distribution. 20. Section 23 3700 - Air Handling. 21. Section 23 7400 - Mechanical HVAC Equipment. 22. Section 23 7500 - Rooftop HVAC Equipment (Supermarket). 23. Section 24 0110 - Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. 24. Section 24 0120 - Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. 25. Section 24 0123 - Service Rate Agreement Form. 26. Section 24 0124 - Target Refrigeration Proposal Form. 27. Section 24 0130 - Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements. 28. Section 24 0150 - Refrigeration Equipment Recovery and Demolition Instructions. 29. Section 24 0529 - Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. 30. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. 31. Section 24 0554 - Minimum Requirements for Commercial and other Duty Refrigerant Containing appliances and Systems. 32. Section 24 0719 - Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. 33. Section 24 0820 - Refrigeration Pre - Start-Up /Start-Up Report. 34. Section 24 0825 - Refrigeration 'Compressor Rack Validation Report. 35. Section 24 0830 - Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report. 36. Section 24 0833 - Refrigeration Pre - Start-Up /Start-Up Report. 37. Section 24 0835 - Refrigeration Compressor Rack Validation Report. 38. Section 24 0930 - Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. 39. Section 24 0933 - Refrigeration Compressor Rack Controls. 40. Section 24 0935 - Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. 41. Section 24 2315 - Commercial Refrigeration Piping. 42. Section 24 3623 - Installation of Walk -In Cooler and Freezer Boxes. 43. Section 24 3823 - Installation of Grocery Display Cases. 44. Section 24 6212 - Installation of Compressor /Condenser Units. 45. Section 24 6213 - Condenser /Compressor Units (Owner Furnished). 46. Section 24 6312 - Installation of Air Cooled Condensers. 47. Section 24 6313 - Air Cooled Condensers (Owner Furnished). 48. Section 24 6332 - Installation of Evaporative Condensers. 49. Section 24 6333 - Evaporative Condensers. 50. Section 24 6419 - Refrigeration Compressor Racks. 51. Section 24 6422 - Installation of Rooftop Compressor Racks. 52. Section 24 6423 - Rooftop Compressor Racks (Owner Furnished). 53. Section 24 7312 - Installation of Walk -In Box Evaporator Coils. 54. Section 24 7313 - Walk -In Box Evaporator Coils. 55. Section 26 0924 - Occupancy Sensor Installation. 56. Section 26 2713 - Electrical Metering. 57. Section 26 5100 - Lighting Fixtures. 58. Section 26 5101 - Lighting Fixtures Installation. D. Commissioning requires participation of Division 11, 13, 20, 23, 24, and 26 contractors to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with Contract Documents. They shall be familiar with all parts of commissioning plan issued by Commissioning Authority (CA) and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in this Section. E. Members of commissioning team consist of Commissioning Authority (CA), Owners Site Representative (OSR), The Facilities Management Field Team (FM); Asset Managers (AM), Operations Center Staff (OC), General Contractor (GC), architect and design engineers (particularly M/E/P engineer), mechanical contractor (MC), refrigeration contractor (RC), electrical contractor (EC), TAB representative (TAB), controls contractor (CC), and other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment being commissioned. A more detailed list of Commissioning team members is included in the Commissioning Plan - a non - contractual supplement to this Specification Section. Commissioning plan can be obtained through the project's Prolog website. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 019100(01810) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.2 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY (CA) A. Commissioning Authority (CA): Selected and employed by Target. Commissioning Authority shall not be associated with or employed by construction General Contractor, or equipment supplier unless pre- approved by Target's intemal commissioning team. 1.3 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Plan: A document that describes in detail goals and objectives of Target's commissioning program, the specific roles and responsibilities of all members of commissioning team, and tasks involved in accomplishing Target's commissioning objectives. B. Commissioning Process: The following narrative describes a brief overview of typical commissioning tasks during construction phase and general order in which they occur: 1. Commissioning during construction begins with a pre - construction meeting conducted by CA and OSR where commissioning process, schedule, and expectations are reviewed with construction team members. 2. Equipment documentation related to non - prototypical systems is made available to CA throughout construction process. 3. CA will visit project site one to three times during construction phase to observe and comment on proper installation of each system being commissioned. Deviations from the Contract Documents identified during this site visit will be documented by CA, passed through Target's OSR, and resolved at no additional cost to Target. 4. In general, checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from component level, to equipment, to systems and intersystem levels, with pre- functional/construction checklists being completed by construction team before functional performance testing (checklists are included in technical Specification Sections). Final functional testing forms are created and completed by CA. 5. Subcontractors, under their own direction, execute and document pre- functional/construction checklists and perform startup and initial checkout in accord with requirements of other Specification Sections. CA documents that checklists and startup were completed as required. This may include CA witnessing start-up of selected equipment and systems. 6. CA develops specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures. 7. Functional performance test procedures are executed and documented by CA after store grand opening. Subcontractors shall participate in a portion of this functional testing effort. 8. Items of non - compliance in material, installation, setup, or operation are corrected by appropriate party. 9. For non - prototypical equipment, CA reviews O &M documentation for completeness. All O &M documentation must be submitted and approved before start of required training. 10. For non - prototypical equipment, CA reviews any required training documentation furnished by subcontractors and verifies that it was completed. 11. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES A. General Contractor (GC): 1. Construction Phase: a. Make available to CA on -site a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders, approved submittals, and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment. b. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O &M data, commissioning tasks, and training. c. Ensure that all subcontractors execute their commissioning responsibilities according to Contract Documents and schedule. d. A representative shall attend a commissioning pre - construction meeting scheduled by CA to kick -off Commissioning process. e. Coordinate training of Owner's Facilities Management personnel if and when required by project Specifications. f. Prepare turnover manuals and as -built documentation according to Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating original sequences of operation to as -built conditions. 2., Warranty Phase: a. Ensure appropriate subcontractors participate in two (2) days of on -site functional testing following grand opening at a time to be coordinated by CA. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET b. Ensure appropriate subcontractor corrects deficiencies and makes necessary adjustments to O &M manuals and as -built drawings for applicable issues identified through commissioning process. c. Participate in 10 -month warranty review meeting planned and scheduled by Target's PM and OSR. B. HVAC, Electrical, and Refrigeration Subcontractors (MC, EC and RC): 1. Construction Phase: a. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include specified requirements for submittal data, commissioning documentation, start-up, O &M data and training. b. Attend a commissioning pre - construction meeting to kick -off Commissioning process. c. Prepare and maintain a schedule for pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start- up, and TAB start and completion for use by CA. d. Make available a copy of.O &M manuals, turnover manuals, submittals and as- builts (non - prototypical commissioned equipment only), through normal channels, to CA for review. e. Furnish skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment. Ensure that they are available and present during agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving. £ Perform and clearly document all startup and system operational checkout procedures required by these Specifications, providing a copy to Target prior to Turnover. g. Correct deficiencies, differences between specified and observed performance, as interpreted by CA. h. Prepare redline as -built drawings for all drawings and final as -built drawings for contractor- generated coordination drawings. Make drawings available to CA at project site. i. Furnish training as specified in Contract Documents. j. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers and Target to determine specific requirements to maintain validity of warranty. k. Assist and cooperate with TAB contractor and CA by: 1) Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required. 2) Providing temperature and pressure taps in piping and equipment according to Construction Documents for TAB and commissioning testing. 1. Warranty Phase: m. Participate in two (2) days of on -site functional testing following grand opening at a time to be coordinated by CA. n. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O &M manuals and as -built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. o. Participate in 10 -month warranty review meeting planned and scheduled by Target's PM and OSR. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. CA will work with OSR, GC, and subcontractors to incorporate all commissioning activities into master construction schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite commissioning process. B. CA will furnish initial schedule of primary commissioning events at commissioning pre - construction meeting. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed and communicated by CA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MEETINGS A. Commissioning Pre - Construction Meeting: Within 30 days of commencement of construction, CA or OSR will schedule, plan, and conduct a commissioning kick off meeting with entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by OSR. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Miscellaneous Meetings: CA may choose to request a small meeting during construction phase site visit. CA will coordinate this meeting with both OSR and GC. Mechanical, electrical, and refrigeration subcontractors will be required to participate in this meeting. 3.2 REPORTING A. A summary report will be prepared and submitted to OSR and GC by CA immediately following each site visit or testing activity. This "courtesy copy" report shall identify all findings and deficiencies and describe necessary actions required to bring each deficiency in compliance with requirements of project. B. Raw field reports shall also be sent to Target's internal commissioning department for analysis, scrubbing, and clarification prior to distributing formal commissioning action log to construction team for final resolution. 3.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractors shall furnish CA with access to construction documentation required to facilitate commissioning work. At minimum, this documentation will include manufacturer and model number, manufacturer's printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of operation, O &M data, performance data, all performance test procedures, control drawings, and details of Owner contracted tests. All documentation requested by CA will be made available in one of two forms: 1. Electronically via Target's Prolog Web project site. 2. Hard copy located at project site included by subcontractors in their O &M manual contributions. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS A. Construction Start-Up Checklists include start-up, pre functional checklists and initial checkout of HVAC, lighting, and refrigeration equipment. Reference Divisions 23 and 24 for more specific information on start-up forms required in this contract. B. Construction checklists are used to ensure that equipment and systems are properly started and operational prior to functional performance testing executed by CA. Each piece of equipment receives full pre - functional checkout. No sampling strategies are used. Contractors shall use start-up construction checklists included in HVAC and Refrigeration Sections of this project Specification. C. Execution of Construction Checklists: 1. Prior to startup, subcontractors and vendors to schedule startup and checkout with GC and OSR. Performance of construction checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by subcontractor or vendor. When checking off construction checklists, signatures may be required of other subcontractors for verification of completion of their work. 2. OSR may observe procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved. 3. Subcontractors and vendors shall execute startup and checkout procedures and furnish CA with a signed and dated copy of completed start-up and pre- functional/construction tests and checklists. 4. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the pre - functional/construction checklist was actually performed, shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms. D. Deficiencies, Non - Conformance, and Approval in Checklists and Startup: 1. Subcontractors shall clearly list any outstanding items of initial start-up and pre - functional procedures that were not completed successfully, at bottom of procedures form or on an attached sheet. 2. Installing subcontractors or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in checklists and tests in a timely manner, prior to TAB and controls work, and shall notify OSR and CA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected. E. Completed Start-Up Checklists shall be submitted through Target's OSR to Target's internal Engineering, Store Services, and Commissioning teams. Ideally, they should be scanned and electronically uploaded into Prolog Web. 3.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Functional testing of all commissioned systems will occur between 1 and 6 weeks after grand opening. The testing effort is executed by the CA will require 2 days of on -site participation from each of the following: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 019100(01810) -5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Mechanical/HVAC subcontractor. 2. Refrigeration subcontractor. 3. Lighting/Electrical subcontractor. B. Correction of deficiencies found during functional testing process is responsibility of GC and relevant subcontractors. CA will work with each subcontractor during verification testing process to prioritize and develop action plans for resolution of deficiencies. C. Objectives and Scope: Objective of functional testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation under normal store load. Additionally, during testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving operation and functioning of systems. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation, seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm - up, cool -down, part-load, and full -load, where there is a specified system response. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, no flow, and equipment failure, shall also be tested. D. Development of Test Procedures: CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. E. Coordination and Scheduling: 1. Subcontractors shall furnish sufficient notice to CA regarding their completion schedule for construction checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. GC and subcontractors shall coordinate startup and pre - functional checkout of systems with TAB contractors and controls contractors. CA will schedule functional tests through OSR/GC /subcontractors and store management team. 3.6 DOCUMENTATION, RESOLUTION, AND APPROVAL OF DEFICIENCIES A. Documentation: CA shall witness and document results of all functional tests using specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms can be made available to GC and subs for review. B. Non - Conformance: 1. CA will record results of functional test on procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non - conformance issues will then be transferred to a commissioning action log for reporting and communication. A preliminary version of this action log will be furnished to construction team within three (3) days of functional testing. Final version of commissioning action log will be distributed within four (4) weeks of functional testing. 2. As tests progress, and a deficiency is identified, CA will recommend who should be responsible for addressing and resolving the deficiency. This information will be made available to construction team initially verbally while on -site, and ultimately in form of a warranty work order, managed through GC: a. When there is no dispute on a deficiency, subcontractor accepts responsibility to correct it. b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible: 1) Document deficiency on commissioning action log form with subcontractor's response, and give a to GC and to subcontractor representative assumed to be responsible. 2) Resolutions are made at lowest management level possible. Bring other parties into discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with OSR. Final acceptance authority is with OSR. 3) Once interpretation and resolution have been decided, appropriate party corrects deficiency, signs statement of correction on non - compliance form, and furnishes it to OSR. 3. Construction team shall address and resolve all open commissioning issues within 15 business days after receiving final version of commissioning action log. C. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect: If 10 percent, or three identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment, whichever is greater, fail to perform to Contract Documents, mechanically or substantively, due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable. In such case, GC shall furnish OSR with the following (this is applicable for equipment that is supplied by either GC or Target): 1. Within one week of notification, Contractor or manufacturer's representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of findings. Furnish findings to OSR within two weeks of original notice. 2. Within two weeks of original notification, Contractor or manufacturer shall furnish OSR with a signed and dated, written explanation of problem, cause of failures, and all proposed solutions, which shall include full equipment submittals. Proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed specification requirements of original installation. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. OSR will work with Engineering and Store Services to determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 4. Upon acceptance, Contractor or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend warranty accordingly, if original equipment warranty had begun. Replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. 5. For Target procured equipment, Target will lead discussions with manufacturer that result from defects. 3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. The following O &M manual requirements do not replace O &M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these Specifications. B. Division 20 -26 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Divisions 20- 26, and deliver this documentation to GC for inclusion in O &M manuals, according to this Section, prior to training of Owner personnel. C. CA shall receive an electronic copy of O &M manuals for review. This should ideally be posted to Target's Prolog web project management website. END OF SECTION COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES 01 9100 (01810) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) NOTE: THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THESE SECTIONS MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 4110 (02205) — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Work Includes: 1. Demolition, removal and disposal of work indicated on the Drawings. 2. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. 3. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the building and structural components. 4. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 5. Capping and identifying utilities. 6. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 7. Temporary partitions and enclosures to allow occupancy of the building and of adjacent properties. 8. Actions needed by General Contractor for compliance with the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) notification requirements that are necessary before mobilization takes place. B. National Emission Standards for hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Requirements: 1. The General Contractor (GC) will be required to complete and submit the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Demolition/Renovation Notification ten (10) working days prior to mobilization. 2. The Notification Form needs to be submitted to comply with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) NESHAP Regulation. Upon completion, a copy of the completed form must be forwarded to Facilities Management Remediation (FMR) at Asbestos.Memos@a,Target.com . 3. Once FMR reviews and approves the submission, FMR will complete a Mobilization Authorization Form and forward that to the Target Construction Project Manager (PM). 4. Please note, no project will be allowed to mobilize until FMR has received a completed copy of the NESHAP 10 -Day Notification. The GC can contact FMR at Asbestos.Memos(a,Target.com with any questions or concerns regarding the notification process. C. Unless specifically noted otherwise, salvaged material shall become the property of the Contractor. D. Material to be Salvaged by Owner (Confirm with OSR): 1. Selected Sales Floor Cooler/Freezers: a. Selected "Cooler/Freezer cases" being. salvaged are placed in area designated by the OSR. Refurbish per requirements of Section 24 3824 and as noted on Drawing RD01. See sheet R401 for locations for salvaged and refurbished cases to be relocated. 2. Back Room Cooler/Freezer: a. Refrigeration Control Panels to be salvaged and sent back to system manufacturer. The remainder of the existing Back Room Cooler/Freezer is not being salvaged and is to be removed by the Contractor. E. The selective demolition of the building list many individual components and systems to be removed and also to be saved. The list of items to be saved is inclusive and need not be added to, but the list of items to be removed is partial and all demolition work dealing with that demolition type are intended to be part of that work. 1. Mechanical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of mechanical demolition, and mechanical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. 2. Electrical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of electrical demolition, and electrical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. 3. General demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of general demolition, and general type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. Note any demolition items that do not typically fall into a particular group's responsibility will be the responsibility of the general demolition contractor. F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET G. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental- protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. H. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other devices that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 2. Remove debris promptly from site and dispose of legally. Do not burn or bury debris at site. I. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations. DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 0130 (03350) — CONCRETE REPAIR WORK A. Work Includes: Concrete patching and concrete repair work. B. Concrete Patching (Vertical Surfaces): 1. Patching Material shall be "Thorite" as made by Standard Dry Wall Products, or equal. Material shall be delivered in factory- sealed and labeled containers. Furnish mixing and application instructions with the material. 2. Liquid Admixture shall be "Acryl 60" as made by Standard Dry Wall Products, or equal. Admixture shall be compatible with the patching material. 3. Mixing. Add the factory prepared dry material to a mixture of three parts water to one part liquid admixture, in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix to a "batter" consistency for the first coat and to a suitable heavy trowel consistency for patching. C. Concrete Repair Work (to be used when the repair is full depth - i.e. filling in a portion of slab that has been removed): Concrete shall be ready -mixed as specified in section 03 3000, and Reinforcing Steel Bars shall be as specified in Section 03 2000. D. Concrete Patching Placement: 1. Concrete Removal - General: a. All unsound concrete in repair areas shall be removed down to sound concrete. Removal of concrete shall extend 2 " -4" beyond the outer boundary of unsound concrete. Concrete shall be removed completely around exposed reinforcing steel to provide a minimum of 3/4" clearance between concrete and reinforcement. If sound concrete is reached before exposing more than half of the reinforcing bar, it is not necessary to extend concrete removal around entire bar. b. The repair areas shall generally be rectangular shaped in plain view and exhibit a generally uniform depth. Provide a minimum 1/4" deep vertical edge at the perimeter of the repair area by sawcutting or chipping. Featheredges are not permitted. The edges of the repair area shall be perpendicular or slightly undercut. During sawcutting, exercise caution to avoid damaging existing reinforcement near the surface of the concrete. Prior to sawcutting, the Contractor shall remove sufficient concrete to determine both the location and the depth of the existing reinforcement. Exercise caution to avoid damaging the existing reinforcement located near the surface of the concrete. c. During the removal process, the Contractor shall exercise care to avoid cracking and otherwise damaging surrounding sound concrete, reinforcement, anchored or embedded items, etc. 2. Horizontal Patching: a. Removal: All debris shall be removed promptly by the Contractor. All reinforcing encountered shall be left in place, cleaned, and adjusted as may be necessary to provide for good cover after patching. b. Surface Preparation. Substrate must be sound, clean, and free from oil, solvents, paint, dust and foreign material. Chip and/or abrade painted concrete to expose clean surfaces. Scrub dirty surfaces with heavy duty caustic detergent and clear water flush. All areas to receive concrete patching shall be sand blasted, or optionally, may be acid etched to remove laitance and efflorescence. If acid etched, neutralize with ammonia and clear water rinse twice. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) c. Immediately prior to placing concrete patching mix, the slabs shall be thoroughly soaked with water. Free water shall be removed shortly before placing finish. d. Installation. A thin cement wash proportioned of 15 pounds of Portland cement to 4 gallons of water shall be applied to the damp, but not wet, surface of the concrete slab to receive the concrete patching mix just prior to the applications. Limit application of cement wash to an area that can be covered with patching mortar before cement wash dries. e. Concrete patching mixture shall be applied over the cement wash while the wash is still wet and/or tacky. If the wash has hardened, another application must be made. Concrete patching shall be applied and troweled in, so as to form a dense, solid overlay with a uniform, granular surface. Sprinkle in sand, as may be necessary to prevent glossy, slippery surfaces where there will be pedestrian and/or vehicle traffic. As the patching work is completed, it shall be checked with straight -edges and level to assure that all surfaces will drain freely; correct as may be necessary before the material sets up. 3. Vertical Patching: a. General. All work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. b. Removal. The Contractor shall remove all debris promptly. All reinforcing encountered shall be left in place cleaned and adjusted as may be necessary to provide for good cover after patching. c. Surface Preparation. Substrate must be sound, clean, and free from oil, solvents, dust and foreign material. Chip and/or abrade oil- saturated concrete to expose clean surfaces. Wash clean with water from hose before filling with patching material. d. First coat shall be brush applied and worked under any exposed reinforcing bars and shall cover the complete patched area. Apply within ten minutes after the liquid has been added. e. Patching mortar shall be trowel applied in 1/2" to 1" thick layers. Apply within five to ten minutes after liquid is added to the mix. Apply in successive 1/2" to 1" layers. Scratch previous layer, cool with water and apply successive layer within 15 to 20 minutes. If patch gets hot and turns light gray, cool by wetting. Build up patch to restore original surface plane, or profile. As the patching work is completed, it shall be checked with straight -edges and level to assure that all surfaces are in accurate alignment; correct as may be necessary before the material sets up. Keep patch damp 20 to 30 minutes after filling to complete curing. E. Concrete Repair Work: 1. Splicing Bars: New reinforcing steel shall be clean and shall be free from paint, oil, grease, form coating, mortar, dirt, mill scale, rust, etc. 2. Existing reinforcing steel shall be reasonably clean of hardened cement, dirt and rust; and shall be bent back to approximately its position prior to being cut. New bars shall be placed across the gap and wired securely in place. Lap bars in accordance with details indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Placing Concrete. No concrete which has commenced to set and no retempered concrete shall be used. Coordinate this work with the mechanical and electrical work. Work embedded shall be securely fastened in place. 4. Concrete shall be placed as soon as practicable. Place concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000. 5. A thin cement wash proportioned of 15 pounds of Portland cement to 4 gallons of water shall be applied to the dampened, but not wet, edges of the existing concrete slab. 6. The temperature of the mixed cement shall not vary more than 10 degrees F plus or minus from the temperature of the concrete forming the slab which is to receive the cement patch. 7. Finish: Troweled concrete shall be screeded, floated and troweled. The fmished surface shall be free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be a true plane within 3/16 inch in ten feet. Provide a troweled finish on floor slab patch as required to match existing slab fmish. 8. Curing: Refer to Section 03 3000 for curing and sealing materials and application requirements. SECTION 03 0140 (03925) — CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION A. Work Includes: Preparation of substrate surfaces, including grinding of existing concrete slab. B. Grinding: After the existing VCT flooring has been removed, prepare the existing floor slab by the following treatment: 1. SASE Grinder with following attributes: a. Grinder: SASE 780 Multifunctional Grinder 1) Weight: 1,100 lbs (minimum). 2) Required Power: 220volt, 50amp, 3 phase. 3) 20 Horsepower (minimum). SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 4) Grinding Width: 30.5 inches. 5) Grinding Head: Planetary. 6) RPM: Variable (300 — 1,000). 7) Grinding Torque: 70.8Foot Pounds (min). b. Dust Control: SASE Bull 100 Dust Containment System. 1) Contractor's Option: SASE Bull 3600 Dust Containment System. Selected system must provide: (a) Filtering: 3 stage system (b) Required Power: 220volt, 14amp, 3 phase. (c) 10 Horsepower. c. Manufacturer: 1) SASE Company, Inc. 26423 79th Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 Telephone No. 800 -522 -2606 2. HTC Grinder with following attributes: a. Grinder: HTC 800 Classic or 800HDX Multifunctional Grinders with following attributes: 1) Weight: 8001bs. - 1,150 lbs 2) Required Power: 480volt, 40amp, 3 phase. 3) 15 - 20 Horsepower. 4) Grinding Width: 32 inches (minimum). 5) Grinding Head: Planetary. 6) RPM: Variable (300 — 1,400). 7) Grinding Torque: 70.8Foot Pounds (min). b. Dust Control: HTC 10iAD Dust Containment System. 1) Contractor's Option: HTC 86D Dust Containment System. Selected system must provide: (a) Filtering: 3 stage system (pre- separator, textile, and HEPA) (b) Required Power: 480volt, 20amp, 3 phase. (c) 8 Horsepower. (d) 500 cfrn. Air flow (minimum) c. Manufacturer: 1) HTC Inc. 5611 Tazewell Pike Knoxville, TN. 37849 Telephone No. 877 -482 -8700 www.htc- floorsystems. com C. Drill and/or core all inserts in slab that are no longer used, fill the remaining hole with non - shrink grout and allow to cure.. D. Clean: Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris. E. Equipment Operation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures. SECTION 03 2000 (03200) — CONCRETE REINFORCING A. Work Includes: Reinforcing steel and accessories for cast -in -place concrete, Reinforcing steel jar unit masonry (when required). B. Reinforcing Bars: 1. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars, for cast -in -place concrete. ASTM A615, Grade 40 plain bars only where noted. 2. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars, for unit masonry. 3. ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed bars, where noted on Drawings. C. Reinforcing Mesh Fabric: ASTM A185, welded wire fabric. D. Accessories and Bar Supports 1. ACI 315. Use plastic tips for accessories in contact with surfaces exposed to view or weather. 2. Ground Supported Reinforcing: Class 3 wire supports with sand plates or precast concrete black bar supports per CRSI. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Interior and Exterior Slabs -on- Grade: Formed construction joints: a. Diamond Dowel System: PNA Construction Technologies, Inc. 1- 800 -542 -0214. b. Speed Plate: Greenstreak Group, Inc. 1- 800 - 325 -9504 c. Smooth round dowels as indicated on drawings. E. Detail reinforcing steel and bar supports according to ACI and CRSI references. F. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Placing: a. Place reinforcing steel according to Shop Drawings. Use reinforcing steel free of loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or coatings that reduce bond with concrete. b. Position and support reinforcing steel by wiring together and fastening in place to insure against displacement during concrete placing. Do not tack weld. Place no bars while concrete is being poured. c. Provide minimum cover according to ACI 318 unless detailed otherwise. d. Locate reinforcing for slabs on grade as shown on the Structural Drawings. e. Bend no bars after being partially embedded in hardened concrete. f. Heat bending of reinforcing is not permitted. g. Notify the OSR when reinforcing steel for each pour has been placed. Place concrete only with OSR's approval. 3. Splices: a. Class B lap splices as indicated in the structural drawings, unless otherwise indicated. b. Lap wire fabric in slabs so that full, uncut squares of fabric of both sheets lap each other at least 1/2 square or 6 ", whichever is greater. 4. Field Adjustments: Adjust bar locations to avoid interference with inserts, sleeves, and reinforcing. When adjustment exceeds 25% of spacing within the plane or one bar diameter perpendicular to the plane of reinforcing, review layout with OSR. G. Field Quality Control: Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. SECTION 03 3000 (03300) — CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Work Included: Temporary formwork, cast -in -place concrete, masonry grout, embedded items, below slab vapor barrier, base fill, grease trap covers, frames and accessories (when required). B. Form Materials: 1. Exposed Surface Form Material: Plywood, tempered concrete form grade hardboard, metal, plastic, paper, or other approved material capable of producing a Smooth Form Finish. 2. Unexposed Surface Form Material: Steel, fiberglass, sound plywood or lumber. C. Concrete Materials: Conform to ACI 301. 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, IA, I1, 111, or IIIA (verify required Type with Drawings). 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207: Type S may be used for masonry grout. 3. Aggregate: a. Exposed Concrete: ASTM C33. Obtain aggregate for exposed concrete from same source for uniform appearance throughout the work. b. Class C Concrete Gradation: ASTM C33 meeting the following gradation criteria: Stone Size/Sieve ".' `` Percent ( %) Retained 1' h" stone 6 - 24 ' /4" stone 6 - 24 No. 30 6 - 15 No. 50 6 - 15 No. 100 3 - 5 Note: 1 — 8% Retained on the top size sieve 1) Adjust maximum aggregate size as required for pumped concrete, maximum size shall not exceed as stated below. 2) Do not use manufactured sand unless blended with natural sand. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3) Adjust proportions of coarse, intermediate, and fine aggregates to provide the following material proportioning characteristics: (a) Coarseness Factor (CF) of 55% to 70 %. Coarseness Factor is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the #8 sieve that is also retained on the 3/8" sieve. Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows: CF = (Percent of Combined Aggregate retained on the 3/8" sieve) / (Percent of Combined Aggregate retained on the #8 sieve) (b) Adjusted Workability Factor (Adj -WF) of 32% to 39 %. Workability Factor (WF) is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the #8 sieve. The adjusted workability factor (Adj -WF) is calculated as follows: (Adj -WF) = WF +[((Wt. of Cementitious Material- 5641bs)/94)x2.5]. The range of accepted Adj -WF for a given CF is as follows: (Adj -WF) = ((10.5- 0.15CF) +34.5) +/- 2.5 (c) Gradation requirements of ASTM C33 may be waived in order to meet the ranges specified above. c. Masonry Grout: ASTM C404. d. Aggregate derived from sources containing chert, shale, or shaly rock shall not be used. e. Class F Concrete (for Grout): *Denotes 100 %passing the same sieve size shown. 4. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 5. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120 may be used up to 40% of the total cementitious content. 6. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. D. Admixtures: Provide products free of added chloride ions from Euclid, Master Builders, SIKH, Grace or comparable. 1. Retarding Admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type B. 2. Accelerating Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type C. 3. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. 4. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. 5. High Range Water Reducing Admixture /Superplasticizer: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F. E. Accessories: 1. Vapor Barrier: Ten (10) mil thick, decay resistant, clear polyethylene sheet, type recommended for below grade application with adhesive backed polyethylene tape. 2. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, preformed, resilient, non - extruding, bituminous impregnated fiber board units; 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Embedded Items: a. Weld Plates and Structural Steel Inserts: ASTM A36. b. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, galvanized. 4. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. From Euclid, Master Builders or comparable. 5. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry. 6. Moisture Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or polyethylene- coated burlap, conforming to ASTM C171. 7. Patching Compound: Portland cement mortar and bonding grout complying with ACI 301, Chapter 9 - Repair of Surface Defects. F. Concrete Slab Base Fill and Compacting Requirements: 1. Base Fill Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with less than 5% passing a No. 200 sieve and free of organic material. a. Base Fill for projects with methane venting requirements: Typical Base Fill Material will not work for your project, follow the specific recommendations of Drawings and Specifications by separate Contract. 2. Compaction Requirements: Place Base Fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers used for trench material compacting. Place Base Fill materials evenly to required elevations of each lift. Compact each layer fully before placing subsequent lifts SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ax AF',• *v a on p aids e -; Coarse 1/2" Greater than 6" Coarse 3/8" 3" to 6" Fine Sand Less than 3" *Denotes 100 %passing the same sieve size shown. 4. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 5. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS): ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120 may be used up to 40% of the total cementitious content. 6. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. D. Admixtures: Provide products free of added chloride ions from Euclid, Master Builders, SIKH, Grace or comparable. 1. Retarding Admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type B. 2. Accelerating Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type C. 3. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. 4. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. 5. High Range Water Reducing Admixture /Superplasticizer: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F. E. Accessories: 1. Vapor Barrier: Ten (10) mil thick, decay resistant, clear polyethylene sheet, type recommended for below grade application with adhesive backed polyethylene tape. 2. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, preformed, resilient, non - extruding, bituminous impregnated fiber board units; 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Embedded Items: a. Weld Plates and Structural Steel Inserts: ASTM A36. b. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, galvanized. 4. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. From Euclid, Master Builders or comparable. 5. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry. 6. Moisture Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or polyethylene- coated burlap, conforming to ASTM C171. 7. Patching Compound: Portland cement mortar and bonding grout complying with ACI 301, Chapter 9 - Repair of Surface Defects. F. Concrete Slab Base Fill and Compacting Requirements: 1. Base Fill Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with less than 5% passing a No. 200 sieve and free of organic material. a. Base Fill for projects with methane venting requirements: Typical Base Fill Material will not work for your project, follow the specific recommendations of Drawings and Specifications by separate Contract. 2. Compaction Requirements: Place Base Fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers used for trench material compacting. Place Base Fill materials evenly to required elevations of each lift. Compact each layer fully before placing subsequent lifts SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) G. Curing Compound: Clear, waterborne, curing and sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1. 1. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc.: High Seal.; Dayton- Superior Corporation: Safe Cure and Seal; Euclid Chemical Co.: Diamond Clear VOX; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: Dress and Seal WB; Sonneborn: Kure -N -Seal W; TK Products: Achro Kure WB. H. Interior Concrete Penetrating Sealer/Hardener: Penetrating colorless, odorless, VOC compliant, water -based reactive silicate solution sealer, hardener and dustproofer. 1. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc.: Intraseal; Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc.; Ashford Formula; Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem Sure Hard; Euclid Chemical Co.; Euco Diamond Hard; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard; Sonnebom: Kure -N- Harden; TK Products: TK- 5329A. I. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install vapor barrier directly under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints 6" and seal with vapor barrier tape. Protect vapor barrier during placing of base material, reinforcing and concrete. Repair punctures and tears before placing concrete. 3. Locate construction joints for interior slabs on grade as shown on Structural Drawings. 4. Locate control joints for interior slabs on grade as shown on Structural Drawings. 5. Construct joints by sawing to leave a 1/8" wide gap 1/4 the slab thickness in depth, or use joint inserts. In areas where slab is indicated to be exposed, saw cut joints or inserts may be used. In areas to receive finish flooring, saw cut only. a. Sawing: Follow manufacturer's instructions for use. Manufacturer: Soff -Cut International, Inc.; Tel: 800- 776 -3328; Web: www.soffcut.com 6. Where sawing is used, complete sawing between four to six hours after placement has been completed. Where inserts are used, form a groove in the concrete with a metal straight edge, and place the plastic insert into the groove. 7. Provide isolation joints where shown on Structural Drawings. 8. Column Isolation Joints: Use plastic circular or diamond shape formwork designed to lock shut around columns for the full slab thickness or diamond joint as shown on the Structural Drawings. 9. Provide exterior paving joints in type and location as indicated on Drawings. 10. Locate construction joints for structural concrete work not over 60 feet on center. 11. Locate and construct construction joints for structural concrete work to least impair strength. Locate joints perpendicular to main reinforcing. 12. Install reinforcing steel continuously across construction joints. Provide dowels where directed. Install longitudinal keys (at least 1 -1/2" deep) at joints in walls and between walls and footings. Key other construction joints where directed. Roughen and thoroughly clean surface of concrete, remove laitance, and wet surface before placing new concrete against joint. Slush vertical joints with a neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete. J. Concrete Mixes: 1. Schedule for Cold Climates: Class Design Strength p.s.i.. Nominal :Agg. Mai. Slump inches ' . Air • %'- : 'Max' W./C. A 4000 3/4 3-4 - - B 4000 3/4 3-4 6 +1% 0.46 C 3000min 3500max 1 -1/2 3-4 - 0.55 D 3000 1 -1/2 3 -5 E 3000 3/4 3-4 6 +1% 0.46 F 3000 - 8 -11 - - 2. Schedule for Warm Climates: Class Design . Strength p.s.i. 'Nominal. Agg.. . Max. Slump inches -1. Air.. % '; .:.... t Max ' W/C A 4000 3/4 3-4 - - B 4000 3/4 3-4 - 0.55 C 3000min 3500max 1 -1/2 3-4 initial - 0.55 D 3000 1 -1/2 3 -5 E 3000 3/4 3-4 - 0.55 F 3000 - 8 -11 - - SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. Class C Concrete: a. The 28 day design compressive strength, f' c, of the concrete mix shall be 3000 p.s.i. minimum and 3500 p.s.i. maximum. The design compressive strength shall be used to determine the required average compressive strength, fcr, per ACI 301. In no case shall the required average compressive strength exceed 5000 p.s.i. b. Slump shall be kept consistent with placement conditions. All on -site slump adjustment will be made with HRWRA (Superplasticizer) after initial slump is verified for consistency. No water is to be added on -site, NO EXCEPTIONS. Final slump shall be 6 " -8" maximum. c. Concrete shall have a shrinkage value at 28 days not greater than 0.04% as measured in accordance with ASTM C157, modified to allow 7 days of curing prior to drying. This shrinkage limit may be increased for the use of permitted chemical admixtures in accordance with ASTM C494. 4. Class D Concrete: Substitute 3/4" or 1" maximum aggregate size if 1 -1/2" is unavailable. 5. Fly Ash Use: a. Class C Concrete: Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 15 percent by weight. b. Class E Concrete: Do not use fly ash. c. For all other concrete, fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 20 percent by weight. 6. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) Use: a. Class C Concrete: Grade 100 or 120 may be used up to 40% of the total cementitious content. b. Class B, and E Concrete: Do not use GGBFS. 7. Class F Concrete (for Grout): a. Use no water reducing admixtures, salts, or anti -freeze ingredients. b. The use of air - entraining admixtures is permitted. 8. Concrete Class Applications: a. Class A: All concrete except as specified below. b. Class B: Concrete exposed to weather including dock paving, foundation walls, accent walls, and retaining walls. c. Class C: Interior slabs on grade. d. Class D: Spread and continuous footings. e. Class E: Exterior sidewalks, stoops, stairs, ramps and curbs. f. Class F: Masonry grout. K. Concrete Mixing: 1. Concrete Supplier: Ready -mix concrete, mixed and delivered according to the requirements of ASTM C94. 2. High -Early Strength: Except for Class C concrete, Type III Portland cement may be used to produce high -early strength concrete. Adding additional amounts of Type I Portland cement to produce high -early strength concrete is not permitted. 3. Cement: Use a single brand of Portland cement unless written permission to use more than one is obtained from Architect. Use same brand and type of cement for concrete exposed to view. 4. Workability: Provide workable concrete to fill forms, without leaving voids or honeycombs without segregation. 5. Admixtures: Water reducing admixture may be used to reduce the unit water content of concrete or to increase slump. Use air entraining admixture for air entrained concrete. Accelerators or Retarders may be used to decrease or increase setting time in order to facilitate concrete finishing. Use no other admixtures. Do not use calcium chloride as a set accelerator. L. Placing Concrete: 1. Place no concrete until reinforcing steel and items to be embedded in concrete are in place. Pour only with OSR's permission. 2. Thoroughly clean forms before placing concrete. Dampen porous earth in contact with concrete. Do not place concrete under water or on frozen ground. 3. Where new concrete is to be placed against concrete that has set, roughen and clean existing surfaces. Thoroughly dampen existing surfaces. 4. Place concrete according to ACI 301 and AC1 304. Place concrete continuously so that no concrete is placed against concrete that has attained its initial set, except at authorized joints. 5. Place concrete as close as possible to final position. Prevent segregation. Place with maximum free drop of five feet. Consolidate during placing with internal vibrators (8000 vpm minimum). Work around reinforcement, embedded items and into form corners. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Refer to Section 04 2000 for additional Class F concrete criteria. 6. Place concrete within 90 minutes after mix water has been added. 7. Maintain, on -site, an adequate supply of evaporation retarder during concrete slab -on -grade placement to prevent rapid evaporation of the surface moisture. Apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions when conditions are conducive to rapid evaporation of the surface moisture of the concrete such as exposed placements and/or hot weather placements. SPECIFICATIONS -- DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 -8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) M. Concrete Floor Finishing: 1. Interior concrete slab on grade, Class C concrete: A minimum of one (1) finisher or finishing supervisor shall be a certified ACI Flatwork Finisher/Technician and shall be present during all interior slab on grade finishing operations. 2. Screed exposed concrete floors and floors to receive resilient flooring, carpet, or thin -set ceramic and quarry tile to an even, level plane. Float and provide toweled finish in accordance with procedures in ACI 302.1R, and as recommended by ACI to achieve floor flatness and levelness specified. Uniformly slope to elevations shown on the Drawings to floor drains. 3. Finished surfaces, other than rooms with floor drains, shall have floor flatness and levelness as determined in accordance with ASTM E1155 as follows: SOV - Specified Overall Value MLV - Minimum Local Value 4. A test section to determine the minimum local value shall meet the following criteria: a. No test section shall measure less than 4 ft. in width nor less than 15 ft. in length. b. No portion of the test surface shall be associated with more than one test section. c. When testing a concrete floor, no test section boundary shall cross any construction joint. 5. Verify floor flatness and levelness of first section within 72 hours of finishing, preferably within 24 hours after placement. If floor slab does not meet minimum average values specified, do not proceed with further installations until corrective measures for installation and finishing are made to meet minimum average floor flatness and levelness, and are approved by the OSR. 6. Corrective measures, acceptable to the OSR, such as underlayment or grinding, may be made to floor slabs scheduled to receive fmish materials. 7. Corrective measures such as grinding, planning, surface repair or re- topping will not be permitted for floor slabs scheduled for clear sealer/hardener fmish. N. Concrete Curb Finishing: 1. Interior concrete curbs at the Produce Labeling Room and the Cooler(s), Class C concrete: A minimum of one (1) finisher or finishing supervisor shall be a certified ACI Flatwork Finisher/Technician and shall be present during all curb finishing operations. a. Concrete Curb Finish: Provide a light broom finish; this can be achieved by using a soft bristle paint brush or other appropriate finishing tool. Finished curb to provide a "tooth" for applying paint. O. Concrete Curing: 1. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain concrete with a minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature above 55° F for a total of seven days for normal concrete or three days for high -early strength concrete. Changes in temperature of concrete shall not exceed 5° F in any one hour or 50° F in any 24 hour period. 2. Cure formed surfaces by leaving formwork in place during entire curing period, or if forms are removed during curing period, by one of the methods specified below for unformed surfaces. Keep steel forms heated by sun and wood forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period. 3. Cure slabs to receive exterior concrete penetrating sealer, interior concrete penetrating sealer/hardener, ceramic tile, or quarry tile by moisture cover curing. Apply moisture retaining cover as soon as fmishing operations are complete and concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by the covering. Sprinkle concrete as necessary during application of covering. Lap edges and ends at least 4 ", and seal laps. Weigh down covering to prevent displacement. Patch holes and tears that occur during the curing period. a. Areas to receive interior concrete penetrating sealer/hardener shall be moisture cover cured for a minimum of 7 days. 4. Cure other unformed surfaces by using a water based curing compound. Apply curing compound according to manufacturer's instructions using spray equipment. Apply curing compound as soon as finishing operations are complete, free water on surface has disappeared and no water sheen can be seen. Apply two coats at right angles to each other on exterior slabs and one coat on interior slabs. Re -Apply at saw cut joints if curing compound was applied before sawing. a. Coordinate with resilient flooring and carpet suppliers and verify that adhesives to be used are compatible with curing compound floor sealer specified herein. Provide moisture cover curing as indicated above at slabs where non - compatible adhesives are used. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 9 SOV Flatness (FF): FF: 35 FF: 24 Levelness (FL): FL: 25 FL: 17 SOV - Specified Overall Value MLV - Minimum Local Value 4. A test section to determine the minimum local value shall meet the following criteria: a. No test section shall measure less than 4 ft. in width nor less than 15 ft. in length. b. No portion of the test surface shall be associated with more than one test section. c. When testing a concrete floor, no test section boundary shall cross any construction joint. 5. Verify floor flatness and levelness of first section within 72 hours of finishing, preferably within 24 hours after placement. If floor slab does not meet minimum average values specified, do not proceed with further installations until corrective measures for installation and finishing are made to meet minimum average floor flatness and levelness, and are approved by the OSR. 6. Corrective measures, acceptable to the OSR, such as underlayment or grinding, may be made to floor slabs scheduled to receive fmish materials. 7. Corrective measures such as grinding, planning, surface repair or re- topping will not be permitted for floor slabs scheduled for clear sealer/hardener fmish. N. Concrete Curb Finishing: 1. Interior concrete curbs at the Produce Labeling Room and the Cooler(s), Class C concrete: A minimum of one (1) finisher or finishing supervisor shall be a certified ACI Flatwork Finisher/Technician and shall be present during all curb finishing operations. a. Concrete Curb Finish: Provide a light broom finish; this can be achieved by using a soft bristle paint brush or other appropriate finishing tool. Finished curb to provide a "tooth" for applying paint. O. Concrete Curing: 1. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain concrete with a minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature above 55° F for a total of seven days for normal concrete or three days for high -early strength concrete. Changes in temperature of concrete shall not exceed 5° F in any one hour or 50° F in any 24 hour period. 2. Cure formed surfaces by leaving formwork in place during entire curing period, or if forms are removed during curing period, by one of the methods specified below for unformed surfaces. Keep steel forms heated by sun and wood forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period. 3. Cure slabs to receive exterior concrete penetrating sealer, interior concrete penetrating sealer/hardener, ceramic tile, or quarry tile by moisture cover curing. Apply moisture retaining cover as soon as fmishing operations are complete and concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by the covering. Sprinkle concrete as necessary during application of covering. Lap edges and ends at least 4 ", and seal laps. Weigh down covering to prevent displacement. Patch holes and tears that occur during the curing period. a. Areas to receive interior concrete penetrating sealer/hardener shall be moisture cover cured for a minimum of 7 days. 4. Cure other unformed surfaces by using a water based curing compound. Apply curing compound according to manufacturer's instructions using spray equipment. Apply curing compound as soon as finishing operations are complete, free water on surface has disappeared and no water sheen can be seen. Apply two coats at right angles to each other on exterior slabs and one coat on interior slabs. Re -Apply at saw cut joints if curing compound was applied before sawing. a. Coordinate with resilient flooring and carpet suppliers and verify that adhesives to be used are compatible with curing compound floor sealer specified herein. Provide moisture cover curing as indicated above at slabs where non - compatible adhesives are used. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET P. Patching and Cleaning Formed Surfaces: 1. General: Patch tie holes and defective areas immediately after form removal. 2. Rough Form Finish: Patch holes and defects to leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. 3. Smooth Form Finish: Patch holes and defects, and completely remove fms by rubbing with wood blocks. 4. Cleaning: Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains. Q. Application of Interior Concrete Floor Sealer/Hardener: 1. Seal and harden interior concrete floors where indicated on Drawings, according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply minimum seven days after pouring floor. 2. Clean floors of curing compounds, contaminants and stains such as waxes, grease, oil, dirt, and dust as recommended by the sealer/hardener manufacturer. 3. Apply sealer to floors thoroughly dry, and clean. Do not apply sealer when temperature is below manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Apply sealer at a rate based on concrete porosity and manufacturer's recommendations. Aggressively scrub into surfaces with an abrasive mechanical scrubber or bristle broom. Keep surface thoroughly wet with sealer, and when sealer begins to gel and thicken, spray with water and repeat scrubbing. Squeegee and vacuum surface thoroughly dry leaving no surface sealer. Immediately repeat the process a second time to ensure complete penetration of sealer. On completion of second application, again thoroughly squeegee and vacuum surface as necessary to leave surface completely dry to prevent sealer film left wet on the surface from drying to a patchy milky appearance. 5. if patchy and milky appearance results, remove by means recommended by the sealer/hardener manufacturer. 6. After application is complete and thoroughly dry, abrasively scrub with a mechanical scrubber and water to bring out shine. 7. Close spaces in which sealer is being applied to traffic, and keep closed for 24 hours after application is completed, or longer if recommended by manufacturer. R. Field Quality Control: Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. SECTION 03 5416 (03542) — HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT A. Work Includes: Hydraulic- cement based underlayment for preparation of substrate surfaces to accept new flooring materials. B. Hydraulic- Cement Based Underlayment: Hydraulic- cement based, polymer- modified, self - leveling and trowel grade products that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 3/16 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. C. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements. a. "K -15" self - leveling. b. "SD -P" or "SD -F Feather Finish" trowel application. 2. Mapei. a. "Ultra/Plan" self - leveling. b. "Plani/Patch" trowel application. 3. Degussa Building Systems, Inc. a. Thoro® Underlayment Self- Leveling. b. Thoro® Underlayment Trowel Grade. D. Provide self - leveling and/or trowel grade products as required to produce a level floor substrate acceptable to floor finish manufacturer and installer. E. Gypsum based or latex, non - cementitious underlayment s are NOT acceptable. F. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. G. Control Joint Filler and Transition Ramp Material : Trowel grade products of same manufacturer as self leveling product selected. 1. Products: Ardex SD -F Feather Finish, Thoro® Underlayment Trowel Grade, Mapei "Plani/Patch ". H. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Obtain additional requirements by getting the full spec from your General Contractor. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 -10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) I. Transition Ramp Installation Requirements: 1. At locations indicated on Drawings where there is a transition between VCT tile and the concrete floor, that transition will be created as shown on Drawings and noted here. 2. At transition locations the VCT flooring must already be in- place. 3. A transition ramp will be constructed and will project 6" beyond the end of the VCT tile 4. Along the tile edge and the end of the transition ramp projection protect the surfaces by masking or other means. 5. At locations where VCT tile creates an inside corner or an outside corner, carry the line of the transition ramp and the protection material to their natural terminus (Note: the projection at the far point of an outside corner will be more than a 6" projection). 6. Mix the transition ramp material to the recommended stiffness. 7. Using a flat blade trowel or other application tool, create a transition ramp starting at the top with the thickness of the VCT tile and going down to zero (concrete surface) at the 6" projection line. 8. Protect ramps from ALL TRAFFIC during drying time (1 -2 hours depending on temperature and humidity). 9. After ramps are dry remove protection material and excess misplaced transition strip material and dispose of. DIVISION 04 - MASONRY SECTION 04 2000 (04200) — UNIT MASONRY A. Work Includes: Mortar and placing grout, concrete masonry units, joint reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories, installation of reinforcing bars and deformed bar anchors in unit masonry, installation of anchor bolts and other embedments in unit masonry. B. Mortar Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. Provide white portland cement when colored mortar is required. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Aggregate: ASTM C144. 4. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. 5. Mortar Cement: Contractor may, at his option, use mortar cement manufactured by Lafarge Corporation conforming to the requirements for mortar types specified and complying with the current Uniform Building Code Standard 21 -14 for Mortar Cement. a. Obtain current certified test report indicating mortar cement meets UBC requirements for air content, flexural bond strength and compressive strength for each mortar type. 6. If pre - blended portland cement - hydrated lime is used, obtain product data for each mortar type and certification that products contain only portland cement and hydrated lime, and meet ASTM C270 proportion specifications with maximum air content of 12 percent. 7. Masonry cements are NOT acceptable. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Smooth and Split (Rock) Faced Normal Weight Units: (Minimum 125 pcf), ASTM C90, manufactured from sand - gravel aggregate conforming to ASTM C33. a. Load Bearing Unit Shapes: All units (excluding lintel, cap and sill block units) to be Plain Double Corner; Single Open End, ( "A" shaped); or Double Open End, ( "H" shaped) units. 1) (CMU -1): Smooth Faced. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dur- O -Wal, (DOW). b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc, (H & B). c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, (MRC). 2. Wire Positioners: Provide 9 gauge wire unless noted otherwise. a. (DOW): "D /A 811" and "D /A 816 ". b. (H &B): "RB" and "RB- TWIN". c. (MRC): "No. 3401" and "No. 3402 ". 3. Single Wythe CMU Joint Reinforcement: Provide hot - dipped galvanized, complying with ASTM A153, Class B -2 coating; longitudinal rods and cross rods. Preformed corners and special shapes. Provide 9 gauge wire, unless noted otherwise. a. (DOW): "Ladur" Design, Standard. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET b. (H & B): "No.220" Ladder -Mesh. c. (MRC): Ladder Type, Series 200. 4. Rigid Anchors: 1 -1/2" wide, 1/4" thick, minimum 24" long, hot -dip galvanized steel anchors with ends turned up 2 ". a. (DOW): No. 301Z. b. (H & B): Rigid Partition Anchor; No. 344. c. (MRC): Rigid Steel Ties; No. 3000Z. 5. Injection Adhesive Anchors: a. Substrate temperature at or above 40 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Hilti: "HIT HY -20 or HY 150 Injection Adhesive Anchors ". 2) Simpson Strong -Tie: "Epoxy -Tie Adhesive" (ET) or Epoxy -Tie High - Strength Adhesive" (SET). 3) Powers Fasteners (formerly Rawl): "Chem -Fast Acrylic Epoxy Injection Mortar" Anchors; or approved equal. 4) ITW Ramset/Redhead Epcon system, ceramic 6 epoxy; or approved equal. b. Substrate temperature below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Simpson Strong -Tie: "Acrylic -Tie Adhesive (AT) ". Adhesive shall be a two- component solid acrylic based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. The adhesive must develop a minimum 9,275 p.s.i. compressive yield strength after seven -day cure 6. Weld Plate Positioning Clips 1) Contractor's option: Weld plate positioning clips to aid in the positioning of weld plates embedded into the masonry wall. (a) Trico Masonry Products: Trico EZ Clip, Tel: 888.922.8377 E. Mortar Proportions and Strengths: 1. Conform to the requirements of the "Proportion Specifications" of ASTM C270 for portland cement -lime with a maximum air content of 12 %. 2. Use mortar type proportioned by volume, with minimum average compressive strength as follows: (Use no masonry cement.) a. Type S; 1800 psi. 3. Use no admixtures, salts, or antifreeze compounds. F. Grout Type: Class F concrete specified in Section 03 3000 of this specification for typical masonry grout. 3/4" maximum aggregate grout may be used in voids larger than 6" except for bond beams with No. 8 or larger reinforcing bars. G. Concrete Masonry Strength: Exterior wall construction: fm = 1500 psi. H. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Provide solids and special shapes at jambs and corners, cutting with a masonry saw. Expose no broken units in finished work. 3. Provide unit types as specified below at masonry containing vertical reinforcement. a. Load Bearing Unit Shapes: All units (excluding lintel, cap and sill block units) to be Plain Double Corner; Single Open End, ( "A" shaped); or Double Open End, ( "H" shaped) units. 4. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation. 5. Lay masonry plumb and true to lines and levels indicated. 6. Where masonry units are disturbed or repositioned after initial placement, remove mortar and relay units with fresh mortar. Where new masonry is placed against masonry that has set or begun to set, remove loose mortar and clean existing surfaces. 7. If head or bed joint is not full thickness of face shell of unit, or contains voids, remove unit and relay with fresh mortar. 8. Keep grout spaces, cavities, and wythes free of excess mortar droppings. 9. Form corbels, chases, openings and recesses required for work of other trades. 10. Build -in anchors, nailing blocks, ties, and work of other trades. 11. Build -in hollow metal frames m masonry walls. Build frame anchors into mortar joints, and solidly grout jamb sections full of mortar, except where electrical wiring is shown. 12. Do not use mortar as grout/corefill. 13. Lay masonry in running bond, unless otherwise indicated, with 3/8" joints. 14. Tool mortar joints as follows: Exposed joints, Concave; Non - exposed joints, Flush cut. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 12 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 15. Lay first course of concrete masonry units above footings, foundations and concrete slabs in full bed of mortar. Starting course bed joints shall not be less than 1/4 inch thick and not more than 3/4 inches thick. 16. Head and bed joints shall be full thickness of face shell of unit, or fully mortared for solid units. 17. Fully mortar webs where adjacent cells are to be grouted. 18. Butter head joints on both faces, and shove into place to squeeze out excess mortar. 19. Where bearing walls are laid up separately, regularly block vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets, and reinforce joint with rigid anchors spaced not over four feet on center vertically. Build anchors into mortar joints. 20. Anchor non - bearing partitions at corners and intersections with masonry bonding. 21. Where masonry abuts cast -in -place concrete walls, install dovetail triangular ties spaced 16" o.c. vertically. 22. Where walls are not placed with horizontal deformed reinforcing bars, continuously reinforce walls with joint reinforcement placed in mortar joints not over 16" on center vertically, or as indicated on Drawings. Embed side rods in full mortar bed. Lap reinforcing 6" minimum Discontinue reinforcing at control joints. 23. Place deformed reinforcing bars as masonry is laid. Lap bar ends not less than lap indicated on Drawings. Place single bars in center of wall thickness unless otherwise noted. Prior to grouting, secure reinforcing against displacement by wire positioners. Intervals shall not exceed height of lift for low lift grouting or exceed 8' -0" on center for high lift grouting. Locate reinforcing within + 1/2 inch of specified location. 24. Grout cores at reinforcing; grout all cells as noted on Drawings. When grouting operations must be interrupted for 1 hour or longer, create a construction joint by stopping grout 1 -1/2" below top of uppermost course. 25. Cleanouts (3" x 3" minimum) to be provided at the base of all pours exceeding 5' -0" in height. Grout lifts shall not exceed 5' -0" unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Grout cores in 5' -0" maximum lifts or if cleanouts are provided, according to Table 5 of ACI 530.1 -95 /ASCE 6- 95 \TMS 602 -95. Consolidate grout with 3/4" diameter low velocity internal vibrator (8,000 vpm min.). Dip vibrator full height within grout around reinforcement and embedded items. Reconsolidate grout after initial water loss and settlement. Do not use vibrator in contact with reinforcing to consolidate grout. 26. Provide temporary bracing/shoring during erection. Leave temporary bracing/shoring in place until structure is permanently self - supporting. I. Lintels and Bond Beams: 1. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated on Drawings. 2. Where other types of lintels are not indicated, provide reinforced unit masonry lintels at wall openings, including openings for mechanical and electrical work. Provide lintel reinforcing as indicated on Drawings for width of opening. 3. Support and tie reinforcing in place with a minimum clearance of 3/4" between reinforcing and block shells. Build in anchors and other accessories. 4. Grout lintels and bond beams. Place and consolidate with internal vibrator (8,000 vpm) without disturbing reinforcing. J. Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of work, power wash and clean as necessary exposed masonry to remove laitance, excess mortar, efflorescence and stains. 2. Cut out and re -point defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 3. Do not use acid solutions or proprietary cleaning compounds without prior approval of OSR. Do not use metal cleaning tools and brushes or abrasive powders. DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 051222(05122) — STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING RETROFIT A. Work Includes: Fabricate, deliver to job site, unload, protect, store and erect: 1. Structural steel Framing. 2. Miscellaneous plates and angles used to support structural members or deck, unless otherwise noted. 3. Bolts and fasteners for structural members. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1 Fabricator Qualifications: Structural steel fabricator shall be AISC Certified, Category STD "Standard for Steel Building Structures" and approved by the building official to perform work without special inspection. 2. Welder Qualifications: Welders shall be AWS certified for the type of welding being performed. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 13 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. EXISTING CONDITIONS: Verify dimensions affected by existing construction prior to fabrication. D. Structural Steel Shapes: 1. Wide Flange Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi, unless otherwise noted. 2. Miscellaneous Structural Steel Shapes (other than wide flange): ASTM A36, unless otherwise noted. 3. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi, unless otherwise noted. 4. Stuctural Pipe Columns: ASTM A53, Grade B, Fy= 35 ksi. E. Electrodes: E70, according to AISC and AWS references. F. Botts: 1. ASTM A325 unless noted otherwise. 2. ASTM A307 or ASTM A490, as indicated on drawings. G. Expansion Anchors: For solid CMU or cast in place concrete only: Hilti Kwik -bolt. H. Injection Adhesive Anchors: Hilti: "HIT HY -20 or HY 150 Injection Adhesive Anchors ". Non - metallic, Non - shrink Grout conforming to ASTM C -1107: 1. Conspec: "Enduro 50 Grout "; Euclid: "Euco N -S Grout "; L & M: "Duragrout "; Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k "; Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout "; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi -Vex Grout #1000. J. Bituminous Coating: Carboline - "Bitumastic No. 50 ". K. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Fabricate according to Shop Drawings and AISC references. 2. For connections not detailed or for which no end reactions are given, provide AISC Type II connections capable of supporting one half the full allowable uniform load capacity of member. 3. Weld or bolt shop connections. Bolt field connections unless noted otherwise. Tighten bolts to a snug -tight condition. 4. Use standard holes unless noted otherwise. Horizontal small slotted holes are permitted in outstanding legs of framing angles. 5. Make no substitution of section size or modification of detail. Provide full length pieces between connections or with splices as indicated on Drawings. L. Shop Preparation and Painting: 1. Prepare steel to be primed after fabrication as required to provide a smooth, even surface. 2. Interior Steel: Prime steel with fabricator's standard primer. Apply free of skips, sags, runs, and drips. Allow ample drying time before handling to prevent damage. 3. Exterior Steel (i.e. frames and braces above roof, etc.): a. Unless noted otherwise, prime with IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Primer No. 163 or Retard -X Water Base Primer No. 162. b. Apply according to paint manufacturer's recommendations free of skips, sags, runs and drips. Allow ample drying time before handling to prevent damage. c. Members as noted on plan to be galvanized shall not be primed. M. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Erect according to Shop Drawings. Allow for temperature difference between erected and in service conditions. Use proper sequence to minimize fit up or induced loads. Use shims when draw exceeds 1/8 ". Distribute shims evenly throughout structure when required to maintain erection tolerances. Maximum permitted shim stack in joints is 1/2 ". 3. Furnish shims, fitting up bolts, and drift pins as required for field connections. Use drift pins to bring parts together, without distorting bolt holes or damaging metal. 4. Install temporary guys and bracing according to AISC "Specifications ", Section 1.25. Leave temporary guys and bracing in place until structure is permanently self - supporting. 5. Align structure before making permanent connections. 6. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces in permanent contact according to SSPC SP -1 "Solvent Cleaning" before members are assembled. 7. Level base plates and bearing plates to be grouted. Grout plates as soon as possible before significant loading. Protect grout from freezing. 8. Fasten compression members after they have been brought into complete contact. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 -14 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 9. Do not cut or enlarge holes with a cutting torch. 10. Correct fabrication errors in field, only as approved by the Engineer. 11. Apply bitumastic coating in two heavy coats to steel surfaces in contact with soil. 12. Clean steel to be painted of loose mill scale, loose rust, weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter suitable to receive a smooth paint finish. N. Bolted Connections: 1. Tighten anchor bolts to a snug -tight condition. Insure that parts are in contact. Use self - locking nuts or upset bolt threads to prevent nuts from backing off. 2. Make high strength bolted connections according to "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts ". 3. Tighten bolts in a sequence toward free edges to distribute loads evenly. 0. Welded Connections: 1. Conform to the requirements of AISC "Specifications" Sections J and M5.3. Do no welding below 0 deg F. Pre -heat material to be welded and maintain interpass temperatures as required. 2. Tighten erection bolts used in welded connections and leave in place, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 3. Field Welds: Clean off slag for visual inspection. P. Field Quality Control: Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. SECTION 05 2122(05222) — STEEL JOIST AND JOIST GIRDER RETROFIT A. Work Includes: Fabricate, deliver to job site, unload, protect, store, and erect steel joists, joist substitutes, joist girders, bridging, extensions, and accessories. B. Steel Joists And Joist Girders: K -series and KCS -series open web steel joists, 2.5K -series joist substitutes, joist girders, bridging, extended ends and accessories, according to SJI "Specification ", unless noted otherwise. 1. Fabricate according to Shop Drawings. 2. Camber joists and joist girders as noted. 3. Design designated joists, joist girders, and extended ends to support loads indicated. Design joist girders for offset joist loads indicated. Loads shown are minimum loads. The joist fabricator may elect to combine some joist designations and design for the heavier loads. 4. Provide beveled ends or sloped shoes where joist or joist girder slope exceeds 1/4 inch in 12 inches. C. Provide Structural Steel Fabricator with quantity of bridging attachment angles at exterior wall conditions. D. Electrodes: E70, according to AISC and AWS references. E. Bolts: ASTM A307. F. Shop Priming: Prime paint joists, joist girders and accessories with fabricator's standard primer. Clean joists and accessories to be primed after fabrication and shop prime according to SJI specifications. Apply paint to provide a smooth, even surface, free of skips, sags, runs, and drips. G. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Erect joists according to Shop Drawings. Bolt joists at column lines, weld other joists 3. Temporarily brace joists during erection, and install bridging immediately as joists are set. Fasten bridging to top and bottom chords. Where joists are exposed to view in finished work, carefully align and neatly install bridging. Securely anchor ends of bridging lines to walls and beams at both top and bottom chords. 4. Keep construction loads off joists until permanently anchored and bridged. Avoid excessive concentrated loads during construction. H. Welding: Weld joists to supporting steel according to SJI specifications, unless otherwise indicated. Use only qualified welders following AWS requirements. Clean welds for visual inspection. I. Field Quality Control: Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 15 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET SECTION 05 4000 (05400) — COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Work Includes: Interior load bearing wall framing. B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Steel Joists, Studs, Runners, and Accessories: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries, Dietrich Industries, Inc, Marino\Ware; A Division of Ware Industries, The Steel Network, Inc, or comparable products from other SSMA members that comply with specified requirements. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003 /A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H; yield strength of not less than 33,000 ksi. 2. Coating: G60; Galvanized coating weight. D. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955. 1. Web depth, minimum base metal thickness, flange width and maximum spacing as indicated on Drawings. E. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955. 1. Web depth, and flange width as indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum base metal thickness of track not less than thickness of studs or joists. F. Framing Accessories: Fabricate steel - framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003 /A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as required for complete installation: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips: standard 2" x 2 ", 68 mil. steel, pre - punched, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Gusset plates. 6. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 7. Joist hangers and end closures. 8. Hole reinforcing plates. 9. Backer plates. 10. Slide Clips: 1 -3/4" x 2 -1/4" minimum; not less than 54 mil. steel; lateral capacity 600 pounds minimum. G. Anchors, Clips and Fasteners: Provide fasteners necessary for complete installation as recommended by manufacturer, including the following: 1. Structural Steel to Clip Angle and Runners: 1 -1/4" Buildex type 12 -24 HWH, TEKS /5 screws. 2. Clip Angle Supports, Joist to Runner, and Runner to Studs: 5/8" Buildex type 8 -18 HWH, TEKS /3 screws. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion - resistant- coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel drill screws. a. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.. H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 780. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: a. Norfolk: "ZRC ". b. Welco: "Cold Galv". I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. J. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. K. Installation Requirements: 1 Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Fabricate cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in this Section. 3. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted 4. Install shop or field- fabricated, cold - formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 16 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) a. Screw, bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. 5. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. a. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. b. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 1) Welded connections are permitted only where indicated on Drawings or with written approval of OSR. (a) Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2) Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 6. Install framing members in one -piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. 7. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. 8. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold - formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. 9. Furnish and install insulation of type shown on Drawings and specified in Section 07 2100 — Thermal Insulation, in locations not accessible after fabrication. 10. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. 11. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. 12. Tolerances: Assemblies shall be level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: a. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. b. Square: Fabricate each cold - formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. L. Load Bearing Wall Construction: 1. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacing as indicated on Structural Drawings and Shop Drawings. 2. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on Structural Drawings and Shop Drawings. 3. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. 4. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall - framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 5. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 6. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. 7. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. a. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. b. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full- height wall studs. 8. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 17 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. 9. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection. Provide one or more of the following bridging types as indicated or required. a. Bridging: Cold - rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. b. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. c. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 10. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip -angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. 11. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system. M. Field Quality Control: Required inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described in the General Structural Notes on Sheet S111 or S141 of the drawings. N. Repairs and Protection: 1. Galvanizing Repairs: Immediately after erection prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Provide fmal protection to installed components subject to damage from construction activities. SECTION 05 5000(05500) - METAL FABRICATIONS A. Work Includes: 1. Steel supports and hangers at bulkheads. 2. Steel head and jamb reinforcing at traffic doors. 3. Miscellaneous steel components at openings. 4. Burglar bars and duct guards. 5. Fasteners necessary for connection of metal fabrications. 6. Embedded plates, loose angles. 7. Stainless steel column bases. 8. Galvanized sheet metal false column covers for refrigeration piping drops. 9. Other items of miscellaneous iron and steel indicated on Drawings, not indicated on Structural Drawings, and not specified under other Sections. 10. Installation of Owner fi4rnished stainless steel bumpers. B. Steel Components: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, steel for miscellaneous structural framing and non - structural purposes as follows: 1. Wide Flange Steel Shapes: ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi. 2. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes, other than wide flange: ASTM A36. 3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi. 4. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53. Provide standard weight (Schedule 40), black finish except where galvanizing is specified. 5. Checkered Steel Floor Plates: FS QQ-F-461C(1), Class 1. 6. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47. C. Stainless Steel Components: 1. Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304. Provide standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Plate: ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304. 3. Stainless Steel Fasteners: Stainless steel. 4. Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 60A. D. Accessories: 1. Anchors, Clips, Brackets, and Accessories: Provide as necessary for erection of work and attachment of work of other trades. 2. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 - 05 5000 - 18 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Fasteners: Bolts, nuts, washers and other fasteners conforming to appropriate Federal Specifications, of type, grade, and class required. Comply with ASTM A307 for bolts 1/2" diameter or larger. Provide zinc- coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. 4. Headed Studs: "Nelson Studs" as manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW. 5. Expansion Anchors: Expansion Anchors: a. Hilti; "Kwik Bolts ". b. ITW Ramset/Redhead; "Trubolt" wedge anchors. c. Simpson Strong -Tie; "Wedge -All" wedge anchor. d. Powers/RAWL; "Power- Bolt ". 6. Deformed Bar Concrete/Masonry Anchors: Nelson "D2L Deformed Bar Anchors" or comparable product conforming to ASTM A496 Low Carbon Steel. 7. Cold Galvanizing: a. Norfolk "ZRC ".. b. Welco "Cold Galv". 8. Grout: Non - metallic, non - shrink: a. Conspec: "Enduro 50 Grout ". b. Euclid: "Euco N -S Grout ". c. L & M: "Duragrout ". d. Master Builders: "Masterflow 830 Grout ". e. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout ". f. Industrial Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout ". g. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi -Vex Grout #1000. 9. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint -12, compounded for 30 -mil thickness. E. Finish: 1. Galvanized Steel: Shop applied cold galvanized after fabrication. Apply in conformance with manufacturer's directions for intended use. 2. Shop Primed Steel: Shop prime steel items not indicated to be galvanized. Remove loose mill scale and rust from structural steel, and remove mill scale and rust from ornamental metal. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease, dirt and other foreign material, and apply one shop coat of rust- inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust- inhibitive pigments. Carefully apply paint to provide smooth and even surface. 3. Stainless Steel: AISI No. 6 fmish ( dull satin, directional polish). F. Roof Opening Framing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide frame for roof openings 12" by 12" or larger in size. Drill frame angles for 3/8" diameter bolts spaced not over 16" on center to secure blocking, unless detailed otherwise. G. Welding: Weld behind fmished surfaces to minimize distortion and discoloration on fmished side. Remove weld splatter and welding oxides from finished surfaces by descaling and grinding. Grind and polish weld beads on exposed surfaces to match and blend with fmish on adjacent parent metal. H. Burglar Bars: Provide for duct, vent, louver, and similar openings, 8" by 8" or larger, in exterior walls and roof except exhaust hood ductwork and supply openings in RTU curbs. Construct with 3/4" diameter steel bars spaced not over 9" on center both ways and secured in a steel frame, unless otherwise indicated. I. Stainless Steel Column Base Covers: 10 inch high, 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel column base covers with #4, satin brushed finish. Fabricate in two sections to form fit steel tube columns with butt joints not to exceed 1/16" separation. J. Steel Channel Support System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Unistrut Corporation. b. Comparable products of the following manufacturers: 1) B -Line System, Inc. 2) Allied Support Systems Power Strut. 2. Framing Material: Formed steel channels, ASTM A1011, Grade 33. a. Unistrut: 1 -1/4 inch Framing System, No. A1000.. b. Unistrut: 1 -5/8 inch Framing System, No. P3000. c. Provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices which are incidental to or necessary for a secure and complete installation. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 19 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET K. False Column Covers: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal False Column Covers at Refrigeration Piping Drops: Fabricate false column covers in size and configurations as indicated on drawings. Fabricate to fit tight to adjoining construction with concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Size and space fasteners to adequately support column covers and trim. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to form tight joints. 2. Materials: 20 ga. galvanized steel sheet ASTM A653. 3. Field Finish: IPS -6, Refer to Section 09 9100. L. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Design and fabricate structural members according to AISC and AWS. Weld or bolt shop connections. Bolt field connections unless otherwise indicated. 2. Metal fabrications in finished spaces shall be considered ornamental metal. Metal shall be smooth and free of surface blemishes including roughness, pitting, roller and seam marks, and rolled trade names. 3. Provide members with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles. 4. After shearing and punching, leave clean, true lines and surfaces. 5. Shop weld headed studs according to manufacturer's instructions. 6. Detail joints to maintain strength and rigidity of adjoining members. Generally, weld shop joints using concealed welds where possible. Locate exposed welds in least conspicuous place, and weld continuously. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. 7. Bolt shop connections, where detailed, and field connections using bolts or machine screws of adequate size. Use countersunk, Phillips, flat, or oval- headed machine screws for exposed bolted connections in finished spaces. 8. Provide neat, hairline joints with matching surfaces at exposed joints. 9. Shop assemble work ready for erection insofar as possible. Where field joints are required, completely shop assemble work to assure accurate fit and then disassemble for shipment. M. Reinforcing: 1. Provide as required at connections, hardware locations, and as necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Perform mortising, drilling, punching and tapping required for attachment of hardware or attachment to other work. N. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install metal fabrications using skilled mechanics experienced in erection of ornamental metal. 3. Erect work plumb, true, square, and securely attached to supporting construction. Field joints shall be neat, hairline joints with adjoining surfaces in alignment. Completed installation shall be secure and rigid with sufficient strength to support loads. 4. Frames for equipment mounted on roof or hung from joists shall impart loads to joists at top chord panel points only, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Protect aluminum in contact with steel metal fabrications from galvanic and corrosive action with bituminous coating applied prior to erection. 6. Immediately after erection, clean welds, scratches and other abraded spots and touch up with the same paint used for the prime coat. Touch up galvanized surfaces with cold galvanizing. 7. Stainless Steel Column Bases: a. Clean column to remove loose particles, dust, dirt, grease and oils. b. adhesive. Press firmly to column surface. Remove excessive adhesive from edges and butt joints. Remove protective paper cover after 24 hours drying time. c. Apply so butt joints are not over 1/16" in width. If column is on a corner intersection, verify with OSR which way to face butt joints. 8. False Column Covers at Refrigeration Piping Drops: a. Refer to drawings for dimensions, installation, and fastening details. b. Locate and place covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. c. Use concealed anchorages to greatest extent possible. d. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together.. e. Column covers to be field painted under requirements of Section 09 9100. END OF SECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02 4100 — 05 5000 - 20 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) NOTE: THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THESE SECTIONS MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND MOISTURE SECTION 06 1000 (06100) - ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Work Includes: 1. Dimensioned lumber, plywood and accessories. B. Lumber General: Conform to requirements of PS20. Provide lumber bearing grade and trade mark of appropriate grading association. Provide new, sound, and thoroughly seasoned lumber. C. Lumber Moisture Content: Do not exceed 19% moisture content of dimension lumber at time of installation. Do not exceed 14% moisture content of fmish lumber. Dress lumber S4S, unless otherwise specified. D. Lumber Grades and Species: 1. Non -Load Bearing Studs: Stud grade, Douglas Fir - larch, Hem-fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 2. Miscellaneous Blocking, Nailers, and Framing Lumber: Standard Light Framing grade, Douglas Fir - larch, Hem -fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 3. Boards: No.2 Common Ponderosa Pine, Sugar Pine or Idaho White Pine. E. Plywood General: Conform to requirements of PS 1. Provide panels bearing appropriate APA grade and trade mark. Provide exterior grade plywood where any face or edge is permanently exposed to the weather. F. Plywood Grades, Types, and Thickness: unless otherwise indicated. 1. Roof Blocking: APA C -D, Group 2, Exposure 1, thickness as required. 2. Interior Partition Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, C -D, Exposure 1, 24/0, Minimum 1/2" thick. G. Rough Hardware Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. KC Metals. 2. Silver Metal Products. 3. Simpson Company. 4. Union Steel Connectors. 5. USP Lumber Connectors. H. Typical Rough Hardware: Provide hangers and other connectors, and accessories of proper size, type and strength for intended use and material to be fastened, as indicated on Drawings. Drawing indications reference Simpson Co. products. Use non - corrosive, non - staining rough hardware for exterior applications. I. Expansion Anchors: 1. "Kwik Bolts" as manufactured by Hilti; ICBO RR #2156. 2. "Trubolt" wedge anchors as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Redhead; ICBO #1372. 3. "Wedge -All" wedge anchor as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie, ICBO #3631. 4. "Power -Bolt" as manufactured Powers/RAWL; ICBO #5225. J. Injection Adhesive Anchors: 1. Hilti, "HIT HY20 Injection Adhesive Anchors ". 2. Simpson Strong -Tie: "Epoxy -Tie Adhesive (ET) ". 3. Powers/Rawl, "Chem -Fast Anchor Sytem ". 4. ITW Ramset/Redhead Epcon system, C6 epoxy or approved equal. K. Concrete Screws: Tapered flathead. 1. Hilti "Kwik -Con II" fasteners. 2. Simpson Stron -Tie "Titen" screw anchors. 3. Powers/RAWL "Tapper" anchoring system. 4. ITW Ramset/Redhead "Tapcon" anchors. L. Preservative Treatment: Pressure impregnated lumber in the following locations with a waterborne preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard U1 and the following Use Categories. 1. Use Categories: a. UC1: Interior lumber and plywood above ground. b. UC3B: Exterior lumber and plywood above ground. c. UC4A: Exterior lumber and plywood in contact with ground. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no Arsenic or Chromium. 3. Dry lumber to moisture content of not more than 19% after treatment. M. Preservative Treatment Application: Treat items as indicated on Drawings and as follows. 1. Lumber /plywood used for fascias, nailers, and other locations in contact with roofing. 2. Lumber /plywood used for plates, ledgers and blocking in contact with concrete or masonry. 3. Lumber /plywood used in contact with ground. N. Preservative Treatment Fasteners and Hardware: Due to the corrosive nature of the preservative treatment, provide stainless steel fasteners and hardware that are in contact with treated wood. 0. Fire Retardant Treatment: pressure impregnated lumber and plywood bearing a UL label indicating fire hazard classification (smoke contribution and flame spread) of 25 or less, or "FR -S" Classification. 1. Moisture Content: Kiln dry after treatment lumber and plywood exposed to view in finished work to a moisture content of not more than 12 %. Dry other lumber and plywood after treatment to a moisture content of not more than 19 %. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. CSI "D- BLAZE.. b. Hickson "Dricon ". c. Hoover "Pyro- guard ". P. Hardware Cloth: 1/2 inch mesh galvanized, standard commercial product. Cover studs with hardware cloth. Locate joints in hardware cloth over studs and horizontal blocking and attach to studs and blocking 6" on center using screws with washers Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install wood fabrications using skilled mechanics experienced in carpentry. 3. Conform to N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing" as a minimum standard of construction and assembly, unless otherwise indicated 4. Conform to APA recommendations for plywood application, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Space framing members 24" on center, unless otherwise indicated. Cut framing members accurately with full, square bearing surfaces. Fit members neatly and set plumb to required lines and levels. Do not shim bearing surfaces. Fasten members securely in place at bearings and connections. Conform to the following minimum requirements unless otherwise indicated. 6. Install wood blocking, bucks, nailers and similar items securely to receive intended work. Shim blocking as necessary to provide a true and level surface. Q. SECTION 06 4000 (06400) — ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Work Includes: 7. Standing and running trim, and miscellaneous finish carpentry items (interior). B. Standing and Running Trim: General: Custom grade conforming to AWI Section 300. 1. Clinic Chair Rail: 3/4" x 3 -1/2" actual, clear white maple chair rail with radius edges as indicated on drawings. Rails to be clear finished as specified under 09 9100, IPS -12. a. Mounting Height: Top of rail at 2' -10" A.F.F. C. Solid Surface Material: 1. Solid Surface Wall Caps at Food Service Seating Area: Solid surface material in thickness, size and profile as indicated on Drawings. a. Manufacturer: Dupont Corian. b. Color: Corian, Sahara. c. Edge Treatment: Eased exposed edges, 1/8 inch. 2. Fasteners and Joint Adhesive: As recommended by solid surface manufacturer. D. Installation Requirements: 1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 2. Install architectural woodwork using experienced finish carpenters. 3. Do not install millwork and trim until back - priming is completed. 4. Erect architectural woodwork plumb, true and square, in a substantial manner. Install work neatly, free of slivers, open joints and hammer or tool marks. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 2 ' TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 5. Blind nail finish work insofar as possible, and set surface nails. Securely fasten work to nailing blocks, grounds and furring. Drill hardwoods for nails. Miter molding and trim on external corners and cope on internal corners. Fill nail sets with matching putty. 6. Install solid surface components in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 7. Install solid surface components plumb, level, true and straight. Shim as necessary using concealed shims. 8. Solid Surface Seams, if exposed, to be hairline, tight and sealed. Where components abut other finishes, cut and scribe for accurate tight fit. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 2100 (07200) — THERMAL INSULATION A. Work Includes: 1. Board insulation under freezer floors. 2. Batt insulation for wall construction. B. (INSUL -2) Extruded Polystyrene: Extruded polystyrene insulation boards conforming to ASTM C578, Type IV, 1.6 pcf density min., 25 psi compressive strength min., k -value of 0.20, water absorption 0.3% max., water vapor transmission 1.1 perm -inch max.; square edge. 1. Diversifoam Products "Certifoam ". 2. Dow Chemical "Styrofoam ". 3. Owens Corning: "Foamular 250 ". 4. (INSUL -2) Installation: a. Place poly vapor barrier over entire concrete freezer subfloor. Use largest sheets possible to eliminate joints. Lap joints 12 inches min. Run up vertical surfaces and continue onto slab a minimum of two feet. Secure in place. Trim off excess when freezer wall panels are in place. b. Install (INSUL -2) extruded polystyrene freezer floor insulation in 2 layers, staggering second layer joint with first layer joints. Butt pieces snug to each other and against perimeter of slab recess. c. Install treated wood thermal break strip directly beneath freezer wall around entire perimeter of freezer. d. Follow immediately after installation of insulation and thermal break with installation of concrete topping slab. C. (INSUL -5) Fire Safing Insulation: Refer to Section 07 8400 - Firestopping for approved manufacturers and requirements for firestopping systems and products. Products selected are to be based on tested UL designs. D. (INSUL -6) Batt Insulation: Either faced or unfaced glass fiber batt insulation conforming to ASTM C665 Type I, K -value of 0.32 maximum. E. (INSUL -7) Glass Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C612, Type 1A, semi -rigid glass fiber type; density of 2.25 pcf, square edges. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Certainteed: CertaPro Commercial Board, CB225. b. Johns Manville: Insul Shield Semi -rigid Board, US 225. c. Owens - Corning, CW -225 Insulation. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84: a. Flame Spread: 25. b. Smoke Developed: 50. F. Accessories: 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturers. 2. Fasteners: As recommended my manufacturer of specified item. 3. Vapor Barriers: a. Freezer Floor: Ten (10) mil thick, decay resistant, clear polyethylene sheet, type recommended for below grade application. 4. Vapor Barrier Tape: Pressure- sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations. 2" wide. G. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install insulation using skilled mechanics experienced in installing insulation. 3. Install (INSUL -5) fire sating insulation according to manufacturer's instructions as indicated on Drawings and where required by code, also comply with installation requirements of Section 07 8400 — Firestopping. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 4. Install (INSUL -7) glass fiber board insulation at exterior walls where scheduled on the Drawings. Install using mechanical fasteners. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions for mechanical fastener pattern and spacing. Provide 1 -1/2" thickness SECTION 07 5419 (07500) — MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM A. Work Includes: 1. There is no Section 07 5419 included in this spec, for roofing requirements see Section 01 3516, Paragraph E. SECTION 07 8400 (07840) — FIRESTOPPING A. Work Includes: 1. Through- penetration firestopping in fire rated construction. 2. Construction -gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire rated construction. 3. Construction -gap firestopping occurring within a fire rated wall, floor, or floor- ceiling system. 4. Construction -gap firestopping occurring at top of fire rated walls. B. Definitions: 1. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed in referenced documents. 2. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies and structural floors. 3. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses, and smoke. 4. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained. 5. Construction Gaps: Gaps between adjacent sections of walls, exterior walls, and structural floors or roof decks; and gaps between adjacent sections of structural floors and at wall tops between top of wall and ceiling. 6. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., to close specific barrier penetrations. 7. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other Sections and may or may not be required. 8. Manufacturer's Engineering Judgments: Firestopping systems which are derived from other U.L. Systems/Designs or other tests, and acceptable to the code enforcing authorities. C. System Description: 1. Fire Rated Construction Design Requirements: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 2. Through- Penetration Fire Stopping Schedule: Assembly designs are specified generally under UL system categories by penetrating item. Manufacturers' product applications must have specific UL system designations. The schedules on the following page indicate which Series of UL Classified Through Penetration Fire Stopping (TPFS) assemblies are acceptable for this Project based on barrier type, construction and penetrant type. The TPFS Series listed are generic in nature; ex: Series C -AJ -2000 includes all designs from 2001 through 2999 from all manufacturers; note that each manufacturer has its own number for tested assemblies. The Contractor shall select appropriate TPFS assemblies for each condition encountered. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 4 TARGET Plastic Pipe C -AJ -2000 C- B- 2000 W -J -2000 F -A- 2000 (Multiple Penetrations) C -AJ -8000 W -J -8000 Note 4 W -L- 2000 W -L -8000 Note 4 Metal Pipe C -AJ -1000 C -BJ -1000 W -J -1000 F -A -1000 C -AJ -8000 W -J -8000 Note 4 (Multiple Penetrations C -BK -1000 W -L -1000 W -K -1000 Insulated Metal C -AJ -5000 Pipe (Operating Temp. 32 - C-BJ -5000 122F) F -A -5000 ( Notes 1 & 5) W- J-5000 (Multiple Penetrations) C -AJ -8000 W -J -8000 Note 4 W -L -8000, Note 4 Notes only W-L -5000 W -L -8000, Note 4 Insulated Metal " C -AJ -5000 Pipe (Note2) (Operating Temp. , C- BJ-5000 below 32 or above F -A -5000 122F) W -J- 5000 (Multiple Penetrations) C -AJ -8000 W -J -8000 Note 4 & 5 Insulated Cable C -AJ -2000 C-AJ-3000 C -BJ -3000 F -A -3000 W -J -3000 C -A -3000 W -J -3000 No Penetrating C -AJ -0000 Items C -BJ -0000 ( Note 3) W -J -0000 F -A -0000 W -J -0000 (Multiple Penetrations) Note only W -L -5000 W -L -8000, Note 4 & 5 W -L -2000 W-L-3000 (Multiple Penetrations) ( Note 3 ) W -L -3000 Note only W -L -0000 Note only W -L -0000 W -L- 8000 Mixed Penetrating C -AJ -8000 Items C -BJ -8000 F -A -8000 W -J -8000 Misc. Mechanical C -AJ -7000 ( Vent Ducts) W -J -7000 Note 6 Wall to Floor Joints: Duct Damper Penetrations: UL system 13W -D -0000 -L -7000 Note 6 Completely fill annular space with mineral wool safing and seal with ftexible firestop sealant. Comply with duct damper manufacturer's requirements. MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C -AJ -2000 F -A -2000 F -C -2000 (Multiple Penetrations) (Note 4) C -AJ -8000 F -A -8000 C -BJ -8000 F -B -8000 F -C -8000 Metal Pipe C -AJ -1000 F -A -1000 W -J -1000 C -BJ -1000 F -B -1000 C -BK -1000 F -C -1000 (Multiple Penetrations) (Note4) C -AJ -8000 F -A -8000 C -BJ -8000 F -B -8000 F -C -8000 Insulated Metal Pipe (Operating Temp 32 -122F (Note 1 ) C -AJ -5000 F -A -5000 C -BJ -5000 F -BJ -5000 F -C -5000 (Multiple Penetrations) (Note4) C -AJ -8000 F -A -8000 C -BJ -8000 F -B -8000 F -C -8000 Insulated Metal Pipe (Note2) (OperatingTemp: below 32 or above122F) C -AJ -5000 F -A -5000 C -BJ -5000 F -B -5000 F -C -5000 (Multiple Penetrations) (Note 4) C -AJ -8000 F -A -8000 C -BJ -8000 F -B -8000 F -C -8000 Insulated Cable C -AJ -3000 F -A -3000 C-BJ -3000 F -B -3000 F -C -3000 (Multiple Penetrations) C -AJ -3000 F -A -3000 C -BJ -3000 F -B -3000 F -C -3000 No Penetrating Items ( Note 3 ) C -AJ -0000 F -A -0000 C -BJ -0000 Note only (Multiple Penetrations) (Note 3) C -AJ -0000 F -A -0000 C -BJ -0000 Note only Mixed Penetrating Items C -AJ -8000 F -A -8000 C -BJ -8000 F -C -8000 Misc. Mechanical ( Vent Ducts) ( Note 6) C -AJ -7000 F -A -7000 C -BJ -7000 F -B -7000 F- C- 7000 1. Examples of systems: Chilled water supply & retum, Heat pump supply & retum, Domestic cold water, Domestic hot water (less than 122 °F), etc. 2. Examples of systems: Steam supply & retum, Steam vent, Condensate pump discharge, Boiler blow down, Domestic hot water (140 °F), etc. 3. Seal opening using barrier's original construction. 4. Where a Series 8000 classified system is not available, install singly, and provide single- penetrant systems. 5. Systems that operate below 32 °F and above 122 °F , comply with the following: a. Provide TPFS system using intumescent elastomeric wrap strip as fill for void/cavity. b. No not use Series 8000 penetrants. Provide only single penetrants. 6. For penetrants protected with dampers, provide TPFS system approved by damper manufacturer. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 6 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) D. Submittals: 1. Comply with Section 01 3300, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the following: a. Composition and limitations. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Furnish sleeve size schedule indicating size of penetrating item, insulation thickness (where applicable), and minimum annular space requirements. 3. Proposed UL System Drawings - Special Installation Drawings: Prior to starting installation of firestopping, firestopping manufacturer and installer shall review specific conditions applicable for Project, and identify each condition for firestopping and prepare individual U.L. Designs or manufacturers engineering judgments identification numbers, and installation drawings for each condition. a. Submit two (3) Special Installation Drawings for each condition, one set for OSR, one set for Architect's File Copy, and one set for Building Official. b. Submit other information as may be requested by Building Official. E. Quality Assurance: 1. Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following: a. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer, State or local authority where applicable. b. Not less than 2 years experience with systems. c. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system. 2. Single Source Responsibility for Materials: Obtain firestopping materials from one manufacturer for entire project. a. This does not restrict Contractor from subcontracting installation of firestopping to multiple subcontracts, but aloes require all installers do use the same manufacturer throughout the Project and be licensed by that manufacturer for the installation of firestopping. 3. Field Samples: First 2 applications for each firestopping condition will be reviewed by OSR and when accepted by the local Building Official shall become a standard of performance for remaining Work. a. Correct areas, modify method of application/installation, or adjust as directed by local code official to comply with specified requirements. 4. Fire -Test Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those of this specification Section: a. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow -up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Through- penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1) Through- penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2'.) Through- penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through- penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: (a) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." (b) ITS in "Directory of Listed Products." F. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: 1. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date. 3. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage of material G. Seqencing: 1. Sequence and coordinate application of firestopping with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements. a. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of firestopping for interior applications due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. b. I)o not install enclosing or concealing construction until after firestopping has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to any defective firestopping. H. System Design: 1. The design of firestopping as described by this Section 07 8400 is the responsibility of the Contractor. Individual through- penetration systems, construction -gap firestopping, through - penetration smoke - stopping, and construction- gap smoke- stopping will be selected by the Contractor to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and governing codes. The actual selection of individual designs or systems is the responsibility of the Contractor, and there is a `Single Source Responsibility for Materials' per this specification. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 -7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET I. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Products listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory for UL System involved, that are manufactured by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Bio -Fire Shield, Inc. c. Hevi -Duty Nelson of General Signal. d. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Grace. f. Rectorseal Company. g. Specified Technologies Inc. J. Through - Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Construction: 1. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements, and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos -free. a. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent property of the product, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the UL system or device, and designed to perform this function. K. Accessories: 1. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials: As classified under category XHHW in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. Forming Materials: As classified under category XHKU in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3. Accessories: As required by manufacturer's listed tested or engineered firestop system assemblies. L. Examination: 1. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. a. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. b. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. M. Preparation: 1. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 2. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 3. Provide adequate ventilation. 4. Obtain code enforcing authorities approval of systems which are based on manufacturers engineering judgments. N. Installation: 1. Comply with firestopping material manufacturer's recommendations, and UL System or Design. 2. Provide dams to permanently secure poured firestopping materials. a. Where firestop systems are applied to joints in structural floors, attach a metal dam to 1 side of joint only. b. Where firestopping is applied in hollow barriers (stud or block walls) install dams or non - combustible headers to prevent materials from collapsing into cavities. 3. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation of damper's anchoring flanges. 4. Close unused portions of large openings in structural floors with reinforced concrete, structurally equal to surrounding floor, solidly embedding penetrating materials. Provide dowels and reinforcement within such infills equal to reinforcing specified for slab. a. Fill remaining spaces with applicable firestopping system. b. Install firestopping in floors flush with top of slab, sleeve, or housekeeping pad. 5. Where large openings are created in concrete or masonry walls to permit installation of pipes and ducts, close unused portions of opening with masonry construction, equal to barrier rating, to within not more than 4 inches of penetrating materials. a. Provide beams or lintels to bridge ducts or other large penetrations. b. Close block cores with mortar or fiber dams. c. Close remaining space with applicable firestopping system. 6. Install smoke - stopping as specified for firestopping. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 7. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space, double wythe masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical, 12 inch wide fiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at maximum 15 foot intervals. 8. Warning Labels: Label each penetration with a minimum 3 inch by 5inch self - adhesive label containing the following information: Warning - Firestop System DO NOT DISTURB Notify Building Management of Any Damage System No. Contractor: Date Installed: Manufacturer: Date Installed: UL System No: O. Field Quality Control: 1. Examine sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. 2. Keep areas of Work accessible until inspection by applicable code authoritie. 3. Manufacturer's Field Services: Firestopping manufacturer's technical representative shall provide the following field services during application. a. Perform a pre - installation examination and acceptance of substrate and voids scheduled for firestopping. Lssue report. b. Be present at initial start-up for each process. Confirm application techniques. Issue report. c. Issue a summary report at completion of installation indicating manufacturer's acceptance of installed system and compliance with UL Design requirements. P. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Clean up spills of liquid components. 2. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. SECTION 07 9200 (07900) — JOINT SEALANTS A. Work Includes: 1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. B. (SLNT -1) (Low Modulus Sealant: Single component premium grade high performance one part silyl- terminated polyether gun grade moisture curing sealant that is paintable. Non -sag, low- modulus, high- movement, fast - curing sealant with movement capability of plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent movement and conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, A, G, and O. 1. Primer: All noted exterior sealant joint surfaces must be primed; follow specification for primer /substrate requirements. a. Sonolastic Primer 733: Quick drying solvent based primer. b. Primer 2000: Quick drying solvent based primer. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. EIASF Construction Chemicals — Building Systems, product: Sonolastic 150 Tint Base. b. No Substitutions. 3. Product Distribution and Procurement: a. Ms. Marthe Brock, CSI, CCPR. BASF Construction Chemicals — Building Systems 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 Phone: (612) 309 -4373 (cell) (800) 433 -9517 for Customer Service FAX: (800) 496 -6067 SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 4. Identify your project by its T- Number and name, and the store address when purchasing SNLT -1. 5. Colors: a. Required Sealant Colors: Provide colors to match color of adjacent finish material. If adjacent materials are two different colors, verify color match with Owner's Project Architect. 1) Provide one color to match the main painted building surface color (standard color), select during Shop Drawing review. 2) Provide additional custom color sealants required based on materials encountered; identify required custom colors during Shop Drawing review. (a) To match EIFS topcoat color. If painted topcoat color, match color specified under Section 09 9700 (custom color). (b) To match cast stone color (custom color). (c) To match face brick color; provide one color for each face brick color (custom colors). (d) To match stone (manufactured or natural stone) color; provide one color for each stone color (custom colors). 6. Warranty: Provide 10 year warranty, signed by Manufacturer covering material performance. C. (SLNT -2) Two -part Polyurethane Sealant: Self- leveling with +/- 25 percent maximum movement capability and conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. 1. Pecora Corporation: Urexpan NR -200. 2. Sonneborn: Sonolastic SL2. VOC - 93 g/L 3. Tremco, THC- 900/THC -901. 4. Tremco: Vulkem 245. 5. (SLNT -2) Color: Sonnebom; No. 273 -P, "Limestone ". Use this color for all concrete slabs and sidewalks using SLNT -2. Provide matching color from the other specified sealant manufacturers as necessary D. (SLNT -3) One -part Acrylic Sealant: Non -sag, paintable acrylic latex polymer caulk capable of +/- 7.5 percent movement and conforming to ASTM C834. 1. Pecora Corporation: AC -20 Siliconized. VOC - 31 g/L 2. Sonneborn: Sonolac. VOC - 41 g/L 3. Tremco: Tremflex 834. VOC - 11 g/L E. (SNLT -4) Silicone Rubber Sanitary Sealant: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corporation: 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant. VOC - 33 g/L 2. General Electric Company: GE Silicone Sanitary 1700 Sealant. VOC - 20 g/L 3. Sonnebom: Omniplus. VOC - 0 g/L 4. Tremco: Tremsil 200. VOC - 35 g/L 5. (SLNT -4) Color: White and Clear. F. (SLNT -5) Silicone Building and Glazing Sealant: 1. Silicone Rubber Sealant: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Silicone Rubber Sealant: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. General Electric: SCS 1200. VOC - 23 g/L. 4. Color: Clear. G. (SLNT -7). Polyurethane Roofing Sealant: One -part polyurethane sealant with movement capability of +/- 25 percent and conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Sonnebom: Sonolastic NP1. H. (SLNT -9). Butyl Sealant: One -part butyl rubber. 1. Pecora "BC- 158 ". VOC - 226 g/L 2. Tremco "Butyl Sealant ". VOC - 208 g/L 3. (SLNT -9) Color: Aluminum/stone color. 1. Sealant Joint Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use, including environmental and other conditions affecting bond of sealant. J. Joint Backing: Closed Cell Backer Rod: Pre - formed, compressible, non - staining, non - gassing, closed cell polyethylene foam rod compatible with the sealant used and acceptable by the sealant manufacturer for the specific application, except as follows: 1. Provide round rod, size as recommended by manufacturer based on width and depth of joint and condition located. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) a. Joints up to 1/2" wide, rod shall equal width of joint plus 1/8 ". b. Joints 1/2" wide and larger, rod shall be equal to the joint width plus 1/4 ". c. Provide bond breaker tape where joint depth does not allow space for backer rod as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 3. Do not use joint backing impregnated with oil, tar, or asphalt. K. Solvents and Cleaning Agents: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. L. Mixing: Prepare and mix caulking materials and sealants according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not thin or adulterate materials. M. Working Time: Use two- component sealants within maximum period of time after mixing recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific material and job conditions, and discard sealant not used within this time N. Installation Requirements: 1. Apply sealant according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. 2. Prime surfaces according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install sealant and accessories using skilled mechanics experienced in placing sealants. 4. Installation of SNLT -1: a. Prime joint surfaces identified below with the primer specified (if joint surfaces are in question of requiring priming contact the Project Architect for determination): 'Substrate Material • . .. ` . Substrate F inish . • . Primer Type Metal Panels Kynar paint and at edges of surrounding wall substrate. (panel -to -panel, & panel -to -wall) Sonolastic Primer 733 Aluminum Framing Kynar paint and at edges of surrounding wall substrate (framing -to- framing, & framing -to -wall) Sonolastic Primer 733 Storefront - Windows - Misc ellaneous Precast Concrete/Wall Precast Concrete & adjoining wall substrate J g (precast -to- precast head joints, & precast -to -wall) Sonolastic Primer 733 - at Wainscoat Caps - at Pier Caps & adjoining walls - other precast caps & adjoining walls Other horizontal building joints ( ALL horizontal building joints ) (substrate -to- substrate head joints, & substrate -to- wall) Sonolastic Primer 733 EEEFS EIFS fmish & at edges of surrounding wall substrate (EIFS- to -EIFS, & EIFS -to -wall) Primer 2000 Stucco Stucco expansion joints using sealant & at edges of surrounding wall substrate (Stucco -to- Stucco exp. joints, & Stucco -to -wall) Primer 2000 b. Apply one coat of primer to all surfaces required based on schedule above, prior to sealing. For questions concerning other surfaces that may need priming, if directed by project Architect consult with manufacturer's Technical Service for recommendations. Contractor will be back - charged the cost of primer and labor for removal and re- installation of all SNLT -1 if proper procedure is not followed. c. Follow additional joint cleaning and preparation requirements noted herein. d. Where necessary, clean joint surfaces by grinding, sandblasting, or mechanical abrading. Remove dust, dirt and loose particles before priming. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET e. Apply primer on cleaned surfaces by brushing on a thin, uniform coat. Make sure primer does not soak into substrate, but forms a continuous film f. Use primer as is, do not thin primer. g. Do not apply primer in a thick coat since it may act as a bondbreaker. h. Allow primer to dry tack free before applying sealant. Dry time will depend on temperature and humidity. i. Sealant MUST be applied the same day as the primer. j. Use SLNT -1 where indicated on Drawings for joints subject to movement and other sealant work subject to movement not indicated on Drawings or specified herein but required for a complete installation. Typical areas include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Exterior wall joints and control joints. 2) Cast stone joints. 3) Perimeter of storefront. 4) EIFS, refer to Section 07 2400 for installation requirements. 5) Door frames. 6) Louvers and other vents and wall penetrations. 7) Non - sleeved mechanical and electrical penetrations in above grade exterior walls. 8) Perimeter of wall light fixtures. k. Since SNLT -1 is a "paintable" sealant, SNLT -1 must be in -place before painting Work commences. 1. Joints to receive SLNT -1 shall be not less than 1/4" and not exceed 2" in width. Depth of sealant shall be as follows: Joint Width Min. Depth Max. Depth 1/4" to 1/2" 1/4" Equal to Width 1/2" to 2" 1/2" 5/8" 5. To match EIFS topcoat color. If painted topcoat color, match color specified under Section 09 Use SLNT -2 for horizontal surface joints subject to foot or vehicular traffic where indicated on Drawings and as specified. 6. Use SLNT -3 for general sealing of interior and exterior joints subject to moderate movement and joints to be painted. 7. Use SLNT -4 where indicated on Drawings, and for joints at counters, fixtures, equipment and walls in toilet rooms, and food storage, preparation, serving and seating areas requiring sanitary sealant. 8. Use SLNT -5 where indicated on Drawings, and for interior and exterior sealing of metal to metal, including flues, vents, pipes which reach temperatures up to 300 deg F. Refer to Section 08 8800 for installation requirements in glazing. 9. Owner Furnished Roofing Sealant: Refer to Section 07 5419. 10. Use SLNT -9 for setting beds at exterior thresholds and sill plates. 11. Install joint backing according to manufacturer's instructions in joints to receive sealant and as indicated on Drawings. Use proper size and shape pieces so installed joint backing is compressed approximately 30% and face of foam is at required depth. Do not twist or braid rod stock. Do not puncture skin of rod stock. Carefully roll rod stock into joint without stretching. DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08 1113 (08110) — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished, hollow metal doors and frames. B. Distributor: 1. Distributor of Doors, Frames and Hardware: Twin City Hardware Company 723 Hadley Avenue North Oakdale, MN 55128 TCH Target National Account Department Tel: 888 - 738 -7220 Fax: 651-735-1800 E -mail: Targetnu,tchco.com SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Door Type and Associated Program Description: 1. Single Doors (Interior and Exterior): a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Single Doors is part of the "EZ -Set Program" (door, frame, and all hardware except closer are assembled in factory), for hardware Groups noted in Section 08 7100. Door with mounted hardware group is set in frame and crated for shipment. GC to build wall around door /frame unit and paint per fmish schedule. Exterior openings will be punched and dimpled. 2. Pair of Doors (Interior and Exterior): a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Pairs of Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and "Doors & Frames" are set individually and all hardware is provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program and hardware must be installed as noted in Section 08 7100. 3. Special Doors (Interior and Exterior). a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Special Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and all hardware is either: 1) provided by the manufacturer or; 2) provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program (sec schedule) and as noted in Section 08 7100. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: E. For BOC,A, SBC, & IBC Code projects add this paragraph: Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Construct fire rated doors and _frames according to requirements of UL 10B. Each fire rated door and frame shall bear the appropr :ate UL labels. F. For UBC Code projects add this paragraph: Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with positive pressure requirements of UL IOC and NFPA 105. Door assemblies shall hear the UL Label and supplemental ''S" positive pressure fire label. 1. Provide completed installation to maintain required fire rating of opening. G. Acceptable manufacturers for Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Ingersoll -Rand; Steelcraft. H. Materials: 1. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60 zinc-iron- alloy ° (galvannealed) coating designation. 2. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. 3. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153, Class B. 4. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. 5. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches. 6. Glazing: as specified under Section 08 8800 — Glazing. I. Steel Frames: Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8. J. Exterior Frames: Fabricate frames from metallic- coated steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam "closed and tight ". Weld face seam and full web of frame (T -3). Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge, (0.067 inch). 2. Material and Finish: Zinc - alloy -iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09 9100. 3. Galvanize internal members and reinforcements. K. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam "closed and tight ". Weld face seam of frame (T -2). Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area. 1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge, (0.067 inch). 2. Finish: Shop prime for field painting under Section 09 9100. L. Factory assemble frames: in largest sections possible. M. Finished work to be smooth: and free from warps and buckles. N. Glazing Stops: Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and install stops. Form neat hairline joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at least two screws per piece. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 13 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET O. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 3 at single door strike jambs, 2 at head of pair doors. with mechanical attachment. P. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames. Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing. Q. Exterior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8, Level II, Heavy Duty, Model 1, Full Flush Door. 1. Material and Finish: Zinc - alloy -iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09 9100. 2. Provide galvannealed components and internal reinforcements as required for hardware specified under Section 08 7100. 3. Close tops of exterior doors to eliminate moisture penetration. Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted. 4. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch. 5. Core: Impregnated kraf t honeycomb core. 6. Face Sheet Thickness: 18 gauge, (0.042 inch). R. Interior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8, Level II, Heavy Duty, Model 1, Full Flush Doors. 1. Material and Finish: Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09 9100. 2. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch. 3. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core. 4. Face Sheet: 18 gauge, (0.042 inch). S. Glazing Stops: Provide for glazed interior lites as indicated on Drawings complying with SDI vision panel designations V, N and G. Construct glazing stops of not less than 18 gauge steel. Fit and install stops in the factory. Form neat hairline joints. T. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for door and frame preparation for hardware. U. Factory prepare doors and frames for templated hardware specified under Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware. Mortise, reinforce, and drill for templated hardware, and reinforce for surface applied hardware. Mortise to hairline accuracy with no oversized punching. 1. All doors and frames to be factory drilled to receive operating and hanging door hardware. Trim components such as kick plates to be field drilled. V. Reinforce doors and frames with 8 gauge steel plate at each butt. W. Reinforce for lock front and strike with 16 gauge steel. frames for closers with 12 gauge steel plate, and reinforce doors with 12 gauge steel channel. Other reinforcing to be not less than 12 gauge steel. X. Cover mortises in frames with pressed steel mortar boxes. Y. Shop Finish: Grind, fill and sand as required to make faces and edges smooth, true and free of irregularities. Chemically clean and phosphate treat to ensure prime paint adhesion. 1. Shop primer: 1 -coat, baked -on rust inhibiting primer. 2. Prime frames under removable glazing stops and prime back side of removable stops. Z. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install hollow metal doors & frames using skilled mechanics experienced in installing hollow metal doors & frames. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for door and frame preparation for hardware. Erect frames plumb, square and true to line. 4. Install doors according to DHI. Install with uniform margins at jambs and head. 5. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with expansion anchors. 6. Factory prepare doors and frames for templated hardware specified under Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware. Mortise, reinforce, and drill for templated hardware, and reinforce for surface applied hardware. Mortise to hairline accuracy with no oversized punching. a. All doors and frames to be factory drilled to receive operating and hanging door hardware. Trim components such as kick plates to be field drilled. 7. Frame Installation and Anchoring: a. New Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames during masonry construction to allow for securing frames with build -in type anchors and solidly fill space between frames and masonry with grout. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 14 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) b. New Pre -cast Concrete and Tilt -up Concrete Wall Panels: Coordinate installation of frames with panel manufacturer or contractor. Cast -in frames into panels and solidly fill space between frames and panels with concrete. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by concrete forces during cast -in process and panel installation. c. Metal Stud Partitions: Secure frames to metal studs with metal strap type anchors. d. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post - installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Non -•Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Door Undercuts: 1) Interior - Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Manufacturer's standard not to exceed 3/4" above floor. d. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. e. Smoke- Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. AA. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. BB. Remove and replace defective work: including steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. CC. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer. SECTION 08 1416 (08210) — FLUSH WOOD DOORS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished, Flush Wood Doors and associated components as follows: a. Solid -core doors with wood veneer faces. b. Factory finishing of wood doors. c. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Owner Furnished Materials: Flush wood doors included in this section are furnished by Owner and distributed by Twin City Hardware with the following criteria: 1. Flush wood . doors to be pre - drilled and prepared for the operating and hanging door hardware specified under Section 08 7100. 2. Refer to Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements for specific Owner and Contractor responsibilities for Owner Furnished Material and Equipment. 3. Coordinate with distributor for specific project delivery requirements for delivery of materials. C. Itemized'. Materials List: The Distributor will prepare for each shipment, an Itemized Materials List indicating each door, frame and hardware component for each door opening included in that shipment. 1. Organization: An Itemized Material List will be organized, to the greatest extent possible, following the numbering order of the Opening Schedule on Drawings. 2. Itemized Material List for doors and frames will be combined with the Material List for Door Hardware, specified under Section 08 7100, to provide a complete listing of components for each opening as applicable. D. Owner Furnished Material Process for Doors, Frames and Hardware. 1. Prior to Mobilization: No less than two (2) weeks prior to Project Mobilization, the General Contractor shall contnt the Distributor for Project notification and scheduling of delivery dates. 2. Prior to Delivery of Shipment: Approximately two (2) weeks prior to delivery, the Distributor will contact the General Contractor by e-mail to confirm delivery date. General Contractor to reply to e-mail within Twenty Four (24) hours to verify or change delivery date. 3. Prior to Delivery of Shipment: Twenty four (24) hours prior to delivery, the Distributor will contact the General Contractor by phone with final notification of delivery. 4. Changes: General Contractor to promptly notify Distributor of Changes that are issued to the Project. Provide ample time in Construction Schedule to allow Changes to be processed properly. E. Warranty: Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in door surface area. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 15 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers. c. Delamination of veneers. 2. Warranty to include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period: Life of installation. F. Distributor: 1. Distributor of Doors, Frames and Hardware: Twin City Hardware Company 723 Hadley Avenue North Oakdale, MN 55128 TCH Target National Account Department Tel: 888 - 738 -7220 Fax: 651-735-1800 E -mail: Target@tchco.com G. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Owner Furnished Wood Doors: a. Lynden Door, Inc. H. Door Construction General: 1. WDMA I.S.1 -A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2. Particleboard -Core Doors: a. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -2, made with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. I. Veneer -Faced Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Interior Solid -Core Doors. a. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. b. Species: Select White Maple. c. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). d. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. e. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. f. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces. g. Core: Particleboard. h. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. J. Fabrication: 1. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 2. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS -3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI- A115 -W series standards, and hardware templates. a. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining K. Factory Finishing: 1. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. a. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 2. Factory Applied Transparent Finish: a. Grade: Premium. b. Finish: WDMA TR -6 clear polyurethane. c. Staining: None required. d. Sheen: Satin. L. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install wood doors & frames using skilled mechanics experienced in installing wood doors & frames. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 -16 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for door and frame preparation for hardware. Erect frames plumb, square and true to line. 4. Hardware: For installation, refer to Section 08 7100 Door Hardware. 5. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 6. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 7. Factory- Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 8. Operation: Re -hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 9. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refmished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing SECTION 08 3323 (08330) — OVERHEAD COILING DOORS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1.Owner Furnished, Manufacturer Installed, Overhead Coiling Shutters and associated components as follows: a. Motor operated, self - supporting, overhead coiling door for Pharmacy. B. Owner Furnished Materials: Overhead Coiling Doors and associated components included in this section are furnished by Owner and installed by the Manufacturer with the following criteria: 1. The 1Dwner will furnish coiling door components from one of the specified manufacturers as indicated. 2. Contractor to coordinate installation schedule with Owners manufacturer. F. UBC Seismic Zones 2 thru 4 or BOCA/SBC Seismic Performance Catefory "C" and "D" or IBC Seismic Design CateRory "D', "E', and "F ": add thisparagraph: Seismic Installations: comply with applicable seismic zone requirements. 1.Peiformance Requirements: a. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI /ASCE and local code requirements. G. References: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA ICS 1: Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. b. NEMA ICS 2: Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. c. NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures. 2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): d. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code. 3. Structural Engineering Institute /American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE): e. S'EUASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. I. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others. J. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manuals describing materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining doors. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's brochure. 2. Parts lists. K. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. L. Manufacturers: 1. The Owner will furnish shutters from one of the following manufacturers: f. Cornell Iron Works. g. The Cookson Company. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 17 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Distributor: Crawford Door Sales: h. Contact: John Carl. i. Phone: 888-848-3667. j. Email: jcarl®cdsdoor.com M. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling -door curtain of interlocking metal slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: ASTM B 209 sheet or ASTM B 221 extrusions, alloy and temper standard with manufacturer for type of use and fmish indicated; thickness of 0.050 inch and as required to meet requirements. a. Cornell Iron Works, #5F, 0.050, (16 ga.) thick aluminum slats. b. The Cookson Company, #4 Slat, 2 -3/4" high x 3/4" deep, 0.050, (16 ga.) thick aluminum. N. Curtain Jamb Guides - Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard aluminum shape with exposed fmish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal -to -metal contact and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. Provide as scheduled. O. Endlocks: Manufacturer's standard endlocks, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high - strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. P. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous tubular shape, finished to match door curtain. Provide keyed lock in bottom bar when scheduled. 1. Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. Support Framing: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support doors; factory fabricated from ASTM A 36 structural steel tubes, fastened to floor and structure above door; to be built into wall construction; and complete with anchors, connections, and fasteners. R. Locking Devices: Equip doors with locking device assembly in bottom bar. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Dual jamb side locking bars that engage through slots in tracks, operable from outside only, with cylinder. a. Lock Cylinders: Locking device to accept removable core cylinders furnished under Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware; Group 94. S. Safety Interlock Switch: Provide safety interlock switch on motor operated doors to disengage power supply when door is locked. Q. T. Counterbalancing Mechanism: General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease- sealed bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 1. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot - formed, structural- quality, welded or seamless carbon -steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled -up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in. /ft. of span under full load. 2. Spring Balance: : One or more oil- tempered, heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast -steel barrel plugs. 3. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold - rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. 4. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold - rolled steel plate. 5. Fasteners: Furnish screws, bolts, anchors, clips, and other accessories necessary for complete installation. U. Electric Door Operators: 1. General: Electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor controls, starter, gear - reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote - control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation a. Comply with NFPA 70. b. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 18 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) c. Motor: Sized large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in. /sec. and not more than 12 in. /sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. d. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. V. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized grille with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions. W. Door Control Station: Provide electrical control station by key for normal operation, and by hand chain during emergency operation. 1. Chain to remain coiled and stored above ceiling during normal operation. 2. Chain to be located in wall chase accessible from access panel on secure side of Pharmacy. Refer to Drawings for location. 3. Key Control Station: "Open" and "Close" keyswitch, constant contact, center return, recessed mounted with stainless steel face plate. a. Cylinder for keyswitch furnished under Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware, Group 94. X. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized aluminum finish for exposed components including door curtain, door guides, bottom bar and hood as applicable. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A41, Class I. Y. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, or baked on finish for steel components including steel support framing and mounting brackets. Z. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Contact project Superintendent or OSR if conditions are not adequate for proper installation. AA. Installation requirements for Manufacturer's Installer: 1. Install overhead coiling doors in a timely manner to comply with Project Construction Schedule. 2. Door installation to be performed by approved and certified technicians of door manufacturer. 3. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, at the mounting locations indicated for each door. 4. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. 5. Install doors level and plumb, and in proper alignment with wall. Securely anchor assembly in opening. BB. Adjusting: Adjust each door to ensure proper operation and function: 1. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer. 2. Replace items which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for each application. CC. Demonstration & Cleaning: 1. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of doors during final adjustment and testing of doors. 2. Clean exposed surfaces. Touch -up and refinish minor damages to painted surfaces using matching air -drying primer or finish paint as applicable. 3. Remove installation equipment and construction debris from project site after completion of installation. DD. Coiling Door Schedule (Pharmacy Coiling Door): 1. Operation: Motor operated with chain hoist for emergency operation. 2. Size: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Mounting: Self supporting, between jamb mounted. 4. Support Framing: 4" x 4" steel tubes with base plates. 5. Door Curtain: Aluminum. 6. Guides: Extruded aluminum guides. 7. Hood: Not required. 8. Control Station: Recessed mounted, "Open" and "Close" Keyswitch. 9. Locking Device: Bottom bar lock with cylinder. 10. Finish: Clear anodized. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 19 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET SECTION 08 3324 (08331) — FIRE RATED OVERHEAD COILING DOORS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1.Owner Furnished, Manufacturer Installed, Interior U.L. Smoke & Draft Fire Rated Overhead Coiling Shutters and associated components as follows. B. Owner Furnished Materials: Fire Rated Overhead Coiling Shutters and associated components included in this section are furnished by Owner and installed by the Manufacturer with the following criteria: 3. The Owner will furnish coiling shutter components from one of the specified manufacturers as indicated. 4. Contractor to coordinate installation schedule with Owners manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire - test - response characteristics per UL 10B, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Wamock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. For (IBC Jurisdictions add this paragraph and delete the paragraph above: Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested forfire-test- response characteristics per UL 10B, and UL1784 and that are listed and "S" labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Oversize Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire -rated door assemblies, except for size. F. UBC Seismic Zones 2 thru 4 or BOCA/SBC Seismic Performance Category "C" and "D" or IBC Seismic Design Category "D ", "E", and "F ": add this paragraph: Seismic Installations: comply with applicable seismic zone requirements. G. References: 4. ASTM A 653: Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -dip Process. 5. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): a. (NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. b. (UBC Code add this paragraph: NVI;PA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Control Door Assemblies. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL): c. UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. d. UBC Code add this paragraph: UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies,. H. System Description: 1. Fire Rated Overhead Coiling Doors: Chain operated, UL labeled 90 minute overhead coiling fire shutter with fire release device, exposed housing and surface mounted guide rails. Connect fire release device to building fire alarm system. Provide the following features: b. Automatic Reset to normal operating mode without technician or mechanical reset after alarm actuation or power failure. c. Closing speed: Not less than 6" per second and not greater than 9" per second average closing speed. 2. UBC Code add this paragraph: Fire Rated Overhead Coiling Doors: Chain operated, UL "S" labeled 90 minute overhead coilingfire shutter with fire release device, exposed housing and surface mounted guide rails. Connect fire release device to building fire alarm system. Provide the following features: a. Automatic Reset to normal operating node without technician or mechanical reset after alarm actuation or power failure. b. Closing speed: Not less than 6 "per second and not greater than 9 " per ,second average closing speed. I. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. 3. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for fire release system. Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field - installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others. J. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manuals describing materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining doors. Include the following: 3. Manufacturer's brochure. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 20 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 4. Part; lists. 5. Information describing fire release system, including testing and resetting instructions. K. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. L. Manufacturers: 3. The Owner will furnish shutters from one of the following manufacturers: e. Cornell Iron Works: U.L. Smoke & Draft Control Fire Shutter, ERC11 with M100 Chain & Automatic Reset Release Device. f. The Cookson Company, Rolling Fire Shutter SD 10. 4. Distributor: Crawford Door Sales: g. Contact: John Carl. h. Phone: 888-848-3667. i. Email: jcarl@cdsdoor.com M. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. 11. Curtain Slats: Manufacturer's standard, minimum 22 gauge, structural - quality, cold - rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 653, with G90 zinc coating. 12. Provide manufacturer's standard flat - profile design as follows: a. Cornell: IF Flat Slat, 1 -1/2" high x 1/2" deep. b. Cookson: #10 Slat, 1 -1/4" high x 3/8" deep. N. Endlocks: Manufacturer's standard endlocks on each side of alternate slats providing wear surface in guides, maintaining slat alignment and to prevent flame passage. O. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard unit attached to bottom slat with UL Listed bottom bar seals. P. Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard formed steel units with UL Listed jamb seals. Configure jamb guides for surface mounted application as indicated on Drawings. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over travel of curtain. Counterbalancing Mechanism: General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable- tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease - sealed bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 13. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot - formed, structural- quality, welded or seamless carbon - steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled -up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in. /ft. of span under full load. 14. Torsion Springs: Spring balance of one or more oil - tempered, heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast -steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. 15. Torsion Rod: Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold - rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsion load. 16. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast -iron or cold - rolled steel plate with bell -mouth guide groove for curtain. 17. Fasteners: Furnish screws, bolts, anchors, clips, and other accessories necessary for complete installation. R. Hood: 1. Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface- mounted hoods. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag a. Fabricate steel hoods of not less than 24 gauge, galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653. b. Finish: to match slats. Q. S. Smoke Seals: 1. Smoke Seals: Manufacturer's standard, UL- listed and tested smoke -seal perimeter gaskets. 2. (IBC' Code add this paragraph: Smoke Seals: Manufacturer's standard, UL- listed and tested smoke -seal perimeter gaskets to comply with "S" Label requirements. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 21 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET T. Manual Door Operator: Provide combination chain -hoist and automatic controlled closing system operator. 1. Chain- Hoist: Provide manual chain -hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and gear - reduction unit and chain keeper. c. Adjacent Swing Doors: Mount chain hoist operator on opposite side of door head away from adjacent swinging doors as applicable. 2. Automatic Closure: Provide automatic - closing device activated by Building Fire Alarm system, with governor unit to control downward speed of door. Closing speed to be not less than 6" per second and not greater than 9" per second. d. Unit to have Automatic Reset feature that automatically resets to normal operation without technician or manual reset. e. Power Requirement: 120 volt AC. 3. Acceptable Products: f. Cornell: M100 Firegard Closing System; chain -hoist operator. g. Cookson: FD -2A Auto -Test Fire Door System, Chain. U. Finish: Coiling Steel Shutters: Manufacturer's standard polyester enamel paint or powder coat finish for hood, curtain, jamb guides, bottom bar and other exposed components. 1. Color: Manufacturer's standard Gray. V. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Contact project Superintendent or OSR if conditions are not adequate for proper installation. W. Installation requirements for Manufacturer's Installer: 1. Install overhead coiling shutters in a timely manner to comply with Project Construction Schedule. 2. Shutter installation to be performed by approved and certified technicians of door manufacturer. 3. Install overhead coiling shutters, hoods, at the mounting locations indicated for each door. 4. Install overhead coiling shutters and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. 5. Install shutters level and plumb, and in proper alignment with wall. Securely anchor assembly in opening. 6. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for installation of shutters. 7. UBC Code add this paragraph: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 for installation of shutters. X. Fire Release Device: Install fire release device: 1. Installation of power wiring and conduit by Division 26. 2. Connect building fire alarm system to release device by Division 28. Y. Field Tests: Manufacturer's installer to coordinate testing of fire rated coiling shutters with building fire alarm field test: 1. Test shutter release device; adjust as necessary and verify automatic reset of shutters. Z. Adjusting: Adjust each shutter to ensure proper operation and function: 1. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer. 2. Replace items which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for each application. AA. Demonstration & Cleaning: 1. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of shutters during final adjustment and testing of shutters. 2. Clean exposed surfaces. Touch -up and refinish minor damages to painted surfaces using matching air -drying primer or finish paint as applicable. SECTION 08 3326 (08332) — OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. Motor operated, self - supporting, overhead coiling grille for: h. Health Clinic. i. Optical Department. 2. Support Framing: Structural steel tubes, jamb supports and miscellaneous steel tie -back to building structure for self - supporting grilles provided by door manufacturer. 3. Installation of Owner Furnished cylinders. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 22 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Owner Furnished Materials: Overhead Coiling Grilles and associated components included in this section are furnished. by Owner and installed by the Manufacturer with the following criteria: 1. The Owner will furnish coiling grille components from one of the specified manufacturers as indicated. 2. Contractor to coordinate installation schedule with Owners manufacturer. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling grilles to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI /ASCE and local code requirements. D. Acceptable Manufacturers for Owner Furnished Overhead Coiling Grilles: 1. The Owner will furnish grilles from one of the following manufacturers. j. Cornell Iron Works. a. The Cookson Company. 2. Distributor: Crawford Door Sales. a. Contact: John Carl. b. F'hone:888- 848 -3667. c. Email: jcarl @cdsdoor.com. E. Grille Curtain: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods. 1. Aluminum Grille Curtain: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. 2. Grille Curtain Pattern: 5/16" aluminum bars spaced 2" on center held by aluminum link chains at 9" on center. b. Cookson: Pattem 5014 M92. c. Cornell: Visionaire ESG10. F. Curtain .Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard aluminum shape with exposed finish matching grille curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal -to -metal contact and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. G. Endlocks: Continuous end links or other devices at ends of rods; locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining grille curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. H. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous tubular shape, finished to match grille. Provide keyed lock in bottom bar when scheduled. 1. Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. I. ■ Support Framing: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support grille; factory fabricated from ASTM A 36 structural steel tubes, fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be built into wall construction; and complete with anchors, connections, and fasteners. J. Locking Devices: Equip grilles with locking device assembly in bottom bar if indicated in Schedules. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Dual jamb side locking bars that engage through slots in tracks, operable from outside only, with cylinder. 2. Lock Cylinders: Locking device to accept removable core cylinders as specified under Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware, Group 94. 3. For Health Clinic provide Safety Interlock Switch: Provide safety interlock switch on motor operated grilles to disengage power supply when grille is locked 4. For Optical Department provide Safety Interlock Switch: Provide safety interlock switch on motor operated grilles to disengage power supply when grille is locked. K. Counterbalance Information, General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease- sealed bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. L. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot - formed, structural - quality, welded or seamless carbon -steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled -up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in. /ft. of span under full load. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 23 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET M. Spring Balance: One or more oil- tempered, heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast -steel barrel plugs. N. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold - rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. O. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold - rolled steel plate. P. Electric Grille Operators, General: Electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory pre -wired motor controls, starter, gear - reduction unit, solenoid - operated brake, clutch, remote - control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6. 3. Motor: Sized large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in. /sec. and not more than 12 in. /sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. Q. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized grille with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions. R. Grille Control Station: Provide electrical control station by key for normal operation, and by hand chain during emergency operation. Chain to remain coiled and stored above ceiling during normal operation. 1. Key Control Station: "Open" and "Close" keyswitch, center return, recessed mounted with stainless steel face plate. Removable core cylinder provided under Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware, Group 94. S. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized aluminum finish for exposed components including grille curtain, grille guides, bottom bar and hood as applicable. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A41, Class I. T. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, or baked on fmish for steel components including steel support framing and mounting brackets. U. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install overhead coiling grilles in a timely manner to comply with Project Construction Schedule. 3. Grille installation to be performed by approved and certified technicians of door manufacturer. 4. Install overhead coiling grilles, hoods, operators and controls at the mounting locations indicated for each grille. 5. Install steel support framing to building structure on doors as indicated. 6. Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. 7. Install grilles level and plumb, and in proper alignment with wall. Securely anchor assembly in opening. 8. Adjust each grille to ensure proper operation and function. a. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer. b. Replace items which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for each application.. 9. Demonstration: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of doors during final adjustment of grilles 10. Clean exposed surfaces. Touch -up and refinish minor damages to painted surfaces using matching air -drying primer or fmish paint as applicable. 11. Remove installation equipment and construction debris from project site after completion of installation. V. Coiling Grille Schedule: (Health Clinic or Optical Department) Grille 1. Operation: Motor operated with chain hoist for emergency operation. 2. Size: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Mounting: Self supporting, between jamb mounted. 4. Support Framing: 3" x 3" steel tubes with base plates. 5. Grille Curtain: Aluminum. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 24 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 6. Guides: Extruded aluminum guides. 7. Hood: Not required. 8. Control Station: One (1) recessed mounted, "Open" and "Close" Keyswitch. Locate on outside, (Sales floor side) of (Health Clinic or Optical) Department). 9. Locking Device: Not required. 10. Finish: Clear anodized. SECTION 08 3800 (08355) — TRAFFIC DOORS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. Instillation of Owner Furnished, insulated double - acting traffic doors (TD). B. Door Panel: Monolithic, hollow shell of high impact, red cross - linked polyethylene with minimum wall thickness of 1/8 ", overall panel thickness of 1 -1/2" with textured finish. Leading edge has molded in key extrusion to accept gaskets. Bottom, and back edges are fitted with an aluminum nosing which will accept gasket. The top edge has a 1/8" radius. 1. Colors: a. ITD-1) "Red ". d. I TD -2) "Beige ". C. References: 1. ASTM A 653: Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -dip Process. 2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): D. Door Panel Core: High density, foamed -in- place, non -CFC urethane bonded to interior of the cross linked polyethylene shell providing an insulating R factor of 9.86. E. Standard Hinge System: consists of the following components: 1. Upper Hinge: self - closing "V" cam design; [1 -3/8" standard rise]. The roller assembly design shall allow up and down adjustments to the door. Upper hinge seal shall be semi -rigid red PVC with a flexible nylon reinforced vinyl skirt and a galvanized steel backer plate. 2. Lower Hinge: Powder coated cast aluminum lower hinge adapter with UHMW sleeve. 3. Hinge Shaft: 1" diameter tubular steel, which runs the full length of the door and rests in the UHMW Sleeve which is mounted in the Lower Hinge Adapter. The Roller Assembly mounts to the top of the tube steel and rests on the V -Cam. F. Vision Panel: Window glazing to be a 16" diameter round window, 1/8" thick polycarbonate with a 7/16" thick PVC Cap Separator placed between two 1/8" thick ABS Frames. 1. Vision Panel Frame to have no exposed fasteners. 2. Mounting Height: 43" from finish floor to the bottom of viewing area. G. Gaskets: 55 to 70 durometer extruded santoprene fitted into matching, pre - formed gasket key and held by friction. Gaskets have wings which seal against the door surface. 1. Colors: Black. H. Spring Bumpers: Polyethylene 3" projection, height shall be 12 ". 1. Colors: a. (TD -1): Red Doors: Black. b. (TD -2) Beige Doors: Chase "Brown Sugar ". I. Structural Steel Door Frames: Pre - finished, 4" x 2" x 3/16 ", standard steel tube frame with base plates. Factory pre - drilled to accept mounting of "Durulite" door above. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Chase Doors; Structural Steel Door Frame. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat finish in color to match doors. J. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Chase Doors: Durulite "Retailer ". K. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install Traffic Doors using skilled mechanics experienced in installing Traffic Doors. 3. Install steel door frames and doors according to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Adjust hardware and leave in good operating order with doors automatically retuming to full closed position. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 25 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET SECTION 08 4100 (08400) — ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. Interior storefront framing system. 2. Joint sealant with-in assemblies. 3. Reinforcing, shims, anchors, brackets and other attachment devices to provide a complete system. 4. Manual aluminum doors. 5. Door hardware for manual aluminum doors less cores and keys 6. Joint sealant with-in assemblies. 7. Reinforcing, shims, anchors, brackets and other attachment devices to provide a complete system. B. Owner Furnished Materials: Aluminum Framing Systems and components included in this section are furnished by Owner and fabricated and distributed by VistaWall Architectural Products with the following criteria: 1. Framing systems and components to be pre -cut and pre- fabricated to greatest extent possible to minimize field cutting and modification. 2. Systems and components to be installed by an approved installation contractor verified by manufacturer. C. Owner Furnished Cores and Keys: Construction and permanent interchangeable cores and keys and other hardware components will be provided under a separate Owner Furnished Contract through Target Asset Protection. 1. Refer to Section 08 7100 for specific hardware components. D. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized installers who are trained and approved for installation of the following systems required for this Project. 2. Systems: a. Aluminum framing systems. 3. Manufacturer's to provide a listing of acceptable installation subcontractors for specific Project location. 4. Contractor must provide installation subcontractor from approved list. 5. No installation subcontractor substitutions will be permitted. E. Performance Requirements: Design and construct framing systems and associated systems to comply with performance requirements specified and applicable building code requirements for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.. 1. Structural Loads: Wind Loads: Design and construct system based on applicable building code requirements for specific Project location. 2. Florida Stores in Wind -Borne Debris Region (120 MPH >): Add the following Paragraphs and disregard the Paragraph above: a. Wind Loads: Design and construct system based on applicable building code requirements for specific Project location and manufacturers FBC approved product report or Miami -Dade County acceptable NOA report. b. Windborne- Debris - Impact- Resistance Performance: Pass missile - impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTMS 1886 and testing information in ASTMS 1996 for Wind Zone criteriafor specific Project location. 2) Large - Missile Test.: For glazed openings located within 30 feet ofgrade. 3) Small- Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade. 3. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: a. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 4. Stores in UBC Seismic Zones 3 and 4 or BOCA/SBC Seismic Performance Category "D", IBC 2000 Seismic Design Categories aD ", "E ", and ".F ": Add Paragraph Below: b. Seismic .Performance: Aluminum framing systems to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SE1 /ASCE 7. 1) Component Importance Factor is 1.0. 5. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static - air - pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 26 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) a. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior. 6. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. b. Test Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. c. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. 7. Energy Performance: a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. b. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static - air - pressure differential of 6.24 l bflsq. ft. c. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum- framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation - resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 66 (for the frame), when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. F. Shop Drawings for Aluminum Framing Systems (and/or Manual Aluminum Doors): Indicate dimensions, description of materials and fmishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Submittal Process: a. Installation Subcontractor to contact manufacturer's representative as specified herein for preparation of Shop Drawings based on Prototype Shop Drawings pre- approved by Target. b. Manufacturer to prepare Aluminum Framing System Shop Drawings, to meet project specific requirements including hardware schedule. Drawings not prepared and signed by manufacturer will be returned as unacceptable. 1) Manufacturer to assign a Project Number or Name referencing this specific project. Indicate Number or Name on Shop Drawings. c. Manufacturer to return Shop Drawings to GC and Installation Subcontractor for final review and approval. d. General Contractor to return Shop Drawings to manufacturer approved for fabrication. 3. Stores in UBC Seismic Zones 3 and 4 or BOCA/SBC Seismic Performance Cateeory "D" IBC 2000 Seismic Design Categories "D', "E'; and "F ": Retain Paragraph below: a. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum framing systems, accessories, and components from manufacturer. 1) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether system certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. G. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which Manufacturer/Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum framing systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. d. Failure of operating components. e. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. H. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair painted finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- applied painted fmishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to the following: a. Color fading, chalking, cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period for Kynar fmish (Champagne C -20): Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 27 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET I. Acceptable Manufacturer of Owner Furnished Aluminum Framing Systems and Components: Oldcastle Building Envelope 803 Airport Road Terrell, Texas 75160 Oldcastle Building Envelope National Account Department Tel: 972 - 750 -5571 E -mail: target@oldcastlebe.com J. Owner Furnished Cores and Keys: As specified under Section 08 7100. Target Asset Protection Department E -mail: ap.vendormanagementa,target.com K. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. L. Internal Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion - resistant primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC -SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. M. . Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides except at vertical butt- glazed joints as indicated on Drawings. 3. Glazing Plane: Front glazed; center glazed for Cart Wall framing. N. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high - strength aluminum with non - staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. O. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, non - staining, non - bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self - locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 4. For exposed locations, provide fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing system. P. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, non - staining, non - bleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials in locations as required by Manufacturer. Q. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8800 for glass and glazing units. R. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed - corner pressure - glazing system of resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. 1. Glazing Gasket Color: Custom color Champagne Pearl to match framing members. 2. Setting Blocks and Shims: Black. S. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. T. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt- mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat References. U. Sealants: 1. Perimeter Sealants: Refer to Section 07 9200 for sealants on perimeter of system. 2. Exposed Sealants with -in Framing System and Champagne Composite Panels: Dow 795 — Color: 14392 -1, "Champagne Pearl ". SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 28 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) V. Framing System: 1. Interior Health Clinic Framing: 2 -1/2" face dimension x 4 -1/2" depth, to accept 1/4" glazing, (GL -2) in locations as indicated on Drawings. b. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Vistawall; Reliance Wall Monumental Framing System. W. Fabrication: 1. Factory assemble aluminum framing systems insofar as possible with joints accurately milled to produce hairline, watertight joints. Reinforce and mechanically fasten joints with concealed devices. Finished work to be neat in appearance, free of defects and rigidly joined. 2. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: c. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. d. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. e. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. f. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. g. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. h. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. i. Mortise, reinforce, and drill and tap for hardware. Provide plate, angle or channel reinforcing as indicated cm Drawings or as required by project specific conditions. X. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. Y. Sealants: 1. Perirneter Sealants: Refer to Section 07 9200 for sealants on perimeter of system: 2. Exposed Sealants with -in Framing System and Champagne Composite Panels: Dow 795 — Color: 14392 -1, "Champagne Pearl ". 3. Exposed Sealants with -in Red Composite Panels: Dow 795 — Color: "Target Red ". Z. Manual Alluminum Swing Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: 1 -3/4 thick, medium stile aluminum doors, with nominal 3 -1/2" wide stiles, 6" nominal top rail and actual 10" high bottom rail. Door units to be fabricated complete with hardware as specified below a. Doors to be glazed with the following glass units: Refer to Section 08 8800 for glass units. 1) 1/4 inch clear tempered glass units, (GL -2), in locations as indicated on Drawings. 2) 1 inch insulated glass units, (GL -11), in locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Construct doors of extruded tubular aluminum sections with a minimum wall thickness as required to withstand specified loading requirements. Corners to be reinforced, welded and mechanically fastened, as standard with the manufacturer. Welds to be concealed so as not to damage the surface fmish. Mechanical joints to be accurately milled to produce hairline, watertight joints. Finished work to be neat in appearance, free of defects, and securely and rigidly joined. 3. Undercut exterior bank of doors with thresholds to 1/8" above threshold to provide proper contact between weatherstripping and threshold. Undercut inner bank of doors to 3/4" above finish floor to clear loose laid floor mats. 4. Provide doors with an adjusting mechanism to facilitate minor adjustments after installation. 5. Glazing Stops: Non - removable from the exterior side, snap -in type, square, extruded aluminum sections with vinyl or neoprene glazing inserts. Form neat hairline joints. 6. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for hardware providing reinforcing as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Provide manufacturer's standard perimeter air infiltration weatherstripping and sweeps on edges of exterior doors meeting frame components. AA. Manual !Door Finish Hardware: The following hardware groups are to be furnished and installed under the Work of this Section. All hardware to comply with requirements specified under Section 08 7100 Door Hardware. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products for Aluminum Door Hardware: Provide hardware model numbers and manufacturers as specified. NO substitutions will be permitted. a. Cores: Best interchangeable cores; Owner Furnished under Section 08 7100. b. Cylinders: Best or Schlage. Cylinders to accept Best interchangeable cores. 1) 1 Note: Best cylinder numbers specified in hardware groups. c. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, with non - removable loose pin hinges as scheduled. 1) Hinge Sizes: 1 -3/4 inch doors / 4 -1/2 inches x 4 -1/2 inches, unless scheduled otherwise. 2) Quantities: As specified in Groups. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 29 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3) Type 4 Hinge: Extra heavy, ball bearing, stainless steel. 4) Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 'Hinge, k . Bommei" Hager r' t''Stanley .: Type 4 BB5006 BB1199 FBB199 d. Electric Hinges: Hager hinge specified BB1199 x ETW, Electric Through -Wire or comparable from other specified hinge manufacturers. e. Closers: Universal mounting and multi -sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions or are specified in the hardware groups). 1) Supply adapter and drop plates as required to suit mounting conditions. Where specified, provide heavy duty solid cast arms to permit doors to swing 180 degrees. Similar to LCN EDA arm. 2) Maximum force to operate doors shall not exceed 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 pounds for interior doors. Fire rated doors to be set to minimum operating force to allow positive latching when closed. 3) California Stores: Add the paragraph (a) below and Delete the paragraph 2) above: (a) Maximum force to operate doors shall not exceed 5 pounds for exterior and interior doors. Fire rated doors to be set to minimum operating force to allow positive latching when closed. 4) Acceptable Manufacturers and products: LCN 4041 Series as specified. f. Mortise Deadlocks: BHMA 156.5, Grade 1. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Adams -Rite: MS1851S. g. Deadlatches: Adams -Rite 4900 Series. h. Exit Indicator: Adams -Rite 4089 exit indicator at all deadlocks, including permanent adhesive header sign, as specified herein. i. Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Von Duprin: Series 98 Exit Devices. j. Electric Strikes: BHMA 156.31, Grade 1, 24 volt DC strikes with standard lip and strike opening and transformer converting 110 volt AC to 24 volt DC. 1) Provide Selected Strike Manufacturer's standard lock guard astragal with US26D finish and tamper resistant screws mounting hardware. 2) Provide audio sound, buzzer, click or method as recommended by manufacturer of electric release strike, when specified, so person standing at door can hear when strike releases. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: (a) Folger -Adam. (b) Von Duprin. (c) Locknetics. k. Push Bars and Pulls: BHMA 156.6. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hiawatha specified in Groups. Item '!Burns .)Hager ; 3Hiawatha Push Bars: 422 130S 1081 -LBP Door Pulls (SST): 26C 4J 536B Offset Door Pull: 39C 12J 658A 1. Weatherstripping and Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard components. m. Thresholds: BHMA 156.21, mill aluminum units. Reese specified in Groups. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers and products. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Hader °'0NGP Pemko. ...Reese 6" Saddle 417S 613 272A S406A 5" Half Saddle - - - S285A SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) n. Stile Plates: 1" wide x 4- 9/16" high, aluminum plate with 5/8" high vertical letters; "PUSH" and "PULL ". 1) Manufacturer: Trimco/Builders Brass; 793 Custom. o. Siignage: Permanent adhesive header sign: 1 -1/2" high x 30" long x .003" thick, bleached aluminum with black letters to read, as follows at all aluminum entry/exit doors. 1.) Acceptable Manufacturers: Adams Rite. 2) UBC Code Areas: use thefollowingparagraph: "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS ". i) IBC & BOCA Code Areas: use the following paragraph: "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN THIS BUILDING IS OCCUPIED ". 2) Wisconsin Stores: use the following paragraph: "THIS DOOR SHALL NOT BE KEY LOCKED WHEN THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED ". p. Hardware Finishes: BHMA 156.18, as follows, unless otherwise specified: 1) Hinges: US32D (630). 2) Exit Devices: US26D (626). 3) Adams -Rite Locks and Latches: US28 (628). 4) Push Plates, Bars and Pulls: US32D (630). 5,) Closers: AL. 6) Sweeps: Clear anodized aluminum. 7) Thresholds: Mill aluminum. Miscellaneous Hardware: US26D (626).. q. Aluminum Entrance Hardware General Notes: 1) Al - Mount cylinder inside of door, center line 4' -0" above finish floor. Do not cut outside door face. 2) A2 - Mount center line of push bars 3' -6" from finish floor. 3) A3 - Mount pull on exterior of door with threaded rods and finished buttons on inside of door. 4) A5 - Mount top screw of pulls back -to -back with concealed fastening to push bars. 5) A6 - Mount deadlock cylinder inside of door, center line 3' -1" above fmish floor. r. Provide hardware model numbers and manufacturers as specified in each group. NO substitutions will be permitted. GROUPS 6 —15 - EXTERIOR ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS — SWING GROUP 8: SgI, ext, alum, deadlock, lever 2 pair Hiinges BB 1199 with NRP Hager 1 Deadlock MS1852SW x 1 -1/8" BS x MS4002 Adams Rite 1 Deadlock Lever 4550 Adams Rite 1 Cylinder 1E74x1ER8 Best (exterior at deadlock) 1 Closer 4041 LCN 1 Overhead Stop GJ100S Glynn Johnson 1 Pull 536B Hiawatha Gen Note A5 1 Push Bar 1081 w/o back plates Hiawatha Gen Note A2 1 Threshold S406A Reese 1 Sweep 323 Reese BB. Fabrication: 1. Factory assemble aluminum framing systems insofar as possible with joints accurately milled to produce hairline, watertight joints. Reinforce and mechanically fasten joints with concealed devices. Finished work to be neat in appearance, free of defects and rigidly joined. 2. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: a. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. b. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered c. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 31 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET d. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. e. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. f. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. g. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum framing systems to exterior. h. Fabricate exterior framing components for assembly using shear -block system. 3. Provide stiffeners and reinforcing as recommended by manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings to meet performance requirements and to insure a rigid and secure installation. Coordinate reinforcing requirements for jambs at automatic entrance doors with automatic entrance door manufacturer. 4. Mortise, reinforce, and drill and tap for hardware. Provide plate, angle or channel reinforcing as indicated on Drawings or as required by project specific conditions. CC. High - Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and Products: 2. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics; a. PPG Industries, Inc. "Duranar ". b. Valspar "Fluropon ". 3. Finish Colors: a. (C -20) Light Champagne: Valspar, Mica -2 Coat, No. 399C245, "Champagne Pearl ". DD. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install Aluminum Framing Systems using skilled mechanics experienced in installing Aluminum Framing Systems. 3. Install Aluminum Framing Systems according to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 5. Remove and replace components damaged beyond repair as a direct result of installation. Repair components with minor damage. OSR to have final decision on acceptance of repair or replacement of damaged components. 6. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, sealant and other foreign materials. 7. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage to finish. 8. Installation of Finished Hardware: a. Install hardware according to manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements using experienced personnel. b. Exterior Thresholds: Set exterior thresholds in full bed of sealant (SLNT -9) specified in Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants prevent compression of threshold. Clean excess sealant after installation. 9. Adjusting and Cleaning: a. Remove and replace components damaged beyond repair as a direct result of installation. Repair components with minor damage. OSR to have final decision on acceptance of repair or replacement of damaged components. b. Remove masking film after installation. c. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants. d. At final completion, adjust and test hardware for function and performance, and leave in good operating condition. Clean to restore original finish. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 32 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 08 7100 (08700) — DOOR HARDWARE A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished door hardware for hollow metal and special doors as indicated: B. Distributor: 1. Distributor of Doors, Frames and Hardware: Twin City Hardware Company 723 Hadley Avenue North Oakdale, MN 55128 TCH Target National Account Department Tel: 888 - 738 -7220 Fax: 651-735-1800 E -mail: Target@tchco.com 2. Owner Furnished Cores, Keys and other Components: Target Asset Protection Department E- mail: ap.vendormanagement( target.com C. Hardware for Door Type and Associated Program Description: 1. Hardware for Single Doors (Interior and Exterior): a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Single Doors is part of the "EZ -Set Program" (door, frame, and all hardware except closer are assembled in factory), for hardware Groups noted in this Section. 2. Hardware for Pair of Doors (Interior and Exterior): a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Pairs of Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and "Doors & Frames" are set individually and all hardware is provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program and hardware must be installed as noted in this Section. 3. Hardware for Special Doors (Interior and Exterior). a. Doors, Frames & Hardware for Special Doors are NOT part of the "EZ -Set Program" and all hardware is either: 1) provided by the manufacturer or; 2) provided as part of the "Door -In -A -Box" Program (see schedule) and as noted in this Section. GROUP 17: ;SgI, ext, storeroom function, deadlock, holder /closer 2 pair 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Hinges Lockset Deadlock Cylinder Closer Armor Plate Edge Protector Trim Protector Bar Threshold Sweep Set Weatherstrip as specified with NRP 93K -7D 15D 48H -7L 1E74 4040 SE x 24v AC x Transformer 120v to 24v. as specified as specified R111LPB S405A 323 797 Note: Install deadlock cylinder on inside of door, blank outside. Best Best Best LCN Rockwood Reese Reese Reese (see note below) (see note below) Note: Install lockset with locked side to inside of building and "free" side to inside of compactor enclosure. GROUP 57: Sgl, int, passage function 1 -1/2 pair Hinges 1 Latchset 1 Stop as specified 93K -ON 15D 232W/236W Best Hager SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 33 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET GROUP 58: Sgl, int, passage function, closer 1-1/2 pair Hinges 1 Latchset 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Stop as specified 93K -ON15D 4041 as specified 232W/236W GROUP 61: SgI, int, privacy function, closer 1 -1/2 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Stop/Holder as specified 93K -OL 15D 4041 as specified 254W Best LCN Hager Best LCN Hager GROUP 63: SgI, int, storeroom function, closer (Verify from Drawings when this Group is Required) 1 -1/2 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Stop GROUP 64: SgI, int, 1 -1/2 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Stop GROUP 65: SgI, int, 1-1/2 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Stop 1279 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 NRP 93K -7D 15D 4041 as specified 232W/236W entrance function as specified 93K-7AB15D 232W/236W entrance function, closer as specified 93K- 7AB15D 4041 as specified 232W/236W Hager Best LCN Hager Best Hager Best LCN Hager Note: Provide overhead stop (in lieu of wall stop), when noted: GJ -90. GROUP 68: SgI, int, keypad, closer 1 -1/2 pair 1 1 1 1 Hinges Keypad Lockset Closer Kickplate Stop GROUP 70: SgI, int, detex 1 -1/2 pair 1 1 1 1 1 Hinges Exit Control Lock Battery Eliminator Cylinder Closer Kickplate as specified Keypad EZ Cylindrical 93KZ -7DV 15KP -STK -626 4041 as specified 232W/236W as specified ECL -230D x 436 BE -961 -1 1E72 4041 as specified Best LCN Hager Detex Detex Best LCN Gen Note 1 (for ECL) SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 34 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) GROUP 71: Sgl, int, passage function, fire rated, closer, recessed wall magnetic holder (where wing walls are provided) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Offset Cont. Hinge Latchset Closer Magnetic Holder Armor Plate Edge Protector Trim Protector Bar HG -310 93K -ON 15D 4041 SEM 7840 x 24V AC/DC as specified as specified R111LPB Markar Best LCN LCN Rockwood Note: Electrical to provide 1/2" conduit from magnetic holder to ceiling space. GROUP 81: Pair, int, storeroom function, closer 3 pair Hinges 1 Lockset 2 Closer 2 Overhead Stop 1 Auto Flushbolt 1 Coordinator 1 Dustproof Strike 2 Armor Plate 2 Edge Protector 1 Trim Protector Bar as specified 93K -7D 15D 4041 GJ90 FB31 P 297D DP2 as specified as specified R111LPB Best LCN Glynn- Johnson Ives Hager Ives Rockwood Recessed mounted at door head GROUP 83: Pair, int, entrance function, closer (Verify from Drawings when this Group is Required) 3 pair H inges 1 Lockset 2 Closers 1 Auto Flushbolt 1 Coordinator 1 Dustproof Strike 2 Stops 2 Armor Plates 2 Edge Protectors 1 Trim Protector Bar 1279 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 NRP 93K -7AB 15D 4041H FB31P 297D DP2 232W/236W as specified as specified R111LPB Hager Best LCN (on fire rated doors delete "H" function) Ives Hager Ives Hager Rockwood GROUP 91: (Verify from Drawings when this Group is Required) All hardware by door supplier. GROUP 94: Mortise cylinder 1 Mortise Cylinder 1E74 Best Pharmacy Overhead Coiling Door: Provide 2 cylinders; 1 for key control station, 1 for locking bottom bar. For Optical projects provide: Optical Overhead Coiling Grille: Provide 1 cylinder; 1 for key control station. For Clinic projects provide: Clinic Overhead Coiling Grille: Provide 1 cylinder; 1 for key control station. GROUP 96: Sgl, int, padlock (Verify from Drawings when this Group is Required) 1 -1/2 pair Hinges 1 Hasp 1 Pull 1 Padlock 1279 3 -1/2 x 3 -1/2 NRP 915 482 21 B772 -M5 Hager Stanley Stanley Best SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 35 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET SECTION 08 8800 (08800) — GLAZING A. Work Includes: 1. Glass and glazing as indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to the following locations: a. GL -2 — Glazing for Storefront and Windows. (verify from Drawings when this is required) b. GL -5 — Glazing for Traffic Doors. (verify from Drawings when this is required) c. GL -7 — Glazing for fire -rated doors (wire glass) . (verify from Drawings when this is required) d. GL -11— Glazing for exterior windows (Low -E glass) (verify from Drawings when this is required) e. GL -11T— Tempered Glazing for exterior windows (Low -E glass) (verify from Drawings when this is required) B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators for Glass: 1. Cardinal Glass Industries. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. interpane Glass Company. 4. Oldcastle Glass. 5. Pilkington Building Products North America. 6. PPG Industries. 7. Viracon.. C. Acceptable Manufacturers for Glazing Materials: 1. Dow Corning. 2. General Electric. 3. Tremco. D. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I, q3 quality, Grade B, horizontally tempered, clear float glass: 1. GL -2: 1/4" thick; Class 1. 2. Provide where required by "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials" and where indicated on the Drawings E. Extruded Polycarbonate (GL -5): 1. Furnished and installed as Work of Section 08 3800. F. Fire Protection Rated Glass (GL -7): 1. Fire - Protection -Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. a. GL -7 Film -Faced Polished Wired Glass: 1/4 inch clear polished wire glass with surface applied safety film. ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality-Q6 and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category 1I materials. 1) Acceptable manufacturers and Products: (a) Anemostat Door Products, Carson, CA; Tel: 310 - 835 -7500; "Safe- Wire" Glass. (b) Comparable products from other manufacturers that meet specified requirements. b. Glaze units into appropriate fire rated framing with furnished 1/8" fire rated glazing tape each side of glass. c. Provide safety glazing classification labeling permanently etched into each glass unit. d. Fire ratings as indicated on Drawings. G. Clear Insulated Glass Unit with Low -E Coating (GL -11): 1. Provide 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior light, 1/2 inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Low- emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Both lights heat strengthened. a. Visible transmittance: 70 percent. b. Outside reflectance: 10 percent. c. Nighttime winter U- value: 0.29 BTU/hour /square foot. Maximum. d. Summer U- value: 0.26 BTU/hour /square foot. Maximum. e. Shading coefficient: 0.43. Maximum. f. Relative heat gain: 90 BTU/hour /square foot. g. Acceptable products: 1) Viracon: VEI -2M. 2) Comparable products of other specified manufacturers that meet or exceed performance characteristics of specified glass. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 36 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) H. Clear Insulated Glass Unit with Low -E Coating - Tempered (GL -11T): Provide 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior light, 1/2 inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Low- emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Both lights tempered. a. 'Visible transmittance: 70 percent. b. Outside reflectance: 10 percent. Nighttime winter U- value: 0.29 BTU/hour /square foot. Maximum. Summer U- value: 0.26 BTU/hour /square foot. Maximum. Shading coefficient: 0.43. Maximum. Relative heat gain: 90 BTU/hour /square foot. Acceptable products: l) Viracon: VE1 -2M. 2) Comparable products of other specified manufacturers that meet or exceed performance characteristics of specified glass. I. Glazing Materials: 1. Provide colors of glazing materials exposed to view in the finished work as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Provide glazing materials as follows: a. Glazing Tape: Tremco 440 Tape. b. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Dow 999 Silicone Building and Glazing Sealant; GE Silicone 1200 Construction Sealant. c. Setting Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 70 -90 durometer. Setting blocks shall be not less than 3" long nor more than 8" long. Length shall be such that loading is 15 psi. Setting blocks shall be full width of rabbet where possible. d. Spacer Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 40 -50 durometer, 1" to 3" long. J. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install Glazing using skilled mechanics experienced in installing Glazing. 3. Conform to requirements of references. 4. Accurately cut glass to fit actual openings while maintaining proper clearances. 5. Set glass using spacers to insure proper edge clearance and uniform beads of compound. Conform to clearances required by the GANA "Glazing Manual" and the glazing material manufacturer's recommendations. Center glass in glazing rabbets. 6. Clean sash rabbets and stops before glazing. Prime rabbets as required by glazing material manufacturer. 7. Apply glazing materials according to manufacturer's instructions. 8. Glaze interior hollow metal borrowed light frames and wood and plastic doors using glazing tape on both sides. Firmly glaze in place with cracks sealed, free of rattles. 9. Upon completion of glazing, clean glass and leave free of traces of glazing material. Final cleaning of glass is specified in Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. 1. c. d. e. f. g. DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09 21115 (09250) — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Work Includes: 1. Non -load bearing steel framing and furring for interior wall and ceiling framing. 2. Interior gypsum board. 3. Installation of insulation in conjunction with wall furring. 4. Installation of joint sealants. B. Manufacturer's standard non -load bearing galvanized steel studs and track for screw application of gypsum board, conforming to ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: as indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). 2. Depth: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Minimum base metal thickness of track not less than thickness of studs. 4. Where product type, size, or thickness is not indicated, conform to manufacturer's current printed specifications and local code requirements for limiting criteria. 5. Provide studs with pre - punched knock -outs at regular intervals for installation of pipe, conduit and bridging. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 37 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. "Dimpled" Steel Studs and Track - Contractors Option: Contractor may, at his option, furnish "dimpled" steel studs and track from the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the specified products in performance and comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 for limiting heights and to limit deflection to L/240 at minimum 5 psf lateral force applied perpendicular to framing. 1. The following are acceptable: a. Dietrich Industries, Inc., "UltraSteel" Framing. b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, "UltraSteel" Framing. 2. Non -Load Bearing "Dimpled" Steel Studs and Track: Provide 25 gauge equivalent components and 20 gauge equivalent components as required to replace like gauge components as indicated on drawings. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge). Provide 0.0677 inch, (14 Gauge) where indicated. 2. Backing system for handrails and grab bars to meet ADA code number 36.401, 4.26.3. Supports at least 250 lbs. of point load. E. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: C shaped channel with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538 -inch, (16 Gauge). 2. Depth: 1 -1/2 inches. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inches, 0.0538 -inch thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat - Shaped Furring Channels: 2 -9/16 inch wide with 1 -1/4 inch face. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1 -1/2 inch, as indicated on Drawings. G. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or non - slotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge). 2. Depth: as required to fit insulation thickness as indicated on Drawings. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge). I. Deflection Track and Firestop System: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Fire Trak Corp., Kimball, MN, tel. 800 - 394 -9875. 2. Components: a. "Shadowline" ceiling runner assembly system with 2" leg that will accommodate 1 -1/2" deflection. Assembly to meet UL rating shown on the Drawings. b. Fire Trak Slip Clip: 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge). J. Flexible Track: Flexible framing track for curved wall and bulkhead conditions. Flex -C Arch; arch framing system. 0.0312 inch, (20 gauge) flanges, 24 mil web, size per wall width. 1. Manufacturer: Flex- Ability- Concepts, Tel: 405- 996 -5343. K. Clips, Screws and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard type for attachment of steel studs, track and drywall furring channels. 1. Track Fasteners: Power -driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. a. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. b. Power - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. L. Suspended Ceiling Components: 1. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge wire. 2. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge wire. 4. Carrying Channels: 0.0538 -inch, (16 Gauge) base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges. a. Depth: 1 -1/2 inch. 5. Hat - Shaped Furring Channels: as specified above. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 38 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) M. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. American Gypsum Company. b. BPB America Inc. c. G -P Gypsum Corporation. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. USG Corporation. 2. Regular Type Gypsum Board: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless noted otherwise. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Type X Gypsum Board: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless noted otherwise. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Type C Gypsum Board: a. Thickness: As required by fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated on Drawings. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Flexible Type Gypsum Board: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular - type gypsum board of same thickness. a. Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 6. Moisture and Mold- Resistant Type Gypsum Board (MR): With moisture and mold - resistant core and surfaces to comply with ASTM D3273. a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand "Mold Tough" Gypsum Panels. 2) National Gypsum Company: XP Wallboard. 3) G -P Gypsum Corporation: "DensArmor" Plus Interior Guard Panels. 7. Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 or ASTM C 1396. a. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Long Edges: Tapered. N. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. C:ornerbead. b. J••Trim: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Trim: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (Control) Joint: One - piece, rolled zinc with V- shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. e. Curved -Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. O. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 2. Joint Tape: a. Standard Paper Tape: 2 inch wide. 1) Interior Gypsum Wallboard except specific products indicated below that require fiberglass tape. b. Fiberglass Tape: self - adhesive, glass -fiber mesh. Sheetrock Brand Fiberglass Drywall Tape or comparable. 1) Interior Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board (MR). 2) Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. 3) Cementitious Board. 41 Tile Backing Panels. 51 Glass -Mat or Cellulose Fiber Gypsum Sheathing Board. 3. Joint 'Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats and trim components used. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 39 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 4. Joint Compound for Water Resistant Backing Boards: a. Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable topping compound. b. Cementitious Backer Boards: As recommended by backer board manufacturer. P. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. a. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. a. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. 4. Thermal Insulation: as specified in Section 07 2100. a. INSUL -3: Perimeter wall insulation in furring. b. INSUL -6: batt insulation in locations indicated. 5. Acrylic Latex Sealant: SLNT -3 as specified in Section 07 9200. 6. Building Paper: Type I (No. 15), ASTM D226 asphalt - saturated, non - perforated felt. Steel Framing Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. And comply with ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 2. Construct steel framing as indicated on Drawings in accordance with code requirements and manufacturers current printed specifications. 3. Align framing accurately according to Drawings. Coordinate with work of other trades. 4. Install steel studs and furring at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 6. Provide minimum 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge) studs to limit deflection to L/240 at minimum 5 psf lateral force applied perpendicular to partition. Provide bracing as required at maximum unsupported lengths as recommended by the stud manufacturer to achieve specified maximum deflection. 7. isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 8. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 9. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non - load - bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 10. Install studs for partitions 16 feet or less in height full height without splices. Where splices are required, lap studs by nesting at least 8" and screw together with two screws in each flange. Securely attach studs to floor and top runners. 11. Non -Fire Rated Partitions Run to Structure: Extend steel stud partitions, constructed in spaces without finished suspended ceilings on both sides of the partition, to structure (beam bottom or roof deck) above. Fill deck flutes above non -fire rated partitions that run to deck with INSUL -6. Securely attach top leg runner to structure not over 24" o.c, inset top channel runner inside leg runner to allow for roof deflection. a. Contractor may optionally provide continuous channel bracing through the topmost cutouts in lieu of top channel runner if acceptable to the stud manufacturer and meets stud manufacturer's design criteria and recommendations. 12. Partitions Not Run to Structure: Terminate steel stud partitions, constructed in spaces with finished suspended ceilings on both sides of partition, at 4" above suspended ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. 13. SEISMIC: UBC SEISMIC ZONES 2, 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B ", "C" AND "D" OR IBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY "D", "E" AND "F ": ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH: Seismic Bracing: Provide lateral bracing for partitions not extending to structure above. Brace with opposing splayed hanger wires, minimum 12 gauge, at 8' -O" on center maximum. 14. Door Openings: a. Provide two 0.0312 inch, (20 Gauge) studs at all door openings. b. Place studs directly against jambs of hollow metal frames, abutting partitions, internal partition corners, and similar locations. Anchor studs to runners with screws or other positive fasteners. c. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips at hollow metal frames with screws or bolts. Install a runner track with web and flanges bent down at each end across head of hollow metal frames, and screw each flange to vertical studs. Q. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 40 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) d. .Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 inch clearance from jamb ,stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 15. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. R. Installation of Suspended Ceilings Components: 1. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Space hangers along direction of main carrying channels not over 4 feet on center, and locate hangers not more than 6 inches from ends of carrying channels. 2. Space 1 -1/2" main carrying channels not over 4 feet on center. Locate main carrying channels within 6 inches of parallel walls. Keep ends of main carrying channels at least 1 inch away from walls. Install main carrying channels level, true to plane, and at the required elevation with hangers saddle tied. a. Where hanger spacing must exceed 4 feet on center, use hangers spaced not over 5 feet on center and 2 inch main carrying channels spaced not over 3 feet on center. 3. Where main carrying channels are spliced, lap ends not less than 12 inches with channel flanges interlocked, and tie each end of lap with double loops of 18 gauge tie wire. 4. Space hat shaped furring channels not over two feet on center across carrying channels. Saddle tie to carrying channels with 18 gauge tie wire at each crossing, or use manufacturer's standard furring channel clips. Locate furring channels 2 inches from parallel walls, and hold ends at least 1 inch away from walls. 5. Where main carrying channels or furring channels are interrupted by light fixtures, grilles and registers, or other openings, install additional channels to frame openings. a. Reinforce framing as necessary to support light fixtures, grilles, registers, and other items mounted in the ceiling. b. Maximum allowable deflection 1/360 of the span. 6. Do not suspend ceiling framing from metal deck, conduit, ductwork or piping except where indicated on Drawings. Where hanger spacing and spans exceed specified spans, use hangers with a larger capacity, larger main carrying channels or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffening, or bracing as necessary to support the loads, without exceeding the specified deflection. 7. Where ceilings return to a higher ceiling, form vertical surfaces with metal studs suspended from structure above or as detailed on Drawings. Space studs not over 24" on center. Brace studs with diagonal bracing spaced not over four feet on center. 8. SEISMIC: UBC SEISMIC ZONES 2, 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B", "C" AND "D" OR IBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY "D", "E "AND "F ": ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH.: Seismic Bracing: Provide sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support to cam;7ly with specific project requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. S. Installation of Interior Gypsum Board: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. And comply with requirements of ASTM C 840 for installation of gypsum panels. 2. Install gypsum board with true even surfaces and straight sharp corners. 3. Install gypsum board on ceilings before walls using full length boards where possible. 4. Form joints neatly. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 5. Install gypsum board vertically with end joints over supports on walls and partitions in fmished spaces. a. Install longest board possible to minimize butt end joints. If butt end joints are required on Sales Floor walls, locate butt joints at bottom portion of wall. b. Stagger end joints on the same side of a wall. c. Do not allow end joints on opposite sides to occur over the same support. d. loo not locate normal end joints at edge of openings. e. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 6. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 7. Install gypsum board on ceilings with end joints over supports, to minimize butt end joints. Stagger end joints of adjacent boards at least 12 ". 8. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non - load - bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. a. Note: At floors maintain 1/2 inch clearance from bottom of panel to floor surface. 9. Accurately locate and neatly cut openings for electrical devices, piping, grilles, and registers, so openings closely fit the devices and are completely covered by plates and escutcheons. 10. Mechanical Application of Gypsum Board: SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 41 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. Install gypsum board using screws, except where adhesive installation is indicated on Drawings. b. Fasten gypsum board beginning at the center and work toward the outer edges. Hold board firmly against supports while fastening. Locate fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Locate fasteners 3/8" to 1/2" from edge of board. 1) Screw gypsum board to steel framing and furring as follows: For walls with gypsum board applied vertically, space screws 8" on center, maximum, along edges and 12" on center, maximum, in the center. For walls with gypsum board applied horizontally, and ceiling construction, space screws 12" on center, maximum. 2) Space screws according to the rated design for fire resistive partitions and ceilings. 3) Screw gypsum board to wood framing with screws spaced not over 12" on center. 11. Material Locations: a. Regular Type: In locations as indicated on Drawings. b. Type X: Vertical, horizontal surfaces and where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies. c. Type C: Where required for specific fire- resistance -rated assemblies indicated. d. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies as required. e. Moisture and Mold- Resistant (MR) Board: Apply to all exterior building wall surfaces. f. Water Resistant Backing Board or Moisture and Mold- Resistant (MR) Board: Provide full height water resistant gypsum board m janitor closets, walls, (except toilet rooms) to receive ceramic tile, FRP, and other locations subject to moisture damage. g. Cementitious Backer Board: Provide cementitious backer board in toilet rooms to 48" above floor, entire room, and water resistant gypsum board above cementitious backer board to ceiling. 12. Sealing: a. Seal partition perimeter joints where fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions are shown on the Drawings. Seal joints in backer board occurring behind control joints. b. Seal around pipes, ducts, conduit, and other items penetrating non -rated gypsum board partitions. Seal backs and sides of electrical boxes. c. Seal joints, cut edges, nail and screw heads, and punctures in water resistant gypsum board with a waterproofing sealant recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. d. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with sealant, SLNT -3. 13. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Control Joints: Install control joints in walls, bulkheads, ceiling, soffits and partitions not over 30 feet on center. Provide at each change of substrate, and above door jambs as indicated on Drawings except as follows: 1) Control joints are not required in walls which will not be taped, or taped and finished. 2) Locate joints not indicated on Drawings above door frames whenever possible. 3) Control joints are not required on bulkheads under 30 feet long except at ends. b. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1) Comerbead: Use at outside comers. 2) J -Trim: Use at exposed panel edges and where indicated on Drawings. 3) L -Trim: Use where indicated on Drawings or where required by installation. 4) Curved -Edge Comerbead: Use at curved openings. 14. Finishing Gypsum Board: a. Tape and fmish gypsum board surfaces, joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for final finish. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 1) Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Pre -fill open joints edges, and damaged surface areas. 3) Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 4) Finish joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or other scheduled finish material. 5) Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board. 15. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish (as specified under ASTM C 840, and as summarized below): a. Level 0: (No Finish); Taping, finishing, and trim accessories, (comerbeads, etc.) are not required. b. Level 1: (Tape set in compound); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound. Panel surfaces must be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable. c. Level 2: (1 coat ); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one coat of the joint compound on fastener heads, and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces must be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 42 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) d. Level 3: (2 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over the tape. Apply two separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. e. Level 4: (3 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. "Drywall primer" must be applied to surfaces before applying final decoration. f. Level 5: (Skim coat); Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three fmish coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 1) Note: Level 5 is considered a high - quality gypsum board finish and is recommended for areas that will receive glossy paint or that are subject to severe lighting conditions. 16. General Gypsum Board Finish locations: a. Level 0: Not Used. b. Level 1: Not Used. c. Level 2: Surfaces that are substrate for tile, unfinished walls, (stockroom walls, etc.), ceiling plenum areas, and other concealed areas unless a higher level of finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies. d. Level 3: Exterior Gypsum Board Soffits with textured paint fmish. 1) Note: Smooth finished soffits to receive Level 4 fmish. e. Level 4: At all finished surfaces that will be exposed to view. Standard finish unless otherwise indicated. f. Level 5: Starbucks Bulkhead and other areas with severe lighting conditions that will show imperfections of gypsum finishing. SECTION 09 30001(09300) — TILING A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished interior floor, base and wall tile and thresholds. 2. Installation of Owner Furnished interior floor tile. 3. Installation of floor joint sealant. 4. Miscellaneous accessories. B. Wall Tile (Owner Furnished): 1. CT -2: Wall Tile; RBC, Target Blend Glass Mosaic Sheet Tile, No. TGY -33, 1" x 1 ", 6" border, 12" mesh- mounted sheets . 2. CT -3: Wall Tile; Gemini Tile, 8" x 8" Field Tile, No. TGY -88, "Khaki ". 3. CT-4: Wall Tile; RBC, Mosaic Sheet Tile, No. TGY -28, Starbucks "Crystal White ", Random Pattern Stone Mosaic ". 4. CT -9: Wall Tile; United States Ceramic Tile, 6" x 6" Field Tile, No. U -074, "Biscuit Bright ". 5. CT -10: Wall Tile; United States Ceramic Tile, 3" x 6 ", Accent Tile, No. U739, "Red Pepper Bright ". C. Floor Tile (Owner Furnished): 1. CT -11: RBC Tile and Stone; "Back Bay"; 18" x 18 ", No. TGY -65, "Grain ". (CA LRV Food Ave). 2. CT-12: RBC Tile and Stone; "Back Bay"; 18" x 18 ", No. TGY -27, "Walnut ". (CA LRV Food Ave). 3. CT-15: Floor Tile; Gemini Tile, 12" x 12 ", No. TGY -99, "Moon Glow ", abrasive surface. 4. CT -26: Cove Base; Gemini Tile, 12" wide x 6" high, P3689, No. TGY -99, "Moon Glow ". 5. CT -26A: Cove Base Outside Comer; Gemini Tile, 1" wide x 6" high, PC3869, No. TGY -99, "Moon Glow ". D. Base Tile (Owner Furnished): 1. CT -211: Cove Base; RBC Tile and Stone; "Back Bay"; 6" wide x 6" high, No. TGY -65, "Grain ". (CA LRV Food Ave). 2. CT -22: Cove Base; RBC Tile and Stone; "Back Bay"; 6" wide x 6" high, No. TGY -27, "Walnut ". (CA LRV Food Ave). E. Quarry Tile (Owner Furnished): 1. Quarry Tile: Quarry Floor Tile; 6" x 6" x 1/2" 2. Quarry Tile Type(s): a. QT -1: natural clay paver with abrasive unglazed finish, all other attributes as specified #3 - #8 below. b. LA County projects add the following tile type: OT-1(S): natural clay paver with smooth unglazed finish, all other attributes as specified #3 - #8 below SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 43 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. Edge design: Wire cut and ground, square edge. 4. Color: No. 10 Summitville Red. 5. Static Coefficient of Friction Ranges: For Abrasive Surface; Dry 0.80 to 1.0, Wet 030 to 0.95. 6. Acceptable manufacturer and product: a. Summitville Tiles, Inc.: Quarry Tile.. 7. Grout joint: 3/8 inch wide. 8. Grout color: Hydroment Plus; Delorean Gray. 9. QT -2: Not Used. 10. QT -3: Not Used. 11. QT-4: Not Used. 12. QT -5: Quarry Base Tile; Summittville, 6" wide x 5" high x 1/2" coved base with round top, Q 3565, No. 10, "Summitville Red ". F. Latex Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors: 1. Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors (other than Cooler/Freezer Floors): Bostik ".Hydroment Single-Flex Multi - Purpose Latex Modified Flexible Thin Set Mortar, premixed. a. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.4. 2. Thin Set Mortar for Cooler /Freezer Floors (Choose a or b): Meet or exceed ANSI 118.4 a. For installations with early foot tragic and surface install temperature cf 50° or higher (Choose 1) or 2)]: 1) Provide Bostik ".Hydroment Single- Flex" Latex Modified Thinset mortar. (24 hour foot traffic) 2) Provide Bostik , " Hvdroment Single -Flex Fast Set ".Latex Modified Thinset Mortar. (6 hour foot traffic) b. For installations with foot traffic after 48 hours and surface install temperature of 34 °- 500: 1) Provide Bostik " Hvdroment Single -Flex Fast Set " Latex Modified Thinset Mortar with. Hydroment HY1900 Modified epoxy additive. G. Organic Adhesive for Walls: 1. Organic Adhesive for Walls: Mapei, Ultra -Mastic ECO. VOC - 61 g/L: a. Meet or exceed ANSI A136.1; Type I. H. Commercial Portland Cement Grout for Floors: Bostik "Hydroment ", Polymer- Modified Ceramic Tile Grout (Sanded), with "Hydroment Multi - Purpose #425 Acrylic Latex additive ".. 1. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.6 and A118.7. 2. Colors: a. Restroom and Food Service Floors (CT -15): Hydroment , " Delorean Gray ", H160. b. Tile Base (CT -26 and CT -26A): Hydroment , " Delorean Gray ", H160. c. For California (or Revised Food Service) stores use Floor Tile CT -11): Hydroment, "Latte ", H192. d. For California( or Revised Food Service) stores use Floor Tile (CT -12): Hvdroment, "Sand Beige", 11148 e. For California( or Revised Food Service) stores use Tile Base CT -21 & CT -21A Hydroment, "Latte ", 11192. f For California( or Revised Food Service) stores use Floor Tile (CT -22 and CT-22A): Hvdroment, "Sand Beige", H148. I. Dry Tile Grout for Walls: Bostik "Hydroment (Unsanded) Dry Tile Grout" with "Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic Latex Additive ". 1. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.6. a. Colors: 1) Restroom Wall Tile: H151, "Taupe. 2) Food Service, Grocery and Starbucks Wall Tile: H135, "Antique White ". J. Wall Adhesive for Quarry Tile Base at Cooler/Freezer Wall Panels (When Required): 1. Elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive for Quarry Tile Base: Bostik "Hydroment Ultra Set Advanced ", one -part, trowel applied, elastomeric waterproofing/crack /sound isolation membrane and setting adhesive, available in pails or sausages. a. Meet or exceed ANSI 118.10 as noted: 1) Fungus Micro Organism Resists Pass 2) Seam Strength 8 lbs. per inch > 8 lb.. 3) Break Strength 170 psi 194 psi 4) Dimensional Stability Pass 5) ASTM D9068 Waterproofness— Pass SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 44 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) K. Metal Edge Strip: (Terrazzo Angle Type), between ceramic or quarry floor tile and resilient tile in locations as indicated on Drawings. 1. Size: 1/8 inch wide, zinc, depth as indicated on Drawings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip; Staley, NC; 336- 622 -4247. b. Comparable products from other manufacturers. L. Door Thresholds (Owner Furnished): Solid surface material in size and profile to transition from ceramic floor tile to vinyl floor tile. Bevel as required to meet finish surface elevations between adjacent materials. 1. Manufacturer: DuPont Corian. 2. Colors: Corian "Bone ". M. Joint Sealant: Provide sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, Color to match adjacent grout color in following locations: 1. Floor Expansion Joints: SLNT -2. 2. Interior Wall Joints: SLNT -4. N. Quarry Tile Floor Transition Strip - (FTS -6): Anodized aluminum transition strip between quarry tile and finished concrete slab sloped for wheeled traffic. ADA compliant. 1. Size:: 2 -9/16 inch long, visible length x 1/2 inch high. 2. Manufacturer : Schluter Systems. 3. Product: AERP 125 B65 "Reno- Ramp ". 4. Finish: Satin Anodized Aluminum. O. Dressing Room Floor Transition (Owner Furnished): 1. Transition Strip: Solid surface material in size and profile to transition from ceramic floor tile to carpet. Bevel as required to meet finish surface elevations between adjacent materials. a. Manufacturer: DuPont Corian. b. Colors: Corian "Bone ". P. Joint Sealant: Provide sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, Color to match adjacent grout color in following locations: 1. Floor Expansion Joints: SLNT -2. Mixes: 1. Latex- Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar: Prepare premixed mortar by mixing with clean, drinkable tap water strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Latex- Portland Cement Grout: Acid resistant grout, mixed with acrylic latex additive. Mix grout strictly according to additive manufacturer's instructions. Do not dilute additive with water. Q. R. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Install tile according to TCA "Handbook ", ANSI A108.4, and ANSI A108.5. 2. Ceramic Tile Floors: Install ceramic paver tile on concrete floors by thin -set method using a latex - portland cement mortar; TCA Method F113. Lay tile in stack bond pattern with 1/8" wide joints, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Quarry Tile Floors (other than Cooler /Freezer Floors) in 50 °+ temperature range: Install quarry tile on concrete floors by thin -set method using a latex portland cement mortar; TCA Method F113. Tile will not acceptfoot traffic before 24 hours of cure time. Lay tile in stack bond pattern with 3/8" wide joints. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Quarry Tile Floors for Cooler /Freezer Floors in 500+ temperature range: Install quarry tile on concrete floors by thin -set method using a latex-portland cement mortar; TCA Method F113. Tile will not accept foot traffic before 6 hours of cure time, and typical tragic can occur after 24 hours. Lay tile in stack bond pattern with 3/8" widejoints, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Quarry Tile Floors for Cooler /Freezer Floors in 34 °- 50° temperature range: Install quarry tile on concrete floors by thin -set method using a latex-portland cement mortar; TCA Method F115 -07. Tile will not acceptfoot tragic before 48 hours of cure time. Lay tile in stack bond pattern with 3/8" widejoints, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Quarry Tile Base: Install quarry tile base on gypsum board surfaces by thin -set method matching joint width to that of adjacent floor tile using the same thin set material as specied for quarry rile floors; TCA Method W202. Radius cove to be `flush" with floor tile per TCA "Flush Cove Base Installation" Instructions. 7. Ceramic Tile Walls: Install ceramic wall tile on gypsum board surfaces by thin -set method using an organic adhesive; TCA Method W223 or W242. Lay tile horizontally in stack bond pattem with 1/8" wide joints, unless otherwise indicated. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 -12 9300 - 45 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 8. Ceramic Tile Base: Install ceramic tile base on gypsum board surfaces by thin -set method matching joint width to that of adjacent floor or wall tile using an organic adhesive; TCA Method W223 or W242. Radius cove to be "flush" with floor tile per TCA "Flush Cove Base Installation" Instructions. 9. Thresholds: Install thresholds at door openings in full bed of clear silicone sealant (SLNT -4). Locations as indicated on Drawings. S. Quarry Tile Floor Transition Strip (FTS -6) Installation: 1. Verify floor transition used with quarry tile thickness so a flush installation between the two materials can be achieved. 2. Fill the cavity beneath the sloped section of the floor transition with thin -set mortar. 3. Using a notched trowel, apply thin -set mortar to the floor area where floor transition is to be installed. 4. Press the perforated anchoring leg of floor transition into the mortar and align. 5. Trowel additional thin -set mortar over the perforated anchoring leg to ensure full coverage and support of tile edges. 6. Solidly embed the tiles so that the tiled surface is flush with the top of the floor transition; the floor transition should not be higher than the tiled surface, but rather slightly lower, up to 1/32 ". 7. But quarry tile up to the integrated joint spacer on floor transition, which ensures a uniform joint space of 1/16" - 1/8 ". 8. Fill joint between transition strip and quarry tile completely with clear silicone sealant. T. Joint Design and Construction: 1. Provide expansion joints 3/8" wide to align with joints in concrete slab and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide sealant joints at inside corners of wall tile and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. 3. Construct expansion joints full depth of tile and mortar bond coat. 4. Install joint backing material with top 1/4" below the finished surface of tile except as otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer. Protect joints with paper or other suitable material to keep joint free of mortar, grout, and dirt. 5. After grout has thoroughly cured, remove paper, and clean joints by brushing. Sand or lightly grind edges of tile to be in contact with sealant, and thoroughly clean joint. Prime joints and apply sealant according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. U. Grouting Installation: 1. Grout tile walls, floors and base with latex - portland cement grout. 2. Do not grout tile until tile is firmly set. Completely remove paper, glue, and adhesive before grouting. Properly ventilate and allow sufficient time for evaporation of volatiles from adhesive before grouting. 3. Soak or dampen joints of tile to be grouted with latex - portland cement grout as recommended by grout manufacturer. 4. Force grout into tile joints, completely filling joints with compacted grout and covering mortar or adhesives. joints of square -edged tile flush with surface. Strike or tool joints of cushion -edged tile to depth of cushion. Fill gaps and skips, and retool. V. Installation of Quarry Tile Base on Cooler /Freezer Wall Panels (When Required): Clean Cooler/Freezer Wall Panels as recommended by the elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive manufacturer. Install quarry tile base on Cooler/Freezer Wall Panel surfaces by thin -set method matching joint width to that of adjacent floor tile using the elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive; TCA Method W202. Radius cove to be "flush" with floor tile per TCA "Flush Cove Base Installation" Instructions. Do not apply the elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive over surfaces below 50° F., and allow to cure 6 -12 hours depending on temperature and humidity. Install per elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. If questions arise consult elastomeric membrane and setting adhesive manufacturer's Technical Service Department. W. Installation of New Quarry Tile over Existing sealed concrete: 1. Existing concrete must be sound with not structural cracks. If structural cracks exist contact the Structural Engineer for direction on how to proceed. 2. Existing concrete surface must be free from all dust, wax, sealers, oils, coatings of any kind. The typical sealer/hardner that may be present will be successfully abated during grinding. Other surface contaminates must be dealt with individually. 3. The existing concrete slab surface requires grinding to remove surface impurities and to provide an acceptable surface profile for the new tile system. a. Follow grinding requirements of Section 03 0140 Concrete Floor Preparation.. b. Provide floor surface profile as recommended by tile adhesive manufacturer. 4. If the floor surface needs leveling or other surface remediation follow requirements of 03 5416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 46 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 5. Install the specified tile system using Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors as recommended for the actual application encountered. 6. Install the new Quarry Tile per TCNA method TR712 -09, F113 -09 or ANSI recommended methods dictated by the need for epoxy set and grout, crack isolation and/or waterproof membranes. If no remedial methods of setting the tile are required, install tile as specified herein for "Quarry Tile Floors for Cooler/Freezer Floors" X. Installation of New Quarry Tile over Existing Quarry Tile: 1. Existing Quarry Tile and Grout must be sound, well bonded with not structural cracks. If structural cracks exist: contact the Structural Engineer for direction on how to proceed. 2. If existing Quarry Tile and Grout have any tile that are not sound (i.e. fully bonded), all the existing tile must be removed down to the structural slab. a. Follow requirements of Section 03 0140 Concrete Floor Preparation.. b. Provide floor surface profile as recommended by tile adhesive manufacturer. c. For the self - leveling material used to fill the recess where the existing Quarry Tile was removed follow requirements of 03 5416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment. d. Install the specified tile system using Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors as recommended for the actual application encountered. e. Install the new Quarry Tile per TCNA method TR712 -09, F113-09 or ANSI recommended methods dictated by the need for epoxy set and grout, crack isolation and/or waterproof membranes. If no remedial methods of setting the tile are required, install tile as specified herein for "Quarry Tile Floors for Cooler/Freezer Floors ". 3. If existing Quarry Tile and Grout are sound proceed as follows: a. Existing Quarry Tile and Grout surface must be free from all dust, wax, sealers, oils, coatings of any kind. The typical Existing Quarry Tile and Grout will be successfully abated during grinding. If surface contaminates are present the tile must be removed. b. The existing Quarry Tile and Grout surface requires grinding to remove surface impurities and to provide an acceptable surface profile for the new tile system. l) Follow grinding requirements of Section 03 0140 Concrete Floor Preparation. e 2) Provide floor surface profile as recommended by tile adhesive manufacturer. 3) If the Existing Quarry Tile and Grout needs leveling or other surface remediation follow requirements of 03 5416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment. c. Install the specified tile system using Latex - Portland Cement Thin Set Mortar for Floors as recommended for the actual application encountered. d. Install the new Quarry Tile per TCNA method TR712 -09, F113 -09 or ANSI recommended methods dictated by the need for epoxy set and grout, crack isolation and/or waterproof membranes. If no remedial methods of setting the tile are required, install tile as specified herein for "Quarry Tile Floors for Cooler/Freezer Floors ". Y. Curing & Cleaning of Tile Work: 1. Damp cure latex - portland cement thin -set installations and grouts containing portland cement for a minimum of 72 hours. 2. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. 3. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 4. Protection: a. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. b. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed, except as approved by OSR. SECTION 09 5100 (09510) — ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner furnished suspended metal grid ceiling systems including main runners, cross tees and edge moldings. 2. Installation of Owner furnished acoustical ceiling panels. 3. Furn ish and install hanger wires, fasteners, compression struts and accessories required for a complete installation, including seismic bracing as required by local goveming code. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 47 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Acoustical Ceiling Panels (Owner Furnished): 1. ACT -1: USG Radar Clima Plus SQ, Mineral Fiber Board, No. 2410, 24" x 48" x 5/8 ". 2. ACT -2: USG, Frost, No. 414, Cast Ceiling Panels with SLB reveal edge, 24" x 24" x 3/4 ". a. Color: USG, Advantage Color, No. 090, "Sandstone ". 3. ACT -3: USG Sheetrock Lay -in Ceiling Panels, No. 3270, 24" x 48" x 1/2 ". 4. ACT -5: USG Radar Clima Plus SQ, Mineral Fiber Board, No. 2210, 24" x 24" x 5/8 ". C. Suspension Systems for ACT -1, 3 and 5 (Owner Furnished): 1. Ceiling Suspension System for ACT -1, ACT -3 and ACT -5: Heavy Duty grid system meeting requirements of ASTM C635 Heavy Duty when suspended at 4' -0" o.c. Exposed tee -grid, double web, hot - dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange. a. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel; white finish on exposed surfaces. b. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with 1" mounting flange by 2" face flange and hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish. c. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard. d. Ceiling Grid Corners: JB 12 -3/4" Radius 90 degree Outside Corner Cap for 3/4" molding (Donn). e. Acceptable Manufacturer's and Products: 1) USG; Donn DX/DXL Double Web Grid System. D. Ceiling Suspension System for ACT -2 (Owner Furnished): 1. Heavy Duty grid system meeting requirements of ASTM C635, Heavy Duty when suspended at 4' -0" o.c. Exposed tee -grid, double web, electro - galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange. a. Finish on Suspension System: 1) Baked enamel; USG Advantage Color, No. 090, "Sandstone" finish on exposed caps. 2) Baked enamel; white finish on non - exposed surfaces. b. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with 1" mounting flange by 2" face flange and hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish. c. Acceptable Manufacturer's and Products. 1) USG; Donn DX Suspension System. E. Attachment Devices: 1. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements if applicable. a. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488. 1) Type: Post installed expansion anchors. 2) Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. b. Power - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190. F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: 1. Wire Hangers: Zinc- Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. 3. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04 -inch thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch diameter bolts. G. SEISMIC ACCESSORIES (FOR (JBC SEISMIC ZONES 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D ", "E" and "F ": ADD this article): 1. Wall Edge Molding: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch face angle with hemmed edges to match suspension :system. 2. Compression Struts: Provide approved vertical compression strut units to comply with requirements of ASTM E580 and governing codes. Refer 10 Drawings for locations and sizing of units. 3. Stabilizer Spacer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. a. USG Stabilizer Bars; SB. Length varies from 1 foot to 5 feet in length. H. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install Glazing using skilled mechanics experienced in installing acoustical ceilings. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 48 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Install systems according to requirements of regulatory agencies, ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of this section. 4. FOP UBC SEISMIC ZONES 2, 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B", "C" and "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D", "E" and "F ": ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH: Comply with requirements of ASTM E580 for installation of ceiling suspension systems requiring seismic restraint. 5. Cooperate with mechanical and electrical trades in locating and spacing fixtures, diffusers, and similar items located in ceiling. 6. Lay out pattern according to reflected ceiling plans. Where not otherwise indicated, lay out with margins on opposite sides of rooms equal in size and greater than 1/2 tile width. 7. Install suspension system level, true to plane, and at required elevation and pattern, with finished surfaces undamaged. 8. Suspend main runners with minimum 12 gauge wire, typical. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Pipe:; and Conduit: Do not support suspension systems from conduit, ducts, pipes, or equipment. 11. Roof Deck: Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 12. Concrete or Composite Floor Deck: Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, post installed mechanical or power - actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. L SEISMIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS (FOR UBC SEISMIC ZONES 2, 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B ", "C", and "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D", "E" and "F ": ADD this article and the appropriate paragraph or paragraphs below): 1. FOR UBC SEISMIC ZONES 2, 3 & 4, BOLA /SBC SF. LSMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B", "C" and "D" or IBC SEISMIC design calekory "D", "E" and "F ": ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH: Laterally szpport ceiling system with 4 wires, minimum 12 gauge, splayed in four directions 90 degrees apart, and connected to main runner within 2 inch of cross runner and to structure above at an angle not exceeding 45 degfrom the planes of the ceiling. a. Vertical hanger wire 12 gauge at 4' o.c. b. Place lateral supports 12' -0" 0. c. in each direction with the first support located within 4' -0 "from each wall. c. FOR UBC SEISMIC ZONES 3 & 4, BOLA /SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D", "E" and "F ".• ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH: Compression Struts: Provide approved vertical compression struts, fastened to main runner and to roof or floor structure above, designed in accordance with ASTM E580. d. FOR UBC SEISMIC ZONES 3 & 4, BOLA /SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D ", "E" and "F ": ADD FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH: Install 2 inch wall edge molding at perimeter. On two adjacent walls, loose lay unattached main runners and cross tees on edge molding and hold back 3/4 inch from wall. On the other two adjacent walls, attach grid to wall edge molding with pop rivets. Support main runners and cross tees with wire hanger supports 8 inches maximum from walls and install horizontal stabilizer spacers to hold suspension system in place at the unattached main runner and cross tee ends. SECTION 09 65011(09650) — RESILIENT FLOORING A. Work Includes: 1. Removal of existing VCT flooring material and adhesive. 2. Testing of substrate surfaces. 3. Installation of Owner Furnished vinyl composition tile, resilient base, and floor transition strips. 4. Sheet Linoleum Flooring. 5. Contractor to furnish adhesives for installation of VCT, resilient base and accessories. 6. Cleaning of surfaces and areas of work. 7. Sealing and finishing resilient flooring. B. Related Items: 1. Section 03 5416 — Hydraulic Cement Underlayment; for preparation of substrate surfaces to accept new flooring materials. 2. Section 03 0140 — Concrete Floor Preparation; for preparation of substrate surfaces, including grinding of existing concrete slab. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 49 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: a. 48 hours before installation. b. During installation. c. 48 hours after installation. 2. Close spaces to traffic during and for 48 hours after floor tile installation. D. Pre - Installation Meeting: 1. Convene a pre - installation meeting under provisions of Section 01 1100 prior to commencing work of this Section. 2. Require attendance of: a. OSR. b. General Contractor. c. VCT Flooring Contractor. d. Other parties directly affecting work of this Section. 3. Pre - installation meeting agenda: a. Review of drawings and specifications for application of VCT system. b. Review proposed application procedures and coordination required with other trades. c. Review proposed changes and deviations from drawings and specifications. d. Review specific project conditions. e. Walk through area to receive Work of this section. f. Review required inspections and coordination, and parties required to be involved. g. Record: Names, company affiliations, telephone numbers and email addresses of all attendees, include this information with meeting minutes. h. Remodel VCT Work Scope and Contract Responsibilities. Contract Parties: ( Contractor = GC, actual contract party and holds sub - contract for floor contractor ; hires and supervises Housekeeping) ( Housekeeping = Target's Housekeeping contractor ]: 1) Floor Installation: VCT floor installation by Contractor; (No Work by Housekeeping ). 2) 2 Protective Coats: installation by Housekeeping; (GC Supervision ). 3) Daily Maintenance: by Housekeeping; (GC Supervision ). 4) Stripping & Turnover Coats: by Housekeeping; (GC Supervision ). 5) Turnover: the GC is responsible for Turnover to the Owner; ( Housekeeping not involved with turnover). i. Discuss floor prep for existing VCT floor slab. 1) Floor Slab Prep Evaluation: Typical floor prep will be discussed during the Pre - Installation Meeting. (a) Standard Floor Prep: The requirement as how to remove existing adhesive from the slab surface is the decision of the Contractor; which includes whether to use grinding or other standard floor prep to achieve a properly prepared slab for installing VCT tile.. (b) Grinding Floor Prep: If differential slab surfaces are uncovered when VCT tile is removed, the area may require using a grinder (Section 03 0140) and underlayment material (Section 03 5416); this will be accomplished on a "Time & Material" basis specific to your project subject to the amount or Work required in consultation with the OSR. 4. Pre - installation Meeting Minutes: Contractor to record in writing minutes of meeting. Meeting minutes to include items discussed, decisions and agreements made, including unresolved issues. Distribute minutes within 5 days of conference to: 1) OSR. 2) General Contractor. 3) VCT Flooring Contractor. 4) Target's Housekeeping Contractor. 5) Other designated parties. E. Extra Stock: 1. Save all unused vinyl composition tile and resilient base scraps longer than 2 feet in length for Owner's maintenance purposes. Store where directed by OSR at completion of Work. F. (RF -1, and RF -3) Vinyl Composition Tiles and Feature Strip (Owner Furnished): 1. The following materials are Owner Furnished, (the actual material being provided will be determined by Target), if there are questions concerning the materials being furnished or the quantity of materials contact your OSR: SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 50 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) a. EF -1: (white tile): 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick. b. RF -2: Not Used. c. RF -3: (red accent strip): 6" x 24" x 1/8" G. (RF-8) Sheet Linoleum Flooring: 1. Manufacturer: Forbo Linoleum, Inc.; Haze1ton, PA; Tel: 800 - 842 -7839. 2. Colors and Patterns: Marmoleum, Fresco, No. 3828, "Blue Heaven ". 3. Thickness: 1/10 inch, 2.5mm. 4. Width: 79 inches. 5. Length: 105 inches. 6. Backing: Jute. 7. Adhesive: Forbo L910 Adhesive. 8. Heat Welding Rods: Marmoweld color matched welding rod. H. (RB) Resilient Base (Owner Furnished): 1. (RB) Resilient Base: Coved base, 6" high x 1/8" thick, ASTM F 1861. a. VPI Coved Wall Base. VOC — 0 g/L b. Color; `Burnt Umber ". 2. Acceptable Manufacturers Resilient Base: a. VPI Corporation; Sheboygan, WI. Tel: 800 - 874 -4240. Distributed by Golden Valley Supply; Tel: 763- 544 -8907; Contact: Connie Larson. I. (FTS) Floor Transition Strips: 1. Resilient Reducer Strips from resilient to concrete flooring:, reduces 1/8 inch to 0. Butts to resilient flooring. See detail in Drawings and see Section 03 5416 in spec "SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 02- DIVISION 05 02411)0 — 05 5000" and refer to paragraphs "Control Joint Filler and Transition Ramp Material" and "Transition Ramp Installation Requirements ". J. Adhesiv(s: 1. Contractor's Option: Contractor has option to install VCT using standard trowel type flooring adhesive or spray type flooring adhesive. Verify adhesive to be used with specific Owner Furnished tile shipped to Project Site. Acceptable products are specified below. 2. VCT Trowel Type Adhesives: a. Manufacturers: 1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2) Mannington Commercial. 3) W. W. Henry Company, Tel.: 800.232.4832. b. Water Based Latex: Verify adhesive to be used with specific Owner Furnished tile shipped to Project Site. 1) Armstrong, S -515 Clear Thin Spread Floor Tile Adhesive. VOC — 49 g/L 2) Mannington, V -11 Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L 3) W. W. Henry, 430 ClearPro Thin Spread Floor Tile Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L 3. VCT Spray Type Adhesives: a. Manufacturers: 1) Chicago Adhesive Products Company (Chapco); 800- 621 -0220. 2) The Mohawk Group; 800 -554 -6637. b. Products: 1') Chapco Safe -Set 607 Premium Spray Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L 2) Mohawk, NuSpraylok DK139, Standard Spray Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L 4. Resiliient Base & Floor Transition Strip Adhesive: As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material, location and intended use. a. Resilient Base: VPI No. 600 Acrylic Copolymer Wall Base Adhesive. K. Underlayment: 1. Provide underlayment material as required for final substrate preparation. Use same product used for project as specified under Section 03 5416. L. Sealers, Strippers, Cleaners and Finish System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: Johnson Wax Professional; www.johnsondiversey.cozn/ a. Protection Coat Finish: "Signature" Floor Finish System. VOC — 3 g/L b. &Tipper: "Bravo" Stripper (non - solvent based). c. Cleaner: "Stride" Neutral Cleaner. d. Finish System: "Signature" Floor Finish System. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 51 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET M. Existing VCT Removal: 1. Move fixtures from area to be re- tiled. 2. Remove existing VCT tile by using either: a. SASE Twister (Propane Powered). b. SASE Cyclone (Battery Powered). c. SASE Company, Inc. d. 26423 79th Avenue South e. Kent, WA 98032 f. Telephone No. 1- 800 -522 -2606 3. Scrape any additional loose adhesive or floor material from slab. 4. Work Boundaries: At the end of each work session the work boundary edge condition must be a defined clean edge. This work may require using hand tools to achieve the required edge condition. Work Boundaries will be established by the Contractor after consultation and approval by the OSR. N. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install VCT flooring and accessories using skilled mechanics experienced in installing VCT. 3. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. 4. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 5. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 6. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with underlayment and leveling materials to remove bumps and ridges and to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 7. Do not install flooring materials until they have been stored at same temperature for a minimum of 24 hours as the space where they are to be installed. 8. Allow adhesive to properly "set up ", if additional air is required to dry adhesive, set fans or blowers to blow away from floor surface so surface contaminates will not be blown into wet adhesive. 9. Trowel Adhesive Installation Option: To aid in eliminating adhesive ridges telegraphing on resilient flooring, replace trowel blade every 1,500 s.f. or in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 10. Lay -out tile pattern in accordance with Drawings from center marks established between principal walls or panels, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite sides of room or panels are of equal width. a. Install tile square to room axis, unless otherwise indicated. b. Match adjacent tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. c. Lay with uniform tight joints, accurately aligned, with alternating grain checker board pattern. d. Cut tiles neatly at walls and partitions so that flooring joint will be covered by base. Extend flooring neatly into feature strips and edging strips 1) Cut Tile: No tile shall be cut less than 11" except on the perimeter of a contained area, panel or outside wall Minimum perimeter tile shall not be less than 6" x 11 ". 2) Installation of areas with tile less than 1/2 tile in width are not acceptable to Target. Owner's OSR will require removal and reinstallation of non - compliant tile in accordance with this specification at Contractor's expense. 11. Rolling: Immediately after setting tile in an area, thoroughly cross roll installed area using the tile manufacturer's recommended 1001b. steel drum roller weighted roller. Roll side to side, up and down, and diagonally to ensure proper transfer of adhesive onto tile backs. a. Roll completed areas occasionally and entire job again upon completion. 12. (RF -8) Linoleum Flooring Installation: Cut required length of linoleum flooring from roll, allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. Install sheet flooring square with room axis. a. Heat Welded Seams: Rout out seams and heat weld together with complementary colored heat welding rod of complimentary composition in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations. b. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 150 sq. ft. /gal. as recommended by flooring manufacturer. O. Cleaning and Protection: 1. Immediately after installation, remove excessive adhesive, sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly to remove all construction debris and miscellaneous installation soiling. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 52 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. Immediately after sweeping or vacuuming apply at least two protective coats (2,000 s.f. per gal.). Use Signature floor fmish (provided and applied by Contractor) for remodel applications. These are "Protective Coats" NOT "Slop Coats" (i.e. Slop Coat - poured directly on tile in a pool and spread evenly). Allow floor to dry 'thoroughly - approximately 3/4 hour drying time typically between coats; longer time with high humidity and/or low temperatures; shorter time with low humidity and/or high temperatures. 3. During the next five days clean floor by damp mopping with an approved neutral cleaner, carefully scrubbing black marks and excessive soil. Always follow manufacturer's recommended dilution ratios and application instructions. 4. After five days, normal store maintenance may be resumed including the build up of additional coats of wax. STRIPPING IS NOT MANDATORY! If stripping is required to remove excessive dirt refer to "Cleaning or Stripping" instructions in paragraph "2" of "Finishing" Article below. 5. Protection: Protect flooring during Owner's fixturing operations. Coordinate with Owners OSR for scheduling, locations and type of protection required. P. Finishing: 1. Coordinate and schedule cleaning operations with OSR and Target's Store Team and use Target's Night Maintenance Contractor for final stripping and finishing before turnover day. 2. Follow the finishing procedures for the finish coatings in accordance with the Target Floor Care Procedures manual for a two (2) coat build up application. Always follow manufacturer's recommended application instructions. SECTION 09 6800 (09680) – CARPETING A. Work Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished carpeting, carpet mat and floor transition strips. 2. Contractor to furnish adhesives for installation of carpet, carpet tile and accessories. B. Carpet Materials (Owner Furnished): 1. Carpet CPT -1: Owner Furnished, Custom Grey Patterned Carpet. a. Manufacturer: Masland, or Mohawk Carpet (verify). b. Pattern: "Sticks and Stones ". c. Carpet CPT -1A (Infant Furniture Flat): Owner Furnished, pre -cut carpet pieces of CPT -1 with hemmed edges. Loose laid on fixtures by Fixture Installer. Refer to Floor Finish & Wall Finish Plan (A121) for locations. l) Sizes: Sizes provided based on Store type. (a) 48" wide x 46" deep. (b) 36" wide x 46" deep. 2. Carpet CPT -2 : Not Used. C. Carpet Tile CPT -3 (Entry): Owner Furnished, patterned loop carpet tile, Target is testing carpet tile and your store will receive one of the two specified products listed below: 1. Interface: Custom Tufted 9Z70, Modular Tile. a. Product Number: 19Z7002500. b. Color: Custom Gray pattern and color. c. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop. d. Face Yarn: Invista Type 6.6 Nylon. e. Yarn Weight: 35 oz. /sq. yd. f. ]Dye Method: 100% Solution Dye. g. Primary Backing: —. h. Secondary Backing: —. i. Size: 19.69" x 19.69" Tile. 2. Sbernco; EcoMod Cut Sheet, Modular Tile. a. Product Number: —. b. Color: Graphite. c. Construction: Tufted Loop. d. Face Yarn: NSP Eco Sol Q Nylon. e. Yarn Weight: 32 oz. /sq. yd. f. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dye. g. Primary Backing: Woven Polypropylene. h. Secondary Backing: Ecoworx 100% recycable. i. Size: 24" x 24" Tile. D. Carpet CPT-4: Not Used. E. Carpet CPT -5: Not Used. SPECIFICATIONS – DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 –12 9300 - 53 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET F. Carpet Tile CPT -6 (Electronics Boat and/ or Pharmacy): Owner Furnished, Custom Cushioned Carpet Tile. 1. Manufacturer: Mannington Commercial. 2. Note: Refer to Floor Finish & Wall Finish Plan (A121) for location of Furniture Flats. 3. Style: Y5969 -AZ08. 4. Construction: Textured Patterned Loop. 5. Face Fiber: 100% Polypropylene. 6. Dye Method: Solution. 7. Gauge: 1/12. 8. Pile Height: .156 Average. 9. Tufted Yarn Weight: 26 oz. per sq. yd. 10. Primary Backing: 100% Woven Synthetic. 11. Secondary Backing: Infinity Modular Cushion back Closed cell Polymer. 12. Size: 24" x 24 ". 13. Recommended Adhesive: Mannington MC -711 Cushion Multi- purpose Adhesive. G. Carpet Tile CPT -7: Not Used. H. Carpet Tile CPT -8: Not Used. 1. Carpet Tile CPT -9: Not Used. J. Carpet CPT -10 [Previously CPT -1 (Brown)]: Owner Furnished, Custom Broadloom Carpet. 1. Manufacturer: Mannington Commercial. 2. Style: X2661 -AZ08. 3. Construction: Textured Patterned Loop. 4. Face Fiber: 100% Polypropylene. 5. Dye Method: Solution. 6. Gauge: 1/12. 7. Pile Height: .156 Average. 8. Tufted Yarn Weight: 26 oz. per sq. yd. 9. Primary Backing: 100% Woven Synthetic. 10. Secondary Backing: UltraBac Plus. 11. Width: 12 feet. 12. Recommended Adhesive: Mannington MC -411 Multi- purpose Adhesive. VOC - 0 g/L 13. Installation: No Pattern Match. K. Carpet CPT -10A (Infant Furniture Flat): Owner Furnished, pre -cut carpet pieces of CPT -10 with hemmed edges. Loose laid on fixtures by Fixture Installer. Refer to Floor Finish & Wall Finish Plan (A121) for locations. 1. Sizes: Sizes provided based on Store type. a. 48" wide x 46" deep. b. 36" wide x 46" deep. L. Carpet Mat (MT -1): Owner Fumished, Entry Carpet Mat. 1. Manufacturer: Sbemco International Inc.; Algona, IA; Tel: 800 -468 -0860. 2. Style: "Compririb" Carpet Mat. 3. Color: 4. Face Fiber: 100% Polypropylene. 5. Product Height with Backing: 9/16 ". 6. Face Yarn Weight: 65 ounces per sq. yd. 7. Moisture Retention: 27 ounces per sq. ft. M. Accessories 1. Patching and Leveling Compound: Furnish and install one of the following: a. Parabond M -120 Powder and M -283 Latex Additive. b. DAP 609 Powder and 60L Additive. c. Dependable Skimcoat Powder and Latex Liquid. N. (FTS) Floor Transition Strips (Owner Furnished) : 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Floor Transition Strips (FTS): a. VPI Corporation; Sheboygan, WI. Tel: 800 - 874 -4240. Distributed by Golden Valley Supply; Tel: 763- 544 -8907; Contact: Connie Larson. 2. (FTS -1) Carpet Edge Guard: Vinyl edge guard. Carpet to vinyl tile. Owner Furnished. a. VPI: No. ACC 03 -T. VOC - 0 g/L b. Color: `Burnt Umber ". SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 54 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. (FTS -3): Not Used. 4. (FTS -4) Carpet Tile Adaptor: Vinyl Adaptor. Carpet tile to vinyl tile. Owner Furnished. a. VPI: No. ACC 21 -T. VOC — 0 g/L b. Color: "Burnt Umber ". 5. (FTS -5) Entry Carpet Tile Adaptor (FTS -5 is now 2 ", if replacing part of existing 1"vinyl replace it all with 2 "): Vinyl Adaptor. Carpet tile (CPT -3) to entry mat (MT -1). Owner Furnished. a. VPI: No. ACC 17, Snap -Down Divider 2 ". b. Color: No. 01, "Jet ", (Black). c. Track Base: No. ACC 07M. O. Adhesives: 1. Contractor's Option: Contractor has option to install carpet, carpet tile and accessories using standard trowel type flooring adhesive or spray type flooring adhesive. Both type of products are specified below. 2. Trowel Type Carpet Adhesive: For LEED projects, VOC cannot exceed 50 g/L a. Capitol USA: Saf -T -Bond 002. VOC — 0 g/L b. Henry 351 FastProTM Carpet Adhesive. VOC — 4 g/L c. Mannington MC-411 Multi- purpose Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L d. Masland Contract: Ultra- Premium #2750 Floor Covering Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L e. Shaw: Subset 1000. VOC — 0 g/L 3. Spray Type Carpet Adhesive: For LEED projects, VOC cannot exceed 50 g/L a. Products: Chapco Safe -Set 607 Premium Spray Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L b. Manufacturers: Chicago Adhesive Products Company (Chapco); 800 - 621 -0220. 4. Seam Sealer: For LEED projects, VOC cannot exceed 50 g/L a. Masland: 1810 Latex Seam Sealer. VOC — 0 g/L b. Shaw: Subset 4000. VOC — 0 g/L 5. CTP -3 Trowel Type Carpet Tile Adhesive (Owner Fumished): Target is testing carpet tile and your store will receive one of the two specified products listed below a. Interface Adhesive: XL Brands: Dyna -Mix MB. VOC — 0 g/L. b. Sbemco Adhesive: Shaw 5100 Adhesive. 6. Spray Type Carpet Tile Adhesive: Not to be used with CPT -3. a. For LEED projects, VOC cannot exceed 50 g/L b. Products: Chapco Safe -Set 602 Pressure Sensitive Spray Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L c. Manufacturer: Chicago Adhesive Products Company (Chapco); 800 - 621 -0220. 7. Floor Transition Strip Adhesive: a. As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material, location and intended use. P. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install carpeting using skilled mechanics experienced in installing carpeting. 3. Conform to requirements of references. 4. Install carpet materials on surfaces which are thoroughly cured, dry, clean and free of dirt, grease, oil, paint, mortar and plaster droppings. 5. Fill cracks, holes and voids in subfloor. Thoroughly clean surfaces so that they are smooth and free of dust. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendation for patch thickness. 6. Prime concrete according to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Do not mix carpet from different production lots unless examined and approved by the OSR. 8. Cut carpet to the proper length a minimum of 3 to 4 inches longer than the area of measurement and spread out in the area where it is to be installed a minimum 24 hours prior to actual installation. Align all breadths, or sections, of carpet in their proper position and trim the seams before spreading adhesives. 9. Install carpet in longest lengths possible to minimize cross seams. Install carpet in each area so grain is in one direction. Make seam joints straight with pieces butted tightly together. 10. Form, seams according to Carpet Manufacturer's instructions. Center seams at door openings under the door. Do not extend seams that are perpendicular to door openings through opening. 11. Trowel Adhesive Installation Option: Use 1/8" V -notch trowel to spread adhesive unless another size is recommended by the Carpet Manufacturer. Do not lay carpet into adhesive immediately. Allow sufficient tack time or set up time. Test tackiness by touching adhesive with fingers to see if strings develop when pulling away. Immediately remove excess adhesive from carpet pile face. A 100% transfer of the adhesive to the carpet backing, while maintaining full coverage of the floor, must be obtained. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 55 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Q. 12. Spray Adhesive Installation Option: Apply spray adhesive to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install carpet over adhesive within manufacturer's recommended time period. 13. Use seam sealer on every seam and under vinyl molding flanges, outlet covers and carpet edge moldings. To prevent fraying and raveling at seams, apply a 1/8" continuous bead of seam sealer adhesive to the base of the first edge where the face yarn enters the backing to seal the first edge as well as the second edge when the edges are butted together to form the seam. 14. Roll carpet with a light roller to remove air bubbles and wrinkles and leave a smooth surface. It may be necessary to re -roll the carpet 24 to 48 hours later to remove any bubbles or air pockets that may have developed. 15. Remove or trim loose yarn, frays and ravels. Repair, seal or replace to prevent further raveling. 16. Immediately upon completion, clean and vacuum carpet and perform an inspection with the OSR. Correct noted deficiencies within seven working days. 17 Immediately after inspection, re -clean and vacuum carpet, if necessary, and protect from damage and soiling by covering with polyethylene film perforated with a 1/4" round rod approximately 24" on center each way to prevent mildew. Allow no storage of tools or equipment on carpet. 18. Replace damaged or defective work where required. Replace entire carpet section if required to achieve pattem and color uniformity. Carpet Tile Installation: 1. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." a. Install carpet tile after all fixtures are installed. b. The concrete slab must be tested for moisture (2 tests minimum), per manufacturer's recommendations, and correct any moisture issues before proceeding. c. Glue -down; apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's application rate. Do not use excessive adhesive. d. The floor and room temperature , as well as flooring materials and adhesive must be maintained at 65 °- 95° F, and for 48 hours prior to, during and after the testing and installation. e. Follow the flooring manufacturer's guidelines for installation. Allow adhesive to dry completely before placing carpet tiles. f. Place adhesive with a 1/16" x 1/16" x 1/16" U -notch trowel , at the following spread rate: 1) Interface Adhesive: XL Brands: Dyna -Mix MB: applying adhesive at a rate of 180 - 270 sq. ft. / gal. 2) Sbemco Adhesive: Shaw 5100 Adhesive: applying adhesive at a rate of 125 sq. ft. / gal. g. Carpet Tile Adhesion Property: releasable and repositionable. h. Install all carpet tile: 1) Interface: Install with the "Quarter Turn" method. 2) Sbemco: Install by the "in- line" installation method. i. Carpet Tile Adhesion Property: releasable and repositionable. j. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, and thresholds. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. k. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open- bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 1. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non- staining marking device. m. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 2. New Store Installation Method (to new concrete slab): follow instructions of Article 1 above. 3. Existing Store Installation Method (to existing concrete slab with multiple layers of adhesive): a. Grind floor as specified in Section 03 0140. b. After grinding is complete follow instructions of Article 1 above. 4. Existing Store Installation Method (to existing concrete slab with minor adhesive layer before removal): a. Remove any floor covering and scrape slab clear of a existing adhesive. b. After scraping is complete follow instructions of Article 1 above. 5. Existing Store Installation Method (to existing VCT flooring to remain): a. Existing VCT flooring must be sound and fully adhered to concrete flooring. b. Strip all wax and polish off of existing VCT floor, rinse clean all stripper, and allow to day. c. Grind any protruding tile surfaces so the VCT floor surface is be flat and level, and remove all debris. d. After VCT prep is complete follow instructions of Article 1 above. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 -56 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 09 7200 (09950) — WALL COVERING A. Work Inicludes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Installation of Owner Furnished Fiberglass reinforced plastic, (FRP), sanitary wall covering. B. (WC -3) Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic, FRP (Owner Furnished): 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating. a. Flame Spread: <200. b. Smoke Developed: <450. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Glasteel Inc.: General Purpose Liner Panel. I) Color: 659, "White ". b. Distributor: Distributed by Golden Valley Supply; Tel: 763 -544 -8907. 1) Contact: Connie Larson. 3. Material will be provided in largest standard sizes available to minimize joints. 4. Manufacturer's standard plastic comer, perimeter, and joint molding, and recommended fasteners will be provided with sheet material.. Color to match fiberglass reinforced plastic sheet. 5. Adhesive to be GC provided as specified below. C. (WC -6) Sheet Linoleum (Owner Furnished): 1. WC -6: Sheet Linoleum for application on wall. a. Manufacturer: Forbo Linoleum, Inc.; Hazelton, PA; Tel: 800.842.7839. b. Colors and Patterns: ii.) WC -6A: Marmoleum Real, No. 3131, "Scarlet ". c. Thickness: 1/10 inch, 2.5mm. d. Width: 79 inches. e. Roll Length: 105 Feet. f. l3acking: Jute. g. Adhesive: Forbo L910 Adhesive. h. Note: Trim Components and Adhesive for Sheet Linoleum as specified in this section provided by Contractor. D. Acrylic PVC Sheet (K -3 and K-4) (Owner Furnished): 0.040" thick sheet, with matching extruded PVC wainscot trim cap. 1. Manufacturer and Product: C/S Group; C/S Acrovyn. Tel: 800.233.8493. 2. Colors: a. (K -3) Beige Acrylic Sheet: No. 103, "Beige "; Suede Texture. b. Wainscot Trim Cap: No. 103, "Beige "; Smooth texture. c. (K-4) Red Acrylic Sheet: No. 953, "Target Red ", Suede Texture d. Wainscot Trim Cap: No. 953, "Target Red"; Smooth texture E. Substrate Cleaner: 1. VM&P Naphtha, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. F. FRP Adhesives: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): a. Franklin International; TiteBond Solvent Free Fast Grab FRP Adhesive. VOC 2.6 g/1. G. Acrylic iPVC Sheet Wall Primer (must be used on existing gypsum board walls that are spackled): 1. XT 2000 Primer: manufactured for Acrovyn by Super -Tek Products, Inc.; Woodside, NY; Tel: 718- 278 -7900. H. Acrylic iPVC Sheet Adhesives: 1. Acrevyn Heavy Duty Water Base Mastic (VOC — 0 g/L) and Acrovyn Water Base Mastic Primer as manufactured for Acrovyn by Super -Tek Products, Inc.; Woodside, NY; Tel: 718 - 278 -7900. I. Joint Sealant: 1. SLNT -4 as specified in Section 07 9200. a. Color: To match adjacent surface. J. Trim Components for Sheet Linoleum — (WC -6): 1. Trim Components: Extruded aluminum trim components for use with sheet linoleum wall covering. Provide in locations as indicated on Drawings. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 57 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. "J" Trim: 7/8 inch high x 1/2 inch deep "J" type aluminum trim. 1) Gordon, Final Forms II, No. JD -12, J Edge Trims. 2) Finish: Clear anodized. b. "T" Trim: 1 -3/4 inch high x 1/2 inch deep "T" type aluminum trim. 1) Fry Reglet, No. TBATTENC Edge Trim. 2) Finish: Clear anodized. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Gordon, Inc.; Bossier City, LA. Tel: 800 -747 -8954 Web: www.gordongrid.com b. Fry Reglet Corporation; Alpharetta, GA. Tel: 800 - 237 -9773 Web: www.fryreglet.com K. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install wall covering using skilled mechanics experienced in installing wall covering. 3. Apply wall covering according to the manufacturer's instructions. 4. Where resilient base is scheduled, trim wall covering at a point 1/2" below top height of base to permit maximum base adhesion to wall surface. 5. Completed installation shall be neat, clean and firmly adhered to the underlying surface. 6. Protect floors and adjacent surfaces from damage. L. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FPR) Installation: 1. Install using adhesive as specified. Lay out to minimize joints. 2. Install plastic molding at perimeters, corners, and joints. Install a continuous bead of SLNT -4 in molding channels prior to installation. Seal perimeters abutting other materials with a continuous bead of SLNT -4. 3. Remove excess adhesive and sealant from molding channels and face of FRP immediately after installation. M. Acrylic PVC Sheet Installation: 1. For locations where new acrylic PVC is scheduled to be placed where there is existing acrylic PVC sheet, the existing acrylic PVC sheet must be removed as stated here before placing the new acrylic PVC sheet: a. Existing acrylic PVC sheet removal: At top edge of existing acrylic PVC sheet score the gypsum board paper / paint edge so when peeling the existing acrylic PVC sheet off the wall surface any possible tearing of gypsum board paper will not extend up the existing painted wall surface. Skim coat with spackle type compound at the existing acrylic PVC sheet wall surface and allow to dry, sand out any high spots or irregularities to provide a flat smooth surface, prime with Acrylic PVC Sheet Wall Primer and allow to dry, then proceed as follows: (If existing gypsum board is beyond repair, replace with new gypsum board). 2. Verify that substrate surfaces are dry, free from dirt, grease, loose paint and scale. 3. Follow adhesive manufacturer's instructions for wall surface preparation. 4. Lightly sand gypsum board joints, joint compound and rough spots on walls. 5. Remove dust and prime joint compound with shellac to assure adhesion of adhesive. On painted substrates, test paint adhesion by applying cellophane tape or masking tape and pulling off sharply. If paint comes off, remove remaining paint before installing acrylic PVC sheet. 6. Clean substrate by wiping with substrate cleaner. 7. Bring acrylic PVC sheet into room and store at room temperature of not less than 65 deg. F. for 24 hours before installing. If roll stock acrylic PVC sheet is used, cut panels from roll and allow to lay flat before installing. 8. Outline area to be covered with a chalk line or masking tape to insure a neat installation. When installing acrylic PVC sheet as wainscoting, make sure the sight line at top edge is level. When installing acrylic PVC sheet as full wall covering, make sure vertical edge is plumb. Scribe acrylic PVC sheet at top to fit contour. 9. Install acrylic PVC sheet with textured (rough) surface exposed. Use 1/16" thick gap joint between sheets for 0.040" or thicker sheets. 10. Apply primer and adhesive to substrate. Primer coat acts as a sealer for the surface, and shall be allowed to dry thoroughly. Apply with a short-nap roller and cut in corners with a trim brush. Wipe back of acrylic PVC sheet with substrate cleaner, then apply one coat of adhesive. Follow adhesive manufacturer's instructions for amount of adhesive and drying time. 11. Bond the cemented surfaces together within time limits set by adhesive manufacturer, after coats of adhesive have dried properly. If adhesive becomes too dry, recoat and re -dry as above. Since adhesive bonds immediately upon contact, use slip sheets to prevent accidental bonding. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 58 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 12. Roll entire surface with a heavy roller to insure complete bonding. Remove masking tape or chalk line and clean up excess adhesive. 13. Wainscot Trim Cap: Adhesively apply wainscot trim cap to substrate over top of acrylic sheet at top edge of wainscot only. N. Sheet Linoleum Installation - (WC -6): 1. Install sheet linoleum material in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Prepare substrate for linoleum installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. a. Substrate to be smooth, dry and rigid and free of foreign materials such as dust, paint, grease, and oils. b. Refer to Section 06 1000 — Rough Carpentry for MDF backing installation. 3. Coordinate sheet linoleum installation with installation of corner guards and trim components as indicated on Drawings. a. Refer to Section 10 0010 — Miscellaneous Specialties for corner guards. b. 1[nstall trim components in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install in Longest lengths possible to minimize joints. 4. Appily specified adhesive to substrate using notched trowel in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Install sheet linoleum material into adhesive. Mechanically fix in place as required until adhesive has set. Hand roll material to ensure positive and complete bond to substrate. SECTION 09 9100 (09900) — PAINTING A. Work Includes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Exterior painting systems. 3. Interior painting systems. B. Acceptable National Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co., (BM). 2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc., (ICI). 3. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh Paints, (PPG). 4. Pratt and Lambert (P &L). 5. Sherwin - Williams Co., (SW). 6. TK Products, Minnetonka, MN., (TK). For EPS -7 and EPS -10 use TK Products only. 7. For 1[PS -6 and EPS -2 only: Vanex, Inc., Mt. Vernon, IL., 800 - 851 -7390. (Vanex) C. Colors: 1. Match colors pre - selected by Owner as indicated on Drawings and scheduled below: a. (C -1): TK Products' custom formulation, Color No. TK- 7010 -01, "Red" (ext. spherical bollard paint color) b. (C -2) through (C -4): Not Used. c. (C -5): Benjamin Moore No. BM 974, "Muskoka Trail ". d. (C -6): Benjamin Moore formulation for color No. 869, "Oxford White ". e. (C -7): Not Used. f. (C -8): OSHA Safety Yellow. g. (C -9): TK Products' custom formulation, Color No. TK- 380 -211 "Neon Red ". 11) Note: Use Medium Gray Tinted Primer under 2 -coats of "Neon Red" where indicated as (C -9). h. (C -10): Benjamin Moore No. 1038, "Everlasting ". i. (C -11) through (C -15): Not Used. j. (C -16) through (C -18): Not Used. k. (C -19): Benjamin Moore No. BM 1075, "Fairway Oaks ".. 1. (C -20): Light Champagne; Color to match aluminum framing system paint color; Valspar, Mica -2 Coat, No. 399C245, "Champagne Pearl ". m. (C -21): Not Used. n. (C -22): Pre - finished Clear Anodized Aluminum. Refer to Section 08 4100. o. (C -23) through C -(29): Not Used. p. (C -30): Benjamin Moore: HC -79, "Greenbrier Beige ". q. (C -31): TK Products' custom formulation, Color: Folkstone. D. Material.ls: 1. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another, with factory- applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint - material containers not displaying manu.facturer's product identification will not be acceptable. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 59 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET E. Primers: 1. Exterior Steel Primer: a. BM: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer. b. ICI: "Devflex" 4020 DTM Interior/ Exterior Waterborne Primer. c. PPG: 90 -712 Series "Pittech" Int/Ext Acrylic DTM Primer. d. P &L: Z1003 "SuPrime 3" Int/Ext Latex Metal Primer. e. SW: "Pro -Cryl" Universal Primer B66 -310. f. TK: TK -27 Primer. VOC — 99 g/l. 2. Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer: a. BM: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer. b. ICI: "Devflex" 4020 DTM Interior/ Exterior Waterborne Primer. c. PPG: 90 -712 Series "Pittech" Int/Ext Acrylic DTM Primer. d. P &L: Z1003 "SuPrime 3 "lnt/Ext Latex Metal Primer. e. SW: "Pro -Cryl" Universal Primer B66 -310. 3. Exterior Steel/Galvanized Steel High -Build Epoxy Primer (for Urethane Top Coat) (MDFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils): a. TK: TK -4064 H2O Water Borne High Build Epoxy Primer. VOC — 95 g/l. b. Note: Scarify primer surface by abrasive blasting with fine aggregate prior to topcoat application if primer has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer after primer application. 4. Exterior Canopy/Fascia/Fixture Primer (for Urethane Top Coat) (MDFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils): a. TK: TK -4064 H2O Water Borne High Build Epoxy Primer. VOC — 95 g/1. b. Note: Scarify existing canopy /fascia/fixture surface with 220 grit paper, wash clean with detergent and allow to dry. 5. Interior Steel Primer: a. BM: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer. VOC — 51 g/L b. ICI: "Devflex" 4020 DTM Interior/ Exterior Waterborne Primer. VOC — 83 g/L c. PPG: 90 -712 Series "Pittech" Int/Ext Acrylic DTM Primer. VOC — 123 g/L d. P &L: Z1003 "SuPrime 3 "Int/Ext Latex Metal Primer. VOC — 73 g/L e. SW: "Pro -Cryl" Universal Primer B66 -310. 100 g/L f. TK: TK -27 Primer. VOC — 99 g/L. 6. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: a. BM: 231 EcoSpec Interior Latex Primer. VOC — 0 g/L b. ICI: 1000 -1200 "Dulux Ultra" Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer. VOC — 97 g/L c. PPG: 6 -2 "Speedhide" Interior Latex Sealer. VOC — 98 g/L d. P &L: Z8160 "Pro -Hide Gold" Latex Wall Primer. VOC — 100 g/L e. SW: "PrepRite" 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W200. 87 g/L f. TK: TK -323 PVA Primer. VOC — 71 g/L. 7. Interior "High- Build" Gypsum Board Primer for use with (C -9): a. TK: Tri-Wall Plus Flat Interior Hi -Build Primer - Finish, (TK- 0024 -01, Gray). VOC — 93 g/L. 1) No Substitutions. 8. Interior Wood Primer: a. BM: 231 EcoSpec Interior Latex Primer. VOC — 0 g/L b. ICI: 1020 -1200 "Ultra- Hide" Interior Acrylic Latex All Purpose Primer- Sealer. VOC — 135 g/L c. PPG: 6 -855 "Speedhide" Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. VOC — 96 g/L d. SW: "PrepRite" Classic Interior Latex Primer. VOC — 91 g/L e. TK: TK 27 Primer. VOC — 99 g/L F. Latex Finishes: 1. Interior Latex Flat: a. BM: 219 Eco Spec Interior Latex Flat. VOC — 0 g/L b. ICI: 9100 Dulux Lifemaster Flat Interior Latex Enamel. VOC — 0 g/L c. PPG: 6 -70 Series, "Speedhide" Interior Latex Flat. VOC — 17 g/L d. P &L: Z3700/F3700 series RedSeal Porcelain Interior Flat Acrylic Latex Wall Coating. VOC — 42 g/L e. SW: B5 Harmony Interior Latex Flat. VOC — 0 g/L f. TK: TK -309 Heavy Duty Interior Flat Latex. VOC — 49 g/L. 2. Interior Latex Eggshell: a. BM: 274 Moorcraft "SuperSpec" Latex Eggshell Enamel. VOC — 150 g/L b. ICI: 1412 "Ultra- Hide" Latex Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel. VOC — 112 g/L c. PPG: 6-411 Series Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. VOC — 73 g/L d. P &L: Z8200 "Pro -Hide Gold" Interior Latex Eggshell. VOC — 100 g/L SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 60 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) e. 3W: "ProMar 200" Latex Eggshell, B20W200. VOC — 96 g/L f. 'I'K: TK -380 Heavy Duty Eggshell Latex. VOC — 48 g/L. 3. Interior Latex Eggshell for (C -9), Neon Red: a. TK: Heavy Duty Eggshell Latex, (TK- 380 -211, Neon Red). VOC — 48 g/L. I) No Substitutions. 4. Interior Latex Semi - Gloss: a. 13M: 276 Moorcraft "SuperSpec" Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. VOC — 150 g/L b. ICI: 1407 "Ultra- Hide" Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel. VOC — 150 g/L c. PPG: 6 -510 Series Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. VOC — 90 g/L d. P &L: Z8300 "Pro -Hide Gold" Interior Latex Semi - Gloss. VOC — 150 g/L e. SW: "ProMar 200" Latex Semi - Gloss, B31W200. VOC — 134 g/L f. TK: TK -7003 Latex Semi - Gloss. VOC — 49 g/L. 5. Exterior 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel: a. BM: M28 Acrylic Gloss Enamel. b. ICI: Dulux 3028 Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish. c. PPG: "Pitt- Tech" Int/Ext High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel. d. P &L: Z2900 "Enducryl" Acrylic Enamel. e. SW: DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss B66W100. f. TK: TK -7002 Acrylic Gloss. VOC — 92 g/L. G. Epoxy Finishes: 1. Interior Epoxy Semi - Gloss: a. 13M: 256 Moorcraft Super Spec Acrylic Epoxy Coating. b. PPG: "16 -551 Series Pitt-Glaze WB Water -Borne Acrylic Epoxy. c. P &L: Z5300 "Tech- Gard" Waterborne Epoxy. d. SW: B70 Series WB Catalyzed Epoxy Semi- gloss. e. TK: TK -397 Epoxy Semi - Gloss. 2. 100% Solids Epoxy: a. TK: TK Hi -Tech Maximum Solids Epoxy, two- component polyamine epoxy system. b. No substitutions. 3. Epoxy Column Paint a. TK: High -Tech Plus # M -2493. H. Traffic ]Paint: 1. BM: M58 Acrylic Latex Safety & Zone Marking Paint. M58 -10, Yellow. VOC — 84 g/L 2. PPG: Latex Zone Marking Paint. 11 -24, Yellow. VOC — 134.34 g/L 3. P &L: Z9000 Zone Marketing Paint. VOC — 125 g/L 4. SW: :SetFast" Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint. TM225, Yellow. VOC — 100 g/L 5. TK: TK-3255 Traffic Paint. VOC — 62 g/L. 6. ICI: Latex Traffic Paint Fast Dry 4810 VOC — 123 g/L I. Special Finishes: 1. Interior Quick -Dry Semi -Gloss Acrylic: a. Vanex: Break - Through Semi -Gloss Acrylic. ( Telephone No. 1- 800 - 851 -7390 ext 102 ) b. TK: TK -397 ( Telephone No. 1- 800 -441 -2129 ) 2. Polyurethane Gloss Enamel: a. TK: TK -6662 Series, Gloss Metallic. VOC — 423 g/L ( Telephone No. 1- 800 - 441 -2129 ) J. Mixing: 1. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without modification. Use premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label instructions, and avoid unnecessary thinning. 2. Primer Tint: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. K. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install paint using skilled mechanics experienced in application of paint. 3. Apply paint according to the manufacturer's instructions. 4. Coordination of Work: Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied. a. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials immediately to OSR in writing. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 61 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 5. Protection: Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, or surfaces not to be painted, property of Owner, and finished Work of other trades. 6. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, clean, and free of dust and properly prepared to receive intended finish. 7. Unprimed Ferrous Metals: Clean un- galvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. 8. Primed Ferrous Metals: Touch up bare areas and shop- applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer. 9. Unprimed Galvanized Metal: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants before priming. Clean and touch up chipped and abraded areas in shop coats with primer before applying specified field coats. 10. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply specified primer. 11. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, and cement plaster, surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 12. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill minor irregularities in interior gypsum board with spackle and irregularities in exterior gypsum ceiling board with exterior joint compound according to requirements of Section 09 2116. Sand smooth, level with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting. L. Preparation of Existing Surfaces: 1. Previously painted surfaces: a. All previously painted surfaces should be completely dry, smooth - sanded, clean and free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, wax or any other contaminants such as flaking or peeling paint before paint application is started. b. All contaminants should be treated or removed. c. All defects should be corrected as necessary. d. Dull glossy old paints by sanding lightly with 120 grit sandpaper to provide proper "tooth" for new paint system. e. Patch holes and cracks with an appropriate patching compound and sand smooth prior to priming. 2. Existing galvanized components: a. All surfaces must be free of grease, oil, dust, flaky rust, mill scale, loose paint, chalk and other foreign matter. Glossy surfaces should be dulled by sanding lightly with 120 grit sandpaper to provide tooth for paint to hold. Clean scarified surfaces with a cloth lightly moistened with "Xylene" or alcohol to remove all remaining surface contaminates. b. Peeling and scaling paint and chalk must be removed by scraping, sanding and wire brushing. c. If the galvanized surface is scheduled to receive new paint and surface is broken and rust is evident, remove the rust to bare metal by wire brushing, sanding or blasting. Spot prime immediately to prevent rust. d. Clean thoroughly and spot prime with rust inhibitive compactable with specified field coats. 3. Existing interior hollow metal doors and frames: a. All surfaces must be free of grease, oil, dust, flaky rust, mill scale, loose paint, chalk and other foreign matter. Glossy surfaces should be dulled by sanding lightly with 120 grit sandpaper to provide tooth for paint to hold. Clean scarified surfaces with a cloth lightly moistened with alcohol to remove all remaining surface contaminates. b. Peeling and scaling paint and chalk must be removed by scraping, sanding and wire brushing. c. If the surface is scheduled to receive new paint and rust is evident, remove the rust to bare metal by wire brushing, sanding or blasting. Spot prime immediately to prevent rust. d. Clean thoroughly and spot prime with rust inhibitive compactable with specified field coats, as specified in this Section under the following painting systems: IPS -6. 4. Existing exterior galvanized hollow metal doors and frames: a. All surfaces must be free of grease, oil, dust, flaky rust, mill scale, loose paint, chalk and other foreign matter. Glossy surfaces should be dulled by sanding lightly with 120 grit sandpaper to provide tooth for paint to hold. Clean scarified surfaces with a cloth lightly moistened with or alcohol to remove all remaining surface contaminates. b. Peeling and scaling paint and chalk must be removed by scraping, sanding and wire brushing. c. If the galvanized surface is scheduled to receive new paint and surface is broken and rust is evident, remove the rust to bare metal by wire brushing, sanding or blasting. Spot prime immediately to prevent rust. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 62 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) d. Clean thoroughly and spot prime with rust inhibitive compactable with specified field coats, as specified in this Section under the following painting systems: 1) EPS -2. (Galvanized Hollow Metal Doors and Framing). 5. Existing Steel Columns (both existing painted columns being re- painted and existing columns that have not previously been painted): a. Fainted Columns being Re- painted: Repair any dents or deep scratches with automotive bondo type filler. Sand smooth with 150 -220 grit paper. Clean all dust and dirt with a mild solution of TSP, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. b. Not previously painted columns: Wire brush column to remove any loose existing primer or surface rust. Sand smooth with 150 -220 grit paper. Clean all dust and dirt with a mild solution of TSP, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. Prime with Interior Steel Primer and proceed with specified paint system. M. Preparation of New Surfaces: 1. Cooler/Dry Produce Concrete Curb (exposed top sloped surface): When finishing concrete create a light broorned surface or light brushed surface to provide the proper "tooth" to accept the paint fmish system. If a light broomed or brushed fmish is not provided, grind the concrete surface to create the "tooth" required, clean all grinding debris off concrete surface to be painted: a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. b. Concrete curb must cure a minimum of three (3) days before painting may proceed. 2. Exposed Exterior Steel Painted (EPS -7): Shop or field application. a. F'repare surfaces by Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC -SP6), to achieve a blast profile of 1.0 to 2.0 mils. b. F'riming: After cleaning, apply one coat of primer paint of the specified type, applied in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, to a uniform dry film thickness specified under EPS -7. c. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean, dry and free of deleterious substances which would impair the work. Application methods shall be used which will result in full coverage of joints, comers and all open spaces. Do not apply primer when the surface temperature of the steel is below the dew point of the atmosphere. d. Note: Scarify primer surface by abrasive blasting with fine aggregate prior to topcoat application if primer has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer after primer application. e. Application Date: Indicate on primed components the date of primer application N. Application: 1. Apply materials according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not less than that recommended. 2. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before sanding or applying subsequent coats. Lightly sand each coat of vamish and enamel applied to wood or metal with fine sandpaper and wipe clean with a tack rag before next coat its applied. Avoid cutting through edges. O. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1. Paint mechanical and electrical items as scheduled according to location (exterior or interior) and type of material. Paint small items such as grilles and registers occurring in painted walls and ceilings with same type of finish as wall or ceiling. 2. Paint exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical materials and equipment on exterior of building. Paint ventilators, stacks, vents, louvers, grilles, piping, ductwork and conduit including aluminum and copper. Do not paint completely factory finished items and rooftop gas piping unless specifically indicated. 3. Paint exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical materials and equipment occurring in fmished spaces or adjacent to finished surfaces including, but not limited to the following: grilles, registers, piping, radiation, ducts, piping, jacketed insulation, conduit, panels and cabinets. 4. Paint security devices, conduit, and accessories on doors to match door color. 5. Paint hangers and supports for materials and equipment indicated to be painted. P. Paint Systems Schedule: EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS) 1. EPS -1: Exterior Ferrous Metal: Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: a. Clean Surface: per specifications. b. Primer: Primer: 1 coat, Exterior Steel Primer (spot prime as required) [Option: delete if Not Required] c. Finish: 2 coats, 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 63 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET New Surfaces being painted: a. Primer: Primer: 1 coat, Exterior Steel Primer (spot prime as required) [Option: delete if Not Required] b. Finish: 2 coats, 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel. 2. EPS -2: Exterior Galvanized Metal and Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: a. Clean Surface: per specifications. b. Primer: 1 coat, Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer (spot prime as required) [Option: delete if Not Required] c. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Quick -Dry Acrylic; Semi - Gloss. New Surfaces being painted: d. Primer: 1 coat, Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer (spot prime as required) [Option: delete if Not Required] e. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Quick -Dry Acrylic; Semi - Gloss. 3. EPS -3 through EPS -6: (Not Used). 4. EPS -7: Exterior Decorative Steel / Galvanized Steel: a. Primer: 1 coat, High Build Epoxy Primer, 1) Shop application for components specified in Section 05 1210, however touch -up of field welds, damaged and bare areas is a part of this Section, DFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils. 2) Note: Scarify primer surface by abrasive blasting with fine aggregate prior to topcoat application if primer has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer after primer application. 3) Field application for components specified under Section 05 3123. b. Finish: 1 coat, of Polyurethane Enamel. MDFT 3.0 mils 5. EPS -8 through EPS -9: (Not Used). 6. EPS -10: Re- Painting Ext.:Canopies (Greatland) Existing Blue /Green I Fascias (P- Stores) Existing Red Electrical Fixtures (All Store types) Existing color varies: a. Primer: 1 coat, Exterior Canopy/Fascia/Fixture Primer, 1) Field application for components, DFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils. 2) Note: Scarify existing surface with 220 grit paper, wash clean with detergent and allow to dry. 3) Note: existing structural beams that are existing painted with Polyurethane fmish do not need Primer, scarify the existing fmish as noted in `2)' and fmish coat as noted in `b'. b. Finish: 2 coats, of Polyurethane Enamel. 1.0 -2 0 mils per coat, with final dry thickness 3.0 mils minimum. Color: C -20, unless noted otherwise. INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (1PS) 1. IPS -1: Gypsum Board; Eggshell Finish: a. Primer: 1 coat, Gypsum Board Primer. b. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Latex Eggshell. 1) Note: Use the following primer and topcoat for areas indicted for C -9 Red. New Surfaces being painted C -9 Red: (a) Primer for C -9: 1 coat, TK, "High Build" Gypsum Board Primer. (b) Topcoat for C -9: 2- coats, TK, TK, High Scrub Flat Latex. (c) No Substitutions. Existing "Non -Red" Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted C -9 Red: (a) Primer for C -9: 1 coat, TK, "High Build" Gypsum Board Primer.(at patched & repaired areas only) (b) Topcoat for C -9: 2- coats, TK, TK, High Scrub Flat Latex. (c) No Substitutions. Existing "Red" Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted C -9 Red: (a) Primer for C -9: 1 coat, TK, "High Build" Gypsum Board Primer.(at patched & repaired areas only) (b) Topcoat for C -9: At patched & repaired areas that are primed: 2- coats, TK, High Scrub Flat Latex - (one coat over the primed paint area and the second coat as part of the entire wall painting). At Red painted wall surfaces that are scarified and cleaned: 1 -coat, TK, High Scrub Flat Latex No Substitutions. (c) SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 64 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. IPS -2: Gypsum Board; Epoxy Finish: a. Primer: 1 coat, Gypsum Board Primer. b. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Epoxy Semi - Gloss. 3. IPS -3: (Not Used). 4. IPS• -4: (Not Used). 5. IPS -5: Gypsum Board; Flat Finish: a. :Primer: 1 coat, Gypsum Board Primer. b. Finish: 2 coats Interior Latex Flat. 6. IPS -6: a. Metal Handrails, Railings, Misc. Ferrous Metal; Semi -Gloss Finish: 1) Primer: 1 coat, Interior Steel Primer. 2) Finish: 2 coats, Interior Latex Semi - Gloss. b. Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Borrowed Lights, Steel Columns; Semi -Gloss Finish (Special Finishes): :3) Finish: 2 coats, Interior Quick -Dry Acrylic; Semi - Gloss. 7. IPS••7 through IPS -8: (Not Used). 8. IPS••9: Interior Steel, Epoxy Finish: a. Primer: 1 coat, Interior Steel Primer. b. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Epoxy Semi - Gloss. 9. IPS -10: (Not Used). 10. IPS••11: Wood, Paint Finish: a. Primer: 1 coat, Interior Wood Primer. b. Finish: 2 coats, Interior Latex Eggshell. 11. IPS••12 through IPS -14: (Not Used). 12. IPS -•15: Cooler/Dry Produce Curb Paint: a. Primer: None required if light broomed or brushed concrete finish is present, for incorrectly fmished concrete grind surface to create "tooth" required and clean surface before painting. b. Finish: 2 coats 100% Solids Epoxy. c. No Substitutions. 13. IPS -•16: Epoxy Column Paint: a. Preparation: Repair any dents or deep scratches with automotive bondo type filler. Sand smooth with [50 -220 grit paper. Clean all dust and dirt with a mild solution of TSP, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. b. Finish: 2 Coats: First coat: spray, roll, or brush Epoxy Column Paint, allow to dry 24 hours. Second coat: same as the First. SECTION 09 9700 (07176) — EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM A. Work Includes: 2. Surf ice preparation including minor surface patching and pressure wash cleaning. 3. Exterior finish coatings. 4. Exterior finish coatings for Exterior Insulation and Finish System, EIFS, specified under Section 07 2400. B. Submittals: (Submit to Architect for Review and Approval all exterior paint colors) 1. Color Samples: Submit for approval (2) two paper- backed samples, standard draw -down type, of each color indicated. Samples will be reviewed for Approval, do not proceed without Approval. C. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. TK Products, Div. of Sierra Corporation. 2. Textured Coatings of America, Inc. 3. No Substitutions. D. Product Representatives: 1. Mr. Tom Moss TK Products, Div. of Sierra Corporation 11400 West 47th Street Minnetonka, MN 55343 Phone: (952) 938 -7223 (800) 441-2129 FAX: (952) 938 -8084 SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 65 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Mr. Richard Barnes Textured Coatings of America, Inc. 4101 Ravenswood Road, Suite 401 Fort Lauderdale, FL 33312 Phone: (954) 581 -0771 (800) 454-0340 FAX: (954) 581 -9516 E. Colors: 1. Match existing colors in the Store; verify with Owner that proposed "matched colors" are acceptable and approved for the project. If colors listed in this Schedule do not match your Drawings callout verify color with your Project Architect. a. (C -1): Custom color "Red ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK- 6010 -01. 2) TCA; Color No. 40128 -315. b. (C -10): Benjamin Moore No. 1038, "Everlasting ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -1683. 2) TCA; Color No.. c. (C -11): Benjamin Moore No. 1039, "Stone House ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -635. 2) TCA; Color No. d. (C -12): Benjamin Moore No. HC-46, "Jackson Tan ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -604. 2) TCA; Color No. e. Precast & Site Cast Color (C -13): Benjamin Moore No. 1155, "Cappuccino Muffin". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -1656. 2) TCA; Color No. f. Precast & Site Cast Color (C -14): Benjamin Moore No. 1127, "Sedona Brown ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -1589. 2) TCA; Color No. g. CMU Color (C -13): Benjamin Moore No. 1162, "Wooded Vista ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK -5321 -1657. 2) TCA; Color No. h. CMU Color (C -14): Benjamin Moore No. 2106 -30, "Pine Cone ". 1) TK Products; Color No. TK- 5321 -1658. 2) TCA; Color No. F. Materials: 1. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another, with factory- applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint- material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. G. Concrete Repair Materials: 1. Concrete Repair Compound: a. TK- Complete Concrete Patch 36# Kit. b. Tex -Cote, Flex -Patch elastomeric repair material. H. Water Repellent Coating: 1. TK -290WB Tri- Siloxane, 10 percent solids. 2. Tex -Cote, Rainstopper 1750W clear silane /alkoxysilane. 10 percent solids. 3. Tinting: Water Repellent to be Clear except for the following. a. At CMU painted wall applications the water repellent coating should be tinted (Tan) to allow visual inspection. b. All other conditions, cast stone and integral colored masonry should be clear. 1. Block Filler: 1. TK -338 -1 Elasta -Block flat, water based elastomeric modified acrylic emulsion, 73.08 percent solids by weight. 2. Tex -Cote Latex Block Filler, styrene /acrylic resin system. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 66 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) J. Finish Materials: 1. Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating, Matte Sheen (all colors other than Red): a. T i -Sheen Concrete Surfacer TK -5321, water base acrylic emulsion, 57% solids + 2% by weight. b. Tim-Cote 400, high performance, efflorescence blocking, water base acrylic protective coating. 2. Exterior Acrylic "Red" Finish Coating, (C -1), Matte Sheen: a. TK -6010 Series, water based, acrylic latex, 47% solids by weight. b. Tex -Cote Supercote exterior 100 percent, matte sheen. K. Mixing: Mix materials according to manufacturer's printed instructions. L. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Install paint using skilled mechanics experienced in application of paint. 3. Apply paint according to the manufacturer's instructions. 4. Protect fmished surfaces, work of other trades, and property of the Owner from damage and defacement. Cover adjacent finished surfaces and fixed equipment with drop cloths. 5. Sealant Joints: Coordinate application of paint coatings with installation of control joint sealant. Do NOT paint sealant or masonry joint surfaces to which sealant is to be applied. 6. Pressure wash surface at 3,000 psi with clean water within 24 hours before applying primer and fmish protective coating materials. 7. Apply fmish materials to surfaces which are thoroughly cured, even, clean and dry, free of dust, efflorescence, construction chemicals and residue, and properly prepared to receive the intended finish. 8. Water Repellent Coating: Spray apply at on surfaces at a rate not to exceed 70 square feet per gallon for smooth concrete block and 40 square feet per gallon for split face concrete block, or at a lesser rate of square foot per gallon that satisfies the porosity of the material to completely wet out the substrate with a minimum of 2 inch rundown. Allow 24 hours minimum drying time prior to application of protective finish coat. 9. Block Filler: Spray apply at concrete and concrete masonry surfaces at a rate not to exceed 80 square feet per gallon for smooth concrete and concrete block and 50 square feet per gallon for split face concrete block, or at a lesser rate of square foot per gallon that satisfies the porosity of the substrate. Backroll to a point of continuous film, pinhole free. Allow 24 hours minimum drying time prior to application of finish coat. 10. Finish Coating for Concrete and Concrete Block: Apply at a rate not to exceed 125 square feet per gallon for smooth concrete and concrete block and 80 square feet per gallon for split face concrete block. If sprayed, back roll to a continuous pinhole free film. Do not allow excess material causing puddling, sagging or muderacking. Do not allow any block filler to be visible. 11. During application, promptly remove finish materials where spilled, splashed or spattered on adjacent surfaces. M. Finish Schedule: 1. Proviide exterior finish systems as indicated on Drawings and as follows: EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEMS (EFS) EFS -1: [Split Face], [Smooth Face] Concrete Masonry and [Cast -in -Place Concrete]: Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: 1. Clean Surface: per specifications. 2. 1 coat - Block Filler (as required). [Option — delete if Not Required] 3. 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating. New Surfaces being painted: 1. 1 coat - Water Repellent. 2. 1 coat - Block Filler 3. 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating. Note: Omit water repellent at Cast -in -Place Concrete. EFS -2: Not Used. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 67 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET EFS -3: Red Accent Band: Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: 1. Clean Surface: per specifications. 2. 1 coat - Block Filler (as required). [Option — delete if Not Required] 3. 2 coats - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (C -1). New Surfaces being painted: 1. 1 coat - Water Repellent. 3. 1 coat - Block Filler 4. 2 coats - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (C -1). Note: Omit water repellent at Cast -in -Place Concrete. EFS-4: Not Used. EFS -5: Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS). Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: 1. Clean Surface: per specifications 2. 2 coats - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating. New Surfaces being painted: 1. 2 coats - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating. EFS -6: Not Used. EFS -7: [Pre -cast Concrete Wall Panels] [Tilt -up Concrete Wall Panels] [Exterior Cement Panel Finish System (07 2420)]: Existing Painted Surfaces being Re- Painted: 1. Clean Surface: per specifications. 2. 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (Coarse Texture). — provide texture coat only if existing texture is missing or worn down. 3 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (Smooth Texture). New Surfaces being painted: 1. 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (Coarse Texture). 4. 1 coat - Exterior Acrylic Finish Coating (Smooth Texture). SECTION 10 0010 (10010) — MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES A. Work Includes: 5. Corner guards. 6. Stainless Steel Wall Caps and Edges for low walls. 7. Food Service Chair Rail. 8. Installation of Owner Fumished Privacy Window Film. 9. Installation of Owner Furnished Interior Bollard Sleeves. 10. Installation of Owner Furnished Small Wall Clusters and/or Large Wall Clusters. B. Corner Guards: 1. Stainless Steel Comer Guards: 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2 ", 16 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish, adhesive applied. 4' -0" long unless noted otherwise. a. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: 1) Curran Engineering Company, Inc.; Valencia, CA; Tel: 800.643.6353; Model No. CE- 10- 505-4. 2) Comparable products from other manufacturers. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 68 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Stainles3 Steel Wall Caps and Edges: Fabricate wall caps and edges from 16 gauge, type 304 stainless steel sheet. 1. Fabricate "U" shaped wall caps and edges with 3 inch overhang at sides and one end cap. End cap joints to be welded and ground smooth and flush. 2. Verify web dimension of cap and edges with wall types as indicated on drawings and actual field conditions prior to fabrication. 3. Wall edges to run to floor and interlock with wall cap, with butt joint, when indicated on Drawings. 4. Smooth edges of caps to remove burs and sharp edges. 5. Fabricate caps in single length to greatest extent possible. If multiple units are required, fabricate for tight, hairline butt joints. 6. Finish: No. 4 satin fmish with clear semi -gloss powder coating on exterior surface. 7. Adhesive: Construction adhesive as required for substrate. 8. Sealant: SLNT -4, clear silicone sealant. Refer to Section 07 9200. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. Curran Engineering Company, Inc.; Valencia, CA; Tel: 800.643.6353. 1) Part No. CE- 10- 508 -2. b. Comparable products from other manufacturers. D. Privacy Window Film (Owner Furnished): Owner Furnished, and Owner Installed Privacy Window Film. 1. Privacy Window Film: 3.0 to 3.5 mil. thick, polyester window film with decorative matt surface to be applied to inl:erior surface of glass. a. Locations: 1) Components: (a) Lounge/Training Exterior Glass, as indicated on Drawings. Refer to Section 08 8800. 2) Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: (a) Product: 3M, "Fasara" Decorative Window Film; No. SH2MA ML, "Milano ". (b) Manufacturer: 3M Building Safety Solutions Department; 3M Center Building; St. Paul, MN. (c) Contact: James E. Mannix. (d) Tel: 651-733-2222. E. Food Service Chair Rail: 3 inch rectangular, 2- piece, wall mounted chair rail. Provide end caps as required for locations as indicated on Drawings. 1. Acceptable manufacturer and Product: a. Stylmark; Minneapolis, MN; tel.: 800.328.2495; "Trim Maker ". 1) Components: (a) Base: Extruded aluminum, # 410540. (b) Chair Rail: Extruded aluminum # 110226, with #128, Buffed Satin Stainless Steel fmish. (c) Endcaps: Same material ands finish as chair rail; #310214. F. Interior Bollard Sleeves (Owner Furnished): Polyethylene thermoplastic tubes with 1/4 inch wall thickness and radius top. 1. Diameter: sized to fit over standard 4 inch schedule 40 pipe. 2. Unit Height: 50 inches; bottom to start of radius. 3. Color: Manufacturer's "OSHA Yellow ". 4. Surface Finish: Smooth. 5. Manufacturer: IdealSheild; Detroit, MI; Tel: 866 - 825 -8659. 6. Model Number: BPD- YL- 4 -50 -S. 7. Mounting Tape: Self- adhesive neoprene tape. G. Small Wall Clusters and Large Wall Clusters (Owner Furnished): High Impact Polystyrene with Korad cap, low -gloss fmish and additional screen printing. 1. Mounting bracket: MDF wall cleats, and wall mount system. 2. Cluster Types: 1) Small Wall Cluster. 2) Large Wall Cluster. 3. Manufacturer: Excel Plastics; Fergus Falls, MN; Tel: (218) 998 -3800; Contact: Scott LaRue. H. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Locate as indicated on Drawings 2. Install components using skilled mechanics experienced in such installation. 3. Conform to requirements of references. 4. Install specialties plumb, true and square, in a neat, rigid, and substantial manner. 5. Mount stainless steel corner guards where indicated on the Drawings according to manufacturer's instructions. Start bottom end of comer guard at floor. SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 - 12 9300 - 69 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET I. Privacy Window Film Installation 1. Application: Apply window film in strict accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions. Window film to be installed from window sill to 5' -8" a.f.£ as indicated on Drawings. 2. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper cleaning of window surface after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Stainless Steel Wall Caps and Ends Installation: 1. Adhesively apply wall caps and edges on low wall surfaces in locations as indicated on Drawings. a. Set caps and edges level true and flush directly on top of low wall for caps and against vertical wall ends for edges. Wall edges to run to floor surface with clear silicone sealant joint at floor. Shim as required. b. Trim open end cap units if required to fit length of low wall. c. Tightly butt joints of adjacent caps in multiple cap installation. 2. Install SLNT -4, clear silicone sealant at edges and ends of caps. 3. Coordinate with installation of corner guards. Corner guards should butt tightly to bottom of 3 inch cap overhang. K. Interior Bollard Sleeve Installation 1. Install interior bollard sleeves on all interior pipe bollards indicated on Drawings. 2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Install neoprene mounting tape on pipe bollard 3 inches up from floor line and 3 inches down from top of pipe bollard. 4. Place bollard sleeve over pipe bollard, working unit down over pipe until sleeve sets flush on floor surface. L. Small Wall Clusters and Large Wall Clusters Installation 1. Install Small Wall Clusters and/or Large Wall Clusters as indicated on Drawings. 2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Anchor types required for securing Mounting brackets (anchors by Contractor — equivalent anchors acceptable): 1) Tek Screw — through gypsum board into stud. 2) Molly Bolt — gypsum board only. 3) Screw — plywood behind gypsum board. 4) Anchor length and type must be based on the wall substrate encountered. SECTION 10 2813 (10800) — TOILET ACCESSORIES (OWNNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed, Toilet Accessories and associated components as follows: a. Toilet Accessories. b. ADD this sub paragraph for Urban Abuse Projects: Toilet Accessories — Urban Abuse. c. ADD this sub paragraph for .Health Clinic Accessories: Health Clinic Accessories B. SEISMIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS (FOR UBC SEISMIC ZONES Z 3 & 4, BOCA/SBC SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORY "B ", "C ", and "D" or IBC SEISMIC design category "D", "E" and "F "; ADD this article and the appropriate paragraph or paragraphs below): C. Acceptable General Manufacturers: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. D. Acceptable Specialty Manufacturers: 1. Rubbermaid. 2. Kimberly- Clark. E. Toilet Accessories: 1. Soap Dispensers: Surface mounted, 1000ml dispenser. a. Kimberly -Clark Model 92144. b. Color: Custom color, "Almond ". 2. (TD -7): Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted folded paper towel dispenser. a. Kimberly -Clark Model 09905. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 70 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) F. ADD thisparajiraph for Urban Abuse Projects (and do not use above specified "Toilet Accessories ": Urban Abuse Toilet Accessories. 1. Soap Dispensers: Surface mounted, 1000m1 dispenser. a. Kimberly -Clark Model 92144. b. Color: Custom color, "Almond". 2. (TD -7): Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted folded paper towel dispenser. a. :Kimberly -Clark Model 09905. G. ADD thJs- paragraph for Health Clinic Accessories: Health Clinic Accessories. 1. Specimen Pass -Thru Cabinet: Through wall, stainless steel pass -thru cabinet with continuous hinged doors and spillage tray. a. Rough Opening: 11-1/2" wide x 10-7/8" high x adjustable for wall thicknesses from 3" -- 5-3/4". h. Bobrick 8-505. c. Comparable products from other specified general manufacturers 2. Coat Hook: Surface mounted, stainless steel hat and coat type hook, satin finish. a. Bobrick B -6827. b. Comparable products from other specified general manufacturers. H. Installation Requirements: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Locate as indicated on Drawings 2. Install components using skilled mechanics experienced in such installation. 3. Install units plumb, true and level, in a neat, rigid, and firmly anchored manner in locations and at heights indicated. 4. Use theft -proof screws to install toilet accessories. Fasten to masonry with screws and expansion shields. 5. Seal perimeter of toilet accessories, (between unit and wall or partition surface), with SLNT -4, clear sealant. 6. After installation, remove temporary labels and protective coatings, and clean and polish surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust and leave in good operating condition. SECTION 11 4125 (13040) — WALK -IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS — STOCKROOM (OWNNER FURNISHED) A. Work Includes: 1. This Section applies to furnishing walk -in cooler and freezer boxes for Non -Super Target Stores including delivery and warranty. In general walk -in boxes consist of insulated panels, alignment strips, seismic re- enforcement parts, trim, fasteners, pre -hung insulated door sections, door heaters, hardware, thermometer, electrical junction boxes, and conduits. 2. Refer to Section 24 0130 for administrative requirements unless specifically directed otherwise. 3. Specific box enclosures include: a. Stockroom Freezer. b. Stockroom Meat Cooler. 4. This Section does not include on site erection of walk -in Cooler and Freezer boxes. B. Acceptable manufacturer for Walk -in Cooler/Freezer Boxes subject to compliance with applicable Drawings, this Specification, and Section 24 0130: 1. Kysor Panel Systems, Division of Kysor //Warren Inc. C. Insulated Panel System: General Requirements: 1. Insulated Panels: a. Panels: Wood framed with foamed in place UL listed class 1 urethane non -cfc insulation, bonded to metal pans, cam lock panel fasteners and lag down lids. b. Urethane shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke not more than 450 when tested in inaximum thickness intended from use in accord with ASTM 84. c. Urethane shall have flash and self - ignition temperatures of not less than 600 deg F and 800 deg F respectively. d. Thermal conductivity (k) shall not exceed (0.125 BTU/hr /ft2 /deg F/ in.). e. Overall heat transfer coefficient (U) of not more than 0.030 BTU/Hr ft2 f. 26 GA. Stucco Galvanized wall and ceiling finishes as noted on the Target Cooler Drawings. g. 1%1'hen fire treated lumber is Not Required use this paragraph: Wood Framing: Engineered grade lumber, either off nger joined segments or of laminated layers. h. When fire treated lumber Is Required use this paragraph: Wood Framing: Fire treated grade 2, lumber. Treated at a minimum to meet theJollowing.: ;) Meet criteria set forth in NER -577 as published by National Evaluation Service. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 71 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2) Flame spread rating 25 or less when subjected to ASTM E 84 burn test of 30 minutes. 3) Re -dried to a maximum of 19 percent (Lumber) or 15 percent (Plywood) moisture content, in conformance with UL Follow -up Service Procedures Files R16519 (Lumber) or R18401 (Plywood) and procedures outlined in Osmose Standard FP -00 for fire retardant treated wood. i. Key Way Strips: Engineer grade lumber with 20 GA galvanized steel re- enforcement angle. Size to allow clearances of no greater than 1/8-inch at face. j. Panels shall have double gaskets on edges. k. Cam locks to be Kason or equivalent. 1. Design tongue and groove (including allowance for gaskets and metal pans) to be self aligning and fit tight with no play. m. Furnish sufficient quantity of plastic filler caps for cam lock mechanisms, color to match panel fmish. n. Furnish sufficient quantity of proper length lag bolts to fasten ceiling panels to wall panels. o. Panels shall have applicable safety labels and manufacturers operating instructions placed at appropriate locations. D. Wall Panels: 1. Coolers: a. Use this paragraph when allowed by Local and State Codes (typically Delete for California): Cooler Wall Panels: 3 1/2 -inch thick, with single wood frame, tongue and groove joints. and cam locks for butt panel to panel joints; wood frame, tongue and groove ioints for floor to wall joints; and integral extended top face to conceal wall to ceiling joint, refer to Drawing details'. b. Use this paragraph when required by Local and State Codes (typically use for California): Cooler wall panels shall be 4 -inch thick, with single wood frame, tongue and groove joints, and cam locks for butt panel to panel joints; wood frame, tongue and groove joints for floor to wall joints; and integral extended Laplace to conceal wall to ceiling joint, refer to Drawing details. 2. Freezers: a. Freezer wall panels shall be 5 1/2 -inch thick, with single wood frame, tongue and groove joints, and panel locks for butt panel to panel joints; wood frame, tongue and groove joints for floor to wall joints; and integral extended top face to conceal wall to ceiling joint, refer to Drawing details. E. Common walls between walk in coolers and freezers to be of 5 1/2 -inch thick panels. F. Ceiling Panels: 1. Ceiling panels for both coolers and freezers shall be 5 1/2 -inch thick, lag down type panels, pre - drilled with double wood framing at wall to ceiling joints, and single wood frame, tongue and groove joints with panel locks for ceiling to ceiling joints. G. Insulated Doors: 1. General Requirements: a. Furnish pre -hung door sections as indicated on drawings which include insulated door and associated hardware ready for field assembly as part of walk -in box structure. b. Insulated doors shall be 3 -1/2 inch thick foamed in place infit type doors with interior and exterior 36 inch aluminum diamond - plate; kick plates, pre - molded magnetic gasket at top and both sides with an adjustable heated double bladed rubber sweep gasket along the bottom. Interior and exterior finishes shall match wall panels. c. Provide 5 OHM heater cable in freezer doors. 2. Hardware and Accessories: a. Provide Kason door hardware; (hinges, latches, closers, and inside release handles): 1) Door sizes 36 "x 84" and 42 "x 84 ": (a) Kason Hinge #1248 ( #1248000022). (b) Kason exterior pull handle #K911, mounted on 18 gage stainless steel plate, 6 "x15 ". (c) Interior push plate — 18 gage stainless steel, 6 "x15 ". (d) Kason door closer and hook # 1094 (# 1094000003 and # 1094000029). (e) 20 gauge 304 stainless steel door jambs. 2) Door sizes 60 "x 84 ", 60 "x 90" and 60 "x 96 ". (a) Kason Hinge #1277 ( #1277000012). (b) Kason exterior pull handle #K911, mounted on 18 gage stainless steel plate, 6 "x15 ". (c) Interior push plate — 18 gage stainless steel, 6 "x15 ". (d) Kason spring action door closer #1097000004. (e) Kason door closer and hook #1094 ( #1094000003 and #1094000029). (f) 16 gauge 304 stainless steel door jambs.. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 72 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) b. Walk in door jambs to have 1" x 1" 18 GA Stainless steel jamb guard on interior and exterior jambs with exterior header. c. ]Provide 3 -way door frame heaters for freezers; 3 OHM heater cables for 36" and 42" wide doors, and 5 OHM heater cables for 60" wide doors. d. ]Provide 16 GA type 304 stainless steel thresholds at doorways. e. 'Provide 2 -inch diameter RF type dial thermometer, mounted adjacent doorway. f. ]Provide Kason series 1832 Hi Flow heated ventilator port ( #1832000004) for coolers. g. Provide Kason series 1845 Magnum Flow heated ventilator port ( #1845000014) for freezers. h. Provide a 15A -120 volt 2 way light switch with pilot light and junction box located adjacent doorway, extend imbedded conduit out through top of panel section. SECTION 12 9300 (02840) — SITE FURNISHINGS A. Work ILncludes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished Site Furnishing Components as follows: a. Concrete Spherical Bollard. b. Benches. c. Trash receptacles. d. Tree Grates: Contractor to Furnish and Install Tree Grates B. Concrete Spherical Bollard (Owner Furnished): 30 inch diameter, pre - fmished, pre -cast concrete bollards with 4 inch PVC sleeve to accept steel pipe embedded in footing. Bollards to have 1/2 inch extended base 12 inch in diameter to match diameter of footing. 1. Concrete Surface Finish: Sand Blast. C. Concrete Spherical Bollard Finish: Factory pre - fmished with TK Products, TK -7010 Series, water based, acrylic latex, gloss sheen, Color C -1. 1. Touch -up paint in spray can form, included with bollard shipment. D. Concrete Spherical Bollard Manufacturer and Product: 1. Wausau Tile, Wausau, WI; Tel: 800 - 388 -8728; Terra Form Model No. EB5201. E. Benches (Owner Furnished):: Surface mounted, 6 foot long benches with steel tube frame and perforated steel seat surface and back. Finish: Polyester powdercoat fmish. Stainless steel expansion bolts furnished with benches. F. BencheManufacturer and Product: 1. Wausau Tile Inc., Metal -Form Division; Wausau, WI; Tel: 800 - 388 -8728; Model No. EB -5100, Color: Target Red G. Trash Receptacles (Owner Furnished): 22 inch diameter, 41 inch tall trash container constructed of perforated steel drum, cast aluminum top and concrete base. 1. Steel Finish: Polyester powdercoat finish, Color, Target Red. 2. Linear: 30 gallon, polyethylene. H. Trash Receptacle Manufacturer and Product: 1. Wausau Tile Inc., Terra -Form Division; Wausau, WI; Tel: 800 - 388 -8728; Model No. EB -5300, Target Ash n' Trash Container with Rain Cover. I. Tree Grates (Contractor Furnished and Installed): Aluminum flush top, rectangular bearing bars with cross bars locked at right angles to, and in the same plane as, top surface of bearing bars, 4 inches on center. 1. Surface: Plain. 2. Loading: Grating to carry a pedestrian loading equal to a uniform load of 100 lbs. per square foot over the required clear span with deflection not to exceed 1/4 ". 3. Fabrication and Tolerances: Fabricate in accordance with NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual requirements. 4. ADA. Compliance: Tree grates conform with the spacing requirements of ADA when installed with the elongated openings perpendicular to the dominant direction of travel. 5. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating fabrication and installation of tree grates. Indicate connection details and fasteners. J. Tree Grate Finish: Mill fmish with S1ipNOT Grade 2 (Medium), aluminum on aluminum. K. Tree Grate Sizes: 6' -0" x 6' -0" square units. Units installed on sidewalk as a single grate or with multiple units to create a long rectangular grate as indicated on Drawings. L. Tree Grate Manufacturer and Product: 1. Ohio Gratings, Inc.; Canton, OH; Tel: 800 - 321 -9800; SFG Series, 7- SGF -4. SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 —12 9300 - 73 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET M. Installation Requirements (General): 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Locate as indicated on Drawings 2. Install components using skilled mechanics experienced in such installation. 3. Install furnishings plumb, true and square, in a neat, rigid, and substantial manner at the locations indicated on Drawings. 4. Install all units with stainless steel fasteners. 5. After installation, clean surfaces. N. Precast Concrete Spherical Bollards Installation: 1. Install bollards over steel pipe inserts in locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Touch -up factory fmish paint system with specified paint under Section 09 9100, EPS -11, C -1. O. Tree Grate Installation: 1. Install tree grates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings for concrete sidewalk pavement. 2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform all cutting and fitting for installation. Place gratings such that cross bars align. a. Circular cutouts to be sized 2 inch larger than obstruction. Square cutouts to be made to the next bearing bar past obstruction. 3. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with dissimilar materials, coat aluminum components with one coat of bituminous paint or other approved material. 4. Grating Attachment: Use anchorage type as recommended by manufacturer on approved shop drawings. All fasteners and connections to be of non - corrosive materials. END OF SECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS — DIVISION 06- DIVISION 12 06 1000 — 12 9300 - 74 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 20 0020 (15020) MECHANICAL DEMOLITION NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform demolition, removal, and restoration to complete mechanical work under Contract. Relocate or reuse existing materials and equipment as directed in Contract Documents. Salvage material and equipment Owner wishes to save. Dispose of other materials and debris. B. Drawings generally show extent of demolition, removal, and relocation, but they cannot show all work, or all conditions and details that will affect progress of work. Examine Project site. Determine existing conditions. Become familiar with Project requirements before bidding work. C. General Requirements: 1. Complete work using workers skilled in required trades. If necessary, sublet work to appropriate subcontractors. Restore material in every respect, including removal of visual defects in exposed finishes in a manner approved by Architect. Engage specialists in at least the following trades: a. Exposed concrete finishes. b. Exposed masonry and stonework. c. Waterproofing and vapor barriers. d. Roofing, flashing, and accessories. e. Exterior wall systems. f. Interior exposed finishes and casework where, in Architect's judgment, mechanical contractor will not be able to achieve an acceptable match. 2. Coordinate and schedule work with Owner to avoid any disturbance or disruption of Owner's operations. Perform work that will affect Owner's operations at times acceptable to Owner. If necessary, do work in stages to avoid disruption. Since final schedule must be worked out between Owner and Contractors, assume for purpose of bidding that this coordination can be done without overtime work. Coordinate work with other trades prior to commencing demolition. 3. Where work affects structure, exercise extreme care to protect structure and its occupants. Take particular care when working near occupied areas. Employ or subcontract competent, qualified structural engineers and construction specialists to develop appropriate and responsible techniques for doing work. Provide temporary shoring and supports when required. Design and place permanent or temporary supports to carry structural loads down to sound bearing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVABLE MATERIALS A. Salvable Materials to be Reused in the Work: 1. Remove salvable materials to be reused or relocated and move them to new location. If new location is not ready to receive these materials, store and protect them from damage until new location is ready. 2. Remove, clean, and preserve materials that are to be reused, or are needed to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removing these materials to avoid damaging them or making them unsuitable for reuse. Replace damaged materials shown, tagged, or required for reuse with equivalent matching materials. B. Salvable Materials to be Stored by Owner: 1. Owner to mark or tag existing materials or equipment they wish to keep. Carefully remove these items and protect them from damage. Store them in an area designated by Owner. 2. Consult Owner about any salvage they wish to keep and about their general standards for salvaging materials and equipment removed from Project. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 20 0020 (15020) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. Cleaning or restoration of Owner's salvaged materials is not part of this Contract. Remove salvable materials from Project site and place them in a storage area designated by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. Install temporary bracing, shoring, and support for execution of work and protection of persons and property. Always install appropriate supports and protection, and always use proper methods to prevent collapse, settling, and other damage. Obtain responsible designs so supports will be adequate for loads they carry. Supports must properly distribute their loads to lower levels or to sound bearing. Install temporary coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing spaces and to parts of building that are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and to avoid abnormal heat loss. Prevent weather damage by scheduling work at envelope according to weather conditions. C. Install temporary dust enclosures above and below ceilings to separate construction site from rest of building. Also, Install temporary air filters and ductwork to contain construction dust within construction area. Install hinged doors at access points through temporary enclosures. Seal temporary and permanent doors with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work and keep them sealed until dust has settled. 3.2 DEMOLITION AND CUTTING A. Mechanical Demolition: Demolish and remove existing mechanical construction as shown on Drawings and as required to accomplish work. Where new work is adjacent to existing construction and when existing construction must be replaced, remove just enough existing construction to complete work under Contract. At no additional cost to Owner, remove and replace existing construction that was to remain, but is damaged during work. B. Cutting Concrete: Cut openings through concrete by core drilling or sawing. Never cut openings in concrete with a hammer -driven chisel or drill without written authorization from Architect. C. Other Work: Never endanger or damage work of other trades. If work of other trades must be altered to accommodate mechanical work, review proposed alterations with installer of work and comply with installer's recommendations to minimize damage. Where necessary, engage original installer to make required changes. D. Clean demolition areas and remove debris from site at end of each day's work. Transport debris in a manner that prevents spread of dust. Do not permit burning or storage of debris at site. Keep construction areas broom clean. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. 3.3 UNANTICIPATED MECHANICAL WORK A. If demolition work exposes concealed mechanical services (such as piping or ducts), immediately inform Engineer of additional cost to Project to remove or retire unanticipated work. Begin this additional demolition only after receiving approval from Owner for additional costs. B. Remove or reroute unanticipated mechanical services under direction from Engineer. Reconnect them to maintain Owner's operations. Abandon services in place where they will be concealed inside floors and walls, but disconnect them from their sources and cap them in place. Leave no "dead end" services concealed in finished work. 3.4 DEMOLITION SCOPE OF WORK A. General: 1. Selective demolition of building lists many individual components and systems to be removed and also to be saved. List of items to be saved is inclusive and need not be added to, but list of items to be removed is partial and demolition work dealing with that demolition type are intended to be part of that work. a. Mechanical demolition whether individually noted or not to be included in work of mechanical demolition, and mechanical type items in areas to be selectively demolished to be responsibility of contractor assigned to that work. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 20 0020 (15020) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) b. Electrical demolition whether individually noted or not to be included in work of electrical demolition, and electrical type items in areas to be selectively demolished to be responsibility of contractor assigned to that work. c. General demolition whether individually noted or not to be included in work of general demolition, and general type items in areas to be selectively demolished to be responsibility of contractor assigned to that work. Note demolition items that do not typically fall into a particular group's responsibility to be responsibility of General Demolition Contractor. 2. Existing HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Sprinlder Sys tem Drawings are provided for information only. However, existing conditions still need to be field verified. Refer to Drawings for scope of Mechanical/HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection Sprinkler System, and Refrigeration demolition work. 1. Welding: Perform in accord with Specification Section 00 7200, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction — Article 10, Protection of Persons and Property, and Target's Hot Work Program. a. Remove flammables /combustibles from the area. b. Have a fire extinguisher close by. c. Set up a fire watch to be conducted every half hour after welding is complete to verify that no slag has been left behind to smolder or ignite a fire. d. Fill out a Hot Work Permit before starting and have it signed by a Target Store Lead on Duty (LOD) or Store Team Lead (STL).. 2. Fire Protection Sprinlder System Valve Closures: Follow Target's Red/Yellow Tag process for taking sprinkler systems out of service. a. Work with Target Store LOD or STL to coordinate the shut down. b. Target STL or LOD must contact Target Alarm Center (TAC) prior to taking systems out of service and inform TAC as to how long systems will be shut down. c. It is preferable not to shut systems down when store is not occupied. 'If system is to be shut down overnight, the store will need to arrange for a fire watch during unoccupied hours. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 20 0020 (15020) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 20 0020 (15020) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 20 0050 (15050) BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS NOTE: TI-IIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS [NCLUD.ED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic materials and methods for the following mechanical systems: a. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, HVAC. b. Plumbing. c. Fuel Piping. d. Fire Protection. 2. Accessories required for a complete installation. 3. Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: General requirements for submittals. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: General requirements for material and equipment. D. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning, operating instructions and maintenance manuals, and other project closeout requirements. E. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning Procedures. F. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Specification of concrete materials and installation of embedded items. G. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. H. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing around pipes and ducts penetrating gypsum board partitions. J. Section 21 1313 - Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems. K. Section 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation. L. Section 22 1000 - Plumbing Piping Systems. M. Section 23 0593 - Air System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (Owner Furnished). N. Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation. O. Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation (Owner Furnished). P. Section 23 1100 - Fuel Piping. Q. Section 23 3000 - HVAC Air Distribution. R. Section 23 7400 - Mechanical HVAC Equipment (Owner Furnished). 0 S. Division 26 - Electrical work for mechanical installations. T. Section 31 2333 - Trench Excavating and Backfilling. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products that contain software or hardware components that are date sensitive to be certified as fully tested and compliant with date ranges from 1900 to 2099. This compliance is for operational date related functions including leap years. Include certification with submittals. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with applicable seismic zone requirements 9or projects in seismic zones). Perform work so that seismic movement can be tolerated. Systems affected by seismic movement include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Support of mechanical equipment and piping. b. Support of ductwork. • c. Pipe sleeves through walls. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". C. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". D. FM Global, "FM Approval Guide ". E. ICC, "International Code Council ". F. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". G. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturers Association ". H. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". I. SMACNA, "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association ". J. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, "Building Materials Directory". K. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low- Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants ". 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Submit Type "A" shop drawings, "B" product data, "C" samples, "D" test reports, "E' certificates, "F' calculations and "G" installation details according to following schedule: Equipment and Materials Submittal Type Calking and Sealants B, G Ceiling Identification Marker B Clean Outs B Ductwork Systems A, B, C Fan. Transfer B Floor and Funnel Drains, and Floor Sinks B Hangers and Supports B Insulation Materials B Piping Identification B Plumbing Fixtures, when provided by Division 22B Plumbing Piping: Sewer, Domestic Water B, C Fuel Piping, Gas B, C Pressure Gages B Shock Absorbers B Sprinkler System, Components A, B, C, D, E, F Strainers B Thermometers B Volume Dampers B Water Heaters B Grease Interceptor B Sump Pump A, B Grinder /Slicer Pump A, B 0 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 2 ti 1 11 ti 11 1 1 11 11 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Thermostatic Mixing Valve B Trap Primers B Vacuum Breakers and Backflow Preventers B C. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional specific requirements. D. Submit installation details with UL test number for sealing pipe penetrations through fire -rated walls. E. One week prior to"turn over e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to: refrigerant.tracicing@target.com. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Layout of equipment, pipes, ducts, and accessories is diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned. B. Coordinate work with other trades and separate contractors to avoid interference of Work indicated and to secure maximum headroom. C. Refrigerant Containing Asset Tags: 1. 45 days prior to store turn over, HVAC contractor to contact Marking Services Inc, (MSI) to validate,and coordinate Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags, (800) 234 -0135 or www.markserv.com. 2. Coordinate tag delivery, refrigerant data acquisition, and installation of asset tags with MSI. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Michigan Hanger Co. Inc. 2. Anvil® International. 3. Cooper B- Line ®, Inc. B. Conform to ANSI/MSS SP58, "Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design, and Manufacture ". Construct hanger assembly of corrosion resistant galvanized steel, except furnish copper plated hangers supporting uninsulated copper piping. Furnish hangers as follows: Pipe Size Type Michigan Hanger 1/2" to 6" Adjust Ring, Swivel Loop 100 8" and larger Clevis Ring 401 Uninsulated copper piping Copper plated 101 C. Pipe Clamps: Metal heavy duty insulated pipe clamp with EPDM gasket. D. Wire Cable: Galvanized steel wire rope with Gripple® Hang -Fast Wire Duct Hanger Systems as furnished by Gripple® Inc. is an acceptable alternate for hanging only round ductwork in compliance with SMACNA Standards and where permitted by governing code. E. Earthquake Protection - Seismic sway brace devices for suspended piping, ductwork, and equipment (for projects in seismic zones): 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Cable Type: 1) Loos & Co., Inc., Seismic Wire Rope /Cable Bracing for plumbing piping, gas piping, fire protection sprinkler system piping, and HVAC ductwork, UL listed (FM approval N /A). 2) Ductmate® Industries, Inc., Clutcher"'', mechanical system hanger, and EZ- Lock"'', wire rope beam clamp in conformance with ICC Code Guideline For HVAC duct supports, Evaluation Service, Inc, EG284. b. Rigid Type: 1) TolcoTM A Brand of Nibco: Sway brace fittings for plumbing piping, gas piping, fire protection sprinkler system piping, and HVAC ductwork, UL listed (FM approval N /A). BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.2 CALKING, SEALANTS, AND SLEEVES A. Silicone Calking: Furnish calking with oakum joint filler for use in sleeve applications. 1. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. GE "Contractors SCS 1000 Series ". VOC — 20 g/L. b. Pecora Corporation "864NST ". VOC — 98 g/L. B. Fire -Rated Sealant: Furnish UL- listed foamed silicone elastomer compound in accord with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. Manufacturers and Products listed below are acceptable for use with piping in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07 8400 for other applications not covered here. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Dow Corning® "3 -6548 RTV Foam ". VOC — 0 g/L. b. Flame Stop "V174 ". VOC — 0 g/L. c. 3M' "Fire Barrier CP 25WB +Caulk ". VOC — 0 g/L. C. Perlite/Thermafiber safing insulation combination may be used on uninsulated pipes through fire -rated walls, when installed according to ICBO Report 2331. Manufacturers and Products listed above are acceptable for use with piping in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07 8400 for other applications not covered here. D. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Schedule 40 black or galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless ". 2. Thunderline Link - Seal ®: a. Model LS Link -Seal® complete with Model CS or WS wall sleeves. 1) Below grade installation furnish 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2) Above grade installation furnish dichromatic plated bolts and nuts. E. Escutcheons: Chrome plated, with raised edges to accommodate extended sleeves. F. Refer to Section 07 9200 for other joint sealant work. 2.3 FASTENERS A. When using screws or bolts for fastening mechanical equipment to treated lumber, fasteners must be exterior grade with electroplated zinc coating and color - pigmented topcoat layer. Coatings ensure resistance against corrosive properties of pressure treatment chemicals present in wood. 2.4 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Moore. 3. Seton. 4. Marking Services Incorporated, MSI, Phone: (800)- 234 -0135. B. Piping Identification: 1. Furnish semi -rigid, snap -on plastic identification markers. Include direction arrows and lettering in accord with ASME /ANSI A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ", standard as follows: Outside Pipe Diameter Including Covering Minimum Length of Label Field Color Minimum Height of Letters 0.75" — 1.25" 8" 0.5" 1.5" — 2" 8" 0.75" 2.5" — 6" 12" 1.25" 8 " -10" 24" 2.5" Over 10" 32" 3.5" BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. At Contractor's option, the following alternate method may be used: Identification of piping to be accomplished by stenciling black letters on a yellow background. Stencil letters using black stenciling paint and stenciling brushes, minimum 1 -inch high. Indicate direction of flow by stenciling a 6 -inch black arrow on a yellow background. 3. Use following abbreviations to identify piping: Cold Water CW Condensate Drain CD Gas G Hot Water HW Sanitary Waste (Above Fin. Flr.) SW C. Ceiling Identification Markers: 1. Furnish adhesive backed 3/4 -inch diameter markers, suitable for ink notation on colored faces as follows: a. Balancing Dampers: Yellow. b. Fire Protection Valves: Red. c. Duct Smoke Detectors: Orange. d. Plumbing Valves: Green. 2. Furnish 2 typewritten lists with identification codes, functions, and locations of ceiling markers each in its own protective sleeve. D. Valve Tags: 1. Valve Tags on valves are not required, unless required by local code authority having jurisdiction, except for fire protection sprinkler system valves. E. Rooftop HVAC Unit Refrigerant Asset Tags, Owner Furnished: Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags, approximately 1 x 3 inches in size. 2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Magnetic and manual starters, disconnects, power wiring and electrical accessories are specified in Division 26, unless otherwise noted. 2. Control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 26, unless otherwise noted. 3. Starters furnished as specified in Division 26, unless otherwise noted. 4. Wiring, conduits, and electrical equipment not shown on Drawings which are part of packaged unit design and are necessary for proper operation of such packaged equipment are specified in Division 23. B. Motors: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Gould - Century "E- Plus ". b. Spartan - Louis Allis "Pacemaker ". c. Westinghouse — "MAC II ". 2. Comply with IEEE and NEMA requirements, and requirements of this section. 3. Design motors for supply voltages shown on Drawings and specified. Size to develop required brake horsepower and operate satisfactorily with a voltage variation of plus 10 percent at an altitude of 5600 feet. Dynamically balance motors and hold to commercial tolerances. 4. Select motors to operate satisfactorily without failure when ambient temperature reaches 40 deg C (104 deg F) for a period of two hours or more. 5. Furnish drip proof ball bearings and Alemite® Zerk grease fittings, except as otherwise specified. 6. Furnish squirrel -cage type motors with drip proof enclosure, unless otherwise specified, constant speed, and across - the -line normal starting torque designed for quiet operation. Each motor shall operate at its proper full load and speed continuously without excessive heating. Size motors at minimum of 115 percent service factor. 7. Equip V -belt drives with sliding base, belt guard and motor sheave. 8. Furnish electrical characteristics for each motor as indicated on equipment schedules on Drawings and in Specifications. 9. Motors 5 hp and Above: High efficiency type with power factor and energy efficiency above 90 percent. C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA and these Specifications for motor control and starting equipment. Design control equipment for specified function and operation. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Run piping and ductwork in most direct, straight, and mechanical manner, properly graded. Offsets in vertical pipe will be allowed only when necessary to avoid conflicts with other trades. Allow for freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and contraction without springing at pipe connections. Properly group piping with other pipes. Route pipes and ductwork as closely as possible to that shown on Drawings. OSR reserves the right to make slight changes in runs to avoid interference with other work or structural conditions without extra charge by the Contractor. Exercise particular care in coordination with installation of sprinkler system. B. Install equipment and materials according to manufacturer's recommendations unless contract Documents specifically call for a variance. 1. Installation Documentation: Available on -site for review. C. Install with clearances to allow proper servicing and maintenance of items installed under this contract. Mechanical contractor is responsible for coordinating proper clearance requirements with other contractors and maintaining them throughout construction. 3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS A. Firmly hold equipment, ducts, and piping in place using hangers, supports, and anchors. Design hangers and supports to support weight of equipment, duct, pipe, fluid, and insulation, and install with adequate side bracing to prevent swaying. Remove excessive rod materials from hangers that protrude 2- inches or more from hangers after adjusting and pitch have been established. B. Locate supports or hangers adjacent to joints, couplings, and fittings. In addition to above hangers and supports, support piping at each offset or change of direction, at ends of branches, at base of riser pipes, in immediate vicinity of valves and heavy accessories, and along piping as required to prevent sags, bends or vibration. C. Install with vertical adjustment to maintain required pitch for proper drainage and to allow for expansion and contraction of piping. Install hangers for insulated pipe large enough to encompass insulation, including insulation support shields. D. Support piping, ductwork, and equipment, from structure. Support only from top chord of bar joists, except non- load bearing anchors for bracing may be attached to bottom chord of joists. DO NOT support from other equipment or roof deck. Connect hanger at bar joist top chord panel point; that is, the point at which the vertical or angular member of bar joist is attached to top chord. Coordinate hanger locations between trades so as not to exceed a maximum allowable load of 100 lb, unless approved otherwise by Structural Engineer, to joist panel point. Locate panel point loads at least 6 feet from other panel point load on same joist. Install necessary steel to span between joists to locate hangers properly. If these conditions cannot be met, notify Architect. E. Ductwork - Refer to Section 23 3000: • 1. Size and Space ductwork hangers in accord with SMACNA standards, except as indicated in the preceding paragraph when locating panel point loads on same joists. 2. Support ducts with galvanized strap hangers bolted to angle stiffeners or secured to sides of duct. 3. Support ducts with trapeze hangers formed of rod and angle iron under ducts. 4. Install stays on vertical lines of ducts consisting of galvanized steel straps anchored to building structure (not roof deck) at points necessary for proper support and alignment. 5. Adequately side -brace ductwork to prevent swaying. 6. Alternative Gripple® Hang -Fast Wire Duct Hanger Systems for round ductwork only to be installed in accord with manufacturer's instructions and governing code. F. Plumbing Piping - Refer to Section 22 1000: 1. Support hubless piping on both sides of joints, couplings and fittings. 2. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. 3. Increase size of hanger rods supporting trapeze hanger as required to handle added weight of multiple pipes. 4. Subject to weight restrictions per hanger, support horizontal piping with spacing as follows (except gas piping on roof and fire protection piping): BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 6 ti 11 1 11 11 0 11 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 5. Steel pipe: 6. Copper tubing: Steel Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing 1/2" 3/8" 6' -0" 3/4" to 1" 3/8" 8' -0" 1 -1/4" to 2" 3/8" 10' -0" 2 -1/2" to 3 -1/2" 1/2" 12' -0" 4" to 5" 5/8" 12' -0" 6" 3/4" 12' -0" 8" to 12" 7/8" 12' -0" 15" to 20" 1 -1/8" 12' -0" Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing 1/2" to 3/4" 3/8" 5' -0" 1" to 1 -1/4" 3/8" 6' -0" 1 -1/2" to 2" 3/8" 8' -0" 2 -1/2" 3/8" 9' -0" 3" 1/2" 10' -0" 4" 1/2" 10' -0" 5" 5/8" 10' -0" 6" 3/4" 10' -0" 8" 7/8" 10' -0" 7. Maximum horizontal spacing for PVC and ABS pipe: 4 feet. Allow for expansion every 30 feet. Comply with local code and pipe manufacturer's recommendation if more stringent. 8. Cast iron pipe - No -hub and SV(Service): Install with 5' -0" maximum spacing for 5 foot lengths and 10' -0" "maximum spacing for 10 foot lengths with a minimum of one (1) hanger per section close to joint and barrel. Install one (1) hanger at changes in direction and branch connections. G. Gas Piping - Refer to Section 23 1100: Support gas piping on roof with spacing as follows: Pipe Size Max. Spacing 1/2" 6' -0" 3/4" to 1" 8' -0" 1 -1/4" to 6" 10' -0" H. Fire Protection Sprinkler System Piping: Refer to Section 21 1313. Support fire protection sprinkler system piping as required by latest edition of NFPA 13 and governing code. 1. Earthquake Protection ffor projects in seismic zones): 1. Support suspended plumbing piping , equipment, and gas piping in accord with governing code and details on the Drawings to protect from earthquake damage. Refer to Section 22 1000. 2. Support suspended fire protection sprinkler system piping in accord with NFPA 13, governing code, and details on the Drawings to protect from earthquake damage. Refer to Section 21 1313. 3. Support suspended HVAC ductwork and equipment in accord with SMACNA Standards, governing code, and details on the Drawings to protect from earthquake damage. Refer to Section 23 3000. J. Vertical Piping: Install with stand -out hangers 12' -0" O.C. and at every pipe joint. K. Plumbing Walls: 1. Small plumbing piping in walls may be supported from steel waste and vent piping with wej -it® "Adjusto- Spacer System" components in lieu of other hangers and components. 2. Separate steel support components including metal wall studs from copper piping with plastic tape. • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Conform to requirements of Section 31 2333 for excavating and backfilling. B. Perform necessary, excavating for work and backfill excavations. Excavations to have uniform bearing for pipes. Do not place work on frozen ground. Do not undermine or damage bearing of column, wall, or other structural footings. Excavations below footings shall not be deeper than one -half the horizontal distance from such footings or foundations. Backfill only after work to be covered has been inspected, tested as required, and approved. 3.4 CHASES, SLEEVES, AND OPENINGS A. General: 1. Place sleeves in walls, floors, and other locations and verify that appropriate trade leaves chases, sleeves, and openings. In case of failure to do so, cut and patch chases and openings necessary, at no additional expense to Owner. 2. Refer to Structural Drawings for openings in walls. Core drill piping passing through foundation walls or above grade walls erected during an early contract, except where sleeves are indicated. Core drill for piping and equipment passing through walls. Verify size and location of openings with OSR. B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Install sleeves through slabs, walls, and partitions, 1/2 -inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Install domestic hot and cold water pipe sleeves 1 /2 -inch greater in diameter than pipe insulation. 2. Install Schedule 40 black steel pipe or Link -Seal® Model CS HDPE thermoplastic sleeves through interior concrete masonry unit partitions extending through full thickness of wall, and flush with finished surfaces. Seal spaces between piping and sleeve, and between sleeve and wall with silicone calking. Sleeves are not required through gypsum board partitions where escutcheon plates are installed to cover opening around pipes, except on insulated pipes through fire -rated partitions. 3. Install Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves through exterior building walls above and below grade. Install flush with finished surfaces and calk between sleeves and pipe with oakum and silicon calking to ensure a watertight joint. Seal spaces between sleeve and wall with silicone calk of color approved by OSR are not required on neat core drilled holes. Link - Seal® with Model CS HDPE thermoplastic sleeves may be used in lieu of above. 4. For multi -level stores install Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves through above grade floor slabs in exposed areas (such as offices). Extend sleeves 1/2 -inch above finished floor surface, except sleeves for piping larger than 2- inch to extend 6- inches above floor. Seal spaces between pipe and sleeve, and between sleeve and floor with silicone calking flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight joint. Link -Seal® with Model CS HDPE thermoplastic or Model WS steel sleeves may be used in lieu above. 5. Install sleeves through floor slabs on grade for exposed piping and for concealed piping in chases, pipe spaces, and within walls or partitions and terminate 1/2 -inch above finished floor surface. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves 6- inches above finished floor surface on grade and elevated decks for exposed piping in Marking and Stock room areas. Seal with silicone calking. Link -Seal with Model WS steel sleeves may be used in lieu of above. 6. For sleeves sealed with silicone calking, pack space between pipe and sleeve with oakum and install approximately 1 -inch depth of silicone calking.' 7. Install pipes centered through wall penetrations so that pipe movement does not result in uninsulated pipes (such as gas and vent) rubbing against wall or sleeve material. C. Fire -Rated Penetrations: Where chases, sleeves, and openings penetrate fire rated walls /floors, seal opening around pipes or other penetrating elements with foamed fire rated sealant as specified. Galvanized steel sleeves are required on insulated pipes through fire -rated partitions. 1. Fire sealant for insulated pipes: Intumescent type. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and UL testing for wall /floor assembly. Refer to Specification Section 07 8400, Firestopping. D. Escutcheons: Install escutcheon plates on exposed piping through floors, walls, or ceiling in finished areas, except within closed cabinet work. O BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.5 PIPES OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Do not run mechanical ductwork and piping through electrical equipment rooms including: telephone room, switchgear room, transformer room, and elevator equipment room. The only exceptions are mechanical services, such as fire protection and HVAC, serving the room which are acceptable by local codes. B. Do not install mechanical piping above panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, switchboards, motor controllers or other electrical equipment in accord with Article 110 of latest edition of NEC. 3.6 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed piping within building and piping in accessible concealed spaces, such as above lay -in ceilings and access panels. Identify contents and direction of flow at not more than 30 foot intervals, whenever a pipe turns 90 degrees, whenever a pipe passes through a wall, both sides, and other locations for ease of maintenance. 1. Identify exposed sprinlder lines in backroom areas indicating by number which sprinkler zone they correspond to. B. Install ceiling identification markers on ceiling grid at points over which mechanical items requiring service or adjustment are located. C. Install protective sleeve with typewritten list of identification codes, functions, and locations of ceiling markers on wall near door in Water Service Room, and give other list to store manager. Submit with operating and maintenance manuals. D. Install Owner furnished Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags as follows: 1. Acquire and submit refrigerant tracking data, and install tags on new HVAC equipment. 2. Review prototypical list, furnished through MSI, for new refrigerant containing HVAC equipment and furnish feedback to MSI. • 3. Owner furnished asset tagging kit furnished through (MSI) to contain the following: a. Verified MS -215 asset tags and stainless steel self locking braided wire fasteners necessary to mark new refrigerant containing HVAC equipment. b. A comprehensive refrigerant asset tag installation instruction guideline, with pictures and examples. c. An electronic spreadsheet template, Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet, for recording and submitting equipment refrigerant data as requested. 4. Refrigerant tracking data spread sheet must be filled in completely, leaving no blanks. Complete one line for every new piece of refrigerant containing equipment added and one line for each independent circuit in an appliance with multiple circuits or systems. 5. HVAC contractor must follow up directly with MSI to resolve tag discrepancies that are discovered during refrigerant inventorying and tagging process. It is the HVAC contractor's responsibility to insure that refrigerant containing HVAC equipment gets recorded and properly tagged, and to re -tag improperly tagged equipment, or re -survey equipment not originally inventoried at no additional cost to Target. 3.7 TOUCH -UP A. Touch -up pre- finished and pre -primed equipment items to match existing factory finish. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment where set to prevent breakage, misuse or disfigurement. Cover pipe and duct openings to prevent entry of debris. Immediately cover openings in equipment upon uncrating or receipt at the job site until permanent connection is made. B. Install temporary filter media over return air grilles prior to HVAC start-up. Filter media to remain during construction period and to be removed prior to system test and balancing. 3.9 SYSTEM START -UP /OPERATION /INSTRUCTION A. Prior to start-up, equipment be fully lubricated, charged, filled, and otherwise prepared according to manufacturer's recommendations. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. After system installations have been completed and connections made, systems to be operated, adjusted, calibrated and balanced to ensure the specified performance. Air systems final testing, adjusting, and balancing to be performed by Owner as specified in Section 23 0593. Contractor, and manufacturer of various items of equipment, to fully instruct Owner's designated operating personnel on operation adjustment and maintenance of each system and equipment. 3.10 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning Authority to schedule and coordinate this event. Refer to Section 01 9100 for additional information. END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 20 0050 (15050) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 21 1313 (15300) FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY. A. Section Includes: 1. Design, provide, and test automatic sprinkler system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. C. Section 20 0050.— Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for submittals and installation requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Areas within building have been classified according to occupancy hazard existing therein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Provide fire protection systems in accord with latest edition of NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems ". B. FM Global Compliance: Provide fire protection sprinkler system equipment and materials in accord with latest edition of FM Global Approval Guide, including FM label on each product unless noted otherwise. C. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection sprinkler system equipment in accord with latest edition of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. D. Requirements of Regulating Agencies: 1. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Provide fire protection systems in accord with regulations of local fire department or fire marshal. 2. Perform work of this Section in accord with laws, ordinances, and regulations in effect at job site, as well as these specifications and reference standards listed herein. When contract documents call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality or higher standard than required by above rules and regulations, provisions of Contract Documents to take precedence over said rules and regulations. Furnish without extra charge, additional material,and labor when required for compliance with said rules and regulations, whether or not mentioned in Contract Documents. 1.5 REFERENCES A. FM Global, "FM Approval Guide ". B. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". C. NICET, National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologies. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, "Building Materials Directory". E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, "Fire Protection Equipment Directory 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300 and 20 0050, except as otherwise specified herein. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Product Data: 1. Submit equipment brochures and catalog cuts to indicate a complete description of items to be furnished. 2. Where manufacturer specifications and directions are referred to in Specifications, submit such printed specifications and directions before work is commenced. C. Certificate of Installation: Submit fully executed test certificates to Global Risk Consultants Corporation prior to Global Risk Consultants Corporation's final inspection and approval, in accord with requirements of NFPA 13. Submit copies of each test certificate to Owner's Site Representative, OSR. D. Record Drawings: 1. Keep up -to -date and furnish an accurate "As Built" record of work installed. Show type, size, elevation, and location of features of the system, and clearly indicate changes or deviations from original Contract Documents. 2. Upon completion of Work, submit a set of drawings showing changes as noted on record drawings to OSR. 3. Upon completion of Work, submit a set of drawings showing changes as noted on record drawings, hydraulic calculations (if required for work performed), and Certificate of Installation to: Target Mechanical Engineering 50 S 10`h St Ste 400 TP3 -1005 Minneapolis, MN 55403 E. Submittal Procedures: 1. Submittals to General Contractor: Submit one electronic copy of Material and Equipment Product Data Brochures Submittal to General Contractor to upload to Target's Prolog Web (a secure web -based SQL database tool, which Target uses to share and manage Construction Documents) under Project Documents \4. Architecture and Engineering\3. Submittals\Fire Protection. 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Review complete Drawings and Specifications of other trades before installing work. After checking, consider work of other trades and coordinate work to obtain the best arrangement of equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and other construction. B. Inform OSR of points of conflict between trades, so that conflict may be properly resolved. Installed work which interferes with work of other trades to be removed and reinstalled at Contractor's expense when so directed by OSR. Contractor to fully inform himself regarding peculiarities and limitations of spaces available for installation of materials furnished under this Contract. Although location of equipment may be shown on Drawings in certain positions, Contractor to be guided by architectural details and conditions at job site, and to position equipment so it is easily accessible for service and maintenance. C. 1.8 UNIT PRICES A. Submit Unit Prices according to Bid Form, as applicable. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ABOVE GRADE SPRINKLER PIPING A. Conform to NFPA 13 for piping, fittings, and methods of joining. Piping and tubing to be UL/FM listed and approved by local codes. 2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPING SYSTEMS A. - Contractor has option to provide flexible piping connections to sprinlders at lay -in ceilings. Flexible piping systems to be UL and FM Listed and suitable for intended use. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flex Head Ceiling Sprinkler Systems as manufactured by Flexhead Industries, Holliston, MA (800) 829 -6975. C. Installation to include a ceiling grid mounting bracket and one piece braided flexible sprinlder drop with 1 -inch minimum internal hose diameter in 2 -foot through 6 -foot hose lengths. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Furnish UL and FM listed sprinlders, unless noted otherwise, conforming to NFPA requirements for intended use. B. Acceptable Types and Manufacturers: 1. Walk -in Cooler/Freezer: a. Dry Pendent Concealed Sprinlder: UL listed, Standard Response, Standard Coverage, 5.6 K- Factor, glass bulb type sprinlders, 200 deg F, 1 -inch NPT threads, chrome plated. Tyco Fire Products Model DS -C, Sprinkler Identification. Number TY3555. Furnish 30 -inch minimum length, and include Tyco Fire Products DSB -2 dry sprinlder boot. • b. Dry Pendent Sprinkler: UL listed, Standard Response, Standard Coverage, 5.6 K- Factor, glass bulb type sprinlders, 200 deg F, 1 -inch NPT threads, chrome plated with deep escutcheon. Tyco Fire Products, Model DS -1, Sprinlder Identification Number TY3255. Furnish 30 -inch minimum length with TYCO sprinlder guard and includeTyco Fire Products DSB -2 Dry Sprinlder Boot. c. No substitutions allowed. 2. Dry Produce/Labeling Room: Pendent Concealed Sprinlder, UL listed as Quick Response, Standard Coverage, K -5.6, 155 deg F, bulb type, 1/2 -inch NPT, Tyco Fire Products Model RFII, Sprinlder Identification number TY3531 and TY3505. Substitutions allowed. 3. Waste Compactor Chute: Dry Type Sidewall Sprinlder (for waste compactor chute on stores in areas subject to freezing temperatures and getting a compactor replacement as shown on Drawings), Standard Coverage, Standard Response, UL listed for.ordinary hazard occupancies (FM listing N /A), 5.6 K- Factor, 155 deg F, glass bulb, 1 -inch NPT, natural brass finish with standard brass plated escutcheon. Tyco Fire Products Series DS -1, Model/Sprinlder Number TY3355. Substitutions allowed. 4. Waste Compactor Chute: Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler {for waste compactor chute on stores in areas not subject to freezing temperatures and getting a compactor replacement as shown on Drawings), Standard Coverage, Standard Response, UL listed for ordinary hazard occupancies (FM listing N /A), 5.6 K- Factor, 165 deg F, glass bulb, 1 -inch NPT, natural brass finish with standard brass plated escutcheon. Tyco Fire Products Series TY -L, Model/Sprinlder Number TY3311. Substitutions allowed. 5. For Pendent, Upright, Flush Concealed, Horizontal Sidewall, Dry Horizontal Sidewall, and Dry Pendent 'Sprinklers use the following manufacturers, unless noted otherwise elsewhere in this Specification Section or noted on Drawings: a. Tyco Fire Products. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinlder. c. Viking. C Accessories: 1. Reserve Sprinklers Supply Cabinet: Furnish wall mounted steel sprinkler cabinets containing one wrench and spare sprinlders as required by NFPA 13. Refer to Part 3 of this Section. 2.4 HANGERS A. Comply with Mechanical Pipe Hanger Details and Structural Details on Drawings, and NFPA 13. See Mechanical construction Drawings for hanger types and spacing. B. Earthquake Protection (for projects in seismic zones): Seismic sway bracing for suspended piping, refer to Section 20 0050. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING AND SPRINKLERS A. General: 1. Install piping and sprinlders according to approved Shop Drawings. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Locate symmetrically with architectural elements. 3. Verify and follow Owner's and local fire department valve closure procedure requirements prior to commencing with remodeling work on fire protection sprinkler systems. B. Piping and Equipment: 1. Install concealed piping for pendent and concealed sprinlders. Install piping concealed in finished areas, unless noted to be exposed. Locate horizontal piping above ceilings and locate vertical piping behind walls or in shafts. 2. Support piping and equipment with hangers and supports according to NFPA 13 and details in Mechanical Construction Documents. • 3. Maintain clearance between piping and structural members in accord with requirements of latest edition of NFPA 13. 4. Install a pressure relief valve for all wet pipe systems in accord with requirements of latest edition of NFPA 13, and pipe discharge to floor drain in Water Service Room. C. Flexible Piping Drops: 1. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions and complete installation information. 2. Attach multiport mounting bracket to t -bar ceiling grid; then attach Flex head sprinkler to submain. Secure sprinkler to bracket. Test installation for leaks in accord with NFPA Guidelines and "Field Quality Control" article in Part 3 of this Specification Section. 3. Failure to follow manufacturer's cited instructions may cause personal injury. 4. Provide a label limiting relocation of sprinlder on anchoring component in accord with the requirements of latest edition of NFPA 13. a. Language for label to be as follows: CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE THIS LABEL. Relocation of this device should only be performed by qualified licensed individuals that are aware of the original system design criteria, hydraulic criteria, sprinkler listing parameters, and knowledge of the state and local codes including NFPA 13 installation standards. Relocation of the device without this knowledge could adversely affect the performance of this fire protection and life safety system. D. Earthquake Protection (forprojects in seismic zones): Install piping in accord with NFPA 13 and governing code to protect from earthquake damage. E. Sprinklers: 1. Install sprinlders in accord with sprinlder listing and manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Location in Finished Areas: Install sprinlders in areas with finished ceilings coordinated with architectural reflected ceiling plans. Sprinklers located within an area to line up in both directions. Sprinklers may be placed within four inches (minimum) of ceiling panel edge. No lighting fixture can be moved to accommodate a sprinlder location. Coordinate closely with ceiling installer before laying out work. Field cut piping as necessary to correct "creep" of sprinlders as installation proceeds along length of run. 3. Install pendent sprinlder deflectors in sales floor minimum 1 -inch, and maximum 2- inches below ceiling panel surface except as noted on Drawings. 4. Location in Unfinished Areas: Coordinate with work of other trades and meet requirements of NFPA 13 and local governing codes. 5. Flush Concealed Pendent Sprinkler Locations: Dry Produce/Labeling Room. 6. Dry Pendent Sprinklers: Locate in walk -in coolers and freezers. a. Install sufficient quantity of sprinlders around light fixtures to eliminate obstructions to sprinlder spray pattern, and to meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Coordinate locations of sprinlders in relation to light fixtures with Division 26. b. Cut penetration in freezer /cooler ceiling and install recessed escutcheon in freezer /cooler ceiling. c. Install dry pendent sprinklers with Tyco dry sprinlder freezer seals in accord with manufacturer's instructions, except for sealant. d. Sealing of pipe penetrations through freezer /cooler panels and sealing of Tyco dry sprinlder freezer seal to top of cooler /freezer panel to be done in Refrigeration Contract. 7. Match existing sprinklers in areas being remodeled unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section or on Drawings. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) F. Reserve Sprinlders Supply Cabinet: Furnish new unused spare sprinlders with special sprinlder wrench for each type of sprinlder supplied in accord with latest edition of NFPA 13. Used sprinklers are unacceptable. Provide cabinet for spare sprinklers and wrenches as follows: 1. Locate cabinet in close proximity to sprinlder riser(s). 2. For installations with fewer than 300 sprinlders, include not less than 6 spare sprinlders. 3. Stock of spare sprinklers to include a proportional sampling of each type and temperature rating installed with a minimum of 3 each. 4. Post a list in cabinet of sprinlders installed. List shall include the following: a. Sprinkler Identification Number (SIN) if equipped; or manufacturer, model, orifice, deflector type, thermal sensitivity, and pressure rating. b. General description. c. Quantity of each type to be contained in cabinet. d. Issue or revision date of list. 3.2 PROTECTION OF FINISH A. Protect finish parts of construction Work against damage during construction until final acceptance. Cover materials and equipment, in storage and during construction to prevent marring or damage to finished surfaces, and keep moving parts clean and dry. 3.3 CLEANING AND FINISHING A. Clean equipment and piping of iron cuttings and other foreign substances. B. Remove cement, plaster, dirt, and foreign substances that accumulate during installation. Remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent. C. Finish painting, except for items specified to be factory finished, is specified in Section 09 9100. Install clean sprinkler piping suitable for paint application. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Regularly inspect work and deliver certificates of approval to OSR. Do not cover up or enclose work until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by required authorities. Should work be enclosed or covered before such inspection and test, uncover work and make repairs with like materials necessary to restore work damaged thereby to its original condition, without cost to Owner. B. Hydrostatically test piping at not less than 200 psig or 50 psig above static pressure in excess of 150 psig for a period of not less than two hours. Inspect pipe joints while system is under test pressure and correct visible leaks to the satisfaction of OSR. If necessary, piping to be dismantled and reassembled with use of new pipe or fittings. No calking or makeshift method of temporary repair of defective work will be permitted. Repeat tests until line or system receives approval of OSR. C. Test Acceptance: Acceptance of tests performed on systems not to relieve Contractor from liability for property damage to building resulting from leakage or ruptured piping during warranty period. Repair such damage promptly and properly, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or adjacent areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement pertains only to piping, joints, connections, equipment and workmanship represented by the systems as finally accepted, and not to extensions or revision made by others during warranty period. 3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Final Inspection: Upon completion of tests specified herein, arrange for a final inspection with OSR. Decision to be reached during the inspection concerning the resolution of discrepancies and changes, as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of fire protection system will be made after completion of Work resulting from the final inspection, and after receipt of a formal letter of acceptance from the authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 (15300) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 22 0700 (15250) PLUMBING INSULATION NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS .INCLUD.ED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED.. • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermal and sound insulation and accessories for the following systems: a. Plumbing piping. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. D. Section 20 0050 — Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers and Products listed in this Section are acceptable for use in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07 8400 for other applications not covered here. Furnish insulation systems with composite flame and smoke hazard ratings for insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket to insulation as tested by ASTM E 84 - "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", NFPA 255 - "Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", and UL 723 - "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", not exceeding the following: 1. Flame Spread - 25. 2. Smoke Developed - 50. 3. Smoke Developed - 150, for insulation in concrete masonry unit walls. B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and jackets and facings for fittings to have same component ratings listed above. C. Materials or their shipping cartons or packages to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed specified requirements. 1.4 REFERENCES A. . ADA, "Americans with Disabilities Act ". B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". E. ICC, "International Code Council ". F. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ®, UL, `Building Materials Directory". H. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low- Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants ". PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700 (15250) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation Materials: 1. Armacell. 2. IMCOA. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knau£ 5. Nomaco K -Flex. 6. Owens - Corning®. 7. Trubro, Inc., Molded Vinyl Insulation. 8. Unifrax. Adhesives, Cements, and Accessories: 1. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc., MEI ®. 2. Childers ®. 3. Ramco. 4. 3Mn4, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 5. Saran''. TARGET 2.2 JACKET AND FACING DESCRIPTIONS A. Type,GVB: Glass cloth, white factory sizes, beach puncture, 150 oz. in. /in/tear, tensile strength 1001b per inch width, mullen burst 300 psi, with Saran'' Vapor Barrier. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. Jacket "sizing" of mildew- resistant vapor barrier mastic, void of wheat paste. Owens - Coming® "ASJ" factory applied jackets are also acceptable. B. Pre - molded Fitting Covers and Jacketing: Johns Manville Zeston® 2000 PVC pre - molded insulated fitting covers and jacketing complying with ASTM D 1784 and with fiber glass insulation insert complying with ASTM E 136, "Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C ". Furnish with required adhesive tape. 1. PVC Jacket: Roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming, 20 mil thickness. 2. PVC Jacket: Cut & Curler Jacketing, 20 mil thickness, 48 -inch length sections factory curled to fit snugly. 2.3 GLASS FIBER INSULATION: TYPE A A. External wrap heavy density resin bonded inorganic glass fiber insulation having factory- applied vapor barrier facing with an average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 btu - inch/hour -ft2 -deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F rated for 0 deg to 850 deg F operating temperature and jacket temperature limitation of minus 20 deg F to 150 deg F as follows: 1. Fiberglas SSL II® pipe insulation as manufactured by Owens Corning ®: Jacketed with all- service, ASJ, vapor retarder and with factory applied DOUBLESURE® double pressure- sensitive longitudinal adhesive closure system and butt strips seals for a positive closure. Specification Compliance with ASTM C547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pre - formed Pipe Insulation, Type I, ASTM C585, "Standard Specification for Inner and Outer Diameters of Pipe Insulation ", and ASTM C1136, "Standard Specification for flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. All Types (facing only) ". Thermal performance in accord with ASTM C 680, "Standard Practice for Estimate of the Heat Gain or Loss and the Surface Temperatures of Insulated Flat, Cylindrical, and Spherical Systems by Use of Computer Programs ". 2. Owens Corning® "No Wrap" style pipe insulation designed for field jacketing with covering secured by wires or bands, and vapor sealed with mastic is an acceptable alternate. 2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION: TYPE D A. Continuous Tube Insulation: Armacell "AP /Armaflex ®" Elastomeric Thermal Insulation. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700 (15250) - 2 11 11 1 1 11 11 11 11 t TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2.5 CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC INSULATION: TYPE E A. Closed Cell Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.28 btu-inch/hour-f12-deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F; rated for minus 40 deg F to 220 deg F, 6.0 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.6 CLOSED -CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION: TYPE F A. Closed Cell Polyolefin Foam Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 btu - inch/hour -ft2 -deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F; rated for minus 324 deg F to 210 deg F, 1.5 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.7 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURE SUPPLY AND WASTE INSULATION: TYPE G A. Closed Cell Vinyl Insulation: Complying with requirements of ADA, Article 4.19.4, California Article P.1504B, and ANSI A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ". Insulation molded to fit P -traps and angle stop valve assemblies, designed to cushion impact and protect against burning. 2.8 INSERTS AND SHIELDS A. Inserts: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation, of equal thickness to adjoining insulation, with vapor barrier where required. Wooden blocks or dowels are also acceptable. B. Shields: 18 gage galvanized steel for pipe hanger sizes 5 -inch and smaller, 16 gage for pipe hanger sizes 6 -inch through 10 -inch, and 14 gage for pipe hanger sizes over 12 -inch and larger. Furnish the following shield lengths: Pipe Hanger Size Shield Length 6" and smaller 12" 8" - 10" 18" Over 12" 24" C. Prefabricated thermal hanger shields are acceptable in lieu of inserts and metal shields. 2.9 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Strap Banding: Galvanized steel bands, 3/4 -inch wide by 0.005 -inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: Soft - annealed galvanized steel wire; 0.062 -inch. C. Wire Anchors: Welded steel studs, clips, and angles as required. D. Finishing Cement: Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement. Comply with ASTM C 449. Ramco "Thermokote 1 ", asbestos free high temperature insulating cement. E. Sealants and Adhesives: 1. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. 2. Indoor Jacket Seam Sealer and Adhesive acceptable manufacturer: MEI® Mono -Tack Spray Adhesive 22 -65, asbestos free, water based, non - toxic, non - flammable, designed for fiberglass to metal applications. UL classified. VOC -82 g/L. F. Adhesive Tape for Insulated Fitting Covers and Jacketing: Zeston® PVC Z -Tape II, 5 mil thickness, white, smooth finish, Flame spread - 5, and Smoke developed — 0. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install insulation continuous through wall, floor, and ceiling openings, and through sleeves. B. Apply insulation to clean,.dry surfaces. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700 (15250) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. Extend insulation full thickness through hangers, protected at hanger point by inserts and metal shields. D. Install metal shields around lower half circumference of insulation. Install inserts not less than 2- inches longer than metal shields and of same thickness as insulation. Fasten metal shields to pipe insulation with duct tape. E. Seal joints as recommended by manufacturer. F. Use insulation only for its intended purpose, for example, duct wrap used for rainwater conductors will be rejected. 3.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Insulate domestic hot water, recirculating hot water, domestic cold water, filtered cold water, reverse osmosis water, and horizontal rainwater conductors with Type A, Type E, or Type F insulation as follows: 1. Type A: Open hinged sections of insulation, place over pipe, align and seal or jacket as required: a. • Type A insulation includes jacket and longitudinal lap with two adhesives separated by a release strip. Remove release strip to open insulation. After closing on pipe and aligning, rub adhesive strips firmly together to close and seal. A two -part butt strip seal completes the closure. b. Finish Type A insulation designed for field - applied jacket with covering secured by wires or bands, and vapor seal where required. No staples are permitted. B. Install Type E insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. C. Install Type F insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. D. Finish fittings, valve bodies, and flanges for piping 4 -inch and smaller with finishing cement to thickness of adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate piping over 4 -inch and water meters with mitered pipe insulation segments secured with twine or 19 gage wire banding with one coat of finishing 'cement. E. When finishing cement is dry, cover with 4 oz. glass cloth jacket, Type GVB, and two coats of sizing. F. Install jacketing on exposed piping and fittings that are located between finished floor level and six feet above finished floor to protect insulation from damage in janitor closets and back room areas including night maintenance and water service room. G. Pre - molded covers are acceptable for fittings and valves in exposed areas only if approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. Secure covers over insulation and seal joints as recommended by manufacturer: 1. Apply an approved vapor retarder mastic compatible with PVC between pipe insulation and fitting cover, and on fitting cover throat overlap seam. H. For pipes running underground or in masonry walls, use 1/2 -inch thick flexible elastomeric tube or closed -cell polyolefin foam insulation. Seal joints with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING Type Size INSULATION Type Thickness Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculating Hot Water All A 1" E 1" F 1" Domestic Cold Water All A 1" E 3/4" F 1" END OF SECTION PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700 (15250) - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 22 1000 (15410) PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO .DR.AWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary waste piping. 2. Vent piping. 3. Domestic water piping: a. Domestic cold water system. 4. Domestic water system: a. Shock absorbers. b. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers. c. Trap primers. d. Thermostatic mixing valve. 5. Domestic water heaters — tank type. a. Electric. 6. Soil and waste system fixtures: a. Floor drains, funnel drains, floor sinks, and cleanouts. b. Trench drains. 7. Domestic water expansion tank. 8. Domestic hot water circulating pump. 9. Interior grease interceptor and grease interceptor dye test. 10. Exterior grease interceptor. 11. Sump Pump . 12. Grinder /Slicer Pump (below floor). 13. Grinder Pump (on floor). 14. Unions. 15. Valves. 16. Piping Specialties. 17. Protection of Piping (corrosion protection for below grade metal piping on projects with corrosive soil conditions). 18. Vacuum Condensate Collection System. 19. Flexible expansion joints (for projects with unstable soil conditions). 20. Flexible expansion loop (for projects in seismic zones or other areas where above grade piping crosses building expansion joints). 21. Connections to Owner - Furnished fixtures and equipment. 22. Termination of piping systems at a point 5' -0" outside building unless otherwise indicated. 23. Field quality control: a. Plumbing testing. b. Water piping sterilization. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01 4200 - References. C. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. D. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for: 1. Basic Materials and Methods. 2. Submittals. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. Piping Identification. E. Section 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation. F. Section 21 1313 - Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems; for furnishing, installation and testing of fire protection piping. G. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures. H. Section 22 9000 — Start-up Plumbing. I. Section 31 2333 — Trench Excavating and Backfilling. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National. Standards Institute ". B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". C. ASPE, "American Society of Plumbing Engineers ". D. ASSE, "American Society of Sanitary Engineering ". E. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing and Materials ": "Standard Specification for..." F. AWS, "American Welding Society". G. AWWA, "American Water Works Association ". H. CEC, "California Energy Commission" (for stores in California). I. CISPI, "Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute ". J. CSA International, "Canadian Standards Association ". K. IAPMO, "International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ". L. IMC, "International Mechanical Code ". M. IPC, "International Plumbing Code ". N. MSS, "Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. ". O. NCPWB, "National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau ". P. NSF /ANSI Std. 61: NSF International, "Drinking Water System Components ". Q. NSPC, "National Standard Plumbing Code ". R. PDI, "Plumbing and Drainage Institute ". S. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, "Building Materials Directory". T. UPC, "Uniform Plumbing Code ". U. UMC, "Uniform Mechanical Code ". V. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low- Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soldering Qualifications: Qualify soldering processes, procedures, and solderers for copper and copper alloy pipe and tube in accord with ASTM B 828. B. Brazing Qualifications: Qualify brazing processes for copper and copper alloy pipe and tube according to ANSI/AWS C3.4. 1. Qualify brazing procedures and brazer performance in accord with either Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or AWS B2.2. C. Welding Qualifications: 1. Welding of piping joints to conform to ANSI B31.1, "Piping and Piping Systems ". 2. Welders to be certified by NCPWB or other reputable and recognized agency, using welding procedures set forth in ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications ". PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) D. Quality Marking: Manufacturer's name or mark to be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, fixture, and device installed in piping systems. E. Piping System Tests: 1. Perform tests of piping systems as specified in individual Sections. Test piping before concealing. 2. Acceptance of tests performed not to relieve Contractor from responsibility for property damage to building resulting from leaking or ruptured piping during guarantee period. Property damage to be promptly and properly repaired, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement to pertain only to piping, joints, connections, equipment and workmanship represented by systems as finally accepted, and not to those extensions or revisions that may be made by Owner during guarantee period. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accord with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures, and Section 20 0050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Water Heaters: Fumish three years or longer written guarantee against leakage of tank, covering material and labor. B. PEX Tubing and Fittings: Non - Prorated warranty against failure due to defect in material or workmanship for 25 years beginning with date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR UTILITIES A. Exterior utilities will be installed under a separate contract to a point five feet outside building, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Verify location, material and invert elevation before proceeding with work and furnish fittings, offsets, and adapters necessary to make final connection to exterior utilities. Pipe materials specified in this Section apply to connections to exterior utilities. 2.2 SANITARY WASTE PIPING A. Below Grade: Furnish one of the following in accord with local codes: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Cast Iron and Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (no substitutions allowed): a. AB &I Foundry. b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry. c. Tyler Pipe. 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. Service Weight (SV) Bell and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM A 74, "Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ". b. Neoprene Rubber Gaskets for Compression Joint conforming with ASTM C.564, "Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ". 3. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. NO HUB® Cast Iron Soil Pipe conforming with ASTM A 888, "Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm, Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications ", and CISPI 301, "Standard Specification for hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings, for sanitary and storm drain, waste, and vent piping applications ". b. Cast Iron Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1277, "Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings" and CISPI 310, "Specification for coupling for use in connection with hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings for sanitary and storm drain, waste, and vent piping application ", consisting of cast iron split clamps secured by 18 -8 stainless steel bolts and nuts, and with neoprene gasket conforming with ASTM C 564. Manufactured by MG Coupling ®. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 4. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665, "Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ", and ASTM D 2564, "Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping ". 5. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661, "Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings" and ASTM D 2235, "Standard Specification for Solvent Cement For Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ". B. Flexible Expansion Joints (for projects having unstable soil conditions): 1. Manufactured of 65 -45 -12 ductile iron conforming to material requirements of ASTM A536, "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ", and ANSI /AWWA C153/A21.53, "Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service ". Foundry certification of material to be readily available upon request. 2. Flexible expansion joints to be pressure tested prior to shipment against its own restraint to a minimum of 350 psi. A minimum 2:1 safety factor, determined from published pressure rating, to apply. FM Approved for 12- inch and smaller sizes. 3. Flexible expansion joints to consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint, having a minimum per ball deflection of 20 degrees for 3 -inch to 12 -inch sizes and 4- inches minimum expansion. Additional expansion sleeves to be available and easily added or removed at factory or in the field. Both standardized mechanical joint and flange end connections to be available. 4. Internal surfaces (wetted parts) to be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213, "Fusion- Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ", and to be holiday tested with a 1500 volt spark test conforming to said specification. Sealing gaskets to be constructed of EPDM. Coating and gaskets to meet NSF /ANSI Std. 61. •5. External surfaces to be coated with a catalyzed coal tar epoxy conforming to material requirements of AWWA C210, "Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior & Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ". Appropriately sized polyethylene sleeves, meeting ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, "Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast - Iron Piping ", to be included for direct buried applications. 6. Manufacturer's certification of compliance to above standards and requirements to be readily available upon request. Owner to reserve the right to inspect manufacturer's facility for compliance. Flexible expansion joints to be FLEX -TEND® as manufactured by EBAA Iron, INC., Eastland, TX. C. Above Grade: Furnish one of the following in accord with local codes: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Cast Iron and Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (no substitutions allowed): a. AB &I Foundry. b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry. c. Tyler Pipe. 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. Service Weight (SV) Bell and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM A 74. b. Neoprene Rubber Gaskets for Compression Joint conforming with ASTM C 564. 3. Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ASTM A 53, with cast iron threaded drainage fittings, ASME B16.12. 4. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. NO HUB® Cast Iron Soil Pipe conforming with ASTM A 888 and CISPI 301. b. Cast Iron Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310, consisting of cast iron split clamps secured by 18 -8 stainless steel bolts and nuts, and with neoprene gasket conforming with ASTM C 564. Manufactured by MG Coupling ®. c. Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1540, , "Standard Specification for Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ", consisting of the following: 1) 1 -1/2 -inch through 4 -inch ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket with 3 -inch minimum width, 28 gage minimum Type 304 stainless steel shield, and Type 304 stainless steel worm drive clamps with a minimum clamp torque of 80 inch pounds. 2) 5 -inch through 10 -inch ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket with 4 -inch minimum width, 28 gage minimum Type 304 stainless steel shield, and Type 304 stainless steel worm drive clamps with a minimum clamp torque of 80 inch pounds. 5. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and lo-VOC solvent cement and primer conforming with ASTM D 2665 and ASTM D 2564.. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 4 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 6. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and lo-VOC solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and ASTM D 2235. 7. Low -VOC Cements and Primer: a. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. b. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1) Oatey Lo -VOC PVC Regular Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to fl- inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 2) Oatey Lo -VOC Medium Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 3) Oatey Lo -VOC Heavy Duty Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 12 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 4) Oatey Lo -VOC ABS Black or Milky Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding non - pressure ABS pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter, or equal. VOC — 325 g/L. 5) Oatey Lo -VOC Purple Primer for use with PVC pipe and fittings, or equal. VOC 550 g/L. 2.3 VENT PIPING A. Below Grade: Furnish one of the following in accord with local codes: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Cast Iron and Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (no substitutions allowed): a. AB &I Foundry. b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry. c. Tyler Pipe. 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. Service Weight (SV) Bell and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM A 74. b. Neoprene Rubber Gaskets for Compression Joint conforming with ASTM C 564. 3. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. NO HUB® Cast Iron Soil Pipe conforming with ASTM A 888 and CISPI 301. b. Cast Iron Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310, consisting of cast iron split clamps secured by 18 -8 stainless steel bolts and nuts, and with neoprene gasket conforming with ASTM C -564. Manufactured by MG Coupling . c. Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1540, consisting of the following: 1) 1 -1/2 -inch through 4 -inch ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket with 3 -inch minimum width, 28 gage minimum Type 304 stainless steel shield, and Type 304 stainless steel worm drive clamps with a minimum clamp torque of 80 inch pounds. , 2) 5 -inch through 10 -inch ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket with 4 -inch minimum width, 28 gage minimum Type 304 stainless steel shield, and Type 304 stainless steel worm drive clamps with a minimum clamp torque of 80 inch pounds. 4. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and ASTM D 2564. 5. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and ASTM D 2235. 6. Low -VOC Cements and Primer: a. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. b. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1) Oatey Lo -VOC PVC Regular Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 4 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 2) Oatey Lo -VOC Medium Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 3) Oatey Lo -VOC Heavy Duty Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 12 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 4) Oatey Lo -VOC ABS Black or Milky Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding non - pressure ABS pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter, or equal. VOC — 325 g/L. 5) Oatey Lo -VOC Purple Primer for use with PVC pipe and fittings, or equal. VOC 550 g/L. B. Above Grade: Furnish one of the following in accord with local codes: PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Acceptable Manufacturers for Cast Iron and Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (no substitutions allowed): a. AB &I Foundry. b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry. c. Tyler Pipe.' 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. Service Weight (SV) Bell and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM A 74. b. Neoprene Rubber Gaskets for Compression Joint conforming with ASTM C 564. 3. Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ASTM A 53, with cast iron threaded drainage fittings, ASME B16.12. 4. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: a. NO HUB® Cast Iron Soil Pipe conforming with ASTM A 888 and CISPI 301. b. Cast Iron Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings conforming with ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310, consisting of cast iron split clamps secured by 18 -8 stainless steel bolts and nuts, and with neoprene gasket conforming with ASTM C -564. Manufactured by MG Coupling ®. c. Stainless Steel Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bolts and nuts conforming with ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 5. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2665 and ASTM D 2564. 6. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D 2661 and ASTM D 2235. 7. Low -VOC Cements and Primer: a. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. b. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1) Oatey Lo -VOC PVC Regular Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 4 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 2) Oatey Lo -VOC Medium Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 3) Oatey Lo -VOC Heavy Duty Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 12 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 4) Oatey Lo -VOC ABS Black or Milky Clear Solvent Cement for solvent welding non - pressure ABS pipe and fittings up to 6 -inch diameter, or equal. VOC — 325 g/L. 5) Oatey Lo -VOC Purple Primer for use with PVC pipe and fittings, or equal. VOC 550 g/L. 2.4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Above Grade: 1. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B -88, with wrought copper or bronze fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22, with solder joints in accord with code and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 - Execution of this Section. 2. If allowed by local code, mechanically formed tee fittings as created by T -Drill are an acceptable method of installation. Joints created in this manner to be installed/brazed in compliance with code and manufacturer's instructions and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 — Execution of this Section. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) T -Drill Industries, Inc. 1740 Corporate Drive Suite 820 Norcross, GA 30093 770.925.0520. 3. If allowed by local code, Copper Press Fittings are an acceptable method of installation. Joints created in this manner to be installed in compliance with code and manufacturer's instructions and Article on "Installation, Copper Tubing" in Part 3 — Execution of this Section. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) ProPress : (a) Viega 17545 Daleview Dr. Lakewood, OH 44107 - 1- 877- 620 -0016. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) (b) Ridge Tool Co. 400 Clark Street Elyria, OH 44035 1- 800 -519 -3456. 2) NIBCO® Press System"": NIBCO, INC. World Headquarters 1516 Middlebury St. Elkhart, IN 46516 -4740 1- 800 - 234 -0227. b. Material: Copper press fittings to conform to material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18, "Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ", or ASME B 16.22, "Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings ". 0-rings for copper press fittings to be EPDM. B. If allowed by local code, Polyethylene (PEX) tubing and fittings is an acceptable method of installation for pipe 2- inches and smaller in diameter for above ground and joint -free below ground installations unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 1. Tubing: a. Material: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) manufactured by PEX -a (Engle method). b. Material Standard: Manufactured in accord with ASTM F 876, "Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing" and ASTM F 877, "Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Hot- and Cold -Water Distribution Systems ", and tested for compliance by an independent third party agency. c. Minimum Bend Radius (Cold Bending): No less than 6 times outside diameter. Use PEX tubing manufacturer bend supports if radius is less than stated. 2. Fittings: a. Furnished by PEX tubing manufacturer. Comply with requirements in ASTM F 877. b. Manufactured in accord with and from materials listed in ASTM F 1960, "Standard Specification for cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross - Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing ". c. Fitting assembly consisting of barbed adapter and applicable sized PEX ring. Barbed insert manufactured with 0-ring to facilitate pressure testing with air. 3. Manufacturers: a. Uponor, Inc. — Wirsbo AQUAPEX® tubing and ProPEX® fittings. b. REHAU North America — RAUPEX® tubing and EVERLOC® fittings. 2.5 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM A. General: Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. B. Shock Absorbers: Furnish shock absorbers (water hammer arrestors manufactured in accord with ASSE 1010) at solenoid, remote operated or quick closing valves and as shown on Drawings: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Smith. b. Josam. c. Zurn. d. Sioux Chief. 2. Furnish Josam Series: No. 75000. C. Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers:. Furnish devices suitable for intended use and as required by governing code to prevent contamination/pollution of potable water distribution system. Refer to Section 21 1313 for Fire Protection backflow prevention. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ames. b. Conbraco. c. Febco. d. Flowmatic. e. Hersey. f. Watts. g. Wilkens. h. Woodford. 2. Backflow Preventers: PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. ASSE 1012, "Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent" - Double Check Valve with intermediate atmospheric vent (DCV IAV). 1) Equal to Watts Model 9D. Rated for 175 PSIG and backflow temperatures up to 250 deg F. Suitable for continuous pressure. Backflow preventer to have atmospheric vent with airgap fitting. 2) Low Hazard; Backsiphonage or Backpressure. b. ASSE 1013, "Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers" - (RPZ): 1) Equal to Watts Series 009. Rated for 175 PSIG and temperatures up to 180 deg F. Backflow preventer to have four test cocks and #1 and #2. shutoff valves. Furnish with air gap fitting. 2) High or Low Hazard; Backsiphonage or Backpressure. c. ASSE 1015, ." Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies and Double Check Fire Protection Backflow Prevention Assemblies" - (DCV): 1) Equal to Watts Series 007. Rated for 175 PSIG and temperatures up to 180 deg F. 2) Low Hazard; Backsiphonage or Backpressure. d. ASSE 1052, "Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Backflow Preventers" — (HCBP): 1) Equal to Watts Model N9 -CD or Woodford Nidel® Model 50. In -line field testable double check backflow preventer with non - removable design. Maximum temperature: (a) Watts: 180 deg F. (b) Woodford: 120 deg F. 2) Vacuum High or Low Hazard; Backsiphonage or Low Head Backpressure. 3. Vacuum Breakers: a. ASSE 1001, "Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers" - (AVB): 1) Equal to Watts Series 288A. Rated for 150 PSIG and temperatures up to 210 deg F. High or Low. Hazard; Backsiphonage only. b. ASSE 1011, "Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers" — (HCVB): 1) Equal to Watts No. 8A or Woodford Nidel® Model 34 HF, anti - siphon, non - removable with 3/4 -inch male hose thread. Maximum temperature: (a) Watts: 180 deg F. (b) Woodford: 120 deg F. c. ASSE 1020, "Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly" - (PVB): 1) Equal to Watts Model 800M4QT. Suitable for continuous pressure applications. High or Low Hazard; Backsiphonage only. d. ASSE 1056, "Performance Requirements for Spill- Resistant Vacuum Breaker" — (SVB): 1) Equal to Watts Model 008PCQT. Designed for indoor point -of -use applications to prevent backsiphonage of contaminated water back into the potable water supply. 4. Refer to the following tables for store equipment and backflow prevention requirements: Dry ASSE ASSE ASSE ASSE ASSE, Produce/ 1012- 1013 - 1020- 1022- 1001 - Labeling . DCV RPZ :PVB BPBM,. _ AVB Room IAV Equipment Market Area ... 3 -Comp X Sink Sprayer Condensate X Vacuum System D. Trap Primers: Furnish trap primers as required by governing codes to maintain trap seal at floor drains and floor sinks. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. - Josam. b. MIFAB ®. c. Sioux Chief. d. Sloan. e. Smith. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) f. Zurn. 2. Applications: a. Plumbing Fixtures: Furnish trap seal primer valve with integral vacuum breaker and gasketed access cover as shown on Drawings. Manufactured in accord with ASSE Standard 1044, "Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Devices — Drainage Types and Electronic Design Types ". b. Water Mains: Furnish pressure drop activated brass trap seal primer, UPC/IAPMO listed, and ASSE certified to ASSE Standard 1018, "Trap Seal Primer Valves, Water Supply Fed ". 3. Trap Primer Connectors: In lieu of providing for a 1/2-inch primer tapping integral to floor drain, furnish a trap seal primer connector which is a waste pipe section mounted below floor drain with a 1/2 -inch brass compression fitting tap attached to it. 1/2 -inch tap will receive plumbing line coming from trap primer. Trap primer connector to be equal to Josam 88400 or connector may be field fabricated. Connector tapping must maintain a minimum of 2- inches above P -trap seal level or as required by code. E. Trap Primers Alternate: If allowed by local code, furnish Trap Guard® insert Part Series "TG" as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. Phone: (800) 262 -5355. Website www.trapguard.com. F. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts Model Series MMV -Ml. 2. ASSE 1016, "Performance Requirements for Automatic Compensating Valves for Individual Showers and Tub /Shower Combinations ", listed, with locking adjustment cap and integral check valves. Operating discharge temperature range of 80 deg F to 120 deg F. Maximum continuous inlet temperature of 225 deg F. Maximum pressure rating of 150 PSI. 2.6 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS - TANK TYPE A. Acceptable Manufacturers (Electric ): 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Lochinvar. 3. Rheem® - Ruud®. 4. State. 5. Bradford White Corporation (Residential models only). B. General: 1. Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. 2. Size and capacity of water heaters as scheduled on Drawings and specified herein. 3. Furnish glass lined water heaters complete with fiberglass or foam insulation with steel jacket, heat trap fitting, CSA and ASME rated ANSI Z21.22, "Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems ", certified temperature and pressure relief valve, 125 psig rating with hand test lever, and safety and operating controls as required by governing codes. 4. Vacuum Relief Valves for Water Heater Service, ANSI Z21.22 and design certified by AGA: Bronze body construction with silicone disk. Maximum water pressure 200 lbs., maximum temperature 250 deg F. Sizes 1/2 -inch and 3/4 -inch, Watts Regulator Co. No. 36A. C. Electric Water Heaters: 1. Furnish UL approved, multi - element, thermostatically controlled (unless otherwise scheduled) heaters with overheating control and outlet temperature set at 110 deg F, except for water heater serving Food Service which should have a temperature at food service fixtures of 120 deg F. Furnish lavatories and hand sinks served by Food Service water heater with a hot water limit stop on faucet or a temperature mixing valve to maintain a maximum outlet temperature of 110 deg F. 2. Heater standby loss not to exceed 4 watts per square foot of tank area. 3. Coordinate electrical characteristics with electrical trade before ordering. 4. Furnish with one of the following 3 -inch high housekeeping pads or base: a. Precast concrete. b. Composite plastic Ultralite1' mounting pad manufactured by Diversitech. c. Co- injected ground recycled rubber, The Black Pad ®, manufactured by Diversitech. d. Field or shop fabricated 3 -inch high steel ring base. 5. Furnish heaters that are listed in "Directory of Water Heaters" as published by CEC £for stores in California). PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.7 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM FIXTURES A. Floor Drains, Funnel Drains, Floor Sinks, and Cleanouts: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Josam. b. Jay R. Smith. c. Wade. d. Watts. e. Zurn. f. Sioux Chief. g. MIFAB®. 2. Furnish heavy cast iron or PVC plastic body drains as scheduled on Drawings. Manufactured to conform to ANSI/ASME A112.6.3, "Floor Drains ", or CSA B79, "Commercial and Residential Drains and Cleanouts ". B. Cleanouts: 1. Furnish cleanouts with access covers. Manufactured to conform to ANSUASME Al 12.36.2M, "Cleanouts ". a. Approved Josam models: 1) Finished floor - Series 57000 Nickaloy top. 2) Wall - Series 58600 -VP chrome plated with vandal- resistant screw. 3) Unfinished floor and under carpet - Series 57000 -SD -2 bronze. 4) Tiled floor - Series 57000 -SQ square Nickaloy top. 2. Furnish carpet markers at floor cleanouts where carpet will be installed. 3. Unfinished Areas: Furnish cleanout tee and plug of same material as piping. C. Trench Drains: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Aco b. Josam. c. MIFAB® d. Polydrain. e. Zurn. 2. Refer to Schedule on Drawings for model numbers: Furnish pre - sloped polymer concrete channel units with built -in ductile iron overlay rail for edge protection. Furnish slotted ductile iron grate with locking mechanism Manufactured to comply with ANSI/ASME A112.6.3. D. General: Refer to Section 20 0050 hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. E. Traps: Furnish "P" traps as required in fixture drains, floor drains without integral traps, and other points indicated on Drawings or as required by local codes. Furnish traps of same material as lines in which they are installed. F. Plugs: Hub -Fit Gripper® Plugs, Model 270 538, 3.5 inch nominal size mechanical plug with natural rubber "0" ring, as manufactured by Cherne Industries, or approved equal. 2.8 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANK A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol. 2. Watts. B. Furnish pre- charged hydro - pneumatic steel expansion tank constructed in accord with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, with welds conforming to ASME Section IX. Tank to be stamped with a maximum working pressure of 150 psi. Internal wetted parts must comply with FDA regulations and approvals and be suitable for potable water systems. An internal diaphragm to be used to isolate air charge from water. C. Model number and size as indicated on Drawings. 2.9 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP A. Acceptable Manufacturers: PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. ITT Bell and Gossett. B. Furnish in -line circulating pump specifically designed for domestic water systems. Pump to be bronze construction, equipped with water -tight mechanical seals. Pump motor to be non - overloading over entire pump curve. C. Model number as indicated on Drawings. D. Strap -on Aquastat Temperature Controller - Furnish as follows: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Honeywell L6006C1018 strap -on Aquastat® Controller, SPDT switch, range 65 -200 deg F, adjustable differential 5 -30 deg F, 8 amp at 120 volts, 5.1 amps at 240 volts. b. Barber Coleman TC2974 strap -on aquastat, SPDT switch, range 50 -210 deg F, fixed differential 10 deg F, maximum bulb temperature 260 deg F, 9.8 amp at 120 volts, 8 amps at 240 volts. c. Johnson Al 9DAC1 strap -on aquastat, SPDT switch, range 100 -240 deg F, fixed differential 10 deg F, 10 amp at 120 volt, 6 amp at 240 volt. E. Furnish with Bell & Gossett Circuit Setter® Calibrated Balance Valve: 1. Valves 1/2 -inch to 2 -inch pipe size, NPT or sweat. Design pressure /temperature: 200 psig at 250 deg F. 2. Valves to be of bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. 3. Valves to have differential pressure read -out ports across valve seat area. 4. Read -out ports to be fitted with internal EPT insert and check valve. 5. Valve bodies to have 1/4 -inch NPT tapped drain/purge port. 6. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. 7. Valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. 8. Valves to be leak -tight at full rated working pressure. 2.10 INTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1 Josam. 2. Wade. 3. Jay R. Smith. 4. Watts. 5. Zurn. 6. Schier. 7. Rockford. 8. Thermaco, Inc., Trapzilla ®. 9. Big Dipper® Thermaco, Inc. 10. Substitution in accord with provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Recessed In -Floor Interior Grease Interceptor: See drawings for flowrate and grease capacity. Interceptor to be in compliance with local plumbing code. C. On -Floor Interior Grease Interceptor: Big Dipper® Thermaco, Inc., Big Dipper® Point Source Grease Removal Unit, Item number W- 250 -IS with bright finish type 304 stainless steel exterior, rotationally molded,polyethylene interior. Automatic self - cleaning rated at 25 gallons per minute peak flow and 50 pounds of grease capacity. Electrical: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 520 Watts (4.5 Amps). 2.11 EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. Exterior Grease Interceptor: Design and construct in accord with this paragraph, or as required by local code requirements, so as to constitute an individual structure. Design to be as follows: 1. Construct of precast concrete. Precast tank construction to meet latest edition of ASTM Standard C 1227, "Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Septic Tanks ", subpart 5 -- Materials and Manufacture and subpart 6-- Structural Design Requirements. Liquid depth to be not less than 42- inches, nor more than an average of 72- inches. Capacity to be as indicated on Drawings. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Clearly mark prefabricated interceptor tanks to indicate liquid capacity, name and address, or registered trademark of manufacturer. Impress or emboss markings into or onto outside wall of tank immediately above outlet opening. Clearly mark site constructed concrete tank at the outlet opening to indicate liquid capacity. Impress or emboss marking into or onto outside wall of tank immediately above outlet opening. 3. Interceptor to have a minimum retention time of 30 minutes. 4. Allow at least 4- inches above water level for venting. 5. Allow 50 percent of wetted height of whole interceptor (all compartments) for storage of grease. 6. Rectangular tank to have minimum width of 36- inches and minimum length of 72- inches. Longest dimension of tank to be parallel to direction of waste flow. Tank to have two compartments separated by a baffle dividing the tank into approximate 2/3 and 1/3 sections. Install cast iron or PVC long 1/4 -bend in baffle separation between compartments with inlet opening 12 inches off of tank bottom. 7. Furnish inlet and outlet openings of tank with open -end sanitary tee fittings or baffles, so designed and constructed as distribute flow and retain grease in tank compartments as follows: a. Allow at least 2- inches of clear space above top' of sanitary tee fittings or baffles. b. Sanitary tee fitting or baffle at inlet opening to extend below liquid level of tank a distance equal to 1/3 of total liquid depth, or at least 6- inches below liquid depth (outlet invert). c. Sanitary tee fitting or baffle at outlet opening to extend below liquid level of tank a distance equal to 2/3 of total liquid depth, or at least 12- inches below liquid depth. d. Both inlet and outlet baffles to extend at least 6- inches above liquid depth. e. Waterline in interceptor to be at least 2- inches below horizontal drain discharging to interceptor. f. Furnish with at least one manhole opening located over either inlet or outlet opening. 1) Furnish additional manhole openings such that no interior compartment wall of tank is more than 4- feet from edge of manhole opening. 2) Distance between manhole openings serving same compartment not to exceed 8 -feet. 3) Manhole openings to be not less than 24- inches in least dimension. 4) Construct manholes of approved materials and terminate at ground surface or as indicated. 5) Manholes to meet latest edition of ASTM Standard C478, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes ". 8. Furnish manhole risers with a substantial, fitted, watertight cover of cast iron. 9. Furnish inlet or outlet opening, which does not have manhole opening as specified previously, with airtight inspection opening located over inlet or outlet. Inspection opening to be at least 4- inches in diameter. 2.12 SUMP PUMP A. System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Weil Pump Company. b. Paco Pumps. c. Peerless Pump d. ABS Pumps Inc. e. Hydromatic Pump. f. Substitutions in accord with provisions of Section 01 6000. 2. Duplex Pump assembly set in a deep basin. Refer to schedule on Drawings for model number and size of pumps and sump basin. 3. Furnish manufacturer standard catalog product complete with isolation and stainless steel seated check valves. 4. Basin for pumps to be, made of fiberglass with flanged top. 5. Furnish bolted down 5/8 -inch steel cover, gas tight cover with four inch vent opening and bolted manhole cover. 6. Furnish mercury float switches with heavy duty switches. First float switch starts lead pump, second float switch set at high level starts second pump to assist in pumping out basin. 7. Factory wired control panel for remote wall mounting and containing magnetic starters, disconnect switches, electric alternator and "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches. B. Submersible Pump: 1. Furnish submersible, close coupled pump of cast iron construction with high efficiency type, NEMA -6, air - filled hermetically sealed, class "F" insulation motor suitable for 150 deg F ambient temperature. 2. Impeller constructed of bronze or cast iron, non clog design, fastened to a stainless steel shaft. 3. Permanently lubricated bearings, double sealed and oversized to handle radial and axial loads. 4. Furnish double mechanical seals with both seal faces and rotating parts in a constant oil bath. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 12 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 5. Motors: Refer to schedule on Drawings for electrical characteristics. Furnish electrical circuitry and controls as follows: a. Control components pre -wired and housed in a Panel that is a NEMA 1, UL listed enclosure. Equip system with a single point power connection. b. Face mount the following on panels: 1) Starter "Hand - Off -Auto" selector switches. 2) Power on (amber). 3) Automatic alternation switch for alternating lead pump: 4) Audible alarm and alarm silence switch. 2.13 GRINDER/SLICER PUMP (BELOW FLOOR) A. System: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Weil Pump Company. b. Paco Pumps. c. • Peerless Pump. d. ABS Pumps Inc. e. Hydromatic® Pump. f. Substitutions in accord with provisions of Section 01600. 2. Duplex Pump assembly set in a deep basin. Refer to schedule on Drawings for model number and size of pumps. 3. Furnish manufacturer standard catalog product complete with isolation and stainless steel check valves. 4. Basin for pumps to be made of fiberglass with flanged top. 5. Furnish bolted down 5/8 -inch steel cover, gas tight cover with four inch vent opening and bolted manhole cover. 6. Furnish quick remove system complete with floor discharge elbow, stainless steel lifting rope and upper guide pipe bracket that allows submersible pumps to be lowered and raised from a wet pit without disturbing discharge piping. 7. Furnish two copper floats with heavy duty switches. First float switch starts lead pump, second float switch set at high level starts second pump to assist in pumping out basin: 8. Factory wired control panel for remote wall mounting and containing magnetic starters, disconnect switches, electric alternator and "Hand- Off -Auto" selector switches. B. Pumps: 1. Furnish submersible, NEMA -6 close coupled pump of cast iron construction with air -filled hermetically sealed motor suitable for 150 deg F ambient temperature. 2. Impeller constructed of bronze or cast iron, non clog design, fastened to a stainless steel shaft. 3. Permanently lubricated bearings, double sealed and oversized to handle radial and axial loads. 4. Furnish double mechanical seals with both seal faces and rotating parts in a constant oil bath. 5. Motors: Refer to schedule on Drawings for electrical characteristics. C. Electrical Circuitry and Controls: 1 Control components to be pre -wired and housed in a Panel that is a NEMA 1, UL listed enclosure. Equip system with a single point power connection. 2. Face mount the following on panels: a. Starter "Hand- Off -Auto" selector switches. b. Power on (amber), c. Automatic alternation switch for alternating lead pump. d. ' Audible alarm and alarm silence switch. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 13 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.14 GRINDER PUMP (ON FLOOR) A. SFA- SANIFLO INC., SANICUBIC® Classic pre - assembled heavy -duty duplex grinder pump lift station consisting of two 1 HP, 220 -240V, 60 Hz induction motors sealed in an oil filled enclosure mounted inside a polypropylene housing. Motors are fitted with a common spindle /shaft which drive stainless steel cutting blades and pump impeller. Unit includes two pressure switches and an integral circuit board for control, five 1 -1/2 inch or 4 -inch inlet connections on either side of housing and on top of enclosure, 1 -1/2 inch vent connection on top of enclosure, and check valves on internal discharge pipes. Unit is certified to American and Canadian Standards. Macerating standard; US: CSA Certified and IAPMO (UPC) listed — ASME A112.3.4, CA: Macerating Standard CSA B45.9. 2.15 UNIONS A. Malleable Iron Unions: Malleable iron with ground joint brass to iron seat, ANSI B16.14, black or galvanized; Grinnell 463, Stockham 694. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Lines 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller: a. Watts Series 3000. b. Zurn, Model DU, DUC, or DUM. c. A.Y. McDonald Model 2110. d. Corrpro Companies, Inc., EPCO Model FX, EA, FXS, FB, or HA -6. 2. Lines 2 -inch and larger: Insulating flanges having one brass component and one steel component as manufactured by Service Engineers, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas. 2.16 VALVES A. General: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. ; Apollo® Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Lunkenheimer Valves. g. NIBCO INC. h. Powell, Wm. Co. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. Jomar International, LTD. k. Other manufacturers as shown on Drawings. 2. Manufacturer's name and model, figure or drawing number specified are for identification of type, quality and construction. 3. Select valves for not less than 150 lb. water working pressure at 200"deg F, and for compatibility with working pressure of pipe and with fittings attached. Select valves designed for installed service. 4. Valves 2 -1/2 -inch and smaller to have threaded or solder end connections. Valves 3 -inch and larger to have flanged end construction. 5. Valve tags are not required. B. Valve Service Schedule: 1. Shut off valve for: Cold and hot water Ball valve. 2 -inch and smaller Cold and hot water Gate valve. 2 -1/2 -inch and larger C. Valves - Water: PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 14 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Ball valves: Rated 150 psi SWP and 600psi non -shock CWP, and with two piece cast bronze bodies, TFE seats, full port, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, anti - blowout stems and chrome plated brass/bronze ball. Valve ends: full depth ANSI threads or extended solder connections. Manufactured in accord with MSS -SP 110, "Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket - Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved, and Flared Ends ". a. Where piping is insulated, equip ball valves with 2 -inch extended handles of non - thermal conductive material. Include a protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking vapor seal or disturbing insulation. Include memory stops that are full adjustable after insulation is applied. 2. Gate valves — 2 -1/2 -inch and smaller: Class 125 and 200 psi CWP, rising stem, union bonnet, solid wedge and manufactured in accord with MSS- SP -80, "Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves ". Body, bonnet, and wedge: Bronze ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings ". Stems: Dezincification- resistant silicon bronze ASTM B 371,' "Standard Specification for Copper -Zinc- Silicon Alloy Rod ", or low zinc alloy ASTM B 99, "Standard Specification for Copper - Silicon Alloy Wire for General Applications", non - asbestos packing, and with malleable or ductile iron handwheel. Valve ends: Threaded or solder -type. 3. Gate valves - 3 -inch and larger: Class 125 manufactured in accord with MSS -SP70, "Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends ", flanged, bolted bonnet, OS &Y, iron body bronze trimmed, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ", class B cast iron. Packing and gaskets: Non - asbestos. 4. Check valve: a. 2 -1/2 -inch and smaller: Y pattern swing -type manufactured in accord with MSS -SP80, Class 125, bronze ASTM B 62 body with TFE seat disc. Valve ends: Threaded or solder type. b. 3 -inch and larger: Swing type manufactured in accord with MSS -SP71, "Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends ", Class 125, flanged ASTM A 126 Class B cast iron body with bronze trim, non - asbestos gasket. Or, wafer -style with stainless steel spring, bronze disc plates, rubber seat, body of cast iron ASTM A 126 Class B or ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ", for use with Class 125/150 flanges. c. For applications with sump pumps use spring - actuated valve on pump discharge. Use swing check with outside lever and spring on sump sewage and storm drain lines. 5. If operating pressures exceed 125 psi, Class 150 gate valves and check valves of like construction of the preceding to be used. 2.17 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Strainers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller. b. C.M. Bailey. c. Armstrong. d. Watts. 2. Y -pattern type, cast iron or semi -steel (bronze when installed on copper, brass or potable water pipe), pressure rated for intended service. . 3. Standard stainless steel 20 mesh screen for 2 -inch and smaller sizes. 4. Standard stainless steel 1/16 -inch perforated screen for 2 -1/2 -inch to 5 -inch sizes. 5. Gasketed machined flanged cap with threaded blowdown opening. Valve with hose connection for non- potable water. Valve with no hose connection for potable water. 6. Furnish screwed strainers for sizes 2 -inch and smaller and flanged for 2 -1/2 -inch and larger. Select for minimum effective straining ratio four to one. B. Pressure Gage: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trerice. b. Ashcroft. c. U.S. Gauge. d. Crosby. e. Marsh. f. Weiss. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 221000(15410) -15 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Bourdon -spring pressure type with non - corrosive movements, set in cast aluminum case, flared type construction. 3. Gages to have 4 -1/2 -inch dials with white background, black lines and figures, calibrated for two times working pressure. C. Thermometers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Weksler. b. Trerice. 2. Mercury Free with red colored spirit (organic) liquid filled lens tube type with separate socket, adjustable angle style with 7 -inch cast aluminum case; 30 deg F to 300 deg F range with 5 deg F maximum scale division. D. Water Filter (for vacuum condensate system): 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Pentek. b. Culligan. c. U.S. Filter. d. Ametek. 2. Furnish filter model #10 clear filter housing with one micron pleated cellulose polyester sediment filter model ECP10 -1. E. Welding Accessories: Weldolet ®, Thredolet ®, and Sockolet® branch connections, schedule 40- carbon steel, ASTM A105, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications ", as manufactured by Bonney Forge. F. Pipe Sleeves: Refer to Section 20 0050. G. Escutcheons: Refer to Section 20 0050. H. Calking, Sealants, and Sleeves: Refer to Section 20 0050. 2.18 PIPING INSULATION A. Refer to Section 22 0700 for insulating materials for systems specified in this Section. 2.19 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 20 0050 for piping identification for systems specified in this Section. 2.20 PIPING PROTECTION A. Corrosion Protection for Below Grade Metal Pipes (for projects with corrosive soil conditions): 1. Polyethylene material: Sheets or tubes with a minimum 8 mils thickness conforming to ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5. '2. Plastic Adhesive Tape: Scotchrap' 50 all- weather 10 mil thick minimum 2 -inch wide polyvinyl chloride plastic adhesive tape. B. Protection of Pipes passing through Concrete Walls and Floors: 1. Pipe Sleeves: Refer to Section 20 0050. 2.21 CONDENSATE VACUUM REMOVAL SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED, EXCEPT FOR ITEMS NOTED AS PROVIDED BY DIVISION 22) A. Owner Furnished System Includes the Following: AcornVac as manufactured by AcornVac, Inc. To be complete, tested, and ready for operation including skid with vacuum pump(s), swing check valves on skid, and spare parts package. For technical questions regarding installation of system, or clarification of components, contact: AcornVac, Inc., 13818 Oaks Ave., Chino, CA, 91710. 1. Telephone Contacts: a. 1- 800 -591 -9920, Ext 532 — Tom Zinn. b. 1- 800 -591 -9920, Ext 531 — Rod Olson. 2. Fax: 1- 909 - 902 -5041. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 16 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Email: a. tzinn @acornvac.com b. rolson @acomvac.com B. Piping and Valves provided by Division 22 as shown on Drawings to be as follows: Vacuum drainage piping and fittings to be in compliance with national plumbing standards, Local plumbing codes, and must be smooth internal bore, rated for 100 percent vacuum pressure. Acceptable materials include Schedule 40 PVC pressure pipe with DWV fittings at change of direction from vertical to horizontal; Type "L" or Type "M" copper pipe and copper DWV fittings; vacuum rated stainless steel pipe and fittings. PVC pipe and fittings: Solvent welded with the use of primer for visual joint inspections. Valves to be installed in lines so that they are easily accessible for future inspection and maintenance. 1. Lo -VOC Cements and Primer: a. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. b. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. c. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1) Oatey Lo -VOC Heavy Duty Clear or Gray Solvent Cement for solvent welding PVC pipe and fittings up to 12 -inch diameter Schedule 40, or equal. VOC — 510 g/L. 2) Oatey Lo -VOC Purple Primer for use with PVC pipe and fittings, or equal. VOC 550 g/L. C. Overhead suspended vacuum piping will require "split -ring hangers" for support every 4 feet for PVC pipe (8 feet for 1 -1/2 -inch and 2 -inch copper tubing), or shall be installed with hangers to meet seismic bracing if applicable in accord with local code requirement. Unless seismically braced, the use of "clevis hangers" is not permitted. D. Owner to furnish a packaged on demand, vacuum center consisting of stainless steel collection tank(s), water sealed liquid ring vacuum pump(s), powder coated steel frame, electrical control panel, fittings and ancillary equipment for full automatic operation of system as indicated on Drawings. E. Lift Kit Assemblies: 1. Owner to furnish AcornVac Model 2800-300-001 Lift Kit assemblies as shown on Drawings. Owner to furnish an assembly for each point in facility for waste water collection, removal, and transportation to Vacuum Center for eventual disposal in a sanitary waste line. Active components of Lift Kit to be powered by vacuum pressures generated at Vacuum Center. 2. Each Lift Kit Assembly, to consist of a Controller which determines when sufficient waste has been collected in an accumulator for removal, an Extraction Valve which isolates accumulator from vacuum piping network and atmospheric pressure, a mini check valve assembly, and a sufficient length of flexible vacuum rated tubing to interconnect active vacuum c omponents. Controllers and Extraction Valves to meet the following minimum requirements: a. Controller — AcomVac Model Number 2802 - 100 -001. b. Extraction Valve - AcornVac Model Number 2801 - 000 -001. 3. Accumulators to be installed by Division 22 where shown on Drawings and to act as temporary storage vessels for waste liquids. Refer to Part 3 of this Section. Accumulators to be field fabricated or manufactured by vacuum system supplier as shown on Drawings. 2.22 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOP A. Flexible expansion / seismic loops to be Metraloop® " as manufactured by The Metraflex Company, Chicago, IL (lor projects in seismic zones or other areas where above grade piping crosses building expansion joint). B. Flexible loops to consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and a 180 degree return, assembled in such a way that the piping does not change direction, but will maintain its course along a single axis. Loops to include a factory supplied center support nut located at bottom of 180 degree return and a drain/air release plug. C. Materials of construction and fitting type to be consistent with pipe material and equipment/pipe connection fittings. D. Connectors to be UL classified in accord with NSF /ANSI std. 61. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 17 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOMESTIC COLD WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION TARGET A. Domestic Cold Water Distribution: 1. Install a complete domestic cold water distribution system inside building including connection to plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated on Drawings. 2. Connect cold water to Owner Furnished equipment in locations indicated on Drawings. Install shut -off valves at equipment connections. 3. Trap Primers: Install access panels for trap primers concealed in walls. Trap primers require periodic maintenance and must be accessible. a. At plumbing fixtures: Install on 1/2 -inch supply line to fixture in upright position according to manufacturer's recommendations. b. At water main lines: Install on 1/2 -inch line off water mains with a branch line tee off of top of water main as recommended by trap primer manufacturer. 4. Install ProSet Trap Guard® on floor drains in accord with manufacturer's instructions where indicated on Drawings if allowed by local code. 5. Backflow preventers: Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations on plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated in Part 2 of this Section and where indicated on Drawings. a. Pipe airgap fitting drain line from ASSE 1012 double check valves and ASSE 1013 reduced pressure zone backflow preventers to nearest floor drain or janitor's sink. 6. Vacuum Breakers: Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and local code on plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated in Part 2 of this Section and where indicated on Drawings. a. Mount ASSE 1001 atmospheric type vacuum breakers and ASSE 1020 pressure vacuum breakers at high point of downstream piping according to manufacturer's recommendations and local codes. B. Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. 3.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICE A. Install a complete domestic hot water system including water heaters and connection to plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated on Drawings. 1. Connect hot water to Owner - furnished equipment at locations indicated on Drawings. Install shut -off valves at equipment connections. 2. Backflow Preventers: Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations on plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated in Part 2 of this Section and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Vacuum Breakers: Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and local code on plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated in Part 2 of this Section and where indicated on Drawings. a. Mount ASSE 1020 pressure vacuum breaker at high point of downstream piping. B. Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. C. Install strap -on aquastat on hot water circulating line where indicated on Drawings and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Aquastat to cycle circulating pump as return water temperature dictates. Pump to go on at water temperature of 95 deg F and off at water temperature of 105 deg F (adjustable). 1. Mount aquastat on piping with 1 -inch diameter or larger for accurate temperature sensing. 2. Remove insulation from pipe. Thoroughly scrape off scale, rust, or paint. Mount controller using adjustable bracket furnished. a. Turn on power. D. Install Circuit Setter Calibrated Balance Valve on hot water circulating line where indicated on the Drawings and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. To retain calibrated accuracy, for pipe sizes 1/2 -inch to 2 -inch, maintain 3 pipe diameters minimum length of unrestricted straight pipe upstream and 1 pipe diameter minimum length downstream adjacent to the valve. 2. Adjust water flow rate velocity not to exceed 8 fps. E. Tank -Type Water Heaters: 1. Install dielectric unions on hot and cold water connections to water heaters. 2. Pipe temperature /relief valves on water heaters to nearest floor drain or approved location according to local code. • PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 18 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) e 3. Set outlet temperature at 110 deg F for water heaters not serving food service. 4. Set floor mounted units on 3 -inch high house keeping pad or base. 5. For project in seismic zone anchor or strap water heaters to resist horizontal displacement due to earthquake motion. Refer to details on Drawings. a. Strapping: At points within upper one -third and lower one -third of its vertical dimension. b. At lower point, maintain a minimum distance of four inches above controls with strapping. 6. ,Install vacuum relief valve on suspended water heaters as shown on Drawings. 3.3 COPPER WATER TUBE AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION A. Solder Joints: 1. Type L: Make joints using 95 -5 tin - antimony (no lead) solder and Nokorode® soldering flux paste as manufactured by RectorSeale (Ph: 800- 231- 3345). An approved substitute solder is Silvabrite 100 ®, 95.6 percent tin, 4 percent copper, 0.4 percent silver as manufactured by Wolverine Joining Technologies, LLC (Ph: 800 - 225- 2130). B. Mechanically Formed Tee Fittings: Form in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form an outlet having a height of not less than three times thickness of branch tube wall so as to comply with American Welding society lap joint weld. 1. Device: Fully adjustable as to insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of joint. 2. Notch branch tube to conform with inner curve of run tube and press two dimple /depth stops into branch tube (one 1 /4 -inch atop the other). This is to insure penetration of branch tube into tee is of sufficient depth for brazing and that branch tube does not obstruct flow in main line tube. 3. Dimple/Depth Stops: In line with run of tube. 4. Second Dimple: 1/4 -inch above first and to serve as a visual point of inspection. 5. Braze mechanically formed tee fittings in accord with Copper Development Association's Copper Tube Handbook using BCuP filler metal. Note — Soft soldered joints will not be permitted. 6. Contractor assumes responsibility for joints being installed in accord with code and manufacturer's instructions. 7. Mechanically formed tee fittings: Listed in accord with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.5c, IPC, IMC, UPC, UMC, IAPMO, NSPC, ASTM F 2014 -00, and ASPE Data Book, Volume 4. C. Press Connections: 1. Make copper press fittings in accord with manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Fully insert tubing inserted into fitting and mark tubing at shoulder of fitting. b. Check Fitting alignment against mark on tubing to assure tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in fitting. c. Press joints using tool approved by manufacturer. 3.4 POLYETHYLENE (PEX) TUBING AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION A. Install tubing in accord with tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated in tubing manufacturer's installation handbook. B. Do not install within 6- inches of gas appliance vents and within 12- inches of recessed light fixtures. C. Do not solder within 18- inches of tubing in same waterline. Make sweat connections prior to making tubing connections. D. Do not expose tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If construction delays are encountered, cover tubing that is exposed to direct sunlight. E. Ensure that no glues, solvents, sealants, and chemicals come in contact with tubing without prior permission from tubing manufacturer. F. Use grommets or sleeves at penetrations for tubing passing through metal studs. G. Protect tubing with sleeves where abrasion may occur. H. Install engineered secondary pipe positioning and support systems where tubing penetrates stud and joists, and for horizontal supports. I. Use tubing manufacturer supplied bend supports where bends are less than 6 times outside pipe diameter. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 19 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET J. Locate supports at not less than 32- inches between hangers in accord with manufacturer's tubing installation handbook. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Install pipe anchors and guides where needed to prevent excessive movement of piping and excessive strain on piping and equipment connections. Install expansion loops and offsets in piping as required to prevent excessive strain or pipe displacement between anchors, at piping take- off,'and at equipment connections. Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, supports, and anchors. B. Protection of piping against corrosion: 1. Corrosion Protection for Below Grade Metal Pipes (for projects with corrosive soil conditions): a. If soil conditions are corrosive, protect underground ferrous metal pipe with corrosion protective wrapping. Apply as recommended by protective material manufacturer. Install polyethylene wrapping according to ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5. 2. Protect metal pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floors or other corrosive material against external corrosion by a protective sheathing or wrapping, or other means that will withstand reaction from lime and acid of concrete, cinder, or other corrosive material. Refer to Section 20 0050 for pipe sleeves. a. Sheathing or wrapping shall allow for expansion and contraction of piping in order to prevent any rubbing action. Minimum wall thickness of material shall be 0.025 inch. 3. Isolate dissimilar metal piping materials using dielectric unions, except where valves are used. Isolate copper piping from ferrous building elements with plastic tape. C. Protection of piping against physical damage: 1. Protect pipe by shield plates in concealed locations where piping, other than cast -iron or galvanized steel, is installed through holes or notches in studs, joists, trusses, or similar structural members less than 1.5 inches from nearest edge of member. 2. Cover area of pipe where structural member is notched or bored with protective shield plates a minimum of 0.062- inch -thick steel, and extend shields a minimum of 2- inches above sole plates and below top plates. 3. Installation of construction fasteners shall not penetrate piping systems. D. Connect piping to apparatus and equipment with flanges, unions, and similar devices to permit easy removal. Install unions on inlets and outlets of apparatus and equipment having screwed or soldered connections, 2 -inch and smaller. E. Install valves where required and as indicated on Drawings for control, operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems. Install valves ahead of control valves and as service valves for mechanical apparatus and fixtures to permit maintenance of same without shutting down service of piping systems in building. Valve each domestic water branch at main, except at plumbing fixtures having integral stops. Coordinate location of access panels to service valves and equipment in concealed locations with appropriate trades. F. Install stop valves with integral check valves on hot and cold water lines serving mop sink faucets. G. Install check valves on hot and cold water lines serving faucets with hose and spray attachments and faucets with hose threaded outlets. H. Install manual drain valves at every low point of water systems. Drain valves with threaded hose connection to be 3/4 -inch size. Attach a 1/8 -inch thick plastic 2 "x4" tag inscribed with "USE FOR DRAINING SYSTEM ONLY ". Verify exact location of drain valves and receive approval from OSR prior to installation. I. Install thermometers where indicated on Drawings. Mount thermometers at convenient height for reading. J. Install pressure gage connected to its respective pipeline, and located where shown on Drawings by means of suitable brass pipe and fittings containing a brass cock. Install shutoff valve ahead of each gage. K. Install PVC, CPVC, or ABS plastic pipe according to ASTM D 2321. Install expansion offsets or approved expansion joints as required by local codes. L. Where welded pipe connections are allowed, Bonney "Weldolets ®" or Thredo1ets® " may be used in place of welding tees. M. Ream piping up to 2 -inch inclusive after cutting. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 20 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) N. Blow out piping sections with compressed air or otherwise clean internally immediately prior to installation into pipe line. O. Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign material. P. Install water shock absorbers where indicated on Drawings and where necessary to prevent water hammer. Q. Flexible Expansion Loops: 1. For project in seismic zone or area where above grade piping crosses building expansion joint install UL classified flexible expansion loop designed for seismic movement at pipe passing through or crossing building seismic joints. 2. Flexible loops to impart no thrust loads to system support anchors or building structure. 3. Locate loops at, or near, building seismic joint. 4. Install a vertical support hanger, located within 4 pipe diameters, on each side of the flexible loop. Brace each hanger transversely and longitudinally braced in accord with local codes. Seismic bracing not to pass through building seismic joint and not to connect or tie together different sides or parts of building structure. 5. Flexible Loops: Capable of movement in plus or minus X, Y, and Z planes. 6. Install, inspect, and test flexible loop connection to piping in accord with current standards and governing codes. 3.6 SOIL DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT (DWV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete continuous waste and vent plumbing system as shown on Drawings. Work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Building sanitary sewer, extended to point indicated outside building, to join site sanitary sewer line shown on site utility plan. Verify connection point, invert elevation and pipe material before proceeding and make necessary adjustments to accomplish connection. 2. Install continuous waste and vent system. 3. Connect waste and vent piping to plumbing fixtures, appliances, Owner - furnished equipment in Food Service, and other locations indicated. 4. Install soil waste and drain pipe cleanouts the same size as pipe served at foot of stacks, at every change in direction, where indicated on Drawings, and as required by governing codes. B. Floor Drains, Funnel Drains, and Floor Sinks: 1. Set floor drains with strainer top level with finished floor surface. Verify floor finishes and elevations with Architectural Drawings and Specifications before commencing work. 2, Install ProSet Trap Guard® on floor drains in accord with manufacturer's instructions where indicated on Drawings if allowed by local code. C. Vents: 1. Install 4 -inch diameter vent pipe from a point 12- inches below roof where 4 -inch roof penetrations are required. Install single counter flashing over flashing sleeve and pipe with adjustable clamp to ensure tight closure over sleeve. 2. Locate vents, cut holes in roof deck, and furnish flashing sleeve to roofing trade before roofing work is started. 3. Install vent piping with lines sloped back towards fixtures being served in accord with governing codes. D. Plugs: 1. At completion of project install Hub -Fit Gripper® Plugs in open hub drains that are to be abandoned or sealed off for future use. Confirm locations with Owner's On -Site Representative. 3.7 INTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of grease interceptor. B. Install cover flush with finish floor. C. Interior Grease Interceptor Dye Test: At time of Final Completion Inspection, perform a dye test in presence of OSR and Architect/Engineer. Utilize non - toxic, non - hazardous, non - staining red or blue dye and test as follows: PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 21 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Remove interior grease interceptor cover, test each floor drain or fixture shown to be connected to grease interceptor. Allow individual drain or fixture to run clear before proceeding to next fixture. Also test three fixtures, selected by Architect/Engineer, not connected to grease interceptor, to ensure no cross connection of waste piping. 3.8 EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR INSTALLATION A. For exterior grease interceptor installation, protect tank to prevent loadings that may lead to structural collapse. Install as follows: 1. Interceptor located on exterior of building not to be located within 5 -feet of building, 10 -feet of water service line, and 2 -feet of lot line. 2. Adequately anchor if interceptor is installed in groundwater. 3. Connect inlet and outlet pipes to tank with a sealed flexible joint to accommodate pipe movement. 4. Install cleanout, at least 4- inches in diameter on discharge line from interceptor. 5. Install vent line as shown and size as indicated on plan. 6. Terminate inspection openings at grade or as indicated on plan. 7. Terminate manhole risers at grade or as indicated on plan. Covers to be flush with finished concrete. Lock manhole covers in place, mark with a warning sign to not enter without proper equipment, and affix a minimum 4 x 6 -inch permanent label identifying interceptor tank with the words, "GREASE INTERCEPTOR ". 8. Install interceptor on bedding of at least 3- inches in depth. Bedding and backfill for tanks to be well graded granular material in accord with Section 31 2310. 9. Joints on concrete risers and manhole covers to be tongue and groove or shiplap type. Seal watertight using neat cement, mortar or bituminous compound. Weld joints on steel risers or flange and bolt watertight. Bituminous coat steel manhole extensions inside and outside. Methods of attaching fiberglass risers to be watertight and approved by local code authority. 10. After installation, tank must pass a manometer test with 1 -inch of water column for five minutes, or a vacuum test with 2- inches of mercury for 60 minutes. 3.9 SUMP PUMPS INSTALLATION A. Install in accord with local code requirements and follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of sump pumps and accessories. B. Install cover flush with finish floor. C. Install control panel on wall. Division 26 to install power and control conductors and conduits from panel to pumps and switches. 3.10 GRINDER/SLICER PUMPS INSTALLATION (BELOW FLOOR) A. Install in accord with local code requirements and follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of grinder /slicer pump and accessories. B. Install cover flush with finish floor. C. Locate control panel on wall and install wiring from panel to pumps and switches. 3.11 GRINDER PUMP (ON FLOOR) A. Install in accord with local code requirements and follow manufacturer's published instructions and details for installation of grinder pump system. B. Install effluent pipe leading into pump with .1 /4 -inch per foot gravity flow towards the pump unit. C. Install isolating ball or gate valves on waste inlet line(s) and on discharge pipe. 3.12 VACUUM CONDENSATE COLLECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION (BY DIVISION 22) A. Preparation: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 22 TARGET ° MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. B. Installation: 1. System installation to be by a trained and certified installer. Manufacturer to furnish free training upon request by Division 22 contractor prior to commencement of installation. 2. Installation to be in strict accord with manufacturer's installation instructions and with local authority approval. 3. Start-up: Refer to Section 22 9000. 4. Manufacturer's representative to review concealed components prior to being concealed and completed installation. 5. Do not store equipment outdoors prior to installation. Protect vacuum components from environment, construction debris, damage, dust, mortar splatter and direct paint or paint splatter. 6. Conventional venting is not required and to be installed only as sized and shown on Drawings. 7. Method of Installation: a. Install vacuum condensate collection system components and vacuum collection system piping as required for a complete installation in accord with manufacturer's recommendations as outlined in AcomVac Design Guide for Supermarkets. b. Furnish and install gravity condensate drainage piping to accumulator. c. Install vacuum center with clear space sufficient for servicing. Install valves in accessible locations or provide access doors or panels (minimum size 14 inches by 14 inches) in walls, partitions, floors or ceilings. Floor access panels to be watertight. 8. Vacuum Collection System Piping and Accessories: a. Inside surfaces of drainage piping to be smooth and free of burrs, weld bead protrusions and abrupt changes in cross section. b. Taper -ream joints in which inside diameter of vacuum drainage pipe and fitting do not meet. Pipe /fitting interface to produce a smooth transition. c. Right angle bends in horizontal vacuum drainage piping to be long radius DWV bends. d. 45 degree changes of direction in a vertical riser must be made with DWV fittings. e. 90 degree changes of direction in a vertical lift must be made with long radius DWV fittings. f. Line clean outs to be spaced no greater than 48 feet. Provide additional cleanouts at ends of mains and branches and where indicated on Drawings. g. Wye branch fittings in vacuum drainage piping to be positioned so that branch lines enter wye branch fitting at a minimum of 45 degree measured in a vertical plane from horizontal. h. Lifts or risers to enter main within 45 degrees from top. Side or bottom entry is not permitted. i. Slope branch lines toward collection main and collection mains toward vacuum tank(s). Slope to provide positive pitch, (1/8 -inch per foot), to collection system. j. Protect vacuum drainage lines from clogging, debris and damage for remainder of construction period. Place plugs in end of uncompleted work at end of each work day or when work is stopped. k. Isolation and check valves to be full port valves rated for vacuum and shall be accessible for service and operation. 1. Tee fittings not to be used in vacuum drainage piping. m. A single offset is allowed in vertical piping in accord with AcomVac Design Manual guidelines to avoid structural members. n. In sales area or in areas viewable by public, conceal vacuum piping above ceilings or within walls. o. Locate lift or riser piping no more than 3' -0" from outlet of accumulator. p. Bracing: 1) Piping must be supported, braced, and secured to resist thrusting forces exerted during vacuum system operation. 2) Correct bracing is to be accomplished by use of multi- directional pipe clamps and rigid support assemblies. 3) Proper bracing has been achieved when no noticeable movement of vacuum piping system occurs during operation. 4) Piping must be braced in accord with AcomVac specifications or local code requirements, which ever is more restrictive. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 23 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 5) Bracing assemblies must be attached to a rigid base. Structural steel, rigid studs, or wooden backings must be used to provide adequate support. Drywall, thin sheet metal case backing, and HVAC duct are not acceptable bases. 6) Bracing of horizontal piping should be in four foot intervals when the installation is done in PVC, and eight foot intervals for copper, or as required by local code. 7) Sagging of piping between supports is not permitted; 1/4 -inch slope per foot is to be maintained at all times. 8) Lateral or seismic bracing should be added every 25 feet when hanger assembly is greater than 36- inches long. 9) When a Unistrut® or equivalent trapeze is used, piping must be clamped down securely. 10) Vertical risers are to be secured in six foot intervals. 11) An approved bracing assembly must be installed within one foot of every directional change on both sides of the fitting. 12) An approved bracing assembly must be installed within one foot of every extraction valve, on both the inlet and outlet side. 9. Vacuum Extraction Valves, Controllers, and Accumulators: a. Protect valve components from paint, construction dirt and debris at all times. b. Install accumulators, controllers, and extraction valves where indicated on Drawings and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Neoprene rubber sensor tubing between controller and accumulator shall have uniform pitch back from controller to accumulator. d. Secure neoprene rubber sensor tubing to vacuum lifts or risers with nylon tie straps. Take care so as not to kink or constrict tubing. 10. Vacuum Center: a. Vacuum center discharge line to flow into sanitary system with plumbing code minimum required air gap. b. Provide filtered cold water connection to vacuum center pumps and inter - connect Owner furnished equipment at vacuum center, including waste and vacuum drainage piping and valves. c. Coordinate electrical work with Division 26 required for power and control wiring. Division 28 to wire remote monitoring alarms and indications from dry sets of contacts to Owner's Building Controls System. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Test vacuum condensate collection system piping at 22- inches Hg with no loss of pressure exceeding 0.1 -inch Hg per minute over a minimum period of 10 minutes. 2. Materials or workmanship found faulty to be immediately replaced or repaired and sections or full system to be re- tested. 3. Testing to be performed in presence of manufacturer's representative. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Contractor to test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Test as required by code and as specified herein. Materials or workmanship found faulty to be immediately replaced or repaired and sections or systems re- tested. 2. Perform tests in presence of governing authorities and OSR. 3. Submit certificates to OSR that tests have been satisfactorily completed. B. Plumbing Tests: 1. Plumbing tests to be not less than the following: 2. Test water pipes at a pressure at least 50 psig higher than normal working pressure, but in no case at a pressure less than 125 psig, for a period of 2 hours. 3. Sanitary and vent pipes, air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes. 4. Perform final air test when plumbing work is finished, according to governing code requirements. 5. No plumbing system, or part thereof, to be covered or concealed until such work receives approval of OSR and governing authorities requiring tests. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 24 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Water Piping Sterilization: Upon completion of cold and hot water systems, sterilize systems with chlorine before placing in operation. Utilize a chlorine dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Following a contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush chlorinated water from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.02 parts per million. Valves in water lines being sterilized to be opened and closed several times during sterilization period. Comply with goveming code requirements. D. Test vacuum condensate collection system piping at 15 PSIG for a minimum of 10 minutes with no loss in pressure. • END OF SECTION PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 22 1000 (15410) - 25 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 22 4000 (15440) PLUMBING FIXTURES NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJbC1 . REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, Contractor Furnished unless noted otherwise, for the following items: 1. Janitor's Sinks. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. 1 B. Section 01 4200 — References. C. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. D. Section 01 8113 — Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. F. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods; for submittals. G. Section 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation. H. Section 22 1000 - Plumbing Piping Systems and Equipment. I. Division 26 - Electrical; for electrical work for mechanical installations. J. Owner Furnished equipment and other fixtures are indicated on Drawings. ' 1.3 REFERENCES A. IAPMO /ANSI Z124.6- 2007: "Plastic Sinks ". NOTE: The following references are not part of this Specification Section, and are included as reference only for Owner Furnished plumbing fixtures and equipment. B. ANSI /ASME A112.18.1: "Plumbing Fixture Fittings" (for faucets). , C. ANSI/NSF 2: "Food Equipment" (for stainless steel sinks and hand sinks). D. ANSI/NSF /61, Section 9: "Drinking Water System Components" — Health Effects (for faucets). ' E. ANSI Standard 2358.1: . "Emergency Eye Wash and Shower Equipment" (for emergency eye wash equipment). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Furnish products of same manufacturer for each product type specified throughout unless noted otherwise. 1.5 SUBMITTALS , A. Furnish submittals in accord with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures, and Section 20 0050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. J ' 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 (15440) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: CONTRACTOR FURNISHED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE A. Janitor Sinks: 1. Fiat. 2. E.L. Mustee & Sons, Inc. NOTE: The following fixtures and equipment are not part ofthis Specification Section, and are included as reference only for Owner Furnished plumbing fixtures and equipment. B. Stainless Steel Sinks (Owner Furnished): 1. Amtekco Industries, Inc. 2. BK Resources. C. Faucets (Owner Furnished). 1. Component Hardware Group, Inc. D. Emergency Eye Wash (Owner Furnished) 1. Bradley. 2.2 FIXTURE SCHEDULE: CONTRACTOR FURNISHED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE A. JANITOR'S SINK (F -6A): 1. Fixture: Fiat Products, Inc., Model No. MSB -3624 molded stone mop service basin, 36 "x24 "x10" high with; intergral stainless steel drain body, dome strainer /lint basket. Manufactured in compliance with IAPMO /ANSI Z124.6 -2007. 2. Model No. E -77 -AA vinyl bumper guard. 2.3 CALKING A. Calking: White colored SLNT -4 joint sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, and in accord with Section B. 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Contractor to install Owner Furnished and Contractor Furnished items as follows: Set fixture in place and properly connect to waste and vent, and water pipes. Install rigid, plumb, level, and true at heights indicated on architectural elevations. B. Furnish chrome plated angle supplies with female nominal pipe thread (FNPT) inlets and angle supplies with loose key stops in water supplies to sinks with exposed supplies. Where water supplies are concealed in accessible cabinet work, piping may be copper and stops to be wheel handle type. 3.2 CALKING A. Calk around plumbing fixtures with SLNT -4 joint sealant. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 (15440) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 22 9000 START -UP PLUMBING NOTE: THIS SECTION COVERS CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Start-up of the following Owner furnished equipment: 1. Vacuum Condensate Collection System. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 22 1000 — Plumbing Piping Systems and Equipment. 1.3 START -UP COORDINATION A. Coordinate vacuum condensate collection system start-up with: AcornVac, Inc., 13818 Oaks Ave., Chino, CA, 91710. 1. Telephone Contacts: a. 1- 800 -591 -9920, Ext 532 — Tom Zinn b. 1- 800 -591 -9920, Ext 531 - Rod Olson. 2. Fax: 1- 909 - 902 -5041. 3. Email: a. tzinn @acomvac.com b. rolson @acomvac.com PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A manufacturer's representative shall provide installation inspection and on -site start-up of system. Manufacturer's representative to confirm to Owner's Representative and Engineer that vacuum drainage piping and collection system equipment have been installed in accord with Drawings, Specifications, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's representative to provide a maximum of two installation inspections and one system startup service call. Additional inspections required due to faulty installation of vacuum drainage piping and system components to be responsibility of installing contractor at no additional cost to Owner, AcornVac, or AcomVac Service Representative. B. Plumbing contractor shall be present during start-up and commissioning activities for vacuum condensate collection system. END OF SECTION START -UP PLUMBING 22 9000 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START -UP PLUMBING 22 9000 - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 0593 (15993) TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT A PART OF DIVISION 23. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND WORK. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 0593 (15993) - 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 0593 (15993) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 0700 (15250) HVAC INSULATION NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS .PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermal and sound insulation and accessories for the following systems: 2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, HVAC, ductwork, and equipment. 3. HVAC equipment condensate piping for rooftop units . 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 — References. B. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. D. Section 20 0050 — Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. E. Section 23 3000 — HVAC Air Distribution. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers and Products listed in this Section are acceptable for use in specific applications and are subject to requirements of Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. Refer to Section 07 8400 for other applications not covered here. Furnish insulation systems with composite flame and smoke hazard ratings for insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket to insulation as tested by ASTM E 84 - "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", NFPA 255 - "Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", and UL 723 - "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ", not exceeding the following: 1. Flame Spread — 25. 2. Smoke Developed — 50. 3. Smoke Developed — 150, for insulation in concrete masonry unit walls. B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and jackets and facings for fittings to have same component ratings listed above. C. Materials or their shipping cartons or packages to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed specified requirements. Duct liners to be stenciled with "Meets NFPA 90A Requirements ". 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing Materials ". B. NAIMA, "North American Insulation Manufacturers Association ". C. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". D. SMACNA, "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association ". E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ®, UL, "Building Materials Directory". HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation Materials: 1. Armacell. 2. Certainteed (Ductwork insulation only). 3. IMCOA. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Knauf. 6. Nomaco K -Flex. 7. Owens - Corning ®.. B. Adhesives, Cements, and Accessories: 1. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc., MEI ®. 2. Childers ®. 3. Ramco. 4. 3M"', Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 5. Saran'. 2.2 JACKET AND FACING DESCRIPTIONS A. Type GVB: Glass cloth, white factory sizes, beach puncture, 150 oz. in. /in/tear, tensile strength 100 lb per inch width, mullen burst 300 psi, with Sarane" Vapor Barrier. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. Jacket "sizing" of mildew - resistant vapor barrier mastic, void of wheat paste. Owens-Corning® "ASJ" factory applied jackets are also acceptable. B. Pre - molded Fitting Covers and Jacketing: Johns Manville Zeston® 2000 PVC pre - molded insulated fitting covers and jacketing complying with ASTM D 1784, "Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Compounds ", and with fiber glass insulation insert complying with ASTM E 136, "Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C ". Furnish with required adhesive tape. 2.3 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION: TYPE A A. External wrap heavy density resin bonded inorganic glass fiber insulation having factory- applied vapor barrier facing with an average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 btu - inch/hour -ft2 -deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F rated for 0 deg to 850 deg F operating temperature and jacket temperature limitation of minus 20 deg F to 150 deg F as follows: 1. Fiberglas SSL II® pipe insulation as manufactured by Owens Coming: Jacketed with all- service, ASJ, vapor retarder and with factory applied DOUBLESURE® double pressure- sensitive longitudinal adhesive closure system and butt strips seals for a positive closure. Specification Compliance with ASTM C 547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pre - Formed Pipe Insulation, Type I, Grade A to 850 deg F ", ASTM C 585, "Standard Specification for Inner and Outer Diameters of Pipe Insulation ", and ASTM C 1136, "Standard Specification for Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation: All Types (facing only)" . Thermal performance in accord with ASTM C 680, "Standard Practice for Estimate of the Heat Gain or Loss and the Surface Temperatures of Insulated Flat, Cylindrical, and Spherical Systems by Use of Computer • Programs ". 2. Owens Corning® "No Wrap" style pipe insulation designed for field jacketing with covering secured by wires or bands, and vapor sealed with mastic is an acceptable alternate. 2.4 INTERNAL DUCT INSULATION, DUCT LINER: TYPE B A. Refer to Section 23 3000. 2.5 , EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION, DUCT WRAP: TYPE C A. Blanket of glass fiber insulation factory- laminated to FRK vapor retarder facing with a 2 -inch stapling and taping flange on one edge as follows: HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. SOFTed All- Service Fiber Glass Duct Wrap as manufactured by Owens Corning ®, Type 75 with a density of 0.75 pcf and thermal conductivity of 0.30 btu - in/hour- ft2 -deg F at 75 deg F mean, in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ", and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems" standards, and other model building and energy codes. For ducts operating at temperatures from 40 deg F to 250 deg F. Specification compliance with ASTM C 1290 - "Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts, Type ", ASTM C 1136 - "Standard Specification for Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation: All Types (facing only) ", and ASTM C 553 - "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications ". 2.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION: TYPE D A. Continuous Tube Insulation: Armacell "AP /Armaflex" Elastomeric Thermal Insulation. B. White Speedline PVC fitting covers and jacketing, 800 -551 -9759 or website'www.speedlinepvc.com. 2.7 CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION: TYPE E 1 1 1 1 A. Closed Cell Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.28 Btu - inch/hour -ft2 -deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F; rated for minus 40 deg F to 220 deg F, 6.0 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.8 CLOSED -CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM PIPE INSULATION: TYPE F A. Closed Cell Polyolefin Foam Insulation: Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 btu - inch/hour -ft2 -deg F at a mean temperature of 75 deg F; rated for minus 324 deg F to 210 deg F, 1.5 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.9 INSERTS AND SHIELDS A. Inserts: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation, of equal thickness to adjoining insulation, with vapor barrier where required. Wooden blocks or dowels are also acceptable. B. Shields: 16 -gage galvanized steel for pipe sizes 4 -inch and smaller. Furnish the following shield lengths: Pipe Size Shield Length 6" and smaller 12" C. Prefabricated thermal hanger shields are acceptable in lieu of inserts and metal shields. 2.10 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Strap Banding: Galvanized steel bands, 3/4 -inch wide by 0.005 -inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: Soft - annealed galvanized steel wire; 0.062 -inch. C. Wire Anchors: Welded steel studs, clips, and angles as required. D. Finishing Cement: Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement. Comply with ASTM C 449, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic- Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement ". Ramco "Thermokote 1", asbestos free high temperature insulating cement. E. Sealants and Adhesives: 1. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Indoor Jacket Seam Sealer and Adhesive: MEI® Mono -Tack Spray Adhesive 22 -65, asbestos free, water based, non - toxic, non - flammable, designed for fiberglass to metal applications. UL classified. VOC -82 g/L. b. Nosing Compound: MEI® Eco -Perm Coating 11 -02, water based, fire resistive asbestos free coating for use indoors over thermal insulation. UL classified. VOC — 82 g/L. F. Adhesive Tape for Insulated Fitting Covers and Jacketing: Zeston® PVC Z -Tape II, 5 mil thickness, white, smooth finish, Flame spread - 5, and Smoke developed — 0. HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install insulation continuous through wall, floor, and ceiling openings, and through sleeves. B. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces. C. Extend insulation full thickness through hangers, protected at hanger point by inserts and metal shields. D. Install metal shields around lower half circumference of insulation. Install inserts not less than 2- inches longer than metal shields and of same thickness as insulation. Fasten metal shields to pipe insulation with duct tape. E. Seal joints as recommended by manufacturer. F. Use insulation only for its intended purpose. 3.2 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONDENSATE PIPING A. Insulate copper, PVC, and ABS condensate piping installed below roof deck with Type A, Type E, or Type F insulation as follows: 1. Type A: Open hinged sections of insulation, place over pipe, align and seal or jacket as required: a. Type A insulation includes jacket and longitudinal lap with two adhesives separated by a release strip. Remove release strip to open insulation. After closing on pipe and aligning, rub adhesive strips firmly together to close and seal. A two -part butt strip seal completes the closure. b. Finish Type A insulation designed for field - applied jacket with covering secured by wires or bands, and vapor seal where required. No staples are permitted. 2. Install Type E insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. 3. Install Type F insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Seal joints with recommended adhesive. B. Finish fittings for piping 4 -inch and smaller with finishing cement to thickness of adjoining pipe insulation. C. When finishing cement is dry, cover with 4 oz. glass cloth jacket, Type GVB, and two coats of sizing. D. Pre - molded covers are acceptable for fittings in exposed areas only if approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. Secure covers over insulation and seal joints as recommended by manufacturer: 1. Apply an approved •vapor retarder mastic compatible with PVC between pipe insulation and fitting cover, and on fitting cover throat overlap seam. E. For pipes running underground or in masonry walls, use 1/2 -inch thick flexible elastomeric tube or closed -cell polyolefin foam insulation. Seal joints with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. General: Division 23 mechanical contractor to install duct liner at ducts requiring thermal and acoustical insulation as specified in Section 23 3000. B. External Duct Insulation, Duct Wrap: Type C: 1. Secure insulation to ducts with spot applied adhesive 8- inches on center. 2. On ducts 24- inches and wider, install pins 18- inches on center, spaced 3- inches maximum from butt joints, on bottom to prevent sagging. 3. Use vapor - barrier tape over seams, tears, and penetrations of vapor barrier jacket. 4. Alternate method of cap seal: Longitudinal joint lapped and folded, then stapled securely in place. HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING Type Size INSULATION Type Thickness HVAC Equipment Condensate All A 1" E 3/4" F 1" 3.5 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK Type INSULATION Type Thickness Rectangular Supply (and C 1 -1/2" (2 " for 2006 Return for Florida projects and projects governed by MCC) IMC): Insulate along entire length of duct run. Note if Type C is used, Type B duct liner to be installed by Div 23 Mechanical Contractor for first 10 feet from RTUs for sound attenuation (refer to Section 23 3000). Round Supply and outside air intake: Insulate along entire length of duct run. C 2" END OF SECTION HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK HVAC INSULATION 23 0700 (15250) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 0900 (15950) CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 23. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER- FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 0900 (15950) - 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 0900 (15950) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 1100 (15410) FUEL PIPING NOTE:. THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Natural -gas piping system. 2. Liquified Petroleum, L.P., gas piping system, if indicated on Drawings. 3. Connections to Owner- Furnished fixtures and equipment. 4. Piping identification. 5. Piping testing. 6. Termination of piping systems at a point 5' -0" outside building unless otherwise indicated. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01 4200 - References. C. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. D. Section 09 9100 — Painting, for exterior gas piping. E. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, for: 1. Basic Materials and Methods. 2. Submittals. F. Section 26 0526 — Secondary Grounding. G. Section 31 2333 — Trench Excavating and Backfilling. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI: "American National Standards Institute ": B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ": C. ASPE, "American Society of Plumbing Engineers ". D. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". E. AWS, "American Welding Society". F. CEC, "California Energy Commission" (for California projects). G. CSA International, "Canadian Standards Association ", the approving agency for American Gas Association, AGA Standards. H. IAPMO, "International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ". I. IFGC, "International Fuel Gas Code ". J. IMC, "International Mechanical Code ". K. IPC, "International Plumbing Code ". L. MSS, "Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. ". M. NCPWB, "National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau". FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET N. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". O. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, "Building Materials Directory". `P. UMC, "Uniform Mechanical Code ". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: 1. Welding of piping joints to conform to ANSI B31.1, "Piping and Piping Systems ". 2. Welders to be certified by NCPWB or other reputable and recognized agency, using welding procedures set forth in ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications ". B. Quality Marking: Manufacturer's name or mark to be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, fixture, and device installed in piping systems. C. Piping System Tests: 1. Perform tests of piping systems as specified in individual sections of piping. Test piping before concealing. 2. Acceptance'of tests performed not to relieve Contractor from responsibility for property damage to building resulting from leaking or ruptured piping during guarantee period. Property damage to be promptly and properly repaired, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement to pertain only to piping, joints, connections, equipment, and workmanship represented by systems as finally accepted, and not to those extensions or revisions that may be made by Owner during guarantee period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR UTILITIES A. Exterior utilities will be installed under a separate contract to a point five feet outside building, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Verify location, material and invert elevation before proceeding with work and furnish fittings, offsets, and adapters necessary to make final connection to exterior utilities. Pipe materials specified in this Section apply to connections to exterior utilities. 2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM A. General: .1. Refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. B. Gas Piping and Fittings: 1. Above grade for gas pressures less than 2 psi: a. Inside Building, 2 -inch and larger; Outside Building, 2 -1/2 -inch and larger: ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless ", Schedule 40 black steel with ASTM A 105, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications ", standard weight butt weld fittings, where allowed by local codes. b. Inside Building, 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black steel with standard weight malleable iron threaded fittings, where allowed by local codes. c. Outside Building, 2 -inch and smaller: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 galvanized steel with standard weight malleable iron threaded fittings, where allowed by local codes. 2. Above grade for gas pressures 2 psi and greater: a. Inside and Outside Building, 1/2 -inch and larger: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black steel with ASTM A 105 standard weight butt weld fittings, where allowed by local codes. b. Outside Building, 2 -inch and smaller: ASTM.A 53 Schedule 40 galvanized steel with standard weight malleable iron threaded fittings, where allowed by local codes. C. Flexible Gas Connectors: 1. Furnish CSA International approved heavy -duty stainless steel gas connectors at equipment. Verify requirements of local codes. FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. Connectors to have an overall length not to exceed 36- inches. 3. Connectors to be sized to handle total demand of connected load. D. Gas Pressure Regulator: 1. Fumish gas pressure regulator where indicated on Drawings to reduce pressure from 5 psig to 14 -inch water column (11 -inch water column for L.P. gas). a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Maxitrol. 2) Fisher . 3) Schlumberger . E. Overpressure Protection Device, OPD: Furnish regulators with OPD attached and shipped as an assembled unit in accord with ANSI Z21.80a / CSA 6.22a, "Line Pressure Regulators ", standards for gas pressures greater than 2 psi to 5 psi. F. Automatic Shutoff Valve (for projects in California): 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Little Firefighter Gas Valves. b. (714)- 824 -0410. c. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc. d. (800)- 442 -7633. 2. Furnish UL and State of California (CA -OSA) certified earthquake actuated automatic shutoff valve with visual open -close indicator, manual reset, and preset tripping mechanism to shut off gas supply within 5 seconds when subjected to a horizontal sinusoidal oscillation with peak acceleration of 0.3G and a period of 0.4 seconds. 3. Furnish valve with inlet pressure and pressure drop as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 UNIONS A. Malleable Iron Unions: Malleable iron with ground joint brass to iron seat, ANSI B16.14, "Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads ", black or galvanized; Grinnell 463, Stockham 694. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Lines 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller: Universal insulating unions type 2000 series, style No. 3 and 4. 2. Lines 2 -inch and larger: Insulating flanges having one brass component and one steel component as manufactured by Service Engineers, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas. 2.4 VALVES A. Valves — Gas Service: 1. Lubricated Plug Valve: Sizes 1/2 -inch and larger, UL listed and CSA approved for natural gas or LP gas applications as indicated on Drawings. Cast iron body. Walls and end connections to conform to applicable ANSI B 16.1, "Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ", Class 125, designed for a minimum of 175 pound WOG. a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Homestead® Valve, a Division of Olson Technologies, Inc. 2) Resun ®, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 3) Milliken. 4) Key Port Valve ®, A Unit of SMG, Inc. 2. Ball Valve: Sizes 1/2 -inch through 4 -inch, UL listed and CSA approved for natural gas applications. Forged brass two piece body and end pieces, full port construction, with a rated working pressure of 600 psi CWP. a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Apoilo® " Valves, Conbraco Industries, Inc. 2) Milwaukee Valve Company. 3) Nibco ®, only 1/2 -inch through 2 -inch are UL listed and CSA International Certified. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Strainers: FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 3 11 11 11 11 s 11 7 1 it 11 11 11 11 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller. b. C.M. Bailey. c. Armstrong. 2. Y -pattern type, cast iron or semi -steel (bronze when installed on copper, brass or potable water pipe), pressure rated for intended service. 3. Furnish standard brass screen, gasketed machined flanged cap with threaded blowdown opening. Valve with hose connection for non - potable water. Valve with no hose connection for potable water. 4. Furnish screwed strainers for sizes 2 -inch and smaller and flanged for 2 -1/2 -inch and larger. Select for minimum effective straining ratio four to one. B. Welding Accessories: Weldolet ®, Thredolet ®, and Sockolet® branch connections, schedule 40- carbon steel, ASTM A105, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications ", as manufactured by Bonney Forge. C. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, black or galvanized; Schedule 40 PVC; or galvanized iron sheet metal riveted to form rigid cylinder. 2. Fabricate sleeves of new material, cut square and reamed. D. Escutcheons: Chrome plated, with raised edges to accommodate extended sleeves. 2.6 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 20 0050 for piping identification for systems specified in this Section. 2.7 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOP (FOR PROJECTS IN SEISMIC ZONES OR OTHER AREAS WHERE PIPING CROSSES BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS) A. Flexible expansion / seismic loops to be "Metraloop ®" as manufactured by The Metraflex Company, Chicago, IL. B. Flexible loops to consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and a 180 degree return, assembled in such a way that the piping does not change direction, but will maintain its course along a single axis. Loops to include a factory supplied center support nut located at bottom of 180 degree return and a drain/air release plug. C. Materials of construction and fitting type to be consistent with pipe material and equipment/pipe connection fittings. D. Connectors to be UL classified. E. Flexible loops attached to fuel gas lines, to be specifically manufactured for fuel gas applications and certified by CSA International. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 GAS PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete gas piping system as shown on Drawings in accord with NFPA 54 /ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code ", for natural gas; or NFPA 58, "Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code ", for LP gas if indicated on Drawings, and National and Local Code requirements. Work includes the following: 1. Low pressure natural gas service from gas meter or L.P. gas service from regulator to gas fired appliances as indicated on Drawings. 2. Medium pressure natural gas service from gas meter or L.P. gas service from regulator to gas fired appliances as indicated on Drawings. 3. Installation of low pressure gas service line from roof to gas fired equipment inside building. 4. Install UL listed / CSA approved lubricated plug valve as manual shut off valve for natural/L.P. gas piping main downstream of meter /regulator and branches where shown on Drawings. 5. Install UL listed / CSA approved ball valve as manual shut off valve for natural/L.P. gas piping at appliances, equipment, and where shown on Drawings. FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 6. Install steel sleeves as specified in Section 20 0050 for installation of gas service line where indicated and as required by governing code. 7. Gas piping arrangements to allow for movement in seismic zones (for projects located in seismic zones). 8. For projects in California, install automatic shutoff valve on building exterior after meter in accord with manufacturer's instructions. 9. For projects in seismic zones with 1.. P. gas provide seismic bracing for vertically rnounted L.P. tanks located against building exterior wall in accord with NFPA 58 requirements and local code. 10. Electrically isolate building distribution system from underground ferrous gas piping with a UL listed dielectric fitting installed a minimum of 6- inches above grade. 11. Apply an appropriate joint compound (pipe dope) sparingly and only to male threads of metallic joints. Compounds to be resistant to action of liquefied petroleum gas. 12. At a minimum, paint exposed threads at joints to prevent corrosion at threads. 13. Paint exposed black steel piping for corrosion protection if required by local code. Refer to Section 09 9100.° B. Flexible Gas Connectors: 1. Install connectors according to manufacturer's recommendation, using manufacturer - furnished fittings. 2. An accessible manual gas shut -off valve must be installed on gas supply immediately upstream of connector. 3. Install connectors as straight as possible, avoiding sharp bends and kinks. 4. Do not install gas connectors in locations where connector is concealed within or runs through a wall, floor, or other partition. C. Support gas piping on roof by wood blocking as described in Architectural documents. Metal brackets holding piping on wood blocks to be a minimum of one pipe size larger than pipe to allow for expansion/contraction of piping. D. For projects in Denver, Colorado, piping installed across roof surfaces to be elevated not less than 6- inches above the roof surface, securely supported at a maximum of 10 feet on center, and located where it will be protected from physical damage in accord with governing code requirements. E. For suspended piping indoors refer to Section 20 0050 for hangers, supports, and anchors. F. Bond fuel gas piping system to a grounding electrode in accord with NFPA 54 /ANSI Z223.1, NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code®, and National and Local Code requirements. Installation of bonding jumper by Division 26, refer to Section 26 0526. G. Flexible Expansion Loops ff rr• projects in seismic zones or other areas where piping crosses building expansion joints): 1. Install UL classified flexible expansion loop designed for seismic movement at pipe passing through or crossing building seismic joints. 2. Flexible loops to impart no thrust loads to system support anchors or building structure. 3. Locate loops at, or near, building seismic joint. 4. Install a vertical support hanger, located within 4 pipe diameters, on each side of the flexible loop. Brace each hanger transversely and longitudinally braced in accord with local codes. Seismic bracing not to pass through • building seismic joint and not to connect or tie together different sides or parts of building structure. 5. Flexible Loops: Capable of movement in plus or minus X, Y, and Z planes. 6. Install, inspect, and test flexible loop connection to piping in accord with current standards and goveming codes. 7. Attach flexible loops attached to fuel gas lines specifically manufactured for fuel gas applications and certified by CSA. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Contractor to test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Test as required by code and as specified herein Immediately repair or replace materials and workmanship found faulty and retest. 2. Perform tests in presence of governing authorities and Owner's Site Representative, OSR. 3. Submit certificates to OSR that tests have been satisfactorily completed. B. Gas Piping: FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 0 TARGET 1. Test pressure and test duration to be in accord with requirements of NFPA 54 for natural gas or NFPA 58 for L.P. gas as indicated on Drawings, or local code requirements if more stringent. 2. Leak Check Not Using a Meter: Perform leak check with a manometer or pressure gage in accord with Annex D•of NFPA 54, "Suggested Method of Checking for Leakage ". END OF SECTION FUEL PIPING 23 1100 (15410) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 3000 (15880) HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS 'INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN '1'O THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal ductwork. 2. Internal duct insulation. 3. Flexible ductwork. 4. Flexible duct connectors. 5. Ductwork accessories. 6. Air Volume control dampers. 7. Installation of Owner Furnished grilles, registers, and diffusers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. C. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: 1. Sealing of duct sleeves penetrating fire -rated partitions. 2. Hangers, Supports, and Anchors. 3. Submittals. D. Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation: Ductwork Insulation. E. Section 23 7400 - Mechanical HVAC Equipment (Owner - furnished information). F. Section 23 7500 — Rooftop HVAC Equipment (Supermarket): Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. G. Section 23 3700 - Air Handling. H. Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation: Owner - furnished information included for reference only. I. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Owner - furnished information included for reference only. Work will be by an independent air balance testing agency. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install air distribution system materials and construction in accord with ASHRAE, ASTM, NFPA, SMACNA, and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL standards as referenced. 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE®. B. ASTM International, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". C. NAIMA, "North American Insulation Manufacturers Association ". D. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". E. SMACNA, "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association ". F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, UL, `Building Materials Directory". G. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low— Emitting Materials, Adhesives and Sealants". HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK: SHEET METAL TARGET A. General: 1. Furnish indoor ductwork with G -60 galvanized coating. Furnish cadmium plated hardware, fasteners, and accessories. 2. Furnish turning vanes in 90 degree mitered elbows of supply ductwork. B. Rectangular Ductwork: 1. Galvanized sheet metal of minimum gages in accord with SMACNA Standards, unless otherwise indicated: a. Use 2 -inch water gage pressure class as basis of compliance with SMACNA Standards. C. Round Ductwork and Fittings: 1. Galvanized sheet metal, longitudinal welded seam or spiral lockseam round ductwork, of minimum gages in accord with SMACNA Standards, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate longitudinal seam duct using butt weld. Longitudinal locking seam ductwork is not acceptable. 2.2 INTERNAL DUCT INSULATION, DUCT LINER: TYPE B A. Mat faced glass fiber insulation having average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.25 btu - inch/hour- ft2 deg F at mean temperature of 75 deg F in accord with ASTM C 518, "Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus ", and 2.0 pcf minimum density as follows: 1. QuietR® AcoustiTEX Duct Liner or QuietR® AcousticR'"' Duct Liner: Manufactured by Owens Coming Insulating Systems, LLC. Bonded blanket of glass fibers with smooth, fire- resistant airstream surfaces to resist damage during installation and service, and designed to be installed inside sheet metal ductwork or plenums with metal fasteners and adhesives, in compliance with NFPA 90A - "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ", 90B - "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems ", ASTM C 1071 - "Standard Specification for fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material) ", Type I, Flexible, and other model building and energy codes. B. Furnish a non - flammable, UL Classified, water -based adhesive in compliance with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1: 1. Duro Dyne Corporation WIT resin emulsion white adhesive for bonding insulation material to sheet metal. 2. Duro Dyne Corporation WSA resin emulsion dark grey adhesive for bonding insulation material to metal. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK — SUPPLY AIR A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Model Number: 1. Flexmaster Type 5M. 2. Thermaflex Model M -KE. B. Factory made and suitable for low to medium pressure cooling and heating duct systems. Composed of a foil or mylar duct permanently bonded to a steel spring wire helix surrounded by a fiberglass insulating blanket and a metalized vapor barrier jacket. C. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ®, UL Standard No. 181, "Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors ", and in compliance with NFPA 90A and 90B for Class 1 air duct materials. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK — RETURN AIR (FOR USE ONLY ON PROJECTS HAVING RTU'S WITH ERV'S) A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Model Number: 1. Flexmaster Type NI -45. 2. Thermaflex Model S -TL. B. Factory made non- inslrlatedJlexible air duct designed fur application in all pressure cooling and heating duct systems. Composed of a coated or corrosive resistant galvanized spring steel wire helix permanently bonded to a coated fiberglass cloth fabric. Rated for operatingpressure of negative 1 -inch water column. C. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. �, UL Standard No. 181 and in compliance with NFPA 90A and 9OB for Class 1 air duct materials. HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2.5 AIR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Construct dampers and splitters in ducts with a locking arm outside of duct, set in same direction and plane of damper and working over a quadrant or regulator. Blades not to exceed 6- inches in width for ducts 24- inches and smaller, or 8- inches in width for larger ducts. B. Furnish 5/16 -inch diameter damper rods fitted with steel or nylon bearings on one end for dampers 14- inches and under. For rods 15- inches long and over, fit rods with steel or nylon bearings on each side of duct. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Fire resistive heavy glass fabric, double coated with neoprene, UL approved; "Ventglas ®" as manufactured by Ventfabrics for low pressure systems, or approved equal. B. Connector: Iron bands or angles. 2.7 DUCT SEALANT A. Sealants and Mastic: 1. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. United McGill AirSeal Corporation, United Duct Sealer Based), UL Classified indoor /outdoor duct sealer. VOC — 1.2 g/L. b. United McGill AirSeal Corporation, UNI- FLEX'' Duct Sealer, water -based UL Listed sealant for low -, medium -, and high - velocity duct systems. VOC — less than 1.0 g/L. c. United McGill AirSeal Corporation, UNI- MASTIC'' 181, water -based sealer that meets UL 181A, "Standard for Closure Systems for Use With Rigid Air Ducts ", and UL 181B, "Standard for Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors ", requirements for HVAC duct systems. VOC 12.2 g/L. d. Duro Dyne Corporation, SAS -UL, water based non - flammable UL Classified duct sealer for sealing joints in air handling systems. VOC — 47 g/L. e. Duro Dyne Corporation, DurosealTM duct closure mastic, water -based UL listed, fire resistive duct sealer for use in medium- and high - velocity duct systems, suitable for indoor and outdoor use. VOC 54 g/L. B. Sealing Tape: 1. Aluminum heat seal tape, 3 -inch wide, 2 mil thick. 2. Duct tape is not acceptable. 2.8 FABRIC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Approved Manufacturer: Frommelt Safety Products — High Throw Series "DuctSox ® ". Note: Purchase from manufacturer, not local representative, see contact and telephone number below. B. Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to NFPA -90A and UL 723, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". Constructed of clear, non - porous, Class A rated, 11 mil thick, polyethylene material weighing 5.5 oz/yd2. Polyethylene material to be tested and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL -723) to comply with NFPA -90A Flame Spread Index and Smoke Developed Index requirements (less than 25 and 50, respectively). C. Large tube shaped fabric ducts with strategically placed orifices formed in the material. Design of orifice size and location is furnished by the manufacturer. D. Furnish system complete with suspension cable, snap clips, attachment loops, and installation instructions. E. For purchase and information concerning costs, design issues, and installation questions contact: DuctSox Customer Service Group DuctSox, Corp. Ph: 866 - 382 -8769 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK (SHEET METAL) A. General: 1. Construct sheet metal ductwork in accord with the following: a. Latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" using minimum 2 -inch w.g. pressure classification for rectangular duct reinforcement. b. Current applicable state and local codes. 2. Install watertight ductwork where exposed to weather. 3. Make joints in sheet metal ductwork virtually air tight by sealing with duct sealants conforming to SMACNA Standards Class A sealing requirements. 4. Sealant not to be relied upon to seal damaged ductwork. Repair or replace damaged ductwork prior to installation. 5. Construct sides, including bottom and top of ducts and plenums, of sheet metal. Use no portion of building construction, such as walls, or slabs, as part of duct or plenum, unless specifically indicated on Drawings or otherwise specified. 6. Use additional bracing where necessary as directed by Owner's Site Representative, OSR, wherever in their opinion such additional bracing is required. Panels over 18- inches wide or deep to be crossbroken or beaded for strength. B. Rectangular Ductwork: 1. Fabricate rectangular ductwork joints as follows: a. Construct duct -to -duct transverse joints with standard slip fittings or use proprietary Ductmate® 25/35 Systems in accord with the latest edition of Ductmate® Industries, Inc. Construction Standards. Use Ductmate® accessories to insure integrity of installation. Ductmate® Industries, Inc., Telephone: 1- 800 - 245 -3188. b. Proprietary products to be tested in accord with SMACNA procedures. c. The Lockform er Company TDC® flange joint and Engel Industries, Inc. TDF® flange joint may be used, but construct as non - proprietary SMACNA T -25a (TDC) or T -25b (TDF) flange of which construction guidelines are given in figure 2 -1 of 2005 edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. No other duct construction pertaining to formed -on flanges will be accepted. Use Ductmate® Industries 440 butyl gasket between flanges. d. For longitudinal seams, use Pittsburgh lock seam. C. Round Ductwork and Fittings: 1. Use primarily in areas where ductwork is concealed. Use in exposed areas where called out on Drawings. 2. Fabricate longitudinal seam duct using butt weld. D. If indicated on Drawings for remodel projects, add ductwork to existing RTU(s) to accommodate installation of duct mounted smoke detector(s) by Division 28. Verify RTU(s) that require additional ductwork, and coordinate location, size, and length of ductwork required with Division 28. TARGET 3.2 INTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General: Install duct liner at ducts requiring thermal and acoustical insulation as specified herein. Ductwork shall be fabricated to accommodate the thickness of the duct liner. B. Internal Duct Insulation, Duct Liner: Indoor Type B: 1. Completely cover portions of duct designated to receive duct liner and adhere to sheet metal with 90 percent coverage of adhesive complying with ASTM C 916, "Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation ", and press insulation firmly in place in accord with manufacturer's recommendations as follows: a. Neatly butt transverse joints with no interruptions or gaps. b. Cut duct liner to assure overlapped and compressed longitudinal comer joints. For details, refer to NAIMA Publication AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard ". c. Install with black mat faced surface facing air stream. d. Secure duct liner using mechanical fasteners, either impact -driven or weld secured, which shall compress the duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations for maximum fastener spacing on top, bottom, and side surfaces of duct. HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) e. Coat butt edges of transverse joints with adhesive and press together. f. Coat, butter, raw exposed leading edges with adhesive to prevent delamination between insulation and mat facing. g. Use metal nosing on leading edges where duct liner is preceded by unlined metal. h. Use manufacturer's approved sealer or adhesive to coat minor surface damage and small tears. 2. Increase ductwork dimensions to accommodate thickness of duct liner. 3. Do not install duct lining within 6 -feet of outside air intake louvers and no closer to electric coils or gas heaters than indicated by equipment manufacturer. 4. After installation, and prior to occupancy, blow out duct system to remove any cutting scraps of foreign material remaining in the cut. 5. If multiple layers of insulation are required, the following steps must be taken: a. Adhere bottom layer of cut liner to duct in normal manner staggering joints with bottom layer in both directions. b. Adhere top layer to bottom layer of liner using a minimum of 90 percent adhesive coverage. c. Treat leading edges with metal nosings to prevent separation of the two layers. d. Use mechanical fasteners of proper length for double layer. 3.3 INTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK' Type INSULATION Type Thickness Rectangular Supply (and B 1" (1 -1/2 " for 2006 IECC) Return for Florida projects and projects governed by IMC): Insulate along entire length of duct run. Note if Type C is used (refer to Section 23 0700), also install Type B for first 10 feet from RTU's for sound attenuation. Rectangular Return: Insulate first 10 feet from RTU's. Insulation not required beyond 10 feet plus from RTU's. B 1" Rectangular Rigid Transfer Air Duct: Insulate along entire length of duct run. B 1" 3.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Install flexible duct according to the following: 1. Latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible ". 2. Current applicable state and local codes. B. Supply Air Flexible Ductwork: 1. Install flexible ductwork as vertical drop connections to supply air diffusers as shown in detail on Drawings. 2. Intended only for use at end of duct runs connecting to terminal devices. 3. Not to be used for main duct runs. 4. Maximum allowed installed length as shown in detail on Drawings. C. Return Air flexible Ductwork: 1. Intended for use only on projects with RTU's that have energy recovery ventilators, ERV',s. 2. Install connections between ER and return air grilles as shown on Drawings. 3. Hang from roof joists or rest on lay -in ceiling grid. Do not lay duct on top of light fixtures. 4. Do not transition from laying on ceiling grid vertically into return air grilles. Provide a sheet metal plenum on grille for horizontal attachment. HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) D. Seal flexible duct to male outlets with sealant. Securely fasten with strap clamp. 3.5 AIR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS TARGET A. Install manual volume dampers in each branch low pressure supply, return, and exhaust duct. Splitters or extractors may be used in lieu of manual volume dampers for small branches, where so indicated on Drawings. B. Install additional balancing dampers as required by the Owner's independent air balance and testing agency. 3.6 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS A. 'Install Owner Furnished diffusers according to manufacturer's recommendations. Secure diffuser core safety chain(s) to interior of supply ductwork. Placement of chains should not hinder the removal of diffuser core. Chains should not be visible from the sales floor. B. Install Owner Furnished grilles, registers, and diffusers with fitted gaskets, drawn tight to surface and securely fastened to eliminate gaps and dirt streaking. Rigidly fasten ducts behind grilles, registers, and diffusers, and add extra screws if necessary to draw grilles, registers, and diffusers tight to surface. 3.7 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS A. Refer to Section 20 0050. 3.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Install flexible connections not less than 6- inches wide, and with ample slack in the connections. B. Fasten connections using iron bands or angles pulled tight and bolted in place. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS A. Duct Sleeves: Coordinate location and size of openings for ductwork passing through walls, floors or partitions, with other appropriate trades. Seal around ducts penetrating fire rated partitions as required by UL and NFPA standards. B. Drip Pans: Coat inside surface of sheet metal drip pans watertight with mastic coating. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Air systems to be tested and balanced by Owner's independent air balance agency as specified in Section 23 0593. Contractor to make changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, including addition of dampers, required for correct balance as recommended by air balance agency, at no additional cost to Owner. B. Duct Leakage Rate: Not to exceed five percent of design cfm for each system in accord with SMACNA Standards. Reseal system in which excess leakage is determined by air balance agency. 3.11 FABRIC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Suspend cable from joists or Unistrut® suspended between joists (10' -0" spacing max.) with J- hooks. Support ends of cable with eye bolts and cable clamps and adjust cable tension with turnbuckles. Trim cables close to cable clamps and wrap cable ends with vinyl tape to prevent cutting or tearing of DuctSox® by cable strands. B. Suspend DuctSox® by inserting snap clips in metal grommets, located on seam, and hang on cable. C. Where DuctSox® attaches to sheetmetal, install metal hook attachments on fitting. Connect DuctSox® to ' sheetmetal fittings by pulling fabric loop around metal hooks and tighten sealing belt. D. Refer to manufacturer's installation details and instructions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000 (15880) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 3700 (15850) AIR HANDLING NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT. INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. , PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner Furnished packaged rooftop air conditioning equipment. 2. Transfer Fans. 3. Filters. 4. Gas pressure regulator for Owner Furnished desiccant dehumidification unit having indirect fired gas post heater. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning Procedures. E. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry; Wood curbs for rooftop equipment. F. Section 07 5419 - Membrane Roofing System. G. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof curb counter flashing. H. Section 09 9100 - Painting: Field painting of mechanical equipment and piping. I. Section 20 0050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Submittals. J. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. K. Section 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation. L. Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation: Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. M. Section 23 1100 - Fuel Piping. N. Section 23 3000 - HVAC Air Distribution. O. Section 23 7400 - Mechanical HVAC Equipment: Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. P. Section 23 7500 — Rooftop HVAC Equipment (Supermarket): Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. Q. Section 23 9000 — Start-up HVAC. R. Division 26 - General electrical work for mechanical installations. S. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment: Installation of line voltage thermostats. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AMCA International, "Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. ": B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute. ": AIR HANDLING 23 3700 (15850) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. ANSI Z223.1, NFPA 54: National Fuel Gas Code. C. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ": D. CSA International, "Canadian Standards Association ", the approving agency for American Gas Association, AGA, Standards. E. NFPA, `National Fire Protection Association." F. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low — Emitting Materials, Adhesives and Sealants ". 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic Requirements (for stores located in IBC seismic categories "D" and "E'): 1. Adapt prototypical support, hanger, and anchor designs called out in these Documents to meet specific site seismic requirements for project. These may include but are not limited to the following: a. Additional bracing and fasteners. b. Restraint cabling. c. Providing seismic design drawings, certifications and calculations as required by local authority having jurisdiction. B. Hurricane Requirements (for stores located in Hurricane zones): 1. Adapt prototypical support, hanger, and anchor designs called out in these Documents to meet specific site hurricane requirements for project. These may include but are not limited to additional bracing and fasteners. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment roof supports with General Contractor. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes ". B. Fan Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, "Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data ", tested to AMCA 300, "Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices ". C. Fan Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99, "Standards Handbook ". PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Transfer Fans:: 1. Acme. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Greenheck. 4. PennBarry. 2.2 TRANSFER FANS A. Fans: As scheduled on Drawings. B. Fan Housing: Square design constructed of heavy duty gage galvanized steel. Unit to have square duct mounting collars. Fan construction to include removable access panels of sufficient size to allow easy access to internal components. C. Fan wheel: Centrifugal backward inclined and to be statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motor and Drive: Mounted out of airstream and to be readily accessible for servicing. E. Furnish factory mounted disconnect on unit. F. Furnish neoprene hanging isolator kit. AIR HANDLING 23 3700 (15850) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) G. Where fan is controlled by thermostat, Owner to furnish line voltage thermostats as specified in Section 23 0900. Installation of thermostats is specified in Division 26. 2.3 FILTERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AirGuard.• 2. Camfil Farr. 3. Filtration Group (Aerostar). 4. Purolator (FACET). 5. Tri-dim. 13. Filters: Meet requirements of ASHRAE 52.1 -1992 and ASHRAE 52.2 -1999 Test Standards. C. Fumish 2 -inch, medium efficiency, 30 -35 percent approximate results for Dust Spot Efficiency in accord with ASHRAE Standard 52.1 -1992, "Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air- Cleaning Devices used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter, ANSI approved ", MERV 8, in accord with ASHRAE Standard 52.2 -1999, "Method of Testing General Ventilation Air- Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size (ANSI approved) ", pleated non -woven cotton/synthetic filter media of not less than 4.3 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING A. Condensate Drain Piping: 1. Type "M" hard drawn copper. 2. Schedule 40 CPVC, PVC, or ABS will be allowed, within building and on roof, where accepted by local codes. For warm climate locations use only copper piping on roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRANSFER FANS A. Install transfer fans in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Suspend from structure using threaded rod and attach to vibration isolator kit. 3.2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Install rooftop air conditioning equipment and curbs scheduled on Drawings. 2. Install rooftop units according to manufacturer's recommendations, Construction Documents, and applicable codes. Meet installation schedule established by Owner's Site Representative, OSR. a. Rig unit for lifting in accord with manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Use spreader bars to prevent rigging cables from damaging units when lifting and setting units in place. 3. Protect units in accord with Section 01 6000. 4. Install structural roof curbs on structural members as detailed on Structural Drawings. 5. Secure RTU hold -down brackets to curb prior to setting RTU on curb. Refer to details on Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Hold -down brackets and self - tapping screws are furnished with curbs. 6. Place sealing gasket, fumished with curbs, around entire perimeter of curb and between curb sections as shown on Drawing detail and as follows: a. Install gasketing with no gaps between gasket pieces. b. Install gasketing after hold -down brackets are installed and prior to setting RTU in place. 7. Install deep seal trap fumished by RTU manufacturer on unit cooling coil drain. 8. Within one week of setting Rooftop Units, tag and submit a Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet for each independent refrigerant circuit of each unit. Submit Forms to Target. Refer to Section 24 0553. 9. If rooftop unit condensate is piped, pipe condensate drains from rooftop units as shown on Drawings. If copper piping is used, solder joints using similar method as for domestic water piping specified in Section 22 1000. Paint copper piping in accord with Section 09 9100. 10. Install gas pressure regulator furnished by rooftop unit manufacturer and shipped loose with unit as follows: AIR HANDLING 23 3700 (15850) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. Install downturn vent on regulator to prevent moisture from entering regulator housing. b. Install pressure regulator and gas piping to avoid conflict with access panel door swing at RTU.. 11. Install power exhaust components furnished by rooftop unit manufacturer where components are shipped loose with unit. 12. If RTU's are used for construction heat and ventilation, follow rooftop unit start-up procedures. Refer to Section 01 5000, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, for air filtering procedures, and use filters as specified in Part 2 of this Section when replacing filters. 13. Refer to Section 23 0900 for Owner Furnished controls. B. Start-Up: Refer to Section 23 9000. 3.3 OWNER FURNISHED DESICCANT DEHUMIDIFCATION UNIT A. Provide gas pressure regulator in accord with Section 23 1100, Fuel Piping, for Owner Furnished desiccant dehumidification unit having indirect fired gas post heater. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Air systems to be tested and balanced by Owner's independent air balance agency. Changes in pulleys and belts required for correct balance as recommended by air balance agency to be done by air balance agency in accord with Section 23 0593. END OF SECTION AIR HANDLING 23 3700 (15850) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 7400 (15780) MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT A PART OF DIVISION 23. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND WORK. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 7400 (15780) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 7400 (15780) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 7500 (15853) ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT (SUPERMARKET) (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOTA PART OF DIVISION 23. IT COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND WORK. END OF SECTION ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT (SUPERMARKET) (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 7500 (15853) - 1 1 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT (SUPERMARKET) (OWNER FURNISHED) 23 7500 (15853) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 23 9000 START -UP HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Start-up of Owner Furnished rooftop air conditioning equipment. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 B. Section 01 9100 C. Section 23 0593 reference only. D. Section 23 0900 3.1 3.2 3.3 E. F. - References. - Commissioning Procedures. - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Owner Furnished, information included for - Controls and Instrumentation: Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. Section 23 3700 —Air Handling. Section 23 7500 — Rooftop HVAC Equipment (Supermarket): Owner Furnished, information included for reference only. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION DESICCANT DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT A. Start-up by unit manufacturer. PACKAGED UNITARY HVAC RTU WITH HEAT WHEEL A. Start-up by unit manufacturer. ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT(S) START -UP (IF RTU(S) SCHEDULED ON DRAWINGS) A. Start-Up: Refer to and complete "UNIT START -UP CHECKLIST" included at end of this Specification Section for each RTU. 1. Correct unit deficiencies that are not part of unit warranty as follows: a. Fit, align, and adjust access doors on RTU(s) to open and close properly, and to ensure that door seal gaskets seal properly. b. Repair dents'and scratches: Repaint scratches with paint matching RTU cabinet exterior color. Refer to Section 09 9100. c. Paint unfinished exposed metal components. Refer to Section 09 9100. d. Replace missing screws from RTU cabinet housings. e. Replace broken and missing door handles and latches. f. Adjust mis- aligned exhaust ports. Comb out bent coil fins in condensing and evaporator sections. g. h. Clean condensing coil section. 2. Coordinate with unit manufacturer to correct deficiencies that are part of manufacturer's warranty. 3. Furnish completed checklist to OSR upon successful start-up of units. B. HVAC contractor shall be present during start-up and commissioning activities for RTU(s). END OF SECTION START -UP HVAC 23 9000 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET UNIT START -UP CHECKLIST (If RTU(s) Scheduled on Drawings) Use this checklist for HVAC unit(s). Complete one checklist sheet for each unit. Fill in blanks with "N /A" for items that do not apply. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for specific equipment start-up information. Unit No.: Serial No.: Technician: I. PRE- START -UP: Model No.: Date: Inspect cabinet and doors for damage, misalignment, or poor seals. Inspect seal between RTU and roof curb for complete water tight seal. Remove shipping materials from unit. Remove temporary fasteners from intake and exhaust openings. Inspect factory installed and field installed electrical wiring for loose connections. Check voltage at unit disconnect. Voltage must be within range listed on unit nameplate. Inspect blower belt alignment. Adjust pulleys as necessary for proper belt alignment. Verify belt is properly tensioned. Verify that condensate piping is properly connected to drain pan outlet. Verify gas pressure at unit is within specified range. Check gas piping for leaks. Verify air filters are clean and installed correctly. Verify installation of all inlet hoods, inlet screens, and accessories. Verify installation of remote supply duct mounted DAT sensor on single zone variable air volume rooftop HVAC units. Li. START -UP: [ ] Check voltage and amp draw. Verify amp draw does not exceed maximum rated load amps listed on unit nameplate. [ ] Observe blower rotation. Blower rotation must match rotation markings on unit. [ ] Check refrig. suction & discharge pressures. Pressures should be within range indicated in manufacturer's literature. [ ] Use the Lennox Integrated Modular Control (IMC) Board to test the following control sequences: [ ] Cooling Mode [ ] Heating Mode [ ] Humiditrol Reheat [ ] Economizer Complete the following information: Electrical Supply Voltage: L1 — L2 L2 - L3 L3 — L1 Compressor Amps: Compressor 1 L1 L2 L3 Compressor 2 L1 L2 L3 Compressor 3 L1 L2 L3 Compressor 4 L1 L2 L3 Supply Fan Amps Electric Heat Amps Temperatures Outside Air deg F DB, deg F WB Return Air deg F DB, deg F WB Full cooling mode supply air deg F DB Full heating mode supply air Pressures Gas Inlet inches w.c. Refrigeration Suction (PSIG): Circuit A , Circuit B Refrigeration Discharge (PSIG): Circuit A • , Circuit B , Circuit C , Circuit C deg F DB , Circuit D Circuit D START -UP HVAC 23 9000- 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0110 (15600) BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Section covers work and responsibilities associated with installation of Owner furnished refrigeration equipment. It is only to be awarded to a Target pre - qualified refrigeration contractor. 2. Full extent of refrigeration work is indicated by Drawings, Schedules, this Section, and those Sections listed as related items to this Section. 3. In general, description of work and responsibilities of refrigeration contract includes, but is not limited to, installation, start-up, and commissioning of refrigeration systems and display cases, evaporator coils, condensers or condenser /compressor units, and interconnecting refrigerant piping, condensate drains, and field installed refrigeration controls. 4. In addition it includes minor items necessary to the installation which may not specifically be mentioned in Contract Documents. Such items include, but are not limited to, screws, shims, anchors, escutcheons, brackets, pipe sleeves, sealants, flux, glue, and changes due to unforeseen obstructions. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. Section 01 4200 - References. C. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. D. Section 01.7700 — Closeout Procedures. E. Section 01 9100 — Commissioning Procedures. F. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. G. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements. H. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. I. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. J. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. K. Section 24 0830 — Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report — For stores without a RTCR. L. Section 24 0833 — Refrigeration Pre - Start-up /Start-Up Report. — For stores with a RTCR M. Section 24 0835 — Rooftop Compressor Rack Validation Report. — For stores with a RTCR N. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. O. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. P. Section 24 3623 - Installation of Walk -in Cooler and Freezer Boxes. Q. Section 24 3823 — Installation of Grocery Display Cases. R. Section 24 6212 - Installation of Condenser /Compressor Units. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0110 (15600) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET S. Section 24 6312 — Installation of Air Cooled Condensers. T. Section 24 6332 — Installation of Evaporative Condensers. — For high ambient design locations. U. Section 24 7312 — Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. V. Section 24 9000 — Start-up (Refrigeration) W. Division 26 — Electrical. X. Section 31 2310 - Earthwork/Building Area. Y. Job Site Rules and Regulations — English and Spanish Z. •Kysor Walk -In Instlalation Manual AA. Refrigerant Containing Asset Tag Instructions BB. Refrigeration Details and Best Practices for 2009/2010 MR -RS Projects CC. Remodel Master Checklist for MR and RS Project Only DD. Roof Protection Rules to Post — English and Spanish EE. Target Remodel Consistency Manual FF. Target Remodel Consistency Manual . 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 11 4125 — Walk -in Coolers and Freezers — Stock Room. B. Section 24 6213 — Condenser /Compressor Units. C. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. D. Section 24 0935 — Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. E. Section 24 7313 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refrigeration Contractor - Contractor with specific skill, knowledge, equipment, and manpower to competently and completely install a complete and working supermarket refrigeration system as described in these documents and accepted industry standards. B. Owner - Target Corporation, 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403. C. OSR — Owner's Site Representative. D. RTCR — Roof Top Compressor Rack 1.5 REFERENCES A. ARI, "Air - conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". C. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency ", Title VI, Clean Air Act. D. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ". E. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". F. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". G. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ® Building Materials Directory." 1.6 DRAWINGS AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. These Contract Documents are supplied and owned by Target Corporation. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 240110(15600) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Drawings accompanying Specifications are diagrammatic in nature and due to small scale, it is not possible to indicate each individual pipe, offset, fitting, and accessory required. They indicate sizing for refrigerant piping mains and overall piping routings in space allotted. C. Carefully examine Drawings and Specifications, becoming thoroughly acquainted with available information and installation requirements. Then, as required, complete refrigerant piping design and adapt work to jobsite conditions at no additional cost to Target Corporation. D. Refrigerant charge shown in Refrigeration Schedule is a calculated estimate. Actual required charge for proper operation may vary due to site conditions. Contractor required to provide complete and proper charge for year round system operation. • 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Refrigeration submittals to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group must be marked with store reference number and shall be sent to the following: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 50 S. 10th St. Suite 400, TP3 100 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 C. In general, fax submittals and follow -up with mailed hard copy. (Submittals which are electronic in nature may be e- mailed as directed with no follow -up.) 1. Minimum of two weeks prior to handling of refrigerants on Target's behalf, ensure that technician refrigeration certification information is recorded, current, and accurate on Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool. hftps://www.eam.verisae.com/DataNett/refrigerant/login.html 2. Submit to Target Refrigerant Tracking (refrigerant.tracking @target.com) the following documents: a. A completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet, including data for new refrigerant containing equipment installed as part of project. (Refer to Section 24 0553). b. A completed Service Refrigerant Data Spreadsheet for all equipment when refrigerant is added to or removed from a refrigerant containing appliance, unit or system as part of a warranty repair. Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracking @target.com. c. Prior to Turnover day and manufacturers' (Case or Compressor Rack) field service engineers arriving on site for operational reviews, submit the completed Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report Form. (Note: If this form, properly completed, is not received as instructed the General Contractor is responsible for costs associated with a second trip by that manufacturer's, (Compressor Rack or Case) field service engineer which is attributed to incomplete work.) D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Prior to Grand Opening, furnish a complete set of As Built Drawings to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group as listed in 1.7B. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect materials or Owner furnished equipment. Materials which are found to be damaged, defective or unsuitable for intended service shall not be accepted. Report any Owner Furnished Equipment found to be damaged or otherwise unacceptable, immediately to General Contractor and OSR. B. Refrigeration contractor shall furnish a suitable means of securing and protecting all tools, materials, and equipment associated with refrigeration installation, during construction period. C. MSDS sheets for all materials, compounds, and chemicals will be maintained on site by the contractor. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0110 (15600) - 3 11 11 1 11 11 11 B MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.9 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION A. Sequence, schedule, and coordinate all refrigeration installation and start-up activities so as to allow the over all project to be constructed in an orderly manner. B. Send a representative to weekly project meetings as required by General Contractor or OSR. Attend as directed regardless of whether or not contractor has a crew on site. C. Purchase materials and arrange deliveries in a timely manner so not to delay project. This may include taking early deliveries and off site storage of items which might be in short supply. D. Contractor to provide their own on -site storage container as required. Coordinate with General Contractor for location and availability of on site storage space. E. Notify, coordinate, and correspond with all legal authorities having jurisdiction for required inspections of the refrigeration system and piping during the installation process. F. Coordinate with refrigeration energy management system (REMS) integrator check -out activities minimum of 10 days prior to required check -out call. G. Coordinate and confirm system start- up dates with compressor rack manufacturer for Compressor Racks Performance Assessment activities minimum of 15 days prior to required site visit. H. For high ambient design locations, coordinate and confirm evaporative cooled condenser system start-up dates with equipment vendor for water treatment system performance assessment a minimum of 15 days prior to required site visit. I. Coordinate and confirm dates with commissioning agent to review completed installation minimum of 15 days prior to requested site visit. J. Coordinate with the General Contractor and other subcontractors the placement of refrigeration, electrical, mechanical , plumbing and fire sprinkler systems to fit in the available clear space. 1.10 REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Obtain required permits and licenses for installation of refrigeration systems, piping, and equipment prior to start of project. B. Assign a competent project foreman with a minimum of five years experience installing supermarket refrigeration systems. It shall be responsibility of that person to supervise daily activities associated with installation work; serve as field contact representative and review installation documents for discrepancies. This foreman shall not be changed during project without permission from Target OSR, unless there is a termination of employment. C. Assign a project manager for each specific project. Contractor shall determine if appointed project manager can service multiple Target projects. D. Project manager and lead refrigeration installer for each project shall attend a three day Target Refrigeration Training program in Minneapolis, MN prior to project mobilization. E. Contractor is required to develop and implement an approved Target Refrigeration Training Program for contractor's project managers and foreman assigned to each project. F. Contractor is required to use Target's contract administration system (Prolog Manger, Prolog Web) for contracts, pay applications, potential change orders, change orders, contract documents and requests for information (RFI). G. Contractor is required to appoint a Target Program Manager for the Target account. Program Manager is responsible for dissemination of all Program and project specific information to Contractor personnel. H. Successful installation of grocery refrigeration systems is a complex process involving many trades, skill sets, and activities. This must be done fully and correctly. Refrigeration scope of work includes accomplishing the following: 1. Receiving, unloading, and setting grocery cases in their proper locations straight and level. (Note: This can include both refrigerated and non - refrigerated cases along with case wedges and cap displays supplied by case manufacturers, Refer to Refrigeration Drawings). It is refrigeration contractor's responsibility to ensure that glass doors are aligned plumb and level to prevent saw - toothing of doors. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0110 (15600) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. Securing, bolting, buckling, sealing, and trimming out cases free of blemishes. 3. Installation of case condensate drains independently routed, concealed under cases, properly sloped and trapped, in direction of flow to their designated hub drains or floor sinks. 4. Installation of underground refrigeration chase network, clean and tight to protect under ground refrigerant piping. 5. Setting air - cooled or evaporative condensers in their proper locations, level and anchoring them to building structure. 6. Installation of Evaporative Condenser water treatment system and controls. Passivation of evaporative condenser tube bundles and housings prior to start-up of refrigeration systems. 7. Setting condensing units in their proper locations level and anchoring them to building structure. 8. Setting condensing units and rooftop refrigeration racks in their proper locations, level and anchoring them to building structure. 9. Receive, unload, and erect walk -in cooler and freezer boxes. 10. Hang evaporator coils level and tight to ceiling. Route condensate drains tight to walls properly trapped and slope in direction of flow to a hub drain or floor sink. 11. Installation of refrigerant detection systems in walk -in coolers and freezers. 12. Installation of walk -in box liquid control valves. 13. Installation of walk -in cooler and freezer thermostats, door switches, and alarm systems. 14. Installation of interconnecting refrigeration piping between cases, condensers evaporator coils and racks; clean and free from leaks with proper slopes, traps, and sizes. 15. Installation of refrigeration piping insulation as specified. 16. Seal and restore vapor barriers for penetrations into walk -in boxes and cases. (Including electrical, alarm, communication, and sprinklers). 17. Verify freezer floor thermal break locations are properly installed and located prior to walk -in installation. 18. Correctly label and tag refrigeration system equipment and piping as specified. 19. Removing and properly disposing of shipping materials, crating, skids, and other construction debris associated with refrigeration system installation. 20. Submit required regulatory forms in a timely manner, carefully and completely filled out. I. Contractor will install and maintain six (6) Target provided self - contained reach -in coolers and six (6) Target provided self - contained freezers as temporary sales floor merchandiser's. At the completion of the construction, contactor will remove temporary merchandisers and prepare for shipment to Target determined location. J. Contractor will provide all equipment (lifts, cranes, helicopters) required for the unloading and installation of this scope of work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Refrigeration contractor warrants to Target Corporation that all material, equipment, refrigeration components, accessories and workmanship provided by the Refrigeration Contractor are free from defect and conform to Target specifications and project specific construction documents. Refrigeration contractor will immediately repair, replace or rework any portion of the installation found to have defect or found not to conform to Target specifications or to be in non - conformance with project specific construction documents. Rework and necessary repairs shall be completed at no charge to Target. Warranty period begins with refrigeration contractor mobilization and ends at 11:59 PM on Target designated Grand Opening date. B. Warranty includes all required service, repair, adjustment and maintenance of contractor provided materials, equipment, refrigeration components, accessories and workmanship covered by this contract as well as all required service, repair, adjustment and maintenance of Target provided equipment, refrigeration components, accessories and material installed under this contract for the length of the warranty period. C. Warranty includes labor, parts, consumables, travel, fuel, system inspection and diagnosis, refrigerant and reclaim services. D. During warranty period refrigeration service, maintenance, and repair work shall be in accord with Section 24 0120. E. Coordinate with equipment vendor to obtain reimbursement for labor, parts, consumables, travel expenses, refrigerant replacement and materials required for repairs to equipment , components and accessories supplied by the equipment vendor as outlined in Section 24 0130. BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0110 (15600) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET F. Target Corporation shall not be responsible for additional cost associated with repair, replacement or maintenance of equipment during warranty period. G. Within ten working days after Target designated Grand Opening date, installing contractor shall coordinate and accompany a Target appointed representative or servicing contractor on a handover walk through inspection of applicable refrigeration equipment and systems installed under this contract. Installing contractor will complete all required service determined by this walk through within 10 working days of walk through. H. Owner reserves the right to make temporary or permanent repairs necessary to protect life or property and to return the system to normal operating condition without voiding installation contractor warranty. I. All work is subject to quality approval of Target and Target's Authorized Agents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PRE - START -UP A. See Section 24 9000. 3.3 START -UP • A. See Section 24 9000. 3.4 STORE TURNOVER DAY A. Coordinate and execute the REMS checkout call with REMS Integrator as soon as final system adjustments are completed. B. Finish work and furnish Target with complete and operating refrigeration systems on Store Turnover Day. C. It is understood that temperatures and valves may need to be adjusted, and control strategies modified as cases are loaded with product and conditions within store environment change. 3.5 OPENING DAYS A. Have mechanic on job site from 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. during both "soft" and "grand" opening days. 3.6 PROJECT CLOSE OUT A. Refer to Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures. B. Include "walk through" and general system and alarm training to designated store personnel prior to store opening. END OF SECTION BASIC COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION REQUIREMENTS 240110(15600) -6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0120 (15602) REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: TIIIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON TIIE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLU.DED.IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to both non - warranty and warranty service requests and describes administrative and execution activities as well as parts and materials supplied by authorized servicing contractors engaged in refrigeration service, repair, and maintenance work as directed by Target Corporation through its work order process. B. Activities, supplies, and responsiveness levels described within this Section are minimum levels of performance expectations. Services described in this Section shall be responsibility of contractor including but not limited to, labor, testing materials, parts, travel time, parking fees, permit fees, and equipment necessary to fulfill these contractual obligations. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 8113 — Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). B. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. C. Section 24 0553 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. D. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. E. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. F. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following Standards, Codes, and Regulations shall apply to both overall Service Agreement and any specific work orders issued as part of this agreement: 1. ARI 700, 1993 "Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard for Refrigerant Purity". 2. ASHRAE 15, Latest Edition "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". 3. ASHRAE 34, Latest Edition "Designation and Safety Classifications of Refrigerants ". 4. ASME B -31.5, "Refrigeration Piping ". 5. ASME: "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII ". 6. ATSM, "American Society for Testing and Materials, (various standards) ". 7. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency regulations as applied to Handling and Recycling Refrigerants, Section 608; and Stratospheric Ozone Protection, Title 5 ". 8. IMC, As adopted by local jurisdiction having authority, "International Mechanical Code ". 9. NFPA 70, Latest Edition "National Electrical Code ", (NEC). 10. NSF — 7, "National Sanitation Foundation Standard for Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers ". 11. OSHA, "Occupational Safety & Health Administration regulations as applicable and appropriate for the work being performed." 12. UL, "Underwriters Laboratory standards as applied to electrical devices and wiring; and Standard 207, for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories ". 13. UMC, (As adopted by local jurisdiction having authority), "Uniform Mechanical Code ". REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1, "Low - Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. FMOC: Target, Facilities Management Operations Center. B. LOD: Lead On Duty. C. LOS: Level of Services. D. Maximo: Computer software package Target utilizes for asset management and work order application. E. NNTE: New or revised not to exceed price. F. NTE: Not to exceed price. G. STL: Store Team Lead. H. Equipment: Defined as physical part of refrigeration system of building or facility, both interior and exterior, including, without limiting the foregoing, the following: 1. Condenser /compressor units. 2. Evaporator coil units. 3. Refrigerated display cases. 4. Parallel compressor racks. 5. Condensing units. I. Compressor Racks and Condenser /Compressor Units: Includes compressors, piping, valves, filter, driers, wiring, controls, flex connections, isolation devices, insulation, clamps and hangers, fans, motors, lamps, switches, alarm horns, relays, contactors, and mechanical and electrical safety devices. J. Compressors: Includes mechanical and electrical operational and safety devices, isolation devices and adjoining piping. K. Condenser: Includes control devices, coils, housings, fan motors and blades, screens, piping, water towers, and adjoining piping. L. Evaporator Coils: Includes control devices, coils, housing, drain pans and adjoining piping. M. Refrigerated Display Cases: Includes coils, cabinets, housings, covers, drain pans, condensate piping, evaporator fans, fan kits, air diffusers and grilles , temperature sensors, electronic controls devices, power and control wiring, piping, valves, metering devices, case lighting systems, glass doors, door hardware, defrost and anti -sweat heaters and case trim. Where applicable these also include produce misting systems and floral case hydroponics systems. N. Walk -in Coolers, Freezers, and Prep Rooms: Includes evaporator coils, housings, drain pans, drain lines, temperature sensors, electronic controls devices, power and control wiring, piping, refrigerant detection systems, alarm system devices, valves, metering devices, piping, fan motors, defrost heaters, low temperature insulated doors, medium temperature insulated doors, double action cooler doors, door hardware, thermometers, and insulated panel systems. O. Electrical Controls: Includes control devices and wiring, contactors, relays, fuses, solenoids, and safety devices. P. Temperature and On /Off Controls: Includes devices and wiring, thermostats, Refrigeration Energy Management Systems (REMS), controls, devices and modules, and temperature sensors. Q. Remote Control Panels: Includes lamps, switches, alarm horns, and relays. R. Exhaust/Make up/Transfer Fans: Includes motors, dampers, grilles, and electrical controls. S. Reclaim Coils: Includes piping, valves, metering devices, insulation, hangers, and clamps. T. Ice Machines: Includes compressors, wiring, controls, fans, motors, lamps, switches, controls, drains, relays, contactors, cabinet parts, storage bins, and mechanical and electrical safety devices. U. In -Store Refrigeration Alarm/Monitoring Systems: Includes all panels, relays, circuit boards, switches, alarm devices, pilot lights, power and signal wiring, and sensors. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 240120(15602) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.5 WORK ORDERS A. Target will define scope of work for each individual request of services through issuance of a work order. Contractor is not to proceed with execution of any procurement of parts and materials or engineering and field activities until they have received a mutually agreed upon work - order. B. Target will issue work orders via e-mail or facsimile machine. Consider these copies same as originals. C. Scope of work described in a work order shall cover maintenance, repair, installation and other services related to mechanical and electrical equipment as defined in Article 1.4. It may not necessarily identify labor; materials, replacement parts, consumable supplies, and equipment required to complete work. D. Only perform work pursuant to a written work order received. E. Each work order shall be issued with a pre - determined maximum value or NTE. If additional repairs are required that exceed the original NTE and work can be completed within the LOS, contractor shall obtain authorization from Target prior to proceeding. F. If at any point in the execution of a work order, it is discovered that additional scope needs to be added to a work order, Contractor shall notify Target immediately and submit and alternative proposal, (Reference article 1.6 of this section). Contractor shall not proceed with work toward additional scope items until work orders can be revised or re- issued. G. Commencement of work under a work order constitutes contractor's acknowledgement that work order and Drawings, Specifications, and other documents relating thereto are sufficient for completion of work described in work order. H. Target may cancel, re -issue or amend work orders as necessary. Target may also cancel a work order in whole or part without cause, in which case Target's liability shall be limited to cost of that portion of work order fully and properly performed to the satisfaction of Target prior to cancellation. 1.6 PROPOSALS A. A proposal is required and must be submitted for occurrence when projected cost of services exceeds individual work order or required scope of services needs to be expanded beyond that identified on original work order. B. Complete proposals and submit on Target Proposal Form provided by Refrigeration Operations or Target Contract Services Procurement. Attach additional pages if more space is needed to ensure sufficient level of detail. C. Proposal approval will be communicated by one of the following methods: 1. Verbal: If immediate approval is required to resolve an emergency situation, contact FMOC, 1- 888 - 888 -0304, verbally and if requested immediately follow -up request with a FAX or electronic copy. Written proposals must be received within 1 business day. 2. FAX or Electronic: If approval is required in the next 24-48 hours, submit your proposal via facsimile machine or electronic copy. E -mail: refrigeration .proposals @,Target.com, Fax: (775) 908 -1535. 3. Electronic: If repairs are not pressing (such as planned maintenance in nature or proposed replacement) submit proposals by E -mail. Proposals must be received within 2 business days. D. Proposals shall reflect labor rates, material mark -ups and trip charge per Contractor's executed Service Agreement. 1.7 COMMUNICATIONS AND SERVICE TICKETS A. Store Management Communications: 1. Service technicians must check in with store management, defined as Store Team Leader (STL) or Lead on Duty (LOD), at Guest Services Desk, upon entering and leaving store or job site daily. B. Building Services Operation Center Communications: 1. FMOC is staffed, 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week, by technicians and supervisors to assist stores and contractors in resolving Refrigeration and Refrigeration Energy Management System (REMS) problems. 2. FMOC is Target's authorized agency to issue work orders /purchases orders, authorizations, approvals, and proposals. 3. Utilize phone numbers listed on work orders /purchases orders for verbal and FAX communication with FMOC. 4. Upon completion of a work order /purchase order call 1- 888 - 888 -0304 and follow closing prompts to close work order. This must be done as soon as work order is completed. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS • 24 0120 (15602) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. Refrigeration Service Tickets: 1. A service ticket form must be completed and distributed for each individual work order. This applies to warranty and non - warranty work. (Note: Only one service ticket is required per work order). 2. Service ticket must contain the following information on the form prior to obtaining store management authorization and signature: a. Work Order Number. b. Store Number. c. Description of Work: 1) Summarize description of work performed by Unit number. d. Refrigerant Activity: 1) Indicate refrigerant activity that took place at store. e. Labor Hours Utilized. 1) Dates of service performed. 2) Hours of service performed. 3) Labor Type: Category of service performed. f. Materials and Sub - Contractors Utilized: 1) Unit number. 2) Description and make. 3) Part number and quantities. 4) Taxable or Non - taxable Items. (Note: Cost extensions do not have to be completed prior to obtaining store authorization, but must be completed prior to billing.) 3. Record service technician notes and comments on Refrigeration service tickets. Service technicians are not to utilize, maintain or record operating conditions in un- official note books left in unsupervised locations around a store, including PUCs or Mechanical and Electrical Rooms. 4. Target reserves the right to request copies of service tickets for work performed at our stores. 1.8 INVOICING PROCEDURES A. Invoice Target within 30 days for work performed.; Billing shall include the following: 1. Single invoice for each work order. 2. Invoicing must include the following information: a. Target work order number. b. Target purchase order number. c. Target site identification number, (Store Number). d. Refrigerant tracking authorization number corresponding to each service ticket listing installation or reclaim of refrigerant as part of work scope. 3. Lien waivers for work orders in excess of $5000. (Note: The only acceptable condition is pending "Receipt of payment from Target Corporation ") 4. Invoices shall reflect labor rates, material mark -up and trip charge per Contractor's executed Service Agreement. B. Target will have not obligation to pay Contractor for invoices that are submitted to Target more than 90 days after the Contractor has completed the services described on the invoice. 1.9 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Employees: 1. Utilize qualified skilled technicians and installers to assigned projects and service calls. 2. Technicians and installers shall exhibit the following: a. Training in safe usage of tools utilized to complete work assignments. b. Knowledge of applicable safety programs in place for protection of affected parties, contractor employees, Target employees, and Target's guests. These programs many originate from either contractor or Target. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) c. Technical skills necessary to service, install, and work around Target's refrigerant containing appliances and systems. d. Abide by proper conduct, protocols, and work rules set forth by Target Corporation to govern activities in Target's facilities. e. Abide by proper business practices and processes necessary to conduct business with Target Corporation. 3. Furnish employees with a company photo identification card or badge, which must be presented when registering in facilities visitor log. 4. Supervision and operationally support contractor's employees while they are working in Target facilities. 5. Target reserves the right to restrict contractor employees from working in Target facilities when deemed appropriate. B. Licenses and Permits: 1. When applicable, obtain necessary installation permits and arrange inspections associated with work assignments. 2. Maintain necessary applicable business and contracting licenses for each location assigned. C. Refrigerant Management: 1. All refrigerant containing assets, regardless of circuit capacity and type of refrigerant are managed in accordance with the following. Authorized servicing contractors working on Target owned equipment which contains a refrigerant shall comply with Target's Corporate refrigerant management practices as described in Part 3 of this Section and fulfill their responsibilities as identified in Target's Corporate Refrigerant Management Plan as summarized as follows: a. Maintain on file in Target's refrigerant tracking database the following information: 1) Company Name. 2) Mailing address. 3) Telephone number. 4) E -mail address. 5) Primary contact person. 6) A Scope of Service Listing, (Site's Serviced, Type of Equipment Serviced). 7) A list of qualified Service Technicians. 8) A validated PDF or JPG copy of Refrigerant Handling Certificates for each qualified Service Technician listed. b. Access Contractor data section of Target's Refrigerant Tracking Web -site and update company data on file: 1) Contractor's company name. 2) Mailing address. 3) Telephone number. 4) E -mail address. 5) Primary contact person. c. Input updates to lists of qualified service technicians to Target's refrigerant tracking database. Updates must be accompanied by copies of their respective certificates. d. Update technician files at a minimum of 48 hrs prior to dispatching technician to a Target facility. e. Only utilize technicians whose names and refrigerant handling certificates are on file in Target's data base to dispense refrigerant to Target owned equipment. (Note: Target will not pay invoices which include adding or reclaiming refrigerant done by or with a non - roster reclaim machine or employee.) f. Target's Refrigerant Tracking Vendor shall validate and update contractor files or notify contractors of certificate non - compliance within 24 hours of receiving documents. 2. Authorized servicing contractors shall be responsible for reporting changes, additions, or reclaims to refrigerant charge quantity of Target owned piece of refrigerant containing equipment. D. Response Times: 1. Maintain a 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week monitored telephone line. 2. Maintain a fax machine or electronic mail site capable of receiving work orders 24 hrs per day, 7 days per week. 3. In cases of emergency service requests, contractor's responding technician shall contact FMOC operations at 888 - 888 -0304 and confirm dispatch within 30 minutes of the original telephoned request for service. a. Qualified service technician shall be at store within 2 hours of original telephone request for service. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 5 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET (Note: Target will recognize and allow for extenuating circumstances such as but not limited to weather and traffic if notified appropriately and promptly.) 4. If contractor can not respond to a request for emergency service due to extenuating circumstances, they must notify FMOC operations at 888 - 888 -0304 within 30 minutes of original telephoned request for service so that an alternate service provider can be pursued. 1.10 SERVICE RATES A. Reference Service Rate Agreement to determine pre - established pricing for labor rates, material mark -ups, and trips charge. 1.11 SUB - CONTRACTORS A. Sub - contractors must be approved in advance by Target Refrigeration Operations Department. B. Sub - contractor must agree to and abide by all terms and conditions of Target Corporation Building Services Refrigeration Maintenance /Service Scope of Work and this Specification Section. C. Primary contractor will be responsible for notifications, invoices and communications with sub - contractor. 1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planned Maintenance: 1. Planned Maintenance Work Orders: a. Target will issue a work order approximately thirty days prior to requesting a planned maintenance inspection to be completed. Frequency of inspections may vary. Actual quantity will be established by work orders. b. NTE amount on work order is for total store's inspection, not for an individual unit. If additional maintenance or repairs are required above NTE amount, submit a proposal describing additional services required, Refer to Article 1.6. c. Actual time spent performing planned maintenance procedures on individual units may vary based on size age and other factors. Actual cost of total inspection shall be NTE of the work order. d. If a planned maintenance inspection can not be completed within thirty days allowed, FMOC must be notified. 2. Planned Maintenance Survey and Inspection: a. Scope of inspections will be determined by a planned maintenance checklist. Refer to accompanying checklist sections or service levels identified on planned maintenance work order. b. Planned maintenance checklists are intended to be guidelines and should not take precedent over seasonal conditions, which are required to prevent damage to Target's equipment. c. Planned maintenance forms are available electronically in and must be completed and submitted electronically to Target Refrigeration Operations Department at Refrigeration .Operations @Target.com d. Additional work or parts required after a Planned Maintenance Survey shall be submitted in accordance with Target proposal process. Refer to Article 1.6. e. Anticipated Planned Maintenance Schedule: 1) Super Target: Two PM's per year. 2) Mini -Racks and Rooftop Compressor Racks: Two PM's (complete survey), 2 times per year. 3) Single Condensing Units: One PM (complete survey), once per year. B. Emergency Service: 1. Emergency service work conditions shall apply when issued work order identifies conditions as such and issuance is immediately followed up with telephone contact. C. System Modifications: 1. System modification shall be performed when a work order is issued directing a specific refrigeration system adjustment or modification with limited scope of service or requesting a proposal for such work. 2. Timing and scheduling for system modification type work order shall be coordinated on a case by case basis. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supply parts, materials, and equipment which meet the following general requirements: REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 240120(15602) -6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Electrically operated devices and electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL. 2. Certified brazers for assignments that require install or repairs for refrigeration piping, joints, or specialties. 3. Refrigeration valves and specialty devices shall be compliant with UL Standard 207 or the ASME pressure vessel code as appropriate. 4. Sealants, finishes, and materials utilized of repairs or installations, which could be considered to come into contact with food products, shall comply with NSF -7. B. Utilize and submit to Target a documented quality assurance process which is capable of the following: 1. Verification of qualification for technicians and installers. 2. Verification of quality standards and appropriateness for parts, materials, and equipment actually installed. 3. Verification that corrective actions taken were appropriate for the conditions. 4. Service tickets that accurately and with appropriate level of detail reflect work performed. C. Target reserves the right to audit contractor quality assurance programs without prior notice. 1.14 WARRANTIES A. Servicing contractor shall include full warranty coverage for work performed in response to a work order. This warranty shall extend for a period of 30 days from date of acceptance of by Target as signed off on service ticket and cover misdiagnosis of issues, workmanship, and defective parts or materials. B. Full warranty coverage for purposes of this agreement means that contractors are responsible for cost of all equipment or system damages related to defects in their misdiagnosis of issues, workmanship, or defective parts and materials. Examples include but are not limited to the following: 1. Loss of refrigerant and oil charges. 2. Damage to electrical and controls devices. 3. Contamination of components and systems. 4. Cosmetic damages to display cabinets, store fixtures, and store finishes. C. Contractor shall pass on to Target manufacturers' parts and materials warrantees which extend beyond 30 days and shall be responsible to administer those warrantees. These activities can include but are not limited to the following: 1. Ordering and obtaining replacement parts and materials. 2. Return of defective parts and materials. 3. Required administrative functions such as logistics and scheduling coordination, and all documentation of conditions and circumstances. D. Contractor shall respond to requests for correction of warranty issues in a manner appropriate to the scenario. 1. Within 24 hours for issues which will not directly impact store operations. 2. Within 2 hours for conditions considered emergency. 3. At soonest possible opportunity which can be coordinated with store operations in cases where store operations will be impacted. E. If servicing contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required repairs during warranty period, Target Corporation shall have the right to have repairs performed by another contractor. In this event, original servicing contractor shall pay Target Corporation all associated costs in repair of equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES A. Furnish fasteners, anchors, hangers, and supports as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet requirements of Section 24 0529, "Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors ". B. Furnish piping insulation materials as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet the requirements of Section 24 0719, "Commercial Refrigeration Insulation ". C. Furnish pipe, fittings and brazing materials as required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work as requested by a work order, which meet the requirements of Section 24 2315, "Commercial Refrigeration Piping ". REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET. 2.2 COMPONENTS, REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES, PARTS, AND CONTROLS A. Replacement compressors: New or fully remanufactured by an approved re- builder of the original manufacturer. B. Replacement Parts: New with same standard ratings, functional capabilities, and require no additional system modifications. In general furnish parts by same manufacturer unless otherwise directed by Target. C. Target recognizes that during emergency service circumstances used parts, parts by less desirable manufacturers, and minor system modifications may be required to return systems to operation. In these instances repairs are viewed as temporary and FMOC must be notified at 888 - 888 -0304 to coordinate follow up activities. 2.3 ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES A. Furnish equipment and material listed by UL or ETL. B. Thermoplastic - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5, UL 83, ANSI/ASTM B3. C. Rubber - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3, UL 44, ANSI/ASTM B3. 2.4 REFRIGERATION ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Refrigeration Energy Management System (REMS) controls devices and replacement parts shall be manufactured by Computer Process Controls (CPC) of Kennesaw, GA. B. Target's approved REMS integrator is Energy Management Consultants (EMC): 1550 LaFollette Street Fennimore, WI 53809 Phone: 608 - 822 -3550 Fax: 608 - 822 -3847 Contact: Kevin Kenney or Pete Adam C. Furnish as necessary, exact replacement parts, Refer to Section 24 0933, "Refrigeration Compressor Rack Controls" and Section 24 0935, "Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls" for an approved listing of components. 2.5 CALKING AND SEALANTS A. Furnish appropriate calking and sealants required to complete maintenance and service scopes of work, as requested by a work order, by the following: 1. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Butyl Rubber Sealant — one component multipurpose calk intended for stable joints, temperature range minus 20 deg F to 150 deg F. Bostik, Chem -Calk® 300 or equal. VOC — 240 g/L. b. SLNT -4 - Sanitary clear silicone rubber sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Dow Corning® 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant or equal. VOC — 33 g/L. c. "Versi- Foam ®" by RHH Foam Systems, Inc. VOC — Og/L. d. "Permagum" by Virginia KMP Corp.. VOC — 0 g/L.' 2.6 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS A. Furnish refrigerants as required of type indicated on equipment name tag and certified to meet ARI 700 standard (latest edition), for chemical purity. Deliver refrigerants in original containers. B. Furnish refrigeration oil as required from an unopened container of type listed in equipment installation records. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify refrigerant and oil types for each system serviced. Clean up of contaminated refrigeration systems due to technician error shall be at contractor's expense. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.2 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Maintenance, repair, and cleaning work which could impact refrigerant containing components of an appliance or refrigeration system must comply with the following: 1. Technician performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. 2. Contractor shall access Target's Refrigerant Tracking website whenever refrigerant is added or removed from a refrigerant containing device. 3. Perform work which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliances or system in a manner that complies with EPA requirements governing refrigerants 4. Equipment manufacturers' written troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures are to be followed. 5. Only . manufacturers' approved replacement parts, cleaning solutions, and other compounds are to be utilized in maintenance and repair procedures. 6. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process. Refrigerant shall be transferred to an approved and contractor owned reclaim cylinder. If appropriate, install a dry nitrogen holding charge prior to removing piece of equipment from the building. B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping, components, or control devices as required to eliminate leaks. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install all replacement parts in accord with manufacturer's documented instructions. B. Compressor Replacement: Include installation of a new contactor, liquid line drier /filters, oil filters and suction filters, and perform an oil test. Note oil test results on service ticket. In addition, include installation of refrigeration system isolation devices on each side of compressor if not already installed on existing system. C. Refer to the following Sections as applicable for installation requirements related to refrigeration hangers, supports, fasteners, insulation, and piping: 1. Section 24 0529, "Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors." 2. Section 24 0719, "Commercial Refrigeration Insulation." 3. Section 24 2315, "Commercial Refrigeration Piping." 3.4 REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT PROCESSES A. Refrigerant and Oil Handling: 1. Refrigerant is not to be brought on site or stored on site in operating Target store without an accompanying refrigerant handling certified technician, and no unused or reclaimed refrigerant is to remain on site after that technician leaves site. 2. Comply with federal, state, and local laws and regulations governing handling and use of regulated refrigerants and oil. Obligations include, but not limited to, the following: a. Pay costs associated with disposal of refrigerant that cannot be reclaimed due to mixing of refrigerants or improper handling. b. Size recovery/recycling equipment to system tonnage being serviced to minimize billable labor expenses. c. Include name, address, and phone number of refrigerant and oil purchasing vendors and refrigerant distillation vendors that contractor will utilize in conjunction with service performed by this Contract. Contractor must notify Target, within 24 hours, of modifications to these vendors. d. Do not leave used refrigerant overnight at store. e. On -site transfer of same type refrigerant between systems is acceptable except in cases of known system contamination. Validate refrigerant types and test for contamination prior to transfer of refrigerant. f. Limit recovery effort to refrigerant isolated between refrigeration system isolation devices. B. Refrigerant Reporting: 1. Authorized servicing contractors shall access contractor reporting service records section of Target's refrigerant tracking website, within 24 business hours of completing the work, and input the following information for refrigerant usage events: a. System asset barcode for piece of equipment serviced. b. Quantity and type of refrigerant added. REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 9 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET c. Quantity and type of refrigerant reclaimed. d. A clearly defined description of reason for adding refrigerant. e. A precise description for location of leak. f. Date equipment was serviced. g. Statement regarding status of leak repairs. h. Description of where the leak was located. i. Detailed description of leak repair verification method. j. Description of what caused the leak k. Description of how leak was repaired. 1. Name of technician of record. 2. Upon successful completion of a refrigerant usage service record, a refrigerant usage event number will be provided. Keep record of this number for your reference. 3. For stores with assets not available on Target's refrigerant tracking website, authorized servicing contractors shall utilize the non - tagged refrigeration system in the system asset barcode selection. 4. Target reserves the right to audit authorized servicing contractors' refrigerant inventory records and billings as they pertain to Target for compliance with Target's Corporate Refrigerant Management Plan. 5. Authorized servicing contractors shall assist Target as requested in periodic audits of Target's refrigerant tracking website. Activities could include, but are not limited to, submitting report documents, measuring responses, and participating in process verification exercises. 6. All refrigerant containing assets are covered under this Section, regardless of capacity of circuit or type of refrigerant gases used. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repairs which require opening of a refrigerant circuit, or some portion there of shall, be pressure tested and properly evacuated when practical. Refer to Section 24 2315. B. For instances where formal pressure testing and evacuation processes as described in Section 24 2315 are not possible, effectiveness for repairs shall be verified by 2 different methods with a minimum of 24 hours of equipment operation between tests. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Verify proper adjustment of all valves and control devices which are associated to refrigeration system or circuit worked on. B. Verify proper rotation or alignment of all rotating devices which could have been impacted by work performed. C. Include labor and supplies necessary to clean and restore areas affected technician's work to Target's standards. D. Remove and properly dispose of replaced parts, equipment, packaging materials and other items brought to site by service technician. E. Properly reassemble all equipment cabinets and guards. If necessary replace missing fasteners and weather seals. Report damage to equipment cabinets or guards which require follow up attention to FMOC at 1- 888 - 888 -0304. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent store fixtures and building finishes from damage during course of work activities. B. Include required safety equipment and barriers necessary to protect contractor's employees, Target team members, and Target guests. END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 24 0120 (15602) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) . SECTION 24 0130 (15603) REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section describes required vendor administrative activities and responsibilities along with related internal Target Design, Procurement and Construction Processes which impact supply of Owner Furnished refrigeration equipment. These activities, responsibilities, and processes include, but are not limited to, administrative requirements, engineering support services, scheduling, project proposals, purchase orders, Target change processes, communication protocols, product documentation requirements, and equipment modification change management processes. B. This Section applies to Owner Furnished equipment sections as listed in the Related Items Article of this Section. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 11 4125 — Walk -in Coolers and Freezers — Stock Room (Owner Furnished). B. Section 24 0150 - Refrigeration Equipment Recovery. C. Section 24 7313 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. D. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. E. Section 24 6213 - Condenser /Compressor Units (Owner Furnished). F. Section 24 6312 — Installation of Air Cooler Condensers. G. Section 24 6313 - Air Cooled Condensers. H. Section 24 6332 — Installation of Evaporative Condensers I. Section 24 6333 - Evaporative Condensers. J. Section 24 0935 — Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Prolog Web: A secure web -based SQL database tool, which Target uses to share and manage Construction Documents. B. CHANGE Manager: Web based software tool used by Target to initiate, communicate and manage building, equipment, or fixture changes during design and construction phases of projects. Change requests are issued in one of three formats as follows: 1. "D" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating an Architectural or Engineering design change affecting multiple projects. "D" CHANGES identify impacted design disciplines, describe change scope, contain necessary supporting attachments, (drawings, sketches, cut sheets, and specification modifications), and are typically distributed to store design teams for project specific adaptation. Vendors should not receive or react to "D" CHANGES. 2. "A" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating an Architectural or Engineering change to a specific project. "A" CHANGES identify impacted construction trades and equipment suppliers, describe the change scope, contain necessary supporting attachments, (drawings, sketches, cut sheets and specification modifications), and are issued to the field. Vendors should receive "A" CHANGE documentation from project General Contractors. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. "S" CHANGE - An electronic document communicating a store fixture or building change, which is issued by Store Planning. An "S" CHANGE may or may not require an "A" CHANGE for implementation. Vendors will receive "S" CHANGE information from Procurement. Vendors must confirm whether or not an "S" CHANGE or "A" CHANGE will be implemented on a project -by- project basis with each General Contractor or refrigeration contractor before proceeding. C. Original issue Construction Documents are posted on Prolog Web. However, changes to such documents are not posted on Prolog Web. Vendors must obtain "A" CHANGE documentation from project General Contractors. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Target identifies projects by store number, and schedules projects by cycle. For new stores the grand opening date defines the cycle. Stores will fall into March, July, or October cycle. For example, stores that will open in March of 2009 are identified as a March 09 projects. Likewise, a store opening in July of 2009 is identified as a Jqly 09 cycle store. B. Remodel projects are also identified by cycle. Projects that will be considered substantially complete in March of 2009 will be designated as Cycle 1/09. C. Special projects and retrofit timelines will be communicated as applicable. D. Vendors shall manage their equipment delivery dates to accommodate Target's project schedules for each cycle of their sourcing agreement. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Communication of Target documents including Purchase Orders and Change Orders shall take place through e -mail, phone, or fax. Vendors are required to have systems in place to support each. B. Vendors shall be responsible to download project specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. C. Vendors shall include as part their scope of services the following communications infrastructure and activities: 1. Assign one individual as primary administrative contact person for duration of program, and include name, address, phone numbers, and e-mail address for named individual. 2. Complete Target training session outlining use of Prolog Web, Prolog Manager, and CHANGE Manager as requested by Target. 3. Maintain proper computers and software to completely communicate with Prolog Web, Prolog Manager, and CHANGE Manager. 4. Download drawings and information using Adobe Acrobat and Micro - station software programs. 5. Properly manage procurement and delivery of required parts, components, and pieces for vendor furnished equipment. 1.6 ENGINEERING SUPPORT SERVICES A. Assign an engineering contact, to furnish technical support for program and include name, address, phone numbers, and e-mail address for named individual. Responsibilities shall include development and support of design documents, tracking changes, and rapid response to questions from Target personnel. (Target requires direct access to this individual with an intermediary.) 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Assemble, organize, and submit manufacturers' required submittals as requested in applicable Specifications Sections which cover furnished refrigeration equipment and forward to General Contractors, refrigeration contractors, and Target. Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 50 S. 10th St. Suite 400, TP3 1005 Minneapolis, MN 55403 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 B. Record Documents: 1. At end of each construction cycle, Vendor shall assemble, organize, and submit manufacturers' required record documents as requested in applicable Specifications Sections for furnished refrigeration equipment and forward to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group. Record copies of documents described above, for each type of refrigeration equipment furnished during the cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, hard copies are not acceptable). 1.8 WARRANTY A. Vendor shall administer and serve as primary point of contact for warranty issues of equipment supplied under their purchase agreement. Coordinate directly with repairing contractor of record for delivery of material, reimbursement of expenses, and providing technical support as necessary. B. Defective Materials and Workmanship: Refrigeration equipment vendor warranties shall cover against defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one year from date of Owner's acceptance (Grand Opening) or as specifically directed, refer to Section 24 7313 and as applicable 24 6213. 1. Parts — Vendor responsible to supply or reimburse repairing contractor for required replacement parts from delivery date to one year after Grand Opening date. 2. Labor — Refrigeration vendor responsible to reimburse repairing contractor for required labor due to defective parts or workmanship from delivery date to Grand Opening Date. 3. Refrigerant — Refrigeration vendor responsible to reimburse repairing contractor for lost refrigerant due to defective parts or workmanship from delivery to Grand Opening date. C. Design, Application or Component Recalls: Refrigeration equipment vendor shall cover all parts and labor costs associated with repair and replacement of components or equipment required due to vendor design errors /omissions, application errors or component recalls. D. Refrigeration equipment warranties for remodel, retro -fits, and right- sizing projects shall start up on Target's documented acceptance of installation. E. Warranty period for factory assembled refri2eration compressor racks shall commence upon sign off of approved start -up checklist with comntents or corrective action plans, by OSR and Refrigeration Contractor, (Refer to Section 24 6423 and as applicable 24 6312 or 24 6333.) F. Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding manufacturer's warranty or relieving manufacturer of responsibilities during warranty period. G. Warranty shall not apply to injuries or damages occurring after Owner acceptance due to "Act of God ", fire, violence, abuse, or carelessness of separate contractors or agents of Owner. 1.9 DESIGN DOCUMENTS A. Designs and applications covered by referenced purchase agreements shall not be changed or modified without written agreement between both parties. B. Furnish Target Engineering with design documents showing piping, electrical schematics, and component specifications as listed in appropriate Specification Section. C. Furnish cut sheets showing footprint and end view or section view for each piece of equipment. Example: Vendor shall furnish a drawing showing footprint of a condenser /compressor unit, and a drawing showing layout of components within unit. A section view of individual components is not required. D. Vendor furnished design documents shall be signed and submitted to Target Engineering. Target Engineering shall sign the submittal and return to vendor to signify agreement on design. E. Target shall assign a fixture number or an equipment number to each piece of equipment. Requirements to be met prior to creation of fixture number include definition of attributes such as: 1. Weight. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Physical dimensions. 3. Electrical requirements. 4. Mechanical requirements. 5. Refrigeration requirements. 6. Refrigerant requirements. 7. Model number. 1.10 VENDOR PRODUCT CHANGES A. Vendor shall not substitute, revise, change, or otherwise modify an agreed upon piece of equipment or process without written agreement from Target. B. Vendor shall review proposed changes with Target Engineering, and Target Procurement to determine appropriateness of change and cost of change. C. Component changes - alternates as listed in appropriate Specification Section may be furnished by vendor at their option. D. Submit UL/NSF and similar listings- documentation to Target Engineering showing that UL/NSF or similar ratings have been maintained throughout change. E. Mid -cycle changes to design shall not be allowed without written permission from Target. 1.11 TARGET DRIVEN CHANGES A. During construction, design and equipment requirement may change due to a variety of reasons. B. Change requests are communicated to design teams and to field through "D" CHANGE, "S" CHANGE and "A" CHANGE documents. C. Store Design Team has authority to implement or deny a change request. D. Change requests are issued by Target to General Contractor. General Contractor is to distribute change requests to installation contractors. E. Vendors will also receive copies of "S "CHANGES from Procurement. It is vendor's responsibility to verify implementation of "S" CHANGE with Contractor. F. Vendor may also receive notification of required and approved changes from GC/ Installation Contractor. G. Furnish Target Procurement with a revised quotation within 5 days of confirming the change with the field. H. Furnish Contractor and Procurement with revised ship /delivery date within one week of receiving change request. I. Make every effort to accommodate changes without affecting requested delivery date. J. In general, change will occur in accord with schedule outlined in Target Change Windows documentation. K. Installation contractor shall coordinate all changes with equipment vendor. L. Changes that impact equipment more than 21 days prior to shipment shall cause shipment to hold for re -work or redistribution. M. For changes received less than 21 days before previously agreed upon and scheduled ship date, vendor should contact Target Procurement and Target Engineering to discuss ramifications of change and agree upon a:plan of action. N. Changes that involve transferring or changing equipment after equipment delivery shall be managed by Vendor. This includes arranging shipment of replacement equipment, and managing redeployment of existing equipment, refer to Section 24 0150. O. Transfer of leftover, used, or incorrect equipment shall be managed by Target Asset Recovery, refer to Section 24 0150. , REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.12 PARTS MANUALS A. Furnish electronic parts manuals to Target Refrigeration Engineering. 1.13 DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. For new construction and remodel projects Target shall post prototypical drawings, equipment schedules and designs on Prolog Web for each cycle of stores. Special projects and retrofit projects are not available via Prolog Web. Documents for these projects will be forwarded via email, fax, or mail. B. Project Engineer shall post store specific Construction Documents for each new and remodel project on Prolog Web. C. Download store specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. D. Compare prototypical drawings to store specific drawings. Vendor shall also determine if required equipment is within scope of purchasing agreement equipment design. E. Before building or shipping equipment, compare store specific equipment needs with Recovered Asset list on Target Asset Recovery website. Use equipment from asset recovery list before building new equipment. F. Documents that are revised by "A ", "D ", or "S" CHANGES are not posted to Prolog Web. CHANGES are communicated through change process outlined in Article 1.11. G. If discrepancy exists, vendor shall contact Project Engineer. Vendor shall also contact Target Procurement if situation will affect requested delivery date. 1.14 PROPOSALS A. Review construction documents and develop a written quotation to price equipment covered in their purchase agreement. B. Proposal shall be sent via email to assigned Procurement Sourcing Specialist. 1.15 PURCHASE ORDERS A. Target shall issue a purchase order for equipment after receipt of proposal unless pricing or design discrepancies are identified and communicated to vendor. 1.16 COORDINATION ACTIVITIES A. Contact General Contractor /Installing Contractor to schedule preliminary ship /delivery date. Vendor shall obtain date in writing from contractor. B. Confirm delivery dates with General Contractor /Installing Contractor for equipment 10 days prior to shipment. C. Requested changes in delivery dates shall be confirmed via email or FAX. D. Confirm equipment requirements and sizing with General Contractor /Installing Contractor. E. Vendor shall keep copies of written correspondence. F. Vendor shall immediately notify Target Procurement of an event that may cause a delay in shipment. 1.17 DELIVERY SCHEDULE A. Coordinate delivery of equipment with General Contractor/Installation Contractor. B. Equipment vendor shall furnish Target Engineering and Target Procurement with an electronic copy of an updated equipment delivery schedule each Friday during active shipping period. Schedule shall be in Microsoft Excel. Show fields as listed below: 1. Store Number. 2. Construction Cycle. 3. Address. 4. City. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 5. State. 6. Delivery Date. 7. Field Contact Person. 8. Site phone number. 9. Field Contact Date. 10. Written confirmation from field received. 11. Written confirmation of ship date sent. 12. Target purchase order number. 13. Factory Order Number. 14. Equipment Revision Number. 15. Notes to document any changes. 16. Drawing date. 17. Change Numbers. 18. Fixture or equipment numbers of all equipment. 19. Model and serial numbers of equipment. 20. Model and serial numbers of refrigeration compressors if applicable. 1.18 CONSTRUCTION CYCLE CLOSE -OUT PROCESS A. At end of each construction cycle vendor shall submit the following to Target: 1. Store Number. 2. Construction Cycle. 3. Address. 4. City. 5. State. 6. Delivery Date. 7. Field Contact Person. 8. Site phone number. 9. Field Contact Date. 10. Written confirmation from field received. 11. Written confirmation of ship date sent. 12. Target purchase order number. 13. Factory Order Number. 14. Equipment Revision Number. 15. Notes to document any changes. 16. Drawing date. 17. Change Numbers. 18. Fixture or equipment numbers of equipment. 19. Model and serial numbers of equipment. 20. Model and serial numbers of refrigeration compressors if applicable. 21. Bill of Materials numbers. 22. PDF copies of final bills of material related to individual projects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT VENDOR COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS 24 0130 (15603) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION- (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0150 (15601) REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to new or used refrigeration equipment or parts which Target identifies suitable for re -use or transfer to another location. B. This Section also includes guidelines and direction for demolition and disposal of Target owned refrigeration equipment as identified in scope of work for a Remodel, Retrofit, Right- Sizing, or Special Project. C. Items eligible to be managed through this process include: 1. Walk in cooler/ freezer box evaporator coils. 2. Condenser /compressor units. 3. Air cooled condensers. 4. Evaporative condensers. 5. Refrigeration compressor racks. 6. Refrigerated display cases, either self - contained or remote condenser. 7. Computer Process Controls (CPC) brand refrigeration controls and accessories. D. Equipment types or parts not specifically called out above are not covered by this Section. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 — References. B. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning, operating instructions and maintenance manuals, and other project closeout requirements. C. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. E. Section 24 0553 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute." B. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®" 1.4 CONTACT INFORMATION A. Target Asset Recovery: asset.recovery(target.com B. Target Refrigeration Engineering. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Minimum of two weeks prior to handling of refrigerants on Target's behalf, ensure that technician refrigeration certification information is recorded, current and accurate on Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool. https://www.eam.verisae.com/DataNett/refrigerant/login.htnal REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 24 0150 (15601) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. A completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet, with data for each piece of refrigerant containing equipment which is transferred or removed from site. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigeration contractors are responsible for the Quality Assurance of their refrigerant handling practices, reclaim equipment, and shall employ skilled craftsmen. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. B. Reclaim refrigerant in accord with EPA requirements and ARI standards.' 1.7 DEMOLITION WORK INCLUDED 1. Perform demolition, removal, and restoration to complete refrigeration work under the Contract. Relocate or reuse existing materials and equipment as directed in Contract Documents. Salvage components and equipment the Owner wishes to save. Dispose of other materials and debris as directed in this Section. 2. Drawings generally show extent of demolition, removal and relocation, but they cannot show all work, or all conditions and details, that will affect progress of work. 3. Lists of items to be salvaged should be considered complete but lists of items to be disposed of should be considered general in nature and many not necessarily list every item out individually. 4. Examine project site to determine existing conditions, become familiar with project requirements before bidding work. 5. General Requirements: a. Complete work using workers licensed to handle refrigerants and skilled in required trades, if necessary, sublet work to appropriate subcontractors. b. Restore material in every respect, including removal of visual defects in exposed finishes in a manner approved by project Architect, utilizing appropriate specialists as necessary to repair and replace utilities, building elements, finishes and decor. c. Coordinate and schedule work with Owner to avoid any disturbance or disruption of Owner's operations. d. Perform work that will affect Owner's operations at times acceptable to Owner, if necessary, do work in stages to avoid disruption. e. Since final schedule must be worked out between Owner and Contractor, assume for sake of the bidding that this coordination can be done without overtime work. f. Coordinate work with other trades prior to commencing demolition. g. When work affects structure, use extreme care to protect structure and its occupants. h. Take particular care when working near occupied areas, employ or subcontract competent qualified structural engineers and construction specialists to develop appropriate and responsible techniques for doing work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Contractors, transfer agents, and freight companies are responsible for protection and preservation of refrigerant charge during their handling, shipping, storage, and delivery of refrigerant containing equipment. Isolate refrigerant charge in a protected part of refrigeration circuit; protect exposed refrigerant containing parts with a crating: 1. Secure accessories, covers, and trim for shipment. 2. Move equipment to location for easy pick up by a freight company. Relocate from roof or sales floor and place in back room of store near loading dock. 3. Note missing parts, pieces, or damage and send information to Target Refrigeration Engineering. 4. Shrink wrap equipment. 5. Set and band equipment on pallet. 6. Remove shelves from refrigerated cases and palletize and shrink wrap. B. Transfer Agent or Freight Company shall coordinate special handling or rigging requirements with OSR or General Contractor, minimum three weeks prior to delivery. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 240150(15601) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVABLE COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A. Salvable refrigeration components and equipment to be reused in Work: 1. Remove salvable components or equipment to be reused or relocated and move them to new location. If new location is not ready to receive these materials, store and protect them from damage until new location is ready. 2. Remove, clean and preserve components or equipment that are to be reused, or are needed to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removing these items to avoid damaging them or making them unsuitable for reuse. Replace damaged parts as directed, for reuse with equivalent, matching materials. Power wash cases that are to be re -use to prevent bacterial or moisture damage to the units during storage. B. Salvable components or equipment to be stored by Owner: 1. Owner will identify existing refrigeration components and equipment to keep. Carefully remove these items and protect from damage. Store in an area designated by Owner. 2. Cleaning or restoration of Owner's salvaged components and equipment are not part of this Contract, relocate salvable items to an Owner designated area of project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Technicians performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. Refer to Section 24 0120 for Refrigerant Management Processes. B. Remove and properly dispose of refrigerant from equipment that is to be removed during remodel process and not reused (condensing units). C. Remove and store for reuse refrigerant from equipment that is to be reused during remodel process (RTCR). Recharge existing reused systems with reclaimed refrigerant per Target Guidelines. 3.2 ASSET RECOVERY A. Refrigeration contractor /General Contractor Responsibilities for Asset Recovery: 1. Pump refrigeration system down and remove refrigerant from equipment if applicable. 2. Disconnect existing refrigeration equipment. 3. Solder pipe closed. 4. Charge equipment with dry nitrogen to 15 psig. 5. Completely fill out and submit Target Refrigerant Tracking Form. 6. Contact Target Asset Recovery to schedule pick -up of leftover equipment. Include the following information at that time: a. Manufacturer. b. Model number. c. Serial number. d. Description of equipment including approximate size and weight. e. Digital picture of equipment, if applicable. 7. Allow 5 days for pick -up of equipment. 8. Obtain Bill of Lading (BOL) from Target Asset Recovery and affix to each item to be shipped. B. Target Asset Recovery responsibilities: 1. Send BOL to Contractor. 2. Schedule pick up and delivery of leftover refrigeration equipment. 3. Incur all charges for shipping. 4. Manage inventory list and inventory of leftover refrigeration equipment. C. Refrigeration Equipment Vendor responsibilities for managing recovered assets: 1. Download store specific Construction Documents from Prolog Web. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 24 0150 (15601) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Continually obtain updated copies of Target's Recovered Asset List. (Contact Target Asset Recovery to obtain a listing of current available inventory). 3. Compare store specific equipment needs with Asset Recoveryinventory list. 4. Make equipment selections from Asset Recovery Inventory list first then build new equipment to meet needs of project. 5. Notify Target Asset Recovery of need to relocate equipment. 6. If document change is required due to re- configuration of case layout, vendor shall notify Target Refrigeration Engineering. 3.3 EQUIPMENT RE -SALE A. Outside contractors are forbidden to re -sell assets on Target's behalf. Resale of Target owned refrigerant equipment must be handled through Target Asset Recovery. (Contact asset.recovery@target.com). 3.4 EQUIPMENT TRANSFER A. 'Contractors must utilize Target Asset Recovery to transfer whenever a refrigerant containing device is transferred from one Target facility to another and furnish specific asset tag information each piece of equipment, as required by the asset recovery process. B. Contractors, agents, or freight companies transferring refrigerant containing assets as part of their scope of services are responsible to submit a Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet for instances of refrigerant loss which occurs while refrigerant containing appliances or systems are in their possession, refer to Section 24 0553. 3.5 EQUIPMENT DISPOSAL A. Contractors shall only dispose of Target owned refrigerant containing assets when directed by contract documents or with approval of OSR. B. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building or be placed in a trash container with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, and transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder. C. Submit a Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet whenever refrigerant is removed from a refrigerant containing device for disposal, refer to Section 24 0553. 3.6 REFRIGERATION DEMOLITION A. Contract Documents may not always identify full extent of temporary protection required to protect ongoing store operations and merchandise during demolition and restoration activities. Coordinate full extent of necessary temporary protection with Target's project manager prior to submitting a bid, including the following: 1. As necessary, install temporary shoring and supports as required and approved by a structural engineer. Place supports, permanent or temporary, to carry structural loads down to sound bearing. 2. As necessary, install temporary coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing spaces or to parts of building that are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and to avoid abnormal heat loss, prevent weather damage by scheduling work on envelope according to weather conditions. Contractor to protect existing roof membrane with tarps and boards provided by the General Contractor in accord with Target's Roof Protection Plan. Install temporary floor protection to prevent tile damage when transporting new and relocated cases and walk -in boxes. 3. As necessary, install temporary dust enclosures above and below ceilings to separate construction site from rest of building. Also install temporary air filters and ductwork to contain construction dust within construction area. B. Demolition and Cutting: 1. Demolish and remove existing refrigeration equipment and insulated boxes as shown on Drawings and as required to accomplish work. 2. Where new work is adjacent to existing construction, and when existing construction must be replaced, remove just enough existing construction to complete work under Contract. 3. At no additional cost to Owner, remove and replace existing construction that was to remain but that is damaged during work. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 240150 (15601) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 4. Cut openings through concrete by core drilling or sawing, never cut openings in concrete with a hammer -driven chisel or drill without written authorization from Architect. 5. Never endanger or damage work of other trades. If work of other trades must be altered to accommodate refrigeration work, review proposed alterations with installer of work and comply with installer's recommendations to minimize damage. 6. Where necessary, engage original installer to make required changes. 7. Clean demolition areas and remove debris from site at end of each day's work. 8. Transport debris in a manner that prevents spread of dust, do not burn or store debris at project site. 9. Keep construction areas broom clean. 10. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. C. Unanticipated Work: 1. If demolition work exposes concealed utility services (such as piping, ducts, or electrical conduits), or other building conditions which must be addressed, immediately inform OSR. Begin this additional demolition only after receiving approval from Owner for the additional costs. 2. Remove or reroute unanticipated utility services under direction from project Engineers and maintain Owner's operations with minimum interruption. 3. Disconnect services from their sources and cap them in place, leave no "dead end" services concealed in finished work. 4. Abandon services in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls. D. Refrigeration Demolition Scope of Work: 1. Coordinate work with other trades as necessary to complete the following: a. Remove refrigerant from refrigeration systems prior to doing demolition work. Refer to Section 24 0120 • for Refrigerant Management Processes. b. Remove above floor refrigeration piping. c. Remove refrigeration piping on roof. d. Abandon under floor refrigeration piping. Cap off below finished floor. e. Remove existing refrigeration pre - piping from reused cases that are converted from electric defrost to gas defrost. END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 240150(15601) -5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT RECOVERY AND DEMOLITION INSTRUCTIONS 24 0150 (15601) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0529 (15607) REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS TI -IAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN 'EMS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers, embedded concrete anchors, fastening devices, and supports for refrigeration piping and equipment. B. Specific applications are identified on Drawings and related items. C. Administratively the work of this section governed by the requirements of Section 24 0110 and is to be the responsibility of the refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 — References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®, "Building Materials Directory". B. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". C. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". D. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; NER, National Evaluation Reports. E. MSS, "Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry". F. Osmose, Inc., Wood Preserving Group, FirePRO'' Fire Retardant Treated Wood Quality Control Manual. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hanger assemblies as required, consisting of pre- manufactured components which are UL approved or comply with MSS SP -69, SP -58, SP -89, and SP -90. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic Requirements (IBC SEISMIC_ CATEGORIES "D ".AND "E): 1. Adapt prototypical support, hanger, and anchor designs called out in these Documents to meet specific site seismic requirements for project. .'These may include but are not Limited to the following: a. Additional bracing and fasteners. b. Restraint cabling. c. Furnishing seismic design drawings, Certifications and calculations as required by local authority having Jurisdiction. B. lIurricane Requirements: REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS 24 0529 (15607) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. .Adapt prototypical support, hanger, and anchor designs called out in these Documents to meet specific site hurricane requirements for project. These may include but are not limited to additional bracing and fasteners. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment roof supports with General Contractor. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Include warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Section 24 0110. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts, and self locking nuts. B. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. C. Hanger Rods: ASTM A 36 hot rolled steel with cut coarse threads. D. Individual Hangers: Adjustable Swivel Ring type with copper finish and plastic coating, Cooper B -Line® B3170CTC series. E. Strut mounted cushion clamp assemblies as manufactured by Hydra -Zorb or Cooper B- Line ®. Galvanized powder coated 1008 -1010 carbon steel clamps with projection welded studs, pre - molded DuPont"" Hytrel® cushions and nylon insert locknut. F. Bolted metal framing systems, (Unistrut® or Cooper B- Linee) shall consist of channels fittings and hardware as defined in the Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standard Publication MFMA -1. 1,. Channels shall be cold formed 12 gage. ASTM A 570, grade 33 low - carbon steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. 2. Channel accessories shall be ASTM A 635 steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. G. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. H. Roof top pipe support systems, per Architectural and Refrigeration drawing details. I. Wood blocking or equipment supports, internal to building: Fire treated and at a minimum meet the following: 1. Criteria set forth in ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. Legacy Report, NER -577. 2. Flame spread rating 25 or less when subjected to ASTM E -84 burn test of 30 minutes. 3. Re -dried to a maximum of 19 percent (Lumber) or 15 percent (Plywood) moisture content, in conformance with UL Follow -up Service Procedures Files R16519 (Lumber) or R18401 (Plywood) and procedures outlined in Osmose, Inc. Standard FP -00 for fire retardant treated wood. J. Alternate insulated piping supports — Insuguard or Cooper B -Line Snap `N Shield 12" horizontal pipe supports used in conjunction with threaded rod and strut framing system. Size individual supports to accommodate copper piping and insulation thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Attach hangers and supports directly to building structure or masonry. Do not attach hangers or supports to roof deck, suspended ceilings, drywall, or other sheeting materials. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS 24 0529 (15607) - 2 TARGET MR =RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Attach hangers and pipe supports only to bar joist chords, with-in 6- inches of panel points. (Panel point is where vertical or angular member of joist is attached to chord). 1. Coordinate hanger locations between trades so that a maximum allowable load of 100 lbs to single joist panel point is not exceeded. 2. Locate panel point loads a minimum of 6 -feet from other loads on same joist. 3. Install necessary supplemental steel to span between joists where hanger locations do not match -up with building structure. 4. Notify OSR if these conditions cannot be met. C. Install mechanical- anchor fasteners in concrete after it has completely cured and in accord with manufacturer's published instructions. Do not install anchors in slabs less than 4 inches thick. D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and accommodate normal expansion and contraction due to changes in temperature. E. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading or stresses from movement are not transmitted to connected equipment. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for the smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes specified. Refer to refrigeration details on the Refrigeration Drawing Sheets. H. Install hangers and supports with vertical adjustment to ensure indicated pipe slopes and maintain pipe deflections as allowed by ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping ". I. Coordinate locations for roof top piping supports with building structure. J. Install hangers for insulated pipe sized to encompass insulation including support shields. K. In addition to, or coordinated with typical hanger and support spacing required by schedule in Article 3.5 of this Section, locate hangers at the following: 1. Adjacent to joints, couplings and fittings. Refer to Section 24 2315 for distance requirements. 2. At each offset or change of direction, support pipe within 10" of direction change or offset. 3. At ends of piping branches. 4. At base of risers. 5. In immediate vicinity of valves or other heavy refrigeration system accessories. 6. As required to prevent sags, bends, or vibration. L. Remove excessive rod materials from hangers that protrude 2- inches or more from the hangers after adjusting and pitch have been established. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Construct corrosion resistant galvanized and painted hanger assemblies that conform to MSS SP -58. B: Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified by Drawings or this Section. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structures, in compliance with MSS SP -69 and SP -89. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and achieve the indicated slope of piping. B. Remove sharp edges and burrs from refrigeration system hangers and supports. C. Remove signs of surface corrosion on hangers and supports and restore finishes with touch up paint or galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. • REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS 24 0529 (15607) - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Copper Tubing: Subject to weight restrictions according to hanger, support horizontal piping with spacing as follows: Pipe Size Hanger Rod Dia. Max. Spacing to 3/4" 3/8" 5' -0" 1" to 1 -1/4" 3/8" 6' -0" 1 -1/2" to 2" 3/8" 8' -0" 2 -1/2" 3/8" 9' -0" 3" 1/2" 10' -0" 4" 1/2" 10' -0" 5" 5/8" 10' -0" 6" 3/4" 10' -0" 8" 7/8" 10' -0" B. Increase hanger rod size as required for trapeze hangers to handle added weight of multiple pipes and space hangers to accommodate smallest pipe size of group. END OF SECTION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SUPPORTS, HANGERS, AND ANCHORS 24 0529 (15607) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0553 (15610) COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISI-IED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices for refrigeration systems and their respective components, including pipe markers, system identification labels, and asset tags. B. Pipe markers, valve tags, and system identification labels are to be furnished and installed as part of this scope of services by the Refrigeration Contractor. C. Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags are to be Owner furnished and contractor installed. Refrigeration contractor is responsible for acquisition and submission of refrigerant tracking data and installing asset tags on new commercial refrigeration equipment, food service appliances, domestic refrigerators, and electric water coolers installed as part of project. (This includes equipment which has been provided by other sub - contractors.) D. Related Items: 1. Section 01 4200 - References. 2. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. E. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". B. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASME Al3.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering or concealing. B. Install identification devices prior to installation of drop ceilings or other concealment. C. Refrigerant Containing Asset Tags: 1. 45 days prior to store turn over, refrigeration contractor shall contact Marking Services Inc, (MSI), to validate and coordinate Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags. (800) 234 -0135 or www.markserv.com. 2. Coordinate tag delivery, refrigerant data acquisition, and installation of asset tags with (MSI), General Contractor, and other applicable sub - contractors or vendors. 3. Tags are not store specific. Surplus tags may be kept for future projects. 4. In the event of a tag shortage, please contact MSI immediately for additional tags. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION 24 0553 (15610) - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.5 SUBMITTALS' A. One week prior to turn over e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to: refrigerant .trackingnu,target.com. Provide additional copies to the Target OSR and General Contractor at time of completion. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Include as part of overall project installation warranty coverage. Refer to Section 24 0110. B. Warrant completeness and accuracy of data submitted for refrigerant tracking. C. Warrant installation of tags and labels for a period of one year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Marking Services Inc., MSI, PH: (800)- 234 -0135. 2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Coiled Pipe Labels 1. Indoor - Furnish MS -970 coiled polyester pipe labels designed to comply with ASME A13.1 -1996. Colors are to be black characters on a yellow or white background. 2. Outdoor — Furnish MS -995 coiled polyester pipe labels with clear TEDLAR over - laminating and TEDLAR sealing strip to comply with ASME 13.1 -1996. Colors are to be black characters on a yellow or white background. B. Furnish Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic- resin - laminate 'engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Include holes for mechanical fastening: 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/16 -inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8- inches in length, and 1/8 -inch for larger units. 3. Fasteners: Self- tapping, stainless steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. C. Furnish 2 -inch round MS -215 type valve tags 125 mil thickness with stainless steel grommets, black print on a white background and stainless steel braided wire fasteners as available through MSI. D. Refrigerant Tracking Asset Tags (Owner Furnished): Approximately 1 x 2 3/4 inches in size, of the following types as directed: 1. Target approved laser- etched multi color anodized aluminum tags with the appropriate permanent adhesive, (3M, #467 for non - plastic surfaces and #9471 for plastic surfaces). 2. Target approved MS -215 type tags as available through MSI. 3. Tags are to contain the following information: a. Bull's -eye logo. b. Target asset identification number. c. A scannable bar -code containing asset identification number. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify Conditions: Examine areas where work is to be performed. Identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION 24 0553 (15610) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.2 REFRIGERANT CONTAINING ASSET TRACKING AND TAGGING PROCESS A. Asset Tagging Kit (Owner Furnished): Kit furnished through MSI shall contain the following: 1. Verified self adhesive asset tags necessary to mark new food services appliances, refrigeration equipment, refrigerators, and electric water coolers. 2. Verified MS -215 asset tags and stainless steel self locking braided wire fasteners necessary to mark new . compressor /condensing units, walk -in box evaporator coils, refrigeration compressor racks, heat re -claim storage tanks, and condensers. 3. A comprehensive refrigerant asset tag installation instruction guideline, with pictures and examples. 4. An electronic spreadsheet template, (Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet), for recording and submitting equipment refrigerant data as requested. B. Fill in refrigerant tracking data spread sheet completely, leaving no blanks. Complete one line for every new piece of refrigerant containing equipment added and one line for each independent circuit in an appliance with multiple circuits or systems. C. Follow.up directly with MSI to resolve tag discrepancies that are discovered during refrigerant inventorying and tagging process. Insure that all refrigerant containing equipment gets recorded and properly tagged, and re -tag improperly tagged equipment or re -survey equipment not originally inventoried at no additional cost to Target. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces prior to applying self - adhesive labels, tags, or signs. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Mark each refrigerant suction and liquid pipe at the following three locations with a pipe label that identifies line type, refrigerant, direction of flow, and circuit number (example < -- R404a ABO1 RS): 1. Adjacent to roof -top condenser /compressor units or compressor rack (outdoor pipe label). 2. Midpoint of each horizontal piping segment above ceilings (indoor pipe label). 3. Point where a pipe enters into a case or walk -in box (indoor pipe label). B. Install 3"x5" engraved plastic - laminate sign on each condensing unit that identifies system number and refrigerant type. C. Install an engraved plastic - laminate sign on each compressor rack control panel that includes the following information: 1. Name, address, and phone number of installing contractor. 2. Type and total quantity of refrigerant installed as of date of equipment turnover. 3. • Type and total quantity of refrigerant oil installed as of date of equipment turnover. 4. Method used for, tracking tabulating and determining total charge added. D. Install 3 "x5" engraved plastic - laminate sign on each condenser /compressor unit that identifies the system number, refrigerant type, refrigerant charge quantity, and name, address, and phone number of installing contractor. E. Install a framed schematic depicting field installed portion of refrigeration systems adjacent to REMS -1 refrigeration control panel in electrical distribution center. F. Install an engraved plastic - laminate sign to each fixture of case line up, adjacent to manufacturer's model and serial number tag on interior surface of case indicating refrigeration system and temperature sensor number. (Example, the case containing the first control temperature sensor of circuit A01 would be designated "A01 T1 ", case with sensor #2 would be designated "A01 T2 ", and so on). Control temperature sensor numbers are determined from the REMS drawings. G. Install an engraved plastic laminate sign to each evaporator coil, adjacent to manufacturer's model and serial number tag indicating refrigeration system and temperature sensor number. Control temperature sensor numbers are determined from the REMS drawings. H. Record equipment data and install an (Owner Furnished), laser- etched asset identification tag, as directed by asset tagging instruction guide for each new refrigerant containing display case, refrigerator, food serve appliance, and electric water cooler. (This includes equipment not necessarily installed by refrigeration contractor.) COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION 24 0553 (15610) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET I. Record equipment data and install an MS -215 type asset identification tag mechanically fastened with self locking stainless steel braded wire fastener, as directed by asset tagging instruction guide, for each air cooled condenser, condenser /compressor unit, walk -in box evaporator unit, and compressor rack system. J. Mark each field installed refrigeration stop valve with a tag that clearly identifies the valve function and system number. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate refrigeration identification devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. B. Clean faces of identification devices and frames of valve charts. END OF SECTION COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION 24 0553 (15610) - 4 TARGET 'MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0554 (15010) MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO TI-HS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section'applies to commercial and other duty refrigerant containing appliances and systems. It is a supplement to construction contract Documents, standard requests for proposals, service agreements or other purchasing documents for these types of equipment, providing the minimum refrigeration related requirements necessary for Target to maintain compliance with 1990 Clean Air Act (CAA). Examples of equipment covered include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Under Counter Refrigerators and Freezers. 2. Self- Contained Refrigerated Display Cases. 3. Refrigerated Prep Tables. 4. Chilled Beverage Dispensing Machines. 5. Soft Serve Ice Cream Freezers. 6. Ice Machines. 7. Electric Water Coolers. B. In general this Section requires that suppliers of refrigerant containing appliances and systems include necessary labeling and documentation, comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations, and follow Target procedures. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 22 4000 — Plumbing Fixtures. B. Purchase agreements for store and food service equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". B. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ®" 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Comfort Cooling — Cooling systems used to condition spaces for human comfort. B. Commercial Refrigeration — Cooling systems utilized for preservation of perishable goods or merchandise. C. Other Refrigeration — Cooling systems which remove heat from a utility and do not fit in comfort or commercial categories. Examples are drinking fountains and ice makers. D. OSR — Owner's Site Representative. 1.5 DESIGN AND LABELING REQUIREMENTS A. Appliance or system shall be approved as a complete assembly and bear appropriate UL labels. B. Appliance or system shall be tested to appropriate ARI standard. C. Appliance or system shall utilize one of the following Non -ozone depleting refrigerants: 1. R -404a. 2. R -134a. 3. R -410a. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 24 0554 (15010) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET D. Appliance or system must have a manufacturers' name tag mounted in an esthetically acceptable visible location that does not require disassembly or relocation of machine when installed for store use. (Field relocation or installation of duplicate name tags will be at manufacturers' expense.) E. At a minimum manufacturers' name tag must include the following information: 1. Manufacturers' Name. 2. Manufacturers' Equipment Model Number. 3. Manufacturers' Serial Number. 4. Date of Manufacture. 5. Type of Refrigerant Contained in Refrigeration Circuit. 6. Quantity of Refrigerant Contained in Refrigeration Circuit. F. Manufacturers' name tag on equipment to be installed outdoors shall be metal stamped or engraved tags permanently attached to unit with mechanical fasteners. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Equipment manufacturers, sales representatives, transfer agents, installing contractors or service providers shall, as directed by this Section, submit to Target, completed copies of Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual, and ensure that applicable Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certification information is recorded, current, and accurate on Target's web -based refrigerant tracking tool. https://www.eam.verisae.com/DataNett/refrigerant/login.html B. If installation or start-up of appliance or system requires addition of refrigerant or activities with a reasonable risk for release of refrigerant, then Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate information must be submitted. C. Submit completed copies of Target Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet for each occurrence when refrigeration components of appliance or system are serviced during warranty period. Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracking @target.com. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers are responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment and shall employ skilled craftsmen. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturers are responsible for protection and preservation the refrigerant charge during shipping, delivery, and handling. Refrigerant charge should be isolated in a protected part of the refrigeration circuit; exposed refrigerant containing parts shall be protected with a crate, and clear and simple handling instructions available at project site. B. Manufacturers shall coordinate special handling or rigging requirements with OSR or General Contractor, minimum 3 weeks prior to delivery. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine location of installation for inherent or obvious likely scenarios which could cause a release of refrigerant. Examples include but not limited to the following: 1. Unprotected refrigerant containing components located such that they could be physically impacted by carts, and falling objects. 2. Unsecured appliances which could easily knocked off a counter or tipped over. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 24 0554 (15010) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigerant containing appliances and systems in accord with manufacturers' written instructions. B. Do not make connection or install assemblies shipped loose that will obstruct visibility of manufacturer's name tag. 3.3 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Maintenance, repair, and cleaning work covered by these Contract Documents, which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliance or refrigeration system must comply with the following: 1. Technician performing work must have Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certification information on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. 2. A Target Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet must be filed whenever refrigerant is added or removed from a refrigerant containing device, (whether it is planned or unplanned). Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracking @target.com 3. Manufacturers' written troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures are to be closely followed. 4. Work which could impact refrigerant containing components of appliance or system shall be performed in a manner that complies with EPA requirements governing refrigerants. 5. Only manufacturers' approved replacement parts, cleaning solutions, and other compounds are to be used in maintenance and repair procedures. 6. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, refrigerant transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder, and if appropriate, a dry nitrogen holding charge installed prior to piece of equipment going out of building. 3.4 EQUIPMENT TRANSFER A. A Target Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet must be filed whenever a refrigerant containing device is transferred from one Target facility to another. Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracIdng@target.com. B. Form must indicate which facility the asset came from and which facility it has been moved to, along with appliance's make, model, and serial number. C. Contractors, Transfer Agents, or Freight Companies transferring refrigerant containing assets as part of a their scope of services, are responsible to submit a Target Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet for instances of refrigerant loss which occurs while refrigerant containing appliances or systems are in their possession. Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracking @target.com. 3.5 EQUIPMENT RE -SALE A. Outside contractors are forbidden to re -sell assets on Target's behalf. Resale of Target, owned refrigerant equipment must be handled through Target Asset Recovery, (contact asset.recovery@target.com). 3.6 EQUIPMENT DISPOSAL A. Contractors shall only dispose of Target owned refrigerant containing assets when directed by the contract documents, or with approval of OSR. B. No Target owned refrigerant containing appliance or system is to leave a Target building or be placed in a trash container with refrigerant still residing in appliance or system. Refrigerant must be reclaimed through an EPA compliant process, and transferred to an approved contractor owned reclaim cylinder. • C. A Target Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet must be filed whenever refrigerant is removed from a refrigerant containing device for disposal. Obtain electronic forms from and submit to refrigerant.tracking @target.com. D. Technician performing work must have a Technicians Refrigerant Handling Certificate document on file with Target prior to starting work on equipment. END OF SECTION MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 24 0554 (15010) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) ' TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL AND OTHER DUTY REFRIGERANT CONTAINING APPLIANCES AND SYSTEMS 24 0554 (15010) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0719 (15620) COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS .PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for installed insulation systems on refrigeration equipment and piping. Work to be performed shall include, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Insulation of refrigeration suction, sub - cooled liquid piping, hot gas defrost piping and evaporator coil condensate piping. 2. Sealing and adjacent insulation of conduits and piping which penetrate walk -in cooler and freezer boxes, including those installed by other trades. B. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 8113 — Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). C. Section 24 0110 - Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. E. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. F. Section 24 0553 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". B. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Association ". C. UL, "Building Materials Directory". D. OSHA, "Occupational Safety & Health Administration ". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to General Contractor as necessary copies of manufacturer's MSDS sheets for materials, solvents, and adhesives which are to be brought on site as part of installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractors and manufacturers shall utilize only skilled installers specialized in installation of closed cell elastomeric foam insulation materials on piping systems. B. Material shall conform to specified ASTM Standards where applicable, principally ASTM C534. C. Contractors and manufacturers shall conform to OSHA and other published practices for installation of insulation. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) _ TARGET 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship insulation materials and accessories (such as adhesive and coatings) to job site in marked, unopened containers as received from manufacturer. Identify boxes with manufacturer's stamp or labels indicating hazard characteristics of products and a lot number allowing traceability back to manufacturing date. B. Store materials at job site in a proper manner, which does not damage, deface, or otherwise reduce their serviceability. Store highly flammable solvents, adhesives, and coatings in compliance with OSHA requirements. Store materials, which are susceptible to weather damage, in a weatherproof environment and store materials with manufacturer's identification attached. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Contractor or manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that temperature and other environmental conditions are favorable for installation of insulation materials. B. Site conditions and sequencing: 1 Contractor or manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination and cooperation with other trades so that work is performed with minimum interference and conflict. Particular attention must be given to heat tracing and pressure testing procedures prior to installation of insulation materials. 2. Contractor or manufacturer shall be prepared to staff project as necessary to match schedule needs. Work shall be completed in a timely manner, subject to activities of others. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Include warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Flexible closed cell elastomeric tubular or sheet insulation which conforms to minimum requirements specified by ASTM -0534. Material shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 50 or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E84 for all thickness and water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm -inch or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E96. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Aeroflex Aerocel ®. 2. Armacell LLC. 3. K -Flex USA B. Pre - fabricated Insulation fittings by one of the following manufacturers subject to requirements of this Section: 1. Armacell LLC, Armafit manufactured fittings 2. Aeroflex USA, AEROFIT manufactured fittings 3. K -Flex USA K -FIT manufactured fittings 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Glue: A contact adhesive specifically formulated for bonding insulation materials which ensures a moisture resistant permanent bond between applied materials. Must form a non - flammable material when dried and is approved for use with insulation materials to be installed: 1. Non LEED Projects a. Armaflex® 520 Adhesive. b. K-Flex® 620 Contact Adhesive - Black. 2. LEED Projects a. Comply with USGBC LEED requirements for credit EQ 4.1. b. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. c. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1) Armaflex® 520 BLV Adhesive. VOC — 0 g/L. 2) K -Flex® 720 -LVOC Contact Adhesive - Amber. VOC — 0 g/L. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Insulated pipe support systems in conjunction with Section 24 0529, shall be by one of the following: 1. Insulation couplings as manufactured by Klo- Shure ®. Contact information 248 - 373 -6250 or website www.klo - shure.com. 2. Armafixn' insulated inserts as manufactured by Cooper B -Line® Inc or ZSI Inc. 3. Aerofix'*' insulated inserts as manufactured by Aeroflex USA, Inc. 4. K -Flex 360 Insulated Pipe Supports as manufactured by K -Flex USA. C. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. 1. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Sealant (SLNT -4) - Sanitary silicone rubber sealant conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 Dow Corning® 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant or equal. VOC — 33 g/L. D. Furnish sufficient quantities of urethane foam insulation material to seal walk- intcooler and freezer box gaps greater than 'A" as required by Refrigeration Drawings and this Part 3 of this Section as follows: 1. "Versi -Foam " by RHH Foam Systems, Inc. or equal. VOC — 0 g/L. 2.3 FINISHES A. Protective Coatings: 1. White PVC fitting covers and jacketing with vinyl adhesive for outdoor applications manufactured by Speedline Corporation, PH: 800 -551 -9759 or website www.speedlinepvc.com. 2. K -Flex WT Clad N/S (non - split) tube insulation with fully adhered PVC jacket and K -Flex pre - formed fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Do not apply insulation covering pipe or fitting joints until after pressure testing affecting those joints has been completed and approved by authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not apply insulation until surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Insulation work shall be performed by trained installers regularly engaged in insulation trade. B. Cleanly and squarely cut all insulation joints. Do not tear insulation. C. Install piping insulation continuous through sleeves and penetrations (walls, partitions, roofs, ceilings, and floors). D. Completely seal seams, butts, and ends to retard moisture vapor from entering system. Glue joints with approved products. Do not tape insulation joints. E. Vapor stop exposed ends and every 12 feet by applying approved contact adhesive to outside surface of piping and inside surface of insulation, and secure to piping. F. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves with same insulation thickness as adjacent piping. G. Cover elbows, "P" traps, and tees with prefabricated insulation fittings of mitered tubular sections, manufactured by an approved fabricator. H. Insulate valves to a point just below seal cap or packing gland. Seal insulation to valve body with contact adhesive. I. Insulate refrigerant suction and liquid lines as described in insulation schedule in Article 3.4: COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) • TARGET 1. Glue seams to prevent condensation from forming. 2. Slide on insulation whenever possible and do not slice lengthwise unless unavoidable. (This statement applies only to act of physically applying insulation materials to sections of straight piping and does not contradict requirements for mitered insulation fittings.) 3. Insulate valves and devices installed in suction lines with thickness described previously. Devices include and are not limited to EEPRs, suction filters, and isolation valves. 4. Protect refrigerant piping insulation outdoors, from unit connection point to a point 6 inches inside of pipe box. Apply proper size Speedline PVC fitting covers and jacketing for insulated piping and seal in accord with manufacturers' instructions with solvent weld adhesive process for outdoor applications. 5. Insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with local and state codes. 6. If condensation appears to be excessive, Target reserves right to review application. If installation is found to be incomplete or unsatisfactory, installer will be required to re- insulate at their cost. J. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of pipe labels and tags. K. Install piping and insulation in such a manner to ensure a properly functioning system. Reinstall an installation that is deemed unacceptable by Target at installer's expense. L. Penetrations: 1. After utility piping, (refrigeration, fire protection, drains, and electrical conduits) has been completed into cooler and freezer walk -in boxes, seal, fill, and trim penetrations both interior and exterior. 2. Seal and insulate unit cooler hanger rod penetrations. M. Insulate conduits and utility piping which penetrate walk -in cooler and freezer boxes for distance of 12 inches from outside skin of box. N. Insulate equipment hanger systems which penetrate walk -in cooler and freezer boxes. O. Insulate evaporator coil condensate lines inside boxes where box temperature is below 32 deg F. P. Insulate evaporator coil condensate lines where exposed to unconditioned back room spaces. Insulate from box penetration to drain termination to prevent condensation formation. Q. . Insulate hot gas supply line from compressor racks to remote header connections. R. Insulate non -sub cooled, medium temperature liquid lines from a point 6" outside pipe box to a point 6" below roof deck penetration. Insulation intended as protection for lines passing through box skin and roof decking. Use 3/8" wall thickness. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Install the following minimum insulation thicknesses: Piping and Refrigerating Specialties Temperature (deg F) Piping Up to 2" dia. . Piping 2" to 4" dia. Piping 4" to 6 ". dia. Sub - cooled Low Temp. Liquid Lines 1/2" Suction above + 25 deg F Freezer Condensate Piping 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" Suction +10 deg F to +25 deg F 3/4" 1" 1" , Suction -10 deg F to +10 deg F 1" 1" '1 -1/4" Suction -30 deg F to -10 deg F 1 -1/4" (1" in Sales Area) 1 -1/4" (1" in Sales Area) 1 -3/8" (1" in Sales Area) Condensate lines inside freezers, meat coolers and exterior to boxes. 1/2" Hot gas supply line to 1/2" COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 4 TARGET • MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) remote header 1 1 1 (Note: Thicknesses listed are minimums and greater wall thickness may be used at installers discretion) 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain a neat and orderly work area and remove scrap, waste, or debris resulting from work on a weekly basis, and upon completion of work. END OF SECTION COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION INSULATION 24 0719 (15620) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0930 (15682) FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS MR. OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers refrigeration contract responsibilities related to work associated with mounting control devices and terminating low voltage control wiring to Owner furnished refrigeration equipment, control panels, and sensing devices, including the following: 1. Cooler and freezer refrigerant leak detection alarm panels. 2. Door open alarm panels. 3. Liquid line solenoid valves. 4. Electronic Pressure Regulating Valves (Loop piping design) 5. Front office alarm panels. 6. Refrigerated display case REMS panels. 7. Cooler and freezer evaporators. 8. Condenser /compressor units. 9. Air cooled condensers. 10. Compressor rack systems. B. This Section does not include power wiring or installation of control wiring. C. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. B. Section 24 0553 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. C. Section 24 0935 — Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. D. Section 24 6213 — Condenser Compressor Units (Owner Furnished). E. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers (Owner Furnished). F. Section 24 6333 — Evaporative Condensers. G. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. H. Section 24 7313 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils I. Division 26 - Specifications for electrical components and their installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Local and national applicable codes and standards. B. NEMA, "National Electric Manufacturer's Association ". C. NECA, "National Electrical Contractors Association ". D. UL, "Underwriter's Laboratory". E. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 24 0930 (15682) - 1 1 r 1 1 1 r1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ensure that refrigeration system controls have been installed properly and in accord with applicable referenced standards. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate on site project refrigeration controls activities of REMS integrator, electrical contract, compressor rack manufacturer, and case manufacturer. B. Coordinate with REMS integrator for delivery of control panels, low voltage wire and cabling, and other related loose refrigeration system control devices. C. Furnish copies of refrigeration controls installation documents, including drawings, diagrams, manuals, and related memos to Division 26 electrical contractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive and distribute to appropriate contractors, Owner Furnished control panels, low voltage wire and cabling, and other related loose refrigeration system control devices. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refrigeration Control Drawing Sheets, which depict refrigeration controls design, are furnished by Refrigeration Energy Management System, REMS, integrator: Energy Management Consultants, LLC 1550 LaFollette Street Fennimore, WI 53809 Ph: 608 - 822 -3550 www.emccontrols.com B. Division 26 electrical contractor shall install control wiring between refrigeration components. C. Final connection of control wires and communication cabling to display cases evaporators, condensers, compressor units, remote refrigeration control panels, and temperature sensors, is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. D. REMS integratorshall provide low voltage cable, control panels, loose input devices, and enclosures for REMS system. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Include same warranty conditions for control system installation as refrigeration system. Refer to Section 24 0110 for requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify that proper control wiring bundles and cabling ha* been pulled into place for each refrigeration system component. Refer to Refrigeration Control Drawing Sheets. FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 24 0930 (15682) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Prior to starting termination process, verify that each control conductor is in good condition by testing continuity. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Consult with Division 26 electrical installer to ensure that there is complete understanding regarding electrical requirements, (power and control), for each refrigeration component. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Terminate refrigeration control wiring and communication cabling according to Refrigeration Control Drawing Sheets. B. Strip conductor insulation as prescribed by manufacturer of terminator. C. Tighten connections to ensure maximum surface contact between terminals. D. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of panels and equipment cabinets, and protect wiring from abrasions. E. Tightly twist stranded conductors prior to insertion to terminals. Do not allow loose individual strands at terminal lugs. F. Splice control wiring only in junction boxes, equipment cabinets, and control panels. Do not splice control wiring in conduits or raceways. G. Maintain isolation of shielded circuits when splicing coaxial type cables. H. For stores with Loop Piping designs, install RTCR Manufacturer supplied suction return gas temperature sensors upstream of field installed EEPR valve. Secure with two Panduit PLT25 -M120 low temperature ties. I. Include labor and tools necessary to terminate all low voltage sensor wiring for display case supply and return air temperature sensors at both cases and control panels. J. Terminate wiring to walk -in cooler /freezer box door switches, both at switches and control panels. K. Terminate wiring to walk -in cooler /freezer box temperature sensors, both at sensors and control panels. L. Mount and connect cabling or sample tubing to walk -in cooler /freezer box leak detection devices and detection panels, both at devices and control panel or detection unit. ' M. Include labor and tools necessary to terminate communication cabling between remote control panels, alarm panels, condensers, and compressor units. N. Pull communication cabling in continuous strands with no splices. O. Review power wiring connections to compressor racks, condensers, condenser /compressors, and evaporator coils. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain a neat and orderly work area and remove scrap, waste, or debris resulting from work, and upon completion of this work. B. Verify that refrigeration controls related identification labels and tags are in place and legible upon completion of work. Refer to Section 24 0553. C. Install covers on control panels and protective enclosures when installation and commissioning activities have been completed. END OF SECTION FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 24 0930 (15682) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIELD REFRIGERATION CONTROL TERMINATIONS 24 0930 (15682) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 0935 (15683) ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section defines responsibilities of Refrigeration Compressor Rack Manufacturer, (RCRM), as related to electrical devices and controls for Rooftop Refrigeration Compressor Racks and associated valve headers. These responsibilities include the following: 1. Providing motor control panels for each compressor rack furnished. 2. Refrigeration Energy Management System, (REMS), refrigeration control components necessary to operate the rooftop compressor rack unit, including but not limited to suction valves, discharge pressure control, compressor staging, and circuit solenoid valves. 3. Providing sensors and control devices identified in this Section and in Section 24 6423. 4. Providing fail safe back -up control system components as necessary to supplement REMS controls. 5. Necessary power and control wiring identified in this Section to make properly functioning refrigeration compressor racks and control valve header assembles as identified in Section 24 6423. B. Section does not include: 1. Temperature sensors associated with display cases walk -in boxes, and refrigerated prep areas. 2. Field wiring external to compressor rack frame. 3. REMS integration and software. 4. Internal control devices and wiring to air cooled condensers, refer to Section 24 6313. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. B. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements. C. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. D. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. E. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers. F. Division 26 - Specifications for applicable general electrical components and their installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Local and national applicable codes and standards. B. ETL, Electrical Testing Labs. C. NEMA, "National Electric Manufacturer's Association ". D. NECA, "National Electrical Contractors Association ". E. UL, "Underwriter's Laboratory". F. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS — REFRIGERATION CONTROLS A. This Section includes design criteria, lists of critical control points, and required components for refrigeration system controls. B. Accompanying prototype Drawings include requirements necessary to facilitate finalization of engineering and design for specific store locations. It is responsibility of RCRM to utilize both sources of information in completion of final engineering and design for refrigeration control system and include necessary control components to make a complete and working refrigeration compressor rack and control valve header assemblies. C. Final Engineering and Design: Includes reviewing prototype store Drawings, verifying refrigerated case requirements, and I/O counts for furnished equipment, finalizing component selections and control logic, sizing motor control panel enclosures, panel layout, creating design documents, and coordination with REMS integrator. D. Installation includes furnishing and mounting REMS components, electrical control devices, and enclosures; electrical labeling and identification; and interconnecting power and control wiring; associated with refrigeration equipment mounted on the compressor rack frame. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 3300, unless otherwise indicated. B. Refer to Section 24 0130 for coordination of refrigeration equipment submittals. C. Equipment Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings, field correspondence and close out submittals in coordination with Section 24 6423. D. Complete electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components and Control Devices: UL and ETL labeled. B. Electrical Panels: UL labeled and in compliance with NEC standards. 1.7 COORDINATION A. RCRM shall furnish an input/output points list and electrical drawings for refrigeration rack to REMS integrator with a copy to Target Project Refrigeration Engineer (Reference Section 24 0130), in an electronic format, (AutoCAD DWG, Microstation DGN, DXF, or Adobe PDF) so that overall REMS controls integration can be completed and field wiring documents generated. Zip these files and e-mail to engineering@a,emccontrols.com B. RCRM shall notify and begin coordination with REMS integrator within 24 hrs of receiving proposal request and allow a minimum of 30 days lead time for REMS integrator to complete work. C. Approved REMS integrator is (EMC): Energy Management Consultants 1550 LaFollette Street Fennimore, WI 53809 Phone: 608 - 822 -3550 Fax: 608 - 822 -3847 Contact: Kevin Kenney, or Pete Adam 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 24 0130 "Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Manufacturers subject to compliance with Specifications, furnish Rooftop Refrigeration compressor rack control panels assembled by one of the following: a. Hill- Phoenix. b. Hussmann. c. Zero Zone. 2.2 REFRIGERATION PANELS A. Compressor Rack Motor Control Panels: 1. Motor control panels: NEMA -3R rated enclosures, properly sized to house all necessary specified devices and 10 percent spare capacity. 2. Control Devices: a. Square D, non -fused type disconnects for both main and control power sources. b. Square D, DPA type three pole contactors with auxiliary contacts and 120 volt coils. c. Control Isolation Relays. d. Current sensing relays, RIBXG series as manufactured by Functional Devices Inc. or equal. e. Line voltage phase monitoring device with adjustable trip delay, Symcom MotorSaver® Model 250A or equivalent. f. Fuses and Fuse Blocks. g. Molded case circuit breakers manufactured by Square D. h. Time delay relays. i. Terminal blocks. 2.3 REMS SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Technician Interface Device: 1. Handheld terminal, CPC Part number 811 -3110. 2. Sporlan SMA -12, Stepper Motor Actuator with Molex connector, Sporlan part number 953158. B. UO Boards: 1. MultiFlex 88, 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs - CPC Part number: 810 -3064. 2. MultiFlex 16AI - CPC Part number: 810 -3013. 3. MultiFlex 88A0, 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs, 4 Analog Outputs - CPC Part number: 810 -3063. 4. MultiFlex 168, 16 Inputs and 8 Outputs - CPC Part number: 810 -3066. 5. MultiFlex 168A0, 16 Inputs and 8 Outputs, 4 Analog Outputs - CPC Part number: 810 -3065. 6. 8RO -C - Relay Output Board with Configurable Contacts (Form C or Standard) - CPC Part number: 810 -3006. 7. 4A0 - Analog Output Board for Variable Speed - CPC Part number: 810 -3030. C. EEPR Control Boards: 1. MultiFlex ESR - CPC Part number: 810 -3199. D. Sensors: 1. Suction Transducer - CPC part number 800 -2200, 0 -200 psig. 2. High pressure transducer - CPC part number 800 -2500, 0 -500 psig. 3. Enclosure temperature sensor - CPC part number 501 -1122, 0 -120 deg F. 4. Liquid temperature sensors - CPC part number 501 -1125. 5. Gas temperature sensors - CPC part number 501 -1126. 6. Ambient air temperature sensor - EMC part number EMC /CONDTEMP -8" 2.4 EXAMINATION A. RCRM shall review store specific drawings, specifications, and relevant change documents to become familiar with the stores requirements prior to ordering material and starting work. B. It is intent of this Specification to describe a complete and working factory wired control system ready for termination of field wiring without further modification of internal unit wiring. It is responsibility of (RCRM) to notify Target Refrigeration Engineering of suspected gaps. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.5 COMPRESSOR RACK MOTOR CONTROL A. RCRM shall design refrigeration compressor rack control circuits such that mechanical pressure switches and adjustable time delays are in parallel with REMS control system. B. Compressor Rack to be capable of full operation utilizing mechanical pressure switches without the REMS system, Refer to Section 24 6423. C. Include factory mounted pre -wired disconnects for both main and control power sources. D. Include Off/Auto (OA) switches for each compressor control branch circuit for complete electrical isolation of branch. In auto mode compressors normally operate under the control of the REMS system with the suction group low pressure control providing vacuum safety only. If REMS controller fails, relay contacts will then place compressors under control of low pressure switch and time delays. Note compressors shall be under the protection oil safeties in both modes. E. Include properly sized motor control circuits in each compressor rack panel, consisting of a contactor with auxiliary contacts, circuit breaker and phase loss protection for each compressor. F. Install REMS integrator including total unit power monitoring capabilities on main voltage entering unit. System consists of 3 current transformers and power monitoring control unit to interface into REMS system. 2.6 INSTALLATION A. Rack Critical Control Inputs: 1. Compressor suction manifold pressures. 2. Compressor suction manifold gas temperatures. 3. Branch suction return gas temperatures, one sensor for each refrigerant circuit suction line. a. Loop piping projects - Shipped loose for field installation 4. Compressor discharge manifold pressure. 5. Compressor discharge manifold gas temperature. 6. Condenser drop leg pressure. 7. Condenser drop leg temperature. 8. Power phase loss. 9. Power monitoring. 10. Compressor oil failure input, (One per compressor). 11. Compressor operational proof, (One per compressor as measured by current sensors). 12. Manual compressor operation status alarm. 13. Refrigerant liquid temperature at high pressure receiver outlet. 14. High pressure receiver liquid level. 15. Subcooler outlet temperature. 16. Liquid manifold temperatures. 17. Liquid manifold pressures. 18. High pressure receiver rupture disk tranducers (high pressure) (2). 19. High/low by pass pressure transducer (high pressure) 20. Rack shutdown proof, (summation of all individual compressor operational proofs). 21. Enclosure temperature. 22: Ambient temperature, sensor located on condenser. 23. Digital Scroll DDCM module alarm output. 2.7 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Installation of refrigeration system controls devices, enclosures and associated interconnecting wiring shall be in conformance with appropriate related Division 26 Sections. B. Factory wire unit disconnect such that one main disconnect switch will interrupt both main and control power to the unit. C. Include separate designated factory wired 120 volt circuits for control panels. D. Interconnecting network wiring between REMS components and boards. Cable: Belden 8641 or equivalent. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) E. Include a holster and stainless steel tether in control panel for CPC handheld interface terminal. F. Wire sensors and other input devices directly to input boards in panels. G. Wire EEPR control cables directly to ESR boards in panel. H. Wire compressor control circuits to terminal strips in motor control panels. I. Wire rack solenoid valves to terminal strips in motor control panels. J. Wire electronic sub - cooler controller in accord with manufacturer's instructions. K. Wire receiver heating element contactor to a terminal strip and control with REMS. L. Wire enclosure ventilation contactor to terminal strip and control with,REMS. M. Low Voltage Cable Installation Guidelines: 1. Cables pulled in exposed areas: Run at 90 degree angles, pull neatly, and hide from view whenever possible. 2. Tie down cables carefully. Secure or support cables to prevent sagging. Zip cable ties down snug. 3. Install conduit sleeves or rubber grommets for cables passing through panels, cabinet partitions, or barriers with sharp edges. 4. Connect conduit sleeves with cables entering or passing through with an insulated throat or plastic bushing on each end. 5. Mount panels and devices level and plumb. 6. Pull cables continuously from one panel to another. 7. Mark wires and cables on both ends in accord with rack manufacturer's wiring diagrams and documentation. 8. Leave sufficient slack or provisions for access, at critical points, to control panel wiring, for common electrical measurement devices such as amp probes. 9. Insulate refrigerant line temperature sensors to match adjacent piping insulation, refer to Section 24 0719. 10. Insulate sensors on non - insulated piping with minimum 3/8 -inch thickness of fiberglass insulating material and secure with foil tape. Extend minimum of 3- inches on either side of sensors. N. Two piece RTCR Units: 1. Provide pin boxes and terminal strips for the field, interconnection of all low voltage and power wiring connections between the compressor and condenser sections. Label each interconnection point and provide field wiring diagrams in the compressor section pin box. PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK CONTROLS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 0935 (15683) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 2315 (15630) COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK. AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQU:IREI). PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes installation of the following: 1. Halocarbon refrigeration piping. 2. Relief vent piping. 3. Refrigerant oil and charge. 4. Condensate drain piping from refrigerated equipment. B. Section also includes the following Commissioning activities: 1. Pressure testing. 2. Evacuating. C. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 07 8400 — Firestopping. D. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. E. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. F. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. G. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. H. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ARE "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". C. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". E. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". F. AWS, "American Welding Society". G. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ® ", "Building Materials Directory". H. EPA, "Environmental Protection Agency ", Title VI, Clean Air Act. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 24 2315 (15630) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Reference Section 24 0110 for Refrigeration Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation materials shall be new and without defect. Workmanship shall be of highest quality. If requested, refrigeration contractor shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to, material test reports, packing slips, material data sheets, employee qualification and training documentation records, brazed joints, insulation mock ups, leak testing, and electrical function testing records. B. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 -2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". 2. ANSI/ASME Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 3. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Furnish safety (pressure relief) valves complying with ASME code and stamped with appropriate code symbols. C. Refrigeration contractor and manufacturers are responsible for quality of brazing done by their organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store refrigeration pipe and fittings in a clean and dry location, minimum of 1 -foot above surrounding floor or grade. Receive fittings and store in closed containers or cartons, and store copper piping with rubber end plugs in place. Do not install copper tubing left uncapped for more than one day as refrigeration piping. B. Deliver brazing materials, flux, solvents, glues, sealants, insulation materials, lubricants, oils, and refrigerants required to complete refrigeration installation and store on job site in manufacturer's original packaging or crating with labeling intact and fully legible. C. Maintain on site, MSDS sheets for materials, compounds, and chemicals stored at job site. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Include as part of overall project installation warranty coverage refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Pressure Control Hoses: Factory assembled SEC99B Ultra Tube Armored Tubing as manufactured by Johnson Controls. (No home -made hoses are acceptable.) B. Refrigeration piping: 1. Dehydrated, hard drawn ACR type L seamless copper tubing with nitrogen charge. Manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B 280. Use type K copper where required by State or Local Codes. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller Industries b. Cerro Flow Products, Inc c. CMC Howell Metal 2. Dehydrated soft drawn ACR type L seamless copper tubing with nitrogen charge. Manufactured in accord ' with ASTM B 88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B 280. Use type K copper where required by State or Local Codes. Soft copper tubing may only be used for liquid line expansion loops within gas defrost cases. Acceptable manufacturers: ' a. Mueller Industries b. Cerro Flow Products, Inc COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 242315(15630) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) c. CMC Howell Metal C. Walk -in Evaporator Coil Condensate Drain Piping: Type L seamless copper tubing manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Mueller Industries 2. Cerro Flow Products, Inc 3. CMC Howell Metal D. Copper Fittings: ASME -B 16.22 wrought copper streamlined pattern or forged brass, only long radius elbows. No 45 degree fittings are allowed. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Mueller Industries . 2. NDL Industries, Inc. E. Changes in Direction: Use copper fittings to -make changes in direction. For piping 5/8" OD or less, changes in direction can be made using tubing bender on hard copper piping. No soft copper allowed for any piping or changes in direction with the exception of case liquid line expansion loops, see part 2.1 B.2. F. Piping Transitions: Use factory- fabricated fittings. (No crimping, swaging, or stab -in connections allowed.) G. Branch Connections: Make with either fittings or with use of a Tee puller. H. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag -1 (Silver). 'I. Case Condensate Piping: ASTM D -1785 schedule 40 PVC piping made from plastic compounds conforming to ASTM D -1784. J. PVC Fittings: Schedule 40 socket type, ASTM D -2466. Made from plastic compounds conforming to ASTM D 1784. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0529 for pipe support spacing, excavating and backfilling, and other installation related requirements. B. Accurately measure, and cut refrigeration piping to length with a tubing cutter. Do not use a hacksaw or abrasive type cutter on refrigeration piping. C. Ream cut ends to full diameter, and remove burrs created during cutting process. D. Remove oxides and surface soil from pipe ends and fitting cups with abrasive cloth, abrasive pads, or properly sized fitting brush. E. Carefully assemble all joints prior to brazing, inserting tube all way into the fitting cup, firmly against stop. F. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature fluctuations inherent in operation of these types of refrigeration systems. G. Use extreme care to keep refrigerant piping clean and dry. Keep piping sealed when.not working directly at a specific location or joint. Do not leave open refrigerant piping ends unattended during installation process! Visibly inspect pipe and fittings prior to assembly. Swab as necessary with alcohol soaked cloth to remove dirt, filings, or visible moisture. H. Braze joints in refrigerant piping with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Continuously flush piping during brazing process with dry nitrogen to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. Target reserves the right to inspect refrigeration system for oxidation. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 24 2315 (15630) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET I. Target may, at their discretion require refrigeration contractor or equipment manufacturer to remove up to 5 joints from their refrigeration system or equipment to inspect for oxidation. If 1 joint is found to have excessive scaling, additional joints shall be removed: If 4 joints are found to be oxidized, responsible entity shall re -work all joints at their expense. J. Protect affected valves and control devices during brazing process by disassembling and removing heat sensitive parts or use of heat shields. K. Install piping to prevent vibration and undue strain on pipe and fittings. Refer to Section 24 0529 for pipe hanger and support spacing and in accord with details on "R" Series Drawings. L. Install cushioned pipe clamps for vertical risers over 6 feet in height as detailed in "R" Series Drawings. In general, clamps are not required on horizontal piping. However, there may be special conditions which dictate requirement to clamp horizontal piping. M. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner with horizontal runs sloped continuously downward toward compressor rack at a rate of 1 -inch per 20 feet. N. Support bends and changes of direction within 10 inches of bend/change. O. Oil Traps: 1. Required at base of suction risers exceeding 6 feet in length. 2. Intermediate traps required every 15 feet for vertical suction riser. 3. Inverted trap required at top of each suction riser. P. Size vertical risers with a minimum gas velocity of 1000 feet per minute. Q. Size liquid lines with less than 2 deg F change in saturation temperature and a liquid velocity of less than 300 fpm. R. Size suction lines with a horizontal gas velocity greater than 500 feet per minute and pressure drop not to exceed a change in saturated refrigerant temperature of 2 deg F. S. Suction headers to have individual circuits entering top of header. T. Control Tubing: 1. Install tubing such that there is sufficient slack. Avoid stretching and sharp bends. Properly support tubing away from contact with sharp or abrasive objects. 2. Always connect control tubing to refrigeration system or components through a service valve. 3. Remove breakaway Schrader® valve depressor. 4. Do not over torque flare nuts. U. Liquid headers to have individual circuits exiting side or bottom. V. Correct piping, as deemed by Target Refrigeration Department, to be installed incorrectly at refrigeration contractor's expense. W. Braze copper -to- steel, brass -to -steel or steel -to -steel joints using solder with minimum of 45 percent silver content. X. OSR or GC shall visually inspect refrigerant piping and insulation prior to being covered. Y. Refer to Section 24 0719 for installation of refrigeration piping insulation and Section 24 0553 for identification markers and tags. Z. Refer to Section 07 8400 for firestopping of piping penetrations through fire rated assemblies. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to concealing joints with insulation or piping in walls, floors, or ceilings clean and test in accord with ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigerant Piping ". These sections of piping must be installed entirely leak -free and remain pressurized until their final connection is made. B. Pressurize piping to minimum of 300 psig with dry nitrogen and physically test all joints with a soap solution. Piping must hold pressure for minimum of 24 hours prior to concealing. Do not release pressure until making final connections. COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 24 2315 (15630) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Verify that concealed piping is still pressurized to 300 psig holding pressure prior to making final equipment connections. 3.4 PRESSURE TESTING A. Prior to charging a refrigeration system perform a complete system pressure and leak test with dry nitrogen or other acceptable inert gas in accord with ANSI/ASME B 31.5, "Refrigerant Piping" and the following protocol: 1. Minimum 2 weeks prior to testing notify OSR and Target Refrigeration Engineer by fax. Also, Target Engineering must have on file, a copy of refrigerant handling license for responsible technician. (Refer to Article 1.5, "Submittals ", of this Section). 2. Isolate electronic pressure transducers and relief valves. 3. Systematically pressurize each individual branch with suction and liquid line isolation valves closed. Increase pressure on branch to 15 psig with an approved tracer gas. Increase pressure on branch to 150 psig for low side and 300 psig for high side, including liquid lines, with dry nitrogen. Inspect accessible joints with an approved leak detection device. 4. Systematically pressurize each refrigeration component and piping to 15 psig with an approved tracer gas. Raise pressure to 150 psig for low side and 300 psig for high side, including liquid lines, with dry nitrogen, and leak check each joint whether mechanical or welded with an approved leak detection device. 5. Repair detected leaks and re- pressurize. 6. Entire low side of system must hold 150 psig and high side of system, including liquid lines, must hold 300 psig for minimum of 24 -hours prior to purging. 7. Upon successful conclusion of test, reduce pressure on system to 0 psig using approved and legal methods. 3.5 EVACUATION PROCEDURE A. Evacuate system with a vacuum pump specifically designed and manufactured for vacuum duty, with a capacity of at least 8 cfm. B. Connect pump to both high side and low side of refrigeration system with at least 3/8 -inch copper tubing. C. Open valves unless unit contains a factory charge of refrigerant. D. Evacuate system to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1500 µmHg. E. Increase pressure on entire system to 2 psig using a non -CFC refrigerant. F. Repeat steps D and E three times. G. Evacuate to 500 µmHg and hold for 24 hours. H. Verify vacuum procedure and test with Target OSR or TRA. I. Break final vacuum with refrigerant to be used in final charge of system. J. See Target MR -RS Re -Used RTCR Guidelines document for special testing and evacuation procedures required on re -used RTCR units. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain a clean and orderly work area. On a weekly basis remove from jobsite scrap, waste, and debris resulting from refrigeration related work. B. On completion of refrigerated work, remove tools, equipment, excess materials, scrap, waste, and other debris resulting from work, and clean walk -in coolers /freezers, roof areas adjacent to condensers, and refrigeration compressor house, to meet Target's standards. END OF SECTION COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 24 2315 (15630) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COMMERCIAL REFRIGERATION PIPING 24 2315 (15630) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 3623 (15615) INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES ,(OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK. AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handing, and erecting Owner Furnished walk -in cooler and freezer boxes. Refer to Section 11 4125. B. Administratively work of this Section governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is to be responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 8113 — Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). C. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. E. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration Systems Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. F. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 11 4125 — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers and Freezers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM, "American Society of Testing Materials ". B. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". C. USDA, "United States Department of Agriculture ". D. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ® ", "Building Materials Directory". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigeration contractor is responsible for vapor barrier integrity of walk -in cooler and freezer boxes erected as part of their contract and shall employ craftsmen with a minimum of 5 -years experience installing similar cold storage units, to assemble insulated panel enclosures and seal utility or hanger penetrations. 1 1 1 1 1 111. 1 1 1 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Furnish necessary labor, materials, and equipment to receive, unload, handle, and store Owner Furnished walk -in cooler and freezer box panels, trim, and other associated items. B. Examine and inventory items furnished. Report damaged and missing items to OSR. C. Store components for walk -in coolers and freezers in a clean dry location above floor with sufficient support to prevent sag, warp, or deflection of panels and trim parts. D. Prior to assembly, protect components as necessary from damage, moisture, soiling, and theft during storage. 1 INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 24 3623 (15615) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.7 COORDINATION A. Assist with layout of and review installation of special cooler and freezer floor slabs with General Contractor. B. Consult with Division 26 contractor to layout conduit penetrations through walk -in cooler and freezer box insulated panels. C. Consult with Division 21 fire protection sprinkler systems contractor to review sprinkler piping penetrations through walk -in cooler and freezer box insulated panels. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealing materials at temperatures above or below manufacturer's recommendations or to damp or frosted surfaces. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Include warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. B. Over and above general warranty provisions referenced above, guarantee vapor tight integrity of insulated panel joints, floor -to -wall, wall -to- ceiling, and utility penetrations, for a period of 3 years from date of grand opening. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Furnish sufficient quantities of urethane foam insulation material to seal walk -in cooler and freezer box panel gaps as required by Refrigeration Drawings and this Section as follows: 1. "Versi- Foam®" by RHI3 Foam Systems Inc. or equal. VOC — 0 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Walk -in boxes are not to be erected until after roof is on building and area is dry. B. Verify that cooler and freezer walk -in box floor slabs are stable, smooth, and level prior to installing alignment strip. C. Verify that freezer floor vapor barriers have been installed. D. Verify location of thermal breaks prior to installation of walk -in freezers. If thermal breaks and wall panels do not align, do not proceed with installation of wall panels until thermal break positioning is corrected. Notify GC and Target OSR immediately of any discrepancies. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to pouring of concrete floor slabs for walk -in cooler and freezer boxes work with General Contractor to accurately locate and layout walk -in freezer insulated floor and recessed cooler floor. (Refer to Structural and Refrigeration Drawings). 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Sweep floor and layout outside dimensions of box with a chalk line. Refer to Refrigeration Drawings for establishing perpendicular lines. Then measure half wall thickness to find center line of wall panel layout. 2. Trim excess freezer sub -slab vapor barrier sheeting and seal to floor slab. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 24 3623 (15615) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3. Shim alignment strips to level and secure with 20 gage reinforcing angles, straight and level to floor slabs and thermal isolation blocking, at center line of wall panel layout using 2 -inch powder activated anchors for coolers and 3 -inch deck screws for freezers. 4. Prior to application of sealants and calking, wipe down or clean surfaces. 5. Apply butyl calking, utilizing a pneumatic caulking gun to attain a continuous and consistent 1/2 -inch bead on insulated panels and floor slabs as indicated on Refrigeration Drawing Sheets to achieve complete vapor seal • at joints. 6. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to panel joints as directed on Refrigeration Drawings and finish so as to eliminate harborages. 7. Refer to Section 24 0719 as it applies to sealing penetrations, including those made by other trades. B. Wall Panels: 1. Assemble wall panels, including pre - mounted door section, in order and manner indicated on manufacturer's shop drawing, installation instructions, and Refrigeration Drawings. 2. Install panels true, plumb, and in alignment. 3. Cam lock panels together and install vinyl plugs in cam lock access holes. 4. Foam gaps under panels "Only where Gap Exceeds 1/4- inch." Trim excess foam from joints and apply a smooth and even layer of sealant to form a vapor barrier over all foamed joints. C. Ceiling Panels: 1. Assemble ceiling panels in order and manner indicated on manufacturer's shop drawing, installation instructions, and "R" Series Drawings. 2. Align and position ceiling panels so that they line up flush with wall panels. 3. Lag screw ceiling panels to wall panels, cam lock ceiling panels together, and install vinyl plugs in cam lock access holes. 4. Foam wall to ceiling joints "Only where Gap Exceeds 1/4- inch." Trim excess foam from joints and apply a smooth and even layer of sealant to form a vapor barrier over all foamed joints. 5. Install dairy cooler ceiling support structure per Refrigeration details and manufacturers instructions. Ceiling hanger brackets supplied by walk -in manufacturer. Overhead strut, hanger rod and other hardware provided and installed by refrigeration contractor. 6. Attach hangers and supports to bar joist chords, within 6- inches of panel points. (Panel point is where vertical or angular member of joist is attached to top chord). 7. Install and adjust dairy cooler glass doors per manufacturer's instructions. Seal finished opening and adjust doors for level swing and closure after installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust pre -hung cooler and freezer doors for proper seal and operation. Include strikes, latches, hinges, sweeps and closers integrator. B. Verify function of vacuum breaker vent, door heaters, and lighting. C. Touch -up scratches and abrasions to pre - finished facing paint or gel coat to match factory applied finish. D. Remove protective covering and strippable films just prior to turnover day. E. Clean out walk -in boxes and dispose of construction debris and un -used parts upon completion of box assembly. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 24 3623 (15615) - 3 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN COOLER AND FREEZER BOXES 24 3623 (15615) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 3823 (15641) INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR. OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF • WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing, field assembly, start- up, and adjustment for Owner Furnished grocery display cases. B. Work related to installation of grocery display cases which is not part of refrigeration scope and therefore not included as part of this Section is installation and termination of power wiring and conduits for case heaters, lighting, and fans. C. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. F. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Section 24 3824 — Tyler Supplemental Service Manual — N5FGNA Defrost Conversion Instructions. J. Section 24 3825 — Tyler Supplemental Service Manual — P5FGNA Defrost Conversion Instructions. K. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 REFERENCES A. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". E. ASTM, "American Society for Testing and Materials ". F. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". G. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". H. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". I. UL "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ® ", "Building Materials Directory". INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 24 3823 (15641) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Furnish necessary labor, materials, and equipment to receive, unload, and move into place, Owner Furnished grocery display cases, (both refrigerated and non - refrigerated). B. Handle, lift, move, and set refrigeration equipment, cases, trim parts, or other grocery display accessories in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and use extreme care in a manner which will not damage or reduce serviceability of item. C. Refrigeration contractor shall be held liable for damage to Owner Furnished refrigeration equipment, cases, trim parts, or other grocery display accessories, which are covered by this Section, during installation. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Include warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify plumbing, electrical, and refrigeration locations pertaining to refrigerated display cases prior to pouring of concrete floors. Notify OSR or General Contractor immediately of coordination issues. C. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing for transporting equipment and final location to verify that they are free of interferences, comply with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. D. Verify condition of floor slabs and location of all refrigeration related stub ups prior to setting refrigerated display cases. Check slopes, finishes, and surface conditions. Mark locations of underground drain pipes, chases, and conduits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Furnish labor, material, and equipment necessary to receive and move Owner furnished grocery display cases and case accessories to interior of store. Report detected damages to General Contractor and Target OSR immediately. B. Unpack cases, case wedges, and end cap displays. Remove shipping tape, supplemental shipping brackets, and properly dispose of shipping materials, crating, skids, and waste. C. Position, level, align, anchor, calk joints and assemble case line -ups as according to manufacturer's published 'instructions and in locations specified on Construction Drawings. D. Assembly of case line -ups includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Remove and replace access panels. 2. Apply manufacturer supplied sealants between cases and gaskets. 3. Buckle together cases, case wedges and end cap displays. 4. Install case, close -off panels, trim parts, fan kits, bumpers, color band parts, raceway covers, and kick plates, as shown in Refrigeration Drawings. E. Install case condensate lines of matching or larger size than factory furnished trap on each fixture. Route condensate lines as shown in Refrigeration Drawings and install in compliance with local plumbing codes. INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 24 3823 (15641) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) F. Install interconnecting refrigeration suction and liquid piping between refrigerated display cases and refrigeration . compressor racks or condenser /compressor units, as indicated in Section 24 2315 and shown in Refrigeration Drawings. G. Refer to Section 24 0719 for installation of mechanical insulation materials and practices. H. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. I. Refer to Section 24 0110 for commissioning of refrigeration equipment. J. Install Owner furnished produce misting systems in wet produce cases in accord with manufacturer's published instructions. Systems include a base controller, timer, drain tube, an expansion tank, and mister bars with nozzles. (Note: RO water piping provided to cases by Division 22.) K. Adjust glass -doors for proper fit and swing. L. Inspect all re -used cases for damaged or non - functional parts and report any required maintenance to Target OSR. M. Inspect all re -used cases for potential air leaks through door seals, joints or penetrations. Seal any leaks prior to cases re- installation N. Prior to separating cases or disconnecting condensate drain lines, power wash existing re -used cases prior to relocation O. Provide calking and gaskets required to re -seal cases joints on existing re -used cases. P. Install Owner Furnished defrost conversion kits for existing re -used cases when required. Q. Install correctly sized, replacement expansion valves for existing re -used medium temperature cases that move from R -22 to R404a refrigeration systems. New expansion valves and orifices Owner. Furnished. 3.3 CONVERSION OF RE -USED CASES A. Refer to attached Tyler Document, Part No. 5153270, "Supplemental Installation & Service Materials, N5FGNA Defrost Conversion Instructions for Target ". B. Refer to attached Tyler Document, "Supplemental Service Manual — P5FGA- P5FGNA Defrost Conversion Instructions for Target ". C. Use the appropriate defrost conversion manual depending on re -used case models. Coordinate correct defrost conversion kits with Tyler. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install grocery display cases according to manufacturer's published installation manuals, both case specific and general (UL/NSF). 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of construction debris from cases, including trash and un -used materials for top of cases. In addition vacuum out cases. B. Final cleaning of cases, and installation and adjustment of shelving are responsibility of Target. C. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of asset identification tags and other required identification markings. D. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve superheat as required to obtain proper coil operation. Refer to 2010 Target MR/RS Refrigeration Superheat Settings document. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 24 3823 (15641) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF GROCERY DISPLAY CASES 24 3823 (15641) - 4 .Mill /N/EPE1f.31[' 1IerAdvanLageSeties Supplemental Installation & SeMce Manual Defrost Conversion Instructions for Target Corporation Converting Electric Defrost to Hot Gas Defrost for Tyler Case Model Numbers N5FGNA 2 to 5 Door/Glass Door Merchandisers 1hoearn mhandisare aorr smr 1n th® Arnariam Satendiuda IreCihala &103F InGumation& Hod& mak li1 t n atundani ANSLOWSF 7 1 1 1 1 1 Contents INTRODUCTION 4 CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 4 Electrical Changes 4 Piping Changes 6 REFRIGERATION NOTE 6 ASC Installation Instructions 7 Table A 7 Gas Defrost Liquid Lines 8 WIRING DIAGRAMS 8 Parts List B174926 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 2DR 11 Parts List B174927 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 3DR 11 Parts List B174928 RETRO,ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 4DR 11 Pmts List B174929 RETRO,ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 5DR 11 Part Number Locations 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Supplemental Installation & Service Materials N5FGNA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION These instructions layout and explain the steps to convert the N5FGNA cases from electric defrost to hot gas defrost. "this field oonversbn shout! only be performed by a qualified service technician, CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS WARNING Before performing these conversion instructions, shut off electrical power to the case to avoid personal injury anchor death. Electrical Changes Remove raceway cover (1) following the "Raceway Cover Removal's instructions in the "General i&S Manual". 1 2. Remove bottom trays (2) from case (3). 3.. Disconnect front and back defrost heater wires (4 & 5) from terminals 22 & 25 on the 208 VAC termi- nal block n. 1 1 1 1 48.5 &9 9 CAPON! !eAttP3. P(TWER SUPPLY 4. Disconnect defrost heater klixon wires (7 & 8) from terminals 24 & 25 on the 208 VAC terminal block (• 5. Disconnect drain pan heater wire (9) from terminal 2 on the fan control relay (10). 6.. Disconnect two bladk wires (11 & 12) from termi- nals 3 & 11 on the 120 VAC terminal block (13). 14 &15 16 1? AN M6Y ;41 4Y! .� 81B S o _PO!Y 243vAC '1111. 13 +Cx+4U F ->hEr7 50474,L'T' 120,4C 0002 7 Disconnect drain pan heater klaxon wires (14 & 15) from terminals e & 16 on the 120 VAC terminal block (13), 8. Disconnect fan delay klaxon wires (16 & 17) from terminals 11 & 12 on the 120 VAC terminal block (13), 9. Reconnect drain pan heater wire (9) to terminal 11 on the 120 VAC terminal block (13).. 10, Remove the fan control relay (10), 208 VAC termi- nal block (6) and fuse bock (18) (if applicable) from the raceway Discard these electrical components. December 2000 48812516 N5FGNA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS H III PHOENIX 11. Remove mounting screws and carefully lift and place fan panel (19 ) on top of coil assembly (20). 12. Remove heater retainer clips (21) and lift out front defrost Dater (22) from slots in front of coil assem- bly (2g1, Reinstall the heater clips (21), Discard front defrost heater (22) and heater wire leads (4 & 5) to raceway, 13. Carefully reposition fan panel (19) and secure with mounting screws. 14. Remove mounting screws and top coil closeoff (23) from coil assembly (20). 15, Remove heater retainer clips (21) and lift out rear defrost heater (24) from slots in rear of coil as- mbly (20). Reinstall the heater retainer clips (21). Discard rear defrost heater (24) and heater wire leads (4 & 5) to raceway. 16. install top coil closeoff 3) on top of coil assembly, (20) and secure with rnounting screws. N5FGNA E EIectrirc Defrost Termination 1301301 Ms Defrost Fan Delay Elect OeIroet (4 0) Gas Defrost (25110, 0 = Gas Defrost drain Pan eater (70140 FiS = Electric Defrost Failsate (tali.) 17. Remove defrost termination kl boon, fan delay klaxon and fallsafe kifxon from the return bends on the right end of the coil assembly (2), Discard the klixons. NOTE. The drain pan heater kfixon (70/40) stays on the right side of the fan panel, 16. Install a new gas defrost fan delay klaxon (25/10) on the second front return bend on the coil assembly (20). NOTE. The defrost termination klaxon for gas defrost will be located to the Ieft of the bypass check valve on the new gas defrost piping. 411812516 December 2009 5 Supplemental Installation & Service Materials NSFGNA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Piping Changes WARNING Be sure to position a flame and heat resistant shield over the bottom of the case liner. Heat from torch for melting and brazing could damage the liner and/or cause personal injury or death. REFRIGERATION NOTE The liquid lines to top of case and headers need to be changed per Target RS Legend. The top liquid line header is eliminated. Multiple case line-ups require a 7/8" header in the cases per hot gas circuit. Single cases and case circuits require a 5/8" liquid line to be run to top of case. The suction lines and header do not change. These are field modifications. See "Gas Defrost Liquid Lines" on page 6. BEFORE 1. Cut out the components as shown in the "Before" illustration and save the liquid valve assembly. 2. Unbraze distributor (see ASC Installation Instruc- tions on page 7) from TXV and add ASC sideout. Connect liquid line assembly to the ASC as shown in the "After" illustration. TVTIMINNTICH ,110EE OCA1.0 FOrT, AFTER 3. Add suction line pipe. 4. Connect liquid valve assembly. 6 December 2009 iiR812516 Supplemental Installation & Service Materials N5FGNA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ASC Installation Instructions A Important: TXV must be wrapped with wet rags when unbrazing distributor from TXV and when brazing ASC to TXV. B. Important: Remove current nozzle in distributor and discard. C. The new nozzle will be packaged in the ASC Kit along with retairing ring. Confirm the orifice size is correct for case type by referring to Table A and Fig- ure 18. Install new nozzle in ASC as shown in Figure 17 and secure with retaining ring. D. Connect ASC to distributor and to TXV as shown in Figure 17 acrd braze. New Node Connect' onnect this and to TXV Remove Nozzle and discard Retaining Ring Connect this end to distributor Flg.17 AEC instalatlon Diagram ORIFICE NUMBER Fig. 18 Nozzle NOTE: L Type Is NOT stamped on Nozziel Table A Aeu:AuxiiiaTif Stclonnect Installation Instructbns The anrilfary side mnmc ar (ASC) permits the conversion of Commntions! Sporimm rehigeremt dietributors for hot gas bypass, het gas detioetg or referee cycle saviors. Man ASCs arm ibr use with Spcalam Distributors only Reiter to Bulletin so-ie Bar complete ealecNan and appikeiion info mation. L Remove the nozzle and refiner ring ibmn the convemilonal refrigerant distrib- utor and rB- install in the inlet of the Bide owned= See Rgua L FOR USE ON REFRIGERATION BntllorAlR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS °WY Ctrl eB ey acerlanMen om.inny, .. 2. The oast pazrtian of the ASC is slipped aver the dietrilnster inlet and brazed in placa Do NOT place tuning between ASC and di dributam Sae Figure 2 & The inlet of the ABC is Blipped into the thermostatic e=pazaiom valve nutlet and brazed in plan. Soo Figure 2. 4. The auzii►ary aide connection ie made as required by the particular epgalicatica Pitigal In U.S.. d A Case Orifice Number Nozzle litter AEC Kit 4 PEFGN5 P6FGN4, N5Ff3N5 1/2 L P0789970 P6F3N3, N5FCN4 1/3 L P078996K PSFGN2, NSFCN2, N5Ft3N3 1/4 L P078995A wrm SD44 to -1oo2 1RB12618 December 209 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 N5FGNA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Hill PHOENIX • Heider along eases - 7,8-• - . • Lino into casoit ars ethways 112" • " " Note: Tees point down Attain tiguki line must be 5.4- minimum (even voth Just 1 case) Gas Defrost Liquid Lines Gas defrost liquid lines to the cases should be branched off the bottom of the header. This ensures a full column of liquid to the expansion valve. A branch line from the header to an individual case should be over 3' long and must have 3" expansion loop incor- porated. Do not run suction or liquid lines through cases that are part of a separate system, especially if either has gas defrost. If there is no way to avoid this, insulate the piping for the portion that runs through the other cases. Temperature variations of refrigeration and defrost cycles cause piping to expand and contract. Allowing for this expansion and contraction will prevent piping failunes. WIRING DIAGRAMS 3' 3' Max. for gas defrost The following are typical expansion rates for copper tubing: -100°F to -40°F = 2.5" per 100 foot run (ultra low temp) -40°F to 0°F = 2" per 100 foot run (low temp) 0°F to 30°F = 1.5" per 100 foot run (medium temp) 30°F to 50°F = 1" per 100 foot run (high temp) Expansion loops are designed to provide a definite amount of travel. Placing the loop in the middle of a piping run will allow for maximum pipe expansion with the minimal amount of stress on the loop. Don't use 45 degree elbows for loop construction because they will not allow the lines to flex. Suction and liquid lines cannot be joined together or be allowed to touch. Pipe hangers must not restrict the expansion and contraction of piping. Insulation on suction and liquid lines makes the whole system more efficient! Insulate - it pays! The following wiring diagrams on the following pages show the wiring circuits for the N5FGNA cases with electric and hot gas defrost. December 2009 SR812518 NSFGNA Domestic & Export (SO Hz) Case Circuits (Electric Defrost for Target) —ow/1,EL 91.vn,04- eat (Aka • WM • • IP • 11. S - • "I P., - -10.01,C/g • .16111t- II• Gsbarri 1 w4Tit■Lu ilk - LL CR 14ZATEn3 11141 1TE • • •RX. * rbLetam H1411.M .-4mTABLK Wan FRANPIE ••SS 11E1,7E175 CVAPORAMC AN MINIMS •- • •- APliTiVrt)- -••• <•14( (Pi F 3i .° 4L rA1).,.4411 yP CO Nu 4 AM- DEL i, Kt Kt, (101!. 14.:. 4n .1r '7.1.criE 5 2 ) • r CR A N PAN AT Xt 1 MAI (OPIENN ,rm1$ WV) CrEFRO57 *ICA ER 1041 C.U..11.°C.4 (V31.74 SO•.CuOSE •0'1• ctp Rot rfEA ER'S ••••• .r• OnAtti PAN MtAft4 GROUNDED CASES MUST 0112516 Decentkw NB MI MI 111111 MN 111111 11M1 NM MS la IMO En 111111 11•11 11111 2 APPC 12 I 2 211111.24125 A WM* NW 4122101, DP r 1 00 L - V A 2 :yr •CIIVII titt- acii 1.0 VA VP 10411441311414 TKCIPW1314.1 Wt. lel 14 'V . CiS.40 4 • I it 2 44,q.' • minim 2 A 1 'El 11301fftr 011 T121 PIDf 12C1.(DI lilt Al Kt** I KV mai rm Geo, 04. lit ON T41 Co4,0*-4VCAI CO MOKIA oppomit, COR.0111n vot rr M4 Od L I t‘ 114113 5 tot latoki i 144 4 NI iO-iT E4 ttr CC1L EL Wit FIX214 I xpmgct otApi, mink PROW IMAM to MANI CCNNetT AllitE/OLACA Rift I, ttftinal m \Mt I "XX kJ( WU 1 NA L I 4 QOTE: ALL CASE$ MUST FE GROUNDEO Pk) 110TE uct n:flat0 Coneu: too: day 0�1 ActAlAcLAttr HSA1LPS NO*LY IOWAti- FO4r rat liXITOPt." RAO. AWN 1 vrAlE0S. PCsiCR NUM,: 1VM. etfra ,o■ c vs.,..5 .e- 0 ...+- NIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIINIIIIIIIIIIIIINNN 1.1111111.110 1 : MD. Mil Di NB; DI IIII D r- IlD 13 ' 11:=3111=1111 ICI 1=13 an ircv F . LiGHT5 PoolcIR pptY 1:04C 60,4 UPC00. TA r spEcAL DIAGRAM WRG HO OFR TOM' NI.WGNA 9.27 N5FCNA Domestic & Export (50 Hz) Case Circuits (Hot Gas Defrost for Target) MI MI NIB IIIIIII INI NS NMI MINI OW INN MI MN II•1 MI all WM 1.:10 e..V'eTa 1 c:u i. • ".". ,e.• 1-17 ••••, 4 L•"5:2:3.'„4":'r;..::1 .D•71.77 -:-:---v.-,4;j11 C.Mt ca. ter rit...17; • ,761..1 :a Is col ty.74 Y iy twc•i..) v.!!- .0rr riV•I :•.1 • 1'113 rrail ;•-.14 C"it .-.••••-.• .13 1 .43J,;•!•.1 • • . • • 7 15 •.0 .1Q 7■2' 114 ,ir. 676,1461-11 of . 472,tia`: IsCrSOOS - • --•• I I ■• 1 .1 j ri ; . . -.... • •••,- ilk 0•.‘ •5ei 1 r''. .• a S'O.:330 .1. 1,-; r. tilt.d , i t — • ' ',••1111°- ft • aaaaaa•-•--.4.. • 71 - ' I I . ...I Zi .LI4 : if -Z‘ 41 4 9 1 4.V trt zr, St:An Gt /1174., 04,-Vtv :ifs,' • Z... • Ft013.40' 'NJ oF0A! c..t1 111 kle c-7;v7, aYT- 11.11 • ol^, • •• I • ar 0 .10 sr, ••• • t4at.-' :17.4:47-Z.A•7t,2 - • 1. 2.4» Xittt. ;JO VS •••4a1.- t..; - fa 1;•P. \••••-•:# ele4ni ; "C 1 .)t-11 'RE* L F 1 1 N5FC(N) Case Circuits (Hot Gas Defrost for Target) 11 r1.11 ilVt ' 1,41 hn H MAC' i 0 ; .7,4041.111 44411.(4.4., 41,f1- 1 Ci r‘. :r ti 10" ...erc 0.11*-2:f34 t • • 1 14101 • h •i • r) • A:1— 1,0 !.(f•C -4, 4444.444)4.44 '41 tahli:41 'Dad 4. 1.:;1144=7 • i.4 .1 Li 3•A•1 ii311 p•• avY. ,lt2110.1 ILIA" t,tC41 141,44 1,411/. 11N(.20 04•;..4.4S• • ,a) iv 4441.4*. 1.41,44.3 4• 410 .14 tr, 1.4 'TO: 4444 eb [ 44 , h■ ,,..... . IM..... q `........ . 1 ---- P . ;'. : 4t L•••:, • , 414 4,?)a i • 11.."::1-(.: io rElt*—+ e;8 0001. ( "Ttg..:,44 Ird .1,,,e,;••0 •. 04 C$ u ' 414.dri, 3•;•4; 4'3. W17:!43 gl 0: t 141,110n ••• n'4.8 ant DJ WV! OW SOOttO MIN UN 11111 11111 NM NM MI NS 111111 11111 11111 11111 NM ON NB MN in SIM MI MIN Ell EMI MN NMI NM NMI 11611 NIB; OW MN IMO MN • IIII1 L, ... • 4.t ,74 1_2 I f : tye • 1:4•;;-: . . . 1.s• , r . NI . ; • f • • • 7:-/."•-•'!".'".- : " 7;7 *77 " • i•;;;`, ,j; • I. • ::'`v.t4,- • .• 40g ..114 .4114,'• 1• Y. •-• :.• ?Vt..- t,•,; '.,...7. ...,4 11,0 ; •;;Ird '' • ;* la P4 ■"....! *Ikr, • oV .1.1,14 • -AV,I, "...-...,,' it."41.7 3:1'e ",....-1'''116.; ts,— 1,1 :7-770 s i • .142:4,0 - ' - •- • -•• . . •-•-•: - - :27 ,;-71,71-1-. ,.. 1 .......... ••• . ______ • 4. ......,- 4 ; .... ;,.. . . • — — 1 1 .. - .— ---4—................■ .7- ' i -7-7.- •-:. • - — - - . • ::•■ " ',*-°°"*" • 0.11 412' :Se .1 I ti ••■.‘,.; • I -•4:•18 • "41 --0 •-••••••• •••■• t- ; ,••••.,J•-•-•; N5FGNA Case Circuits (Electric Defrost for Target) Buck And Boost Transformer Door Heat Option N5FGNA Domestic & Export (50 Hz) Case Circuits (Hot Gas Defrost for Target) YiL 711.AC1C•, • *ME .744 WATERS 0 -I, PLFOKTCR KCMG; 4111'.14- .1tgortdo HCAIC - "CLIC fpx* riztAmt Lkio AASS CAT/MS EVOCIRA ICR Fom It YA FAAEL CRIDUND C'EFT4077 ?4A7111 LIMIT 10Cismau (opcm 7o-r,exce5rN 4o.r) GRCIADED PM 1111.A7-10LAF1/1 I itA1C,31 AT roOLS. oFr 17 7.:VT.A)N 11 Ifpf KATCP1 CI At 259', AT &C11 MIA AI PAN me•TeR 1 CASES ?UST - lung, "%Olt 014 A 11/7 CWLM AAL PIM :g hgn Y017 LACIC 14 December 2009 #R812516 NSFGNA Case Circuits (Hot Gas Defrost for Target) Igt 1 a 4now V 1k 7.SV,7! 1 1 v- •! 110N 31t34c't ',nat.,. 1.33) tt riVt:rif :t1 2t3D1., .1 t3.33ttkt 't • 11:vas V' 1-1ar 1 „I., • •,*,3 €11 i* 7-3r1 041 7V:41: t 4 3Att3w r.: on rtv .11,1tr-.1 4333.-3 gert1.42' .4C :111.',71•0•S111 37I3 1.1 17, 1 '111VX,1014/r, vat .Z.3. rtfitt1 CAD el 1 I [11 1111 • ''"" "••atr=—.1 frOl :nm. 0 .03afttri v .70 .1101 • , 14211.3V L.24 leta l: td tez,3543, *-1,0 S.31:.,114 t3,1 3tV.7Acr3s114-ii' 1:7r 4 'afar. 11ZZAZZ d3r4: qt3-4„M era 3131---4.op ■Jr1 It.34,3036 tt.1 411. N t • W41 Kr.. .r.+3., rt. ; 3Iti, (j .7,3te. 3.14hAti. ittle3.4o OM MO 111111 MIN MN =II MN INN MI MO MS Mil IIIIII MS OM NW MN 0 Supplemental Installation N5FGNA DEFROST & Service Materials CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 8174926 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 2DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 P040847F VL1(CHK,1 /2 ODS NO46308 2 P079077F TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25OEG,5 /8 3 P052443K PRB,CPC, #501- 1127,ORANG E,DTERM 4 P078995A DIST,SP, ASC-4-4, 1/4, KIT 5 P0104048 B F812492GCU 7 F812493ECU 8 F812494CCU 9 F812495ACU, 10 R812516 11 F812699KCU 12 P052099K TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/8X1 /2,NIB9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK 1/2'032 RFLCHK TO TEE 1/2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET 112'032 RFL,SUCTION, N5FGNA '7/$`045 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, N5FG RFL, VLV TO TXV PIPE PROBE CLAMP B174927 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 3DR Diagram HMI PHOENIX Number Port Number Part Description 1 P040847F 2 P079077F 3 P052443K 4 P078995A 5 P0104048 6 F812492GCU 7 F812493ECU 8 F812494CCU 9 F912495ACU 10 R812516 11 F812699KCU 12 P052099K VLV,CHK,1/2 ODS NO#6308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,5 /8 PRB,CPC, #501 -1127, ORANGE,DTERM DIST,SP, ASC -4- 4,1/4, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/BX1 /2,NIB9611 RFLASC TO CHK 1/2'032 RFL,CHK TO TEE '1 /2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET '1/2'032 RFL,SUCTION, NSFGNA '7/8'045 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, N5FG RFL, VLV TO TXV PIPE PROBE CLAMP B174928 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 4DR Diagram HMI PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 P040847F 2 P079077F 3 P052443K 4 P078996K 5 P0104048 6 F812492GCU 7 F812493ECU 8 F812494CCU 9 F812495ACU 10 R812516 11 F812699KCU 12 P052099K VLV,CHK,1 /2 ODS NO46306 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,:25DEG,5 /8 PRB,CPC,4501- 1127,ORANGE,DTERM DISTSP, ASC -4 -4, 113, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/BX1 /2,N IB9611 RFLASC TO CHK '1/2'032 RFLCHK TO TEE 1/2'032. RFL,TEE TO INLET 1/2'032 RFL,SUCTION, N5FGNA `7/8'045 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, N5FG RFL, VLV TO TXV PIPE PROBE CLAMP B174929 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, N5FGN, 5DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Part Description Number Part Number 1 P040847F 2 P079077F 3 P052443K 4 P078997G 5 P0104048 6 F812492GCU 7 F812493ECU 8 F812494CCU 9 F812495ACU 10 R812516 11 F812699KCU 12 P052099K VLV,CHK,1/2ODS NOH6308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,5 /8 PRB,CPC, #501- 112:7,ORANGE,DTERM DIST,SP, ASC -4 -4,1 /2, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/8X1 /2,NIB9611 RFL,ASCTOCHK '1/2'032 RFL,CHK TO TEE 1/2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET 1/24032 RFL,SUCTION, NSFGNA '7/8'045 REF:AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, N5FG RFL, VLV TO TXV PIPE PROBE CLAMP Part Number Locations Fora gn Ft Ow 1 6F,..46,, 16't:: a:: +Ml+ MINIMANNIO,0410 OW. TM/ CCNNECTI t# LOCATIOM$ 6 3 sFw.aw„ia F 12 KM:A 4u nrtiF: AFTER 8 11 LX utL ift5V :VC7.1)A 6tf RTC 16 December2009 #R812516 i N MI MR MI OM MN MN N NM - OM • N M' MI MI NM OM 11111 PHOE JL7C L X C C L L C Tyler Advantage Series Supplernervtal InstaHation & SeMce Manual Defrost Conversion Instructions for Target Corporation Converting Electric Defrost to Hot Gas Defrost for Tyler Case Model Numbers P5FGA • P5FGNA 2 to 5 Door /Glass Door Merchandisers These merchandisers conform to the American Standards Institute & NSF International Health and Sanitation standard ANSIINSF 7 Contents Introduction 4 Electrical Changes 4 Removal of Electrical Defrost Components . 5 Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Components 6 Removal of Electrical Defrost Components 7 Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Components 8 Removal of Electrical Defrost Components 9 Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Components 10. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components 11 Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Components .. 12 Removal of Electric Defrost Heater 21 Removal and Installation of Mixon Sensors 21 Removal of Electrical Defrost Components 22 • Hot Gas Defrost Assembly 22 ASC Installation Instructions 23 Gas Defrost Liquid Lines 24 Parts List B174930 RETRO, ELECTTO HG, P5FGN, 2DR. 25 Parts List 8174931 RETRO, ELECTTO HG, P5FGN, 3DR 25 Parts List B174932 RETRO, ELECTTO HG, P5FGN, 4DR 25 Parts List B174933 RETRO, ELECTTO HG, P5FGN, 5DR 25 Parts List 8174934 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 2D ............. 25 Parts List. B174935 RETRO,EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 3DR 26 Parts List B174936 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 4DR 26 Parts List B174937 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 5DR 26 Part Number Locations 27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P5FGA DEFROST CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Hill PHOENIX Introduction The following are instructions that layout and explain the steps to convert P5FGA and P5FGNA two to five door merchandisers from electric defrost to hot gas defrost. This is a field conversion and should only be performed by a qualified service technician. Note: Procedures in this manual may reference the Tyler General Installation and Service. Manual (Tyler part #9043544), which is available from the Hill PHOE- NIX weblike:htp /wv. hilphoenvx.com/t fquckref/ quickreference.htm. WARNING! Before performing these conversion instructions, make sure to shut off all electrical power to the merchandiser in order to avoid the potential for personal injury or even death. Electrical Changes Note: For both front and top powered models, the removal of the front components is necessary. See Figure 1 for the following procedure: Component Access 1. Remove raceway Dover by following the "Raceway Cover Removal" instructions in the Tyler "General lEtS Manual" . 2. Remove shelving and bottom trays as necessary for access to components. 3. On models with the wiring out the top of the case, remove the junction box covers. The following pages include the procedures to remove the existing electrical components for electric defrost, and the reinstallation of electrical components that support hot gas defrosting. Der 2009 if R812517 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Frozen Cases with Front Wiring P5FGA, P5FGNA —LJ u!,L bLC1C( ri (.30cmp • - • BLI•;: 7-1 2001100 trr 1:).1112S /NU) DLifir k: r A•4 melon. AN). Dll H;fi Cowl Pct. PELAY Highlighted in Figur9 2 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008022 on page 13, are the existing elec- trical components that support electric defrost. The following proceclur9s call out the removal of these components in preparation of adding new hot gas electrical components in their place. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components A Unplug and remove "electric defrost control harness", #2008005 (Fig. 2.A). B. Unplug and remove "hamess for 120v drain pan heater", #2008023 (Fig. 2.B). C. Remove the 'fuse block" from the raceway (Fig. 2.C). D. Remove the "relay" from the raceway (Fig. 2.D). E. Remove defrost heater" and brackets (Fig. 2.E). F. Remove defrost heater termination thermostat" (# 2000727) from coil end. (Fig. 2.F) G. Remove 'fan delay thermostat" (#2000725) from coil end (Fig. 2.G). Rgure highlight af eisctital oomponents ft r/ litrintg DiagraM 424108022 !-1 1- fL y ^:■74(r.1' . . r Figura 2.E ELSE ELCC 304.-mp - • HID • %,e,"7.-2-77-r. -• • cap Rgum Eguria 2C Feguro 2.D Ft ng 2.F 40 R812517 December 2009 5 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Frozen Cases with Front Wiring P5FGA, P5FGNA :44 $ •.$ ; .4. $4 I II 1 I 1 1 • • '7 ' 4IAPI4F:5 Highlighted in Figure 3 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2000766 on page 14, are the existing elec- trical components that support hot gas defrost. The following procedures call out the installation of these components after the removal of the electric defrost components. Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Compo- nents H. Install "fan delay heater therrnostat", #P079083C on coil end as displayed on Figures 3.H and Figures 12, 13, or 14. I. Install P079084A, "hot gas defrost control harness" (Fig. 3.1); 1. Insert rubber grommet into same location as "electric defrost control harness". 2. Plug in all connections a. Fan delay heater thermostat b. Drain pan heater c. Drain pan heater fail-safe thermostat d. Fan motors e. Power supply harness 0 Rguns 1-104ght of electrical companents from wirtg *gam 4209766 Fpue a /4 Rum 3.1 6 December 2009 1R812517 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Frozen Cases with Top Wiring P5FGA, P5FGNA Highlighted in Figure 4 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008037 on page 15, are the existing elec- trical components that support electric defrost. The following procedures call out the removal of these components in preparation of adding new hot gas electrical components in their place. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components A. Unplug and remove "electric defrost control har- ness", #2008011 (Fig. 4.A). B. Unplug and remove "harness for 120v drain pan heater". #2008023 (Fig. 4.B). C. Remove "fuse block" from the junction box (Fig. 4.C). D. Remove the "relay" from the raceway (Fig. 4.D). E. Remove "defrost heater" and brackets (Fig. 4.E). F. Remove defrost heater termination thermostat" (# 2000727) from coil end Fig. 4.F). G. Remove 'fan delay thermostat" ( #2000725) from coil end (Fig. 4G). Fqura4.E 13. H. - w- 1; F47179 4:C F,gura 4.F Rgtria 4A r Figure 4.D Fqura4.G !18812517 Decan'ber 2009 7 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Frozen Cases with Top Wiring P5FGA, P5FGNA rnt K E 1-A3NC;'7 2000745 TO suPPLY Highlighted in Figure 5 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008610 on page 16, are the existing elec- trical components that support hot gas defrost. The following procedures call out the installation of these components after the removal of the electric defrost components. Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Compo- nents H. Install "fan delay heater thermostat", #P079083C on coil end as displayed on Figures 5.H and Figures 12,13, or 14. 1. Install P079084A, "hot gas defrost control harness" (Fig. 3.1). 1. Insert rubber grommet into same location as "electric defrost control harness". 2. Plug in all connections a. Fan delay heater thermostat b. Drain pan heater c. Drain pan heater fail-safe thermostat d. Fan motors e. Power supply harness Fur Right of deer/real components fleet witv &warn 42008610 FogureSi-i December 2009 # R812517 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FC(N)A Dual Temperature Cases with Front Wiring 125FGA, P5FGPIA ■ • • " ' • •*,:••• 0'1 • "1-t rI f f—: • ,} ?rill I .t: * it 6: itittlight ofelactricar =portant fur knettg dagrarn 42008026 Highlighted in Figure 6 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008026 on page 17, are the existing elec- trical components that support electric defrost. The following procedures call out the removal of these components in preparation of adding new hot gas electrical components in their place. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components A Unplug and remove "electric defrost control har- ness", #2008005 (Fig. 6.A). B. Unplug and remove "dual-temperature electric defrost power input harness", #2008269(Fig. 6.B). C. Unplug and remove "dual-temperature fan control harness", .#2008027 (Fig. 6.C). D. Unplug and remove "harness for 120v drain pan heater", #2008023 (Fig. 6.D). E. Remove "DPST relay" that connects to the "fuse block" from the raceway (keep other 2 relays) (Fig. 6.E). F. Remove the "fuse block" from the raceway (Fig. 6.F). G. Remove "defrost heater" and brackets (Fig. 6.G). H. Remove 'defrost heater termination thermostat" (# 2000727) from coil end (Fig. 6.H). I. Remove "fan delay thermostat" (#2000725) from coil end (Fig. 6.1). .• i• ..• .•• La Figura 6.D Rgura 6.13 Fpie 6.R FgRe 6A Rgure 6, C r usE BL 3C< 21.1;,:v ) Rya 6.F 4 R812517 December 2009 9 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Dual Temperature Cases with Front Wiring P5FGA, P5FG NA CM `I MY' 741, :f , • z l`i t •I: 4:.! 1,(4 •1::4.4.• '■ ■•••• Jt F444.11.11 at30 .-r- r r tc , - - r Rim 7. I-Ighfght of electrical =po- t Pent from wiring *gran? 42008039 Highlighted in Figure 7 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008033 on page 18, are the existing elec- trical components that support hot gas defrost. The following procedures call out the installation of these components after the removal of the electric defrost components. Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Compo- nents J. Install "fan delay heater thermostat", #P079083C on coil end as displayed on Figures 7.J and Figures 12,13, or 14. K. Install P079084A, "hot gas defrost control harness" (Fig. 7.1‹). 1. Insert rubber grommet into same location as "electric defrost control harness". 2. Plug in all connections a. Drain pan heater (1 wire) b. Drain pan heater fail-safe thermostat c. Fan motors d. Power supply harness e. Hot gas dual-temp fan control harness (next...) L. Install "hot gas dual-temp fan control harness", P079086G. Plug in all connections (Fig. 7.L). 3 Fgure 7 J Rgure 7.K Rgure 7.L 1. Fan and drain pan heater control relay 2. Fan delay bypassing control relay 3. Hot gas defrost control harness 4. Drain pan heater (1 wire) 5. Fan delay thermostat M. Install "dual-temp hot gas defrost power input hamess", P079085K (Fig. 7.M). 1. Insert rubber gromment into same location as "dual-temp electric defrost power input hamess". 2. Plug in all connections a. Fan and drain pan heater control relay b. Fan delay bypassing control relay c. Terminal block I10 December 2009 4 R812517 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FG(N)A Frozen Cases with Top Wiring P5FGA, P5FGNA Highlighted in Figure 8 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008039 on page 19, are the existing elec- trical components that support electric defrost. The following procedures call out the removal of these components in preparation of adding new hot gas electrical components in their place. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components A Unplug and remove "electric defrost control har- ness", #2008011 (Fig. 8.A). B. Unplug and remove "dual-temperature electric defrost power input harness", #2008268 (Fig. 8.B). C. Unplug and remove "dual-temperature fan control harness", #2008027 (Fig. 8.C). D. Unplug and remove "harness for 120V drain pan heater", #2008023 (Fig. 8.D). E. Remove "DPST relay" that connects to the fuse block" from the raceway (keep other 2 relays) (Fig. 8.E). F. Remove the 'fuse block" from junction box (Fig. 6.F). G. Remove "defrost heater" and brackets (Fig. 8.G). H. Remove "defrost heater termination thermostat" (# 2000727) from coil end (Fig. 8.H). Remove "fan delay thermostat (#2000725) from coil end (Fig. 8.1). r)r7PnsT Vir4TF:74400EN Figur*? a G RgurPaA Ftgure 8.0 RE) RE° K4 r USE BLVA 1,0ATZ rm.') Rgure 8.F rtguteat # R312517 December 2009 11 Conversion Instructions, Electrical Changes For P5FC(N)A Dual Temperature Cases with Top Wiring PSFGA, P5FGNA :44 R921/19 9: Htitifght of elocttal components from wirtv Grogram 42W&034 Highlighted in Figure 9 above, and on the full wiring diagram #2008034 on page 20, are the existing elec- trical components that support hot gas defrost. The following procedures call out the installation of these components after the removal of the electric defrost components. Installation of Hot Gas Defrost Components J. Install "fan delay heater themiostar, #P079083C on coil end as displayed on Figures 9.J and Figures 12, 13, or 14. K. Install P079084A, "hot gas defrost control har- ness" (Fig. 9.K). 1. Insert rubber grommet into same location as "electric defrost control harness". 2. Plug in all connections a. Drain pan heater (1 wire) b. Drain pan heater fail-safe thenrostat c. Fan motors d. Power supply harness e. Hot gas dual-temp fan control harness (next...) L. Install "hot gas dual-temp fan control harness", P0790860. Plug in all connections (Fig. 9.L). Figure 9.M 1. Fan and drain pan heater control relay 2. Fan delay bypassing control relay 3. Hot gas defrost control harness 4. Drain pan heater (1 wire) 5. Fan delay thermostat M. Install "dual-temp hot gas defrost power input har- ness", P079085K (Fig. 9.M). 1. Insert rubber gromment into same location as "dual-temp electric defrost power input har- ness". 2. Plug in all connections a. Fan and drain pan heater control relay b. Fan delay bypassing control relay c. Terminal block I12 December 2009 # R812517 CO IL VR.05i Al ,L:S ANI-1 I APE 1DP. OF CASE YEN' rAN c..2- • Y,A4T V.r6 I I J. .r [ t 7, ••..e. OM** ,4•4•47C44 71.1 2,14 4• teJ•14. .1,MNA WA • 1 .11 • :NI ma, 43,C 44! 4, SI 4.,,C11, e'lf•C, • .1.4.47,S Ce .4. 7.441a. •sa Tstr•?.f) fr,f174741 - ts-c,on. ts •64 177041.174. n• anx •14111111 TYLER, • CL L-l4.. T4Y C.64/.1: AN.) f • • I: • b ;CD Lj tt J Te • 1 ••••■••■■•• 72C V Pi Eji SOCK!: T vEt17 rANS. - • -J Ww! 1 L3LCC.: OE.T.P:.)51" c,01-17, :0 1 ;:...,..t.-.,..-.,• , k..,.kki 1. 1.±...... - ( 1 ..•.,. _ ---- 1 * . .1.E 13■ :'•I +UR' FA F Dr . ilttl ;21 i4 \ , • R,7cf(3J DiR FITR Tku, Dr?, Z.L.E T."; 7.tN :CLAY' J CLE C"SP 14t FAN MOTO:; OP m' in% .R0 I :n1A• I e e' 444 , 71 IT L. n , I r; ASS .1' 7. I 0% AC Ar.7,'D 1430:"NAL 00n.. ..c, , • _LILO • 71h1.17 .7.:it-:` 10 ASS VEM ..„ . • & P f AcRAN' A "Wh In.W1 .6271 F ANS • A - %1:: — ▪ !: 1 r0 41,(11:2,A • ! I •" `,1 14.: Ik rc yv s_ pr. LEADS —OGE7HER H. 7.A:) 1 AWN 0A• A !n. • •s. - ;31 AO: '.!ZU1 1 1 ;..:0 ti0.1Z N,C1: AN PCINH.si ucW N. 120,1.60 14:)At.4, Oln,:n_Y US7.: (171?FrJR 1:0101,7:TORSI 1 t5 11 • 2 codc0) . err Itvt. tit& it Ji I al 1N rot% C ri .• Fee • 2.3 t C.* •,3 0?O717:06 1, USC .7.7-le ' 3402 wiet. rAAI.:F.AM OFR T.4RCE- P5-73Nj r--;.;•00-8C)22. F3 as 0!,140913 ZZ080 ©Z# uWVJ&w a SUU!M flue-1m puoad YNOdSd VOASd I= MI I= =MEM MI • • • I= I= I= I= NM • NM MN MN 11M INS 11111 11111 1111111 1=1 NMI NE NM NMI 11= NMI INK 111•11 1111111 11111 En- NOV 00.1. PROBE WIRES AND TAPE PC FCP or cAsc RACEWAY VENT PAN OPTI:N (Th T Warman" 6 HA AKHAHt, APITSW- 341.01111. t.,1104%A.".11 11 9 LP IldBei NOVI AMC% ■7 120V POWER 50CXE7 FOR VENT FARS. v(RT ICAL 7-5 L I 0'7 .14G - ANTHONY F PANE Al) CCCRS 3. NC I I V`ri coa .50.nA7AF„ NU 1 L : ALL CAliES i1ubl BE ltiOLINUE) • 3ZC RED AFT/F.1T — NCTE: IF MC HEAT -XNTROL IS USED JUPPER 2&3J4i1 IF ilcoR HFAJFR (-117,1.14,7. CCNTROT IS *Jsrn CUNNICI U ULNNINAL i AAU 1777 A-A•A*.Z 1 1 COCR ?PANE [0.) INIS WIMN3 11ASTAM REPRESENTS A WM-COMMON' PRACT.CE A CLASS FIAT SUPPLY NIIINL: 11F. MU: 1.11AMT. FITAA.UN APO IAN PANTA.% AS !;i'CVT.0 OOHZ ?Jr ONLY (:,ECTJESTE0 SY TAT.GIT 7DRPDRATION. TYLER REM DERAT ON REQUIRES 1101.1 :..144 41f J-DUI AMPS ITN A SIWWLE YO AMP C.RMI UAW 4WIRAL 120VAD POIF=R SUPPLY. nor.R.yoyf.1.,1 4-000ft (pi POI F &It r.Jvcs, h4jiJI,G Fat T:C P5F34 uAL or 4-00:+t 2-DX>Olt. IS MAIN FA PL-SIFE. HC De-AY -e PIC; FAM C.,ELAP-;- RC FAY DELAY NOTE: Lt.! cuevefi cAcucroLil: CZLY ZODU7J7^IC,./ 1,411E ---3LACK TEMINAL °LOOK Gte Ur; POWFR :=11DPTY\ 12UVAC WTI! OR - OVAC 2.ZDVAC 50,1Z I tiTERNA712AAL.) COVNEOT TO TANS PowER FOR VENT FRNS (=NIETO' •liAs•C MINTS' 00 .rms, LEAcis rwrr TO INICCHING FAN PON(54 JA57.1 1.17.L "../- 7 mr$14 L ;MOEDA NOTE fee+ rfAC .11-E FAME 4.1.11A CIE= 1111 FAN CID= T k M.037 C7f74 1 3•4 DIACVAM wRf..; FiGANR TAPCE1 PSFC(N) 1,1:0•1It INIALAIR 7715: A. AA A 3 DS T. VND 9d V0d9d 1 CP. ••••? c 7. VL17 FANS ir CO.1 PROW.. k 117: TAP: 7c t v 1 4,1 t 1/44 HETI__ .."' • . I - - - ...,.. IL E.1 Lit ......L.T -• 1 • ...:,..:„:": ?4_...... .. ... ............. f200.30• it" ' YI.:•. :8 ii --,..—=‘;'-'41- 4 '' 4'..:'— ..... A!, V 0 IA 1 '—.-00 -..... .,,r.3:: DP r.tit: .1 '11 :•t PT.'7..44,2,37 43 a • rt, • • •-•••• L/II.■•••• • 11..1•4 < 4.11 SUP" T LER .: L ••• _1l LoVAL. M. l . • t jjN) /vs: o.,Cor.r. , :F • P.'', tc- E-31..), :if liWA4 RZD- CCt4hErr AvE ‘rittt,S • LEICS 7CCIT, CP 'C ••' IC It.CCI•itNr., /4'.44 P,:-.1.7..FR • HrAt-re, /1 S_JPF v"frif 12:e. I /-t I t• t- ttc: • I • .4 ft -n -i • ■•• 3. Vs,' 1.'4: • •MAT. — AL.1- t MAX. 31. •.i.t 42 • -•.•••••tli 7..rt fon cr ifl ELT MAI X Crsi.1". 11ST rritt t, ' Valk, 1 • 1i talVt.1.1,, • 1 1'3; a 74 k:ULL !OM MEF,5-• AND :7- 7•INELS r LAW 1.11 11' -Acall-1 (i1“.1-11CL•T■ (tt I t .(.ii 1:A.*• r.0- 10.0 .1 AMP....; Lits '. £itiC1 F 2t: osf, C 1: !1..11,4'1 C IAL .1 V.: ":!;-:C: T THE CF „ ct., • ; •r..• " nr; 11,31 • li.J1 314 i : T374 FM, AMP 144 be tt11,1 hi •ti &Mt 1 C rilrf.24 1.1.0 F ')FR TAR;;F- 2008037 1.0 11; 3 CO CO SU m 5 0 VNOJSd V01Sd I= NM 01111 ISM NMI Int 111111111 1=1 ▪ Mill IMO NM NM MN OM d• CA M MN M IIIIII 1.11 M MI I, M I -� n fJ ) CJ's n r1 n R CPT trait: NOT (1.s C €FRCE.T TTigl,tlf_N INLAK7ti'h?.. i 14 I?7EN5., 55'F_0.1,I1E1 4C•F) io CC+LCAES b'F" °:q'EAS TtigItp51AI 19 411nFC7 f.ra I'E Fa FE 3I'TVEE: TLC C ICTRLOITOC Aka laC 01:61% /A04 01 r.€ E!'6PO I /3? COIL. wit ILL L'i 'icy! 6-- -'70041 74",,U NO N340 ]ATE/!, QI04a1Q0 1r►04!Jd3 m 7 CONNECT 'FRAME ASoTTS AND •FANS' LEADS TODETMER MCA? IRai= AtJ3L TO InCCaING FAN POWER • C4_ SS IAEATER I Trr,7JG� SPPLY lION/AC FAtu JUMPER HARNESS — i2a054�Y MCV FED CM . TCP CF CASE. 1. 'v..W ,OIi ir 'P .y.lR . l n■0l0 a.. JJt,w"i$i i ae ki I01731 ". 1. iruMi � s ° +afRert� 4Rt .I!iP P' 'C1 SL:FPL —Si. 125V4.0 60012 ma Vf.RT1 CAI . - R L.I .IT AN1Ib3rY FRMIF aril Derse. r I MA i1 11 I SeAlt c 1® ALB 33WO k 4 i UP'10TEAL LASE try1AFRAT IJRF; Ti4ERNl75 T AT T I-Vb::61a 4+?04f! nC 3a•A -COCA -. %M1 ' i.l Mau Ata C4jUN[vT T',T 1 t9YAL. NJ-Y1.7 LAIY 3/01 1 at wt., FAA' L 0-"T 1fi�y0,Tl,T - i'G FAN at 1Y- .OTE " OM' USE CffPFR COFfOUCTORS * U415'NIP.1115 0I AG{AId a' >a 5EN13 L, 'Y;iK =I:( hlf}'9` .a ?p :l IiE FQR 'NI?INI. 14E M ha 1 ?'.AFdE HE4TERE- 4013 F4N P'LNELS 40' {L: I'.1i,1E51L0 9Y 3.1,R: 1 I:ri r /LL1 ?FL F3' I GE '+.p 1101 F".E•;1131N15 TILT THE L5.3 NO7 ESieEE.4 `3 was oti L SINCI, E 20 41.lP C1;0011 41rT1 FJUIV.RL. it 2'V4 3311 SLJl' LY, EC+NALS 1 .30 MMES r t OEG}s f'! rot jtt•KX+E 67911117ia Mt • IN 0"7,1 i1 13.1.4403 50237 t r C I A. ALA VORG -iG DFR TOP F'dtR IAP TARGET 2008610 I - VNDASd V 9d 4 1 V ef L 7.) I'1 L') r- 1 :;:.CEi,E ? I I I; ) �� -h- •fl- E5 r2� == Ica Ttj= o •'5. a 1141. NA! `; fi I 4'4'1- 70 0— C.C;ii —i47L ':A'I -pt SIN Cr 1...C` EN' 24VAC _::..) "'iLY X4 0 - 13r7C 1 I.; V� • v O r • Ir1S I',91, =1,4IFR t41 = 3: r 9 • •47 .lar4Ml� {i LN L6 i45�} :Cp LSI- 1++.:I•I ID Ot ii-+tj 3. w!.ralue i._brtn VE• fA1: - Col Ir.,' 1 5 1 1 GHT i kr; 6i'•p''rCB. H 2Cre ?GttE:Ft SOCKET1 try v017 tnus F ?JqF A.�i•r [;I;C +7 c. to 7-1 W. £1a! 1' ... LI '• r • - • tvctx r • —. t. • .:131 _ 1 +: •+� L — - r z• tAl iatc t F e,i IKN lava =:D '•J:,: ciao: 'SA^It ^ia: ' 47.'4 FA's ^rr. • s ri i rte• 1 Qrst 'IL fri w' .. �i P ° - 6r, 41 at .s,I c E 7 t.FfirAl 14?tF.+ CCUTfi L FCL;- ,14VAC CO IL ; ��I•.F_r;E'r _ 1'.„,:__, I Ars ; 1 e C .! ::1 71 %1YAL ' I 1 I, ) 1'10 E 1`VI_ a i y , V r I rJ'= - • _ V 1 1 _ 1 , ' lAUE tla.�' e_i> ANC, 7M4 344:.' - ^a Aa •'•!'t)IJC^ • .1e• i.17 ;arwa.s-1 YI..F, -:? I fiN ,?• . 1t,iF i - -A 1-ID. i'A srI 7x 1„D t3 avn ^ _ ! J A Si ' ,f J^ so/3 + I ' . 1 . 1 r -( r-t NOV I W& 17 ^- VA,-; , writ S ..... • I DU-1i ;: AMU) t ri E. r t• I-L rr'IA1t rt• .M „ ;tJI % t, R1I:.1T id°t VIM; Fey t g'::11 ' x'-_737 (E1111:1: 'G:�hFC1 TQ FAti ra1. r 1.1.' na WR F FE": r)FR' L "I .r.--!V_I 1•:1I- (i. LC Orl- r_r A':.fl.: 1 SA•L ta! +i3-1 1 20r_�B 6 [• = M M MI N MN INN IMO MN SI■ M - VND19d VO ISd MI MI MI M • MI M MI M MI OM RIM I. N = = MN 0 F 1 COL rloke wIP fa AS.Lk TAPE 70 TOP -- 9 Cr C: €f EI,t't,INAL`i if A'41D 02 --.. -c =J1 CCi'- Wit.. •_f l LH. fi N Low Tmr P11,, LYf' 24Y:+Z `_LP': tY 41A 4Fh+ xr g 4y,4 1_21J1?SALrs ys Apo yS 'TC DE ccti' F:i:ST "2_ „PT CI'1 L vEN- Fria • MU-L IC•k IICAtRS iq.j aLi -. -C e,P.. CS '3 nr, J - -MCP CS '1 ;.--.11M1 (1ti 7 • MYdY� J,F iaf . i1!�If'ir• ". .A AF SWIM. n *e • ri iw5ria wz .ubs▪ • • ,■62 StXKET 124 CA L. 1 4 1.. €. VHT1 1.• xaNrt -or:ct FF.4JF kW) CCOR. , d1 lip G,1 1t= r el 4, • r'1 3 c" 4 t 7i M'I tG1' 41;e"/ :GC13757 3. ?3,757 • .7 vffffff f eV IA, ' ° {" r INi `i11 11 114 T% 4a 1t. TH; f`;.Li; I "tmIs' In 'I,. 1 'AI'C' r 7 I.. CHI.. 7 ,fi2 i 4 MT AY D ?ASS'4C 4 .• <';WR sryf��+Fi'EaF�I pfr 141 FAN 1G, avj *IN et NI- r1C 1 3'' Y JSz _CP 1 ;c --' . 0,42 T6 =AoB = C'!f =R *Lc NAL.S'. +r' VEX t 11t:;.1% [ONE 1 }1 rrrt 1'1 tr.F.LO 4E' CIcrA+IL+ 9ET9 1' 1i; ,cS °Y cr.:14 7 S41.L;J • 0.a C' N4� C ii a. AU WRG 1.1G C- 07.44 i FY 4 A:1174 2008033 pi E C !A u2 a� • 3 ro Q V • co • o I 03 3 63 11R e n V■ E n cn E n i lit 0 1 GUIL Ak :l T(r' TI ,14oiriA .S 01 ANC ;12 tI Ii • i iit,. r.L 9!1 null W r:rJ riW t'TM' W C, i J•_.:) 1 LW' y �l r,1 • ,Zrta l r ANS 4'I4 rAu Juk'x'Cfi HAR',ESS tK'l:'1 y17 Glr 11:1 sy tt TC't C' wd s C. • RNs Ct •K i. r.� Krg ' Mf 7 i,Ni -- J. * -5' : rn.:)S CF IlF.I ro Ir C^rI L I�.y q`-T rY' A PIRA I :IV I : '•1 '•EF• 'I;•- •)• P E P 1. c•EP tltro ra rt r "'--• «kG o t~ 1 /.I 1 ''1 11- aL 'r tuSr 111 LJ1, •• T lt":1T I.',.. ,.:- -Inv" At,n 01 AS' Art Wel* svgs., s:... ir?urnu •3,n :. H.� Yv F.r4O MCLEIr .IPM .,... ; Gl" -..'._ F;• ". Cr. (Alt- .' riE2-r R LA r �nrrx.a•_- oti r1- i4Ga. -6a 3_JL illil?nsr rf N., 4! � t 4'af r• !Ala 117.: • i_f?Hi:1A1 Ha..r.•1`4'1 ,•1 3- '1'4111 ,1 .4E Li ^•'., r #.4 tX.LAr' , rL sir rr.'1 41 ti C -R :IPI OCi,%r -1 en r :•�1 �alLf`cr.? nraQ Co F'rz 1.1% :) 1.(l : L1Sr k.; •'r r cx r111. i .?R°:d US- EL G• r,,JNDED (r L J. r-Ilt' 'Lfi ` ,AI:R.1Y R;.;'RESE?i"S A •4CA- i,:& &c' rR:,:' CL o ir1170, r -•IC +►U -__i 'd i 111i?" _,1 -='�S SAS .1 =•t _� Ai �7E TAf:CCT ':OR RATICNu -Y;,u , :-R -';RAT :` • CC:IP :„ -,•••%-' '.:Jr =f' =• I? 1:3 *: A S' .1.: SU: 4a 1 r Ai: T•1 1••IAr• dA. I 20./AC °c : < $RJPP Y. !Icrt toil & :r- _ -.1— 6:,.D1,1] 4 :4C'C rr k T- t'43- 1 -1 rraiir n 1 • K r.. .' 11 1 N I n1 f C K':7:4 • 2ga)sr3,3 -1 : f'.ril i -' :f't ;(r ) G ^. 015211,Tf17.•: fY 4�J3 20083.3 L€ MI MI VND ISd VDASd MI MIN NMI 111111 NMI MI MI INN MI MN NM MIN • MI MI • MI NMI 11111111 1111111 MI MN =I IMP =I all NMI 8 4ts 0, 1.4 22 .4 LI) r9 - CD IL .-1141,IE. i 4,0 "TAPE -TO TCP L'ASE, 74 • L 'LW! UAL'S 4! isf:E1 y , Tr• ccuarra. TCR • SW 1; r.1 - - - 1.14J r Dip nw Cif Mc, r I &IP ?SAW.; OP-r out_ vErr r44 (1) TN ANTI :OA "I El u&1-nn 05%11-101, coirtyr IV1A C11 14..1111' C,1; 1 PER 5- SZCP CS t..) I LR LaLCF CS 1. tl P E R 5• C.S I PER 2-f C.S PAq • nrion,s sys,sters . , • .Z14'0 ▪ Lir.,2,131tAjxki • Iv:4j J.( is, • . :4710. rp '1,CM ) 41,47 r ,k SUPRC"' /- '2.0VAG SOK:, ' 1 AN J-31.01,L1 N.)&14,-.5••• P411) 51.1.h No nhv . I C-111.14LR CcJi VERT CAI R 1 4t IC 011 11CLIY -;:1•1!.,11 urcRs. T LER, 1.-E111411.117 1:4 ' 77•D rif-j fUMU --wr 1- I 2410)71: 1:44 tt111. czrro... riCL4," t.'41'..s0 en 1 1 14 :17.1.Vr irs.A.S1 Lrklf rts: RE) V 4003, 31- zusaq Aff-111 eSED z . 7. riptc. NALS .S0 *MILES • 1:i TieWi int ■.■ VI 06-716 1.1' 30.147■17 7i(15 BM:A:Wit* tee LC • OA AIRS -1G DIF,R • 74•I7-4CiEl 4417) 2008034 I E VNOISd *DASd Conversion Instructions, Electric Defrost Removal P5FGA, P5FGNA Removal of Electric Defrost Heater 1. Remove mounting screws and carefully lift and place fan panel (10A on top of coil assembly (10.B). 2. Remove heater retainer clips (10.C) and lift out front defrost heater (10.D) from slots in front of coil assembly (10.8). Reinstall the heater clips (10.C). Discard front defrost heater (10.D) and heater wire Ieads to raceway. 3. Carefully reposition fan panel (10A and secure with mounting screws. 10.A 10.D 10.13 Figre 10: Rea: vitow of coil and bn panel assent* 114 „v. \01- 11.E 11.B 11.F - Rgire 11: Front v'Se`N of colt and fan renal awsimfay 4. Remove mounting screws and top coil closeoff (11.E) from coil assembly (11.8). 5. Remove heater retainer clips (11.C) and lift out rear defrost heater (11.F) from slots in rear of coil assembly (11.8). Reinstall the heater retainer clips (11.C). Discard rear defrost heater (11.F) and heater wire Ieads to raceway. 6. Install top coil closeoff (11.E) on top of coil assem- bly (11.B) and secure with mounting screws. Removal and Installation of Klixon Sensors Refer to Figures 12-14 below to locate the appropriate Klixons. Remove defrost termination klixon, fan delay klixon and failsafe klixon from the return bends on the right end of the coil assembly. Discard the klixons. NOTE: The drain pan heater klixon (70/40) stays on the right side of the fan panel. Install a new gas defrost fan delay klixon (25/10) on the second front return bend on the coil assembly. NOTE: The defrost termination klixon for gas defrost will be located to the left of the bypass check valve on the new gas defrost piping. , RgifT3 12: ?<bon locefons on cod return berth br two abor mercturxfisars. P5FG/P5FGN-3DRI40R P5FG/P5FGN-6DR Rgcrre 12: Kfficon tocions on cod retirn bends forthweand turcborrnercharesas, Rgure 14: Kbon dons an coil tobsn bids tir five door rnerchandesers. E = Electric Defrost Termination (60/30) E/13 = Electric Defrost Fan Delay (40/20) G/D = Gas Defrost Fan Delay (25/10) = Gas Defrost drain Pan Heater (70/40) F/S = Electric Defrost Failsafe (Opt.) gi R812517 Decomber 2009 Conversion Instructions, Piping Changes P5FGA, P5FGNA Fig. 15 Existing Electric Defrost Assembly I4ot Gas Termination Probe CHECK VALVE NOTE: Hin PHOENIX will provide the ASC sideout, check Auxiliary ASC sideout connected valve, tee, liquid line assemblm and suction line assembly between existing distrthutor and TXV as separate assembnes. Remove nozzle from existing distributor. SUCTION LINE ASSEMBLY Suctiont F-11r TEE LIQUID UNE ASSEMBLY Liquid Fig. 16 Completed Hot Gas Assembly Figure 15 above shows the existing electric defrost as- sembly within your case, that may include an optional suction line electronic evaporator pressure mgulator. Highlighted in Figure 16 above is a completed assem- bly for the Hot Gas defrost conversion. The following procedures call out the removal of these components in preparation of adding new hot gas electrical compo- nents in their place. Removal of Electrical Defrost Components A. Cut out the electric defrost components as shown in figure 15 above. Discard the heat exchanger/ suction line assembly. Save the liquid valve as- sembly. Hot Gas Defrost Assembly B. Assemble the parts from the conversion kit (see table for parts list) with the items salvaged from the electric defrost. Connect A to B, then braze. Connect C to F, then braze. Finally, connect E to D, then braze. The completed assembly should look like the illustration in figure 16. C. Unbraze distributor (see ASC installation instruc- tions on page 22) from TXV and add ASC sideout. Connect the liquid line assembly to the ASC as shown in figure 16 above. 122 December 2009 41 R812517 Conversion Instructions, Piping Changes PSFGA, PSFGNA ASC Installation Instructions A Important: TXV must be wrped with wet rags when unbrazing distributor from TXV and when brazing ASC to TXV. B. Important: Remove current nozzle in distributor and discard. C. The new nozzle will be packaged in the ASC Kit along with retaining ring. Confirm the'orifice size is correct for case type by referring to Tats A and Figure 18. Install new nozzle in ASC as shown in Figure 17 and secure with retaining ring. D. Connect ASC to distributor and to TXV as shown in Figure 17 and braze. New Nozzle Connect ibis and to TXV Rernova Node and discard Ratnlning Ring Connect this end to distributor Flg. 1T ASC Installation Diagram ORIFICE NUMBER Flg. 18 Orifice NOTE: L Typo is NOT stamped on nozzloi Table A SPORLAM �A�liY StdeCfl "nne"as�:.kp Installation Instructions The auxiliary ebb annsaertor (ABC) permite the pommel= of Ca saeational Spmlan refrigerant distributors for hot gas bypass, hot gas defrost, cameras cycle service, flan ABCs are he use with Bparrlaa Dietriburices only Misr to Bulletin 20-10 for ono:opiate selection end application L Remove the nears and retainer ring firma the conventional refirignant distrib- utor and re- Install in the inlet of the ewe mined= ass Fuser r, FOR USE ON REFRIGERATION en rtrAIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS ONLY igli inCE aprian ww amps, vr..a yd., Pisani 2. The outlet portion of the ASC le slipped scar the dietributrr inlet and brazed in plaza Do MOT place tubing betweemASC and dietributor, asefturs 2 8. The inlet of the ABC is slipped into the thermostatic expanaan valve outlet and brazed in piece. SeeFigtae 2 d The auxiliary side connection la made as required by the particular application Primed In U.S. or A. Case Orifice Number Hoak) Lothar ASC Kit 8 P6FGN6, PWFGN4, N5FGN5 1/2 L P0789973 PGFGN3, NEFGN4 1/3 L P0788198K P6FGN2, N6FGN2 1/4 L PI:178995A wavy commitY tititmlaiakii. Or. R 1.190Mu.Ww AMI/ROWR Form 80-06-10 -1000 # R812517 December 21008 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P5FGA, P5FGNA Header along cases 7/8" • Line into cases are always 1/2" 7•7_ Note: Tees point down Main liquid tine must be 5/8" minimum (even with just 1 case) Gas Defrost Liquid Lines Gas defrost liquid lines to the cases should be branched off the bottom of the header. This ensures a full column of liquid to the expansion valve. A branch , line from the header to an individual case should be over 3' long and must have 3" expansion loop incor- porated. Do not run suction or liquid lines through cases that are part of a separate system, especially if either has gas defrost. If there is no way to avoid this, insulate the piping for the portion that runs through the other cases. Temperature variations of refrigeration and defrost cycles cause piping to expand and contract. Allowing for this expansion and contraction will prevent piping failures. The following are typical expansion rates for copper tubing: -100°F to -40°F = 2.5" per 100 foot run (ultra low temp) -40°F to 0°F = 2" per 100 foot run (low temp) 0°F to 30°F = 1.5" per 100 foot run (medium temp) 30°F to 50°F = 1" per 100 foot run (high temp) 3' Max. for gas defrost Expansion loops are designed to provide a definite amount of travel. Placing the loop in the middle of a piping run will allow for maximum pipe expansion with the minimal arnount of stress on the loop. Don't use 45 degree elbows for loop construction because they will not allow the lines to flex. Suction and liquid lines cannot be joined together or be allowed to touch. Pipe hangers must not restrict the expansion and contrac- tion of piping. Insulation on suction and liquid lines makes the whole system more efficient. Insulate - it pays! 24 Dixon/bar 2009 ?I 9812517 P5FGA, P5FGNA 9174930 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, P5FGN, 2DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description P040847F VL\{CHK,1 /2 ODS NO#6308 2 P079083C TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1I2 3 P052443K PRB,CPC, 41501 - 1127,ORANGE,DTERM 4 P078995A DISTSP, ASC -4 -4, 114, KIT 5 P010404B TEECU,CCC,112X318X1 /2,N189611 6 F81.2529HCU RFL,ASC TO CHK 1/2'032 7 F812530ECU RFL.CHK TO TEE 1/2'032 8 F812531CCU RFL,TEE TO INLET '1/2'032 9 F812532ACU RFL,SUCTION LOOP P5F`7/8'045 10* P079084A WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 11 8812517 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, P5FG 12 F8127448G1 BLK,PL,HG,RH,TYLER 13 F812745MGL BLK,PL,HG,LH,TYL.ER 14 P052099K PROBE CLAMP 'See pages 6 and 9 for pmt ilstalion 8174931 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, P5FGN, 3DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10' 11 12 13 14 P040847F P079083C P052443K P078996K P0104048 F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531CCU F812533KCU P079084A R812517 F812744BGL F812745MGL P052099K VLV,CHK,1 /2 ODS N046308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1/2 PRB,CPC, 4501- 1127,ORANGE, DTERM DIST,SP, ASC-4-4, 113, KIT T E E, C U, CC C,1 /2X3 /8X1 /2, N1 B 9611 RFLASC TO CHK '1/2 "032 RFL,CHK TO TEE "1/2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET '1/2'032 SUCTION LOOP, P5FGA,3'7/8'045 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, PSFG BLK,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLK,PL,HG,LH,TYLER PROBE CLAMP See {gas 6 and 9 /Crpart ittltrstratirt? 6174932 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, P5FGN, 4DR 1 1 Diagram Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10" 11 12 13 14 Hill PHOENIX Part Number P040847F P079083C P052443K P078997G P0104048 F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531 CCU F812534GCU P079084A 8812517 F812744BGL F812745MGL P052099K Part Description VLV,CHK,1/2 ODS NO #6308 TSTATDISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1 /2 Pf1B,CPC, 4501- 1127,ORANGE,DTERM DISTSP, ASC -4 -4, 1 /2, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1I2X3/8X112,NIB9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK '1/2'032 RFL,CHK TO TEE 1/2'032 RFLTEE TO INLET 1/2'032 SUCTION LOOP, P5FGA,4'7/8'045 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 REEAS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, P5FG BLK,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLK,PLHG,LH,TYLER PROBE CLAMP 1 'See pages 6 and 9 for part g isPragon 9174933 RETRO, ELECT TO HG, P5FGN, 5DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 P040847F 2 P079083C 3 P052443K :4 5 6 7 8 9 10' 11 12 13 14 P078997G P010404B F8i 2529HCU F812530ECU F812531 CCU F812535ECU P079084A 8812517 F812744BGL F812745MGL P052099K VLV,CHK,1/2 ODS NO46308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1 /2 PRB,CPC,#501- 1127,0RANGE,DTERM DISTSP, ASC -4 -4, 1/2, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/8X112,NIB9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK '1/2'032 RFLCHK TO TEE '1/2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET 1/2'032 SUCTION LOOP,P5FGA,5D'7/8'045 WI R,CS, HARNESS,M20007450 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, PSFG BLK,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLK,PLHG,LH,TYLER PROBE CLAMP Sea pages 6 and 9 it part dbstraltbn iI R812517 December 2009 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 1 P5FCA, P5FGNA B174934 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 2D Diagram Hill PHOENIX Humber Part Number Part Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10* 11 12" 13 *` 14 15 16 P040847F P079083C P052443K P078995A P010404B F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531CCU F812532ACU P079084A P079078D P079086G P079085K P052099K F612744BGL F812745MGL 17 8812517 VL1tCHK,1/2 ODS NO#6308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,112 PRB,CPC, #501- 1127,ORANGE,DTERM DIST,SP, ASC-4-4, 1/4, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X3/8X1/2,N1B9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK 1/2'032 RFL,CHK TO TEE *1/2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET '112`032 RFL,SUCTION LOOP, PSF`7 /8 *045 W IR,CS.HARN ESS,M20007450 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,70DEG,FLS W IR,CS,HARN ESS„M200$0350 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20082670 PROBE CLAMP BiK,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLKPL,HG,LH,TYLER REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, P5FG 'Seeps 6 and 9 br part ilbstrakr? *` Seepage 10 and 12 brpartilkistrdian B174935 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, PSFGN, 3DR Diagram Hill PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10* 11 12** 13'* 14 15 16 17 P040847F P079083C P052443K P078996K P010404B F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531CCU F812533KCU P079084A P079078D P079086G P079085K P052099K F812744BGL F812745MGL R812517 VL1(CHK,1 /2 ODS NO46308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1 /2 PRB,CPC, #501- 1127,ORANGE,DTERM DIST,SP, ASC -4-4, 1/3, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1/2X3/8X1 /2,NlB9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK `112`032 RFL,CHK TO TEE *1 /2'032 RFL,TEE TO INLET '1/2`032 SUCTION LOOP, P5FGA,3`7/8'045 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,70DEG,FLS W IR,CS,HARNESS,M20080350 W IR,CS.HARNESS,M20082670 PROBE CLAMP BLX,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLK,PL,HG,LH,TYLER REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, PSFG I 'See pis 6 and 9 fcrpart ifbsttrafion See page 10 and 12 for part litistalion 8174936 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, PSFGN, 4DR Hill PHOENIX Part Number Part Description Diagram Number 1 P040847F VLUCHK,1/2 ODS N046308 2 P079083C TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG,1 f2 3 P052443K PRB,CPC, #501- 1127,ORANGE,DTERM 4 DIST,SP, ASC -4-4, 1/2, KIT 5 TEE,CU,CCC,1 /2X318X1/2,NIB9611 6 RFL,ASC TO CHK *112 *032 7 RFL,CHK TO TEE '1/2 *032 8 RFL,TEE TO INLET *112 "032 9 SUCTION. LOOP, P5FGA,4`7/8'045 10` WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 11 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,70DEG,FLS 12'* WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20080350 13 ** WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20082670 14 PROBE CLAMP 15 BLX,PL,HG,RH,TYLER 16 BLK,PL,HG,LH,TYLER 17 REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, PSFG P078997G. P010404B F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531CCU F812534GCU P079084A P079078D P079086G P079085K P052099K F812744BGL F812745MGL R812517 *Sea pages 6 and 9 far part allrstrafran Sae page 1 0 and 12 for part illustration 8174937 RETRO, EL TO HG, 2TMP, P5FGN, 5DR Diagram H ®l PHOENIX Number Part Number Part Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10' 11 12" 13" 14 15 16 17 P040847F P079083C P052443K P078997G P010404B F812529HCU F812530ECU F812531CCU F812535ECU P079084A P079078D P079086G P079085K P052099K F8127448GL F812745MGL 8812517 VINCHK,1 /2 005 N096308 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,25DEG1/2 PRB,CPC, #501 -1127,ORANGE,DTERM DISTSP,ASC -4-4, 1/2, KIT TEE,CU,CCC,1/2X3/8X1 /2,N1B9611 RFL,ASC TO CHK *1/2`032 RFL,CHK TO TEE *1 /2 *032 RFL,TEE TO INLET *112'032 SUCTION LOOP,PSFGA,507/8 *045 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20007450 TSTAT,DISC,OPN ON R,70DEG,FLS WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20080350 WIR,CS,HARNESS,M20082670 PROBE CLAMP BLX,PL,HG,RH,TYLER BLK,PL,HG,LH,TYLER REF,AS,MANUAL, EL TO HG, P5FG pages 6 and .9 for part iikrstration "Seepage 10 and 12 for pmtfustraa,ion 1 26 December 2009 # R812517 1 E11,P/4400EJ1/ix; C R22 to R404 Conversion Instructions 1 Removing the TXV Valve and Bulb 1. Mark location of TXV BULB on pipe with a marker (for reference position when installing the new TXV BULB). Unfasten and remove TXV and bulb. Changing the Nozzle 3. Reprove old nozzle from distributor and replace with the new nozzle. Confirm nozzle size is correct by referring to Table A. Table A CASE CASE • BILL OF TYPE LENGTH MATERIALS N5NGN 2 DOOR 9174918 NSNGN NSNGN N5NGN P5NGN ................ P5NGN P5NGN P5NGN 3 DOOR 4 DOOR 5 DOOR 2 DOOR 9174919 8174920 9174921 8174922 3 DOOR j 9174923 4 DOOR 5 DOOR 8174924 9174925 • I 2. Before unbrazing the TXV Vatve, wrap with wet cool rags to avoid possible damage. Installing the New Valve TXV VALVE HILL PHOENIX P/N= P042514M SPORLAN P /N=SBFSEt -C HILL PHOENIX PIN= P042514M SPORLAN P /t4SBFSE C HILL PHOENIX P/N= P937263K SPORLAN P /N=SBFSE -AA-C HILL PHOENIX P/N= P0372o3K SPORLAN P /N=SBFSE AA-C HILL PHOENIX P/N= P042514M SPORLAN P.fN=SBFSEAPA -C HILL PHOENIX PIN= Pa337283K SPORLAN P /■=SBFSEAA-C HILL PHOENIX P/N= PU37283K SPORLAN P /N=SBFSEAA -C HILL PHOENIX PIN= P037263K SPORLAN P /N=SBFSEAA -C 4. Install new TXV valve (refer to Table A to confirm TXV type). Follow instafation instructions from Sporlan as shown on the back. Connect TXV bulb in the same location as naked earlier. PARTS IN BOM NOZZLE REFERENCE MANUAL HILL PHOENIX PIN= P079105E RB12520 SPORLAN P /N= NT.1 /6 HILL PHOENIX PIN= P0791060 R612520 SPORLAN P/N= NT.1 /4 HILL PHOENIX PIN= P079106C R612520 SPORLAN P /N='NT,1 /4 HILL PHOENIX P/N= P079107A RB12520 SPORLAN P /■= NT,1/3 HILL PHOENIX PIN= P079104G RB12520 SPORLAN P /N='NT,1 /9 HILL PHOENIX R/N= P079105E RB12520 SPORLAN P /N= NT.1 /6 HILL PHOENIX P/N= P0791060 ' RB12520 SPORLAN P /N= NT,1 /4 HILL PHOENIX PIN= P079107A s RB12520 SPORLAN P /N= NT.1/3 11111 11111 NMI 1M1 MS NM 11111 MI porlanl n st ructions - ctstaw's on 003t. 1343T14-tv03s 0 Ors■uwastessixt, 'SVstrsiallinz 01.1151AUSIM:•.: • • intzsigcm oc• suctra 0Intuxr014 au susrusso• PCM59041 itittlf(*J4 0): 0151LU,01004. 0 OM:0*E • _ F4E.:40Ei 00 S1S1314 4 fritAtA9 0,1•1014•4:0 • : - 41.441 • or413,13.1.63.1331.34. ' '„ 2 'm - • • • • • 0.24 • - (0-stO msn) NM 1E11 1E1 MI III1 11111 INN 11111 to.....••■••■■eameyeata.ssarasmarroovonvoommamana....., ■1174_,./.. • • cor.ul 3 1.1 INA* .2" TetailVanCE4 7:2....=1-7/77..... 410171.4LL01t30 133 0cmgorisi Lax ttotot „•,-• rtItt • •.:M1 7-, • r • • - ! • 1 5 3 r Iowa tiosattuti` • 1441414X431 01 1413r.404.1411 LOVIMI01ME41. StLISSQ1.115 A lita3AGt fE000t£ tsitertit6 _ _ -_,;- 10•406.50f szta4ad 34.M1444/...43.4 I ' I r 5. - ) 1314144 M. IMOD T 1441111S.141111 2. 60441113. W4:4 TIMM 41114449/13484214444414441= Ul13.4a7411145 1:tl WWII 13 entuscancs 3313111313 .3304a00 to moo* t ottAituttouttat tv... 0033.100 t 00 Ciztauivant :TOE • 4.541.4.) .4.2,113. 'Q3 3414114144.413/4 44 T.1T 1341,r4TETT 14..3AT3.T..*31C311 CM, • 11444413nr4 444.1 9,41114.4.T 33 t CGSI3344.131 3303 41.....344.V434413 • 14.11 nt n'iltI3-J$3 <A. 41313 KAM 3.4317 4U13.17414.1.414 • 44 MG: TA,T7T r3 u.twmt.nty, V4'00041111' • wattut ttorettetitt nicoott•ct61 Aiumain • : . f401411M/85 UWt Et.00.0410 _ flgraloaNti itialittD•S • cpt;:za a e • erm.-wai • - 2 i4LI s 9 3 .1... 3.cu 't woo 6 1400 •-• • uvo,tott t,,tto tottotosoto 1.1171.40.341444 33)43.410 _ 4141124041 Delltrafttl 00 0.4013 mom, 7A_Im 14.3 41311,311 444411111:447. ITTITZT*411.G4S 31334. .-...44441.014113C4.1N 0134 1/131/11314 <1.3.3:4 44/4.13 1334t/341::T. 71.1Cfp4T3,4r4 4.1k. Kr41, 431147341441114.43141 44. 1144=4/41.111 31.3.74 41 44:1131343.44331 1.4314 40411144T v3.t accc rAto 4: 4. <3 7 ••• _-Pz • ,,,j• THE41397ATC G,U1W cr 11111=1/TEJ fr:ttElf-iLulit CHINA r4FCM6110213 CARLA 3illa0SWICA cmc:.,115031614Tet Ziko • ".. '15 11; vir • souncrocruROTTLITAMT11 13 T13 meirAme 1 Lupo bcr. ctu 1034 • unit Iv! 3333134 too OA 1I333TZL13101.1 1.313 common.= • .1 At!: 4 • • • .03, * c Sporlan Instructions Y°R4k vCA? Sin 1FVFF T#9 Fiartra te3V. t43 I tZ,. :";t., ilia #0:441.1 7144'1274E sprrar.:.1 ^sPi'31,Xrerrik .3 x3' iiai+a°' R?'a3'kP 41,:artkc83r 3FrOa Yi &taED }Fy+',vd AVS31W r 1:r 4r ;.tIkL:A `.E4Txri,;, +a {'e to PAZ •I _. :B: pAxa.. SY'ire:#t FsF ;_E#i+E a1$£?SI �.s isga .s sr ; ^eps .ro, sy, ''h ±1EK rPra: 41:._ -Y #1+11 !ae:. 1.26.1.1 --'?:4 Tr Vt xii ,C +?' rrr ;`e;IR itievr.' 'sS. iffi 1i15i"3 'xs :336 ,R�'# BS:s EMyf & > =Aae•,Y,' ACt 71'7 •• lt: ,'L CYFet3'x id','!°Afi 6i',�YYi ER. E1r OFi.RRi11. e>Fsv. ti n.14../.7 2*S4 W MAXIW44A Pf'. F13144i1011HfrarriT 16:WM PA ENS*6EN} PRFSSb? of 83PERA.00 141klaAfA L.^•..ib:dl: 2000 POR.';,AN VALVE COMPANY • 20,6 LANGE DRIVE • WA5 R -2 1 ^T= 22'Fi;iYF 2. P — 613 Prig 14-7 b.afi) — T . - 401141°C S. T - Tp'-' - is, .. }I °F {II C —40<T 14 -C)- 727 17x. [7,4) iktkVi: 0. Strtridi %M 0 rtr[4d11 11.154Arritrirek EXXI rt tIrAblieri 7TA'YGSTf1PC4 1�51121S 'lb ESPARSIVeSfE#1iii IhSTKe 1 >R11114J NUS VAXE4Xr 6M1015.10Wr TFIVAWAFKION Sstar1 41,0 CIM TFE Xti18ti=.ti5 rrr rtrOA 4Ait SSR1gSTBVSX; THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6212 (15661) INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUTRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing and starting up of Owner Furnished air cooled roof -top condensing units. B. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. F. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 11 4125 — Stock Room Walk -in Coolers and Freezers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI /ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. C. ANSI /ASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 24 6212 (15661) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with Owner or site supervisor and furnish labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload condenser /compressor units. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Furnish necessary, labor, tools, and equipment to lift units to roof and set in locations as indicated in applicable Refrigeration Drawings. D. Rig units for unloading, moving, and hoisting according to manufacturer's published instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment, and final location to verify that they are free of interferences. Comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify height, length and spacing of curbs and supports against job specific vendor submittals, to ensure adequate clearance above roof decks, (minimum 10 inches), and exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, coordinate and verify placement of condensing unit support rails and piping penetration boxes with General Contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install and anchor condensing units plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and Drawings. Refer to Architectural Drawings for detail and to Section 24 0529. (When necessary add treated wood blocking to curbs to maintain minimum clearance above roof.) B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Refer to Section 24 0553 as applicable for installation of refrigeration equipment labels and tags. D. Refer to Section 24 0719 as applicable for installation of mechanical insulation. E. Support piping separately so that it is not supported off equipment piping connections. F. Refer to Section 24 2315 as applicable for installation of refrigerant piping. G. Install devices and cabinet parts furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted, such as hail guards. H. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. I. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram to Division 26 Contractor. INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 246212(15661) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test condensing units and associated piping in accord with the requirements of Section 24 2315. Defer to , local code requirements if more stringent. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of crating or shipping materials associated with condensing units. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. 3.6 START-UP A. See Section 24 9000. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 24 6212 (15661) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS 246212(15661) -4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6213 (15660) CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED .EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to condenser /compressor units, including compressors, coils, cabinets, electrical devices, fans, motors, refrigeration specialties, and control devices. B. Installation of condenser /compressor units is not covered in this Section. Refer to Section 24 6212. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. D. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). E. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. F. Section 24 6212 — Installation of Condenser /Compressor units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Drawing Refrigeration Schedule. B. IEEE: "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". C. ARI: "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC: "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". E. NEMA: "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. UL: `Building Materials Directory". G. ASME: "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". H. ASHRAE: "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Turnover Day: 1. New stores, Remodel Stores - Target published date signifying end of construction. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - date that construction is completed and department is turned over to Target for merchandising. B. Grand Opening: 1. New and Remodel Stores - Target published date that store officially opens or re -opens to public. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - Date that construction and merchandising are complete and department opens to public or to Target for general use. CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply as applicable with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Coordinate these submittals with requirements of Section 24 0130. C. Manufacturer shall submit field coordination documents and record documents as described herein: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Rigging and lifting instructions. 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. 3) Unit piping and instrument diagrams, (Internal unit piping schematic). 4) Complete Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01 7700). 5) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 2. Record Documents: a. At end of each construction cycle manufacturer shall submit to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group, record copies of documents described above, for each unit type supplied during cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, NO Hard Copies!) Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 50 S. 10th St. Suite 400, TP3 1005 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 1.6 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES A. This Section and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply condenser /compressor units. It is responsibility of condenser /compressor unit manufacturer to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Manufacturer shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. 1.7 MANUFACTURING QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Leak check and pressure test each condenser /compressor unit to 450 psig and evacuate prior to shipment. Ship refrigeration systems leak free. B. Target reserves the right to audit and witness manufacturing quality assurance, if there is repeatable significant workmanship or component issues. C. Condenser /Compressor Units: UL listed and have a UL label permanently affixed. D. Condenser /Compressor Unit Capacities: Rated in accord with ARI Standards. E. Materials: New and without defect. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. Manufacturer is responsible for application and design of individual components. F. Manufacturer is responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and refrigeration contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. G. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards, and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 -2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." H. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of outdoor condenser /compressor units to jobsite, freight allowed and prepaid. B. Include sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. C. Ship units with 50 psig holding charge of dry nitrogen. D. Schedule delivery of equipment to site as coordinated with General Contractor. E. Include necessary instructions for unloading, handling, and hanging to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. 1.9 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Section includes design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for the refrigeration equipment associated with procurement of condenser /compressor units. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout and arrange necessary and required refrigeration system components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Design equipment, anchorage, and restraints according to applicable seismic and high wind design requirements of store location and furnish necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. C. Suction Temperature Requirements: 1. Condenser /Compressor Units: Capable of providing capacities at suction temperatures as indicated on Refrigeration Schedule. D. Condenser.Design Requirements: 1. When ASHRAE 0.4 percent design for outdoor ambient is less than 100 deg F, use 100 deg F ambient, and when 0.4 percent ASHRAE design for outdoor ambient is 100 deg F or higher, use 110 deg F ambient. 2. For counties in AZ, CA, NV, and UT, identified as areas of ultra high outdoor ambient design temperatures, consult Target Refrigeration Engineering and use 125 deg F ambient. 3. Design temperature difference of 9 to 11 deg F on low temperature system. 4. Design temperature difference of 14 to 16 deg F on medium temperature system. E. Defrost: 1. Walk -in freezer boxes, meat coolers and low temperature cases: Electric defrost. 2. Walk -in cooler boxes and medium temperature cases: Off cycle defrost. F. Other Design Requirements: 1. Select compressors based 40 deg F return gas temperature for low temperature units and 50 deg F for medium temperature units. 2. Do not take sub - cooling credit in compressor selection process. 3. Target reserves the right to review and potentially reject compressor selections. 4. Design for proper elevation above sea level of specific store location. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty consistent with overall equipment purchase agreement, refer to Section 24 0130. CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: 1. Furnish factory assembled and tested, UL listed, outdoor condenser /compressor units as listed on Refrigeration Schedule, by one of the following, manufacturers and subject to compliance with Specifications: a. Bohn b. Krack 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: 1. Include a galvanized steel base with legs, lifting lugs and structural mounting rails to support compressor, condenser coil, electrical panel, and other required refrigeration specialties.. Cabinet panels and top cover shall be galvanized steel or heavy gage aluminum, properly prepped and painted a Target approved tan to match other rooftop equipment. 2. For Alaska projects provide 12 ", snow leg extensions for condensing units. 3. Include an integral oversized NEMA 3R rated outdoor electrical enclosure. 4. Include coated steel OSHA approved fan guards which totally enclose rotating parts of condenser fan and maintain separation from other unit components. 5. Include a standard factory bolt on hail guard with units for field installation. Ship hail guards knocked -down, attached to the unit. B. Compressors: 1. Furnish Copeland semi - hermetic reciprocating or hermetic scroll (ZF series for low temperature applications and ZB series for medium temperature applications) type compressor with internal motor protection, compressor manufacturer approved oil failure controls, and suction and discharge service valves for isolation. Include service gauge fittings on suction and discharge. 208/230 volt 3 phase high efficiency motors. 2. Include crankcase heaters, oil coolers, and cylinder head fans as required for specific application by compressor manufacturer. C. Condenser Coil: 1. Furnish copper tube aluminum fin condenser coil with maximum 10 fins per inch. 2. For projects to be installed within 50 miles of a coast line or within the state of Florida, include a protective coating on tubes and fins to protect against salt -water air in accord with manufacturer's recommendation. D. Fans: 1. Furnish direct drive condenser fan assembly pre -wired to condenser control panel: a. Fan motors to be PSC, 208/230 volt, high efficiency with internal thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Fan blades to be low noise type constructed of heavy gage aluminum paddles mechanically attached to a plated steel hub. E. Primary Power Devices: 1. Include Cooper Bussmann® fuse blocks. 2. Include Square D contactors with auxiliary contacts. 3. Include a Square D non -fuse electrical service disconnect. F. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pressure control hoses: Factory assembled SEC99B UltraTube Armored Tubing as manufactured by Johnson Controls. (No home -made hoses are acceptable.) 2. Refrigeration Piping: Dehydrated, ACR type L seamless copper tubing. Manufactured in accord with ASTM B 88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B 280. Use type K where required by State or Local Codes. 3. Fittings: ASME -B 16.22 wrought copper streamlined pattern or forged brass. a. Only long radius elbows.. b. 45 degree fittings: Not allowed. 4. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag -1 (Silver). G. Mechanical Insulation: CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Flexible closed cell elastomeric tubular or sheet insulation which conforms to minimum requirements specified by ASTM -C 534. a." Material: Flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 50 or less as tested according to ASTM -E 84 for thickness up to 1 -inch and water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm -inch or less as tested in accord with ASTM -E 96. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Aerocel b. Armaflex c. K -Flex USA 3. Glue: Contact adhesive specifically formulated for bonding insulation materials which ensures a moisture resistant permanent bond between applied materials. Forms a non - flammable material when dried and is approved for use with insulation materials to be installed. 2.3 ACCESSORIES 0 A. Valves: 1. Service Valves: a. Forged brass body packed valves with seal caps and appropriate connections, as manufactured by Henry or Superior. (Note: Schrader® fittings not allowed.) 2. Dual Valve Assemblies: a. Dual relief valve assembly consisting of a Henry series 92 forged brass 3 -way valve, (2) Henry rupture disc assemblies with indicator gage and pressure switch, and (2) Henry or Mueller 450 lb. relief valves. 3. Isolation Valves: a. Full port ball valves constructed of forged brass bodies, extended copper connections, seal caps, and multiple stem seals. Specifically designed for halocarbon refrigerants with position and flow direction indicators, suitable for working pressures of 500 psig and temperatures ranging from minus 40 deg F to plus 300 deg F. b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Mueller. 2) Sporlan. 3) Superior. 4) Henry. B. Refrigerating Specialties: 1. High Pressure Receiver: a. ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag for shells larger than 6- inches diameter. b. Vessels compliant with UL -207, (Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical) for shells smaller than 6- inches diameter. c., Vessels: Rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F and manufactured by Standard Refrigeration or equivalent. 2. Suction Accumulator: a. ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag for shells larger than 6- inches diameter. b. Vessels compliant with UL -207, (Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical) for shells smaller than 6- inches diameter. c. Vessels: Rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F and Manufactured by Henry or equivalent. 3. Suction Line Filter: a. Sporlan sealed, SF series suction line filters. Shell to be compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. 4. Liquid Line Filter Drier: a. Sporlan sealed, C series liquid line driers with solder connections. Shell to be compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. 5. Liquid Line Sight glass: a. Sporlan See -All liquid line sight glass with sweat connections. 6. Low Ambient Control Valves: a. Sporlan LAC series head pressure control valve in conjunction with an auxiliary OROA drain leg check valve. CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 7. Liquid Line Solenoid Valves: a. Sporlan E and ME valves. 8. Electronic Evaporator Pressure Regulating (EEPR) Valves: a. Sporlan CDS style valves without Schrader fittings. C. Control Devices: 1. Low Pressure Control: a. Johnson P170AB12, 1/2-inch — 80 psig adjustable,pressure switch, or approved equivalent. 2. High Pressure Control: a. Johnson P170DA1, 50-450 psig manual reset pressure switch, or approved equivalent. 3. Suction Pressure Transducer: a. CPC part number 800 -2200, 0 -200 psig transducer. 4. Discharge Pressure Transducer: a. CPC part number 800 -2500, 0 -500 psig transducer. 5. Pumpdown relay. 6. Defrost relay. 7. Defrost contactors. 8. Low ambient fan cycling controls for all multiple fan condensers and single fan condensers used with refrigerant cooled compressors. 9. Auxiliary contacts on compressor contactor for crankcase heater operation. 10. Line voltage thermostat for receiver heater control. 11. Compressor start time delay relay. Zero to 600 seconds adjustable, Airtronics TGL260 or equivalent. 2.4 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING A. Support structure: 1. Design condenser /compressor unit cabinet structure to properly support refrigeration system components, (compressors, condenser coil, fan assemblies, vessels, valves, control boxes, and piping), with minimum deflection. 2. Arrange supports to facilitate long -term serviceability and compressor accessibility, support piping, and not restrict. access to valves and other control devices. 3. Compressor vibration isolation mounts: Spring mounts for semi - hermetic compressors and rubber pads for scroll compressors. 4. Cabinet: Include necessary accessories to protect condenser coil from hail damage and prevent driving rain or snow from entering unit. 5. Where applicable design support structure, anchorage, and restraints according to seismic design requirements of store location and furnish necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. B. Refrigerating Specialties: 1. Receiver: a. Size receivers such that pump -down or total liquid storage capacity, at 80 percent of total vessel volume can store full summer or winter system charge along with a seal charge which approximates 10 percent of vessel volume. (Assume 100 ft. refrigerant piping and refer to Drawing refrigeration schedule for case coil refrigerant charge quantities.) b. Furnish properly sized brazed connections, (No threaded connections!), for the following: 1) Refrigerant inlet. 2) Refrigerant outlet. 3) Safety relief. c. Heat and insulate liquid receivers for condenser /compressor units. 2. Suction Accumulators: a. Size suction accumulators based on the following: 1) Sufficient size -that pressure drop at full load does not exceed 1/2 deg F. 2) Accumulator is capable of returning liquid at an acceptable rate through full range of refrigeration loading. 3) Locate suction accumulator at same elevation as compressors and down stream of suction filter. CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 4) For Alaska projects, provide heat tape on suction accumulator for condenser /compressor units. Control with line voltage thermostat. 3. Filter Driers: a. Size suction line filters to accommodate the unit's design capacity, with maximum pressure drop not to exceed 1 psig. Locate suction line filter up stream from suction line accumulator. b. Locate liquid and suction filter -driers in piping such that debris cannot fall into piping during core removal. 4. Sight Glasses: a. Include a sight glass in main liquid line down steam of liquid line filter -drier. b. Locate sight glasses only in horizontal piping sections with glass in a vertical orientation, visible from front or end of unit. C. Electrical Mechanical Valves and Switches: 1. Solenoid Valves: a. Normally closed liquid line solenoid valve with manual lift stems, if available based on valve sizing. Valves sized for full capacity of unit with a maximum pressure drop of 3 psi at design conditions. 2. Pressure Switches: a. Furnish high and low pressure switches. 3. EEPR Valves: a. Ship loose for field installation in accord.with the Refrigeration Equipment Schedule (R601). D. Refrigeration Valves: 1. Angle and Inline Check Valves: a. Include as required to make a complete and working system. 2. Service Valves: a. Include at the following locations: 1) Compressor oil pump. 2) Each connection point where a pressure switch or pressure transducer is required. 3) At inlet and outlet of refrigerant filter drier and strainer. 4) In discharge line of compressor 5) Receiver inlet and outlet. 3. Isolation Valves: a. Include at the following locations: 1) Suction inlet and discharge outlet of the compressor. 2) Each inlet and outlet connection to liquid receiver. 3) At suction and liquid connection to compressor /condenser unit. 4) As required in addition to locations already identified to isolate control valves. 4. Dual Relief Valve Assemblies: a. Include for pressure vessels which have an ASME National Board Tag. E. Pipe and Fittings: 1. General: a. Plan Piping as follows: Allow adequate spacing with minimum number of fittings to accommodate insulation thicknesses and arranged so that normal inspection and servicing of unit components is not hindered. Do not obstruct view of sight glasses and name plates. 2. Suction Piping: a. Size refrigeration suction piping such that total pressure drop from compressors to field connection points does not exceed 2 deg F, inclusive of control valves, valves, and applicable refrigerating specialties. 3'. Liquid Piping: a. Size liquid refrigerant piping from high pressure receiver to have a pressure drop of no greater than 2 psig per 100 ft. of equivalent length of pipe. b. Size liquid refrigerant piping from condensers to high pressure receiver such that velocity does not exceed 100 ft. per minute. 4. Furnish mechanical insulation on suction piping, suction filters, and suction accumulator. 5. Include mechanical insulation on liquid receiver. F. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Include brackets, hangers, and self - locking fasteners as required to mount and secure refrigeration system component. G. Unit Controls Functions: 1. Condenser /compressor unit to have sufficient stand alone controls capabilities to independently protect and control compressor, cycle the condenser fan, and operate head pressure control valve. 2. Wire the following other controls devices to a.terminal strip for external control by facilities third party Refrigeration Energy Management System: a. Defrost contactor. b. Compressor contactor. c. Suction transducer d. Discharge transducer 2.5 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A. Compressors: 1. Piping shall not interfere with removal and installation of compressor bodies or compressor heads. 2. Ship compressors dry with NO OIL. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent vibration, pipes rubbing against other pipes or other objects, and undue strain on pipes or fittings. 2. Support bends within 10 inches of bend. 3. Braze joints in discharge, suction, and liquid lines with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Braze copper -to- steel, copper -to- brass, brass -to- steel, or steel -to -steel joints with solder of not less than 30 percent silver content. Bleed dry nitrogen through piping during brazing to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. C. Mechanical Insulation: 1. Insulation work: Performed by trained installers regularly engaged in insulation trade. 2. Install insulation according to manufacturer's recommended procedures and practices. 3. Do not apply insulation until surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture, or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. 4. Completely seal seams, butts, and ends to retard moisture vapor from entering system. Tape and glue seams with approved products. 5. Vapor stop exposed ends by applying approved contact adhesive to pipe surface and insulation with adhesive and securing open ID's to the pipe. 6. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves with same insulation thickness as adjacent piping. 7. Fabricate elbows of mitered tubular sections or sheet sections. D. Mechanical Identification: 1. Equip receivers and accumulators containing refrigerant with a permanent label designating type of refrigerant within vessel. E. Refrigeration Valves and Specialties: 1. Braze components according to manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Install controls, components, and valves in locations and positions where they are serviceable and not easily damaged. 3. Ship solenoid valves for walk -in coolers and freezers loose for field installation. 4. Equip each compressor to be equipped with oil failure and high pressure controls. F. Electro Mechanical Switches: Include control hoses as required from pressure controls to compressor. G. Relief Valves: Mount relief valve assemblies in accessible locations above refrigerant liquid levels and according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: 1. Utilize only cushion type clamps to secure refrigeration piping. 2. Torque nuts to manufacturer's recommendations. CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) I. Power and Control Wiring: 1. Route wiring within condensing unit and outside electrical panel in water -tight conduit and in conformance with NFPA 70. 2. Mark wiring with numbers for identification every 6- inches. 3. Control Wiring: 18 AWG or larger. 4. Furnish terminal strips for field connections. 5. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of panels and equipment cabinets, protect wiring from abrasions. 6. Make electrical wiring terminations according to electrical industry standards utilizing UL approved devices. 7. Provide fuse protection for condenser fan motors. • 2.6 EQUIPMENT LABELING AND TAGGING A. Clearly affix labels to outside of condensing unit displaying the following at a minimum: 1. Manufacturer name and address. 2. Condensing unit model number. 3. Condensing unit serial number. 4. Main power voltage. 5. MCA (Minimum Circuit Ampacity). 6. MOPD (Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device). 7. Control power voltage. 8. Compressor model number. 9. Compressor serial number. 10. Compressor RLA. 11. Compressor LRA. 12. Condenser fan FLA. 13. Defrost heater amps, if used. 14. Caution or warning signs as needed. 2.7 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Paint compressor heads or bodies with refrigerant type in respective colors: 1. R -404a heads: Orange. 2. R -22 heads: Lime green. B. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. C. Clean out control panels remove excess wire, fabrication debris, metal shavings, and un- necessary devices. Ensure that wiring and control diagrams are protected with plastic laminate, clean, legible, and fully adhered to cabinet surfaces. • PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6213 (15660) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6312 (15663) INSTALLATION OF AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK. AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED 1N THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing and starting up of Owner Furnished air cooled condensers. B. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. F. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. G. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. H. Section 24 9000 — Start-up (Refrigeration) I. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C.. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI /ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. C. ANSI/ASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". INSTALLATION OF AIR COOLED CONDENSERS 24 6312 (15663) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with Owner or site supervisor and furnish labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Furnish necessary labor, tools, and equipment to lift units to roof and set in locations as indicated in applicable Refrigeration Drawings. D. Rig units for unloading, moving, and hoisting according to manufacturer's published instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment and final location to verify that they are free of interferences. Comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. Notify OSR or General Contractor immediately of coordination issues. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do'not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, coordinate and verify placement of air cooled condenser support rails and piping penetration boxes with General Contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set and anchor air cooled condensers plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings. Refer to Section 24 0529. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Support piping separately so that it is not supported off equipment piping connections. Refer to Section 24 2315 for installation of refrigerant piping. D. Install devices or parts furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted, "such as legs ". E. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of refrigeration system identification labels and tags. F. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. G. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram to Division 26 Contractor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test air cooled condensers and associated piping in accord with requirements of Section 24 2315. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. INSTALLATION OF AIR COOLED CONDENSERS 24 6312 (15663) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of crating or shipping materials associated with air cooled condensers. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. 3.6 START -UP A. See Section 24 9000. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF AIR COOLED CONDENSERS 24 6312 (15663) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF AIR COOLED CONDENSERS 246312(15663) -4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6313 (15662) AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to air cooled condensers, including, coils, cabinet, electrical devices, fans, motors, control panel, and control devices. Supply air cooled condensers as part of a compressor rack purchase agreement. B. Installation of air cooled condensers is not covered in this Section. Refer to Section 24 6312. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. D. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). E. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. F. Section 24 6312 — Installation of Air Cooled Condensers. G. Section 24 0935 Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Mechanical Drawing Refrigeration Schedule. B. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". E. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. UL, "Building Materials Directory". G. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". H. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Coordinate these submittals with requirements of Section 24 0130. C. Manufacturer shall furnish field coordination documents and record documents as described herein for submittal through compressor rack manufacturer: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1) Rigging and hoisting instructions. 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. Complete Installation and Operating, I & 0, Manuals. Refer to Section 01 7700. ' 3) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 2. Record Documents: a. At end of each construction cycle manufacturer shall submit to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group, record copies of documents described above, for each air cooled condenser unit type supplied during cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, hard copies are not permitted). ' Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant ' Target Property Development 50 S. 10`h St. Suite 400, TP3 1005 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 • 1 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 1.5 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES ' A. This Section and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply air cooled condensers. It is responsibility of condenser manufacturer to study these documents, utilize the information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Manufacturers shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. 1.6 MANUFACTURING QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Cooled Condensers: UL listed and with a UL-label permanently affixed. B. Electrical Components and Control Devices: UL and ETL labeled. C. Electrical Panels: UL labeled and in compliance with NEC standards. ' D. Air Cooled Condenser Capacities: Rated in accord with ARI Standards. E. Materials: New and without defect. Workmanship of highest quality. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, ' brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. Manufacturer is responsible for application and design of individual components. F. Manufacturer is responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and refrigeration ' contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. G. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards, and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI /ASHRAE 15 -2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply•with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." H. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Delivery of air cooled condensers to jobsite, freight allowed and prepaid. B. Furnish sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Ship coils with a 100 psig holding charge of nitrogen. D. Schedule delivery of equipment to site as coordinated with General Contractor. E. Furnish necessary instructions for rigging, handling, and hoisting to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. 1.8 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Section includes design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for air cooled condensers. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout, and arrange necessary and required components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Design equipment, anchorage, and restraints according to applicable seismic or high wind design requirements of store location and furnish necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. C. Air Cooled Condenser Design requirements: 1. When ASHRAE 0.4 percent design for outdoor ambient is less than 100 deg F, use 100 deg F ambient and when 0.4 percent ASHRAE design for outdoor ambient is 100 deg F to 110 deg F, use 110 deg F ambient. 2. Design temperature difference of 9 to 11 deg F on low temperature system. • 3. Design temperature difference of 14 to 16 deg F on medium temperature system. 4. Design for proper elevation above sea level of specific store location. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty as part of a refrigeration compressor rack purchase agreement. Refer to Section 24 0130. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: 1. Furnish factory assembled and tested, multi - circuit, air cooled condensers, which are UL listed, suitable for use with non CFC and HCFC refrigerants by one of the following manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements of Drawings and Specifications: a. Heatcraft, (Bohn). b. Krack, (Hussmann). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Unit Casings: 1. Design for outdoor installation with weatherproof control panels and hinged fan panels. Construct of galvanized frame, legs, tube sheets, internal fan baffles and motor rails, mill finished aluminum housings, and PVC coated steel fan guards.. B. Coils: 1. Furnish minimum of two independent refrigerant circuits per unit, staggered copper tubes with bonded corrugated aluminum fins, maximum 10 fins per inch. 2. For projects to be installed within 50 miles of a coast line, or within the state of Florida, furnish a polyester protective coating on coil fins to protect against salt -water corrosion in accord with manufacturer's recommendation. C. Fans and Drives Motors: 1. Furnish direct drive condenser fan assemblies pre -wired to condenser control panel. a. Fan motors to be drip- proof, 460 volt 3 phase, high efficiency with internal thermal overload protection, drip shield, and double sealed permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Fan blades to be low noise type constructed of heavy gage aluminum paddles mechanically attached to a plated steel hub. AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET D. Gravity Dampers (Alaska projects only): 1. Furnish integral gravity dampers on each fan outlet to provide airflow shut off when fan is not operating. E. Control Panel, Electrical Components, and Controls: 1. Include a weather tight control panel, integral to end opposite piping connections, as part of condenser. 2. Include a factory mounted, Square -D, non -fused disconnect factory wired to condenser fan contactors and fuse blocks. 3. Include individual fuse blocks, fuses and contactors for each condenser fan motor in the condenser control panel. 4. Include a CPC model 8R0 Multi -Flex output board, CPC Part number 810 -3006, with control fuses, secondary control relays and terminal strips, factory wired to control condenser fans in pairs. 5. Include necessary relays and control wiring to turn off half the condenser fans during split condenser operation. 6. Pressure Control Hoses: Factory assembled SEC99B Ultra Tube Armored Tubing as manufactured by Johnson Controls. No home -made hoses are acceptable. 7. Furnish an outdoor temperature sensor, EMC part number EMC /CONDTEMP -8" for each air - cooled condenser. 8. Include factory wired redundant fan cycling control circuit consisting of, Danfoss, Johnson, or Ranco pressure switches, equivalent to P170A.A118 with 18 -inch control hoses and service valves. Coordinate with Sections 24 6423 and 24 0935. F. Identification, Control Diagrams and Labels: 1. Panel wiring: Label clearly and number according to diagrams. 2. Include a plastic laminated control diagram, bonded on inside surface of electrical panel cover, which schematically shows unit's power and control wiring. 3. Fans: Number as one views headers, starting on left with No.1, then going right for No.2, then back for No.3, and so on. Left bank 1, 3, 5, and so on...; Right bank 2, 4, 6, and so on.... 4. Control condenser fan motors in pairs. Relay to shut -off half the fans during split condenser. Even fans to shut -off during split condenser mode. 5. Cycle condenser fans on starting from header and going back towards control panel. Turn off condenser fans starting from panel end, and going towards header. Header fans not to shut -off until temperature is below 10 deg F. 2.3 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING A. Electrical Wiring: 1. Factory wire fan motors and controls for single point field connection of power and control power wiring. 2. Factory mount temperature sensor under mid -point of header fan on the full active side of the condenser. Wire temperature sensor directly to applicable input board on one -piece RTCR units. Wire sensor to terminal block in condenser control panel and provide terminal block in the RTCR control panel pre -wired to applicable input point on two -piece RTCR units. Field connection of terminal blocks for sensor wiring by Refrigeration • Contractor. 3. Wire condenser fans such that a loss of communication with REMS shall shift control to mechanical pressure switches. Primary condenser fan control by REMS. B. Include service access valves at the following locations. Refer to Section 24 6423: 1. Each condenser circuit inlet header. 2. Connection point for each fan cycling pressure switch. 2.4 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. B. Clean out control panels remove excess wire, fabrication debris, metal shavings, and un- necessary devices. Ensure that wiring and control diagrams are protected with plastic laminate, clean, legible, and fully adhered to cabinet surfaces. AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK AIR COOLED CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6313 (15662) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6332 (15667) INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK. AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handling, setting, installing, and starting up of Owner Furnished evaporative condensers. B. Not covered by this Section are drain piping, make -up water piping, and water treatment systems. C. Administratively, work of this Section is governed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 0120 — Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Requirements. D. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification. F. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. G. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. H. Section 24 9000 — Start-up (Refrigeration) I. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 24 6333 — Evaporative Condensers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. C. ANSI/ASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS 24 6332 (15667) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit a representative tap water sample, from site domestic water supply to evaporative condenser manufacturer at time of refrigeration equipment order. 1. Sample shall be minimum of 16 oz in a clean sealable, non - breakable container. 2. Allow tap water to flow approximately 30 seconds prior to sampling. 3. Fill sample container completely, leaving no head space. 4. Label sample container with the following information: "Tap Water" Sample Date Sampled By (contractor and contact person) Store ID Number Store Location, (address, city, state, and zip code) 5. Ship, sample next day delivery to the following: Attn: Water Analytical Services Evapco, Inc. 5151 Allendale Lane Taneytown, MD 21787 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with Owner or site supervisor and furnish labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Furnish necessary labor, tools, and equipment to lift units to roof and set in locations as indicated in the applicable Refrigeration Drawings. D. Rig units for unloading, moving, and hoisting according to . manufacturer's published instructions. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of power and control wiring with Division 26 contractor. B. Coordinate installation of Pulse—Pure water treatment and conductivity controllers shipped loose with evaporative condensers. C. Coordinate installation of make -up water piping, water treatment, and drain piping with responsible trades. Make allowances to share hangers, pipe supports, and roof pipe boxes where appropriate. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment and final,location to verify that they are free of interferences. Comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS 24 6332 (15667) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. Notify OSR or General Contractor immediately of coordination issues. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, coordinate and verify placement of evaporative condenser support rails and piping penetration boxes with General Contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set and anchor evaporative condensers plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings. Refer to Section 24 0529. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Support piping separately so that it is not supported off equipment piping connections. Refer to Section 24 2315 for installation of refrigerant piping. D. Install devices or parts furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted. 1. Install manufacturer provided water level standpipe and make -up water solenoid. 2. Install manufacturer acturer provided low vs utt'r alarm scnsuz. Prot isle 120 volt aml loci t oltcrgc REIN wirinv; fmm RTCR or motor control panel. E. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of refrigeration system identification labels and tags. F. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. G. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram to Division 26 contractor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test evaporative condensers and associated piping in accord with requirements of Section 24 2315. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of crating or shipping materials associated with the evaporative condensers. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. 3.6 START -UP A. See Section 24 9000. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS 24 6332 (15667) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS 24 6332 (15667) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6333 (15665) EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification applies to low profile centrifugal fan counter flow blow through evaporative condensers, including, coils, cabinets, electrical devices, fans, pumps, motors, and control devices. Evaporative condensers shall be supplied as part of the compressor rack purchase agreement. B. Installation of evaporative condensers is not covered in this specification section, refer to section 24 6332. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS: A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. D. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). E. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers. F. Section 24 6332 — Installation of Evaporative Condensers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Mechanical Drawings - Refrigeration Schedule. B. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". E. • NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. UL, "Building Materials Directory". G. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". H. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Coordinate these submittals with requirements of Specification Section 24 0130. C. Manufacturer shall furnish field coordination documents and record documents as described herein for submittal through compressor rack manufacturer. 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Rigging and hoisting instructions. EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6333 (15665) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) - TARGET 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. Complete Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01 7700). 3) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 2. Record Documents: a. At end of each construction cycle manufacturer shall submit to Target Refrigeration Engineering Group, record copies of documents described above, for each evaporative condenser supplied during cycle and accompanied by a related stores matrix. (These documents are to be electronic format on a CD. PDF and CAD files are required, NO Hard Copies!) Submit to: Mechanical Engineering Dept. Administrative Assistant Target Property Development 50 S. 10th St. Suite 400, TP3 1005 Minneapolis, MN 55403 Telephone: (612)- 761 -5369 Fax: (612) 761 -3321 1.5 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES A. This Section and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply evaporative condensers. It is responsibility of condenser provider and manufacturer to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Vendors shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. 1.6 MANUFACTURING QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Certification: Based on factory performance tests Manufacturer's Guarantees of Thermal Performance. B. Manufacturer's certification of pressure and temperature ratings. C. Codes, Standards, and Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. ANSUASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. 3. UL Labels: Furnish electrical equipment components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 4. OSHA 29CFR 1910.212, "General Requirements for All Machines ", and 29CFR 1910.219, "Mechanical Power - Transmission Apparatus ". 5. ANSUASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of evaporative condensers to jobsite; freight allowed and prepaid. B. Furnish sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. C. Ship coils with a 50 psig holding charge of nitrogen. D. Schedule delivery of equipment to site as coordinated with General Contractor. E. Furnishinecessary instructions for rigging, handling, and hoisting to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6333 (15665) - 2 • TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.8 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES A. This Section and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply evaporative condensers. It is responsibility of condenser provider and manufacturer to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Vendors shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. 1.9 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Section includes design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for evaporative condensers. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout and arrange necessary and required components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Evaporative condenser design requirements: 1. When ASHRAE 1 percent design for outdoor ambient is greater than or equal to 101 deg F, use 78 deg F ambient wet bulb temperature to select evaporative condensers. 2. Select an evaporative condenser for 90 deg F condensing temperature on low temperature system. 3. Select an evaporative condenser for 90 deg F condensing temperature on medium temperature system. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty as part of an evaporative condensers purchase agreement. Refer to Section 24 0130. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish factory assembled and tested, multi- circuit, evaporative condensers, which are UL listed, suitable for use with non CFC and HCFC refrigerants by the following manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements of Drawings and Specifications: 1. Evapco, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Heat Transfer Coils: 1. Minimum 0.06 -inch thick carbon steel tubes mounted in a steel support frame and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Minimum design working pressure 320 psig and tested to 400 psig. B. Cabinet, Casing, Water Basin, and Fan Section: 1. Carbon steel casing and cabinet with minimum G235 galvanized finish. Access panels or doors to be of same materials. 2. Sump basin to be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with large area, removable stainless steel pan strainer, and an adjustable brass float valve assembly with a foam filled float ball. C. Centrifugal Fans and Drives: 1. Forward curved centrifugal type fan, hot dip galvanized, statically and dynamically balanced and factory installed in the pan section. Fan wheel shall be mounted on steel shaft with corrosion preventative finish, supported by self aligning pillow block ball bearings with cast iron housings, minimum L-10 life of 75,000 hours. 2. Protect fan openings and belts by guards that meet applicable OSHA standards. 3. Fan drive: To consist of multi - groove with taper lock bushings and matched v -belt set, designed for 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower. D. Fan Motor: TEFC, premium efficiency, inverter duty, designed for outdoor service, and sized to be to be non- overloading over full range of fan's performance curve. Motor shall be pre -wired to evaporative condenser's control panel. E. Recirculation Water Pump: EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6333 (15665) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Close coupled centrifugal type pump with mechanical seals and TEFC motor suitable for outdoor operation. F. Water Distribution System: 1. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) piping and headers appropriately sized to ensure sufficient water flow, corrosion resistant spray nozzles with provisions to eliminate clogging and header clean out plugs. G. Eliminators: 1. Constructed of inert Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) designed to ensure a minimum of three changes in air flow direction. H. Electrical Wiring: 1. Factory wire pump and fan motors to a numbered terminal strip in a single weather tight junction box on side of unit. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish a stand by water pump of same type as recirculation pump described in Article 2.2. B. Furnish vibration isolation rails or some means to eliminate the transmission of vibrations to the building structure. C. Provide an electronic water level control system. D. Provide a low water monitor /alarm for connection to REMS E. Provide a factory installed Pulse -Pure non - chemical water treatment system. Pulse -Pure panel to be 460 volt and include integrated conductivity/blow -down valve controller. F. Provide a factory mounted motorized blow -down valve assembly. G. Provide factory follow -up service and monitoring for non - chemical water treatment system. Minimum of 9 site visits within 12 months including start-up. 1. Follow -up service and inspection shall include testing of make -up and re- circulating water samples for conductivity, pH, alkalinity, calcium and chlorides as a minimum. Additionally, follow -up service to include confirmation of proper calibration of conductivity controller, visual inspection of non - chemical water treatment chamber and panel and submittal of a monitoring report to Target Refrigeration Operations (refrigeration .operations @target.com) and Evapco (target @evapco.com PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6333 (15665)'- 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6422 (15653) INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handing, setting, installing, and starting up of Owner furnished air cooled roof -top compressor racks. B. Administratively, work of this Section is govemed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Version: December 2005. B. Section 01 4200 - References. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. E. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. F. Section 24 0529 — Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. G. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. H. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. I. Section 24 0930 — Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. J. Section 24 0833 — Refrigeration Pre - Start-Up /Start-Up Report. K. Section 24 0835 — Roof -Top Compressor Rack Validation Report. L. Section 24 9000 — Start-up (Refrigeration) M. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS 24 6422 (15653) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. NEC, "National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 ", pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. • C. ANSI/ASME B31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with Owner or site supervisor and furnish labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload refrigeration compressor rack and remote header, when applicable. B. Coordinate hoisting with HVAC equipment so as to minimize project cost, and include add option cost for independent hoist. C. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. D. Rig units for unloading, moving, and hoisting according to manufacturer's published lifting instructions. E. Unit should only be unloaded from trailer and lifted using crane and appropriate spreader bars, according to manufacturer's published lifting instructions. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment, and final location to verify that they are free of interferences, comply with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Locations of equipment on drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping 'and electrical work. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of roofing membrane, coordinate and verify placement of equipment support rails and piping penetration boxes with General Contractor. B. Verify RTCR curb provided by GC will allow for level installation of RTCR, prior to installation of roofing materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install and anchor refrigeration compressor racks and condensers plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings. Refer to Section 24 0529. B. For projects with two -piece Roof Top Compressor Racks - Provide interconnecting refrigeration piping and low voltage electrical terminations between rack condenser and compressor sections. Refer to Sections 24 2315 and 24 0930. C For projects with Remote Headers - Install and anchor refrigeration remote header assembly plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings. Refer to Section 24 0529. D. For projects with Remote Headers - Provide interconnecting refrigeration piping and electrical terminations between refrigeration compressor rack and remote header assembly. Refer to sections 24 2315 and 24 0930. INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS 24 6422 (15653) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) E. For projects with Loop Piping - Provide full port liquid and suction insolation ball valves on each refrigeration branch line from the main suction and liquid loops. Ball valves should be constructed of forged brass bodies, extended copper connections, seal caps and multiple stem seals. Specifically designed for halocarbon refrigerants with position and flow direction indicators as manufactured by Danfoss, Mueller, Sporlan, Superior or Henry. Install insolation valves in an accessible location and properly identify per Specification Section 24 0553. Each refrigeration circuit should be isolatable from the mains for servicing. F. For projects with Loop Piping - Provide forged brass body packed service valves as shown on Refrigeration Drawings at each suction and liquid branch. Service valves manufactured by Danfoss, Henry or Superior. Schrader fittings are not allowed. G. Install RTCR manufacturer supplied refrigeration control valves as indicated on Refrigeration Drawings and Schedules. H. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. I. Support piping separately so that it is not supported off equipment piping connections. Refer to Section 24 2315 for installation of refrigerant piping. J. Install devices and cabinet parts furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted, such as hail guards. K. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of refrigeration equipment labels and tags. L. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. M. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram to Division 26 contractor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test refrigeration compressor rack and associated piping in accord with requirements of Section 24 2315. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of crating and shipping materials associated with refrigeration compressor rack. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. 3.6 START-UP A. See section 24 9000 END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS 24 6422 (15653) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS 24 6422 (15653) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 6423 (15652) ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section covers rooftop refrigeration compressor rack systems and associated remote refrigeration system control header assemblies, including structural steel frame and support structure, sound damping, weather tight cabinet, compressors, refrigerating specialties, refrigeration valves, electromechanical control valves and switches, pressure vessels, relief devices, bolts, nuts, brackets, piping, mechanical insulation solder, flux, glue, labels, and signage. B. Section also includes delivery, start-up assistance, documentation, installation and operating instructions, service manuals and warranty. C. Section does not include installation of the refrigeration compressor rack, refrigerated display cases and store fixtures, refrigeration piping external to frame or cabinet, refrigerant or refrigeration oil. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. D. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements. E. Section 24 0553 — Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. F. Section 24 0719 — Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 24 2315 — Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers. I. Section 24 6333 -- Evaporative Condensers. J. Section 24 0935 = Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Owner: Target Corporation, 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403. B. OSR: Owner's Site Representative. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". B. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". C. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". D. ETL, "Electrical Testing Lab ". E. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ". F. Mechanical Drawings Refrigeration Schedule. G. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". H. NEMA, National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". 1. OSHA, Occupational Safety & Health Administration. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) J. UL, `Building Materials Directory". 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION TARGET A. Rooftop compressor rack assemblies shall consist of multiple compressors enclosed in sound attenuating, weather tight cabinet mounted to a common structural steel frame • with a condenser or two piece design (separate compressor and condenser sections) as required by store conditions. Compressor rack components shall include electrical panels, suction headers, liquid headers, defrost header, oil return system, pressure regulating valves, and liquid line solenoids. Cabinet shall include weather tight access doors or panels which allow full accessibility to components. Refrigeration load design basis shall be as indicated in Refrigeration Schedule on Drawings. 1. Branch requirements, control and defrost information according to Refrigeration Schedule on Drawings. 2. Electrical controls and devices are to be pre - wired. Refer to Section 24 0935. 3. Loop piping projects - Branch control valves (EEPR, and liquid solenoids) to be shipped loose for field installation by refrigeration contractor. 4. Remote header projects Remote header assembly shall consist of refrigeration circuit branches mounted to a common structual steel frame. Design header such that electrical panel, headers, pressure regulating valves, liquid line solenoids and a drip pan shall be part of the assembly. Front accessibility is required. Header frame including brackets and structure to be suspended from building structure if required, refer to Refrigeration Drawings. 5. Remote header projects - Branch requirements, control and defrost information according to Refrigeration Schedule on Drawings. 6. Remote header projects - Electrical controls and devices are to be pre - wired. Refer to Section 24 0935. B. Refrigerants: As listed in Refrigeration Schedule on Drawings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Refer to Section 24 0130 for coordination of refrigeration equipment submittals. C. Manufacturer shall furnish field coordination documents and record documents as described herein for submittal through compressor rack manufacturer: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Refrigeration system schedule. 2) Rigging and hoisting instructions. 3) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. 4) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 5) Refrigeration system Piping and Instrument Diagrams, (P &ID's). 6) Mechanical nomenclature sheets — headers, compressors and racks. D. Furnish 5 complete sets of the following to project General Contractor at the time of delivery to the site: 1. As -built compressor rack general arrangement drawings showing component and piping connection locations. 2. As -built electrical wiring and controls drawings wiih nomenclature. 3. Complete Refrigeration Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01 7700). E. Submit the following documents upon completion of start-up: This document should be Faxed. 1. Completed Start-up Checklist with any associated comments or corrective action plans. 1.7 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES A. This Section and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply condenser /compressor units. It is responsibility of rooftop compressor manufacturer to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, fabricate equipment, and ship as required. B. Manufacturer shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1.8 MANUFACTURING QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: New and without defect. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. B. Manufacturers are responsible for application validation and final selection of specified individual components and sub - assemblies. Contact Target Refrigeration Engineering regarding component or sub - assembly applications issues. C. Manufacturers are responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and refrigeration contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. D. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards and regulatory requirements. Including but not limited to provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI /ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 3. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Furnish safety (pressure relief) valves complying with ASME code and stamped with appropriate code symbols. 4. Rooftop compressor rack: Approved as a complete assembly and bearing appropriate label as required by building code or authority having jurisdiction, Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) or Underwriter's Laboratory Inc.® (UL). E. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. F. Leak check, pressure test, and evacuate each compressor rack assembly and remote header assembly, if applicable, prior to shipment. Ship refrigeration systems leak free. 1. Evacuate systems to a minimum of 500 AmHg for a minimum of 24 hours prior to final shipping charge is installed. G. Target reserves the right to audit and witness manufacturing quality assurance. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of rooftop compressor rack and associated items to jobsite, freight allowed and prepaid. B. Schedule delivery of equipment to site as coordinated with General Contractor. C. Furnish sufficient lifting lugs or rigging connections so that units may be moved and hoisted in the field. D. Furnish sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. E. Ship units with 100 psig holding charge of dry nitrogen. .F. Coordinate shipping and delivery with project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. G. Furnish necessary instructions for unloading, handling, and hanging to project General Contractor or refrigeration contractor. 1.10. SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Section includes design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for refrigeration equipment associated with procurement of Roof Top Compressor Rack units. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout, and arrange necessary and required refrigeration system components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Rooftop refrigeration compressor racks must be capable of providing capacities at suction temperatures as indicated on Refrigeration Schedule. C. Condensing temperature and condenser 'design requirements refer Section 24 6313 or 24 6333 as applicable. D. Defrost: ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Low temperature cases, dual temperature case, low temperature box evaporators and meat cooler box evaporators: Hot gas defrost. 2. Loop piping or stores with electric defrost - Low temperature cases, dual temperature cases , low temperature box evaporators and meat cooler box evaporators: Electric defrost. 3. Medium temperature cases and medium temperature box evaporators: Off time, (air) defrost. E. Other Design Requirements: 1. Select compressors based on 40 deg F return gas temperature for low temperature units and 50 deg F for medium temperature units. 2. Target reserves the right to review and reject compressor selections. 3. Design equipment anchorage and restraints according to applicable seismic or high wind design requirements of store location and furnish necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. . 1.11 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 24 0130 "Refrigeration Equipment Coordination Requirements." PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSOR RACK AND REMOTE HEADER A. General: 1. Manufacturers subject to compliance with Specifications. Furnish Rooftop Refrigeration compressor rack control panels assembled by one of the following: a. Hill- Phoenix b. Hussmann c. Zero Zone Refrigeration B. Support Structure: 1. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and painting to match cabinet. 2. Structural Steel W- Shapes: ASTM A 992. 3. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. 4. Cold- Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B, black finish unless otherwise indicated, weight class as indicated. 6. Bolted metal framing systems, (Unistrut): Channels fittings and hardware as defined in Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standard Publication MFMA -1. a. Channels: Cold formed 12 gage. ASTM A 570, grade 33 low- carbon steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. b. Channel Accessories:- ASTM A 635 steel and painted with electrodeposited epoxy base paint. C. Cabinet: 1. Single wall 20 Ga. galvanized steel or aluminum properly prepped and painted a Target approved tan to match other rooftop equipment, with minimum 1 inch sound absorbing or dampening liner material in the compressor compartment. Compressor /valve section to have lift off doors. 2. Provide locking hold open arms for hinged electrical access doors. 3. For projects to be installed within 50 miles of a coast line, include an additional protective coating or paint on cabinet and support structure to protect against salt -water air in accord with manufacturer's recommendation. D. Compressors: Refer to Refrigeration Schedule on Drawings: 1. Copeland Scroll compressors compatible with R -404a. a. Economized vapor injection for low temperature application. 2. Compressor mounting kit, Copeland part number 527- 0157 -00. E. Refrigeration Specialties: ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1. Receiver: a. Furnish ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag, rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F. Manufactured by Standard Refrigeration, Refrigeration Research, or equivalent. 2. Receiver Gage: a. Furnish Rochester Gage model HM- 8443 -0005x combination receiver gage and analog output indicator (1 -2 vdc). 3. Suction Accumulators: a. Furnish ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag, rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F. Manufactured by Henry, Refrigeration Research, Standard Refrigeration, or equivalent. 4. Sub - Cooler Heat Exchanger: a. Alfa Laval, Flat Plate, SWEP, or equivalent brazed plate parallel flow heat exchanger with 316 stainless steel plates and 99.9 percent pure copper brazing materials. b. Refrigerant Distribution Devices: Integrate into either stamping of plates or construction of connection assembly. c. Heat Exchanger Operating Ranges: Vacuum to 435 psig and minus 58 deg F to 437 deg F. d. Test to 1.5 times maximum design pressure. e. Helium Mass Spectrometer Measured Maximum Allowable Leak Rate: Less than 2.8 grams of refrigerant per year. f. UL and cUL listed. 5. Filter Driers: a. Alco, Sporlan, or Danfoss replaceable core type liquid line driers with RCW -48 or equivalent high water capacity cores and secondary filters. 1) Shell: Compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. b. Alco, Sporlan, or Danfoss replaceable core type suction line filters with RPE -48 -BD or equivalent cores. 1) Shell: Compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. 6. Sight Glasses: a. Sporlan liquid line sight glass. b. Sporlan oil return sight glass. 7. Oil Level Control System: a. Oil Level Regulators: Alco — OMB -JB 1, Self contained oil level sensor with integral solenoid valve, (110 volt coil). b. Oil Separators: Temprite or Westermeyer with accessible coalescent and integral reservoir: 1) Shells 6 inch diameter and less: Compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. 2) Shells greater than 6 inch diameter: ASME certified and inspected pressure vessels with a National Board Tag, rated for 450 psig at 150 deg F. Include float indicator ball in lowest reservoir sight glass c. Oil Filter: Sporlan ROF -413. 1) Shell: Compliant with UL -207, Standard for Refrigerant Containing Components and Accessories, Non - electrical. F. Electro Mechanical Valves and Switches: 1. Solenoid Valves: a. Sporlan E series valves with manual lift stems, and 110 volt coils. b. Sporlan CME built -in check valve solenoids with manual lift stems, and 110 volt coils for hot gas defrost applications. 2. Pressure Regulating Valves: a. Discharge Defrost Differential Pressure Regulating Valves with 110 volt coils and indicator pilot lights: 1) Parker A4YBL or A82BL 2) Hansen Technologies HA4ABL b. Condenser Pressure Controls: 1) Liquid drain, Parker A8 Series Flo -Con inlet pressure regulator. 2) Bypass Regulator Parker A8AOE Flo -Con outlet pressure regulator. c. Vapor injection pressure regulating valve 1) Parker PORT internally piloted EPR. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3. Pressure Switches: a. High pressure controls: Danfoss, Johnson or Ranco equivalent to P170DA1. b. Low pressure controls: Danfoss, Johnson or Ranco equivalent to P170AB12. 4. Electronic Evaporator Pressure Regulator (EEPR): a. Sporlan CDS style valves without Schraeder fittings. • b. Furnish one hand held Sporlan SMA -12 Bi -Polar Step Motor Actuator per store. SMA -12 to include mating Molex connections to provided board connector. Sporlan Part# 953158. G. Refrigeration Valves: 1. Angle and Inline Check Valves: a. Piston or globe type valves, with forged brass or cast bronze body, Teflon seal, brass internal assemblies. Specifically designed for halocarbon refrigerants approved for horizontal or vertical installation, suitable for working pressures of 500 psig and temperatures ranging from minus 40 deg F to plus 300. deg F. b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Danfoss, Henry, Mueller, Superior, or Watco. 2. Service Valves: a. Brass body packed valves - Furnish forged brass body packed valves with seal caps and appropriate connections, as manufactured by Danfoss, Henry, or Superior. (Note: Schrader fittings not allowed.) b. Ball valves — Furnish Superior MIA series ball valves, or approved alternate, UL approved for 700 psi maximum working pressure compatible with all common CFC,HCFC, HFC and CO2 . refrigerants and their oils with a ball seal leak rate of less than 0.5 oz and a less than 0.1 oz assembly leak rate to atmosphere. Valve to have hand operated handle installed. Connection seal caps to be wrench removable (no finger tight caps). (Note: Schrader fittings not allowed). c. Service valves should be brazed directly into piping. Flare fittings should not be used for the installation of service valves. 3. Isolation valves: a. Full port ball valves constructed of forged brass bodies, extended copper connections, seal caps, and multiple stem seals. Specifically designed for halocarbon refrigerants with position and flow direction indicators, suitable for working pressures of 500 psig and temperatures ranging from minus 40 deg F to plus 300 deg F. b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Danfoss, Mueller, Sporlan, Superior, or Henry. 4. Pre - Relief Valve, (350 psi set point): a. Henry Hi to Low Bypass Valve. b. Hansen Technologies HA2BK relief regulating valve. 5. Dual Relief and Rupture Disc Valve Assemblies, (450 psi rated): a. Henry series 92 or equivalent, forged brass 3 -way valve. b. Two Henry, Hansen Technologies, Westermeyer Industries or equivalent, rupture disc assemblies with indicator gages and pressure transducers. c. Two Henry or equivalent 450 lb. relief valves. 6. Expansion Valves: a. Sporlan Electronic type expansion controller, including the following: 1) Sporlan Sub - cooler Controller. 2) SER Electronic Expansion Valve. 3) Sporlan Pressure Transducer. 4) Two Sporlan surface temperature sensors. H. Refer to Section 24 2315 for applicable Pipe and Fitting material requirements. I. Refer to Section 24 0719 for applicable Mechanical Insulation materials requirements. J. Mechanical Identification: 1. Include a laminated, color -coded schematic P &ID diagram of each refrigeration system, including remote headers (if applicable) with valve legend. Mount laminated schematics within RTCR enclosure. 2. Refer to Section 24 0553 for engraved plastic laminate signs, coiled polyester pipe labels and valve tags. 3. Fasteners: Self- tapping, stainless steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) K. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: 1. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts and self locking nuts. 2. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 3. Hanger Rods: ASTM A36 hot rolled steel, with cut coarse threads. 4. Strut mounted cushion clamp assemblies with galvanized powder coated 1008 -1010 carbon steel clamps, projection welded studs, pre- molded DuPont Hytrel® cushions and nylon insert locknut as manufactured by Hydra -Zorb Company. 2.2 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING A. Support Structure: 1. Design rack, condenser and remote header (if applicable) support structures to properly support refrigeration system components, (compressors, vessels, condenser, valves, conduits, and piping), with minimum deflection. 2. Arrange support members to facilitate long -term serviceability and compressor accessibility, support piping and not restrict access to valves and other control devices. 3. Design support structure, anchorage, and restraints according to applicable seismic design requirements of store location and furnish necessary documentation as required by building code and building authority having jurisdiction. B. Enclosure Cabinet: 1. Incorporate the following features into compressor rack enclosure cabinet: a. Furnish weather tight, outdoor, rough service incandescent lighting fixtures, sufficient to illuminate control panels and other accessible areas of cabinet, (compressors and control valve headers). Provide a minimum of two light fixtures for compressor section. b. Furnish, galvanized steel drip pan under compressors, valve headers, and accumulators, with capped drain line connections for clean out. c. Lift off access doors. d. Sufficient cabinet ventilation to prevent component overheating. Provide rain hoods over all ventilation openings. e. Include factory mounted 120 volt duplex outlets in control panel and compressor section of enclosure. Power to be factory wired from 120 volt control circuit. C. Compressors: 1. Select appropriate size and number of compressors with appropriate accessories, to support general refrigeration rack design requirements as identified in refrigeration schedule. 2. Provide crankcase heaters as sized by compressor manufacturer. D. Refrigerating Specialties: 1. Receiver: a. Size rack receivers such that pump -down or total liquid storage capacity, at 80 percent of total vessel volume can store winter condenser charge; charge from two largest evaporator branches, and seal charge which approximates 10 percent of vessel volume. b. Install receiver assembly beneath condenser on structural steel frame. c. Furnish a mechanical liquid level float with dial gage indicator, adjustable relay contacts and proportional voltage output. d. Furnish properly sized brazed connections, (No threaded•connections), for the following: 1) Refrigerant inlet. 2) Refrigerant outlet. 3) Solid state liquid level probe. 4) Safety relief. 2. Suction Accumulators: a. Size suction accumulators based on the following: 1) Sufficient liquid holding capacity hold total charge of 2 largest evaporator circuits. 2) Sufficient size that the pressure drop at full load does not exceed 1/2 deg F. 3) Accumulator is capable of returning liquid at an acceptable rate through full range of refrigeration loading. 4) Locate suction accumulator at same elevation as compressors and down stream of suction filter. 3. Sub - Cooler Heat Exchanger: ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET a. Furnish a heat exchanger, serviced by vapor injection ports of low temperature compressors, to sub -cool refrigerant liquid for low temperature refrigeration loads. b. Size heat exchanger to supply 40 deg leaving liquid refrigerant temperature when low temperature refrigeration system is operating at design conditions. c. Utilize Sporlan electronic expansion valve and Sporlan sub - cooler control module for sub - cooler operation. 4. Filter Driers: a. Size suction line filters to accommodate the rack design capacity, with maximum pressure drop not to exceed 1 psig. More than one suction filter may be required per suction group. b. Locate suction line filters up stream from suction line accumulators. c. Locate liquid and suction filter -driers in piping such that debris cannot fall into piping during core removal. 5. Sight Glasses: a. Furnish in main liquid line down steam of liquid line filter - driers. b. Furnish in oil return main down stream of oil filter. c. Locate only in horizontal piping sections with glass in a vertical orientation, visible, (Readable), from front or end of rack. 6. Oil Level Control System: a. Copeland approved continuous oil return system. Common components include, but are not limited to, individual oil float chambers for each compressor fed from an oil separator with reservoir, and an oil filter. E. Electrical Mechanical Valves and Switches: 1. Solenoid Valves: a. Normally closed liquid line valves, sized individually for the capacity of each branch. b. Walk -in boxes on the RTCR - Ship loose 120 V liquid line solenoids for field installation on liquid line of cooler and freezer circuits. c. Loop Piping projects - Ship loose 120 V liquid line solenoids for field installation on branch circuit piping of Market cases. d. Normally open condenser splitting solenoid valves properly sized for each discharge gas circuit inlet, with a pressure drop of no greater than 1 psig. e. Pump -out to have liquid strainer upstream of solenoid. Sporlan 2449 -004 orifice is to be used at suction header. Check valve and isolation valves are required. 2. Discharge Defrost Differential Pressure Regulating Valve: a. Properly size defrost differential pressure regulating valve, for full capacity of rack, with pressure drop of no greater than 1 psig for liquid valve applications and to comply with overall rack pressure drop . requirements for discharge valve applications. 3. Pressure Switches: a. Individual high with a time delay relay, for each compressor (coordinate with Section 24 0935). b. Low pressure switches per suction group (coordinate with Section 24 0935) 4. Electronic Evaporator Pressure Regulator (EEPR): a. Size electronic evaporator control valves individually for capacity of each branch, with a pressure drop of no greater than 0.5 psig. b. Loop Piping Projects - Ship loose EEPR suction control valves for field installation. 5. Spare Circuits: a. Provide two spare circuits per units. Spare circuits to include liquid and hot gas solenoid valves, EEPR valve and all associated piping. F. Refrigeration Valves: 1. Angle and Inline Check Valves: a. Furnish as required to make a complete and working system. 2. Service Valves: a. Furnish at the following locations, (Coordinate with Section 24 0935): 1) Each connection point where a pressure switch or pressure transducer is required. (Note: connection of high pressure switches to compressors is an exception to this requirement.) 2) Upstream of each branch EEPR control valve on evaporator suction header. 3) Down stream of each evaporator branch liquid solenoid valve. 4) At inlet and outlet of each refrigerant filter, drier, and strainer. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 5) At receiver bypass, condenser drain leg, oil separator outlet, suction accumulator outlet, and sub - cooler suction. 3. Isolation Valves: a. Furnish at the following locations: 1) Suction inlet and discharge outlet of each compressor. 2) Each inlet and outlet connection to liquid receiver. 3) Each inlet and outlet connection to condensers. 4) Each evaporator suction, liquid and hot gas defrost header branch connection. 5) Liquid and hot gas defrost header main inlet connections. 6) Inlet and outlet of liquid line drier. 7) As required in addition to locations already identified to isolate control valves. 4. Dual Relief Valve Assemblies: , a. Furnish for pressure vessels which have an ASME National Board Tag. 5. Pre - relief Regulators: a. Furnish a By -Pass valve at receiver to address momentary instances of over pressure. 6. Thermal Expansion Valves: a. Furnish electronic expansion controller in accord with manufacturer's diagrams and instructions, as required for proper operation of liquid sub - cooler. G. Pipe and Fittings: 1. General: a. Plan piping as follows: Allow adequate spacing with minimum number of fittings to accommodate specified insulation thicknesses and arranged so that normal inspection and servicing of rack components is not hindered. Do not obstruct view of sight glasses, gages, indicator lights, and name plates. b. Extend piping for field connection to a point minimum 8 inches outside of cabinet. 2. Suction Piping: a. Size refrigeration rack suction piping such that total pressure drop from compressors to the field connection points does not exceed 2 deg F, inclusive of control valves, valves, and applicable refrigerating specialties. 3. Liquid Piping: a. Feed individual liquid branch lines from bottom of liquid header. b. Size liquid refrigerant piping from high pressure receiver to liquid header to have a pressure drop of no greater than 2 psig per 100 ft. of equivalent length of pipe. c. Liquid refrigerant piping from condensers to high pressure receiver shall be sized such that velocity does not exceed 100 ft. per minute. d. Branch liquid piping to evaporators with hot gas defrost to be minimum 5/8 -inch OD and other branch liquid piping to be minimum 1/2 -inch OD. 4. Hot Gas and Discharge Piping: a. Size compressor discharge piping with a maximum pressure drop between compressors to field connection point of 5 psig. b. Hot gas defrost loads over 30,000 Btuh shall have a 7/8 -inch or greater hot gas line. c. Hot gas defrost loads under 30,000 Btuh shall have a 5/8 -inch hot gas line. 5. Relief Vent Piping: a. Tie discharge lines from relief valves to a common header and pipe to enclosure exterior. Terminate common relief header with 90 degree down fitting. H. Mechanical Insulation: 1. Refer to Section 24 0719 for applicable minimum insulation thicknesses. 2. Factory insulate refrigeration components physically located within unit, requiring insulation, (valves, refrigerating specialties, vessels, piping, or other) after successful completion of pressure and leak testing to within 12 inches of field connections. 3. Furnish mechanical insulation on suction piping, suction filters, sub - cooled liquid piping including both ambient and mechanically cooled liquid and hot gas defrost header. 4. Heat trace and insulate high pressure receiver, refer to Section 24 0935. 5. Suction accumulators are not to be insulated. I. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Support piping separately from rack support structure so that its weight is not transferred to refrigeration system components. 2. Furnish piping supports approximately every 4 foot and within 24 inches of changes in direction. 3. Furnish brackets, hangers, and self - locking fasteners as required to mount and secure refrigeration system component. 4. Furnish cushioned clamps on non - insulated refrigerant piping. Refer to Section 24 0719 for insulated pipe clamps. 2.3 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A. Support Structure: 1. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 2. Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: aQ Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. B. Compressors: 1. Mount compressors such that they are individually isolated for vibration with compressor manufacturer's supplied mounting systems. 2. Piping shall not interfere with removal and installation of compressor bodies or compressor heads. 3. Unions or vibration eliminators are required as needed to properly move discharge or suction lines for ease of compressor removal. 4. Ship compressors dry with NO OIL. C. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent vibration, pipes rubbing against other pipes or any other objects, and undue strain on pipes or fittings. 2. Refer to Section 24 2315 for applicable common applicable piping installation requirements. 3. Braze joints in discharge, suction, and liquid lines with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Braze copper -to- steel, copper -to- brass, brass -to -steel or steel -to -steel joints with solder of not less than 30 percent silver content. During brazing bleed dry nitrogen through piping to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. D. Mechanical Insulation: 1. Refer to Section 24 0719 for common applicable mechanical insulation installation requirements. 2. Do not apply insulation until surfaces are clean, dry, and free of dirt, grease, moisture, or other impurities such as corrosive cleaners and dust. Seal refrigerant pipe openings while installing insulation to prevent foreign material from entering tubing. E. Mechanical Identification: 1: Furnish documentation laminated on both sides and permanently fastened to an inner surface of unit and protect from weather: a. Piping schematic with valve legend, identifying valve numbers, functions. b. Control Points List. c. Wiring Diagrams, both power and control. 2. Label unit refrigeration piping to match refrigeration schedule with MS -970 coiled polyester pipe labels. Colors are to be black characters on a yellow or white background. Refer to Specification Section 24 0553. 3. Clearly identify each isolation and control valve with tags identifying function and valve number. 4. Equip receivers and accumulators with an intemal volume greater than 3 cubic feet and containing refrigerant with an engraved plastic - laminate sign, identifying vessel and designating type of refrigerant within vessel. Fasten to adjacent structure. F. Refrigeration Valves and Specialties: 1. Solder or braze components according to manufacturer's recommendation. ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2. Install controls, components, and valves in locations and positions where they are serviceable and not easily damaged. 3. Install housings for liquid line driers, suction filters, and oil filters without cores or filter elements. 4. Ship solenoid valves for walk -in coolers and freezers loose for field installation. 5. Furnish individual compressor oil float controls. 6. Equip each compressor with oil failure and high pressure controls. 7. Install oil management systems according to manufacturer's instructions on each compressor rack. G. Electro Mechanical Valves and Switches: 1. Furnish control hoses as required from pressure controls to compressors. H. Relief Valves: Mount relief valve assemblies in accessible locations above refrigerant liquid levels and according to manufacturer's instructions. I. Hangers, Supports, and Fasteners: 1. Do not clamp within 5- inches of soldered or brazed joints. 2. Clamp vertical and horizontal piping runs as follows: a. For insulated piping use strut mounted clamps with insulation couplings. b. For un- insulated piping use strut mounted cushion clamps. 3. Torque nuts to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 SPARE PARTS AND CONSUMABLES A. Ship loose 2 sets of cores or filter elements for the following: 1. Liquid line driers. 2. Suction line filters. 3. Oil return filters. 4. Temprite coalescent element. B. Furnish a spare pressure control hose of each length utilized. C. Furnish 1 spare set of line fuses for each fuse size installed and 3 spare control fuses for each control fuse installed, if fuses are identical. 2.5 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Compressor heads or bodies to be painted with refrigerant type in respective colors. 1. R -404a heads to be orange. B. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. C. Clean out control panels remove excess wire, fabrication debris, metal shavings, and un- necessary devices. Ensure that wiring and control diagrams are protected with plastic laminate, clean, legible, and fully adhered to cabinet surfaces. 2.6 START UP AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Include an approved field service representative on site to validate refrigeration systems operation. It is responsibility of this representative to review and document temperature and pressure set points, valve settings, assure proper operation, and ensure that refrigeration contractor understands design intent and operation. In addition this representative shall document equipment performance on an approved checklist form and get sign off from both Target OSR and refrigeration contractor prior to leaving project site. PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACKS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 6423 (15652) - 12 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 7312 (15645) INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED 1N THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to work associated with receiving, unloading, handing, hanging, installing, and start-up of Owner furnished walk -in box evaporator units. B. Administratively, work of this Section is govemed by requirements of Section 24 0110 and is responsibility of refrigeration contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 - Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. C. Section 24 0120 - Refrigeration Service and Maintenance Contractor Requirements. D. Section 24 0529 - Refrigeration System Supports, Hangers, and Anchors. E. Section 24 0553 - Commercial Refrigeration System Identification Installation. F. Section 24 0719 - Commercial Refrigeration Insulation. G. Section 24 2315 - Commercial Refrigeration Piping. H. Section 24 0930 - Field Refrigeration Control Terminations. I. Section 24 9000 — Start-up (Refrigeration) J. Division 26 - Electrical. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 24 7313 - Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.4 REFERENCES A. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ". B. ANSI, "American National Standards Institute ". C. ARI, "Air- Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". E. ASTM, "American Society for testing and Materials ". F. NSF, "National Sanitation Foundation ". G. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". H. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". I. UL, "Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ® ", "Building Materials Directory". INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 247312(15645) -1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI /ASHRAE 15- Latest Edition, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems ". B. National Electrical Code (NEC) pertaining to electrical power and control wiring. C. ANSUASME B 31.5- Latest Edition "Refrigeration Piping ". 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery with OSR or General Contractor and furnish labor and equipment necessary to receive and unload. B. Inspect units upon arrival. Do not install damaged units or components. C. Furnish labor, tools, and materials necessary for unloading, moving and lifting according to manufacturer's published instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Include warranty coverage as part of overall project installation. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0120. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAT TRACE FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Heat Cable: Rated for 5 watts per foot at 50 deg F, self - regulating factor of at least 90 percent, UL listed XL Trace as manufactured by Raychem Corporation. B. Components: Power connections, end splices, splices and tee kits manufactured by Raychem Corporation. C. Thermostatic Controls: Raychem model AMC -F5, fixed 40 deg F set point, line sensing type thermostats. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive equipment, proposed routing of moving equipment, and final location to verify that they are free of interferences, comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Locations of equipment on Drawings are approximate. Field verify exact locations before roughing in piping and electrical work. C. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Visually inspect box panel joints for tightness, paying special attention to door gaskets, floor, and ceiling joints. Report gaps to OSR immediately. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately layout, mark, and drill hole necessary holes in walk -in box panels. Cut holes only with drill bits and hole saws. B. Cut holes only as large as required to accommodate pipes, hanger rods, and conduits. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Hang or mount evaporator coils plumb and level in accord with manufacturer's published instructions and drawings, refer to Section 24 0529. B. Remove and dispose of crating, un- necessary support legs, or shipping materials. C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances so as to not restrict air flow. D. Support piping separately so that piping is not supported off evaporator coil units. Refer to Section 24 2315 for installation of refrigeration piping. INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 247312(15645) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) E. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to be factory mounted. Refer to Section 24 0930 for termination of low voltage control wiring. F. Install interconnecting refrigeration suction and liquid piping between Walk -in cooler /freezer evaporator coils and refrigeration compressor racks or condenser /compressor units, as shown in Refrigeration Drawings. G. Install horizontal suction pipe extension for installation of TXV sensing bulb. Bulb should be in direct contact with refrigeration piping and not installed on any braze joint. H. Install liquid line isolation valve per evaporator coil, in accord with Refrigeration Details. I. Install liquid line drier provided with evaporator coil between the liquid connection and isolation valve. J. Refer to Section 24 0719 for installation of mechanical insulation materials and practices. K. Install walk -in cooler /freezer refrigerant sampling intake devices, shown in Refrigeration Drawings, and as necessary interconnecting tubing back to refrigerant detection units. L. Condensate lines for walk -in coolers /freezers: 3/4 -inch copper with traps. Install in compliance with local plumbing codes. M. Install heat trace wrap for condensate drain lines in walk -in freezer boxes and cooler boxes operating below 32 deg F. N. Insulate condensate drain lines in all walk -in freezer boxes and cooler boxes operating below 32 deg (over heat trace wrap) and all condensate lines exposed to unconditioned spaces. O. Fit condensate lines in walk -in coolers /freezers with a union to facilitate cleaning of condensate line and removal of evaporator coil drain pan. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test evaporator units and associated piping in accord with requirements of Section 24 2315. Defer to local code requirements if more stringent. B. After installation of heat tracing, and before and after installing insulation, test using a 2500 VDC Megger ®. Minimum insulation resistance shall be 20 to 1,000 megohms regardless of length. Test both heating cable wires to verify connection of splices and tees. Submit test report to OSR. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove crating, un- necessary support legs, or shipping materials. B. Touch up scratches on surfaces to restore corrosion resistance. C. Refer to Section 24 0553 for installation of identification labels and tags. D. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve superheat as required to obtain proper coil operation. 3.6 START-UP A. See Section 24 9000. END OF SECTION INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 24 7312 (15645) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK INSTALLATION OF WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS 24 7312 (15645) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 7313 (15644) WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section applies to walk -in cooler and freezer box evaporator fan coil units, including coils, cabinets, fans, motors, refrigeration valves, and control devices. Walk -in box evaporator coils shall be supplied as part of a compressor rack or compressor /condenser unit purchase agreement. B. Installation of walk -in cooler and freezer box evaporator fan coil units is not covered in this Specification Section, refer to Section 24 7312. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 01 3300 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements. D. Section 24 0130 — Refrigeration Equipment Vendor Coordination Requirements (Owner Furnished). E. Section 24 7312 — Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Mechanical Drawings Refrigeration Schedule. B. IEEE, "Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ". C. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ". D. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA 70 ". E. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association ". F. NSF, "Nation Sanitation Foundation ". G. UL, `Building Materials Directory". H. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". I. ASHRAE, "American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ". 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Turnover Day: 1. New Stores, - Target published date signifying end of construction. 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - date that construction is completed and department is turned over to Target for merchandising. B. Grand Opening: 1. New Stores, - Target published date that store officially opens or re -opens to public. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 7313 (15644) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Retrofit and Right Sizing Projects - Date that construction and merchandising are complete and department opens to public or to Target for general use. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer shall furnish field coordination documents and record documents as described herein: 1. Field Coordination Documents: a. Submit 5 copies of the following coordination shop drawings to project General Contractor within 5 working days after agreement on equipment delivery date: 1) Hanging and lifting instructions. 2) Dimensioned general arrangement and elevation drawings showing piping connection locations. Including information about expansion valve and distributor. 3) Complete Installation and Operating, (I & 0) Manuals, (Reference Section 01 7700). 4) Electrical wiring and controls drawings with nomenclature. 2. Record Documents: a. Refer to Section 24 0130. 1.6 SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITIES A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawing set are complimentary. Both include information necessary to manufacture and supply walk -in box evaporator coils. It is responsibility of evaporator coil supplier to study these documents, utilize information contained to verify selection of units listed, order equipment, and ship as required. B. Supplier shall comply with business processes and communications protocols as described in Section 24 0130. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Evaporator Coil Units: _ UL listed and have a UL label permanently affixed. B. Evaporator Coil Unit Capacities: Rated in accord with ARI Standards. C. Materials: New and without defect. Workmanship of highest quality. If requested manufacturer shall submit evidence as to quality of systems built, including but not limited to engineering design sheets, full shop drawings, brazed joints, leak testing, and electrical function testing. Manufacturers are responsible for application and design of individual components. D. Manufacturers are responsible for Quality Assurance of their equipment prior to shipment. Target and Refrigeration Contractors are not responsible for modifications or alterations in field due to manufacturer defects or errors. E. Comply with applicable Codes, Standards, and regulatory requirements. Including, but not limited to, provisions of the following: 1. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI /ASHRAE 15 -2001, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B 31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." F. Equipment manufacturer is responsible for quality of brazing done by its organization and shall employ skilled craftsmen following qualified brazing procedures. G. Leak check each evaporator coil unit, pressure test to 250 psig, and evacuate prior to shipment. Ship evaporator coils leak free with holding charge of dry nitrogen. H. Target reserves the right to audit and witness manufacturing quality control, if there is repeatable significant workmanship or component issues. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Include sufficient blocking and crating to protect units from damage during shipping. B. Ship units with 100 psig holding charge of dry nitrogen. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 247313(15644) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) C. Coordinate shipping and delivery with project general or refrigeration contractor. D. Include necessary instructions for unloading, handling and hanging to project General Contractor or. refrigeration contractor. 1.9 SELECTION CRITERIA A. This Section includes design criteria, operating condition requirements and required components for refrigeration equipment associated with procurement of walk -in cooler and freezer evaporator coils. Equipment manufacturer shall utilize this information to select, layout, and arrange necessary and required refrigeration system components, in a cost effective manner to maximize operating efficiencies. B. Suction Temperature Requirements: 1. Walk -in cooler and freezer evaporator coils must be capable of providing capacities and suction temperatures as indicated on Drawing Refrigeration Schedule. C Room temperature and TD requirements: Room Room Temp., deg F Coil Type Allowable TD, deg F Ice Cream Freezer - 15 Low Profile 8 -10 Food Service Freezer - 15 Low Profile 6 -8 Dairy Cooler 36 Low Profile 8 -12 Food Service Cooler 36 Low Profile 8 -12 Produce Cooler (P09.400) 40 Low Velocity 7 -9 Dry Storage (P09.400) 55 Low Velocity 20 -30 Meat Cooler (P09.400) 28 Low Velocity 8 -10 D. Defrost: 1. Dairy cooler, produce cooler, dry storage and food service cooler evaporator coils: Off time (air) defrost. 2. Food service freezer: Electric defrost. 3. Ice cream freezer, and meat cooler evaporator coils: Electric defrost. 4. Walk -in meat cooler or freezers service by RTCR - Ice cream freezer, and meat cooler evaporator coils: Hot gas defrost with extended electric drain pan heaters. Drain pan heaters wired to fan power circuit and controlled via factory installed thermostat. Rise in pipe temperature on gas defrost deenergizes fans and energizes pan heaters. After termination of defrost, reverse action of thermostat deenergizes pan heaters and re- energizes fans. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Include as part of a refrigeration compressor rack of condenser /compressor unit purchase agreement. Refer to Section 24 0130. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: 1. Furnish factory assembled and tested, low profile or low velocity type unit coolers as listed on the Drawing Refrigeration Schedule, suitable for use with non CFC and HCFC refrigerants by one of the following, manufacturers and subject to compliance with Specifications: a. Bohn b. Krack c. Witt 2.2 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A. Unit Casings: 1. Design units for flush mounting against a ceiling and comply with applicable NSF requirements, with a textured aluminum casing, independently baffled fan sections and low throw plastic fan guards. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 7313 (15644) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2. Units shall have aluminum drain pan sloped to a single drain point, on back side. 3. Furnish electric pan heaters on units designed for electric or hot gas defrost. B. Coils: 1. Furnish staggered seamless copper tube, aluminum fin coil and distributor, circuited for the direct expansion refrigerant. (Refer to Refrigeration Schedule for refrigerant and defrost types). Fin spacing shall be 6 fins per inch for units in spaces above 32 deg F and 4 fins per inch for units in spaces at or below 32 deg F. 2. Sporlan balanced port expansion valve and distributor to be manufacturer selected for the specific application and factory mounted. 3. Extend evaporator coil suction stubs a minimum of 6" to accommodate installation of TXV bulb upstream of any field braze joint or field installed suction line trap. 4. Provide a factory installed Sporlan sealed type liquid line filter -drier per evaporator coil. If factory installation is not possible due to size constraints, ship filter drier loose for field installation. Firmly secure drier to evaporator coil for shipment, driers should not be shipped loose in cartons separate from coils. 5. Include a factory installed refrigeration service valve on suction outlet connection of each coil. Schrader taps are not acceptable. Furnish forged brass body valve with seal caps and appropriate connections as manufactured by Danfoss, Superior or Henry. Service valve shall be brazed directly into piping, flare fittings are not to be used for the installation of service valves. 6. Include as required, on units equipped for hot gas defrost, a factory mounted thermal expansion valve bypass check valve and suction check valve. C. Fans and Drive Motors: 1. Furnish direct drive evaporator fan assemblies pre -wired to a terminal strip as follows: a. Fan motors to be, (208/230 volt 1 phase for evaporator coils with electric defrost elements, 115 volt 1 phase for off time and gas defrost evaporator coils), high efficiency ECM type with permanently lubricated ball bearings. b. Fan blades to be balanced, low noise type, constructed of heavy gage aluminum paddles mechanically attached to a plated steel hub. D. Controls: 1. Furnish factory mounted Ranco 060 -100, minus 35 to 95 deg F adjustable thermostat, with contact rating of 17 amps at 240 volts, or approved equivalent, for units equipped for defrost. Thermostat to control fans and defrost pan heaters during defrost. 2. Provide factory mounted defrost termination sensor for all gas and electric defrost unit coolers, CPC part number 501 -1127. Coil sensor leads in electrical cabinet for field connection to REMS cabling. E. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner to prevent vibration, pipes rubbing against other pipes or other objects, and undue strain on pipes or fittings. 2. Properly support coil tubes by tube sheets. 3. Braze coil tubing joints with suitable high temperature silver solder alloy containing not less than 15 percent silver. Braze copper -to -brass joints with solder of not less than 30 percent silver content. During brazing bleed dry nitrogen through piping to prevent excess oxidation and scaling. F. Refrigeration Valves and Specialties: 1. Solder or braze components according to manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Install controls, components, and valves in locations and positions where they are serviceable and not easily damaged. G. Power and Control Wiring: 1. Wiring within evaporator cabinet: Pre made wiring harnesses with molded water tight receptacles for each electrical device and in conformance with NFPA 70. 2. Mark wiring with numbers for identification every 6 inches. 3. Control wiring: 18 AWG or larger. 4. Electrical devices, (motors, heaters, valves and switches): Factory wired with plug -in connections to terminal strips for simple field connection. 5. Neatly tie and support control wiring inside of equipment cabinet and protect wiring form abrasions. 6. Make electrical wiring terminations according to electrical industry standards utilizing UL approved devices. WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 7313 (15644) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2.3 EQUIPMENT LABELING AND TAGGING A. Clearly affix labels to evaporator coil units displaying the following at a minimum: 1. Manufacturer name and address. 2. Evaporator coil unit model number. 3. Evaporator coil unit serial number. 4. Evaporator fan power voltage. 5. Evaporator fan FLA. 6. Defrost heater power voltage. 7. Defrost heater amps. B. Furnish caution or warning signs as needed. C. Include control wiring schematic with legend. 2.4 FINISHES AND CLEANING A. Remove burrs, metal shavings, excess brazing materials, grease, and residues of fabrication. Apply touch up paint to marks, scratches, and blemishes. B. Thoroughly blow out each coil circuit before pressure testing. PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 24 7313 (15644) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK WALK -IN BOX EVAPORATOR COILS (OWNER FURNISHED) 247313(15644) -6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 24 9000 START -UP REFRIGERATION NOTE: THIS SECTION IS FOR OWNER FURNISHED WORK AND IS INCLUDED FOR CONTRACTOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT 'INCLUDE ALI. ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Section covers work and responsibilities associated with the start-up and commissioning of Owner furnished refrigeration equipment. It is only to be awarded to a Target pre - qualified refrigeration contractor. 2. Full extent of refrigeration work is indicated by Drawings, Schedules, this Section, and those Sections listed as related items to this Section. 3. In general, description of work and responsibilities of refrigeration contract includes, but is not limited to, installation, start-up, and commissioning of refrigeration systems and display cases, evaporator coils, condensers or condenser /compressor units, and interconnecting refrigerant.piping, condensate drains, and field installed refrigeration controls. 4. In addition it includes minor items necessary to the installation which may not specifically be mentioned in Contract Documents. Such items include, but are not limited to, screws, shims, anchors, escutcheons, brackets, pipe sleeves, sealants, flux, glue, and changes due to unforeseen obstructions. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 4200 - References. B. Section 24 0110 — Basic Commercial Refrigeration Requirements C. Section 24 6212 - Installation of Condenser /Compressor Units. D. Section 24 6312 — Installation of Air Cooled Condensers. E. Section 24 6332 — Installation of Evaporative Condensers. — For high ambient design locations. F. Section 24 7312 — Installation of Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.3 RELATED ITEMS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Section 24 6213 — Condenser /Compressor Units. B. Section 24 6313 — Air Cooled Condensers C. Section 24 6333 — Evaporative Condensers D. Section 24 6423 — Rooftop Compressor Racks. E. Section 24 0935 — Rooftop Compressor Rack Controls. F. Section 24 7313 — Walk -in Box Evaporator Coils. 1.4 REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Successful start-up of grocery refrigeration systems is a complex process involving many trades, skill sets, and activities. This must be done fully and correctly. Refrigeration scope of work includes accomplishing the following: START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1. Systematically and thoroughly verify refrigeration system control functions, sensor calibrations, and review construction activities for quality and completeness. Prepare refrigeration equipment for operation as part of formal Pre - start-up Review. 2. Systematically and thoroughly verify refrigeration system control functions, sensor calibrations, and review construction activities for quality and completeness. Properly prepare refrigeration equipment for operation as part of formal Acceptance Inspection Review. 3. Thoroughly and systematically pressure test refrigeration systems. Evacuate and install oil and refrigerant charges. Maintain compliance with regulations governing handling of refrigerants. 4. Verify performance of refrigeration racks as part of formal "Refrigeration Compressor Rack Performance Assessments ". 5. Verify performance of refrigerated cases, as part of formal Refrigerated Case Performance Assessment. 1.5 START -UP A. Refrigeration start-up process is comprised of three formal parts. Pre - start-up testing, performance verification and validation activities: 1. Pre - Start-Up Phase: a. Part 1 — Delivery verification: Inspect delivered equipment upon arrival for inconsistencies with refrigeration design documents and damage. Coordinate with refrigeration equipment supplier to correct any deficiencies. b. Part 2 — Pre - Start-Up: Verify that systems have been properly installed and are ready for start-up. 2. Performance Verification Phase: Systems are made operational by refrigeration contractor prior to onsite visit by manufacturer representative. Charge systems in accord with specifications and begin start-up process. Contractor start-up should be scheduled so that systems are operational before equipment manufacturer representative site visit for validation phase. Formally document these pre - start-up and performance verification activities on the following and submit to Target: a. Refrigeration Pre - Start-up /Start-Up Report. 3. Validation Phase: System performance is reviewed by a commissioning agent and equipment manufacturer representatives with assistance from refrigeration contractor. Formally document these performance reviews on the following and submit to Target: a. Rooftop Compressor Rack Validation Report. , b. Commissioning agent's formal workbook report. B. Note: Target will not consider these activities complete until forms are accepted complete by Target Refrigeration Operations. C. Utilize and complete Target Pre - Start-up Report Form or Refrigeration Acceptance Report as a guide to accomplish the following: 1. Systematically check refrigeration and energy management system installations for quality and completeness, record equipment information on Pre - start-up Review form. 2. Test calibration and adjustment of sensors and control valves. 3. Properly prepare refrigeration system for start-up by performing initial maintenance activities. D. Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to perform activities described in Refrigeration Compressor Rack Validation Report, under supervision of Compressor Rack manufacturer's factory field service representative. E. Supply technicians, tools, testing instruments, and materials necessary to adjust refrigeration equipment as directed by refrigeration commissioning agent. Have two (2) technicians available to participate in commissioning functional testing process for three (3) days during the week prior to Grand Opening. Commissioning Authority to schedule and coordinate this event. Reference Section 01 9100 for additional information. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANTS AND OILS A. Refrigerants: As specified on Refrigeration Equipment Schedule, and certified to meet ARI 700 standard (latest edition), for chemical purity. Deliver refrigerants in original containers. B. Refrigeration Oil: Approved for use by compressor manufacturer, with refrigerant and compressors for the application: 1. R404A: a. Copeland Ultra 22CC. b. Mobil EAL Arctic 22CC. c. ICI Emkarate RL 32CF. d. Thermal Zone 22CC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PRE - START -UP A. For condensing unit only stores, document all pre- start-up information on Refrigeration Acceptance Inspection Report. B. For RTCR and CU stores, document all pre- start-up information on Refrigeration Pre - Start-up /Start-up Report. C. Check all electrical connections at rack. Turn main breaker off and verify that no power is present at all three legs with a meter. Verify tightness of all electrical connections. D. Check main power voltage across each supply leg at the compressor rack. Voltage must be within 10 percent of required. E. Check control voltage. F. Energize system for 24 -hours in advance of starting any compressor. G. Verify cleanliness of evaporator coils. H. Verify proper expansion valve installation. I. Verify that evaporator and condenser fans are clear of debris. J. Verify evaporator fan operation. K. Verify that case, walk -in cooler and walk -in freezer doors close properly and are closed. L. Verify operation of case lights and switches. M. Verify that door seals are not damaged. N. Verify high and low pressure control settings. O. Verify that field wiring connections have been completed. P. Verify condenser pressure fan cycling control operation, if used. Q. Verify temperature set - points. R. Verify alarm set - points. S. Verify defrost schedule. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) T. Verify that compressor discharge service valve is fully open. 3.3 CHARGING THE SYSTEMS TARGET A. Use only appropriate refrigerant for system as indicated in manufacturer's documents and Refrigeration Drawings. Notify Target OSR immediately of any discrepancy. B. Add refrigerant to system through a liquid line drier in charging line. C. Charge refrigerant from factory drums only. Track number of full drums, weigh partial drums, and obtain sign off by OSR or a General Contractor's representative. D. One week prior to turn over, e-mail completed Refrigerant Tracking Data Spreadsheet to refrigerant.tracking(a target.com, refer to Section 24 0553. E. Grade and quantity of oil to be added to a system must follow factory recommendations. F. After 24 and 48 hours of operation, verify refrigerant charge and oil levels, within system and adjust as needed. G. When refrigeration systems are charged to proper levels, refrigerant cylinders and opened containers of refrigeration oil are to be removed from job site. No refrigerant is to be stored on site after Store Turnover Date or . during warranty period. H. Refrigerant charge shown on Refrigeration Schedule is a calculated estimate only. Contractor is required to fully charge refrigeration system at start-up. 3.4 PARTIALLY COMPLETED WORK A. Owner may take possession of completed or partially completed portions of work although time allotted for completion of work may not have expired. Taking possession of work shall not be deemed acceptance of any work that has not been completed within terms and Specifications of Contract Documents. 3.5 START UP A. Follow manufacturer's published start up procedures. B. Test and adjust controls to ensure a refrigeration system.operating to Target's design specifications, Target Refrigeration Operational Guidelines and Target MR/RS Superheat Settings documents. C. Start up should be scheduled so that refrigeration systems are operational and running prior to manufacturer representative visit to perform system validation review with refrigeration contractor. D. Include qualified service technicians, necessary tools, and any other supplies required by manufacturers' field service representatives or commissioning agents to perform commissioning activities identified in these refrigeration Drawings and Specifications. E. Charge and run refrigeration systems for 100 hours days prior to turnover to Target for merchandising or stocking. 100 hour run time begins when refrigeration system is running and connected loads are at correct operating temperatures. 100 hour period is to be used to adjust expansion valves, calibrate REMS sensors, etc. F. Start walk -in coolers and freezers prior to refrigerated cases. 1. Walk -in cooler /freezer temperature pull -down schedule: a. Ambient temperature to 35 F (or final box temperature if higher than 35 F) — 48 hours. Pull down in increments no greater than 10 F per 12 hours. b. Hold at 35 F — 24 hours c. 35 F to final box design temperature — 48 hours. Pull down in increments of no greater than 10 F per 10 hours until final temperature is.reached. G. Keep refrigerated case lighting off until refrigeration has been operating for 24 hours. H. Keep refrigeration alarm system off during start-up. I. Activate refrigeration alarm system 24 hours prior to delivery of food. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.6 CONDENSER/COMPRESSOR UNIT START -UP A. Evacuate condensing units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 24 2315 and 24 0110. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. C. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place condensing units in full operation. D. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer's data. E. Furnish written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls test, electrical test results, air and water flow. Refer to Section 24 0110. F. Verify operation of condenser /compressor units on generator power supply. Set compressor time delays to 10 seconds for the walk -in cooler and 20 seconds for the walk -in freezer. • 3.7 CONDENSER START -UP A. Evacuate air cooled condensers and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 24 2315 and 24 0110. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. C. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place air cooled condensers in full operation. D. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for air cooled condensers agree with manufacturer's data. E. Furnish written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls test, electrical test results, and air flow. Refer to Section 24 0110. 3.8 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER START -UP A. Evacuate evaporative condensers and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 24 2315 and 24 0110. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. C. Verify line voltage to the non - chemical water treatment panel. D. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place evaporative condensers in full operation. E. Verify that motor amperages, air flow rates, and water flow for evaporative condensers agree with manufacturer's data. F. Pulse Pure water treatment systems require factory validation of contractor start-up. Contact Refrigeration Equipment Vendor, Evaporative Condenser Vendor (refrignh3 @stanton - associates.net) and Evaporative Condenser Manufacturer (targetAevapco.com) two weeks prior to unit start-up to schedule date for manufacturer approved system check -out. The Pulse -Pure system must be started before condenser pump is started or load is applied to the condenser. G. Include written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls test, electrical test results, waterflow, and airflow. Refer to Section 24 0110. H. Start-up to include passivation and monitoring of condenser coil and cabinet for 30 -60 days as required to complete passivation of galvanized steel. The upper section of the condenser coils should be photographed prior to start-up and every other week for, the first 4 to 8 weeks of operation. Photographs should be forwarded to Target (refrigeration .operations @target.com) and Evapco (target @evapco.com). Operation of the recirculation pump and water treatment system, without load, for 2 to 4 weeks is required to minimize the formation of white rust. Refer to manufacturer's submittals for guidelines on water characteristics to be maintained during the passivation process. During this time, circulation pumps, make -up water systems, water treatment systems and conductivity controls must be operational to properly treat make -up water and.control tower blow down rate. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3.9 ROOFTOP COMPRESSOR RACK START -UP A. Evacuate refrigeration compressor rack and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections. 24 2315 and 24 0110. B. Verify line voltage and check motor rotations prior to operation. C. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place compressor rack units in full operation. D. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for compressor rack units agree with manufacturer's data. E. Furnish written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls test and electrical test results. Refer to Sections 24 0110 and 24 0833. 3.10 EVAPORATOR COIL START -UP A. Evacuate evaporator units and associated piping prior to adding refrigerant charge. Refer to Sections 24 2315 and 24 0110. Verify line voltage and check motor rotation prior to operation. C. Operate equipment controls and safeties to verify proper function. Adjust valves and controls to place evaporator units in full operation. D. Verify that motor amperages and air flow rates for condensing units agree with manufacturer's data. E. Furnish written start-up reports identifying valve positions, controls and, electrical testing results and defrost settings. Refer to Section 24 0110. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.11 REFRIGERATION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION REPORT This form shall be completed by the Refrigeration Contractor and acknowledged by the Target OSR. All installation procedures are found on the Construction Documents or in the project Specifications. This form shall be faxed to the number below no later than one week before store turn over. Contact the Property Development Collaboration Center at 888- 888 -0304 silent option #6 with any questions. Fax completed form to 775- 370 -9168. Store Number: Store Location: Refrigeration Contractor: Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Contact: Form completed by: Print Name Signature Date Refrigeration Service Contractor (if different from above): Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Contact: General Contractor: Address: City, State: OSR: Print Name Signature Date START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 1: Refrigeration Rooftop Compressor /Condensing Units Condensing Unit System No. Mfg. Unit Model No. Condensing Unit Serial No. Fixture No. Compressor Model No. , Compressor Serial No. CU -1 Refrigerant piping properly routed, and supported in accord with Section 24 0529, with pipe supports within 10 in of each change of direction, and risers properly clamped, (refer to Section 24 0719 for insulated clamps)? Roof penetrations for both refrigerant piping and conduits are properly through sealed pipe boxes, in accord with Drawings? Compressor/ condensing units and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled in accord with Section 24 0553, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, marked for refrigerant type and system number, and requested data submitted? CU -2 Ambient temperature sensor installation is complete, located as indicated on Drawings and properly shielded? Refrigeration power and control wiring work, including unit ground cabling, completed, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? 120 volt service receptacles wired and operational? CU -3 CU-4 CU -5 CU -6 CU -7 CU -8 CU -9 CU -10 ' CU -11 CU -12 Yes or No Description Units set in accord with Section 24 6212, 6 ft minimum clearance on all sides; attached and level on designed curbs; and all supplied cabinet accessories properly installed, (hail guards and snow legs)? Refrigerant piping in accord with Section 24 2315, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; and no unnecessary traps? Refrigeration piping insulation in accord with Section 24 0719, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and acceptable UV protection installed? Refrigerant piping properly routed, and supported in accord with Section 24 0529, with pipe supports within 10 in of each change of direction, and risers properly clamped, (refer to Section 24 0719 for insulated clamps)? Roof penetrations for both refrigerant piping and conduits are properly through sealed pipe boxes, in accord with Drawings? Compressor/ condensing units and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled in accord with Section 24 0553, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, marked for refrigerant type and system number, and requested data submitted? Ambient temperature sensor installation is complete, located as indicated on Drawings and properly shielded? Refrigeration power and control wiring work, including unit ground cabling, completed, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? 120 volt service receptacles wired and operational? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 8 TARGET Section 2: Refrigeration System Controls MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Yes or No Description • Einstein equipment is installed and operational. All sensors are installed and operational. Remote alarm panel is installed in Guest Services and operational. Einstein PBX extension is connected to landline and operational. Network cable (data cable) is connected to Einstein Panel and operational. Network cable (data cable) is connected to network jack in control room and operational. Energy Management Consultant (EMC) at 608 - 822 -3550, ext 0 has been contacted to verify system is operational. Alarm Back -up verification with the alarm contractor is completed. Combination temperature/ humidistat installed in market area in accord with the Drawings. Section 3: Walk -in Cooler and Freezer Eva orator Coils p System No. Make Model Serial Fixture No. Expansion Valve (i.e. A01) Model No. Yes or No Description Cooler /freezer box is fully assembled and in good condition, floor slabs have necessary thermal breaks, panel joints are sealed, door fits tight, door latch is properly adjusted and all box penetrations sealed with adjacent piping and conduits insulated in accord with Section 24 0719? Evaporators attached properly to cooler or freezer? Condensate piping installed in accord with the Drawings and Section 24 2315, mounted tight to walls, with proper slopes and traps, heat traced and insulate in freezers, and necessary air gaps. Refrigerant piping in accord with Section 24 2315, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; . long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; supported as indicated on drawings; valves installed properly; and no unnecessary traps? Hand valves installed as indicated on drawings and liquid line solenoid valves field installed in piping, directly above walk -in cooler /freezer boxes? Refrigeration piping insulation in accord with Section 24 0719, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and walk -in box penetrations properly sealed? REMS panels mounted per drawings, evaporator power and control wiring work, including unit, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Temperature sensors mounted, wired as shown on drawings and calibration tested to an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F ? Open Door Alarm Panels and switches installed and operational? Power wiring for heat tapes, door frame heaters and threshold heaters complete with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place. End panels on evaporator coils are installed. Evaporator thermal expansion valves are adjusted and functioning in proper super heat ranges. Evaporator coils and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled in accord with Section 24 0553, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted? Yes or No Description Cooler /freezer box is fully assembled and in good condition, floor slabs have necessary thermal breaks, panel joints are sealed, door fits tight, door latch is properly adjusted and all box penetrations sealed with adjacent piping and conduits insulated in accord with Section 24 0719? Evaporators attached properly to cooler or freezer? Condensate piping installed in accord with the Drawings and Section 24 2315, mounted tight to walls, with proper slopes and traps, heat traced and insulate in freezers, and necessary air gaps. Refrigerant piping in accord with Section 24 2315, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; . long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; supported as indicated on drawings; valves installed properly; and no unnecessary traps? Hand valves installed as indicated on drawings and liquid line solenoid valves field installed in piping, directly above walk -in cooler /freezer boxes? Refrigeration piping insulation in accord with Section 24 0719, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and walk -in box penetrations properly sealed? REMS panels mounted per drawings, evaporator power and control wiring work, including unit, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Temperature sensors mounted, wired as shown on drawings and calibration tested to an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F ? Open Door Alarm Panels and switches installed and operational? Power wiring for heat tapes, door frame heaters and threshold heaters complete with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place. End panels on evaporator coils are installed. Evaporator thermal expansion valves are adjusted and functioning in proper super heat ranges. Evaporator coils and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled in accord with Section 24 0553, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 4: Sales Floor Refrigerated Cases Cases System No. Fixture No. Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Number of Doors Expansion Valve Model No. Yes or No Description • There are no unreported signs of damage, (exterior or internal) which was observed during installation process or missing parts? Cases installed in accord with the fixture plan and Section 24 3823, properly aligned and verified level, buckled together tight and fully sealed with no gaps with all pull up bolts properly tightened, all access covers re- installed? Installation of all applicable trim, bumper and color brand parts, raceway covers, kick- plates and close -off panels is complete, (Refer to details on Drawing M15)? Refrigerant piping in accord with Section 24 2315, ACR tubing; 15% silver brazing filler metal; long radius fittings; inverted traps at tops and bottoms of risers; valves installed properly; and no unnecessary traps? Case condensate pan drain piping installation is complete and verified free of obstructions, with minimum 1/4 -inch per foot pipe slope in the direction of flow, no pipe size reductions and water seals in place? Refrigeration piping insulation in accord with Section 24 0719, thickness as specified, (Article 3.4); mitered fittings; and sealed to top of cases? Case lighting operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and shipping tape removed from fluorescent lamps? ' Case glass doors have been checked and adjusted for alignment, seal and swing? Anti -sweat heaters are operational with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place? Case fans are operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and fan START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 -10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 11 bracket bolts checked for tightness? Case temperature sensor wiring is complete to the supply and return air stream sensors of each case, with all wire terminations verified tight, control points checked, and electrical covers in place? REMS panels mounted per drawings, and not visible from sales floor. Each case supply and return air sensor temperature calibration has been tested and is with an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F? Fan kits are installed on top of cases, as detailed on drawings and secured to cases and partitions? All plug -in electrical have been checked for positive seal? Cases and their associated piping are tagged, marked and labeled in accord with Section 24 0553, asset tags installed, refrigerant piping labeled, system number tag installed, and requested data submitted? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 -12 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.12 REFRIGERATION PRE - START -UP /START -UP REPORT This form to be completed by the Refrigeration Contractor, acknowledged by the Target OSR and submitted to the Target Refrigeration Operations. The Pre - Startup /Start -Up Review is the first step in Target's formal refrigeration commissioning process. All installation procedures are found in the equipment manufacturer's manuals, the construction documents or in the project specifications. This form shall be faxed to the Target Refrigeration Operations Group at (775) 370 -9168 prior to the arrival of the Roof Top Compressor Rack (RTCR) manufacturer's field representative. Part 1: Delivery Verification to be completed upon delivery of the items listed in each section. The intent of this section is to discover any discrepancies between refrigeration design and delivered equipment so discrepancies can be resolved prior to refrigeration start-up and to note any shipping damage upon arrival of equipment to the site. Damage repair should be coordinated with refrigeration equipment supplier. Part 2: Pre - Start-Up to be completed prior to charging refrigeration systems. Part 3: Contractor Start-Up to be completed by refrigeration contractor when systems are started, but prior to site visit by manufacturer's representative. The form must be filled out completely with no items left blank. If for some reason a question or request for information does not apply mark it, N /A. Where deficiencies are found, these should be noted on the final page along with corrective action measures planned. Store Number: Refrigeration Contractor: Address: City, State: Phone /Fax: Contact: Store Location: Grand Opening Date: Delivery Inspection Technician: Print Name Start-up Technician: Signature Date Print Name Signature Date Refrigeration Service Contractor: (If different from above): Address: City, State: Phone /Fax: Contact: General Contractor: Address: City, State: OSR: Refrigerant License No. Print Name Signature Date START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 -13 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 1: Delivery Verification Section 1.1: Rooftop Compressor Rack Compressor /Condenser Unit Make Unit Press @ Delivery Serial Refrigerant Type Rated Volts Rated Amps HP Suction Filter (B) Suction Accum. (A) Suction Accum. (B) . Compressors Make Model Serial Rated Volts Rated Amps Unloader (Yes /No) HP Suction Filter (B) Suction Accum. (A) Suction Accum. (B) . Liquid Drier High Pressure Liquid Receiver Oil Separator Oil Reservoir Oil Filter IMPORTANT: Report any discrepancies between delivered unit design, .refrigerant type, unit or compressor voltage immediately to Target OSR and General Contractor. Rack Components Item Make Model or Size Nat. Board No. or Serial No. Suction Filter (A) Are there any discrepancies in unit design voltage, refrigerant or component? Suction Filter (B) Suction Accum. (A) Suction Accum. (B) . Liquid Drier High Pressure Liquid Receiver Oil Separator Oil Reservoir Oil Filter Yes or No Description Has the rack been•damaged during shipping or delivery? Are there any discrepancies in unit design voltage, refrigerant or component? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 14 TARGET Section 1.2: Rooftop Condenser Condenser MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Make Model Serial Rated Volts Rated Amps Coil Press @ Delivery Are condenser fan motor bracket bolts are tight and are fan blades are properly positioned in housings? Fan motors Make Model Number of Fans Rated Volts Rated Amps Does unit coil have a special corrosion protection coating as required by specifications? Are condenser fan motor bracket bolts are tight and are fan blades are properly positioned in housings? IMPORTANT: Report any discrepancies between delivered unit design, refrigerant type, or unit voltage immediately to Target OSR and General Contractor. Yes or No Description Has the condenser been damaged during shipping or delivery? Does unit coil have a special corrosion protection coating as required by specifications? Are condenser fan motor bracket bolts are tight and are fan blades are properly positioned in housings? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 15 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II 11 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 1.3: Air - Cooled Condensing Units Condensing Units TARGET Unit ID Make Unit Press @ Delivery Serial Refrigerant Type Amt. Of Refrigerant (Ibs) Rated Volts Rated Amps Oil Charge (gal) Oil Type Compressors Unit ID Make Model Serial Rated Volts Rated Amps Unloader HP IMPORTANT: Report any discrepancies between delivered unit refrigerant type, unit or compressor voltage immediately to Target OSR and General Contractor START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 16 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Condensing Unit Comaonents Item - Make Model or Size Nat. Board No. or Serial No. Suction Filter Serial No. Number of Fans Rated Volts Suction Accumulator Liquid Drier High Pressure Liquid Receiver Oil Filter Yes or No Description Location Have the condensing units been damaged during shipping or delivery? Section 1.4: Walk -in Coolers and Freezers Evaporator Coils System No. Equip. No. Location Make Model No. Serial No. Number of Fans Rated Volts Rated Amps IMPORTANT: Report any discrepancies between delivered evaporator coil model number, design, refrigerant type, or unit voltage immediately to Target OSR and General Contractor START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 17 1 I i 1 1 1 1 I�1 1 w 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 1.5: Sales Floor Refrigerated Cases System No. Make Equipment No. Model Serial No. of Doors Rated Volts Rated Amps Coil Press @ Delivery Yes or No Description Were any of these cases damaged during shipping or delivery? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 18 TARGET Section 1.6: Food Service Refrigerated Case MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) System No. Make Equipment No. Model Serial No. of Doors Rated Volts Rated Amps Coil Press @ Delivery Yes or No Description Were any of these cases damaged during shipping or delivery? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 19 1 i 1 i 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2: Pre - Start -Up Section 2.1: Rooftop Compressor Racks TARGET . Yes or No Description RTCR A RTCR B Refrigeration piping installation to cases, evaporator coils and condenser is complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? Proper thickness of mechanical insulation is installed as specified, with all insulation joints sealed? Mitered joints at elbows; tees, and offsets? Refrigeration piping leak testing has been successfully completed and leaks repaired? The rack mechanical identification is as specified, with valves tagged; branch refrigerant circuits marked, major components labeled and a framed copy of the refrigeration single line schematic mounted near by? Unit power wiring is complete including unit ground cabling, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Unit control wiring is complete with all control points verified, control circuit grounding connected, wire terminations tight, all electrical covers in place and the ambient sensor properly located and shielded? Refrigerant oil charge has been installed and there is minimum 1/4 sight glass in each compressor? Refrigeration system evacuation process has been successfully completed? Initial system refrigerant charge, of sufficient quantity for start-up, has been installed? Control software and set - points have been loaded in to the rack Einstein controller? Section 2.2: Rooftop Condensers Yes or No Description RTCR A RTCR B Refrigeration piping installation to cases, evaporator coils and condenser is complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? All secondary condenser fan pressure switch hose connections have been checked and are tight? Refrigeration piping leak testing has been successfully completed and leaks repaired.? Unit identification labeling complete, with refrigerant type designated on unit, equipment tag in place, fans numbered, and wiring diagrams in tact? Unit power wiring is complete including unit ground cabling, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Unit control wiring is complete with all control points verified, circuit grounding connected, wire terminations tight, electrical covers in place and the ambient sensor properly located and shielded? Ambient temperature sensor calibration has been tested and is with -in an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F? 120 volt service receptacle is wired and operational? Have secondary condenser fan pressure switch controls been set? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 20 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.3: Air - Cooled Condensing Units Yes or No Description Refrigeration piping installation to cases, evaporator coils and condenser is complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? Proper thickness of mechanical insulation is installed as specified, with all insulation joints sealed? Mitered joints at elbows, tees, and offsets? Refrigeration piping leak testing has been successfully completed and leaks repaired? The condensing unit mechanical identification is as specified, with valves tagged; branch refrigerant circuits marked, major components labeled and a framed copy of the refrigeration single line schematic mounted near by? Unit power wiring is complete including unit ground cabling, all wire terminations verified tight, (both field and factory installed) and all electrical covers in place? Unit control wiring is complete with all control points verified, control circuit grounding connected, wire terminations tight, all electrical covers in place and the ambient sensor properly located and shielded? Refrigerant oil charge has been installed and there is minimum 1/4 sight glass in each compressor? Refrigeration system evacuation process has been successfully completed? Initial system refrigerant charge, of sufficient quantity for start-up, has been installed? Control software and set - points have been loaded in to the Einstein controller? All roof penetrations properly sealed? Roof top condensing units securely mounted to curbs? Section 2.4: Walk -in Coolers and Freezers Yes or No Description Evaporator is attached properly to cooler or freezer in accord with Target details? Condensate line installed and piped to drain? Heat tape installed on freezer condensate lines? Cooler /freezer box is fully assembled and in good condition, floor slabs have necessary thermal breaks, panel joints are sealed, door fits tight, door latch and closers are properly adjusted and all box penetrations have been sealed? Refrigeration piping installation to cases, evaporator coils and condenser is complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? Proper thickness of mechanical insulation is installed as specified, with all insulation joints sealed? Mitered joints at elbows, tees, and offsets? Liquid line solenoid valves have been field installed in piping directly above walk -in cooler /freezer boxes? Temperature sensors have been mounted and wired as shown on drawings? Each walk -in cooler /freezer air temperature sensor calibration has been tested and is with an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F? Door switches on cooler and freezer doors are installed and operational? Refrigerant leak detection transducers and associated alarm devices are fully installed and operational? End panels on evaporator coils are installed? Liquid line hand valve installed per refrigeration details? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 21 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 2.5: Refrigerated Cases START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 22 Were any flare nut connections or expansion valve feeler bulbs found to be loose prior to starting installation work? There are no unreported, signs of internal or hidden case damage, which has been observed during the installation process. Have any shipped loose case parts, been discovered missing during installation process? All hold down screws, shipping bolts and packing materials have been removed. Cases are properly aligned and verified level, as instructed in the manufacturer's installation instructions Cases are properly sealed one to another and all pull up bolts are properly tightened. Are any pull -up access covers missing on the case line -up? Installation of all applicable trim, bumper and color band parts, raceway covers, kick- plates, and close -off panels is complete. Case condensate pan drain piping installation is complete and verified free of obstructions, with minimum 1/4 -inch per foot pipe slope in the direction of flow, no pipe size reductions and water seals in place. _ Refrigeration piping installation complete, with risers trapped top and bottom, mechanical insulation in place, insulation joints sealed and all piping verified to be complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? Refrigerant circuit piping leak testing is successfully complete with all leaks repaired. All plug -in electrical have been checked for positive seal. Case lighting operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and shipping tape removed from fluorescent lamps. Anti -sweat heaters are operational with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place. Case fans are operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and fan bracket bolts checked for tightness. Case temperature sensor wiring is complete to the supply and return air stream sensors of each case, with all wire terminations verified tight, control points checked, and electrical covers in place. Each case supply and return air sensor temperature calibration has been tested and is with an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F. All end trim and closeoffs installed? Ventilation fan kits installed, sealed and operational? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 22 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.6: Food Service Refrigerated Case Yes or No Description Were any flare nut connections or expansion valve feeler bulbs found to be loose prior to starting installation work? There are no unreported, signs of internal or hidden case damage, which has been observed during the installation process? Have any shipped loose case parts, been discovered missing during installation process? All hold down screws, shipping bolts and packing materials have been removed. Cases are properly aligned and verified level, as instructed in the manufacturer's installation instructions? Are any pull -up access covers missing on the case line -up? Installation of all applicable trim, bumper and color band parts, raceway covers, kick- plates, and close -off panels is complete? Case condensate pan drain piping installation is complete and verified free;of obstructions, with minimum 1/4 -inch per foot pipe slope in the direction of flow, no pipe size reductions and water seals in place? Refrigeration piping installation complete, with risers trapped top and bottom, mechanical insulation in place, insulation joints sealed and all piping verified to be complete with dehydrated, hard -drawn ACR Type L copper tubing, manufactured in accord with ASTM B88 and cleaned in accord with ASTM B280? Refrigerant circuit piping leak testing is successfully complete with all leaks repaired? All plug -in electrical connections have been checked for positive seal? Case lighting operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and shipping tape removed from fluorescent lamps? Anti -sweat heaters are operational with all wire terminations verified tight and electrical covers in place? Case fans are operational, with all wire terminations verified tight, electrical covers in place and fan bracket bolts checked for tightness? Case temperature sensor wiring is complete to the supply and return air stream sensors of each case, with all wire terminations verified tight, control points checked, and electrical covers in place? Each case supply and return air sensor temperature calibration has been tested and is with an accuracy range of plus or minus 1/2 deg F? Condensing unit shroud completely installed? Proper air flow observed through condensing unit with all shrouding installed? START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 23 1 1 1 a 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 2.7: Refrigeration System EMS Controls Yes or No Description Einstein equipment is installed and operational? All sensors are installed and operational? Einstein PBX extension is connected to landline and operational? Ethernet, Echelon Network and Target WAN cables (data cable) are connected to Einstein Panels . and operational? Network cable (data cable) is connected to network jack in control room and operational? REMS Panel 1 and IA have been mounted, control wiring to systems is complete and communication cabling connected? REMS Panel 2 has been mounted, control wiring to systems is complete and communication cabling connected? REMS Panel 3 has been mounted, control wiring to systems is complete and communication cabling connected? REMS Panel 4 has been mounted, control wiring to systems is complete and communication cabling connected? REMS DHCP Panel has been mounted, control wiring to systems is complete and communication cabling connected? Remote alarm panel installation in Guest Services is complete and all alarm functions tested? Humidity and Space Temperature sensors are mounted, with communication cabling connected? Humidity and space temperature sensors calibration tested and within an accuracy range of plus or minus 1 percent? Are all door switch alarm panels, and leak alarm panels properly installed on the walk -in cooler and freezer and connected to REMS control system? Refrigerant leak transducers installed in walk -in cooler and freezer and connected to REMS control system? , Security System interface connection is complete at remote alarm panel. . Alarm Back -up verification with the alarm contractor is completed. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 24 TARGET PART 3: Contractor Start-Up Section 3.1: Refrigeration System Pressure Testing Starting Date & Time for Refrigeration System Pressure Test: MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) RTCR A: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; RTCR B: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -1: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -2: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -3: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU-4: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -5: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -6: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -7: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -8: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; CU -9: Starting Test Pressure; Final Test Pressure; Completion Date & Time for Refrigeration System Pressure Test: Responsible Technician: General Contractor Representative: Print Name Signature Date Refrigerant License No. Print Name Section 3.2: Refrigeration System Charging Roof Top Compressor Rack Signature Date Unit Refrigerant Type Amt. Of Refrigerant (Ibs) Oil Charge (gal) Oil Type Condensing Units Unit ID Refrigerant Type Amt. Of Refrigerant (Ibs) Oil Charge (gal) Oil Type CU -1 CU -2 CU -3 CU -4 CU -5 CU -6 CU -7 CU -8 CU -9 ❑ Verify that all required refrigeration charge information has been filled with Target per specifications. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 25 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 3.3: Rooftop Compressor Ra Verify the Main Power Voltage at Electrical Main Verify Control Voltage Rack A: Verify the Main Power Voltage at Electrical Main Verify Control Voltage Rack B: Section 3.4: Condenser Start -Up . Verify Condenser A Power Voltage: Verify Condenser Control Voltage: Verify Condenser B Power Voltage: TARGET ck Start-Up L1 to GR L2 to GR L3 to GR L1 to GR L2 to GR L3 to GR Li to GR L2 to GR L3 to GR Condenser A: L1 to GR L2 to GR L3 to GR Verify Condenser Control Voltage: Condenser B: PART 4: Initial Contractor Start-Up Confirmation Start -up Technician: / Print Name A to B A to C B to C A to B A to C B to C A to B A to C B to C A to B A to C B to C Signature Date of Initial Start -Up START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 26 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 11 PART 5: Additional Notes 11 11 11 11 11 11 111, '11 11 11 �11 11 11 11 J1 START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 27 11 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 28 TARGET 3.13 ROOF TOP COMPRESSOR RACK VALIDATION REPORT MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) This form shall be completed by the Refrigeration Contractor and Roof Top Compressor Rack (RTCR) Manufacturer's Field Service Representative and acknowledged by all parties listed. Follow applicable published manufacturer's start -up instructions and Federal regulations governing the handling of refrigerants. The completed form is be faxed to the attention of the Refrigeration Operations Department, Target Corporation at (775) 370 -9168 prior to store turnover date. It is the responsibility of the installing contractor to return completed form. The form must be filled out completely with no items left blank. If for some reason a question or request for information does not apply, mark it N /A. Where deficiencies or improper operating conditions are found, a corrective action plan must be documented, including schedule, parts required, roles and responsibilities, and follow -up inspections. Part 1: To be completed by RTCR Manufacturer's Field Representative during site visit with the assistance of the refrigeration installation contractor. Part 2: To be completed by refrigeration installation contractor during /after RTCR Manufacturer's Field Representative site visit. Store Number: Store Location: Grand Opening Date: RTCR Manufacturer: Address: City, State: Phone/Fax: Service Contact: Form completed by: Print Name Signature Date Refrigeration Contractor: (Responsible for Start-up) Start-up Technician: Print Name General Contractor: Signature Date Superintendent: Print Name OSR:, / Print Name Signature Signature Date Date START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 29 1 1 r 1 a 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 1: TO BE COMPLETED BY RTCR MANUFACTURER DURING ON SITE VISIT Section 1.1: RTCR Inspections Visually inspect the RTCR Assemblies for damage. TARGET Yes or No Description RTCR A RTCR B Do all removable panels fit tightly when in the closed position? ' Are panels easily removable? Do latches properly function? Is there any physical damage to the RTCR? Is RTCR clean with all construction debris removed? Are relief devices piped to safe location and protected from the weather? Does this installation conform to the manufacturer's requirements? Are there workmanship issues with this installation which raise concerns about safety or operational reliability? Are all valve tags properly installed per the specifications? Section 1.2: Condensers Yes or No Description • RTCR A RTCR B Are units properly assembled with the required quantity of legs and braces? Are coils clean and free of debris? Is refrigerant piping properly supported and connected to condensers? Do fan blades spin freely? Do split condenser and pump out operation properly function for each condenser, including valve function of solenoid valves and check valves? Does pump out only function with compressor(s) running? Does each fan motor have proper. rotation? All fan guards properly installed? Is ambient air temperature sensor properly installed on condenser and wired to CPC controller? ❑ Cycle each condenser output to verify corresponding fan operation. ❑ Verify back -up condenser fan pressure switch settings, manually cycle switches and verify corresponding fan operation. ❑ Independently measure and record the outdoor ambient air temperature: deg F. ❑ Record the outdoor ambient air temperature displayed on Einstein Controller: deg F. ❑ Verify and record controller setpoints for: o Minimum condensing temperature: deg F o Fast recovery setpoint: psig. o Split setpoint: deg F. o Unsplit setpoint: deg F. ❑ Measure the leaving air temperature off the condenser o Condenser A: deg F o Condenser B: deg F. ❑ Independently measure the liquid refrigerant temp. leaving the condensers o Cond A: deg F o Cond B: deg F ❑ Record the liquid refrigerant temperature leaving the condensers on CPC controller; o Cond A degF. o Cond B: deg F START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 30 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 1.3: Rooftop Compressor Racks (Compressors /Circuits) Yes or No Description Is RTCR A properly piped? Is the refrigerant piping correctly labeled? Have all shipping brackets been removed? Have all required interconnections (electrical and refrigeration) between compressor section and condenser section.been properly installed? (Two piece unit specific) Is RTCR insulation complete? ❑ Verify and record RTCR high -to -low bypass pressure control set point: psi. ❑ Verify and record RTCR pressure relief transducer set point: psi (same setting for both) ❑ Verify that dual relief three -way valve is positioned to feed only one rupture disc /relief valve assembly. ❑ Cycle relay output to verify operation of exhaust fan(s). ❑ Verify RTCR lighting is operational. ❑ Verify RTCR power outlets are operational. ❑ Verify operation of any dedicated panel ventilation systems. ❑ Allow the oil pressure controls to trip and verify proper compressor /alarm operation. ❑ Verify operation of rack control system switchback relay (Einstein to mechanical control). ❑ Verify control circuit isolation of compressor in "OFF" mode. ❑ After oil pressure controls trip, wait 2 minutes and check crankcase heater operation ❑ Cycle all compressor switches, verify control function and manual status alarm function. ❑ Check Einstein for proper programming by cycling all outputs with compressor circuit breakers off. Verify corresponding contactor function. ❑ Verify operation of digital scroll compressor on lead medium temperature compressor. ❑ Verify and operation of 3 -way dual temperature valves. ❑ Cycle branch circuit control isolation circuits and verify operation. ❑ Manually defrost all circuits to verify operation of all associated valves. o Hot Gas Defrost - EEPR closes, hot gas solenoid (energizes) opens, MDV.regulates, fan delay thermostat senses hot gas and shuts fans off, defrost time begins defrost ends, hot gas solenoid closes, MDV opens, timed drip cycle begins, EEPR opens, fan delay thermostat senses cool gas and turns fans on, and normal refrigeration begins. o Off -time Defrost - EEPR closes, evaporator fans continue to run, defrost time begins, defrost ends, EEPR opens, and normal refrigeration begins. Rack Components ❑ Verify and record subcooler mechanical EPR set point: psig. ❑ Verify and record Sporlan subcooler controller exiting liquid temperature set - point: F. ❑ Verify and record Sporlan subcooler controller superheat setpoint: degrees F. ❑ Measure and record actual subcooler leaving liquid temperature: F. ❑ Verify that RTCR low ambient control set points are per I & 0 Manual. o RTCR A Discharge Bypass Regulator: psig. o RTCR A Liquid Drain Regulator: psig. ❑ Verify and record RTCR defrost differential pressure regulating valve set points: o RTCR A: psig (differential). ❑ Record receiver heat trace setpoint: F ❑ Verify operation of receiver heat trace. Amp draw: A START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 31 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Yes or No Description Is RTCR B properly piped? Is the refrigerant piping correctly labeled? Have all shipping brackets been removed? Have all required interconnections (electrical and refrigeration) between compressor section and condenser section been properly installed? (Two piece unit specific) Is RTCR insulation complete? ❑ Verify and record RTCR high -to -low bypass pressure control set point: psi. ❑ Verify and record RTCR pressure relief transducer set point: psi (same setting for both) ❑ Verify that dual relief three -way valve is positioned to feed only one rupture disc /relief valve assembly. ❑ Cycle relay output to verify operation of exhaust fan(s). ❑ Verify RTCR lighting is operational. ❑ Verify RTCR power outlets are operational. • ❑ Verify operation of any dedicated panel ventilation systems. ❑ Allow the oil pressure controls to trip and verify proper compressor /alarm operation. ❑ Verify operation of rack control system switchback relay (Einstein to mechanical control). ❑ Verify control circuit isolation of compressor in "OFF" mode. ❑ After oil pressure controls trip, wait 2 minutes and check crankcase heater operation ❑ Cycle all compressor switches, verify control function and manual status alarm function. ❑ Check Einstein for proper programming by cycling all outputs with compressor circuit breakers off. Verify corresponding contactor function. ❑ Verify operation of digital scroll compressor on lead medium temperature compressor. ❑ Verify and operation of 3 -way dual temperature valves. ❑ Cycle branch circuit control isolation circuits and verify operation. ❑ Manually defrost all circuits to verify operation of all associated valves. o Hot Gas Defrost - EEPR closes, hot gas solenoid (energizes) opens, MDV regulates, fan delay thermostat senses hot gas and shuts fans off, defrost time begins defrost ends, hot gas solenoid closes, MDV opens, timed drip cycle begins, EEPR opens, fan delay thermostat senses cool gas and turns fans on, and normal refrigeration begins. o Off-time Defrost - EEPR closes, evaporator fans continue to run, defrost time begins, defrost ends, EEPR opens, and normal refrigeration begins. Rack Components ❑ Verify and record subcooler mechanical EPR set point: psig. ❑ Verify and record Sporlan subcooler controller exiting liquid temperature set - point: F. ❑ Verify and record Sporlan subcooler controller superheat setpoint: degrees F. ❑ Measure and record actual subcooler leaving liquid temperature: F. ❑ Verify that RTCR low ambient control set points are per I & 0 Manual. o RTCR A Discharge Bypass Regulator: psig. o RTCR A Liquid Drain Regulator: psig. ❑ Verify and record RTCR defrost differential pressure regulating valve set points: o RTCR A: psig (differential). ❑ Record receiver heat trace setpoint: F ❑ Verify operation of receiver heat trace. Amp draw: A. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 32 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 2: TO BE COMPLETED BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR Section 2.1: Rooftop Compressor Rack Unit ❑ After testing is completed, record compressor Toads and settings (table) ❑ Check and record oil level for each compressor (table) ❑ With compressor off, record amp draw of crankcase heaters (table). ❑ Record setting for low pressure control switches, allow minimum of 10 psig dead band, record set points (table). ❑ Verify settings of high pressure safety controls to be no higher than 390 psig for R -404a record set points (table). ❑ Verify time delays have been set correctly. ❑ After testing is completed, verify that all compressor control switches are reset to the AUTO position. ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 33 Comp. Oil Level Measured Amps Loaded L1 L2 L3 High Press Safety Setting Low Press Switch Setting Net Oil Pressure Oil Press Control ' Function Measured CC Heater Amps Comp Al Comp A2 Comp A3 Comp A4 • Comp A5 • Comp A6 Comp A7 (if applicable) Comp A8 (if applicable) Comp A9 (if applicable) Comp B1 • Comp B2 Comp B3 Comp B4 Comp B5 ❑ After testing is completed, verify that all compressor control switches are reset to the AUTO position. ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 33 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Rack Components ❑ Verify that calibration of the following temperature sensors and pressure transducers are with -in specified range of accuracy. 0 Check and record the following other Rack fluid levels, temperatures and pressures: Rack Components Item RTCR Group A Indicated (Einstein) RTCR Group A Measured Specified Range RTCR Group B Indicated (Einstein) RTCR Group B Measured Specified Range Suction Header Pressure Suction Header Temperature Calculated Super Heat Rack Discharge Pressure Rack Discharge Temperature Subcooled Liquid Header Temperature Subcooled Liquid Header Pressure Non Subcooled Liquid Header Temperature -- -- -- Non Subcooled Liquid Header Temperature -- -- -- Drop Leg Temperature Drop Leg Pressure HPR Liquid Level . Oil Reservoir Level (sightglass and estimated gallons) ' START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 34 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.2: Condenser ❑ After testing is complete, operate each condenser fan motor and measure the motor lead amp draws, at fuse blocks (table). ❑ Record final back -up fan pressure control settings (table). RTCR A Condenser Fans ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. RTCR B Condenser Fans Measured Amps Fan Pressure Setting L1 L2 L3 Fan Al Fan A2 Fan A3 Fan A4 Fan A5 Fan A6 • Fan A7 (if applicable) Fan A8 (if applicable) ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. RTCR B Condenser Fans ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 35 Measured Amps Fan Pressure Setting L1 L2 L3 Fan B1 Fan B2 Fan B3 Fan B4 Fan B5 (if applicable) Fan B6 (if applicable) Fan B7 (if applicable) Fan B8 (if applicable) ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tag. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 35 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION = (MR2010_10) TARGET Section 2.3: Refrigeration Branch Circuits ❑ Verify and record EEPR set points in Einstein Software as programmed ❑ Independently measure branch return gas temperatures and calibrate branch suction return gas temperature sensors. Measure and record suction return gas branch temperatures (table). ❑ Observe racks for liquid flood back. Contractor must correct any and all flood back issues prior to allowing rack to operate unattended. RTCR Branch Circuits (MST - Measured Suction Temperature; SST - Saturated Suction Temperature: SH - Superheat) System No. EEPR Valve Set Point Branch Suction Pressure Branch Suction Gas Temperature Calculated Superheat MST - SST = SH ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tags. ❑ Verify installation of circuit id plates on case interiors as per specification. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 36 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.4: Walk -in Coolers and Freezers Visually inspect the walk -in coolers and freezers for proper installation of the evaporator coils, and ensure all penetrations are sealed. Yes or No Description Measured Rm. Temp. Are the evaporators properly supported? EEPR Valve Set Point Are the evaporators piped in accordance with manufacturer's instruction? Measured Volts Are all evaporator fan panels installed in proper operating position? Measured Mips (Pan Heater) Are evaporator coil fan guards completely and properly installed? ❑ Check evaporator coils for proper fan and heater operation. ❑ Manually cycle door switches to verify interruption of evaporator fans and control valve operation. ❑ Manually defrost all circuits to verify operation of all associated valves. o Electric Defrost — Refrigeration solenoid closes, condensing unit shuts off, electric defrost heaters energize, defrost time begins, defrost ends, timed drip cycle begins, refrigeration solenoid opens, and normal refrigeration begins. o Off -time Defrost — Refrigeration solenoid close, evaporator fans continue to run, defrost time begins, defrost ends, refrigeration solenoid opens, and normal refrigeration begins. Evaporator Coils System No. Location Measured Rm. Temp. Measured Superheat EEPR Valve Set Point Suction Temp. Measured Volts Measured Amps (Fans) Measured Mips (Pan Heater) Measured Mips (Heat Tape) • ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tags. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.5: Remote Condensing Units Visually inspect the remote condensing units for proper installation, and ensure all unit and roof -top penetrations are sealed. TARGET Yes or No Description A07 Measured Are the condensing units properly supported and installed? B04 Indicated Are roof penetrations properly sealed? Specified Range Are the condensing units piped in accordance with manufacturer's instruction? Are the condensing unit hail guards completely and properly installed? Are the condensing unit covers completely and properly installed? ❑ Measure and record condensing unit operation and setpoint information (table). ❑ Is there a 120 volt service outlet installed within code required distance of the roof top equipment? Condensing Units (use additional copies of this table for stores with more than two walk -ins) Item A07 Indicated A07 Measured Specified Range B04 Indicated B04 Measured Specified Range Suction Pressure n Suction Header Temperature Calculated Super Heat Discharge Pressure Discharge Temperature Compressor Oil Level -- -- -- -- High Pressure Safety Setting -- -- -- -- Low Pressure Control -- -- • -- -- Oil Pressure Control Setting -- -- o -- -- Oil Pressure Control Function -- -- -- -- Crankcase Heater Amps -- -- -- -- ❑ Verify installation of Target asset tags. START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 -38 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) Section 2.6: REMS System Remote system checkout: When system is fully operation and remote communication is functional, please contact Energy Management Consultants (608) 822 -3550 x 0 and ask for Target Refrigeration Checkout). Please record the following information from the remote checkout process. Date checkout competed: EMC Technician Name: 111 i1 11 • I1 1I 11 .1I II START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 39 11 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1 PART 3: CORRECTIVE ACTION PLANS (use additional sheets as needed) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 END OF SECTION START -UP REFRIGERATION 24 9000 - 40 TARGET STORES MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0020 (16020) ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Perform all demolition, removal and restoration to complete the electrical work under the Contract. Relocate or reuse existing materials and equipment as directed in the Contract Documents. Salvage the material and equipment the Owner wishes to save. Dispose of all other materials and debris. B. The Drawings generally show the extent of demolition, removal and relocation, but they cannot show all the work, or all conditions and details that will affect the progress of the work. Examine the Project site. Determine existing conditions. Become familiar with the Project requirements before bidding the work. - C. General Requirements: 1. Complete the work using workers skilled in the required trades. If necessary, sublet the work to the appropriate subcontractors. Restore material in every respect, including the removal of visual defects in exposed finishes in a manner approved by the Architect. Engage specialists in at least the following trades as necessary: a. Exposed concrete finishes. b. Exposed masonry and stonework. c. Waterproofing and vapor barriers. d. Roofing, flashing and accessories. e. Exterior wall systems. 2. Coordinate and schedule the work with the Owner to avoid any disturbance or disruption of the Owner's operations. Perform any work that will affect the Owner's operations at times acceptable to the Owner. If necessary, do the work in stages to avoid disruption. Since the final schedule must be worked out between the Owner and the Contractors, assume for the sake of the bidding that all this coordination can be done without overtime work. Coordinate work with other trades prior to commencing demolition. 3. Where the work affects the structure, exercise extreme care to protect the structure and its occupants. Take particular care when working near occupied areas. Employ or subcontract competent, qualified structural engineers and construction specialists to develop appropriate and responsible techniques for doing the work. Provide temporary shoring and supports when required. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all structural loads down to sound bearing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVABLE MATERIALS A. Salvable Materials to be Reused in the Work: 1. Remove salvable materials to be reused or relocated and move them to the new location. If the new location is not ready to receive these materials, store and protect them from damage until the new location is ready. 2. Remove, clean and preserve all materials that are to be reused, or are needed to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removing these materials to avoid damaging them or making them unsuitable for reuse. Replace all damaged materials shown, tagged or required for reuse with equivalent, matching materials. B. Salvable Materials to be Stored by the Owner: 1. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials or equipment he wishes to keep. Carefully remove these items and protect them from damage. Store them in an area designated by,the Owner. 2. Consult the Owner about any salvage he wishes to keep and about his general standards for salvaging the materials and equipment removed from the Project. 3. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not part of this Contract. Remove the salvable materials from the Project site and place them in a storage area designated by the Owner. ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0020 (16020) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property. Always provide the appropriate supports and protection, and always use proper methods to prevent collapse, settling or other damage. Obtain responsible designs so the supports will be adequate for the loads they carry. Supports must properly distribute their loads to lower levels or to sound bearing. B. Provide temporary coverings and enclosures to prevent damage to existing spaces or to parts of the building that are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and to avoid abnormal heat loss. Prevent weather damage by scheduling the work at the envelope according to weather conditions. C. Provide temporary dust enclosures above and below the ceilings to separate the construction site from the rest of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to contain construction dust within the construction area. general contractor will provide hinged doors at access points through temporary enclosures. The general contractor will seal temporary and permanent doors with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work. Keep them sealed until the dust has settled. 3.2 DEMOLITION AND CUTTING A. The selective demolition of the building list many individual components and systems to be removed and also to • be saved. The list of items to be saved is inclusive and need not be added to, but the list of items to be removed is partial and all demolition work dealing with that demolition type are intended to be part of that work. 1. Mechanical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of mechanical demolition, and mechanical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. 2. Electrical demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of electrical demolition, and electrical type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. 3. General demolition whether individually noted or not will be included in the work of general demolition, and general type items in areas to be selectively demolished will be the responsibility of the contractor assigned that work. Note any demolition items that do not typically fall into a particular group's responsibility will be the responsibility of the general demolition contractor. B. Electrical Demolition: Demolish and remove existing electrical construction as shown on the Drawings and as required to accomplish the work. Where new work is adjacent to existing construction and when existing construction must be replaced, remove just enough existing construction to complete the work under the Contract. At no additional cost to the owner, remove and replace existing construction that was to remain but that is damaged during the work. C. Cutting Concrete: Cut openings through concrete by core drilling or sawing. Never cut openings in concrete with a hammer -driven chisel or drill without written authorization from the Architect. D. Other Work: Never endanger or damage the work of other trades. If the work of other trades must be altered to accommodate the mechanical work, review the proposed alterations with the installer of work and comply with installer's recommendations to minimize damage. Where necessary, engage the original installer to make the required changes. E. Clean demolition areas and remove the debris from the site at the end of each day's work. Transport debris in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not permit the burning or storage of debris at the site. Keep all construction areas broom clean. Keep all adjacent areas unencumbered and clean: 3.3 UNANTICIPATED ELECTRICAL WORK A. If the demolition work exposes concealed electrical services (such as piping or ducts), immediately inform the Engineer of the additional cost to the Project to remove or retire the unanticipated work. Begin this additional demolition only after receiving approval from the Owner for the additional costs. B. Remove or reroute unanticipated electrical services under direction from the Engineer. Reconnect them to maintain the Owner's operations. Abandon services in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls, but disconnect them from their sources and cap them in place. Leave no "dead end" services concealed in the finished work. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0020 (16020) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0500 (16050) BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. R1 1 ER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Demolition. 2. Maintaining existing equipment in service until new equipment operational. 3. Recycling of lamps and ballasts. 1.2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet requirements of latest edition of NEC and other national, state and local regulations that may apply. B. Where requirements indicated in the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes and standards, the Contract Documents take precedence. C. Fluorescent lamps and ballasts removed from all Target Corporation facilities must be recycled. Lamps and ballasts cannot be thrown in the trash. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Excavation, trenching, backfill and compaction requirements - Section 31 2310. B. Concrete mix requirements - Section 03 3000. C. Finish painting - Section 09 9100. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Load Current and Voltage Measurement. B. Certificate: Submit certificate in accordance with Section 01 3300, stating that electrical tests have been completed. 1.5 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT POWER AND CONTROL WIRING A. Motors and equipment provided under Divisions 8, 11, 13, 23, and 24: 1. Provide power wiring from power source to motor or equipment through its controller as indicated on Drawings. 2. Make electrical connections at power source, controller and motor or equipment. B. Motor and equipment controllers and control devices, Sections in Divisions 22,23 and 24: 1. Provide controllers for every motor or piece of equipment unless indicated otherwise in Contract Documents. 2. Control devices and control wiring: Provided under Sections in Divisions 22,23 and 24 unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Motor and equipment controllers, control devices and control wiring, Sections in Divisions 8, 11, 23 and 24: Provided under Sections of Divisions 8, 11, 23 and 24 unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. Cable splices shall only be allowed where specifically called out on the plans 'or specifications. No other splices allowed. it BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0500 (16050) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide equipment and material listed by UL or ETL. B. Identification: 1. Identify equipment with manufacturer's nameplate. 2. Indicate manufacturer's name, address, model number and electrical ratings. 2.2 LAMP AND BALLAST RECYCLE CONTRACTOR A. WM LampTracker is Target Corporation's national contractor for lamp and ballast recycling from construction projects. 1. To Order Containers: www.wmlamptracker.com > Pallet Load Recycling > Request Packaging Supplies. 2. To Request Pickup: www.wmlamptracker.com > Pallet Load Recycling > Order a Pickup 3. Telephone: 888 -537 -4874 B. Bulk Neon, Lamp, Ballast recycling for Construction projects must be coordinated through WM LampTracker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install equipment with space allowed for removal, repair and modifications. 2. Conduits: a. Arrange conduits routed through insulating panels of refrigerated panels to minimize size of openings. b. Seal conduits with approved fittings and sealants. B. Existing Equipment: 1. Make modifications to existing equipment as indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections. 2. Maintain uninterrupted electrical service to existing areas under modification. C. Inserts and Sleeves: 1. Install inserts for fastening equipment to new concrete work during construction of building in locations approved by the Architect. 2. Use expansion bolts for fastening equipment in existing construction or when inserts have been improperly located. 3. Install sleeves for conduits larger than one inch when penetrating poured concrete walls, floors, or precast panels. Provide waterproofing or vapor barrier to match penetration. 4. Seal sleeves with three hour rated fire retardant silicone sealant. D. Access Panels: 1. Install access panels in least obtrusive location or as approved by Architect for concealed conduit, boxes, wiring, and electrical equipment requiring accessibility. E. Shop Painting: 1. Clean shop or factory fabricated or field built equipment not galvanized or protected and paint one shop coat of primer before delivery to site. Repaint scratches or bends. 2. Do not paint nameplates, labels, tags, stainless steel or chromium- plated items such as shafts, levers, handles, trim, and strips. F. Protection of Work: 1. Protect equipment and fixtures with tarpaulins, drop cloths, barricades as required. 2. Replace damaged equipment with new equipment. G. Housekeeping Pad: 1. Install concrete housekeeping pad for each piece of floor mounted equipment. 2. Size pad 4 inches high and 4 inches beyond equipment length and width. 3. Pour pad level and score top from front to back on 18 inch centers with parting tool. 4. Chamfer exposed edges. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS • 26 0500 (16050) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) H. Balancing and Testing: 1. Balance circuits under full load conditions and record final full load phase current measurements. 2. Measure and record full load current and voltage at main switchboard and each distribution panel and panelboard. 3. Prepare current and voltage measurements in tabular form. 4. Test each feeder by means of megohm insulation tester (megger). Correct circuits showing less than one megohm resistance. 5. Test motors and motor control equipment and replace overload elements that operate at excessive temperatures. I. Excavating and Backfilling: 1. Excavate, trench, backfill and compact for electrical work conforming to Project requirements. Do not cover conduit or other work before inspection and approval. 2. Install identifying underground warning tapes 12 inches below grade, directly above, and continuous with underground cable or conduit. 3.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP AND BALLAST RECYCLING A. Order shipping containers by calling Terry Horstman at MercuryNoss (1- 800 - 776 - 8677). 1. Allow 3 -5 business days for delivery of containers. 2. Containers will not be shipped unless the following information is provided: a. Accurate count of lamps needing shipping containers. b. Accurate count of ballasts needing shipping containers. c. Store number and address. d. Construction/remodel project code. e. On -site contact person, phone number, fax number and e-mail address. f. Store shipping/receiving hours. g. Special drop -off instructions. B. Package the fluorescent lamps and ballasts using the following procedures: 1. Lamps a. Fill lamp boxes completely with fluorescent lamps. b. Securely tape every box closed on all seams. c. Write quantity of lamps on the end of each box. d. Stack boxes on pallets approximately 4 feet high (never exceed 5 feet high). e. Write total quantity of lamps on the outside of each pallet. f. Tightly wrap entire pallet with stretch wrap (minimum of 10 revolutions). 2. Ballasts a. Place ballasts into 55- gallon open top steel drums. b. Secure drum lid tightly with ring and bolt. c. Write quantity of ballasts on the top of each drum. d. Place drums on a pallet (4 drums per pallet) - if pallet is not strong enough place 2 drums on middle of each pallet. e. Write total quantity of ballasts on the outside of each pallet. f. Tightly wrap each pallet with stretch wrap (minimum of 10 revolutions). 3. Unused Packaging a. Return unused packaging containers with the materials to be recycled. They should be shrink- wrapped on the pallets with full boxes or drums. C. Ship the pallets by calling Terry Horstman at MercuryNoss (1- 800 - 776 - 8677). 1. Pallets cannot be picked up unless the following information is provided: a. Accurate count of lamps ready to be picked up. b. Accurate count of ballasts ready to be picked up. c. Amount of unused packaging. d. Store number and address. e. Construction/remodel project code. f. On -site contact person, phone number, fax number and e-mail address. g. Store shipping/receiving hours. h. Special pick -up instructions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0500 (16050) - 3 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET i. Equipment available for loading pallets. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL Y LEFT BLANK BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0500 (16050) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Thermoplastic- insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5, UL 83, ANSI/ASTM B3. 1 SECTION 26 0519 (16120) CONDUCTORS AND CABLE NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wire. 2. Cable. 3. Wiring connections and terminations. 4. Installation of manufactured wiring system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 2300 — Alternates. B. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: Owner will furnish manufactured wiring system for installation under this section to interconnect low voltage distribution system (600 volt maximum) to Sales Floor lighting system and power and communication poles. C. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. D. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. E. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. F. Section 26 5101 - Lighting Fixtures Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM B3 - Annealed Bare Copper Conductor. B. ICEA — Insulated Cable Engineer's Association. C. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. D. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. UL 44 - Standard for Rubber - Insulated Wires and Cables. G. UL 83 - Standard for Safety of Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable. H. UL 1569 - Metal -Clad Cables. (Where allowed by AH.J). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under the provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Certificates of insulation megohmeter tests. Submit test results to OSR. 2.1 BUILDING WIRE PART2- PRODUCTS CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 (16120) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Rubber - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3, UL 44, ANSJ/ASTM B3. C. Conductors: Copper, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN or XHHW, stranded conductor. A. Conductors ( #6 and larger): Stabiloy or Southwire aluminum alloy (AA -8000 series alloy), 600V insulation Type XHHW -2, compact stranded conductors. Allowed only for panel and switchgear feeders, and associated transformer feeders. Not allowed to feed equipment, including air conditioning and refrigeration equipment_ !Where allowed by AHJ). B. Control Circuits: 14 AWG Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN; multi- conductor cable: color coded. C. Metal -Clad (MC) Cable: A factory assembly of one or more conductors each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube. UL 1569. Stranded or solid acceptable. (Where allowed by AIIJ). 2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper, solid conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 60° C, individual insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper solid conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60° C, individual insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. 2.3 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM A. Manufactured Wiring System: Pre -wired flexible metal conduit assemblies furnished by Owner. 2.4 EMS & REMS LOW VOLTAGE CABLES A. Energy management system and Refrigeration energy management system control cables are 18 AWG 2 pair (18/2), 4 pair (18/4), 6 pair (18/6), 8 pair (18/8), (and other sizes as noted on plans) plenum cables furnished by EMS Contractor and installed by electrical contractor. B. Electrical contractor to leave tagged wire ends at each junction for connection by EMS Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. Switch legs are not considered control wiring. B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 150 feet. C. No splices allowed unless specifically shown on plans or specifications. D. Where splices are allowed, only splice in junction or outlet boxes. E. Place no more than 6 current carrying conductors in the same raceway unless indicated on Drawings. F. Neatly train and lace or tie wiring inside boxes, equipment, cabinets, and panelboards. G. Make conductor lengths for parallel conductors equal. H. Use 90° C wire for feed through wiring in channels of continuous row fluorescent fixtures. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 6 AWG and larger wires. CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 (16120) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Swab raceway system installed underground, 1-1/4" and larger, with sponge and drawstring before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Permitted Uses: Locations where not subject to physical damage. 1. CL2P and CL3P Plenum Cables: For EMS /low voltage cables in plenum ceilings. 2. MC Cables: (Where allowed by AHJ). a. Connection to light fixtures per NEC requirements. b. Wiring within store fixtures (i.e. from power poles or floor boxes to receptacles or light fixtures). c. Wiring within un- furred columns. d. Branch circuit wiring and homeruns within walls, in ceiling spaces and surface mounted in backrooms; where not subject to physical damage. e. Panelboard Feeders per NEC requirements. 3. Bare stranded conductors may be used for grounding purposes in accordance with the NEC. B. Not Permitted Uses: 1. Direct burial or in concrete. 2. Bare wires; except CL2P and CL3P; In plenum ceilings must be in conduit. 3. AC cable. C. Support exposed cables not in raceways above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not support cable from ceiling suspension system. Include bridle rings or drive rings. Support cables at intervals not exceeding 6 feet. D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. E. Support MC Cable as detailed on plans. (Where allowed by AHJ). 3.4 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured wiring system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use UL listed spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables longer than 6 feet from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. C. Do not support manufactured wiring system cable or components from ceiling suspension system. 3.5 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. No splices allowed unless specifically shown on plans or specifications. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for conductor size 8 AWG. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. C. Use split bolt connectors for splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with wire nuts and electrical tape. 3.6 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS (WHERE ALLOWED BY AHJ). A. Mechanical screw type connectors. 1. Connectors: a. Dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU). b. UL listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 260519(16120) -3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET c. Sized to accept aluminum conductors of specified ampacity. 2. Remove insulation from the required length of conductor using suitable stripping tool. 3. Wire brush conductor and apply a UL listed joint compound. 4. Tighten the connection per connector manufacturer's recommendation. 5. Wipe off excess joint compound. B. Mechanical compression type connectors. 1. Connectors: a. Dual rated (AL7CU or AL9CU). b. UL listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. c. Sized to accept aluminum conductors of specified ampacity. 2. Lugs: a. Marked with wire size, die index, number and location of crimps. b. Color- coded. c. Lug barrel: Factory pre -filled with a UL listed joint compound. 3. Remove insulation from the required length of conductor using suitable stripping tool. 4. Wire brush conductor. 5. Crimp the connection per connector manufacturer's recommendation. 6. Wipe off excess joint compound. C. Termination to Aluminum Bus 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to A. or B. above. 2. Hardware: a. Bolts: Anodized alloy 2024 -T4 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.1 and to ASTM B211 or B221 chemical and mechanical property limits. . b. Nuts: Aluminum alloy 6061 -T6 or 6262 -T9 and conforming to ANSI B18.2.2. c. Washers: Flat aluminum alloy 2024 -T4, Type A plain, standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. 3. Lubricate and tighten the hardware per the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Termination to Copper Bus 1. Prepare a mechanical connection conforming to A. or B. above. 2. Ha_ rdware: a. Bolts: Plated or galvanized medium carbon steel; heat treated, quenched and tempered equal to ASTM A -325 or SAE grade 5. b. Nuts: Heavy semi - finished hexagon, conforming to ANSI BI8.2.2, threads to be unified coarse series (UNC), class 2B. c. Washers: Steel, Type A plain, standard wide series conforming to ANSI B27.2. d. Belleville conical spring washers: Hardened steel, cadmium plated or silicone bronze. 3. Lubricate and tighten the hardware per the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Termination to Equipment Not Equipped for Termination of Aluminum Conductor. 1. Prepare a compression connection using an adapter UL listed for the purpose. 2. Provide an insulating cover over adapter body. 3. Terminate the adapter to the equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall field inspect and test installation as follows: 1. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. 2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. 3. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. 4. Test each feeder by means of a megohmeter insulation tester. Impress a voltage of no less than 500 volts DC upon the circuit being tested. Correct insulation deficiencies that show an insulation resistance of less than one megohm. Test with conductors connected to their respective terminals with switch or circuit breaker in the "off" position. END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 (16120) - 4 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0526 (16450) . SECONDARY GROUNDING NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Power system grounding. 2. Telephone system grounding. 3. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 4. EPOS, Network and Inventory Control System grounding. 5. Generator grounding. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe or nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non - current - carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. C. Provide continuous green ground wire to receptacle ground lug for outlets serving EPOS, Network and Inventory Control systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete set of marked up prints as record drawings to indicate installed location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors. B. Submit certified test results stating ground resistance from service neutral at service entrance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ground Clamp: Water pipe connection, bronze two piece with serrated jaws, lug sized for grounding electrode conductor. B. Connectors, Compression Type: Bronze or copper, pretreated with conductive paste, sized for conductors to which applied. C. Connectors, Exothermic Weld Type: Powder actuated weld. Bond made through exothermic reaction producing molten copper from premixed copper oxide and aluminum powder. Form bond in mold or crucible. • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits and branch circuits serving EPOS, Network and Inventory Control equipment. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. B. Provide one ground rod, driven with top a minimum of 24 inches below grade. If rock is encountered, bury rod in trench 30 inches minimum below grade. SECONDARY GROUNDING 26 0526 (16450) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at telephone terminal board. D. Network and EPOS Receptacle Systems: Use dedicated insulated green equipment grounding conductor and connect between panelboard ground bus and green lug on receptacle chassis. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. END OF SECTION SECONDARY GROUNDING 26 0526 (16450) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0529 (16190) SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Fastening hardware. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: General requirements for Owner- supplied equipment. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. D. Section 09 9100 - Painting. Devices exposed in public areas. E. Section 26 0533 — Raceways and Boxes. F. Section 26 2301 - Switchboard Installation. G. Section 26 2817 - Disconnect Switch Installation. H. Section 26 2201 - Dry Type Transformers Installation. I. Section 26 2417 — Panelboard Installation. J. Section 26 2914 - Contactors. K. Section 26 5101 - Lighting Fixtures Installation. L. Section 27 0528 - Telephone Raceway System. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. 1.5 REFERENCES A. APA, "American Plywood Association ". B. UL, "Building Materials Directory". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Beeline. 2. Kindorf. 3. Unistrut. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. 12 gauge galvanized or painted steel, "U" section, 1 -1/2" square nominal in section. SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 (16190) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET C. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to support equipment. Provide corrosion resistant finish. D. Threaded Rod: Zinc plated steel, 3/8" diameter minimum, sized to support load required with safety factor of 2. 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Plywood Boards: APA C -D or C -D Plugged, Group 2, Exposure 1. Provide fire retardant treated material, pressure impregnated with Osmose "Flameproof' or Koppers "NON -COM ", and bearing a UL label indicating fire hazard classification of 25 or less, or an FR -S Classification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using bolts, beam clamps, and spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors in solid masonry walls; self - drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. C. Do not secure materials to architectural wall panel system except at steel studs as approved by architect. D. DO NOT FASTEN SUPPORTS TO PIPING, DUCTWORK, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, OTHER CONDUIT, OR ROOF DECK. E. Do not use powder - actuated anchors. F. Do not drill through structural framing members, except as shown for receptacle, telephone, temperature sensor and A/V devices in columns. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install free - standing electrical equipment on concrete pads four inches high and overlapping equipment footprint by two inches on all sides. I. Install surface - mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall, or on 3/4 inch plywood backboards. J. Install plywood backboards over gypsum board or directly to stud framing as indicated. Fasten to studs with self - tapping screws according to APA recommendations. K. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush - mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. L. Bar joist construction: Support equipment and fixtures from the top chord of barjoists. Connect hanger at bar joist top chordpanelpoint,• that is, the point at which the vertical or angular member of barjoist is attached to the top chord. Provide steel channels or rigid conduit to span between joists for locating hangers properly. EMT conduit may be used in place of rigid to support a single strip light fixture that is 8' -0" in length or less. Exception: where spacing offtxtures requires the use of screw eyes. 1. Note: DO NOT support equipment, conduit, or fixtures from the roof deck. M Bar joist construction: Locate panel point loads at least 6 feet from any other panel point load on the same joist. 1. Note. DO NOT exceed a maximum allowable load of 88 lb. to any joist panel point. N. Wood roof construction: Support equipment and fixtures from the wood girder or purlins. Provide necessary wood framing and joist hangers to span between wood members to locate hangers properly. 1. Note: DO NOT support equipment, conduit, or fixtures from the roof deck or sub - purlins. O. Wood roof construction: Locate point loads at least four feet from any other point load on the same member. 1. Note: DO NOT exceed a maximum point load of 961b. to any member. END OF SECTION SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 (16190) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) RACEWAY AND BOXES NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. 3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 4. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 6. Non - metallic conduit and fittings. 7. Metal -Clad (MC) Cable. (Where allowed by AHJ). 8. Surface metal raceways. 9. Multi- outlet assemblies. 10. Auxiliary gutters (wireways). 11. Installation of power and communication poles. 12. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 13. Floor boxes. 14. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: General requirements for Owner- supplied equipment. B. Section 01 8113 — Sustainable Design Requirements (LEED). (Where required for LEED stores). C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Section 31 2310 - Section 03 3000 - Section 06 4000 Section 07 6200 Section 07 8400 Section 08 3100 Section 09 9100 Section 09 2116 partitions. Section 09 6500 - Section 09 6800 - Section 26 0519 Section 26 2726 - Earthwork/Building Area: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities within building area. Cast -in -Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations. - Architectural Woodwork. - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. - Firestopping. - Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors. - Painting. - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing around conduit penetrating non -fire rated gypsum board Resilient Flooring. Carpeting. — Conductors and Cable. Wiring Devices: Receptacles. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. Owner will furnish power and communication poles for installation under this section. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1, "Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc- Coated ". B. ANSI C80.3, "Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc- Coated ". C. ANSI C80.5, "Rigid Aluminum Conduit ". D. ANSI/NEMA FB -1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies ". E. NEMA RN -1, "PVC Externally- Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing ". F. NEMA TC2, "Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC -40 and EPC -80) ". G. NEMA TC 3, "PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing ". H. UL, "Building Materials Directory". I. UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings. J. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. K. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). L. USGBC LEED, U.S. Green Building Council Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design, credit EQ 4.1 "Low- Emitting Materials, Adhesives, and Sealants." (Where required fir LEED stores). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Include product data for surface metal raceways, multi - outlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and accessories. 1.5 UNIT PRICES A. Power and Communication Poles: Unit prices for installation of Owner - furnished poles, for addition or deduction of poles due to Contract revisions; based on requirements for complete pole installation, excluding wiring. (Note: Poles come with a 25' factory manufactured whip.) B. Submit Unit Prices according to Bid Form, as applicable. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. C. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: NEMA RN -1; rigid steel conduit with external galvanized surface. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 2.2 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Galvanized steel, UL 1242. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB -1; use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. 2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB -1; steel, compression or set screw type. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: FS WW -C 566; steel. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB -1. 2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: UL File 52123 galvanized steel flexible conduit with UL 360 PVC jacket. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB -1. 2.6 RIGID NON - METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.7 EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS A. Expansion and deflection couplings: UL 467 and UL 514; accommodate 0.75 inch deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction; allow 30 degree angular deflections; watertight, corrosion- resistant and compatible with rigid conduit or IMC. 2.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. 2.9 SEALANT A. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. (Where required for LEED stores). B. Refer to Section 07 8400 - Firestopping for approved manufacturers and requirements for firestopping systems and products. Products selected are to be based on tested UL designs. 2.10 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Comply with Section 01 8113, Article 2.4 Low Emitting Materials. (Where required for LEED stores). B. Corrosion Resistant Coatings: Asphaltic base liquid; Koppers Bitumastic 50. 2.11 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Miroflector Company, Inc. 2. Panduit Corporation. 3. The Wiremold Company. 4. Mono - Systems Inc. B. Surface metal raceway: UL 5; sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. C. Size: As shown on Drawings. D. Finish: Field - applied matte enamel to match fmish of surface onto which applied. E. Fittings: UL 5; couplings, elbows, and connectors designed for use with raceway system. F. Boxes and Extension Rings: UL 5; designed for use with raceway systems. 2.12 MULTI - OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Miroflector Company, Inc. 2. Mono - Systems Inc. 3. The Wiremold Company. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Multi - outlet assembly: UL 5; sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as multi- outlet assembly. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Receptacles: Convenience receptacles mounted in cover, centered as shown on Drawings. E. Finish: Semi -gloss enamel, field applied to match finish upon which applied. F. Fittings: UL 5; couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors designed for use with multi - outlet system. 2.13 AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman Engineering Company. 2. Panduit Corporation. 3. Square D Company. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. General purpose type wireway, with knockouts and weepholes. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Cover: Screw applied cover with captive screws, chain cover retainer, and full gasketing. E. Fittings: Lay -in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws. F. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish. 2.14 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch knockouts. B. Cast Boxes: Shallow for column mounting (unless otherwise noted on plans), deep for other applications; hubless with 1/2 inch NPS threaded holes as required; gasketed cover. 2.15 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast -In -Place Concrete Floors: Fully adjustable, shallow, concrete - tight, cast iron with partitions or barriers in boxes for use with multiple services, threaded 3/4 inch NPS hubless conduit entrance (2 per compartment minimum). 2.16 POKE -THRU FLOOR BOXES A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Walker/RCI. 3. Steel City. B. Poke -Thru Boxes for Installation in Cast -In Place Concrete Floors. Fire -rated through floor service for power and data in one unit with partitions or barriers for use with multiple services. Dual sided service fitting head to be provided with 3/4 inch knockout holes. 2.17 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel with cover plate. B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches (300 mm) in any dimension: Hinged cover enclosures. C. Cast metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat - flanged, surface - mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight. Cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Provide traffic covers where applicable. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size as indicated on the Drawings; where size not shown, base on N.E.C. tables for conductors being installed. Use 3/4 inch trade size minimum for branch circuit home runs to panelboards, for conduits installed below grade and floor slabs. Minimum size for any conduit work is 1/2 inch trade size. B. Arrange conduit to maintain 8' -0" minimum headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Rack horizontal runs of exposed conduit in stockrooms and shipping/receiving area above bottom chord of bar joists. D. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. E. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues and heating appliances. Maintain minimum 2 inch clearance between conduit and bottom of roof deck. F. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using one -hole galvanized straps with clamp backs, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, bolted split stamped galvanized hangers, or UL listed hanger. G. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. H. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; ream and de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Provide a bushing on conduit stubbed out into accessible ceiling space. D. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. E. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes. F. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. G. Use hydraulic one -shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 1 -1/4 inch and larger. H. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. I. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. J. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. K. Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses building expansion or seismic joints. L. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls, provide pipe sleeve two sizes larger than conduit; seal opening around conduit with fire rated sealant. M. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed foundation walls or floors with water proofing, maintain water proofing at penetrations. Provide waterproofing materials compatible with the waterproofing system being installed on surface being penetrated. Sleeves required for conduits larger than 1". N. Where conduit penetrates foundation walls or floors with vapor barrier, maintain vapor barrier at penetrations. Provide vapor barrier materials compatible with the vapor barrier system being installed on surface being penetrated. Sleeves required for conduits larger than 1". O. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof membrane with flashing by roofing contractor. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET P. Do not cast conduit within floor slabs. Q. Apply a continuous even coat of corrosion resistant coating on metallic conduit in contact with soil. R. Tape wrap or bitumastic paint to coat rigid steel factory elbows for bends in rigid metallic conduit runs below grade longer than 100 feet or which have 3 or more bends within the first 100 feet. S. Wipe rigid non - metallic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for period recommended by the manufacturer. T. Provide backfill material in accordance with Section 31 2310 for conduit installed in soil. U. Seal conduits penetrating partitions separating spaces with more than a 30 °F temperature differential. V. Route conduits to minimize penetrations of cooler /freezer panels. 3.3 CONDUIT USES PERMITTED A. Branch Circuit or Feeder Installations Underground: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit. C. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Liquidtight flexible conduit in lengths not to exceed 18 inches. Liquidtight flexible conduit in lengths not to exceed 72 inches for equipment connections. D. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or rigid aluminum (2" trade size minimum) conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. E. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel where subject to physical damage and below five feet above floor in loading dock area; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. F. Connections subject to Vibration: 1. Dry Locations: Provide flexible metal conduit for connections to transformers, motors, emergency generator and other vibrating equipment. 2. Wet locations: Provide liquidtight flexible conduit. G. Food Service Beverage Line Chase: Schedule 40 plastic conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. H. MC Cable: Permitted in lieu of conduit and wire for concealed dry interior locations in accordance with Section 26 0519.3.3. (Where allowed by AHJ). 3.4 CONDUIT USES NOT PERMITTED A. Branch Circuit installations underground not permitted unless noted otherwise. 3.5 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY & MULTI - OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Use flat -head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. B. Use insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components with bonding jumper screwed to each section. 3.6 INSTALLATION - AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Support auxiliary gutter to wall using two -piece hangers. Install parallel and true to adjacent building lines. B. Secure hangers with screws through studs or with expansion anchors where applied to concrete or unit masonry walls. C. Maintain grounding continuity between gutter sections with bonding jumper fastened to each section. 3.7 INSTALLATION - POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES A. Refer to Drawings for location and installation requirements. RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) 3.8 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in Sales Floor fixtures with Owner's fixturing and electrical drawings prior to rough -in. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08 3100. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.9 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back -to -back in walls. Provide minimum 6 -inch separation. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box. E. Use multiple -gang boxes where two or more devices are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and similar fixtures. H. Position outlets with respect to luminaire locations shown on reflected ceiling plans. I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately position to surface finish. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall - mounted outlet boxes for switches and similar devices plumb and true with building lines. L. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations. M. Label cover of box with panelboard and circuit numbers located within the box. 3.10 FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION A. Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Plug boxes to prevent entrance of concrete. B. Use cast iron floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. 3.11 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. END OF SECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 0533 (16111/16112/16130) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0553 (16195) IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Conduit color coding. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 09 9100 - Painting. B. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. C. Section 26 0519 — Conductors and Cable. D. Section 26 2726 — Wiring Devices. E. Section 26 2913 - Motor Control. F. Section 26 2914 - Contactors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic white letters on a black background for equipment on normal utility power system; white letters on a red background for equipment on emergency or standby power system. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Tape: 3/4" wide vinyl adhesive backed marking tape, color as specified herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to dead -front barrier recessed panelboards in finished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 (16195) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Label box cover with the panelboard(s) name and circuit numbers contained within. 3.4 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.5 COLOR CODING A. Use colored tape to identify systems in conduit and outlet box interior as follows: System Designation Tape Color Fire Alarm Red Telephone Blue EPOS and Network Orange Security Yellow Television Distribution Green Temperature Control White 1. Install tape in 3 inch bands at each end of conduit. 2. Apply two stripes of tape within each outlet box for low voltage systems. B. Paint fire alarm system junction and pull box covers red. C. Conductor of branch circuits connected to the same system: conform to the following color code: Volts Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral 120/208 Black Red Blue White 277/480 Brown Orange Yellow Gray 3.6 DEVICE LABELING A. Label wiring devices with the panelboard's name and circuit number. 1. Install label on exterior of device cover plate. a. Exception: Install label on interior of device coverplate for weatherproof locations. 2. Use clear tape with black lettering. B. Label electrical devices for the TTS equipment listed below. Label shall include panelboard's name, circuit number and load served. 1. Control Room receptacles. 2. Voice/Data IDF receptacles. 3. Paging Amp receptacles. 4. TV Distribution Rack receptacle. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 (16195) 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0923 (16951) OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 0923 (16951) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OCCUPANCY SENSORS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 0923 (16951) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 0924 (16952) OCCUPANCY SENSORS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN TI-HS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Relocation of existing sensors. 2. Installation of Owner furnished sensors, brackets, power packs. 3. Include labor, materials, tools, appliances, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary to the installation of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. B. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. C. Section 26 0519 — Conductors and Cable. D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices. E. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL, `Building Materials Directory". 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate conditions of space utilization and irregular work hours and habits. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. B. Commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. C. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Submit operating instructions and manuals under provisions of Section 01 7700. 1. Lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. 2. Submit interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. 3. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 0924 (16952) - 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components shall be UL listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet state and local applicable code requirements. 1.8 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Proper adjustments to assure owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). 2. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic, use tables, installation conditions, and manufacturer's recommendations to finalize locations. a. Check with Engineer if another sensor type is required prior to ordering and installing. 3. Install additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. a. To order additional sensor equipment contact Target Purchasing at 1- 612 - 761 -1462. B. When installing brackets and power packs prior to the sensor installation, connect the red and blue low voltage wires (from the power pack) together to force "on" the power pack so that the fixtures operate until the sensors are available. C. The stockroom motion sensors control individual aisles or rows locally. D. Provide, at the site, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. 3.2 SETTINGS A. Sensor time delays and sensitivity are pre -set at the factory. 1. Adjust time delay from the preset 10 minutes to 16 minutes for non - partitioned employee restrooms. B. Upon completion of the installation, verify adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble -free occupancy- based lighting control system. END OF SECTION OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 0924 (16952) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2200 (16460) DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 2200 (16460) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 2200 (16460) - 2 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2201 (16461) DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of dry type two winding transformers. 2. Installation of Neon transformers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. B. Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes. C. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. D. Section 26 0529 - Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. G. Section 26 5500 - Neon Interior Signage. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Dry-type transformers shall be installed by Division 26 Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Review product data submitted under provisions of Section 01 3300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Store in a warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep out dust. C. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Protect units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow if handled in inclement weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set transformer plumb and level. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 262201 (16461) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Use flexible conduit, 2 ft minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. C. Use vibration isolating pads to isolate transformer from building structure. D. Install floor mounted transformers on 4" high concrete housekeeping pad. Secure to pad with expansion anchors, 1/2" diameter minimum, with 2 -1 /2" minimum embedment. E. Provide seismic restraints where required by local codes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. END OF SECTION DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 2201 (16461) - 2 1 i TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2416 (16470) PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 2416 (16470) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PANELBOARDS (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 2416 (16470) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2417 (16471) PANELBOARDS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of distribution panelboards. 2. Installation of lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards, including Powerlink controls. 3. Installation of fused switches, fuses and circuit breakers in existing panelboards. 4. Furnish and install fused switches, fuses and circuit breakers where panels are not Square D. 5. New panelboards shall be Square D, and are Owner furnished. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. B. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. E. Section 26 2914 - Contactors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Install panelboards of sizes and type, with overcurrent protective devices and contactors as scheduled on Drawings. B. Provide wiring and conduit associated with Powerlink and EMS controls, as indicated on the Drawings. C. Install fused disconnects, fuses and circuit breakers in existing equipment as shown on Drawings. Where existing equipment is Square D, Owner shall furnish fused disconnects and circuit breakers. Furnish fuses as shown on Drawings. D. Furnish and install fused disconnects, fuses and circuit breakers in existing equipment where equipment is not Square D. Match existing manufacturer and ratings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings and product data for equipment and component devices submitted under provisions of Section 01 3300. PANELBOARDS 26 2417 (16471) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish keys to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate wall construction for flush mount panelboards with other trades to ensure proper wall thickness and framing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Panelboard schedules are shown on Drawings. B. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. C. Height: 6' -6" to top of panelboard. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Indicate load types and areas served using Owner's room designations. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Stub 2 empty one inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard. G. Install Owner furnished handle ties for simultaneous disconnecting means of multiwire branch circuits per NEC 210.4. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 262417(16471) -2 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2726 (16141) WIRING DEVICES NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and box covers. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. FS W -C -596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. FS W -S -896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD 1 - General- Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific - Purpose Wiring Devices. E. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. F. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Wiring Devices. B. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. C. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Inc. D. Pass & Seymour, Inc. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000. 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches for Lighting Circuits: FS W -S -896; AC specification grade quiet snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts AC. Handle: Gray. B. Pilot Light Type: Clear lighted toggle. C. Keyed Switches: AC specification grade Cam -lock style rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts AC. WIRING DEVICES 262726(16141) -1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: FSW -C -596. B. Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5. C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA Type 5- 20R, gray face. D. Receptacles fed from panel LPE -1, Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, ivory plastic face. E. GFI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. F. Surge Suppression Receptacle: Duplex receptacle, NEMA Type 5 -20R, ivory in color. Meet UL 498 and UL 1449 Standards. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Satin finish stainless steel. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. C. Utility Cover Plate: Stamped galvanized steel. D. Surface mounted boxes in finished areas: Satin finish stainless steel to match box dimensions. 2.5 INTERIOR WEATHERPROOF ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. B. Weatherproof coverplates with polycarbonate lift cover. C. Seal -tite elastomer connector cover. 2.6 WALL DIMMER SWITCHES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lightolier 2. Lithonia Lighting 3. Lutron Electronics Co. Inc. 4. Prescolite, Inc. B. Solid- state, semi - conductor type capable of controlling lighting intensity over the complete range from off to full brightness with integral on/off switch. C. Load compatibility: Listed for control of type of lighting units used. D. Unit rating: 1900 watts, minimum, with each channel rated 600 watts, minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches 44 inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, center line dimension, grounding pole on bottom, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. Label panelboard and circuit number on front of plate. E. Install weatherproof plates where exposed to weather and otherwise as indicated. Label panelboard and circuit number on back of plate. WIRING DEVICES 262726(16141) -2 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) F. Install utility plates on surface mounted outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above accessible ceilings. Label panelboard and circuit number on plate. G. Align devices and covers plumb and true with building lines, flush with walls, frames, floors and ceilings. H. Device plates shall cover entire wall opening. I. SuperTarget: Provide weatherproof accessories for wall outlets and drop cords in the following areas: 1. Produce Prep. 2. Meat Prep. J. SuperTarget: Coordinate with Grocery Equipment Contractor. K. Do not use common neutrals for dimmer circuits. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 (16141) - 3 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK WIRING DEVICES 262726 (16141) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2727 (16180) ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections. 2. Electrical connections to Owner- supplied equipment. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: General requirements for Owner- supplied equipment. B. Owner will furnish line voltage thermostats for installation under this section, as specified in Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation. C. Section 26 0519 — Conductors and Cable. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 5 - Specific - Purpose Wiring Devices. B. UL, "Building Materials Directory". 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field verify equipment rating with manufacturer's nameplate data. Adjust feeds, fuses or overcurrent protectors as required to comply with code requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ILSCO. 2. Teledyne Penn - Union. 3. Burndy Corporation. B. Compression Type: Seamless, one - piece, copper; size for conductor applied to. C. Connections to Set Screw Lugs: Pin type compression fittings for use on conductor sizes #2 AWG and larger with barrels filled with conductive paste. 2.2 CRIMP -ON TERMINALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. 3M Company. 3. Thomas- Betts. B. Crimp on insulated for conductor ranging #14 through #10 AWG, flanged fork or ring tongue style. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 2727 (16180) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 2.3 CONNECTORS, SPLICES & TAPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. OZ Gedney. 3. ILSCO. 4. Burndy. B. Compression or setscrew type, insulating cover for use on conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller. C. Compression type or split bolt connectors with insulating covers for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger. 2.4 WIRE CONNECTORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries. 2. Ideal Industries. 3. 3M Company. B. Conical spring type with plastic or nylon insulating outer shell, color coded to denote wire size, for conductor sizes #14 through #10 AWG. C. Butt compression style insulating crimp splices for conductors smaller than #14 AWG. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Bus Connection: Use compression lugs, bolt to bus bars using cap screws, lock washers and nuts of material electrically compatible with bus, for connections to switchboard and main distribution panelboards only. B. Set Screw Lug Connection: Install pin type compression fitting of similar construction as compression lugs. C. Terminations to Motors: Use crimp -on connectors for motor terminations from stranded conductors and where terminal lugs are not provided at connection point. Use ring- tongue terminals wherever possible. D. Use crimping tool supplied by manufacturer of connector to install on conductor. Do not remove conductor strands or over -size terminators. Apply insulating tape over exposed conductor surfaces to 150% of the conductor insulating material. E. Strip conductor insulation as prescribed by the manufacturer of the terminator. Use conductive paste where required for dissimilar materials or as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Tighten connections to ensure maximum surface contact between terminals. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 2727 (16180) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2816 (16440) DISCONNECT SWITCHES (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION DISCONNECT SWITCHES (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 2816 (16440) = 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DISCONNECT SWITCHES (OWNER FURNISHED) 262816(16440) -2 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2817 (16441) DISCONNECT SWITCHES NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Disconnect switches. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 198C - High - Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Disconnect switches shall be installed by Division 26 Contractor. PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings and required by governing codes. Mount at 48" above finished floor unless noted otherwise. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262817(16441) -1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262817(16441) -2 TARGET MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2913 (16480) MOTOR CONTROL NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual motor starters. 2. Magnetic motor starters. 3. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. B. Section 23 7400 — Mechanical HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 3700 - Air Handling. D. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. E. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. F. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. G. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. B. NEMA ICS -6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and over current protective devices. C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01 3300. D. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 7700. E. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 6000. MOTOR CONTROL 26 2913 (16480) -1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS A. Allen Bradley. B. General Electric. C. Square D. D. Cutler - Hammer/Westinghouse. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000. 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. NEMA ICS 2; size M -O, single pole, AC general- purpose Class A manually operated non - reversing full - voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload relay, red pilot light, auxiliary contacts, and toggle operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general - purpose Class A manually operated, 1 or 2 pole, full- voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1B. 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general- purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Full Voltage Starting: Non - reversing type. C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings. E. Control Transformer: Integral with starter, providing 120 volt control power. F. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bi- metal. G. Control Device: Hand - Off -Auto selector switch, spring return to "OFF" from hand position. If indicated, provide "ON -OFF" push button, mounted in cover. H. Indicator Lights: Red jewel pilot light on cover, illuminated while motor is running I. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for interior use and Type 3R where subject to moisture or on building exterior. J. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure. K. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in contact. 2.4 FUSES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann. 2. Gould- Shawmutt. 3. Littelfuse. B. Fuses: UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one -time fuse, 600 volt or 250 volt as indicated on the Drawings. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 RMS amperes. MOTOR CONTROL 26 2913 (16480) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to motor and equipment schedule on Drawings for items requiring motor control equipment. B. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install fuses in fusible switches. D. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics. E. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage /phase rating. F. Provide nameplate on each starter indicating motor served. END OF SECTION MOTOR CONTROL 26 2913 (16480) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MOTOR CONTROL 26 2913 (16480) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 2914 (16485) CONTACTORS NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General purpose contactors. 2. Lighting contactors. 3. IEC contactors for HVAC control. 4. Enclosures. 5. Installation of Owner- supplied cabinet mounted contactors. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. B. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. C. Section 26 0529 - Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contactors shall be furnished by Owner or part of EMS vendor. B. Contactors shall be installed by Division 26 Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 3300. 1. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, and poles. B. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 01 3300. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED CONTACTORS 26 2914 (16485) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Owner's contactor cabinets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions where shown on drawings. Make 120 volt control connections and connect from load controlled (such as light fixtures) to load side of individual contactors and from branch circuit breakers to line side of individual contactor. B. Provide 120 volt control circuit to control coil of contactors for contactors in panelboards. C. Provide 3 wire, 120 volt connection between owner provided contactor cabinet control terminal blocks and panelboard contactor latch, unlatch and common terminals. 3.2 CONTACTOR SCHEDULE A. M shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION CONTACTORS 26 2914 (16485) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 3353 (16260) UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 3353 -1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNINTERRLJPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (OWNER FURNISHED) 26 3353 - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 3354 (16261) UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of UPS system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. B. Section 26 2727 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. C. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code. B. UL 1778 and CSA 22.2 (UL equivalent). C. IEC, Semiconductor Converter Standards. D. EMI compatibility: FCC Title 47, Part 15, Subpart B. E. IEEE C62. 41-1991. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Install UPS system as indicated on Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Review product data submitted under provisions of Section 01 3300. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Store in a warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep out dust. C. Protect units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow if handled in inclement weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3354 (16261) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Coordinate installation with OSR and manufacturer's service representative. C. Install all components of UPS system. D. Furnish and install all building power wiring to and from the unit. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify manufacturer's on -site quality control testing and adjustment. END OF SECTION UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3354 (16261) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 5100 (16511) LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 26. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) 265100(16511) =1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK LIGHTING FIXTURES (OWNER FURNISHED) 265100(16511) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10). SECTION 26 5101 (16512) LIGHTING FIXTURES NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner- supplied luminaires and accessories, including lamps and ballasts. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: Owner will furnish lighting fixtures as scheduled on Drawings for installation under this section. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. C. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings. D. Section 09 9100 — Painting. E. Section 23 0900 - Controls and Instrumentation. F. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. G. Section 26 0519 — Conductors and Cable. H. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Receive and store Owner Furnished equipment and protect against damage under provision of Section 01 6000. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in Owner - Furnished luminaires and lamp holders, and Contractor- supplied fixtures. B. Support surface - mounted luminaires directly from building structure, from ceiling grid T structure or provide auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling T's as required by fixture weight or size. Fasten to T using bolts, screws, rivets, or approved ceiling framing member clips. Verify T's will support fixture weight. Refer to Drawings for additional mounting requirements. C. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Fasten to T using bolts, screws, rivets, or approved ceiling framing member clips. Do not impair the lift -out feature of lay -in ceilings. Do not cut ceiling T's without specific permission from OSR. D. Where required hp UBC Seismic 1 B, BOCA /SBC Seismic Performance Category D or higher: Install ceiling support system rods or wires to each comer of each fixture, locate not more than 6 inches from the fixture comer. LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5101 (16512) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET E. 111D Luminaires: Provide safety chain between ballast and structure and between reflector and ballast for industrial type luminaires. Install shielding provided by manufacturer or where required by code or lamp manufacturer. 3.2 FIELD PAINTING A. Refer to Drawings for fixtures to be field painted according to requirements of Section 09 9100. 3.3 RELAMPING AND CLEANING A. Re -lamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. B. Touch up luminaire at completion of work. 3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. As shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES 265101 (16512) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 26 5500 (16515) NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Supply and Installation of Neon Unit Package including, but not limited to: high voltage side wiring from transformers to electrodes, neon tubes and connectors. 2. Supply of Neon transformers and boxes. B. Recycling of Existing Neon 1. The neon contractor is responsible for the proper removal and recycling of all existing neon and neon components that are scheduled to be removed. 2. Comply with all jurisdictions' requirements. 3. Provide a disposal manifest noting disposal company handling the neon and neon components from this project (with project name and address on invoice). Email this document to Construction .recycling @target.com and copy the General Contractor. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. B. Section 26 0519 — Conductors and Cable. C. Section 26 2201 — Dry Type Transformers Installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 2161, Neon Transformers and Power Supplies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 3300. B. Shop drawings to include: 1. Neon Units: List size and locations of attachment and overall dimension of each unit. Indicate color and method of attachment. 2. Neon transformer quantities. 3. Transformer load calculations. C. Substitutions: Substitutions require prior approval by Target Corporation's Manager - Electrical Engineering. 1.5 UNIT PRICES A. Submit unit price per lineal foot of conduit behind gypsum board finish from transformers to neon electrodes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The transformers indicated on the drawings are diagrammatical, furnish the quantity required for the neon fabricator's design. B. Coordinate quantity of transformers between the electrical contractor and neon fabricator. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 1 MR RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NEON MANUFACTURERS A. Owner has Pre - approved the following Neon Manufacturers with Contact: 1. Approved manufacturers are listed at the end of this section by National, Regional and State. 2. Also listed are approved Neon Installers who purchase the Neon from one of the approved manufacturers. 3. Manufacturers desiring approval must become Eurocom Platinum Vendor. The Certification requirements are attached. 4. Eurocom Platinum certification must be current at the time of manufacturing and installation of the product. 5. Eurocom contact: a. Eurocom, Inc, 1937 Westridge Drive, Irving TX, 75038. b. Sebastian Kautzor, (972) 791 -4401. c. Website: www.eurocom - inc.com d. Email: info @eurocom - inc.com. 2.2 NEON ACCENT LIGHTING MATERIALS A. Neon Tubing and Gas: Provide 15mm and lOmm where indicated on the Drawings. Tubing and gas colors as described below and where indicated on the Drawings: 1. Red Neon: The following manufacturer's are approved: a. EGL Accuwall Ruby Red Coated 15m (neon filled). b. FMS Corp. Brillite Ruby Red #BL98 (neon filled). c. TecnoLux Coated Ruby Red/Rosso No. 118 (neon filled). 2. Blue Neon: Acceptable manufacturer's: a. EGL Accuwall Bromo Blue Coated 15m (argon filled). b. FMS Corp. Brillite Bromo Blue #BL94 (argon/mercury or Eurocom H- gas/mercury filled). c. TecnoLux Coated Bromo Blue/BLU SCURO #16 (argon filled). 3. Green Neon: Acceptable manufacturers: a. EGL Accuwall Emerald Green Coated 15m (argon filled). b. FMS Corp. Brillite Emerald Green #BL92 (argon/mercury or Eurocom H- gas/mercury filled). c. TecnoLux Emerald No. 35 (argon filled). 4. Yellow Neon: Acceptable manufacturers: a. EGL Accuwall Noviol Gold Coated P -73 15m (argon filled). b. FMS Corp. Brillite Sunset Gold #BL97 (Eurocom H -gas filled). c. TecnoLux Gold #117 (argon filled). 5. White Neon (4K Tri- phosphor): Acceptable manufacturers: a. EGL 4100k (white) #33215CL 15m (argon/mercury filled). b. FMS Corp. BL 4100 TC white (argon/mercury filled). c. TecnoLux 4500k Tri- phosphor #25 (argon/mercury filled). B. Neon Tube Supports: 1. McMahon's #10T3 (glass) with wire ties. 2. Eurocom ACC -TS 175 -006. C. Electrical Service: 1. Provide 277 volt service for the 15mm neon units. 2. 120 volt service for the lOmm units. D. Transformer: 7500 volt maximum, Provide transformers contained in transformer box with disconnect in compliance with UL 2161. Provide open circuit protection. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Actown. b. Allanson. c. Advance. d. Jefferson/Magnetek. e. Transco. 2. 15mm neon: 277 volt 30 MA transformers. 3. lOmm neon: 120 volt 20 MA transformers. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) E. Neon Wire: FRNC silicone - compound insulated wire, copper conductor, 15,000 volt insulation, stranded conductor, white, GTO -15. UL 814 & 1581, NEMA WC3, ANSI/ASTM B3. 1. Eurocom ACC GTO P009 2. TecnoLux: GTO15 -W 3. Neon Powerpro — Powerflex (UL listed for installation without conduit). F. Electrodes: 1. 15mm Glass: 2. White color: Philips (Mercury- electrode containing no more than 19 mg per electrode) ELH 80R(P)75. a. Red color: Eurocom Euro -Brite ELE 8ORB(P)70. 3. EGL (T)15CL Advantage (8cc Prem). 4. lOmm Glass: Eurocom ELE 30RB55 & ELE 30RBP55 or (Mercury- electrode containing no more than 19 mg per electrode) ELH 30RB60 & ELH 3ORBP60. G. Neon Electrode Insulator, Gray color: 1. Diversified Components silicone "CAPS ", 103 -C -15; 15mm or equivalent for 10mm. 2. Eurocom: 15mm Glass: ACC - INS- 1GR15, lOmm Glass: ACC - INS- 1GR10. 3. Electro -bits, Quebec, Canada. 4. Masters Technology. H. UL Listed Connector Assemblies: If local authorities require UL listed neon connector assemblies, provide an additional break -out price for it. Acceptable UL connectors: 1. "P -K Housings ", Peterson P -K Industries, Berkeley, CA. 2. "G -WPS & Tubes ", Absko Products, San Diego, CA. 3. "Electro- bits ", Electro -bits of Quebec, Canada. 2.3 FABRICATION OF NEON A. Refer to attached Eurocom Platinum Certification Program. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install neon units centered, level and aligned at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and herein specified. B. Install tube supports 6 inches from each electrode and approximately 4 feet o.c. between. Provide approximately 1/4" spacing between ends of tubing units. C. Curves shall flow smoothly and continuously along the tubing length and across breaks. D. Install wiring from J -boxes to transformers in metal conduit. E. Conceal wiring from above ceiling mounted transformers to neon electrodes behind finish wall and install in listed flexible conduit (metal or nonmetallic). 1. Exception: Neon Powerpro: install as listed without conduit. F. Wiring connecting transformers to neon tubing units shall be as short as possible and insulated to prevent capacitance destructive to the cable and neon units. G. Exposed high tension cable from electrode to electrode shall be white with white sleeve. H. Mixing of different manufacturers of a particular neon color within each building will not be allowed. I. Clean and polish neon strips removing dust and dirt prior to energizing. J. Provide Transformer locations and neon wire lengths as recommended by Neon Fabricator. Maximum GTO cable length each side of a transformer to be 20 feet. K. Conform to applicable codes and ordinances. L. Provide adhesive backed 3/4" diameter ceiling identification markers at each neon transformer location. Markers shall be suitable for ink notation on purple colored faces. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 3.2 TESTING A. Load test each transformer to ensure amperage is 26 ma ± lma. Correct as required. 3.3 FORMS A. Pre - Approved Manufacturers List. B. Eurocom Certification Program. END OF SECTION NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PRE APPROVED NEON MANUFACTURERS NATIONAL MANUFACTURERS These national manufacturers are able to provide Neon manufacturing installation services throughout the U.S. They are listed by state only for convenience. CALIFORNIA Architectural Cathode Lighting 5301 Pacific Blvd. Huntington Park, CA Contact: Erich Zimmerman (213) 581 -8800 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) Ellis & Ellis 1111 Joellis Way, Sacramento, CA Contact: Rob Stark (916) 924 -1936 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) NSI- Architectural Cathode 225 South Loara Street, Anaheim, CA Contact: John Ortiz (714) 490 -5543 (Platinum/ Neon /Nationwide/Regional Installer) Pacific Neon 1576 Silica Ave, Sacramento, CA. Contact: John Gates (916) 927 -0527 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) Sign Resources/Plastilite 6135 District Blvd., Maywood, CA Contact: Mark Ledbetter (213) 771 -2098 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) COLORADO Morry's Neon 1330 Zuni Street, Denver, CO Contact: Glen Weseloh (303) 436 -1675 ( Platinum /Neon/National/Installer) FLORIDA International Sign & Design 10831 Canal St, Largo, FL. Contact: Chris Grimes (727) 541 -5573 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) GEORGIA Artografix 3655 James Dr, Acworth, GA Contact: Peter Horn (770) 529 -4450 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) INDIANA Atlas Sign Co. 3150 Rand Road, Indianapolis IN Contact: Danny (317) 484 -4620 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) Just Neon 922 South Beiger, Mishawaka, IN Contact: Tim (219) 255 -6366 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) MARYLAND Gable Sign & Graphic Inc. 7440 Fort Smallwood Rd, Baltimore, MD Contact: Jim Powell (410) 255 -6400 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) MICHIGAN Spectrum Neon 3750 East Outer Drive, Detroit, MI. Contact: John Haddad (313) 366 -7333 (Platinum/Neon/National) NEBRASKA Ace Sign Display. So. Sioux City, NE. Contact: Lee Umland (402) 494 -4555 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) Best Buy Signs 17401 Storage Rd, Omaha, NE Contact: Jim Paulson (402) 861 -0384 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) NEW JERSEY DVS Sign Systems 112 Connecticut, Burlington, NJ Contact Mario Santilli (800) 776 -7446 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET NEW YORK Pridesigns Inc. 2340 Brighton Hen. TI. Rd, Rochester, NY Contact: Craig Tesler (585) 427 -9050 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide/Installer) USA Sign. 172 East Industry Ct., Deer Park, NY 11729 Contact: Lynn Loader (631) 694 -9700 (Platinum/ Neon /Nationwide/R.egional Installer) PENNSYLVANIA Bunting Graphics Inc. 20 River Road, Verona, PA 15147 Contact: Terry Feiler (412) 820 -2200 ( Platinum /Neon/Nationwide /Installer) REGIONAL MANUFACTURERS These regional manufacturers are able to provide Neon manufacturing/installation services in regions of the U.S. They are listed by state only for convenience. ALABAMA Ocala Neon 179 Bob Hall Rd, Dothan, AL Contact: Brad Sanders (334) 702 -0656. (Platinum/Neon/Regional) ARIZONA Neon Night Scapes 1625 East Jefferson, Phoenix, AZ Contact: John Perry (602) 470 -0201 (Platinum/Neon/Regional) MICHIGAN MC Neon 11710 Lakeway Drive, Plainwell, MI Contact: Matt Cooper (616) 664 -5534 (Platinum/ Neon/Regional) Planet Neon 46593 Grand River, Novi, MI Contact: Jeff Kasper (248) 348 -8150 ( Platinum / Neon/Regional/Installer) MINNESOTA Signcrafters. 7775 Main Street, Fridley, MN Contact: Mike Lawrence (763) 571 -2995 ( Platinum / Neon/Regional/Installer) MISSOURI Warren Sign Company 2955 Arnold Tenbrook, Arnold, MO Contact: Dave Hester (636) 282 -1300 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Installer) NEW HAMPSHIRE Totally Tubular 802 Second Street, Manchester, NH Contact: Jeff P. Tuttle (603) 603 -1487 ( Platinum / Neon/Regional/Installer) NORTH DAKOTA Bacon Sign Co. 629 20th S.E. Ave, Minot, ND Contact: Bruce Bacon (701) 852 -0331 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Instal ler) Indigo Sign Works 1622 Main Ave, Fargo, ND Contact: Chris/Bernie (701) 297 -9696 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Installer) OHIO Harmon Sign Company 7844 W. Central Ave., Toledo, OH 43617 Contact: Dan Kasper (419) 841 -6656 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Installer) OREGON Ramsay Signs/Heath North -West 9160 SE 74th Street, Portland, OR Contact: Joe Gibson (503) 777 -4555 ( Platinum / Neon/Regional/Installer) PENNSYLVANIA City Sign Services 424 Caredean Drive, Horsham, PA Contact: Bob Wurz (215) 442 -1323 (Neon/Regional/Installer) NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 265500(16515) -6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SOUTH DAKOTA Persona 700 21st St SW, Watertown, SD Contact: Lyle Norton (605) 882 -2244 (Platinum/Neon/Regional) TENNESSEE Knoxville Neon. 6919 Neal Chase Way Lane, Knoxville, TN Contact: Rick Nipper (865) 925 -3499 ( Platinum/Neon/Regional) TEXAS Chandler Sign Co. 3201 Manor Way, Dallas, TX Contact: Graig Stevens (214) 902 -2000 ( Platinum /neon/Regional/Installer) Sparkle Signs. 7938 -A Wright Rd, Houston, TX Contact: Kathy (713) 856 -8500 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Installer) VIRGINIA Holiday Sign Company. 1800 Osborne Road, Chester, VA 23836 Contact: Henry Moore (804) 796 -9443 ( Platinum /Neon/Regional/Installer) CANADA Jim Pattison Sign Group. Scarborough, Ontario Contact: George Dybala (416) 759 -6796 (Platinum/Neon/Canada/Installer) LOCAL MANUFACTURERS These manufacturers are able to provide Neon manufacturing/installation services locally, usually within state listed. FLORIDA Sun Coast Neon Graphics Inc. Largo, FL Contact: Bud Mucha (727) 581 -0312 INDIANA Neon Signs Indianapolis, IN Contact: Rick Sebanic (317) 241 -2185 (317) 241 -2398 MICHIGAN Gardner Signs Inc. Troy, MI Contact: Scott Gardner (248) 289 -9100 Sign Art Kalamazoo, MI. Contact: Mike Williams (616) 381 -3012 INSTALLERS ONLY These installers are able to install the Neon after obtaining it from an approved manufacturer. They are listed by state only for convenience. Whether they install Nationwide, regionally or locally is indicated in their listing. ARIZONA Signs of The Times, Inc. 1801 N. 25th Drive, Phoenix, AZ. Contact: Gary Carnine (602) 743 -1840 (Regional/Installer) FLORIDA Bell Signs 1200 Bell Ave, Panama City, FL Contact: Gary Graves (800) 868 -0284 (Nationwide/Installer) MINNESOTA All -Brite Sign, Inc. 13325 Commerce Blvd Suite 3, Rogers, MN. Contact: Kevin Gillette (763) 428 -8969 (Regional/Installer) Electric Sign & Lighting 11328 Zane Ave N, Champlin, MN. Contact: Doug Humphrey (763) 421 -9623 (Regional/Installer) NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET NEW JERSEY MidAtlantic Technologies 9130B Pennsauken Hwy Pennsauken, NJ Contact: Bob Simone (856) 317 -9290 (Regional/Installer) 01-110 Century Sign Company. Cleveland, OH. Contact: Bill Kelleher (216) 642 -0044 (Installer) TENNESSEE A -1 Signs 1441 Hwy 96 PO Box 247 Dickson, TN 37056 Contact: Jack Cannon (727) 224 -8373 (National/Instal ler) NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) EUROCOM PLATINUM CERTIFICATION PROGRAM Standards for the production, installation and maintenance of neon and argon gas discharge tubing PROCESSING MATERIALS Glass Tubing 1. Special attention shall be paid that the tubing and electrode used will be of equivalent diameter. 2. Tubing shall be kept in closed boxes in a dry and dust free environment to avoid contamination by airborne particles and/or moisture. The cleanliness of the glass is of utmost importance to guarantee highest quality in the finished product. Electrodes 1. The level of mercury in a neon tube may not exceed 50mg. 2. No exposed mercury may be used in the neon shop in order to prevent potential contamination. 3. All electrodes used will require a carbon -based emitter coating. 4. The electrodes shall be stored in a clean and dry environment. The cleanliness of the electrodes is of utmost importance to guarantee highest quality in the finished product. Inert Filling Gas 1. The filling gas has to be composed a of consistent 75% neon, and 25% argon mix so as to provide optimal results at all temperature conditions. Transformers 1. All transformers shall be UL 2161 approved with a short circuit current relative to the tube diameter. The secondary Voltage is not to exceed 7500 Volts. 2. Standard operating load is between 82% and 85% of the actual short circuit current of the transformer for ideal results. A continuous ground wire must be connected to the grounding terminal on the transformer, not to the transformer box. PROCESSING EQUIPMENT All tubing shall be processed according to the following minimum standards: Manifold 1. Neon and mercury /cold weather gas units are to be manufactured in a contamination free method. It is recommended to use dedicated sides for neon and mercury/cold weather gas units. 2. A digital high vacuum gauge must be used. The gauge must be based on the Pirani electric principle. The gauge must be able to provide precise measurements up to 0.8 microns. 3. A digital pressure gauge that relies on piezoelectric principles to work must be used. The gauge shall cover a pressure range of 0.1 Torr up to 825 Torr. 4. The pumping system will be equipped with a back -stream filter and an automatic vent valve. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET Vacuum Pump 1. A two stage rotary vane Pump with minimum volume flow rate of 6.8 cubic liters per minute will be used. It will need to achieve a vacuum of 10- 4Torr. 2. A Turbo- molecular Pump with minimum volume flow rate of 33 liters per second to achieve, at least, one (1) millitorr /micron in the manifold in the normal evacuation stage shall be required. It will need to achieve a vacuum of 10- 8Torr. 3. Oil diffusion pumps are not permitted. Manifold Connections 1. Manifold connections to vacuum gauges, pump, inert gases and other accessories shall be based on the international KF flange with a VITON centering ring system. Bombarder /Choke 1. A bombarder with a minimum power of 22KVA/24,000Volt shall be used. PUMPING PROCEDURE 1. No tube will be less than 18" (eighteen inches) in length. 2. No tube will exceed 10' (ten feet) in length. 3. Any Tube over 6' (six feet) long will be pumped one at a time. 4. Any tubes shorter than 6' (six feet) may be pumped two (2) at a time. 5. To promote a good flow rate the maximum length of the 6mm tubulation will not exceed 6 inches. The use of compression fittings is strongly recommended as they permit achieving a higher vacuum and a cleaner unit. BURN IN PROCEDURE 1. 15MM tubes will be "burned in" for 2 to 4 hours on 30mA or 60mA ferro - magnetic style transformer and inspected before removal. 12mm or 13mm tubes will be "burned -in" on 30mA ferro - magnetic style transformer only. Tubing smaller than 12mm will be "burned -in" on a 20mA transformer or less. PROCESSING OF TUBING The processing of tubing will follow the three -stage process that is described in Annex I. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) ANNEX 1 BOMBARDING AND PUMPING PROCEDURE Bombarding and pumping procedure must be executed in three (3) steps WITH A CLOSED STOPCOCK, except for pressure adjustments: Stage I: Place Infrared- Sensor of the Thermo -gauge in the middle of the Glass unit to be pumped. Reduce pressure in manifold to 2 -3 Torr. Close stopcock, activate bombarder, and adjust current to approximately 3 times the electrode current rating. Monitor temperature until it reaches 150 degrees centigrade. Stage II: Reduce pressure in manifold to 2 -3 Torr. Increase current to between 3 -5 times electrode current ratings. Electrode shells must be prevented from reaching red color during the stage. If electrodes start changing color, reduce the current. Proceed to Stage III when temperature reaches 220 degrees centigrade. Stage III: Reduce pressure in manifold to 1 Torr. CLOSE STOPCOCK, increase current to 10 times electrode current rating, bring shells to cherry red color or maximum temperature of 300 to 310 degrees centigrade. Be careful not to over - process! Switch off bombarder, evacuate to 1 millitorr. Heat tubulation with hand torch to release trapped moisture. Backfill with appropriate gas when tubes reach 50 degrees'centigrade. FILLING PRESSURE TABLE Tube 0 H -Gas 100% Neon 8 16 18 10 12 14 12 10 12 13 10 12 15 8 10 16 8 10 18 7 9 Above pressures are in Torr at 50 degrees centigrade. To avoid premature failure of exceptionally short tubes (under 18 inches) an increase of at least 10% over the above pressures is recommended. NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) -11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET ANNEX 11 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE 1. The manifold shall be disassembled every 12 month for cleaning of accumulated debris. Stopcocks must be made of glass designed for high vacuum use (capable of withstanding 1 micron). The 60mm O -rings must be changed every 12 month 2. The interior of the system must be kept free of contamination from mercury vapor, oil vapor and moisture at all times. All filters shall be monitored and cleaned once every 6 month to insure best flow rate (achieving 1 micron in under 20 seconds) during evacuation. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE 1. All running cables within the building will be in a non - metallic conduit or in non - metallic tubing within the required metal conduit (UI. APPROVED TYPE) and will meet all corresponding requirements of local and National Electric Codes (NEC). Special attention will be given on the elimination of moisture and debris. All high- tension cables shall be UL approved silicone type or comparable. 2. All connections between units on the building shall be in a watertight electrode boot of appropriate dielectric strength using silicone GTO cable, in housing or porcelain d2 couplings. All installations will conform to local and national electric codes. PRODUCT INSTALLATION AND REPAIR 1. Damaged argon/mercury tubes will not be repaired/re - pumped. They must be completely replaced. The tubes to be replaced will be produced only by approved manufacturers with the required specified equipment and by employees with an adequate level of training relative to these guidelines. Any deviation from this specification would compromise the integrity of the corporate image and is, therefore, not permitted. 2. Clear glass NEON GAS filled tubes may be repaired and re- pumped if the interior of the inoperative tube has remained dry. The original electrodes must be replaced. END OF DOCUMENT NEON INTERIOR SIGNAGE 26 5500 (16515) - 12 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 27 0528 (16741) TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telephone raceway system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 31 2310 - Earthwork/Building Area: Excavation and backfill for utilities within building area. B. Section 09 9100 - Painting. C. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. D. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conduit, terminal boards, and outlets to form empty raceway system. B. Service entrance from 5 feet beyond exterior wall of building to terminal board. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Conduit: Refer to Section 26 0533. B. Backboards: Walls in room are plywood. Refer to Section 26 0529 for additional product requirements. C. Outlet Boxes, Pull and Junction Boxes, and Floor Boxes: Refer to Section 26 0533. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. For underground service entrance refer to Drawings, and to Section 31 2310 for earthwork. B. Coordinate telephone service with developer. C. Provide sealant in incoming telephone service conduit. Refer to Section 07 9200, sealant -5, silicone rubber. D. Place "TELEPHONE" label on pull and junction boxes. E. Provide pullwire in each telephone conduit run. F. Provide duplex receptacles in the telephone equipment room. Confirm location on jobsite prior to installation. Comply with installation requirements of Section 26 0529. G. Provide #6 AWG bare copper grounding conductor from effectively grounded building structural member to a ground bushing installed above floor slab on telephone service entrance conduit stub. END OF SECTION TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 27 0528 (16741) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 27 0528 (16741) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 27 4100 (16780) AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED) NOTE: THIS SECTION IS NOT PART OF DIVISION 27. THIS SECTION COVERS INFORMATION ON OWNER - FURNISHED CONTROL SYSTEM. END OF SECTION AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED) 27 4100 (16780) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED) 27 4100 (16780) - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 27 4101 (16781) AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM NOTE: THIS SECTION MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL ITEMS THAT APPEAR ON THE DRAWINGS, AND NOT ALL ITEMS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION MAY PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner furnished audio / video distribution system including the following equipment. a. Installation of Cables. b. Connections from TV's to audio /video distribution system. c. Installation and connection of LCD monitors. d. Installation and connections from speakers and volume controls to audio /video distribution system. e. Installation of TV Trac multi- outlet assembly. f. Installation of security sleeves and F terminators. g. Testing, Tuning of AudioNideo Distribution system. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes. B. Section 26 0529 — Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 — Identification for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0526 - Secondary Grounding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL, "Building Materials Directory". 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Voice/Data Low Voltage. Vendor shall install Owner furnished and Voice/Data Low Voltage Vendor furnished components to provide a complete audio /video distribution system. B. Provide an analog operating signal level of +22 dBmV over frequency range of 50 to 800 MHz at each wall plate tap location. C. Provide an analog operating signal level of +1 dBmV to +10 dBmV over frequency range of 50 to 800 MHz at each outlet on all TV Trac multi outlet assemblies. D. Radiation: The following maximum radiation limits, as measured with reference dipole, not to be exceeded on any portion of system, including location of amplifier, coupling and mixing networks, distribution wiring and terminal service locations: Frequency Change in MHz Radiation Limit Microvolts/Meter Test Distance Up to 54 20 30 ft. 54 - 108 20 10 ft. 108 -174 10 10 ft 174 -216 20 loft. 216 - 300 20 30 ft. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Installation subject to requirements of UL. AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 4101 (16781) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1.6 SUMITTALS A. Provide completed TV Wall Checklist to Brian.Trunk @target.com for review and approval. PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. RG -6 Coaxial Cable: 1. RG -6 shall be installed for runs of lengths less than 300 feet. 2. Compression style fittings only. Crimp fittings not allowed. 3. RG -6 Connector — Thomas & Betts Snap -N -Seal Compression F Connector for RG6 Quad Coax SNS6QS. Use manufacturer recommended compression tool. B. RG -11 Coaxial Cable: 1. RG -11 shall be installed for homerun from server to TV wall, regardless of length. 2. RG -11 shall be installed for runs of lengths 300 feet or greater. 3. RG -11 Connector — Aim Electronics Fi l Connector 25 -7191. Use 24-7711P Crimp Tool or crimp tool with .488" crimp die. C. Install wiring in conduit where cable is installed in walls, under floor slabs, store fixtures or above non - removable ceilings. D. Install coaxial cables from AudioNideo distribution system to wall plates on the TV wall and other locations shown on the drawings. Secure and terminate both ends of cable. E. Install TV Trac (multi- outlet assembly). Each TV Trac is provided with a coaxial cable. Refer to Drawings for quantity and locations. 1. Install TV Trac brackets on TV wall fixture. Install TV Trac Multi- Outlet Assembly on bracket. Refer to TV Wall Elevation for exact locations. 2. Connect the power cord to receptacle. 3. Connect TV Trac coax cable to "F" connector wall tap as shown on TV Wall Elevation. F. Install coaxial patch cables from TV Trac to TV for display. G. Install security sleeve on tap on TV Trac. Note: Security sleeves are not required on wall plate taps or splitter board taps. H. Install F terminators on every unused outlet in system. 1. Furnish security sleeve tool to Store, Tie wrap security sleeve tool to control room rack #5. J. Install speakers and volume controls and Voice/Data Low Voltage Vendor furnished speaker wire as shown on drawings. K. Install LCD monitors at rear of gondola as shown on drawings. L. Install component cable from AudioNideo distribution system to AudioNideo cover plate. Conceal cable and cover plate in fixture. M. Install patch cable from AudioNideo cover plate to LCD monitor. Provide final connections. N. Install labeling on splitter board, coaxial homeruns and corresponding wall plates as follows: 1. TV Wall Display = TV -1, TV -2, TV -3 etc. 2. Entertainment Display = TVEnt -1 3. Kids Display = TVK -1 3.2 TESTING, TUNING, AND ADJUSTMENT A. Attach a field strength meter to the Tap on the TV wall. Minimum acceptable value is +22 dBmV, analog CH3. AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 4101 (16781) - 2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) B. After connection of the TV Trac, Test each tap outlet of each TV Trac to verify signal strength is a minimum of +2 dBmV analog CH3. C. Record test results on the TV Wall Checklist provided. Provide approved copy of TV Wall checklist in sheet protector. Post record results at back wall of rack #5 in Control Room. D. TV sets located at TV Wall, Tune to cable channel 3 (TVN Core Guest "A" TV'S). E. TV set located at TV Wall with HDTV tuners, Tune to cable, channel 14 -1 (TVN Core Guest "A" TV'S). F. LCD monitor located in Entertainment, set to HD/DVD component video input (TVN Entertainment Core `B" LCD monitor). G. LCD monitors located in Entertainment, set to HD/DVD component video input (TVN Entertainment Children's "C" LCD monitor). H. Prior to store turn over, verify AudioNideo system is operating as specified. Review the approved TV Wall Checklist with the OSR. END OF SECTION AUDIONIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 4101 (16781) - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK AUDIO/VIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 274101 (16781) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECURE CHANNEL AT EAC- END TO TOP CHORD OF BAR JOIST AT PANEL POINT WITH CHANNE_ CLIP & SET SCR =W T"FICAL. SECTION 27 9900 ELECTRICAL DETAILS EAR JOIST 1 1 /2•X 1 1 /2' X 12 GA STEEL CHANNEL 'NIIH 1 J2'0 HOLES ON 1 -1 /CENTER ATTACH THREADED RODS TO CHANNFI 'R /5FI F HOl L7IN CHANNEL NUTS AN) fOu3LE AUT5 AND WASHERS EAR JOIST CONDUITS CONDUIT HANGER DETAIL (PLAN VIEW) NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET N 21\ CONDUIT HANGER SECTION NOTES: A. MOUNT ASSCM3L? AS H CH AS P055 BLE, BJT MAINTAIN MIT A' BELOW HOOF DECK. DO NO1 INTFRFFRF PIWDRK OF 0TFFR - RADES, DL0CK AIR DIST, F RE PROM: -ION OUTLETS OR LICH1 FIX -LRES. R, DO NCT FX F =D 100 1 RS PFR POINT LOAD AT TOP CHORD CF JOIST DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUIT FROM WEB OF ,.LIST CHANNEL PIPE STRAP S 2E AS REQUIRED MAXIMUM OF " CONDU - {S; ARE ALLOWED IC) BE A ACHED 10 JOIST KOTTOM CHORD. FS11 NOT TO SCALC ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2799001) -2 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) NOTES: A. DU NOI EXCEED 10C LEIS PEH POINT LOAD AT TOP CHORD OF JC15T SECJRE THREADED ROO WITH SELF HOLDING CHANNEL NUT. SIZ= AS R=OWRED CONTINU)US THRC &D :D ROG -3 /B'fi MINIMUM, S12E AS RLCUIRLD FR NOT R SUPPORT CF Ct7NCUIT F�CU WFR CF JdIST • 11 ll HANGER LOAL) SUPPORT SECTION MAXIMUM OF 1' CONCHA ICS) ARE ALLOWED TO BE AT -ACHEf Ti) JCIST BOTTOM CHCRD. NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 3 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET 1 NOT =S: A. MOUNT TRAPE2E ASS_NBLY AS FM-1 AS P055 BLE, BLT MAINTAIN MIN 2' BEL041 ROOF DECK. no NOT INTERFERE WIWORK OF OTHER TRADES. BLOCK AIR DISTRIBJTION, FIRE 'ROTECTIOP OUTLETS OR UC-IT FIXTURES. B FANG FRCVI TOP CHORD PANE_ POINT OF BAR JOIST. DO NOT EXCEED 100 LM PER POINT L040 AT TCP CFORD OF :JOIST C. MAXIMUM OF 1' C3NDUIT1S) ARE A__O*ED TO BE ATTACHED TO J,)IST OCT -ON CHORD. SFCIJRF CHANN =1 AT FACH FFD TO TOP CFORD OF BAR .,QIST AT 'ANEL POINT 411CHANNE_ CLIP AND SCT SCPE i HANGING LOAD SUPPORT DETAI_ DO NOT SUPPCRT CONIAT FROM WEB OF JOIS I 1 1/7' X '-1/9' X 1? GA S TFFI CHANNEL %TF 1/2'i+ 30L1 -O_ES ON 1 -1/2' CEN -ERS CHANNEL PIPE STRAP SIZE AS REQUIRED NOT TC) SCALE ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 99001) - 4 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) NEON MOUNTING STAND DETAIL PLASTI: MUUNTING STAN] SPACED 4` -0' OC AND 6' FROM EACH END, SECURE TO FIXTURE 'N!%? X 8 HEx SCREriS NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 5 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET CLEAR PLASTIC THREADED NECN GTO BUSHING WI-H CAP 2 WIRE TO NON TUBE TERMINATOR E5 .11 NEON IUBE NEM TuO= SuPPCRT ELEc -RODE NSJLATOR (LIS -ED CLASS CuP OR BOOT) G I C WIFIE IOU IED THRU(JCH WA I CAVI _ v TO NEON TRAISFCRMER NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 99001) 6 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) F._ECRODE INSULATOR EXPLODED AKONO1vMETRIC OF NEON TUBE TO GTO I I NF NOT TO SCCI.E ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 7 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET MUL I CONDUC 1 014 'WE MC CABLE. 5IANUARL) SIHUI CHANNEL WITH TYPE MC SALT; L E CLAMP. GENERAL NO -ES: A. TYPE MC CABLE ASSEMBLY SuFORT IS REOJIP,ED -OR MC CABLE LXIT NC EDC AND ENTERING SALES FLOOR. B, MAX MUM CF T Did TYPE. CAB_ =f51 ARE AI I OWED TO RF AT TAC.HFD 10 JOIST SPAN 601TOM CHCRD, C. 00 NOT RLN ANY TYRE OF CABLE BETWEEN THE TOP CHORD OF T-iE BAR JOIST AND THE METAL DECKING. TYPE MC CABLE SUPPORT DETAIL S-11 IRE CHANNFI AT FACH END TO TOP CHORD OF BAR ,KIST AT PANEL P0INT ■IITN C- IANNEL CLI' & S :T S: RCM. TYPICAL. UO NO SU #'3141 IY -E MC CAB_E5 FROM WEE OF JC 5 MOUNT TYPF NC "ARIF ASSFMRI Y AS it GH AS POSSIBLE. AI NT AIN MIN rt' BELOW I/0OF O=CK. GO NOT iNTCRF[RC N' 4TORK OF 0T1-ER TRADES, B_OtR AIR OISRIBUTI0n, FIRL PROTEG-ICN UUTLL -S OR LIGHT FIX IUHES. TYPF 'iC CARI FS CAN 3F 51.PPORTFD CN JOIS FLANGE OR -OP CF BOTTOM CHORD :REFER TO GENE ?AL NOTES] TYPE b1L CABLES ALLOWED TO UL SJPPORTLC FROM NOT TOM CHCRO CF JOIST (REFER TO GENERAL NOTES) PARALLEL & PERPENDICULAR I,QT TL? SCP_E ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 99001) - 8 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECURE CHA NNE _ NT C&CH :ND TO TOP CHORD OF BAR ,.0IST AT PANEL POINT WITH CHANNEL CLIP & SEI SCREW. I Y- ICAL. TYPE MC CABLE ASSEMBLY �• AS HI &H AS POSSIBLE. MAINTAIN DROVIOF 5, IJPPORT F' -0' or: GENERAL NOTES: A. B. YPE MC CABLE ASSEMBLY SUPPORT IS REOUIREO FOR MC CABLE Ex TING EDC AND ENTERING SALES FLCOR. MARIMUN OF r DIA TYPE MC CABLES] ARE ALLOWED -0 BE ATTACHED TO JOIST SPAN GOT -OM CHORD. C. GO NOT RUN AN~ TYPE 0= CABLE B =1W EN HE UP CAM) L) OF I HE BAR JUISI ANL I HE MEIAL L'ECKING. TYPE MC CABLE SUPPORT DETAIL MIR !' BELOW ROOF DECK. DO NOT INTER =ERE •n' :YORK OF OTHER TRADES. BLOCK AIR DISTRIBLTION, fIR= PROT =CTIOM CU -LETS OR LII;�T FIXTURES. MULTI CCVI]JCTOR -YPE %AC CABLE DO NOT SUPPORT YPE MC CABLES FROM 4E6 OF JOIST STANDARD STRUT CHANNEL WITH TYP= MC SADDLE CLAN. I YPE WC CABLES AHE ALLt)WEI1 TO BE SUPPORTED FROM 301T0M CHORD OF JOIST LRFF=R -0 GENERAL NOTES) PARALLEL JOIST NOT Tfl !7,CA1 F ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 9 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET -YPICAL SALES FLOOR GONDOLA POWER POLE ROUTE WRING BETHEEV POHER PULL AND RCPT IN 1/2' 1 L L x CONCUIT, CONCEALED 1-FIN STORE FI]STLRE. NU1 10 5LALt ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 99001) - 10 TARGET MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) PO_E SU'PORT ELAN' OR T -RAR HANt;FR MAN,.FACTURED WIRING SYSTEM CABLE S=T E1 -0 J -BOX MOUNTED ON OLDC COLUMN CEILING SYSTEM 1-BARS FOR S, 21x4' TILES S POII E R /COMMUNICATION P(1_E NC Ann!TIONAL P1IRI NG REQ TYP POWER/COMM POLE INSTALLATION CEILING TRIM PLATEI- -BAR CLAMP FLWIRED LC_�T.9CL= MOUNT P01 F ON STOP= FIKTIJRF OR Fl OOR AS REQUIRED. NOT TO SCAI F ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 9900 - 11 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET POWER POLE CONNECTIONS/ANCHOR FACTORY INSTALLED RCP - P01YHR PCI CJVDDLCTORS SELF TAPPING SCREWS 5A)DI = $I RAP GONDOLA OR D S'_AY =1x -LRE ANCHCR SAIJJ_E SWAP 10 FIXTJRE WITH MACHIN= SCREWS CABLE CONNLLTOR 1/2' FLEXIB_E CONDUIT TO AP'LICABLE DEVICE INSTALL ONLY IF ADDITIONAL WIR Kr, 15 RFQUIRF) NOT To 5CAJ F END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL DETAILS 27 99001) - 12 TARGET STORES MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) SECTION 31 2333 (02220) TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes excavation, trenching and backfill required for the underground utility systems. All work shall be in accordance with these specifications, and if they also exist governing local Standard Utilities Specifications. B. Related Items: 1. Section 03 0130 - Concrete Repair Work for slabs that must be repaired due to this Section. 2. Section 03 3000 — Cast -in -Place Concrete for concrete mix design. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Trench excavation and backfilling work for this Section shall include cutting and removal of existing concrete slabs for trenching procedures. Trench excavation and backfilling will be for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the OSR and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum of 48- hours' notice to the OSR and receive written `notice to proceed' before interrupting any utility. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM): 1. ASTM D2940 - "Graded Aggregate Material For Bases or Subbases." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide acceptable borrow soil materials from off -site when sufficient acceptable soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: 1. Existing Fill Material removed during trenching procedure is acceptable for backfilling. 2. Off -Site Borrow Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, meeting the grading requirements for base material. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: 1. Existing Fill Material removed during trenching procedure is not acceptable for backfilling if it contains rock or gravel larger than 1 -1/2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. D. Bedding Material: Clean sand with 100 percent passing a 3/8 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 31 2333 (02220) - 1 MR_RS MASTER SPECIFICATION - (MR2010_10) TARGET STORES 3.2 PREPARATION A. Slab Removal: Identify trench locations and mark slab for removal. Remove slab at trench locations by saw cutting or other approved method. Control all by- products of the cutting process (i.e. water, dust, noise, etc.), so as not to harm surrounding surfaces and the Owners normal operations. Verify proposed slab removal method with OSR before beginning work. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation to top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance of each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches above the top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 6" to 9" each side of pipe or conduit, or as indicated on plan. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, and flat - bottomed multiple -duct conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms; support pipe and conduit on undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 3.4 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by OSR. 3.5 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on rock or other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Concrete backfill trenches that project below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. Concrete to match footing concrete requirements, per Section 03 3000. C. Place and compact initial backfill with satisfactory soil material or off -site borrow material, free of particles larger than 1 inch , to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil materials to final subgrade. 3.6 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers used for trench material compacting. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to required elevations of each lift. Compact each layer as fully before placing subsequent lifts. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 31 2333 (02220) - 2 • Joanna Spencer - Re: backflow testing Page 1 of 1 From: Joanna Spencer To: Todd Reedy Date: 04/27/2011 3:15 PM Subject: Re: backflow testing Thank you Todd. Joanna >>> Todd Reedy 04/27/2011 3:12 PM >>> Hi Joanna, We have not received any test reports for the fire DCDA at Bed Bath &Beyond property. Regarding Target at 301 Strander: -No RPBA installed for premise isolation. - Fireline DCVA is current. - Irrigation DCVA is overdue. Last test was 6/09. -There is an RPBA inside for CO2 beverage machine that failed the last test in 6/09 and never received a follow - up. Let us know if there are any more questions, Todd 1°1RMANENT FILE COPY DIO 1"7 file: / /C: \Documents and Settings \joanna.TUKWILA \Local Settings \Temp\XPgrpwise \4D... 04/29/2011 M U LVAN NY • • G2 D E S I G N A T WORK Jaimie Reavis — Assistant Planner City of Tukwila = Planning 6300 South Center Blvd, St 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Re: T -0627 South Center Target 301 Strander Blvd Tukwila, WA 98188 Plan Review # D10 -317 Subject: Plan Review Response Dear Ms. Reavis: Please find below our response to plan review comments dated 12/15/10. Please find the original comment followed by our response in bold. 1. The design of this building was approved through design review. The changes in the design of the building exterior will require you to apply for a minor modification to the approved design review, per Tukwila Municipal Code section 18.60.030 (E). The minor modification must be reviewed and approved by the Department of Community Development prior to issuance of the building permit. Response: The minor modification has been approved with conditions by Moira Bradshaw. See attached letter for reference. Conditions include painting of all metal grill work the same color has been provided on sheet A201. The large roof units have been relocated to comply with the roof screening requirements which have been included on sheets G002, A140, S141, R141, R411, R611 & E221. 2. Please include a sight distance diagram as a revision to the building permit, to illustrate how the proposed rooftop equipment will be screened from view. Response: The minor modification has been approved with conditions by Moira Bradshaw. See revisions made to sheets G002 for sight distance diagram. Should you require any additional information regarding this matter, please contact me at 971 - 998 -1451. Sincerely, David Contreras 1 Associate 1 MulvannyG2 Architecture 1 971.998.1451 CORRECTION LTR# 1J 503.223.8030 503.223.8381 RECEIVED APR 21 2011 PERMIT CENTER 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 I PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com tu x MULVANNY • • G2 DESIGN AT WORK Joanna Spenser — Development Engineer City of Tukwila — Public Works 6300 South Center Blvd, St 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Re: T -0627 South Center Target 301 Strander Blvd Tukwila, WA 98188 Plan Review # D10 -317 Subject: Plan Review Response Dear Ms. Spencer: Please find below our response to plan review comments dated 11/29/10. Please find the original comment followed by our response in bold. A. Domestic Water A reduced Pressure Principle Assembly (RPPA), previously called a Reduced Pressure Backtlow Assembly (RPBA), shall be installed immediately downstream of the existing permanent water meter. Installation at another location requires the Public Works Director's approval. The RPPA shall be installed in a Hot Box/Hot Rock or equal freeze protection enclosed anchored to a minimum 4" thick concrete pad. Public Works strongly recommends a power supply be provided for the freeze protection enclosure. On your site plan, please show the property line(s) , street names, North arrow, building location and size of existing permanent water meter and proposed RPPA. Show manufacturer name and back flow mode number. Submit RPPA cut sheet. There is an existing %" RPPA for a carbonated beverage dispenser that is not current on its annual testing requirements (last tested May 2008). Please have a backflow tested and submit passing test results to Public Works ASAP. Response: These revisions shall be included in a separate permit. 8. Fire Prevention The existing 8" Detector Double Check Valve Assembly (DDCVA) located inside the building is not current on its annual testing requirement (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test results to Public Works. Response: These revisions shall be included in a separate permit. CORRECTION 503.223.8030 503.223.8381 RECEIVED APR 212011 PERMIT CENTER 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 I PORTLAND. OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com boo- 311 • • C. Landscape Irrigation The existing 2" Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) is past due for an annual test report (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test result to Public Works ASAP. Response: These revisions shall be included in a separate permit. Should you require any additional information regarding this matter, please contact me at 971 - 998 -1451. Sincerely, David Contreras I Associate I MulvannyG2 Architecture 1 971.998.1451 v. a April 14, 2011 • City of Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director David Contreras MulvannyG2 Architects 601 SW Second Avenue, Suite 1200 Portland Oregon 97204 Subject: Target Minor Modifications (File L11 -013) Original file Tukwila Pond Design Review (File 88- 12 -DR) Dear David: Thank you for the minor modification application and Sheet G002 depicting the proposed changes associated with the current project. Based upon the plans and information submitted in connection with your request for minor modification of the Board of Architectural Review (BAR) approval, I hereby approve the proposed changes subject to some additional conditions listed at the end of this letter. BACKGROUND The BAR approved on January 11 1989, the Tukwila Pond project subject to conditions. In 2002, the City approved a minor modification requested by Target that included painting the decorative grid work and the addition of a metal canopy and new precast column covers at the entryway. The City received your request for a second minor modification to the approved design on February 28, 2011. COMPARISON OF THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS TO THE ORIGINAL APPROVED DESIGN 1. Site Plan There are no significant changes to the site layout. Minor changes to the loading area in the southwest corner of the building are proposed to accommodate a new trash compactor. See further discussion below. 2. Building Design a) Architectural Design Quality and Relationship to Surroundings There are no major changes in the overall architectural quality of the building's design, thREDEIVED detail, the building form or the building's siting. CORRECTION LT biLO*b APR 21 2011 31 � PERbNTCENTER 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax 206 -431 -3665 b) Materials and Colors: Painting the steel decorative elements in a lighter color would be appropriate given that the proposal more closely matches the color of this element throughout the rest of the project. In addition to painting the steel structure over the main entry the metal decorative work over the columned pilasters along the east facade should also occur. c.) Exterior Fixtures, Standards, and Accessories The significant element of the proposal relating to this criterion is the removal of top tier steel structure over the building's public entrance. The original design review file and the 2002 minor modification, at which time a similar request was made regarding the steel decorative motif, have been reviewed. The metal grid and framework and in particular the pyramidal shape is a unifying decorative element of the center as well as of the Target building that continues along three of its sides. The current design proposal includes the addition of two spherical concrete bollards painted red adjacent to the entry. These bollards are not a significant change to the overall design scheme. This is a minor new element that is being proposed that will not detract from the existing materials, colors or decorative themes. 3. Landscaping There are no landscaping changes proposed. 4. Miscellaneous Structures Overall the design of the miscellaneous structures and site furnishings shall be consistent with the architectural concept and the landscape design. The original application states that: "All mechanical equipment will be screened. Garbage dumpsters will be screened or hidden within the building structure." A tour of the site shows that no rooftop mechanical equipment is viewable from the adjacent streets or from the subject site. New rooftop mechanical equipment is proposed. The applicant has relocated the largest of the units to a more central location and according to the dimensions shown on the plan, the equipment is one foot eight inches taller than the rooftop parapet. The current rooftop mechanical equipment is six inches taller than the rooftop parapet. Cross sections and visual studies have been done from the north side of the adjacent street — Strander Bl. and from the development's parking lot, indicating that the equipment is not likely to be seen although given the scale of the drawings it is difficult to positively confirm. See sheet G002? The original project stated that all rooftop equipment would be screened. The applicant also proposes enlarging and modifying the trash compactor, adding bollards, and modifying the compactor's opening/connection on the west facade in the loading dock. There is no other area in the loading dock that is used for recycled materials. The City of Tukwila has a requirement that all commercial buildings provide recycling storage space (18.52.080 Tukwila Municipal Code). The collection point shall be located in a manner so that hauling ricc Page of 3 3 • trucks do not obstruct pedestrian or vehicles on site. If Target is expanding and modifying its trash collection then recycling should be brought up to code. DECISION The proposed revisions to the approved design are considered minor modifications as permitted under 18.60.030 (E). This request for minor modification to the BAR approved design is approved subject to the following conditions. 1. Prior to the issuance of the building permit the applicant shall revise the drawings to show retention of the grid work over the entrance. 2. Prior to the issuance of the building permit the applicant shall provide a site plan that shows compliance with recycling space standard (TMC 18.52.080.) 3. The applicant shall be responsible for ensuring the rooftop mechanical equipment is screened from the public view per the visual study (Sheet G002) APPEAL PROCESS This decision is a Type 1 decision that may be appealed to the City's Hearing Examiner. The Permit Application Types and Procedures chapter of the City's Zoning Code, Classification of Project Permit Applications section (18104.010(B), outlines the authorization and process for appeal. If you have any questions, you can contact Moira Bradshaw at 206 - 431 -3651. Sincerely, ack Pace Director Community Development H:\target\Target minor modification Decision.doc Page 3 of 3 04 -01 -2011 • City of Tukwila • Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director DAVID CONTRERAS 601 SW 2 AV - SUITE 1200 PORTLAND WA 97204 RE: Permit Application No. D10 -317 301 STRANDER BL TUKW Dear Permit Applicant: In reviewing our current application files, it appears that your permit applied for on 11/19/2010, has not been issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and /or National Electrical Code every permit application not issued within 180 days from the date of application shall expire and become null and void. Your permit application will expire on 05/18/2011. If you still plan to pursue your project, a written request for extension of your application must be submitted to the Permit Center at least seven (7) days before it is due to expire. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your permit application. If it is determined that an extension is granted, your application will be extended for an addtional 90 days from the expiration date and you will be notified by mail. In the event that we do not receive your written request for extension or request was denied, your permit application will expire, become null and void and your project will require a new permit application, plans and specifications, and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File: Permit File No. DI0 -317 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 sue. Z. �, Ct1 Department of Community Development 2 �.YS4Ix °�.. • 1 Jim Haggerton, Mayor December 17, 2010 David Contreras Mulvanny G2 Architecture 601 SW 2nd Av — Suite 1200 Portland, OR 97204 RE: Correction Letter #1 Development Permit Application Number D10 -317 Target Store — 301 Strander BI Jack Pace, Director Dear Mr. Contreras, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Planning and Public Works Departments. At this time the Building and Fire Departments have no comments. Planning Department: Jaimie Reavis at 206 431 -3659 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Public Works Department: Joanna Spencer at 206 431 -2440 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, 4C4^L' Bill Rambo Permit Technician encl File No. D10 -317 W:\Permit Center\Correction Letters \2010\D10-317 Correction Letter #1.DOC 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 0 Tukwila, Washington 98188 0 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 0 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 • • PLANNING DIVISION COMMENTS DATE: December 15, 2010 APPLICANT: David Contreras — MulvannyG2 Architecture RE: D10 -317 ADDRESS: 301 Strander Blvd (parcel #262304 -9005) Please review the following comments listed below and submit your revisions accordingly. 1. The design of this building was approved through design review. The changes in the design of the building exterior will require you to apply for a minor modification to the approved design review, per Tukwila Municipal Code section 18.60.030 (E). The minor modification must be reviewed and approved by the Department of Community Development prior to issuance of the building permit. 2. Please include a sight distance diagram as a revision to the building permit, to illustrate how the proposed rooftop equipment will be screened from view. If you have any questions on additional information requested, Jaimie Reavis is the planner assigned to the file and can be reached at 206 - 431 -3659. • • PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT COMMENTS www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Development Guidelines and Design and Construction Standards DATE: December 1, 2010 PROJECT: Target Store T -0627 REVIEW #: 1 PERMIT NO: D10-317 PLAN REVIEWER: Contact Joanna Spencer at (206) 431 -2440 if you have any questions regarding the following comments. 1) In accordance with Washington State Department of Health guidelines for Group A Public Water Systems, Public Works has implemented a cross - connection control program to protect the public water system from contamination via cross - connection. Since the project includes alterations to the existing plumbing system, the entire plumbing system must be brought up to the current standards as set forth in the Uniform Plumbing Code including installation of an approved backflow prevention on the fire line and the domestic water supply to the building. The City has determined that the subject building has deficiencies on domestic water service and landscape irrigation. a) Domestic Water Service A Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly (RPPA), previously called a Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly (RPBA), shall be installed immediately downstream of the existing 2" permanent water meter. Installation at another location requires the Public Works Director's approval. The RPPA shall be installed in a Hot Box/Rock or equal freeze protection enclosure anchored to a minimum 4" thick concrete pad. Public Woks strongly recommends a power supply for the freeze protection enclosure. Please specify on your plan backflow size, manufacturer, and model number and submit a cut sheet of the proposed device. b) Fire Prevention The existing 8" Detector Double Check valve Assembly (DDCVA) located inside the building is not current on its annual testing requirement (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test results to Public Works ASAP. c) Landscape Irrigation The existing landscape irrigation Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) is not current on the required annual testing (last tested in May 2008). Please have the DCVA tested by a certified tester and submit passing test results to Public Works as soon as possible. A separate letter addressing backflow deficiencies was mailed to Target Corporation on November 30, 2010. I have enclosed Development Bulletin C5 which spells out design and installation requirements for cross connection control. The Public Works Director will withhold issuance of this Tenant Improvement permit until the backflow issues for domestic water, fire prevention and irrigation are resolved or the Permit Center receives plans for items 1a and all the backflow test reports. Applicant can post a bond for items a), b) and c) in the amount equal to 150% of the design, installation, and testing cost of subject devices, together with a letter stating the installation by a certain date. (W:PW Eng/other /Joanna Spencer /Comments 1 D10 -317 PW) • City of Tukwila Department of Public Works November 29, 2010 Target Corporation P.O. Box 9456 Minneapolis, MN 55440 RE: Target Store T -0627 Tenant Improvement 301 Strander Blvd., Tukwila WA Permit No. D10 -317 To Whom It May Concern: Jim Haggerton, Mayor Bob Giberson, P.E., Director PERMANENT FILE COPY In accordance with Washington State Department of Health guidelines for Group A Public Water Systems, Public Works has implemented a cross - connection control program to protect the public water system from contamination via cross - connection. Since the project includes alterations to the existing plumbing system, the entire plumbing system must be brought up to the current standards as set forth in the Uniform Plumbing Code, including installation of an approved backflow prevention on the fire line and the domestic water supply to the building. The City has determined that the subject building has deficiencies on the domestic water, fire prevention, and landscape irrigation lines. a) Domestic Water A Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly (RPPA), previously called a Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly (RPBA), shall be installed immediately downstream of the existing permanent water meter. Installation at another location requires the Public Works Director's approval. The RPPA shall be installed in a Hot Box/Hot Rock or equal freeze protection enclosure anchored to a minimum 4" thick concrete pad. Public Works strongly recommends a power supply be provided for the freeze protection enclosure. On your site plan, please show the property line(s), street name, North arrow, building location, and size of existing permanent water meter and proposed RPPA. Show manufacturer name and backflow model number. Submit RPPA cut sheet. There is an existing 1/2" RPPA for a carbonated beverage dispenser that is not current on its annual testing requirements (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test results to Public Works ASAP. b) Fire Prevention The existing 8" Detector Double Check Valve Assembly (DDCVA) located inside the building is not current on its annual testing requirement (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test results to Public Works ASAP. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 433 -0179 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 • 1 Target Corporation Page 2 November 29, 2010 c) Landscape Irrigation The existing 2" Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) is past due for an annual test report (last tested in May 2008). Please have the backflow tested and submit passing test result to Public Works ASAP. I have enclosed Development Bulletins C5 and A9, which spells out design and installation requirements for cross connection control. The Public Works Director will withhold issuance of the Target Tenant Improvement permit until the Permit Center receives plans for installation and test results of subject backflows devices or a bond for items a, b, and c. If you opt to install, you may install under a separate permit or under a revision to this Tenant Improvement permit application. If you opt to install under the Tenant Improvement permit, you must supply the installation plans consisting of a schematic that clearly shows the location of the proposed RPPA in relationship to the property line(s), building perimeter and existing domestic water meter together with a construction cost estimate to the Permit Center as a revision to the Tenant Improvement permit application. Backflow installation will trigger a Public Works Type C Construction Permit, which has a progressive fee. For a Type C permit, Public Works collects a base application and plan review fee ($250.00 plus 2.5% of construction cost for RPPA installation and backflow testing) when the application or revision to this TI is submitted. An additional 2.5% of subject construction cost will be assessed at the time of permit issuance. If you opt to bond for the installation, you must provide the following to the Permit Center: 1) an original design and installation estimate, 2) a bond for 150% of the design and installation cost, and a letter stating your intent to install the backflow by a certain date. This must be done before the Permit Center issues the permit. I have enclosed Public Works Bulletins Al and A2 to help you. Please call Mike Cusick, Public Works Senior Water and Sewer Engineer at (206) 431 -2441 if you have any questions. Sincerely, J nna Spencer Development Engineer JS:lw enclosures: Public Works Bulletins #A -1, A -2, A -9 and C5 Permit Application cc: David Contreres (W:PW Eng/Other /Joanna Spencer /Letter Target Corp 112910) • • ppa.- maw— mama Elva INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL' November 17, 2010 Re: Target Store T -0627 Dear Local Building Official, I am pleased to inform you that the International Code Council has reviewed these drawings for Target Corporation and has provided appropriate notes and comments regarding code compliance, to aid in your review process. This pre - permit application review is part of a project that provides review by ICC plans examination staff to provide valuable information to you as the local code official having jurisdiction. We would value your input on this program and would like to get your feedback on how your review process was affected. Approval of the drawings and permit application, of course, rests with you, the code official as the authority having jurisdiction. Phillip Grankowski, Senior Technical Staff, (888- 422 - 7233), has performed the plan review and would be happy to answer any questions you may have. Also as your Government Relations contact, I can be reached at 888 - 422 -7233, ext. 7603, or by email at kstevenson@iccsafe.org Sincerely, Kraig Stevenson International Code Council Senior Regional Manager State and Local Government Relations Washington Field Office 2122 112th Ave., NE, Suite B -100 Bellevue, WA 98004 Toll Free - 888 - 422 -7233 Ext. 7603 btO 317 RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERM CENTER October 8, 2009 •Building Official Building Department Project: Target Store — 2010 Merchandise Remodel Building Department: INTERWEST C O N S U L T I N G G R O U P Interwest Consulting Group has performed a plan review of the following listed documents which represent a typical merchandize remodeling project planned for existing Target stores. 1. Plans: T -1033 Target Store, 2001 Merchandise Remodel, dated September 28, 2009, Sheets 0001, AD111 through A702, S111 and S141, PM01 and PM02, PD01, P351 through P431, MD01 and M111, RD01 through R621, E001 through E711. T -1033 Target Store, Structural Fixture Package, dated September 28, 2009, Sheets G001, SR11, SR51, SR52, SR53, AD -1 and AD2 for Kysor Panel Unit 1 and AD -1 and AD -2 for Kysor Panel Unit 2. T -1033 Target Store, Hazardous Materials High Piled Package, dated September 11, 2009, Sheets G001, F911 and F921. 2. Project Manual: Project Manual, dated July 28, 2009, by Mulvanny G2 Architecture. 3. Structural Calculations: Sales Floor and Stock Room Structural Fixture Calculations, dated July 28, 2009, by Target Property Development, by Target, Gerald Schwientek. Structural Calculations for Remodel, dated July 28, 2009, by Ericksen Roed & Associates Consulting Engineers. The basis of the review is the following codes: The 2007 California Building Code, 2007 California Mechanical Code, 2007 California Plumbing Code, 2007 California Electrical Code, and 2007 California Energy Code. The project consists of the remodel of an existing store for a new line of merchandise. There are no modifications to the main building structural system and no increase in the area of the building. The scope of work includes installation of freezer /cooler fixtures at the sales floor and installation of freezer /cooler storage units in the back stockrooms. The scope further includes architectural work for support of the modifications and remodel of finishes, the addition of rooftop condensing units, the replacement of an existing trash compactor with a new unit, new shelving and racks, and associated plumbing, mechanical and electrical work. Our review of the above referenced documents indicates that the project is in general conformance with the above codes. However, please note that field verification of site specific conditions such as site accessibility requirements and unique building conditions will need to be provided to address individual projects. We believe that through Target's and Interwest Consulting Group's mutual effort, the plans provide additional information that may streamline your review and permit process. Sincerely, INTERWEST CONSULTING GROUP Norman Hong Architect Senior Plan Review Architect n h /cs h 6280 W. Las Positas Blvd., Suite 220 — Pleasanton, California 94588 Tel: 925.462.1114 Fax: 925.462.1115 Curtis S. Hume, SE Structural Engineer Senior Plan Review Engineer tIO 3i7 RECF9r. NOV 19 ;1E1....1 PERMIT CANT E • :_ • TARGET Date: 10.05.2009 Dear Local Building Official, Target Corporation is in the process of remodeling a number of our stores throughout the United States. We are introducing a new "department that will expand our food offering. There will be minor architectural changes as well as supporting mechanical and electrical changes within the existing store footprint. We are partnering with the International Code Council and state and local jurisdictions across the country to streamline the document review process as we develop plans and apply for building permits. A primary part of this initiative is the release and publication of a "standard" document set to permitting authorities at the state level. This state level review establishes the datum by which all other projects can be judged. Local jurisdictions can then concentrate on the variations that are specific to the Target store in their municipality /governing area. These variations may include the overall scope of work, responses to specific site conditions and compliance with local codes and ordinances over and above the state codes. The attached package includes a certified tenant improvement set of documents. This package includes: Architectural and Engineering Contract Documents, a Seismic Racking Plan and Kysor Freezer /Cooler Panel Plans with supporting calculations, a Hazardous Material Plan and a High Pile Plan with supporting calculations. We are also including a letter detailing the findings of the state's review, a letter from CALBO and a letter from your regional ICC representative further explaining our partnership. I would also like to extend my services and aid in the event you have any questions or concerns. I look forward to partnering with you as we move forward with this process, and please don't hesitate to contact me if you have any questions. Respectfully submitted, SIl Steven Wolf, AIA Proi,e °:c C'c ; el ✓ r i�r l Prr.de•_, I. • 317 Target Corporation, 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403 RECE VED NOV 1.9 2010 PERMIT CENTER CA narrative Letter.doc • • TARGET Date: 08.21.2009 California Building Officials (CALBO) Mr. Stephen Kiefer, President Building Official Livermore, CA Dear Mr. Kiefer, The building design industry is globalizing. Advances in communication and technology are making building design a non -stop 24 hour process. The construction industry is demanding accurate results more quickly and efficiently. Companies that operate on a national level are seeking consistent direction from jurisdictional authorities as they expand their offerings to multiple states and municipalities. The regulatory industry must keep pace with this continued streamlining and advancement. The adoption of the International Codes offer an opportunity by which jurisdictional authorities across the country could gain some added efficiency. Replicable buildings are reviewed repeatedly by neighboring jurisdictions within the same state. The implementation of a review at the state level would potentially eliminate the waste of resources this repetitive local review requires. Plans would still be analyzed at a local level to check for compliance with local municipal codes, but the state level codes would have been satisfied at a state level review. By coupling a more "global" state level review with a local review of unique jurisdictional requirements, replicable buildings utilizing this new system can be constructed more consistently and cost efficiently. While the statewide adoption of the International Codes establishes consistent code provisions for local jurisdictions to enforce, individual interpretation by local authorities often dilutes the goal of consistent enforcement. The adoption of a state level review system would provide added expertise to the local jurisdiction and thus the amount of individual interpretation would be reduced. The system of replicable building review would operate similarly to the current system of code compliance evaluation reports which assure the compliance of particular products. In this case, however, the review would cover an entire building instead of a single product. Like evaluation reports, replicable building design reviews have the potential to produce more thorough and uniform results. This process will greatly enhance the consistency of code application for replicable buildings, and support consistent enforcement of statewide codes while maintaining local jurisdiction authority. Ultimately this process will enhance public safety through a more uniform review process and will conserve resources through the elimination of repetitive reviews on "transportable" plans. Respectfully submitted, Steven Wolf, AIA Txge1 Prop: 1? y Senior Project 612-7(71 1270 tO3I7 Target Corporation, 1000 Nicollet Mall, Minneapolis, MN 55403 EC Fr NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CE1TE CA scope letter.doc »> Todd Reedy 01/04/2010 8:43 AM »> Hi Joanna, A site inspection at 301 Tukwila Parkway revealed: - The 2" domestic meter is located in the fire vault. It needs to be moved into a city approved meter box • located in the right -of -way. • - An RPBA needs to be installed downstream of the domestic meter prior to the irrigation connection. -The 8" DCDA for fireline is not current (last tested 11/08). -The 1.5" DCVA for irrigation is not current (last tested 11/08). -There is no Storz adapter on private hydrant at west entrance to property. Let us know if there are any other questions concerning the water service. Thanks, Todd »> Joanna Spencer 12/31/2009 2:33 PM Todd, Are they current on their backflows. Thanks, joanna & Happy New Year »> PERi'. ANENT FILE COPY D1or7 • I WM • PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -317 PROJECT NAME: TARGET SITE ADDRESS: 301 STRANDER BL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 DATE: 04 -21 -11 Response to Incomplete Letter # _ Revision # After Permit Issued DEPAR M NT : ul ding I sgion A 4rel Fire Prevention Structural 04.21 4 Planning Division Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 04 -26 -11 Complete Incomplete ❑ Not Applicable ❑ Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: No further Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved n Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 05-24-11 Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents /routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • • PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D10 -317 PROJECT NAME: TARGET SITE ADDRESS: 301 STRANDER BL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # DATE: 11 -19 -10 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: c L� i g 'vision ll� u s rks Q( Otto " Structural n oftv,JJ Planning Division Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 11-23-10 Complete Incomplete Not Applicable n Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required n No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 12 -21 -10 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: 11-1 .7— ( 0 Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping PW Staff Initials: w & \ Documents /routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Li/ a l ! L1 Plan Check/Permit Number: 0 ` 17 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # JResponse to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ,1 Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Project Address: Contact Person: 1 1-A aJ-c r v (.1 D j :1 vet Summary of Revision: 'j-2 e -3w0 kreSedvrs Phone Number: q7I - 9 ? " j S I CITY OFTUKWIiA APR 2120111 'EhlMr* CENTER Sheet Number(s): b-a) ?, ,4' i u 0, 4 2.0) ,*(-(1 l ,Z I N) 1Z 1-/) t 0(.0 Il i i 2 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including , i of rev: - Received at the City of Tukwila Perms itt Center by: 'Entered in Permits Plus on t. 1 H:\Applications\Porms- Applications On Lme\2010 Applications \7 -2010 - Revision Submittal.doc Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: 7 -2010 Ul King County Department of Natural Resources and Parks Wastewater Treatment Division 40-s1-7 Non- Residential Sewer Use Certification • To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or change of use of existing connections. • This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing sewer connections within five years of disconnect. Please Print or Type • 317 1 N— a eC-- • party str ,drer ' City J State ZIP c -Z'rGC � r , t ce7— Own4r'Is Name Subdivision Name Lot # Subdiv. # Block # s^, Building Name 1uil (it applicabre) Owner's Phone Number (with Area Code) Property Contact Phone Number (with Area Code) Owner's Mailing Address l POO (4)/- dI , twits, l� L 5-C-4i 3 For King County Use Only Account # No. of RCEs Monthly Rate Property Tax ID # /7-,LQ t Z' ' L .52d .j Party to be Billed (if different from owner) City or Sewer District 1 v j Date of Connection Side Sewer Permit # Please report any demolitions of pre - existing building on this property. Credit for a demolition may be given under some circumstances. Demolition of pre- existing building? ❑ Yes ❑ No Was building on Sanitary Sewer? ❑ Yes ❑ No Was Sewer connected before 2/1/90? ❑ Yes ❑ No Sewer disconnect date: Type of building demolished? Request to apply demolition credit to multiple buildings? ❑ Yes ❑ No 1a A. Fixture Units Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units Kind of Fixture Fixture Units No. of Fixtures Total Fixture Units Public Private Public Private Bathtub and Shower 4 4 Shower, per head 2 2 Dishwasher 2 2 Drinking fountain (each head) 1 .5 Hose bibb (interior) 2.5 2.5 Clotheswasher or laundry tub 4 2 Sink, bar or lavatory 2 1 Sink, Clinic flushing 8 8 Sink, kitchen 3 2 Sink, other (service) 3 1.5 3 Sink, wash fountain, circle spray 4 3 Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF 5 2 Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF 6 2 Urinal, waterless 0 0 Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF 6 3 Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF 8 4 Total Fxture Units Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE) 20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE Total No. of Fixture Units __ 20 s- RCE B. Other Wastewater Flow (in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A) Type of Facility /Process: Estimated Wastewater Discharge: Gallons /days Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE): 187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE Total Discharge (gal /day) _ 187 C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents: (add A & B) A B r •11 s RCE yam NOV 1 9 2010 RCE .. °f AM. T ' :t \57r r Pursuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge. The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. All future billi . . - can be prepaid at a discounted amount. Questions regarding the capacity charge or thi . . should • - referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 206 - 684 -1740. I certify that the information given is rstand that the capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any deviation will require resubmission n •rre t= ,�•ata for determination of a revised capacity charge. r Signature of Owner /Representat -: = %'� L� r � .' r•4 Date 11 /14 I Print Name of Owner /Representative 1058 (Rev. 9/07) 2(5 White — Kina County Yellow — Local Sewer Aaencv Pink — Sewer Customer Contractors or Tradespeople Printer Friendly Page Page 1 of 2 • 1 General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name SKANSKA USA BUILDING INC UBI No. 602134999 Phone 9737533500 Status Active Address 1633 Littleton Road License No. SKANSUB985RT Suite /Apt. License Type Construction Contractor City Parsippany Effective Date 12/30/2002 State NJ Expiration Date 1/12/2013 Zip 07054 Suspend Date County Out Of State Specialty 1 General Business Type Corporation Specialty 2 Unused Parent Company Other Associated Licenses License Name Type Specialty 1 Specialty 2 Effective Date Expiration Date Status SKANSCN912KQ SKANSKA CIVL NW /SKNSK BLDG JV Construction Contractor General Unused 5/18/2009 5/18/2013 Active BAUGHC0103D2CONSTRUCTION BAUGH OREGON INC Construction Contractor General Unused 3/22/1990 9/20/2003 Archived BAUGHS1987MR BAUGH SKANSKA INC Construction Contractor General Unused 7/19/2002 7/19/2004 Re Licensed Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date CORPORATION SERVICE CO Agent 12/30/2002 Amount FLEMMING, WILLIAM KEITH President 01/01/2009 GL0489601804 KENNEDY, RICHARD A Secretary 12/19/2006 HADEN, CLOVIS CLAY Secretary 01/18/2011 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO SINICIN, LEONID Vice President 01/01/2009 KARLSTROM, JOHAN E President 12/19/2006 01/01/2009 EK, CONNY S A Vice President 12/19/2006 01/01/2009 HEALY, MICHAEL President 12/30/2002 12/19/2006 CARSON, ELIZABETH Secretary 12/30/2002 12/19/2006 PHILLIPS, BRETT Vice President 12/30/2002 12/19/2006 Bond Information Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 1 TRAVELERS CAS Et SURETY CO 103904724 12/12/2002 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 12/30/2002 Assignment of Savings Information No records found for the previous 6 year period Insurance Information Insurance Company Name Policy Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Amount Received Date 8 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO GL0489601804 08/31/2010 08/31/2011 $2,000,000.0009 /02/2010 7 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO GL0489601804 08/31/2009 08/31/2010 $2,000,000.00 08/27/2009 https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Print.aspx 05/06/2011 BUILDING CODE INFO SITE ZONING C -P FIRE ZONE OR DISTRICT TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY DESIGN CATEGORY °D" BUILDING OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION M BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TYPE 2 -N (EXISTING - UNCHANGED) BUILDING ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA ALLOWED: UNLIMITED (FULLY SPRINKLERED) ACTUAL BUILDING AREA: 113,588 SF AFFECTED AREA OF WORK: 10,436 SF BUILDING ALLOWABLE HEIGHT 55' -0" MAX BUILDING CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS ACCESSIBILITY CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS 2003 ICC /ANSI A117.1 MECHANICAL CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS PLUMBING CODE 2009 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS FIRE / LIFE SAFETY CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS ELECTRICAL CODE 2008 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMMENDMENTS ENERGY/ GAS 2006 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE HEALTH / FOOD SERVICE SEATTLE & KING COUNTY PUBLIC HEALTH 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 ICC REVIEW LETTER 11.8.10 Re: T-0627 T I et Store, 'Tint, i . To who it may concern, T 0 7 TARGET STORE 2011 MERCHANDISE I am pleased to inform you that the International Code Co cil has reviewed these dra - ngs for Target Corporation and has provided appiropriate notes and comments regarding code compliance, to aid in your review process_ This pre-permit application .review i part of a. project that provides review by ICC plans examination staff to provide valuable information to you as the local code official having _jurisdiction_ We would value your iput on this program and would like to get }cur feedback on how your review process was affected. Approval of the drawings and permit application, of course, rests vith you, the code official as the authority having jurisdiction- Phillip Grankowski_ Senior Technical Staff (88 -422 -733), has performed the plan review and would be happy to answer any questions you may have. Also as your Goverment Relations contact., I can be reached at 888-422-7233, a t_ 7603, or by evil at kstevenson iccsafe.org Sincerely, Kraig Stevenson International Code Counc Senior Regional Manager State and Local Government Relations Washington Field Office 2122 112u' Ave_, NE, Suite B -100 Bellevue, WA 98004 Toll Free 888 -122 -7233 Ext 7603 REMODEL VICINITY MAP OCATION MAP REMODEL SCOPE OF WORK A. PROJECT SCOPE IS LIMITED TO THE INSTALLATION OF FREEZER AND COOLER FIXTURES ON THE EXISTING SALES FLOOR AT THE MARKET AREA AS WELL AS THE INSTALLATION OF A FREEZER /COOLER STORAGE UNIT IN THE BACK STOCKROOM. SCOPE INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF ROOFTOP CONDENSING UNITS AND ASSOCIATED PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. ARCHITECTURAL WORK IS LIMITED TO MINOR DEMOLITION AND REPAIR /REPLACEMENT OF FINISHES. THE EXISTING OCCUPANCY_, AY THE (COMPLETED AND K. CRESS ARE NOT C. EXISTING BUILDING IS FULLY SPRINKLERED. ANY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLERS AFFECTED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION WILL BE ADJUSTED TO MEET REQUIREMENTS. EXISTING COMPACTOR AND ASSOCIATED ITEMS TO BE REPLACED WITH NEW SELF CONTAINED COMPACTOR. THE ALARMS, ELECTRICAL, FIRE SUPPRESSION AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS FOR THE NEW COMPACTOR HAVE BEEN REVISED. DEFERRED SUBMITTAL DEFERRED SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT -OR ENGINEER -OF- RECORD, WHO SHALL REVIEW THEM AND FORWARD THEM TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL WITH A NOTATION THAT THEY HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND HAVE BEEN FOUND TO BE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN OF THE BUILDING OR STRUCTURE. THE DEERRED ITEMS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL THEIR DESIGN AND SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL A. FIRE SPRINKLER ALTERATION PLANS. 1111111111111111.. „. 601 SW SECOND AVENUE 1 SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2com 1 t 503.2218030 1 f 503223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South _ Center R \ActiveCAD \0627a0 1.dgn QUALITY ASSURANCE REVIEW REVIEWED BY: JIM VAN LANEN REVIEWERS PHONE: 503.419.1597 DATE: 11.2.10 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED � MAY 0 5 2011 City kwila BUILDIN ;VISION DI„�rC�l crnG.� I PROJECT TEAM ARCHITECTURAL: DAVID CONTRERAS MULVANNYG2 ARCHITECTURE 601 SW SECOND AVE SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 97204 P: 971.998.1451 RICHARD PESKE, DPM TARGET CORPORATION 50 S. 10TH STREET SUITE 400, TP3 -1165 MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55403 P: 612.761.1588 F: 612.761.3322 STRUCTURAL: NIMESH PARIKH MYERS HOUGHTON & PARTNERS 4500 E. PACIFIC COAST HWY. SUITE 100 LONG BEACH, CA 90804 P: 562.985.3200 MECHANICAL: DOUG SCOTT HARGIS ENGINEERS, INC 600 STEWART ST. SUITE 1000 SEATTLE, WA 98101 P: 206.436.0427 REFRIGERATION: TONY YTUARTE CTA ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS 1185 GROVE ST. BOISE, ID 83702 P: 208.343.3531 ELECTRICAL: CHARLIE MUSSER HARGIS ENGINEERS, INC 600 STEWART ST. SUITE 1000 SEATTLE, WA 98101 P: 206.859.5382 PLANNING APPROVED No changes can be made to these plans without approval from the Planning Division of DCD Approved By: Date: SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: ❑ Mechanical ❑ Electrical ❑ Plumbing ❑ Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION -4 ma clve-itn REVISIONS No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Buliding. Division. NOTE Revisions require a new plan subm and may include atonal plan review fees, DRAFTING SYMBOLS A001DISCIPLINE /SHEET NUMBER + EL= 100' -0' 9A CIRCULATION 108 X T/O EL= 116' -0° FIRE GRID LINE AND BUBBLE. DETAIL /SECTION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER PLAN /DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER SPOT ELEVATION OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM KEY NOTE GENERAL G001 PROJECT INFORMATION Pot (,401/41A(i6 gthPY ARCHITECTURAL AD111 DEMOLITION PLAN A111 FLOOR PLAN A121 FLOOR COVERING, WALL FINISH & BLOCKING PLAN A131 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A140 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SIDEWALK PLAN & DETAILS A331 INVESTIGATION CENTER PLAN A332 INVESTIGATION CENTER FINISH & BLOCKING PLANS A351 BACKROOM PLANS A352 FREEZER /COOLER DETAILS A355 COOLER & FREEZER PLANS A362 COMPACTOR PLAN & DETAILS A501 INTERIOR DETAILS A601 SCHEDULES &. DETAILS A701 SALES FLOOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A702 ENLARGED ELEVATIONS & FINISH PLANS STRUCTURAL ROOM NAME / ROOM NUMBER (ROOM NAME DOES NOT APPEAR S111 WITH ROOM NUMBER IN ALL CASES) S141 OPENING NUMBER PARTITION TYPE WINDOW TYPE OPENINGS IN ROOF /WALL /FLOOR ELEVATION MARKER BASED OFF FINISHED FLOOR (DATA 100' -0 ") CENTER LINE F911 HIGH PILED STOCK F921 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS STRUCTURAL FIXTURE SR11 STRUCTURAL FIXTURE SR51 STRUCTURAL DETAILS NOTES SR52 STRUCTURAL DETAILS GENERAL NOTES SR53 STRUCTURAL DETAILS & GENERAL NOTES PLAN & ANCHORAGE OF & ANCHORAGE OF & ANCHORAGE OF FREEZER- COOLERS cQ T Q I PALLET RACK & GENERAL LT DUTY SHELVING & SALES FLOOR GONDOLAS GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES, PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN & DETAILS PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS PLUMBING, HVAC, FIRE PROTECTION AND REFRIGERATION PM01 MECHANICAL INDEX AND DETAILS PM02 PLUMBING & MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND RISER DIAGRAMS PD01 PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLANS P351 STOCK ROOM PLUMBING PLANS P411 CONDENSATE VACUUM PLANS P421 CONDENSATE VACUUM DETAILS P431 CONDENSATE VACUUM DETAILS M111 MARKET AREA HVAC DEMO AND NEW WORK PLANS M331 OFFICE AREA HVAC DEMO AND NEW WORK PLANS Fill FIRE PROTECTION PLAN RD01 REFRIGERATION DEMOLITION PLAN R111 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PLAN R141 REFRIGERATION ROOF PLAN R401 MARKET CASES SETTING PLAN R411 MARKET & PARTIAL ROOF PIPING PLANS R421 WALK -IN COOLER & FREEZER PIPING PLAN R501 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R511 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R521 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R601 REFRIGERATION SCHEDULES R611 REMS CONTROL WIRING PLAN & SCHEDULES R621 MARKET & WALK -IN CONTROL WIRING PLANS ELECTRICAL E001 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST & ONE -LINE DIAGRAM ED01 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN E111 LIGHTING PLAN E121 SPECIALTY LIGHTING PLAN E211 POWER & SYSTEMS PLANS E221 ROOF POWER PLAN E331 INVESTIGATION CENTER LIGHTING, POWER & SYSTEMS PLANS E381 ELECTRONICS & ENTERTAINMENT POWER & SYSTEMS PLANS E385 DESTINATION BEAUTY POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN E401 MARKET AREA POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN E511 DETAILS & WIRING DIAGRAMS E601 SCHEDULES E931 SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY INITIATING & SIGNALING DEVICE PLAN E932 INVESTIGATION CENTER ACCESS CONTROL & INTRUSION PLAN TVS1 CCTV PLAN FILE COPY INVESTIGATION CENTER Q Penmit No., V'h Plan review approval is sum to mars and omisic . Approval of con�n documents does not authorize the viio!atian of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt of approved Frd Cow and ns is acknowledgFd: BY Dat. s/bh 00 MY VP aty Oflidcwita BUILDING DIVISION - -�— -- 4 - -� - -1 II 1 `--4----.4------- 1 �- 1 - I- -- - -[ - - - - -- ------ 1- ---- --1- -- 1 - - - ---- 1 - - --- ▪ -- 1 1 1 - - — 1 - -- 1 I I I D- EMU- -RL -4N - - - - 4 - -- I I I - SAL -E� -- I F-L0OR COVERING( L 1 1 I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 M ARK LT, I , [�10 -317 DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08-010 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 07:56 b e o @ KEY PLAN 0 I 0 0 0 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-010 TITLE PROJECT PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL INFORMATION -RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMI i CE Eta SHEET G001 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA EXISTING FRONT ELEVATION I I EXIST BULLSEYE '& TARGET LETTERS 1 1 EXIST. PHARMACY SIGNAGE I I PROPOSED SPHERICAL BOLLARD ■ice NMI MeN■ MM MI L II»JUI MUD NMI SZE MIMI In 1 1 1 /-■ 1 1 1 V1 r1 \J 1 CONCRETE SPERICAL BOLLARDS - SEE PROPOSED FRONT ELEVATION (E) WALK P AD D ROOF P UNIT & W 14 6" =1' -0" (E) ROOF UNIT & WALK PAD (E) ROOF UNIT & WALK " PAD- NOTE: SEE SHEET A201 FOR ADDITIONAL BUILDING EXTERIOR MODIFICATIONS. 1 (E) ROOF UNIT & WALK PAD (N) ROOF TOP COMPRESSOR RACK -(N) REFRIGERATION PIPE BOX BUILDING PLAN, SECTION/SITE LINES STUDY 1/16"=V-0" ---t BUILDING PLAN, SECTIONVSITE LINES STUDY 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 1/16"=V-0" U LVA N N Y ' 601 SW SECOND AVENUE 1 SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com 1 t 503.223.8030 1 f 503.223.8381 BRIAN R ENER STATE OF -3 SHINGTON BRIAN R. FLEENER - ARCHITECT \\ 10. 9. 0. 13\ cacheroot \ttctctv02 \ttcfile08 \TGTCADAE \Remodels\ 0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \Signage Study \0627a201_designreview.dgn DATE ISSUED 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS 11.8.10 PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN 4.18.11 A153378-000 -1 CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10 -0285-01 davidc 18— APR -2011 10:52 0 TARGET STORE 742' -011 ACTUAL DISTANCE FOR PARAPET SCREENING AT 5' EYE LEVEL DISTANCE. C REVREV INJDFO ODE N App RoV ANCE MAY o 5 FD 2011 City of Tula BUILDING DING INVI CORP LT R 743' -011 ACTUAL DISTANCE FOR PARAPET SCREENING AT 5' EYE LEVEL - DISTANCE. SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE ® 0 Q t:oi7 T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08 -06-10 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL TITLE I 1 f —1 1 -1 - 1- - -- ti 7 - ------ -4 -- — - ---- {- - -- -}— - - -I- — — — - - - - -- - — - — - — - — - - - _i - - — -n 1 b 1 KEY PLAN 6b SIGNAGE STUDY RECEIVED APR 21ZO„ PFR.MIT(TlUTFR T -0627 SfI ITH CFNTFR. WA ELECTRICAL 129 WATER SERVICE ROOM 134 1 1 SAW CUT AND REMOVE CONCRETE; FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE UNDER SLAB WORK. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND /OR ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS CCTV T1 1 MEN WOMEN 125 ,�xxnxxxa:rAznxxnn ran .w�ic . YYY.,YYrY....Y: Y. Yvvvv..Y...,Y„Y.,vvvY.. YY YYY YYYYYYYrYYYYY SALES FLOOR NOTES WALLS: COORDINATE REMOVAL OF ALL EISTING SALES FLOOR NEON AND LIGHT VALANCES WITH ELECTRICAL AND OSR. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING FOCALS WITH NEW WORK AND OSR. REMOVE KYDEX WALL COVERING S NEEDED FOR NEW WORK. REUSE SST CORNER GUARDS AT !LOCATIONS WHERE NEW FINISHES ARE APPLIED. REPLACE 14S REQUIRED. FLOORS 1 PREPARE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB OR ADDITION OF NEW TILE SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CEILING 1 REMOVE EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING PANELS AND GRID SYSTEM AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE W/ MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REMOVAL/REUSE OF ALL DIFFUSERS GRILLES, SPRINKLER SYSTEM, SURFACE MOUNTED BIND— RECES�SE1TUGHTS. REP ARE �AREAFOR NEW tEILING.— REVIEWED FOR - - CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwi City of _la BUILDING DIVISION AnM /YYV<K<SPY4YYY« �<1(<4/./YYYYY ( < <1Yjj��j�ffj���t Nvr- • - Tvii n '. M/ YVVVYx <S�YYYY <[SSSXN./YYY<t <4YYV «ttt SSSINYYlt(( n..nnn W/ ►.t'. A ": 'Sb60000 V�Mn,vvM ^n/wvvv[[x/. �xKnn x nM�NYVYVV iKA~ .'nn xxnn n3(KXkX%)(X %XXXnx t^^�w YYYt xxMXXn�nxnnxnnnnnnnn X� _ nnnx %xxxxnn ::6:110.10:10~-11 :::V:.:Yii:...I�..1,01 .101,∎ •:i:::i:;:..:Fi...iMa:::.:::: °A ..x..+Y�......x.M.. Y� YYYYYYnxxnnnxxnxnznnw + i x'n nl %XXX%%�xx ����1YYYYYx nxxrxxxxxxx xx xz nrx xx: xx ii:iii`�iSikyA/Sf xn(tx �. YYYYr rvrrvvvvrvrvrxrvYyrx Yxvr n,..yyt M,vv�Rn�Yr iRn.vyrnn„Y�t«S�Y ?�� AN t�.l 7 YY<f <SANVYxY «S <XMA /YYY <t <SM1NYYYYY z }t 1NYY<M A Y[ <4�x xY< 74vNxn Y nY � „v f4�Y t Y ft'C �jff <VY �Y vv.xSCK)w Avv[t Y<SSNYY<t.1.y yYr�: Y .............. YY...........,.,..., ,,,,.,..Y�.......,..YY.,Y...,YY Y..Y...,.,., xYxn x 120 EXIT VESTIBULE 1 101BI 1 CIRCULATION 108 PHARMACY RESTROO 127 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 115 I 1 �I — - - —�� - —4_ = -1_L = = �_L °JI °- AP OFFICE 1 119 DEMOLITION PLAN 111 TAIR 'A' 1 /16" =l' -0" 169 108A 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2com 1 t 503223.8030 1 f 503.223.8381 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627ad111.dgn BRIAN R. FLEENER — ARCHITECT DATE ISSUED 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS 11.8.10 PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 07:57 TARGET STORE *00 3V1 SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-06 -10 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL TITLE RECEnTEE NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER DEMOLITION KEY NOTES WALLS: DOORS: REMOVE EXISTING GYP BD, PLYWOOD, OR HARDWARE CLOTH PARTITION. COORDINATE EXTENT WITH NEW WORK. FLOORS: REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE. SAVE FOR REUSE. COORDINATE REUSE WITH OSR. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE. REMOVE EXISTING CARPET FLOOR COVERING AND BASE. REMOVE EXISTING VCT AND WALL BASE. REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXIST VCT AS REQUIRED FOR AISLE RECONFIGURATION. PREPARE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB FOR ADDITION OF NEW TILE SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERS AND CABINETS: REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRONICS BOAT COUNTER /CABINETS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL. REMOVE EXISTING JEWELRY BOAT COUNTER /CABINETS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL. SAVE FOR REUSE. INTERIOR: REMOVE AND RELOCATE EXISTING SALES FLOOR COOLERS /FREEZERS AND ASSOCIATED FALSE COLUMNS. REMOVE EXISTING 'T' WALL FIXTURE — SAVE FOR REUSE REMOVE EXISTING STOCK ROOM WALK —IN COOLER /FREEZER. REMOVE HARDWARE CLOTH WALLS AND DOOR ABOVE. REMOVE TILE AT COOLER AND THERMAL BREAK AT FREEZER. PREP SLAB FOR NEW WORK — SEE STRUCTURAL. EXTERIOR: REMOVE EXISTING COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE. INDICATES APPROX SAW —CUT AND SLAB REMOVAL — SEE STRUCTURAL INDICATES APPROX FLOOR COVER SCOPE OF WORK GENERAL CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION NOTES A. THE FOLLOWING PLANS REFLECT DEMOLITION INTENT ONLY. DEMOLITION IS NOT NECESSARILY LIMITED TO WHAT IS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND SHALL INCLUDE RELATED MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS. THE INTENT IS TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. B. CUT AND REMOVE MATERIALS AS INDICATED AND AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO RESTORE SURFACES TO 'LIKE NEW' CONDITION WITHOUT CREATING TRANSITIONS THAT APPEAR PATCHED—IN. C. BARRICADE AND COVER SURROUNDING AREAS WHICH ARE TO REMAIN WITH UTMOST CARE. BARRICADES AND COVERS SHALL BE AS NECESSARY TO PROTECT OCCUPANTS, PEDESTRIANS, WORKERS, AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES. PERIODICALLY SPRINKLE TO ALLAY DUST. D. PROTECT EXISTING BUILDING AND ADJACENT SURFACES, FEATURES, AND PROPERTY. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM SITE DAILY. INTERFERENCE WITH THE USE OF OTHER EXISTING FACILITIES SHALL BE KEPT TO A MINIMUM. E. ALL UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS SHALL BE REMOVED IN A MANNER THAT WILL AVOID DAMAGE TO MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN AND SHALL BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND LEGALLY DISPOSED OF AWAY FROM THE SITE. F. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING, SHORING, AND SUPPORT DURING DEMOLITION, CUTTING, REMODELING, AND RELATED NEW CONSTRUCTION AS NECESSARY FOR THE EXECUTION OF THE WORK AND THE PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. G. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE COVERINGS AND ENCLOSURES NECESSARY TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EXISTING SPACES AND MATERIALS TO REMAIN. PROTECT OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS AND ROOFS SO AS TO PREVENT DAMAGE FROM WATER AND THE ELEMENTS AND PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT OR COOLING LOSS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING. H. PROVIDE DUST —PROOF TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES SEPARATING AREAS UNDER DEMOLITION AND REMODELING FROM THE REMAINDER OF THE BUILDING. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HINGED DOORS IN TEMP ENCLOSURES WHERE NECESSARY. I. PATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH. EXAMINE EXISTING SURFACES TO BE PATCHED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. REPORT ALL CONDITIONS WHERE EXISTING MATERIALS, COLORS, AND FINISHES CANNOT BE MATCHED TO THE TARGET OSR. J. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION THAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED AS A RESULT OF THE WORK SHALL BE REPAIRED TO AN EXTENT AND AS REQUIRED TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING UNDAMAGED CONSTRUCTION. K. WEIGHT OF CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE DESIGN LIVE LOAD OF THE EXIST CONC FLOOR SLAB/ ASSEMBLY. SEE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES ON 5111. L. VERIFY/ COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE CONTRACTOR AND /OR TARGET OSR FOR SAVING, RELOCATION AND /OR REUSE OF EXISTING STORE FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT. M. TRENCHING FOR NEW MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL LINES FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION TO BE COORDINATED WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS. PREPARE AREA FOR NEW FLOORING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED. N. REFER TO S111, PD01, MD01 AND ED01 DRAWINGS FOR FURTHER DEMOLITION NOTES. 0. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND TARGET OSR TO COORDINATE DEMOLITION IN PREPARATION FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. P. EXAMINE THE CONDITION OF EXISTING KYDEX AND RUBBER BASE FOR EXCESSIVE WEAR AND TEAR. COORDINATE REMOVAL /REPLACEMENT WITH TARGET'S CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER AND OSR. Q. REVIEW REMOVAL OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE WITH TARGET OSR PRIOR TO DISMANTLING AND REMOVING ANY EXISTING SIGNAGE. R. COORDINATE ROOFING CUTTING /PATCHING AND REPAIR WITH TARGET ROOFING. WHERE REQUIRED PROVIDE ADDITIONAL DETAILS AS REQUESTED FOR APPROVAL TO ENSURE WARRANTY INSTALLATION. S. REMOVE AND REPLACE ACT CEILING TILE AS REQUIRED DUE TO OVERHEAD MECH WORK. T. THE ARCHITECT HAS NO KNOWLEDGE AND SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE IF ANY ASBESTOS OR OTHER HAZERDOUS MATERIALS ARE DISCOVERED DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ISOLATE THE AFFECTED AREA AND CONTACT THE OWNER FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING. U. THE ARCHITECT HAS NO KNOWLEDGE OF AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY EXISTING WATER LEAKAGE AND MOLD, IF ANY. V. BEFORE BEGINNING ANY WORK COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING MATERIALS WITH THE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY PREPARED FOR TARGET STORES. COPIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM BRAD ULLERY, TARGET REGIONAL MANAGER, 612.304.8639. W. BEFORE BEGINNING ANY WORK IF EXISTING FIRE PROOFING IS REMOVED FROM THE STRUCTURE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW MATERIALS, REPLACE FIRE PROOFING TO MATCH EXISTING FIRE PROOFING MATERIALS AND RATING. X. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FALL PROTECTION FROM TOOLS, DEBRIS, ECT. WHEN WORKING ABOVE SALES FLOOR. Y. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO IDENTIFY AND LEAVE EXISTING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP) IN PLACE. COORDINATE W/ LOW VOLTAGE CONTRACTOR TO RELOCATE. DEMOLITION PLAN T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA Ei SALES FLOOR NOTES WALLS: COORDINATE REMOVAL OF ALL EISTING SALES FLOOR NEON AND LIGHT VALANCES WITH ELECTRICAL AND OSR. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING FOCALS WITH NEW WORK AND OSR. REMOVE KYDEX WALL COVERING S NEEDED FOR NEW WORK. REUSE SST CORNER GUARDS AT !LOCATIONS WHERE NEW FINISHES ARE APPLIED. REPLACE 14S REQUIRED. FLOORS 1 PREPARE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB OR ADDITION OF NEW TILE SEE SPECIFICATIONS. CEILING 1 REMOVE EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING PANELS AND GRID SYSTEM AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE W/ MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REMOVAL/REUSE OF ALL DIFFUSERS GRILLES, SPRINKLER SYSTEM, SURFACE MOUNTED BIND— RECES�SE1TUGHTS. REP ARE �AREAFOR NEW tEILING.— REVIEWED FOR - - CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwi City of _la BUILDING DIVISION AnM /YYV<K<SPY4YYY« �<1(<4/./YYYYY ( < <1Yjj��j�ffj���t Nvr- • - Tvii n '. M/ YVVVYx <S�YYYY <[SSSXN./YYY<t <4YYV «ttt SSSINYYlt(( n..nnn W/ ►.t'. A ": 'Sb60000 V�Mn,vvM ^n/wvvv[[x/. �xKnn x nM�NYVYVV iKA~ .'nn xxnn n3(KXkX%)(X %XXXnx t^^�w YYYt xxMXXn�nxnnxnnnnnnnn X� _ nnnx %xxxxnn ::6:110.10:10~-11 :::V:.:Yii:...I�..1,01 .101,∎ •:i:::i:;:..:Fi...iMa:::.:::: °A ..x..+Y�......x.M.. Y� YYYYYYnxxnnnxxnxnznnw + i x'n nl %XXX%%�xx ����1YYYYYx nxxrxxxxxxx xx xz nrx xx: xx ii:iii`�iSikyA/Sf xn(tx �. YYYYr rvrrvvvvrvrvrxrvYyrx Yxvr n,..yyt M,vv�Rn�Yr iRn.vyrnn„Y�t«S�Y ?�� AN t�.l 7 YY<f <SANVYxY «S <XMA /YYY <t <SM1NYYYYY z }t 1NYY<M A Y[ <4�x xY< 74vNxn Y nY � „v f4�Y t Y ft'C �jff <VY �Y vv.xSCK)w Avv[t Y<SSNYY<t.1.y yYr�: Y .............. YY...........,.,..., ,,,,.,..Y�.......,..YY.,Y...,YY Y..Y...,.,., xYxn x 120 EXIT VESTIBULE 1 101BI 1 CIRCULATION 108 PHARMACY RESTROO 127 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 115 I 1 �I — - - —�� - —4_ = -1_L = = �_L °JI °- AP OFFICE 1 119 DEMOLITION PLAN 111 TAIR 'A' 1 /16" =l' -0" 169 108A 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2com 1 t 503223.8030 1 f 503.223.8381 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627ad111.dgn BRIAN R. FLEENER — ARCHITECT DATE ISSUED 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS 11.8.10 PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 07:57 TARGET STORE *00 3V1 SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-06 -10 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL TITLE RECEnTEE NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER DEMOLITION KEY NOTES WALLS: DOORS: REMOVE EXISTING GYP BD, PLYWOOD, OR HARDWARE CLOTH PARTITION. COORDINATE EXTENT WITH NEW WORK. FLOORS: REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE. SAVE FOR REUSE. COORDINATE REUSE WITH OSR. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE. REMOVE EXISTING CARPET FLOOR COVERING AND BASE. REMOVE EXISTING VCT AND WALL BASE. REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXIST VCT AS REQUIRED FOR AISLE RECONFIGURATION. PREPARE EXISTING FLOOR SLAB FOR ADDITION OF NEW TILE SEE SPECIFICATIONS. COUNTERS AND CABINETS: REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRONICS BOAT COUNTER /CABINETS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL. REMOVE EXISTING JEWELRY BOAT COUNTER /CABINETS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL. SAVE FOR REUSE. INTERIOR: REMOVE AND RELOCATE EXISTING SALES FLOOR COOLERS /FREEZERS AND ASSOCIATED FALSE COLUMNS. REMOVE EXISTING 'T' WALL FIXTURE — SAVE FOR REUSE REMOVE EXISTING STOCK ROOM WALK —IN COOLER /FREEZER. REMOVE HARDWARE CLOTH WALLS AND DOOR ABOVE. REMOVE TILE AT COOLER AND THERMAL BREAK AT FREEZER. PREP SLAB FOR NEW WORK — SEE STRUCTURAL. EXTERIOR: REMOVE EXISTING COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE. INDICATES APPROX SAW —CUT AND SLAB REMOVAL — SEE STRUCTURAL INDICATES APPROX FLOOR COVER SCOPE OF WORK GENERAL CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION NOTES A. THE FOLLOWING PLANS REFLECT DEMOLITION INTENT ONLY. DEMOLITION IS NOT NECESSARILY LIMITED TO WHAT IS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND SHALL INCLUDE RELATED MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS. THE INTENT IS TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. B. CUT AND REMOVE MATERIALS AS INDICATED AND AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO RESTORE SURFACES TO 'LIKE NEW' CONDITION WITHOUT CREATING TRANSITIONS THAT APPEAR PATCHED—IN. C. BARRICADE AND COVER SURROUNDING AREAS WHICH ARE TO REMAIN WITH UTMOST CARE. BARRICADES AND COVERS SHALL BE AS NECESSARY TO PROTECT OCCUPANTS, PEDESTRIANS, WORKERS, AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES. PERIODICALLY SPRINKLE TO ALLAY DUST. D. PROTECT EXISTING BUILDING AND ADJACENT SURFACES, FEATURES, AND PROPERTY. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM SITE DAILY. INTERFERENCE WITH THE USE OF OTHER EXISTING FACILITIES SHALL BE KEPT TO A MINIMUM. E. ALL UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS SHALL BE REMOVED IN A MANNER THAT WILL AVOID DAMAGE TO MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN AND SHALL BE COMPLETELY REMOVED AND LEGALLY DISPOSED OF AWAY FROM THE SITE. F. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING, SHORING, AND SUPPORT DURING DEMOLITION, CUTTING, REMODELING, AND RELATED NEW CONSTRUCTION AS NECESSARY FOR THE EXECUTION OF THE WORK AND THE PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. G. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE COVERINGS AND ENCLOSURES NECESSARY TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EXISTING SPACES AND MATERIALS TO REMAIN. PROTECT OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS AND ROOFS SO AS TO PREVENT DAMAGE FROM WATER AND THE ELEMENTS AND PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT OR COOLING LOSS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING. H. PROVIDE DUST —PROOF TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES SEPARATING AREAS UNDER DEMOLITION AND REMODELING FROM THE REMAINDER OF THE BUILDING. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HINGED DOORS IN TEMP ENCLOSURES WHERE NECESSARY. I. PATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH. EXAMINE EXISTING SURFACES TO BE PATCHED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. REPORT ALL CONDITIONS WHERE EXISTING MATERIALS, COLORS, AND FINISHES CANNOT BE MATCHED TO THE TARGET OSR. J. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION THAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED AS A RESULT OF THE WORK SHALL BE REPAIRED TO AN EXTENT AND AS REQUIRED TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING UNDAMAGED CONSTRUCTION. K. WEIGHT OF CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE DESIGN LIVE LOAD OF THE EXIST CONC FLOOR SLAB/ ASSEMBLY. SEE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES ON 5111. L. VERIFY/ COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE CONTRACTOR AND /OR TARGET OSR FOR SAVING, RELOCATION AND /OR REUSE OF EXISTING STORE FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT. M. TRENCHING FOR NEW MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL LINES FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION TO BE COORDINATED WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS. PREPARE AREA FOR NEW FLOORING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED. N. REFER TO S111, PD01, MD01 AND ED01 DRAWINGS FOR FURTHER DEMOLITION NOTES. 0. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND TARGET OSR TO COORDINATE DEMOLITION IN PREPARATION FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. P. EXAMINE THE CONDITION OF EXISTING KYDEX AND RUBBER BASE FOR EXCESSIVE WEAR AND TEAR. COORDINATE REMOVAL /REPLACEMENT WITH TARGET'S CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER AND OSR. Q. REVIEW REMOVAL OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE WITH TARGET OSR PRIOR TO DISMANTLING AND REMOVING ANY EXISTING SIGNAGE. R. COORDINATE ROOFING CUTTING /PATCHING AND REPAIR WITH TARGET ROOFING. WHERE REQUIRED PROVIDE ADDITIONAL DETAILS AS REQUESTED FOR APPROVAL TO ENSURE WARRANTY INSTALLATION. S. REMOVE AND REPLACE ACT CEILING TILE AS REQUIRED DUE TO OVERHEAD MECH WORK. T. THE ARCHITECT HAS NO KNOWLEDGE AND SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE IF ANY ASBESTOS OR OTHER HAZERDOUS MATERIALS ARE DISCOVERED DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ISOLATE THE AFFECTED AREA AND CONTACT THE OWNER FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING. U. THE ARCHITECT HAS NO KNOWLEDGE OF AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY EXISTING WATER LEAKAGE AND MOLD, IF ANY. V. BEFORE BEGINNING ANY WORK COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EXISTING MATERIALS WITH THE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY PREPARED FOR TARGET STORES. COPIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM BRAD ULLERY, TARGET REGIONAL MANAGER, 612.304.8639. W. BEFORE BEGINNING ANY WORK IF EXISTING FIRE PROOFING IS REMOVED FROM THE STRUCTURE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW MATERIALS, REPLACE FIRE PROOFING TO MATCH EXISTING FIRE PROOFING MATERIALS AND RATING. X. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FALL PROTECTION FROM TOOLS, DEBRIS, ECT. WHEN WORKING ABOVE SALES FLOOR. Y. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO IDENTIFY AND LEAVE EXISTING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP) IN PLACE. COORDINATE W/ LOW VOLTAGE CONTRACTOR TO RELOCATE. DEMOLITION PLAN T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA 1 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 1 1 (N) PRODUCE COOLER 183 (N) MEAT COOLER 182 r MINIM I■11 N) VAC PUMP (N) DRY ROOM PRODUCE/ LABELING ROOM _-.2-_- - 1 ....._ L 1— - -- AVIDENCE LOCK -UP 185 184 (N) DAIRY COOLER 180 217 1 (N) FREEZER kk Co_ 1 1- I-i 111 * 1 1 J JJ L �J n• ny ny ny n1 1_ _' _--_ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 „ 181 FZ T-W ALL FIXTURE "T �'T -T C +-111---7) is ti �I — —_ — —1 STORAGE 204 r ENCLAVE 216 DISTRICT OFF CE DTL 206 DTL 1 2071 ( MEN 1 WOMEN OFFICE 218 L OUNGE l- 1' llr 215 219 212 CONFERENCE APBP 208 209 zi9 INVESTIGATION CENTER 210 -OFFICE 213 TTS EQUIPMENT ROOM 205 4 11l I }1 dirk, I�`y ,*= -idi 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 111- 1,1 111 I,I III II 1'1 III (E) SALES 180 — MU LVAN NYgG2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2com I t 503.2218030 I f 503.2218381 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R\_ActiveCAD \0627a111.dgn 8383 T OF FLOOR PLAN 11,11 I III G1STER CHIT ENER SHINGTON (11 f 1O BRIAN R. FLEENER - ARCHITECT 1/16"-=V-0" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 rL TYP 7 PLACES 1 r, (, f �( -�(- - - 4,4 I it /I it /I /I it /I it .I .1 /I it ill /I /I it , / I/ 1/ I/ I/ I/ I/ l/ I/ I/ I/ I/ I/ / I/ I/ I/ I O c 0 00 - -II, • I 1 1 , 1 1 1 , 1 1 I , 11 1 1 I ,- l it /I it it it /I �I it it it it /I it /I /I /I i 30' -6" —qr T T 1,1 1 I °pL _yr r -4-1 _ I�_ I r�- 1 1 I 1 1 1 —LJ r- —LH ___i -- 1 • iiI O 1 �! I zI ,_ , I I 1 1 TYP 3 PLACES yL_b \ I 1 T) 11 1 1 H 11 r' i 1 1 I DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08 06-10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 - RobH 09 -NOV -2010 07:57 1 "Ib . '4 CO +I m P6FX 1 1 Of z O V) zz ►-z NL, xa- WO P6FX 2' -711 DOOR 148 PLAN EXISTING 121" CMU WALL W/ SOLID GROUT CELLS MAY o 5 ton ';ODE SEWED FOR COMPLIANCE • APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION I�1o�31� RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER 1/4"=1'-0" WALL LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH MATLS OR OPENINGS UNO, EXCLUSIVE OF CERAMIC TILE B. FOR DOOR, ROOM FINISH, AND OWNER SUPPLIED MATL & EQUIP SCHEDULES, SEE SHTS A601 C. PARTITION TYPES INDICATE LOCATION FOR BLOCKING, FINISHES, ETC. SEE SHEET A351 FOR PARTITION TYPES D. PLYWOOD BLOCKING IS INCLUDED IN PARTITION TYPE, FOR SIDE OF WALL SEE REFERENCE SIDE E. FOR TYPICAL CONNECTION OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS TO EXTERIOR WALLS SEE F. SPOT ELEVATION (EXAMPLE: + 99' -1111) REPRESENTS CONCRETE SLAB ELEVATION G. SET TOP OF FLOOR DRAIN STRAINERS LEVEL WITH FINISHED FLOOR SURFACE. H. ALL ANGLES ARE 45° OR MULTIPLES OF 45° UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE J. FOR STUD WALLS EXTENDING TO ROOF DECK SEE TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08 06-10 TITLE PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL FLOOR MAN SHEET Alll T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA (N) PRODUCE COOLER 183 (N) MEAT COOLER 182 ENCLAVE 216 MEN 218 WOMEN 219 OFFICE N) VAC PUMP ROOM 185 f (N) DRY PRODUCE/ LABELING ROOM 212 184 (N) DAIRY COOLER 180 (N) FREEZER 181 QT -1 I OFFICE INVESTIGATION CENTER 210 RF -1 - INFILI • 1 EXISITNG RED 1 FEATURE STRIPE 1 213 TTS 214 INSTALL CPT -6 OVER RF -3 RESILENT FLOORING - - - — - — - AFT -ER- SHOWCASES ARE SET RF -1 - I INFILI a EXISITNG RED FEATUI#E STRIPE RF -1 - INFILI • EXISITNG RED FEATURE STRIPE if woo BODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED City ofTukwila !1NG DIVISION NEW RF -1 LOCATED AT THE NEW MARKET AREA 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 i 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2com I t 5032218030 I f 503.2218381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a121.dgn RF -1 - INFILI • EXISITNG RED FEATURE STRIPE II sir —II ,IL �L-- II-- JL —JI-- FINISH & BLOCKING PLAN S ISTERE► ARCHIT EOF MI NTON BRIAN R. FLEENER- ARCHITECT 1/16"=1'-0" FOR WALL FINISHES • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • IPS -1, C -9 ABOVE K -4 157 x- IPS -6, C -5 IPS- , C -5 11 IPS- , \�C -5 IPS -1, ABOVE K -4 158 IPS -6, C -5 • • • • • • • • • • • LOUNGE /TRAINING FINISH PLAN V8" =1' -0" DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 1x6 HOR BLKG a 11' -9' AFF TO t - SURFACE MOUNT 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET I/2' PLYWOOD WAINSCOT TO 8' -0' AFF- SCREW ATTACH DIRECTLY TO STUDS AT 12' O.C. VERT SEE GEN. NOTE A 6 DRAWN BY %2' PLYWOOD TO 1O' -0' AFF ON SALES &FITTING ROOMS FURR OUT FACE OF STUDS ABOVE 10' -0' AFF TO KEEP GYP BD FLUSH FULL HEIGHT OF WALL INSTALL GYP BD OVER PLYWD SEE GEN. NOTE A 7 n 18 I R. HAMLIN ©■ A70 A70 %2' PLYWOOD FLOOR TO CEILING. INSTALL GYP BD OVER PLYWD. SEE GEN NOTE A CHECKED BY CAMERA DOME BLOCKING: 1 X 12 HOR BLKG • 14' -0' AFF TO E SURFACE MOUNT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO PROVIDE N. X 12' HIGH PLYWOOD 13 D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH 74' PLYWOOD BLOCKING FOR EYE WASH STATION 16 A50 ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. • A50 10-0285-01 RobH 09 -NOV -2010 07:57 i LOUNGE/TRAINING FINISH NOTES A. FIELD VERIFY CONDITION OF (E) WALL COVERING. IF IN GOOD CONDITION WITHOUT LARGE TEARS, AND STILL FULLY ADHERED TO SUBSTRATE, PAINT DIRECTLY OVER. B. IF WALLS INDICATED TO BE PAINTED C -5 HAVE (E) KYDEX, REPLACE (E) KYDEX AND BASE WITH (N) K -3 AND RB -1. C. ONLY PLACE (N) RB -1 WHERE K -3 OR K -4 ARE BEING ADDED /REPLACED. D. PAINT (E) DOORS AND FRAMES TO MATCH ADJ WALL FOR WALL FINISHES �l0 31� RECE ED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTEP AREA OF FLOORING TO BE REPLACED TOTAL AREA OF RF -1 REQUIRED: 9.064 SF TOTAL RF -3 REQUIRED: 980 LF TOTAL AREA OF QT -1 REQUIRED: 845 SF TOTAL QT -5 REQUIRED: 29 LF TOTAL AREA OF CPT -1 REQUIRED: 5,057 SF TOTAL AREA OF CPT -6 REQUIRED: 104 SF NOTE: THE TOTALS INCLUDED IN THIS SCHEDULE ARE BASED OFF THE FLOOR AREAS REQUIREING NEW FLOOR FINISHES. THESE TOTALS ARE FOR REFRENCE ONLY, AND THE VENDOR IS STILL REQUIRED TO DO MATERIAL TAKE OFFS. BLOCKING KEYNOTES STORE T0627 1x6 HOR BLKG a 11' -9' AFF TO t - SURFACE MOUNT TIT1E FLOOR COVERING 3 CONFIGURATION LL WALL FINISH & BLOCKING PLAN I/2' PLYWOOD WAINSCOT TO 8' -0' AFF- SCREW ATTACH DIRECTLY TO STUDS AT 12' O.C. VERT SEE GEN. NOTE A 6 %2' PLYWOOD TO 1O' -0' AFF ON SALES &FITTING ROOMS FURR OUT FACE OF STUDS ABOVE 10' -0' AFF TO KEEP GYP BD FLUSH FULL HEIGHT OF WALL INSTALL GYP BD OVER PLYWD SEE GEN. NOTE A 7 n 18 I 1x6 HOR BLKG • 13' -6" AFF TO i, SURFACE MOUNTED. PAINT TO MATCH WALL -SEE SHEET A701 FOR EXACT LOC ©■ A70 A70 %2' PLYWOOD FLOOR TO CEILING. INSTALL GYP BD OVER PLYWD. SEE GEN NOTE A 9 CAMERA DOME BLOCKING: 1 X 12 HOR BLKG • 14' -0' AFF TO E SURFACE MOUNT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO PROVIDE N. X 12' HIGH PLYWOOD 13 74' PLYWOOD BLOCKING FOR EYE WASH STATION 16 A50 2 x 6 HOR BLKG • 6' -6' AND 7' -6' AFF TO €, 2 x 4 HOR BLKG 0 BASE 21 A50 GENERAL NOTES - BLOCKING A. PLYWOOD USED FOR BLKG IS SHOWN IN PARTITION TYPE. BLOCKING KEYNOTE IS USED TO IDENTIFY LOCATION AND SIDE OF WALL - NOT TO INDICATE ADDITIONAL PLYWD. FOR PARTITION TYPE SEE A351. B. NOT USED C. PROVIDE APPROPRIATE BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED HARDWARE AND MISC COMPONENTS. D. FOR EXT WALLS WHERE INSUL IS NOT REQUIRED AND GYP BD IS ELIMINATED BEHIND FIXTURES, ADD 2 x 4 AT BASE AND FURR OUT FACE OF 2 x BLOCKING AND BASE TO MATCH FACE OF GYP BD WALL ABOVE FLOOR FINISH GENERAL NOTES A. SYMBOL INDICATES K -3 LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. B. SYMBOL INDICATES RB LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. CONTINUE RB 6" BEHIND FIXTURE SALES FLOOR DOORS. C. VVVV SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -3 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -3 TO BE 48" HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. SEE D. ALL CPT,RF, RB, CT, QT AND MT ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR E. - - -- SYMBOL INDICATES LOCATIONS WHERE QT -5 BASE IS LOCATED. TYPICALLY THIS BASE IS LOCATED IN THE DRY PRODUCE ROOM WHERE THE HEAVY DUTY BASE IS NOT CALLED OUT. F. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -2) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOOR ON ALL SIDES. G. FLOOR FINISH CHANGES BETWEEN ROOMS OCCUR AT DOOR CENTERLINES TYPICAL. SEE A601 FOR ADDITIONAL FLOOR FINISH INFORMATION K. FOR BASE CONDITIONS NOT SHOWN ON A121, SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ON A601 & A351 L. INSTALL CPT -1A ON FURNITURE FLATS. SEE FIXTURE PLAN FOR LOCATION. N. FOR SST CORNER GUARD / VERTICAL SST END CAPS TO RB CONNECTION SEE P. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -1) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND BROAD LOOM CARPET (CPT -1) R. ••••• SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -4 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -4 TO BE 48" HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. FOR K -4 WALL CAP AND CORNER GUARD / END CAP DETAILS, SEE INDICATES APPROX NEW QT -1 INDICATES APPROX RF -3 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX RF -1 REPLACEMENT EXCLUDING RF -1 PATCH /FILL AREAS INDICATES APPROX CPT -1 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX CPT -6 REPLACEMENT TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 Sr�,NOERaLVo rU�a � WA 981ee STORE T0627 VERSION MR201008 TIT1E FLOOR COVERING PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL WALL FINISH & BLOCKING PLAN SHEET A121 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA O 00 0 EXISTING RTU TYP. LINE - TYP. EXISTING GAS ROOF PLAN SERVICE AREA CONDENSING UNIT - SEE MEOH M1 EXISTING RTU TYP. CONDENSING UNIT CURB SEE FOR NEW RTU AT INVESTIGATION CENTER - SEE MECHANICAL AND NOTE; PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF AIR AND WEATHER TIGHT AT LOCATIONS OF REMOVED UNITS AND /OR CURBS. FOR PIPE BOX CAP SEE 14/A140. FOR LOCATIONS SEE SHEETS RD01 AND M111 PIPE SUPPORT, SEE REFRIGERATION FOR PIPE LAYOUT. FOR BLOCKING. SEE ROOF TOP 'COMPRESSOR RACK, FOR 'SUPPORT DETAIL SEE �a EXISTING GAS LINE - TYP. PIPE SUPPORT, SEE REFRIGERATION FOR PIPE LAYOUT. 9EOR BLOCKING E t\ NOTE; PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF AIR AND WEATHER TIGHT AT LOCATIONS OF REMOVED UNITS AND /OR CURBS. FOR PIPE BOX CAP SEE 14/A140. FOR LOCATIONS SEE SHEETS RD01 AND M111 MARKET ROOF PLAN VI6" =11-0" ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS & EQUIPMENT W/ 5141, R141 & E221. B. REFER TO SHEET S141 FOR LOCATIONS OF FRAMED OPENINGS FOR RTU'S, ROOF DRAIN, AND OTHER FRAMED OPENINGS. C. REFER TO SHEET 5141 FOR ROOF FRAMING ELEVATIONS. D. SEE EXTERIOR PAINTING NOTES ON A601 FOR ROOFTOP EQUIP PAINTING INFO. E. ROOF SLOPES INDICATED ON THE PLANS INDICATE EXISTING ROOF SLOPE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. F. MEMBRANE ROOFING, ROOF INSULATION, MEMBRANE FLASHING, FASTENERS, ETC ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER. SEE SPEC FOR COMPLETE LISTING. G. NEW GAS LINES ARE TO BE PAINTED ONLY IF EXISTING PIPES ARE ALREADY PAINTED. H. FOR ROOFING SEAM WELDS SEE J. VERIFY EXISTING ROOF ELEMENTS IN AREAS OF WORK AND MODIFY /REMOVE ROOF ELEMENTS AS REQUIRED. K. FOR LOCATION & LENGTH OF CONDENSING UNIT CURBS SEE 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 MU LVAN NYG2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 57204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 \\ 10. 9. 0. 13\ cacheroot \ttctctv02 \ttcfile08 \TGTCADAE \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a140.dgn 1/16" =1, -0" NOTE: INDIVIUAL HOLES ARE REQUIRED FOR EACH LINE ENTERING THE FACE OF THE PIPE BOX. SLOT CUTS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED — _ irr CONTINUOUS - SLNT -7 AROUND ALL PIPE OPENINGS FOR STRUCTURAL FRAMING SEE PIPE BOX DETAIL NOTE: FOR REFRIGERATION PENETRATIONS SEE PREMANUFACTURED GALVANIZED PIPE BOX REFRIGERATION PIPING 6" INSUL -6, WITH VAPOR BARRIER PLACED ON DECK PREFORMED METAL ROOF CURB AT CONDENSING UNITS, CORE DRILL HOLES IN THE ROOF DECK FOR REFRIGERATION & ELECTRICAL LINES. THE HOLES SHOULD BE SIZED f1/2" LARGER THAN THE REFRIGERATION & ELECTRICAL LINES AT SIM: CUT SLOTS IN THE ROOF DECK FOR ALL REFRIGERATION LINES REQUIRED AT THE ROOF TOP COMPRESSOR RACK. THE SLOT SHOULD BE ±1/2 " LARGER THAN THE REFRIGERATION LINES 1" =1' -0" CONDENSING UNIT TO BE CENTERED ON LEGS CONDENSING UNIT TO BE SECURED TO CURB FOR ATTACHMENT SEE - SACRIFICIAL WALKWAY PAD. FOR INSTALLATION SEE NOTE: PROBE ALL SEAMS BEFORE WALKPAD IS INSTALLED CONDENSING CURB DETAIL 6" WIDE ROOF MEMBRANE STRIPS & HEAT WELD TO SACRIFICIAL LAYER TO HOLD DOWN ROOF CURBS FASTEN PIPE BOX TO CURB W/ *10 TEK SCREWS & GROMMET SEALS @ 12" OC (MIN 3 PER SIDE) PVC MEMBRANE FULLY ADHERED WELD PERIMETER OF WALKWAY PAD PREMANUFACTURED REFRIGERATION . PIPE BOX, SEE WELD CURB PVC TO ROOF MEMBRANE PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE 2" MX- *15 ROOFING SCREWS- @ 12' O.C. ALL AROUND CURB, ANCHOR @ TOP OF DECK FLUTES PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER. FOR LOCATION, LENGTH, NUMBER OF CURBS AND SPACING, SEE SACRIFICIAL LAYER TO BE AT LEAST 2' -0" WIDE & COMPLETELY WELDED TO ROOF MEMBRANE NOT TO SCALE REFRIGERATION PIPE SUPPORT, SEE 4x4 TREATED WD PIPE SUPPORT FOR LENGTH SEE COMPLETELY WRAP TREATED WD BLOCKING W/ ROOF MEMBRANE. FASTEN MEMBRANE TO BLOCKING W/ 2 11/4' SST SCREWS AND SEAM PLATES AT FLAP EDGE. FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES SEE REFRIGERATION PIPE SUPPORT BASE DETAIL 3" MAX 11/2"..V-0" THE ENTIRE OUTSIDE EDGE OF EACH PAD MUST BE 100% WELDED, EXCEPT 1° WEEPHOLE INSIDE LOWER SIDE OF EACH PAD ADJACENT TO UNIT. PROBE AND CLOSE ALL GAPS AND VOIDS. PAD -TO -PAD JOINT MAY BE BUTTED, MAY BE OVERLAPPED, BUT THE MAXIMUM GAP ALLOWED IS % ". GAP BETWEEN PAD & CURB MUST NOT EXCEED 3" -HAND -WELD THE PAD ALONGSIDE THE CURB 3' -0" TYP I WALKWAY PAD DETAIL PROTECTIVE PAD MUST BE MOUNTED AROUND ALL ACTIVE ROOFTOP MOTORS (FROM LARGE HVAC UNITS TO SMALL FORCED AIR VENTS) AS WELL AS THE THREE ACTIVE SIDES OF THE ROOF HATCH. NOTE: THE ROOF MUST BE COMPLETELY PROBED PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF ANY WALKWAY PADS. NOTE: WALKPAD IS NOT REQUIRED UNDER ECONOMIZER . ='I. .L � .L LI ✓ Wiffir I I _ _ _ 'r= T I'I'��j � �I ttl• FL J ::JEI tt I 1 I 24" MAX SPAN FOR PLYWOOD PIPE BOX CAP DETAIL V4" =1' -0" REMOVE EXISTING PIPE BOX HOUSING, REFRIGERATION PIPING AND UNISTRUT FRAMING SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE WELDED TO EXISTING MEMBRANE FLASHING @ PIPE BOX CURB WRAP PVC MEMBRANE OVER TOP OF CURB, OVERLAP 2" MIN OVERLAP INSIDE CURB 11/2" OF INSUL -1 PREFORMED METAL ROOF CURB -ATTACH ROOF CURB W/ (2) - #12 TEK SCREWS @ 6° OC TO TOP STEEL ROOF DECK FLUTES ROOF DECK CONTINUES AT PIPE BOX FOR CONDENSING UNITS NOTE: PROBE ALL SEAMS BEFORE WALKPAD IS INSTALLED NOTE: FOR REFRIGERATION PENETRATIONS SEE NOTE: PAINT ALL EXPOSED METAL STRUCT MEMBERS EPS -7,C -6 112" =1' -0" ROOF TOP COMPRESSOR RACK AND FRAME 6" TUBE STEEL BEAM, SEE T/O CURB TO BE FLAT & LEVEL FOR CLAMP DETAIL SEE ROOF TOP COMPRESSOR RACK & PREMOLDED PIPE SLEEVE WELD TO ROOF MEMBRANE ROOFING MEMBRANE -TYP STRUCTURAL COLUMN AND CHANNELS, SEE CONDENSER UNIT SUPPORT DETAIL NOTE: THE SIZE OF THE MEMBRANE WRAP FOR THE REFRIGERATION PIPE SUPPORT WILL NEED TO FIELD VERIFIED. COMPLETED WRAP MEMBRANE WRAP 1 12" =1' -0" WIDTH OF 4X4 SUPPORT MEMBRANE WRAP 22" X 171/2" FOR 4X4 SUPPORT CUT MEMBRANE 4 " IN FROM EDGES A DISTANCE EQUAL TO HEIGHT OF WOOD BLOCKING. USE A HOLE PUNCH AT THE END OF EACH CUT TO CREATE A SMOOTH CIRCULAR HOLE TO PREVENT TEARING HOT AIR WELD THE COMPLETE FLAP TO THE SACRIFICIAL LAYER TYP AT BOTH ENDS NOTE: BURGLAR BARS ARE INTEGRAL WITH CURB @ RTU ONLY NOTE: PROBE ALL SEAMS BEFORE WALKPAD IS INSTALLED 3/4" PLYWOOD CAP W/ %4' RADIUS AT ALL EDGES, ATTACH W/ *12 - 21/2" SELF DRILLING, SELF - TAPPING SCREWS AT 6" OC INSUL -6 EXISTING CURB, ROOFING MEMBRANE, BATT INSULATION AND HARDWARE CLOTH TO REMAIN ABANDONED REFRIGERATION PIPING TO BE CUT BACK AS REQUIRED 112" =1' -0" DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS - _ 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 TION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY 4.14.11 . A153378- 000-1 qA R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY - D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. — 10- 0285-01 davidc 12— APR -2011 06:54 M1 RTU NTS PVC FOAM TAPE, SLNT -12 PVC MEMBRANE FULLY ADHERED FULLY WELD PERIMETER OF WALKWAY PAD — PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE WELD CURB PVC TO ROOF MEMBRANE 11/2" OF INSUL -1 *15 ROOFING SCREWS @ 12" O.C. ALL AROUND CURB, ANCHOR @ TOP OF DECK FLUTES FLASHING @ RTU CURB PREFORMED METAL ROOF CURB CHANNEL- SEE STRUC FILL OPEN FLUTE CELLS BETWEEN ROOF INSULATION & METAL DECK WITH FOAM SEALANT 2 INCHES BACK MINIMUM AT ALL 4 SIDES OF DECK OPENING 1 12" =1'-0" CCTV CAMERA, HOUSING AND MOUNT BY OWNER PAINT MOUNTING BRACKET & HOUSING COMPONENTS EPS -1, COLOR TO MATCH ADJ FIN SURFACE SLNT -13 APPLIED OVER ANCHOR HEADS /'CONT LINE OF SLNT -13 AT TOP AND SIDES BETWEEN PARAPET AND MOUNTING BRACKETAND SEAL ALONG EDGE OF BRACKET SIM AT ELEC J -BOX FILL ANCHOR HOLES W /SLNT -13 MOUNTING BRACKETS PROVIDED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR BRACKET DTL MOUNTING BRACKET INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR/ d ' � A SLNT -13 TOP & SIDE ELECT BOX '4111111110;;;;°: --ogg= T CLAMP - SEE WELD TO ROOF MEMBRANE ELEC CONDUIT - LOCATE 6' MIN FROM PARAPET PARAPET MOUNTED CCTV. PREMOLDED PIPE SLEEVE WELD TO ROOF MEMBRANE ROOFING MEMBRANE -TYP II • VENT PIPE SLEEVE NOTE: SEAM PATCH (MINIMUM PATCH SIZE IS 4" X 4" WITH %2" RADIUSED CORNERS) IhIlgg0j111111111 IIIOIIIOgllgl IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIil mi 53/48" - 51/2" OVERLAP 3/4" =1' -0" SLNT -7 APPLIED AGAIN AFTER CLAMP IS TIGHTENED AT TOP OF SLEEVE CLAMP SLNT -7 BEHIND INSIDE OF PIPE SLEEVE PIPE SLEEVE TALL CONE FLASHING @ FLUE FLASHING ONLY PVC PIPE WALL CLAMP DETAIL REVIEWED CODE FOR DE COMPLIANCE t APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 C" of Tukwjia t1UIL ING DIVISION 1 V2" =1, -O" 11/2" WELDED SEAM 1/2" MIN. BETWEEN PLATE EDGE AND WELD ZONE. /2" MIN. BETWEEN PLATE EDGE AND BACK EDGE OF MEMBRANE ROLL. FASTENER PENETRATES TOP FLUTE OF STEEL DECK 3" MIN. FASTENER IS NEITHER OVERDRIVEN (CAUSING WRINKLES) NOR UNDERDRIVEN (HEAD OF FASTENER IS RAISED). PLATES LESS THAN /2" AWAY FROM THE WELD ZONE MUST BE STRIPPED -IN. HEAT WELDED SEAM NOTE: BURGLAR BARS ARE INTEGRAL WITH CURB @ RTU ONLY RTU PVC FOAM TAPE, SLNT -12 PVC MEMBRANE FULLY ADHERED WELD PERIMETER OF WALKWAY PAD 0 z.UJ ffi > 0 NTS 11/x" OF INSUL -1 WELD CURB PVC TO ROOF MEMBRANE PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE 2" MAX *15 ROOFING SCREWS @ 12" O.C. ALL AROUND CURB, ANCHOR @ TOP OF DECK FLUTES FLASHING @ RTU CURB PREFORMED METAL ROOF CURB FILL OPEN FLUTE CELLS BETWEEN ROOF INSULATION & METAL DECK WITH FOAM SEALANT 2 INCHES BACK MINIMUM AT ALL 4 SIDES OF DECK OPENING NOTE: PROBE ALL SEAMS BEFORE WALKPAD IS INSTALLED 1 V2" =1' -0" I I I RECEIVED APR 212011 PERMIT CENTER ` TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 1ROOF TIRE PROJECT CODE 270627 TION LL PLAN & DETAILS i SHEET A140 A PAINT GRID C -20 NOT USED 116" =1' -0" 1 COLOR KEY & LEGEND C -1 RED C -8 OSHA YELLOW C -20 LIGHT CHAMPAGNE PAINT GRID C -20 0 ❑ ❑ 0 a JLJN I 1 — 1 PAINT GRID C -20 NOT USED PAINT GRID C -20 AN PAINT GRID C -20 PAINT GRID C -20 2' -6' DIA. PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE SPHERICAL BOLLARD — PREFINISHED, C -1 'SLNT -2 OVER JOINT FILLER SPHERICAL BOLLARD 3" DIA. CONCRETE FILLED STL PIPE SET IN CONCRETE CAISSON — VERIFY DIAMETER OF CAISSON TO MATCH PRECAST BOLLARD NOTE: TOUCH UP PAINT PROVIDED UNDER SPEC SECT 09 9100, EPS -11, FOR REPAIR OF PREFINISHED COATING DAMAGED DURING INSTALLATION REF: A201 AIL ■■ MEM =1� O I■■ 1-- ■■ MIME '■ ■ ■:■ ❑ 1 EXIST BULLSEYE TARGET LETTERS 1 PAINT ENTRY GRID C -20 • I ❑ ❑ ❑ NOT USED 41.5 I EXIST. PHARMACY ; r I, SIGNAGE , 1 ❑ ❑ 0 r11' -,rrMIN MIRE rbA. ■r mime ❑ ❑ a v / PAINT GRID C -20 ❑ a ❑ w ti io I 9111 CONCRETE SPERICAL BOLLARDS — SEE 0 ❑ 0 ❑ a ❑ 1❑ 7 ❑ ❑ • NI MI ❑ a 71121 a / PAINT GRID C -20 ❑ a • ❑ ❑ ❑ a O 0 ] 0 ❑ L —� 12„ =1,.....0„ REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE PAINT GRID C -20 � APPROVED 1 MAY 0 5 2011 IC 0 a a ❑ PROPOSED FRONT ELEVATION 116 " =1` -0" City of Tukwila BUILDING nivICIfFJ U I. [1 Ilk as I�IIIII s i illll!m Vol 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 I_L r 11 . 11 11 .I !11 UP REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE BOLLARD AND REPAIR CURB RAMP AS REQUIRED TO MATCH EXISTING. r - %"7111 Iil IIIIIIIIIII1111 Im1111111111111 ION Q EQ CONCRETE SPERICAL BOLLARDS — SEE MULVAN NY: G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 \\ 10. 9. 0. 13\ cacheroot \ttctctv02 \ttcfile08 \TGTCADAE \Remodels \0627_WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a201.dgn EQ EQ I 8383 1STERE A CHIT NEft STATE OF ' ; INGtON =+I L N R. FLEENER - ARCHITECT FRONT SIDEWALK PLAN 116" =1'-0" I - - - -7 1 I I I I I I I — I I L _ I— I I— 1 1 , I u1 DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CGO LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY 4.18.11 A153378 -000 -1 / ry R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 davidc 18— APR -2011 10:19 0 7 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER w A 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627MR2o1oo8 VERSION TITLE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SIDEWALK PLANS Om�ar 270e27 CGO LL & DETAILS T -0627 SOUTH CENTER. WA RECEIVED APR 212011 PERMIT CENTER 0 11' -5' U, a_ U- ti d 0 cc P18 20 GA. TO 9' -0' AFF P7F SIM. 20 GA ABOVE 9' -0' rr /AI CARD READER P18 >- 20 GA. TO 9' -0' AFF P7F > SIM. 20 GA ABOVE 9' -0' EVIDENCE LOCK -UP 217 3' -9%2' 217 —L I ALIGN FINISHES ENLARGED PLAN 13' -3' HRBP 201 P2 DTL 202 202 ///////////// / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /// SWING 203 P2 P2 EQUIPMENT ROOM 205 STORAGE 204 DISTRICT OFFICE 200 DTL 206 DTL 207 L 1 O N 0 P2 ENCLAV 216 P2 APBP 208 9' -5' ALIGN . FINISHES EACH SIDE 21' -1' P2 0%2' 7' -111/2' CONFERENCE 209 LOUNGE 215 r I I I CARD READER 1' -6' ALIGN FINISHES EACH SIDE P2 P2 INVESTIGATION CENTER 210 MEN 218 10' -21V2' P2 OFFICE 212 N 0- N P2 OFFICE 213 TTS 214 1/4"=1'-0" EVIDENCE LOCK -UP 217 - — — - — — — - HRBP 201 DTL 202 1- t SWING 1 203 V X r T ENCLAVE 216 x LOUNGE 215 218 ✓ 4 DISTRICT OFFICE 200 X WOMEN 219 CONFERENCE 209 STORAGE 204 r X EQUIPMENT ROOM L_ 205 DTL 206 x L t r L i DTL 207 H I- ✓ L r APBP 208 x -r INVESTIGATION CENTER 210 OFFICE 212 is OFFICE 213 I 214 ENLARGED CEILING PLAN 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South Center R \ActiveCAD \0627a331.dgn 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2com I t 503223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 111111 IIIIII TARGET Ir 1111111 1111111 illilli 11111111 I 1/4"=1'-0" DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08-06-10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 PROJECT CODE 270627 PERMIT SET CENTER PLANS DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 -NOV -2010 07:59. CARD READER 1 - CARD READER 1 - ELECTRIC STRIKE 1 - POWER SUPPLY FOR ELECTRIC STRIKE MAY 0 5 2011 t REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukyjjla BUILDING DMSI(1N FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH MATLS OR OPENINGS UNO, EXCLUSIVE OF CERAMIC TILE B. FOR DOOR, ROOM FINISH, AND OWNER SUPPLIED MATL & EQUIP SCHEDULES, SEE SHTS A601 C. PARTITION TYPES INDICATE LOCATION FOR BLOCKING, FINISHES, ETC. SEE SHEET A351 FOR PARTITION TYPES D. PLYWOOD BLOCKING IS INCLUDED IN PARTITION TYPE, FOR SIDE OF WALL SEE REFERENCE SIDE E. FOR TYPICAL CONNECTION OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS TO EXTERIOR WALLS SEE F. SPOT ELEVATION (EXAMPLE: + 99' -11 ") REPRESENTS CONCRETE SLAB ELEVATION G. SET TOP OF FLOOR DRAIN STRAINERS LEVEL WITH FINISHED FLOOR SURFACE. H. ALL ANGLES ARE 45° OR MULTIPLES OF 45° UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE J. FOR STUD WALLS EXTENDING TO ROOF DECK SEE REFL CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. ACT CEILING GRIDS ARE CENTERED IN ROOMS PER SPECIFICATION 09 5100 CRITERIA UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE B. PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTION AT ALL WALLS EXTENDING TO ROOF OR STRUCTURE PER SEE 12/A501 C. VERIFY LOCATIONS OF HANGING DEPARTMENT SIGNS WITH TARGET'S IN STORE MARKETING. LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY D. PROVIDE QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF DIRECTIONAL/ EXIT SIGNS AS REQUIRED BY FIRE MARSHAL HAVING JURISDICTION E. SEE E111 AND M111 FOR LIGHT FIXTURE AND DIFFUSER RELOCATION. COORDINATEFOR REMOVAL/ REUSE OF LIGHTS DIFFUSERS AND SPRINKLER HEADS F. FOR ALIGNMENT OF SPRINKLER IN SALES FLOOR CEILING SEE SPEC, DIV 15 G. FOR CEILING GRID BRACING AND EDGE CONDITIONS IN SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY SEE CEILING LEGEND EXISTING ACT CEILING APPROX AREA WHERE LIGHTS ARE ROTATED 90 °. THE OSR AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE AMOUNT OF CEILING TILE TO BE REPLACED. NEW ACT CEILING WALL LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER as as as ti. mi�' rj_1111_M_,. _1 - -- - — - __L - I I I No 3 .7 o 6 b KEY PLAN TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-06-10 TITLE INVESTIGATION 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 i PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL CENTER PLANS o O - --0 SHEET A331 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA EVIDENCE LOCK -UP 217 %1 —OH- COUNTER PL -la BASE PL -2a HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a HM DOOR - AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a C-5a — CPT -20 HRBP 201 C-5a CPT -20 DTL 202 — } p Aer ti �C -5a — CPT -20 SWING 203 STORAGE C -5a1 204 ■IN ti HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -9 HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -9 -WC -11 HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -9 HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a C -5a WC -11 C-5a \CPT -20 EQUIPMENT ROOM 205 WC -13 CPT -20 J DISTRICT OFFICE 200 • ti C -5a CPT -20 DTL 207 HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a 1 ti WC -13 C -5a CPT -20 ENCLAVE 216 WC -13 —/ I WC -13 C-5a-) -WC -13 CPT -20 HM DOOR AND FRAME WC -13 IPS -6, C -7a C -5a LOUNGE 215 a F-- CPT-2O APBP 208 WC -13 CONFERENCE 209 CPT -20 WC -13 1/2' PLYWOOD BLOCKING FOR TV MOUNTING BOTTOM OF PLYWOOD AT 5' -0' AFF� WC -13 CPT -20 r-T MEN 218 r HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a INVESTIGATION CENTER 210 WC -13 CPT 20 ENLARGED FINISH AND BLOCKING PLAN 8' -O• MILLWORK ELEVATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 • • • 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2_com I t 503223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a332.dgn 1" =1' -0" 8383 BRI STAT ISTERED RCHITEC 4 FL F WA GTON (Asa BRIAN R_ FLEENER - ARCHITECT 1/4"=1'-0" HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a "/2' PLYWOOD BLOCKING FOR (2) TV MOUNTING BOTTOM OF PLYWOOD AT 7' -0' AFF — LIj- -- I HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a WC -13— ∎ HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a r C -5a CPT -20 OFFICE 213 C -5a TTS 214 r FINISH SPECIFICATIONS: ISSUES AND REVISIONS SECTION CODE MANUFACTURER PATTERN COLOR SIZE NOTES N °�,,�,WA988a DRAWN BY FLOOR FINISH: CARPET CPT-20 INTERFACE WIND II 9229- PLATEAU 19 "X19" �" v' ' / / 7 / \ ,- / \ - i" �' '>!" i" �' / " V- / / V" - �,�' \ > v_ b rn — TK -380 -234, HD_ EGGSHELL TKCS #793 C-7a HOT SPRING STONES — DOOR FRAME C-9 SEE SPECIFICATION 8' -O• MILLWORK ELEVATION 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 • • • 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2_com I t 503223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a332.dgn 1" =1' -0" 8383 BRI STAT ISTERED RCHITEC 4 FL F WA GTON (Asa BRIAN R_ FLEENER - ARCHITECT 1/4"=1'-0" HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a "/2' PLYWOOD BLOCKING FOR (2) TV MOUNTING BOTTOM OF PLYWOOD AT 7' -0' AFF — LIj- -- I HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a WC -13— ∎ HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6, C -7a r C -5a CPT -20 OFFICE 213 C -5a TTS 214 r FINISH SPECIFICATIONS: ISSUES AND REVISIONS SECTION CODE MANUFACTURER PATTERN COLOR SIZE NOTES N °�,,�,WA988a DRAWN BY FLOOR FINISH: CARPET CPT-20 INTERFACE WIND II 9229- PLATEAU 19 "X19" — CHECKED BY RUBBER BASE SEE SPECIFICATION WALL FINISH: PAINT C-5a — TK -380 -202, H_D_ EGGSHELL TKCS #131 C-5a BEIGE — FIELD WALL PAINT C-7a — TK -380 -234, HD_ EGGSHELL TKCS #793 C-7a HOT SPRING STONES — DOOR FRAME C-9 SEE SPECIFICATION WALL COVERING WC -11 DESIGNTEX PARALLAX II 6063 -302 CONFUCIUS — ACCENT VINYL WALLCOVERING WC-13 MAHARAM BEND 399140 001 COTTON — FIELD VINYL WALLCOVERING PLASTIC LAMINATES: PL -la WILSONART 10776 -60 KENSINGTON MAPLE — COUNTER PL -2a WILSONART D91-60 SLATE GREY — BASE TARGET DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 VERSION PERMIT SET INVESTIGATION CENTER FINISH &BLOCKING PLAN N °�,,�,WA988a DRAWN BY CONFIGURATION R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 i RobH 09 —NOV -2010 07:59 -:"D REVIEWED FOR E COMPLIANCE a APPROVED MAY 05 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION GENERAL NOTES — BLOCKING A. PLYWOOD USED FOR BLKG IS SHOWN IN PARTITION TYPE. BLOCKING KEYNOTE IS USED TO IDENTIFY LOCATION AND SIDE OF WALL - NOT TO INDICATE ADDITIONAL PLYWD. FOR PARTITION TYPE SEE A351. B. NOT USED C. PROVIDE APPROPRIATE BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED HARDWARE AND MISC COMPONENTS. D. FOR EXT WALLS WHERE INSUL IS NOT REQUIRED AND GYP BD IS ELIMINATED BEHIND FIXTURES, ADD 2 x 4 AT BASE AND FURR OUT FACE OF 2 x BLOCKING AND BASE TO MATCH FACE OF GYP BD WALL ABOVE FLOOR FINISH GENERAL NOTES A. SYMBOL INDICATES K -3 LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. B. SYMBOL INDICATES RB LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. CONTINUE RB 6' BEHIND FIXTURE SALES FLOOR DOORS. C. VYVY SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -3 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -3 TO BE 48' HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. SEE D. ALL CPT,RF, RB, CT, QT AND MT ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR E. - - -- SYMBOL INDICATES LOCATIONS WHERE QT -5 BASE IS LOCATED. TYPICALLY THIS BASE IS LOCATED IN THE DRY PRODUCE ROOM WHERE THE HEAVY DUTY BASE IS NOT CALLED OUT. F. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -2) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOOR ON ALL SIDES. G. FLOOR FINISH CHANGES BETWEEN ROOMS OCCUR AT DOOR CENTERLINES TYPICAL. SEE A601 FOR ADDITIONAL FLOOR FINISH INFORMATION K. FOR BASE CONDITIONS NOT SHOWN ON A121, SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ON A601 & A351 L. INSTALL CPT -1A ON FURNITURE FLATS. SEE FIXTURE PLAN FOR LOCATION. N. FOR SST CORNER GUARD / VERTICAL SST END CAPS TO RB CONNECTION SEE P. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -1) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND BROAD LOOM CARPET (CPT -1) R. ••••• SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -4 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -4 TO BE 48' HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. FOR K -4 WALL CAP AND CORNER GUARD / END CAP DETAILS, SEE /l� f INDICATES APPROX NEW QT -1 INDICATES APPROX RF -3 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX RF -1 REPLACEMENT EXCLUDING RF -1 PATCH /FILL AREAS INDICATES APPROX CPT -1 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX CPT -6 REPLACEMENT WALL LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER T T T — — t—, _ • I I � L 1 I 71,1, I I I — - Et- ill — — - — - -0 — -0 0 0 KEY PLAN t b b b 0 - -0 ■ SHEET i A332 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA TARGET STORE South CENTER WA STORE T0627MRZO,00a VERSION TITLE INVESTIGATION CENTER FINISH &BLOCKING PLAN N °�,,�,WA988a PROJECT CODE Z' °62'" CONFIGURATION - -0 ■ SHEET i A332 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA ED CD 25' -10V2' SOAP DISPENSER- & TD -7, MOUNT ABOVE SINK 1O P7F SIM 20 GA ABOVE 10' -0' AFF P11B 20 GA TO 10' -0' AFF N N 0 P11B 20 GA TO 10' -0' AFF 0 0 AIMM =IV co r; ■ 1 1 1 , 1 I P7A 1 , ABOVE II COOLER HAND SINK COMP SINr DRY PRODUCE LABELING ROOM 184 HEAVY DUTY BASE M5 PRODUCE COOLER 183 FOR COOLER DIMENSIONS SEE SHEET A355 r P7A > ABOVE COOLER P7F }- SIM 20 GA ABOVE 10' -0' AFF BACKROOM PLAN ■ - BOLLARDS I SEE 4' roe 2' -4' FOR COOLER DIMENSIONS SEE SHEET A355 DOOR LOCATED IN P7 ABOVE COOLER 2' -4" ACk r$27 TIP M5 -MEAT COOLER 182 L S P7F 20 GA ABOVE COOLER KP23 2' -34' s -- r ALIGN FINISHES P7F >- 20 GA ABOVE COOLER P23> -- PROVIDE HEAVY DUTY BASES TO PROTECT' COOLER & FREEZER DOOR OPENINGS - TYP, SEE 4V2' 17' -4'/2' 4V 412 2' -4V2' c, m P7F 20 GA ABOVE FREEZE P23 49 � ® 41!) 0 WOOD THERMAL SIM BREAK 1 M5 • FREEZER 181 WOOD THERMAL BREAK FOR FREEZER DIMENSIONS SEE SHEET A355 WOOD THERMAL BREAK HEAVY DUTY BASE ,n PTA ABOVE COOLER 1/4"=1'-0" 40.0 low• I� N 0_ 20 GA ABOVE FREEZER M N 0_ COOLER/FREEZER PLAN L 8' -4' M5 DAIRY COOLER 180 FOR COOLER DIMENSIONS SEE SHEET A355 20 GA ABOVE COOLER P7F I 1 L-1 20 GA ABOVE 1 COOLER _�__,_ - - GC TO VERIFY CONC SLAB IN FRONT OF THEI FREEZER DOOR IS LEVEL AND PLUMB WITH THE FINSHEDI FLOOR OF FREEZER. GRIND THE HIGH SPOTS IN THE CONC SLAB TO ALLOW FOR DOOR TO SWING OPEN M N 0_ P23 • PROVIDE HEAVY DUTY BASES TO PROTECT COOLER & FREEZER DOOR OPENINGS - TYP, SEE (180.) DOOR LOCATED IN P7 ABOVE COOLER 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 U MU LVAN NY G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2com I t 503.2218030 I f 503223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a351.dgn V4"=1'-0" JANITOR SINK WC -3 & V2' PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD TO EXTEND 2' -0' MIN PAST JANITOR SINK VACUUM PUMP ■ III COOLER /FREEZER GENERAL NOTES A. MECHANICALLY FASTEN PLYWOOD ONLY AT THE VERTICAL PANEL JOINTS OF COOLER /FREEZER PANELS. APPLY CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE BETWEEN THE PANEL JOINTS. B. VERIFY SIZE OF THE COOLER /FREEZER BOX W/ SHOP DRAWING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. SEE SHEET A355 FOR COOLER /FREEZER DIMENSIONS C. GC TO VERIFY THE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB 7' -0' IN FRONT OF THE COOLER /FREEZER DOORS ARE LEVEL AND PLUMB WITH THE COOLER /FREEZER ENTRY THRESHOLDS (NOT TOP OF TILE). IF THE FLOOR IS NOT LEVEL - GRIND FLAT PRIOR TO TILE INSTALATION. D. FOR STRUCTURAL COLUMNS LOCATED IN COOLERS, SEE REFRIGERATION DRAWINGS FOR COLUMN PENETRATION THROUGH THE COOLER CEILING PANEL. ABOVE THE CEILING PANEL, WRAP THE COLUMN W/ BATT INSUL TO 6' -0' ABOVE THE COOLER. PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER AROUND BATT INSUL E. ALL WOOD THERMAL BREAKS AND WOOD SHIMS ARE TO BE PRESERVATIVE TREATED F. CONCRETE SLAB DIMENSIONS TO BE COORDINATED W /COOLER SHOP DRAWINGS DRY PRODUCE LABELING ROOM 184 COORDINATE HANGER ROD FOR EVAP COILS W /CEILING GRID AND /OR COOLER PANELS 7 // /7 // // // '7 '7 %/ .j PRODUCE COOLER 183 ti T A r' , , \ p • S • r MEAT COOLER 182 z N • 20 GA WC -3 OVER V2' PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD WAINSCOT 20 G A AMP' APIPM1/412/4 cp 0 N VACUUM PUMP ROOM PLAN VACUUM PUMP SEE V4"=1'-0" PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN TOP OF PANEL EL = 109' -11' FIN FLR EL = 100' -0' 4 n 11 \ I; 11 • 11 11 lI II 11 II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II / II it :✓ PLYWD @ COOLER /FREEZER DOORS 1/4 " =1' -0" COOLER /FREEZER DOOR PANEL COOLER /FREEZER DOOR COOLER /FREEZER PANEL. JOINT PLYWD STOPS AT COOLER /FREEZER DOOR PANEL JOINT PLYWD INSTALLED V2' OFF THE FINISHED FLOOR i�..1111♦ 11 • 4' PROVIDE P7 HARDWARE CLOTH WALL ABOVE COOLER /FREEZER, HARDWARE CLOTH TO 4' -0' ABOVE COOLER/ FREEZER, STUDS TO DECK J COOLER :/ / PARTITION TYPE P7A DETAIL ACT -3 a 9' -6' AFF DRY PRODUCE LABELING ROOM 184 1/4"=1'-0" 1/2" =1' —O' WALL LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH MATLS OR OPENINGS UNO, EXCLUSIVE OF CERAMIC TILE B. FOR DOOR, ROOM FINISH, AND OWNER SUPPLIED MATL & EQUIP SCHEDULES, SEE SHTS A601 C. PARTITION TYPES INDICATE LOCATION FOR BLOCKING, FINISHES, ETC. SEE SHEET A351 FOR PARTITION TYPES REFERENCE SIDE D. PLYWOOD BLOCKING IS INCLUDED IN PARTITION TYPE, FOR SIDE OF WALL SEE E. FOR TYPICAL CONNECTION OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS TO EXTERIOR WALLS SEE F. SPOT ELEVATION (EXAMPLE: + 99' -11') REPRESENTS CONCRETE SLAB ELEVATION G. SET TOP OF FLOOR DRAIN STRAINERS LEVEL WITH FINISHED FLOOR SURFACE. H. ALL ANGLES ARE 45° OR MULTIPLES OF 45° UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE J. FOR STUD WALLS EXTENDING TO ROOF DECK SEE CEILING LEGEND EXISTING ACT CEILING APPROX AREA WHERE LIGHTS ARE ROTATED 90 °. THE OSR AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE AMOUNT OF CEILING TILE TO BE REPLACED. NEW ACT CEILING ppm" REFL CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. ACT CEILING GRIDS ARE CENTERED IN ROOMS PER SPECIFICATION 09 5100 CRITERIA UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE B. PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTION AT ALL WALLS EXTENDING TO ROOF OR STRUCTURE PER SEE 12/A501 C. VERIFY LOCATIONS OF HANGING DEPARTMENT SIGNS WITH TARGET'S IN STORE MARKETING. LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY D. PROVIDE QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF DIRECTIONAL/ EXIT SIGNS AS REQUIRED BY FIRE MARSHAL HAVING JURISDICTION E. SEE E111 AND M111 FOR LIGHT FIXTURE AND DIFFUSER RELOCATION. COORDINATEFOR REMOVAL/ REUSE OF LIGHTS DIFFUSERS AND SPRINKLER HEADS F. FOR ALIGNMENT OF SPRINKLER IN SALES FLOOR CEILING SEE SPEC, DIV 15 G. FOR CEILING GRID BRACING AND EDGE CONDITIONS IN SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY SEE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED HAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1/21 PLYWOOD ATTACHED TO COOLER PANEL DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08-06-10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 i RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08:00 M5 COOLER 3625125 -30 MTL STUD EXISTING WALL HARDARE CLOTH GENERAL PARTITION NOTES: A. PARTITIONS ARE DIMENSIONED IN PLAN FROM FINISH FACE TO FINISH FACE. EXCLUSIVE OF CERAMIC TILE B. ALL WALL TYPES SHOWN MAY NOT BE USED C. CRITERIA FOR PARTITION HEIGHTS (OCCUPIED SPACES ONLY) PARTITIONS WITHOUT SUSPENDED CEILINGS ON BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION EXTEND TO STRUCTURE PARTITIONS WITH SUSPENDED CEILINGS ON BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION TERMINATE 4' ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS, UNO PARTITIONS WITH SUSPENDED CEILINGS ON ONE SIDE AND NO CEILING ON THE OTHER SIDE OF PARTITION EXTEND TO STRUCTURE WITH GYP BD FULL HEIGHT ON ONE SIDE, UNO 'F' AS PART OF PARTITION TYPE INDICATOR DESIGNATES EXCEPTIONS OR CLARIFICATIONS TO THE ABOVE CRITERIA D. ALL METAL STUDS ARE 25 GAUGE AND SPACED 24' OC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. FOR ADDITONAL INFORMATION SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION: 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. E. MOISTURE RESISTANT GYP BD (MR GYP BRD) IS REQ'D FOR ALL WALLS BUILT AGAINST EXT WALLS F. ALL GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD FINISHES TO BE HELD 12' OFF OF FLOOR PARTITION TYPES REFERENCE SIDE F = FULL HEIGHT S = SOUND RATED ACOUSTICAL PARTITION X = FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION B = BATT INSULATION TO 6' ABOVE CEILING SEE PARTITION TYPE BELOW FOR CONSTRUCTION TYPE HARDWARE CLOTH ENCLOSURE DETAIL 41/4' Li METAL STUD GYP BD (MR GYP BD WHEN a EXT WALL) 3%1 t4 5/8' 5' NOM 47/8' ACT U GYP BD METAL STUD GYP BD 3%' 5 8' P1 P2 3V2' NOM 3%' ACT U' I NOTE: AT SIM CONDITION USE 6' STUD METAL STUD HARDWARE CLOTH NOTE: FOR PTA PARTITION TYPE, HARDWARE CLOTH IS ONLY 4' -0' HIGH SEE 5/A351 5/8' I I 6' 1 1/21 71/4' NOM 7/8' ACT 7 /4" GYP BD METAL STUD GYP BD DRY PRODUCE NOTE: AT SIM CONDITION LABELING RM 58' 6' I I 5 /8I TOD1O'-O' AFF OOD P6 6 1/2' ACT GYP BD II METAL STUD PLYWOOD TO 10' -0' AFF P7 /P7A Y2' M5 fiI COOLER/ FREEZER PANEL PLYWOOD TO 4' -0' AFF Pll NOTE: HOLD PLYWD V2' OFF THE FLOOR. END PLYWD AT THE PANEL JOINT CLOSEST TO THE DOOR SEE P23 6' 11 /2' METAL STUD PLYWOOD AS INDICATED P18 1 1/2" =1' -0" RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER LATCH SIDE FOR CURB CONSTRUCTION SEE 4/A352 COOLER /FREEZER DOOR IN CLOSED POSSTION r HINGE SIDE COOLER /FREEZER DOOR IN OPENED POSSTION . -r I PROVIDE 1" CLEARENCE FROM EDGE OF CLOSED DOOR TO HEAVY DUTY BASE HEAVY DUTY BASE - TAPPER THE EDGE OF HEAVY DUTY BASE AWAY FROM THE DOOR @ 45° HEAVY DUTY BASE - TAPPER THE EDGE OF HEAVY DUTY BASE AWAY FROM THE DOOR @ 45° START THE HEAVY DUTY CURB 6 " BACK FROM THE DOOR OPENING HEAVY DUTY BASE @ COOLER /FREEZER DOORS 1 1/2" = 1' -0" - --0 — — o - — - - - — -0 — —.0 KEY PLAN b 6 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-06-10 TITLE n� PROJECT CODE 270627 CONGURATION LL B A C K R O O, ♦, PLANS SHEET A351 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" ADJ ROOM Ill III II III III COOLER PANEL 1/2" PLYWD- SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION INSTALL 1/2" ABOVE COOLER FLOOR i i i i i mmmmmlad mmmlm a• 4 • FLOOR DETAIL @ COOLER COVED SST BASE, FOR NOTES SEE QUARRY TILE COOLER FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0 SLNT -4 UNDER COOLER PANEL BY COOLER INSTALLER 1 12" =1' -0" FILL CAVITY W/ THINSET MORTAR 0. TREAD TAPE FTS- 6 TILE TO CONC TRANSTION SEE SPEC 09 3000 INSTALL COMPLETELY INSIE THE DOOR FRAME CONC SLAB EL= 100' -0" T/0 SLAB QT TO CONC SLAB TRANSITION 6"=1'-0" NOT USED NOT USED ADJ ROOM COUNTERSUNK SST *12 X 2%2' WOOD SCREWS. PRESEREVATIVE TREATED 2x6.ROUT 2x TO ALLOW FOR ANCHORS & SEISMIC ANGLE FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0' COOLER /FREEZER WALL PANEL COOLER/ FREEZER NOTE: ATTACH 2x6 TO COOLER PANEL FRAMING. SEE COOLER /FREEZER SHOP DRAWINGS FOR FRAMING LOCATION. ALIGN SPLICED 2x W/ COOLER /FREEZER FRAMING SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS 18 GA COVED SST BASE, W /%' MIN COVE, ATTACHED TO WOOD BLOCKING W/ SONNEBORN PREMIUM ADHESIVE, OR EQUAL,SST BASE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GC SEISMIC CLIP & ANCHORS STAINLESS STEEL BASE FOR SEISMIC CLIPS 3"=1'-0" NOT USED NOT USED a• f 53/4' 2/4 I OI /4" I FREEZER WALL PANELS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY FIXTURE CONTR SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR FREEZER ROOM DIMENSIONS 3° 3" MAX MIN a• d 1 1 SEE PLANS FOR BASE TYPE -1 FREEZER FLOOR 0 1119, L UNDER PNL- CONT 4 CONCRE TEFLOOR �►��������� %2' PRESERVATIVE TREATED �����`���� PLYWD OVER (3) 2x4 PRESERVATIVE ��♦�1r1r1I TREATED WOOD BLOCKING ���� ♦� *� +� (2) LAYERS OF 3" INSUL -2 INSTALLED WITH STAGGERED JOINTS - ---- 4" CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB VAPOR BARRIER, EXTEND 2" ABOVE FINISHED CONC FLOOR 6 "GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE DO NOT UNDERCUT SLAB, FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES EXISTING WALL AND SLAB 4 FREEZER DETAIL @ EXISTING PARTITION BASE PLATE 3 /9 "X 6 "X 6" W 4 - 5/8° DIA. HILTI KWIK BOLT II SST EXP ANCHORS (OR EQUAL) IPS -6, ■ ` Ye 3 ♦ C -8 , T.,.# T 1 6 °1 / ♦`` - -- -/ 0 T/0 STEEL PIPE 1 12" = 1' -0" BOLLARD SLEEVE STEEL PIPE %" STL BASE PLATE. CONT WELD TO 4' STL PIPE -PAINT IPS -6, C -8 (E) CONC SLAB • 1 i �1 BOLLARD W /STEEL BASE PLATE ANCHOR 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a352.dgn 3/4" =1' -0" NOTE: AT OUTSIDE CORNERS RETURN SST BASE TO FINISHED WALL EXTERIOR WALL AT SIM CONDITION SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE 5/8' PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS LIGHT BROOM FINISH AT TOP OF CONC, IPS- 15,C -31 4' X 6' X 18 GA SST ANGLE, PLACE OVER BED OF SLNT -4 HEM EDGE 1' CONCRETE FILL SLOPE 1' TO WALL SURFACE QUARRY TILE FLOORING FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS Y2' 0 EXPANSION BOLT 24' O.C. 3' MIN EMBEDMENT HEAVY DUTY BASE @ FRAMED WALL ADJ ROOM %2" PLYWD- SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION INSTALL 1/2" ABOVE FLOOR FLOOR SLAB EL =100', 0" 1 12" =1' -0" FREEZER PANEL SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS FREEZER 16 GA SST BASE W/ 3/8' MIN COVED BASE SET IN SLNT -4, PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GC FREEZER FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS SLNT -4 UNDER FREEZER PANEL BY FREEZER INSTALLER STAINLESS STEEL WALL BASE @ FREEZER ADJ ROOM FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" • d • d II VERIFY W/ MFR. OA" FREEZER •_a d FREEZER WALL PANEL SEE PLANS FOR BASE TYPE SUBFLOOR DETAIL @ FREEZER 3"=1'--0" FREEZER FLOOR EL =10 0' -0' SLNT -4 UNDER PNL- CONT THERMAL BLOCKING CENTERED UNDER FREEZER PANEL -1/2 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD OVER (3) 2x4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING COOLER PANEL SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS LIGHT BROOM FINISH AT TOP OF CONC, IPS- 15,C -31 4" X 6" X 18 GA SST COOLER ANGLE, PLACED OVER A BED OF SLNT -4 HEM EDGE 1" CONCRETE FILL SLOPE 1" TO WALL SURFACE QUARRY TILE FLOORING(D2) COOLER FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS 1/2" 0 EXPANSION BOLT 24" O.C. 3" MIN EMBEDMENT SILICONE SLNT UNDER COOLER PANEL BY COOLER INSTALLER ()QUARRY TILE FLOORING FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0° NOTE: AT OUTSIDE CORNERS RETURN SST BASE TO FINISHED WALL HEAVY DUTY BASE DETAIL @ COOLER 1 12" =1' -0" NOT USED COOLER 0 FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" • . ..a 4 VAPOR BARRIER, EXTEND 2" ABOVE FINISHED CONC FLOOR COMPACTED GRANULAR BASE NOTE: FOR VAPOR BARRIER UNDER MAIN BLDG SLAB (IF ANY), SEE SECTION 03 3000 1/2" PLY WD- SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION INSTALL 1/2" ABOVE FLOOR OFLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" 4• NOTE: AT OUTSIDE CORNERS RETURN SST BASE TO FINISHED WALL TARGET 11/2"=V-0" COOLER PANEL SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS LIGHT BROOM FINISH AT TOP OF CONC, IPS- 15,C -31 4" X 6" X 18 GA SST ANGLE, PLACED OVER A BED OF SLNT -4 HEM EDGE 1" CONCRETE FILL SLOPE 1° TO WALL SURFACE QUARRY TILE FLOORING COOLER FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS 1/2" 0 EXPANSION BOLT @ 24" O.C. 3° MIN EMBEDMENT SLNT -4 UNDER PANEL CONT HEAVY DUTY BASE DETAIL @ COOLER BRIAN R. FLEENER R HiT CT 1 12" = 1' -0" COOLER I I VERIFY W/ MFRI FREEZER • 4. FREEZER WALL PANEL SEE PLANS FOR BASE TYPE SLNT -4 UNDER PNL- CONT FREEZER FLOOR EL= 100' -0 SST BASE, FOR NOTES SEE A352 SIM: QT COVE BASE ADJ ROOM QUARRY TILE FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" 111111111111111111111111111111 COOLER COOLER PANEL COVED SST BASE, FOR NOTES SEE 111111111111111111111111111111 4 n FLOOR DETAIL @ COOLER QUARRY TILE FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 UNDER COOLER PANEL BY COOLER INSTALLER D2 QUARRY TILE FLOORING FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" ADJ ROOM NOTE: AT OUTSIDE CORNERS RETURN SST BASE TO FINISHED WALL 3"=1'-0" COOLER PANEL SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS LIGHT BROOM FINISH AT TOP OF CONC, IPS- 15,C -31 4' X 6" X 18 GA SST ANGLE, PLACED OVER A BED OF SLNT -4 HEM EDGE 1" CONCRETE FILL SLOPE 1" TO WALL SURFACE QUARRY TILE FLOORING COOLER FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" SLNT -4 CONTINUOUS 1/2" 0 EXPANSION BOLT @ 24" O.C. 3" MIN EMBEDMENT SILICONE SLNT UNDER COOLER PANEL BY COOLER INSTALLER HEAVY DUTY BASE DETAIL @ COOLER FREEZER OFREEZER FLOOR EL= 100' -0° '4 • • 4 • ADJ ROOM 1 l2" =1' -0" SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR COOLER/ FREEZER ROOM DIMENSIONS FREEZER DOOR & THRESHOLD M5 THERMAL BLOCKING CENTERED UNDER FREEZER PANEL -I /p' PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD OVER (3) 2x4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING THERMAL BLOCKING CENTERED UNDER FREEZER PANEL -1/2' PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWD OVER (3) 2x4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING '"VAPOR BARRIER, EXTEND 2' ABOVE FINISHED CONC FLOOR COMPACTED GRANULAR BASE NOTE: FOR VAPOR BARRIER UNDER MAIN BLDG SLAB (IF ANY), SEE SECTION 03 3000 SUBFLOOR DETAIL @ FREEZER 1 12" =1' -0" FREEZER PANEL 362S125 -30 MTL STUD SLNT -4 20 GA SST BENT METAL CLOSURE, PLACE OVER BED OF SLNT -4, HEM EDGE 1" EXIST STUD PARTITION WC -3 (FRP) FINISH SST CLOSURE @ COOLER/FREEZER DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS i 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 PROJECT CODE 270627 PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08:00 1 1/2"=1'-0" FLOOR SLAB EL= 100' -0" COVER WOOD BLKG W/ THRESHOLD SET IN BED OF SLNT -4 (2) LAYERS OF 3" INSUL -2 INSTALLED WITH STAGGERED JOINTS 4 " CONC RECESSED FLOOR SLAB VAPOR BARRIER, EXTEND 2" ABOVE FINISHED CONC FLOOR 6 " GRANULAR COMPACTED BASE DOOR SILL @ FREEZER REF: A351 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE t APPROVED MAY 05 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVIRInN bwl7 1 12" = 1' -0" RECEWED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 i STORE TO627 VERSION MR2010_08 08-06-10 TITLE FREEZER/COOLER DETAILS PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL i SHEET A352 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA 16' -4' PRODUCE COOLER 183 163 SF 0 V N MEAT COOLER 182 163 SF 9' -8' 5' -0' N N F 1' -8' COOLER /FREEZER PLAN 18' -2' 2' -9' 14' -8' 0 N FREEZER 181 380 SF 11' -1' 181 5' -0' DAIRY COOLER 180 275 SF F 4' -10' 8' -4' 180 5' -0' F 1' -4' 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 kA 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2.com I 1503_223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \ACtiveCAD \0627a355.dgn V4"=1'-0" --- Vj�W COD Ep FOR 1 R COMtauFTI APPROVED MAY 05 2011 Cibj al Tukwila BUILDING nIVISION DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DOOR NOTES FOR COOLERS & FREEZERS 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8 -10 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN COOLER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN FREEZER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN FREEZER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN COOLER WHITE ENAMEL DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES. RAISE DOOR 1' TO CLEAR QUARRY TILE INSTALLED ON FLOOR PERMIT SET PLANS 183 DRAWING SYMBOLS DRAWN BY A WALL FINISHES: STUCCO GALVANIZED STUCCO WHITE ENAMEL CEILING FINISHES: O nPRESSURE / STUCCO GALVANIZED RELIEF VENT, MANUFACTURER TO VERIFY QUANTITY. FLUSH MOUNTED ELECTRICAL J -BOX DIAL THERMOMETER F R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 - ■ RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08:00 - ti RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER GENERAL NOTES FOR COOLERS & FREEZERS 1. PROVIDE ALL ACCESSORIES FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 2. COOLER WALLS TO BE 4' THICK (NOM.). 3. FREEZER WALLS TO BE 6' THICK (NOM.). 4. COOLER FLOORS TO BE 1/2' QUARRY TILE. 5. SPACERS UNDER AND BEHIND COOLERS AND FREEZERS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 6. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 11 4124 FOR COOLER /FREEZER SPECIFICATIONS. 7. THE INTERIOR HEIGHTS OF ALL WALK -INS IS 9' -6'AFF DOOR NOTES FOR COOLERS & FREEZERS , TITLE COOLER & FREEZE R 180 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN COOLER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN FREEZER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN FREEZER DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES 5' x 8' (NOM) WALK -IN COOLER WHITE ENAMEL DOOR W/ 36' KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES. RAISE DOOR 1' TO CLEAR QUARRY TILE INSTALLED ON FLOOR 181 182 PLANS 183 DRAWING SYMBOLS A WALL FINISHES: STUCCO GALVANIZED STUCCO WHITE ENAMEL CEILING FINISHES: O nPRESSURE / STUCCO GALVANIZED RELIEF VENT, MANUFACTURER TO VERIFY QUANTITY. FLUSH MOUNTED ELECTRICAL J -BOX DIAL THERMOMETER F © T o- - - - - - - - - -© - - - - -o -o — — —e - -o I I 1 I I ill 0 -- i — - — - — - - — - —o PLAN KEY TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA08-06 STORE TO627 VERSION MR2010_08 -10 , TITLE COOLER & FREEZE R 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL PLANS - -o SHEET A355 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA OWNER SUPPLIED - TRASH COMPACTOR (3) NEW BOLLARDS SEE CONC FOOTING SEE STRUCTURAL OWNER SUPPLIED COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE -O REMOVE EXIST ANCHOR BOLTS FROM OLD COMPACTOR SUPPORT LEGS. PATCH CONC SLAB W/ NON- SHRINK GROUT L N- i II • Il . - - - - - I 1'14' 4' -0" I � t PO �\ u _J r5 WALL LEGEND EXISTING WALL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION COMPACTOR PLAN MET CONDUIT HOSE CHASE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR VERIFY SIZE W/ COMPACTOR SUPPLIER EXTEND 1/2' MIN THRU FDN WALL. - NEW OWNER SUPPLIED COMPACTOR POWER UNIT - REMOVE OLD UNIT AND INSTALL AT EXIST LOCATION OWNER SUPPLIED WET WIPE DISPENSER - MOUNT AT 3' -8' AFF OWNER SUPPLIED 0 STEEL WALK —OUT ENCLOSURE REMOVE EXIST STEEL ENCLOSURE & PATCH WALL AS READ OWNER SUPPLIED TRASH COMPACTOR STEEL SUPPORT LEG FOR WALK —OUT ENCLOSURE BY COMPACTOR SUPPLIER G3 STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE OWNER SUPPLIED TRASH COMPACTOR G3 RUBBER GASKET BY - COMPACTOR SUPPLIER A D' • ' . • 6 • 4 • • D D' 6 SILL AT COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE _ANEW HM DOOR & FRAME THRESHOLD SET IN SLNT -9 ^� NEW CONC SLAB NEW CONC. FOUNDATION WALL 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 1 V2" =1' -0" MU LVAN NYg G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 501223.8381 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a362.dgn SLNT -1 STEEL COMPACTOR (a ENCLOSURE WALL & FLASHING ANGLE OWNER SUPPLIED STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE 1/4" =1' -0" SLNT -1 & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES rrr_ ,u. 1-I- 1111 • r + ull l- +i!• IIII "LLi!, IIII LLL 1' IIII ' L1 x.',1111 j rrr j '1nl rrri,'llll rrra .IIII rrra� 1111 r� +� 1111 ALL 1 hN HLi!'.I)III L LLB 'lilt LI I �•. III rrri' uu • rrri :IIII rrra .IIII .rr +�' IIII ,.-11. 1111 _ - `` - L l • III I '� fl I .1111 I1 i i .lilt I , 1111 u1 II , _�_Ne� HEAD AT COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE EXIST CONC. WALL CONSTRUCTION NEW HM FRAME NEW HM DOOR 1 1/2"=V-0" ___ - - --- REMOVE EXIST GUARDRAIL & PATCH WALL AS REQD �I. 7' -4" FIELD VERIFY EXIST WALL CONSTRUCTION NEW HM DOOR & FRAME OWNER SUPPLIED COMPACTOR POWER PACK REMOVE EXIST STEEL PLATE FLOOR & PROVIDE NEW 411 CONC SLAB ON COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL, SEE STRUCT MET CONDUIT HOSE CHASE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR VERIFY SIZE W/ COMPACTOR SUPPLIER EXTEND I /2u MIN THRU FDN WALL 7 / —EXIST PERIMETER ANGLE c • c J' 11 SLNT -2 & BACKER ROD H H 1 4 t Q o 00 • '1.% • ,/ 7. i • - . • • ♦\ '♦ > a__.._a__�_a \� JOINT FILLER CONC FOOTING SEE STRUCT SECTION AT TRASH COMPACTOR EXIST CONC SLAB ; NEW CONC. FOUNDATION WALL SEE STRUC EXIST COMPACTOR PIT G3 OWNER SUPPLIED STEEL COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE SLNT -1 & BACKER ROD III U.. II EMI MEM NNE MBE MEM II MEM MEM NEM NEW CONC WALL CONSTRUCTION SLNT -1 & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES HM FRAME HM DOOR JAMB AT COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE 1 1/2"=-V-0" HM DOOR PAINT EPS -2 , COLOR TO MATCH EXIST FRAME 12" =1' -0" DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS / 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 –NOV -2010 08:00 ELEVATION AT DOCK (D. OWNER SUPPLIED COMPACTOR ENCLOSURE PAINT EPS -1, COLOR TO MATCH MAIN BLDG WALL NEW CONC. INFILL MATCH TEXTURE OF ADJACENT EXIST WALL. PAINT EPS -1 COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL NEW CONC SLAB PAINT EFS -1, COLOR TO MATCH ADJ WALL EXIST FF ELE 100' -ONIF EXIST POURED CONC FOUNDATION WALL D 1/A362 I REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 052011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVIRION RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER 1/4"=-1'-0" CL PIPE & FOOTING BOLLARD DETAIL 6' 0 STL PIPE - FILL W /NON- SHRINK GROUT - ROUND TOP PAINT EPS -1 COLOR: OSHA YELLOW DOME TOP OF CONC FTG SLNT -2 & BACKER ROD OVER 1' JOINT FILLER PAVEMENT SURFACE 16' f CONC FTG 1/A362 1: -i -. -• — A— I � ---- ---- - [ -- - r - - - - - - - 1 III I III 0 KEY PLAN TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 0f3--06-10 TITLE COMPACTOR PLAN PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL AND DETAILS 0 0 — —0 - - --0 - -0 — -0 - — 0 3/4" = V -0" SHEET A362 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA REINFORCE EXISTING GRID W /ADDITIONAL HANGER WIRES 12" OC AT DRUM SIGNAGE AREA INDICATED ON A131 - ATTACH TO LOWER CORD OF BAR JOIST ACT - REPLACE AS D1 Jr REQUIRED NNW EMI EXISTING TEE GRID S5 COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF DRUM SIGNAGE GRID CLAMPS W /TARGET ISM - 6 CLAMPS PER DRUM SIGN HANGING SUPPORT FOR DRUM SIGNS SIM: AT BARREL SIGNAGE PROVIDE EXCEL PLASTICS EP4601 GRID CLAMP - 6 WIRE SUPPORTS 12" OC MAX. PER DRUM SIGN N FULL SCALE GYP BD METAL STUD SAW KERF STUDS 2x WD HOR BLOCKING SCREW ATTACH TO STUDS W/ 2 -2 "x12 WOOD SCREWS EA END -FOR HEIGHT SEE HORIZONTAL BLOCKING @ INTERIOR WALL 3"=1'-0" - ii1I1111I 1111111111111 I IIIIIN LI i cL ACT SEE PLAN FOR STUD SIZE NESTED STUD & RUNNER CORNER BEAD -DO NOT EXTEND THRU CONTROL JOINTS GYP BD -PAINT VERTICAL SURFACE TO MATCH HORIZ - FOR PAINT SYSTEM AND COLOR SEE ACT EDGE MOLDING DIMENSION MAY VARY VERIFY W /REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE DETAIL @ BULKHEAD SECTION PLAN WOOD CAP DETAIL 6005162 -33 (6 "X2OGA) METAL STUD 2 X 6 - PROVIDE 2 PER METAL STUD WOOD CAP ABOVE EDGE OF AISLE PLAN 3"=V-0" GYP. BD. - - -` �1 l� 1' ADDITIONAL HANGER WIRE - ATTACH TO LOWER CORD OF BAR JOIST D1 f—ACT TEE GRID CADDY CLIP HANGING SUPPORT FOR SIGNS DASHED CONDITION INDICATES JOIST AT SIM PERPENDICULAR TO BULKHEAD FASTEN BRACE TO DECK AND VERTICAL STUD W/ (2) *10 TEK SCREWS A50 / \ // \ / \ / \ / \ -- \L____ / 362S162-33 MET STUD @ 48° OC MIN (2) *10 TEK SCREWS (TYP UNO) MET STUD- 20 GA • 24" OC. SEE PLAN FOR SIZE ACT -� DETAIL @ CEILING / / / ACT BULKHEAD FULL SCALE NOTE: CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO USE FIRE TRAK SLIP CLIPS AS SHOWN IN 1" x WOOD CAP, CUT TO FIT BETWEEN METAL STUDS SCREW TO 2" x. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO PROVIDE SHEET METAL CAP IN LIEU OF WOOD CAP 2" x WOOD STUD. CUT TO MATCH HEIGHT OF WOOD BASE. x 12" WOOD BASE SECTION )3 RESILIENT FLOOR CARPET EDGE MOLDING (FTS -1) 6111111 CARPET EDGE MOLDING CONC FLOOR 3/4" =1' -0" FULL SCALE 1/4"=V-0" FILL FLUTES OF DECK W /INSUL -6 METAL ROOF DECK 16 GA MET DEEP LEG RUNNER 20 GA CHANNEL RUNNER DO NOT FASTEN TO 16 GA RUNNER -ALLOW FOR FREE VERTICAL MOVEMENT OF ROOF DECK SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR WALL TYPE NOTE: ALL ROOF SUPPORTED PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYP BD PARTITIONS SHALL ACCOMMODATE 11/2' ROOF DEFLECTION NOTE: AT SIM - ATTACH 16 GA MET DEEP LEG RUNNER TO RUNNER FROM WALL ABOVE TYP METAL STUD WALL EXTENDING TO ROOF SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE K -3/K -4 TRIM CAP TOP EDGE ONLY K -3/K -4 WAINSCOT K -3/K -4 TRIM CAP DETAIL AT SIM CONDITION, ATTACH 1/4' PLY WD OVER EXISTING KYDEX AND APPLY K4 AND ASSOCIATED TRIM OVER PLY WD 1 12" — 1' -0" NTS SEE FOR TYP MTL STUD WALL EXTENDING TO ROOF DETAIL N N 33' METAL STUDS A I 48" OC TO BTM OF ROOF DECK 3%" METAL STUD RUNNER CHANNEL ACT -1 @ 9' -6" AFF. SEE PLAN FOR WALL TYPE PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION BRACING DETAIL 1 1/2" =1' -0" BULKHEAD X SUSPENDED METAL STUD BRACE AT CJ GYP BD AT SOFFIT DO NOT CONNECT TO FLOOR SUPPORTED STUDS WALL 2 X ATTACHED TO FLOOR SUPPORTED METAL STUDS 24 GA METAL ANGLE SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE PAINT METAL TRIM NO.801 -A OR 801 -B & METAL ANGLE - PAINT TO MATCH ADJOINING WALL SURFACE CONTINUE CONTROL JOINT UNDER SOFFIT & UP BACK SIDE NOTE: PROVIDE SLIP JOINT @ ALL LOCATIONS WHERE ROOF SUPPORTED BULKHEAD ABUTS FLOOR SUPPORTED WALLS VERTICAL SLIP /CONTROL JOINT 20 GA CONT TRACK -ATTACH---- TRACK TO DECK W/ (2) *10 TEK SCREWS @ 2' -0° OC TO PROVIDE TEMP SUPPORT UNTIL WIRE SUPPORT IS INSTALLED - REMOVE SCREWS WHEN FINISHED THE DECK WILL NOT SUPPORT LOAD FROM TRACK BRIDGING DETAIL 1 12" — 1' -0" 1° A1000 UNISTRUT CHANNEL @ 24" OC SUSPEND BRIDGING @ 24" OC W/ *12 WIRE FROM UNISTRUT OR JOIST TOP CHORD METAL STUD (2) 11/2" x 16 GA BRIDGING © MIDPOINT SLNT -3 & BACKER ROD CASING BEAD GYP BD PARTITION @ EXTERIOR WALL SEE PLAN FOR EXT WALL TYPE SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE 3"=V-0" NTS SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE SEE ELEVATIONS & FINISH PLANS FOR WALL FINISHES SST CORNER GUARDS TO MATCH EXISTING NOTE: IF WALL IS GREATER THAN 71/4" IT RECIEVES SST CORNER GUARDS K -3/K -4 @ END WALL OR OPENING SEE PLAN FOR STUD SIZE RUNNER TRACK TO CONCRETE: PROVIDE HILTI (2) -X -DNI EIS 317EDMENTR @316) OC EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB 3"=V-0" PARTIAL HGT PARTITION FLOOR ATTACHMENT DETAIL 1 1/2"=V-0" 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 O: \Remodels \0627 WA South Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a501.dgn z FALSE COLUMN SECTION • AN i 14" 11/2 ' U VARIES MAX FALSE COLUMN PLAN PIPE COVER PLAN FALSE COLUMN COVERS 20 GA 3' x 2' SHT MTL ANGLE EACH SIDE. ATTACH TO COVER & SUSPENDED CEILING MAIN RUNNER W/ *10 TEK SCREWS. SIM AT BOTTOM WHERE ATTACHED TO TOP OF FIXTURE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VENT PIPING AS REQUIRED 1' HEMMED EDGE TYP *10 TEK SCREWS a l' -0' TYP 20 GA GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET, EXTEND 4" MIN ABOVE CEILING, IPS -6, C -5 OR IPS -6, C -9 @ ADJACENT WALL VENT PIPING AS REQUIRED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT REFRIGERATION PIPING, SEE R141 NOTE: SEE A111 FOR LOCATION CENTER FALSE COLUMN ON GRID LINE NTS NOT USED CASING BEAD & SLNT -3 W/ BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE NOTE: DO NOT FASTEN PARTITION TO EXTERIOR WALL • • ° D • D • SEE PLAN FOR EXT WALL TYPE INTERIOR PARTITION JOINT @ EXTERIOR WALL - SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE NOTE: SIM CONDITION @ VERTICAL SST END CAP - RUN END CAP TO FLOOR AND TERMINATE RB AT END CAP SST CORNER GUARD TO RB CONNECTION SST CORNER GUARD RESILIENT BASE SLNT -4 CLEAR BOTH SIDES RADIUS END @ BOTH SIDES NTS DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08 -06-10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08:00 NTS 20 GA 3" x 2" SHT MTL ANGLE EACH SIDE. ATTACH TO COVER & SUSPENDED CEILING MAIN RUNNER W/ *10 TEK SCREWS. SIM AT BOTTOM WHERE ATTACHED TO TOP OF FIXTURE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL FALSE COLUMN SECTIONCEILING SYSTEM NOTE: COORDINATE COLUMN PLACEMENT WITH NEON LOCATIONS EXISTING WALL 1-0" PREFERRED FALSE COLUMN PLAN FALSE COLUMN DETAIL 6" MTL STUD VENT PIPING AS REQUIRED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT 20 GA GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET, EXTEND 4" MIN ABOVE CEILING, IPS -6, C -9 1" HEMMED EDGE TYP *10 TEK SCREWS @ 1' -0' TYP REFRIGERATION PIPING, SEE R141 112" =1' -0" NOT USED FILL FLUTES OF DECK W /INSUL -5 METAL ROOF DECK SHADOWLINE FIRE TRAK CEILING RUNNER (SAME GAUGE AS STUD) FIRE TRAK SLIP CLIP 5 /g' GYP BD- ATTACH TO FIRE TRAK CEILING RUNNER ONLY SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR \WALL TYPE NOTE: ALL ROOF SUPPORTED PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYP BD PARTITIONS SHALL ACCOMMODATE 11/2' ROOF DEFLECTION UL * U419 HW -D -0060 DO NOT FASTEN GYP BD WITHIN 4' OF THE TOP OF THE STUDS FIRE RATED METAL STUD WALL TO ROOF 1 VARIES SEE PARTITION TYPE PLAN DETAIL @ VERTICAL SST END CAP 1 12" — 1' -0" SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE RUN K -3/K -4 TO CORNER, 1" SST TO OVERLAP K -3/K -4 SST END CAP NOTE: IF WALL IS 71/4" OR LESS IT RECIEVES THE SST END CAP ICODVIEWED FOR E COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 05 20i1 City of Tukwila BUILDING DnnnEmnhi bo 3" =1' -0" RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR2010_08 08 -06-10 / TITLE DETAILS PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL INTERIOR i SHEET A501 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA DOOR TYPES FRAME TYPES VISION 2 /LAYER N'N PANEL PLYWOOD TYPE V SIIONV PANEL EQ EQ BY CTR RECD OWN I I INSTALL OWN HARDWARE CLOTH 'S BY CTR SPEC DIV /SEC PURCH BY REMARKS ASSET PROTECTIONS Al CCTV SYSTEMS * TYPE TYPE 1 M ,-2'TYP. 2 X 4 WOOD STUDS (METAL STUDS * SILL DTL * TYPE 5 HOLLOW METAL 2'TYP I G18 AP 1 A4 DOOR HARDWARE CORES * D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH * 17 * L * CL 08 7100 MHFE 9' -0" 148 STOCK F HM ih 3' -0" • 1 3/4 + ZD 60 79 :I v7 G18 OPTIONAL) TYPE 2 D1 F - FLUSH TD -1 (RED H/C M \G18 TD -2 ( BIEGE) TRAFFIC DOOR 0 G7 TYPE 4 STEEL CHANNEL OR ANGLE. SEE DOOR DETAILS. MATERIAL LIST AND QUANTITY TAKEOFF ITEMS QUANTITY CATEGORY DESCRIPTION UNIT OF MEASURE MODEL BASE CD PERMIT SET CHANGE FROM BASE CD BID SET SPEC (YIN) QTY (YIN) QUANTITY CHANGE FROM PERMIT SET SPEC (YIN) QTY (YIN) REVISION (ACHANGE) CHANGE FROM BID SET SPEC (YIN) QTY (YIN) VCT VCT (RF -1) SQUARE FEET 3,239 N Y 9,064 RED ACCENT STRIPE (RF -3) LINAEAL FEET 478 N Y 980 CARPET CPT -1 (GREY PATTERN BROADLOOM) SQUARE FEET 2,380 Y 5,057 CPT -10 ('09 BROADLOOM) SQUARE FEET 25,200 N/A N/A 0 QUARRY TILE QT -1 SQUARE FEET 820 Y 845 QT -5 COVE BASE LINEAL FEET 30 29 POWER POLES POWER POLE TYPE A EACH 21 POWER POLE TYPE B. EACH 9 POWER POLE TYPE C EACH 2 2x4 LIGHTS Al EACH 39 PIPE BOX A - 18x 18x 24 PIPE BOX EACH 5 B - 24x 24x 24 PIPE BOX EACH 0 C - 24x 72x 24 PIPE BOX EACH D - 24x 90x 24 PIPE BOX EACH E - 24x96x24 PIPE BOX EACH 0 F - 24x108x24 PIPE BOX EACH 1 G_ - 24x 120x24 PIPE BOX EACH 0 H - 24x 138x24 PIPE BOX EACH 0 NOTE: THE QUANTITIES LISTED IN THE TABLE ABOVE ARE FOR REFRENCE ONLY. VENDERS ARE STILL REQUIRED TO REVIEW THE DRAWINGS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES. 0 SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE RUNNER TRACK VARIES HEAD @ HM / GYP BD REF: A601 1 12" =1' -0" 362S125-30 MET STUD JAMB ANCHORS -VARIES JAMB @ HM TIGHT TO WALL 0 I- JAMB @ HM / GYP BD REF: A601 REF: A601 OPNG HGT 1 l2" =1' -0" 3/411 PLYWD TO EXTEND TO OUTSIDE FACE OF NEXT STUD AFTER KING STUD TYP FOR BOTH SIDES. EXPOSED MTL STUD FRAMING OPEN VOID BETWEEN STUDS HM DOOR & FRAME 3/4" PLYWD ON INTERIOR SIDE TO FACILITATE DOOR FRAMING BLOCKING DOOR IN UNFINISHED WALL (INSIDE) 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 TO TOP OF 20 GA MET STUDS VARIES 1 l2" =1' -0" HDWR CLOTH OWNER FURNISHED MATL & EQUIP SCHEDULE ITEM NO DESCRIPTION SUPP OWN BY CTR RECD OWN BY CTR INSTALL OWN BY 6-th TEST -Ciihrq BY CTR SPEC DIV /SEC PURCH BY REMARKS ASSET PROTECTIONS Al CCTV SYSTEMS * TYPE MAIL * * SILL DTL * CHECKED BY - AP 1 A4 DOOR HARDWARE CORES * D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH * 17 * HM * 5/A362 08 7100 MHFE 9' -0" 148 STOCK F HM 10-0285-01 i 3' -0" 8' -O" 1 3/4 - 60 79 1 HM DECOR FINISHES D1 ACOUSTICAL CLG (ACT -1,3) & GRID * 180 DAIRY COOLER * - * 5' -0" 8' -0" 09 5100 MHFE - D2 CERAMIC /QUARRY TILE * - - * 17 * ABOVE DAIRY COOLER H/C 09 3000 MHFE INTERIOR ONLY D3 RESILIENT FLOOR & BASE * - 96 * * 4/A601 SIM 4/A601 09 6500 MHFE 181 D4 CARPET, TRANSITION STRIP, MT -1, MT -2 * 1 5' -0" * ' " * - 91 09 6800 MHFE - D5 K -3 & K-4 WALL COVERING * 182 MEAT COOLER * - * 5' -0" 8' -0" 09 7200 MHFE - D6 FIBERGLASS REINF PANEL (FRP) (WC -3) * - - * 17 * ABOVE MEAT COOLER H/C 09 7200 MHFE 2' -0" ELECTRICAL El POWER POLES & MFD WRING * 96 2 * 4/A601 SIM * - * DIV 26 MHFE - E2 LIGHT FIXTURE, LAMPS & MFD WRING * 8' -0" - * - * - * DIV 26 MHFE 6/A352 E5 EPOS SYSTEM * TD-2 INSUL * * 8' -0" * GL -5 - TTS 4 . E6 TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM * 6/A352 12 * * F * 1 DIV 26 MHFE 1 3/4" E7 ENERGY MANAGEMENT & CONTROLS * 1 HM * 2/A601 * * 201 DIV 23 MHFE 64 El0 MOTION SENSOR * RELOCATED DOOR 64 * 203 * * * DIV 26 MHFE APBP El2 SWBD, PANELBOARDS, DISC * 209 CONFERENCE * HM * 3' -0" * DIV 26 MHFE SEE SPEC FOR INSTALLATION 58 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 209.1 CONFERENCE F HM 1 3' -0" FIXTURES F2 SALES FLOOR FIXTURES * 68 * HM * 2/A601 * 3, 7 - FIX F F7 SHELVING FIXTURES W/ WALLS * 7' -0" * - * 63 1 HM - FIX - 3, 7 212 OFFICE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 64 1 FURNISHINGS F51 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT * 3, 7 213 * F * 1 3' -0" - MHFE - F53 VALANCE (SOFTLINES CORNICE) * HM 1/A601 * - * 214 TTS - MHFE 1 F58 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS * - - * 1 * 1 /A601 2/A601 10 2813 CEN SEE SPEC FOR INSTALLATION F59 WALL SOAP DISPENSER * 1 3' -0" * 1 3/4" * - 58 10 2813 CEN oEL SPEC FOR INSTALLATION F68 STOCK ROOM SHELVING * 217 EVIDENCE LOCK -UP * * 1 4' -0" 7' -O" - MHFE - F69 BOLLARD SLEEVE * 1/A601 2/A601 * 3,7 * 10 0010 MHFE F70 SITE FURNISHINGS * * * 12 9300 MHFE F72 WET WIPE TOWEL DISPENSER * * * CEN GENERAL BUILDING COMPONENTS G3 COMPACTOR, CONTAINER & CONTROLS " * * * * - MHFE err G7 TRAFFIC DOORS * * 08 3800 MHFE G9 ABRASIVE TREAD TAPE * * * 10 0010 MHFE G14 ROOF MEMBRANE, FLASHING & WALKWAY PAD * * * - MHFE G18 DOOR HARDWARE, HM DRS & HM FRAMES * * * * 081113 MHFE MECHANICAL & REFRIGERATION . M4 REFRIGERATED CASES * * * * DIV 24 MHFE M5 WALK -IN COOLERS & FREEZERS * * * * 11 4124 MHFE M7 GRILLES, REGISTERS, & DIFFUSERS * * * * DIV 23 MHFE M9 WALK -IN EVAPORATOR COILS * * * * DIV 24 MHFE M12 DHU & CURBS * * * * MHFE M14 ROOF REFRIGERATION EQUIP & PIPE BOXES * * * * DIV 24 MHFE M15 VACUUM PUMP EQUIPMENT * * *T _ * * * DIV 22 MHFE M16 GAS & CONDENSATION PIPING SUPPORT * * DIV 23 MHFE INSTALL BY MECH CONTRACTOR SIGNAGE S1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE * * * - ISM S3 HANGING SIGN SUPPORT * * * - ISM S5 GROCERY SIGNS * * * - ISM OFME NOTES NOTE: REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR COORDINATION BETWEEN OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AND THE WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR PURCHASING KEY AP CEN CRE FIX FO ISP ISM MHFE TR TTS ASSETS PROTECTION CENTRAL PURCHASING CORPORATE REAL ESTATE FIXTURE PURCHASING FOOD OPERATIONS INFO SYSTEMS PURCHASING IN STORE MARKETING MATERIAL HANDLING, FINISHES & EQUIP TARGET ROOFING TARGET TECH SERVICES SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE WOOD BLOCKING FOR STOP 2 LAYERS 3/4' PLYWOOD HDWR CLOTH JAMB /HDWR CLOTH DOOR (HEAD SIM) HEAD SIM 1 12" =1' -0" 1/2' PLYWD TO EXTEND TO OUTSIDE FACE OF NEXT STUD AFTER KING STUD TYP FOR BOTH SIDES. \MTL STUD FRAMING c� z 0 0 cc BLOCKING HARDWARE CLOTH HM DOOR & FRAME PLYWD P -18 WALL SYSTEM TO 4' -0" AFF (AT ELECTRONIC STOCK) DOOR IN HARDWARE CLOTH WALL (OUTSIDE) U MU LVAN NY¢G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyGacom I t 503.223.8030 I f 501223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \ActiveCAD \0627a601.dgn 8383 STA GISTERED CHITEC ETON 1411.00 BRIAN R. FLEENER - ARCHITECT 1/4"=1'-0" GROUP 79: Pair, int, passage, r,r, closer, recessed wall magnetic holder (where wing walls are provided) 2 1 2 2 door head 1 1 1 2 1 Cont. Hinges Latchset Closers Magnetic Holders Auto Flushbolt Coordinator Dustproof Strike Armor Plates Trim Protector Bar HG -310 93K -ON 15D 4041 SEM 7840 x 24V AC/DC FB31P 297D TT,9 10211 a Best LCN LCN Ives Hager Ives Hiawatha Note: Transformer mounted on 4 inch cover plate, 4 inch junction box by Electrical. Note: Electrical to provide 1/2" con as svecifierh magnetic holder to ceiling space. -- C6 X 8.2 - FOR SLIP CONNECTION SEE TRAFFIC DOOR FRAME LAP C6 l' -0' MIN ONTO C8 CENTER C6 ON C8 DEPTH C 8 X 11.5 FRAME GRIND WELDS SMOOTH BETWEEN HEAD .& JAMBS Recessed mounted at MAY 0 5 2Ui1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 (E) ROOF DECK Jr (E) JOIST NOTE: ANGLES TO BEAR AGAINST CHANNEL. DO NOT WELD ANGLES TO CHANNEL - VERTICAL SLIP CONNECTION. L6x3x1/4 LLV EA SIDE OF CHANNEL 10 601 (E) JOIST- �8v TYP 6' TYP L3x3x1 /4x0' -10" EA SIDE OF CHANNEL. BEAR AGAINST CHANNEL. DO NOT WELD TO CHANNEL VERTICAL SLIP CONNECTION r C6 (ORIENTATION MAY VARY) VERTICAL SLIP CONNECTION @ DOOR JAMB City of Tukwila BUILDINGOMCI(1w TYP NOT TO SCALE OPENING SCHEDULE NOTES 1 PROVIDE VOID AND BLOCK -OUTS AS REQUIRED IN DOOR FRAME HEAD TO INSTALL CONDUIT, LOW VOLTAGE WIRE, & REED SWITCHES LOCATED IN HEAD 6" FROM DOOR LATCH SIDE, EACH DOOR LEAF. COORDINATE THIS WORK WITH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND SECURITY CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FREE ACCESS FROM OVERHEAD, THROUGH FRAME WHERE POSSIBLE 2 PROVIDE VOID AND BLOCK -OUTS AS REQUIRED IN DOOR FRAME JAMB TO INSTALL ELECTRIC STRIKE AND WIRING VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH HARDWARE SUPPLIER AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 3 SEE INTERIOR PANITING NOTES @ "FINISH MATL & COLOR CODE" SHEET A601 FOR INTERIOR DOOR AND FRAME COLORS 4 1" UNDERCUT 5 HM DOOR AND FRAMES AT TRAFFIC DOORS TO BE PAINTED IPS -6, COLOR TO MATCH TRAFFIC DOORS 6 OWNER FURNISHED BACKROOM FIXTURE INCLUDING DOOR & FRAME 7 FOR ADDITIONAL BLOCKING AT DOOR FRAMES SE 7/A601 & 8/A601 8 SIZE INDICATED IS FOR ROUGH OPENING SIZE DOOR ACCORDINGLY 9 NOT USED 10 . CASED FRAME, NO STOPS 11 . WELD TWO FRAME SECTIONS TOGETHER, SECURE TO SLAB 12 . TRAFFIC DOORS FURNISHED BY OWNER. 13 . OWNER FUNISHED DOOR & TRACK G6 14 . PAINT HM DOOR & FRAME IPS -9, C -5. 15 . PAINT HM DOOR & FRAME IPS -9, C -9. 16 . SEE DETAIL 6/A352 FOR QT TO CONC SLAB TRANSITION 17 . DOOR, FRAME & HDWR FURNISHED AS PART OF COOLER /FREEZER PACKAGE 18 . NOT USED 19 . NOT USED 20 . FRAME ONLY, NO STOPS 21 . MOUNT TRAFFIC DOOR TO COOLER PANEL OPENING VERIFY SIZE OF DOOR WITH COOLER PANEL MFR 22 . FIELD MEASURE TO MATCH EXISTING OPENING. ROOM FINISH NOTES 1 SEE PLANS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS FOR MORE DETAILED MATERIAL AND FINISH INFORMATION. 2 GYPSUM BOARD, WALLS AND CE VG WC, K -3, K -4,PLM OR CT PROVIDE LEVEL 2 GYP BD FIN ) SPEC SECTION 09 2116. 3 UNFINISHED GYPSUM BOARD PF GYP BD FINISH. REFER TO SPEC SECTION 09 2116. = ICINGS RECEIVII 4 PROVIDE INSUL -6 ABOVE CEILIN(JISH. REFER TCHOLD BACK 3" AROUND LIGHTS. OVIDE LEVEL 2 5 APPLY K -3 /K-4 WAINSCOT TO 48'9. CUT INSUL-6ESILIENT BASE TO WAINSCOT. 6 APPLY WC WALL PANELS FULL HEIGHT. 7 EXTEND PAINT 6" MINIMUM BEHIND ALL FIXTURES. 8 PROVIDE 1/2" PLYWOOD WAINSCOT TO 8' -0" AFF - SCREW ATTACH DIRECTLY TO STUDS @ 12" OC. 9 PAINT EXPOSED STRUCTURAL COLUMNS FULL HEIGHT TO CEIL FINISHED ROOMS WITH IPS -6 /C -5 OR C -7 TO MATCH ADJACENT WALLS. 10 CONTRACTORS OPTION TO PROVIDE PLYWOOD BASE IN LIEU OF 1X12 PINE BASE. 11 INSTALL WC -3 OR K -3 PANELS VERTICALLY. 12 INSTALL K -3 & RB -1 AT BOTH WA" n "^' n'1' TO JANITOR SINK AS INDICATED. K -3 TO 48" HIGH. AC )ONCRETE W /SLNT -4. SEE 7/A351 13 ROOMS ADJACENT TO MARKINCLL ALJJHI/tIN I 147 SHOULD HAVE THE tuCDC DD 4 Tr, f HARDWARE CLOTH ON THE MARKING OR STOCK SIDE. 14 PROVIDE 1/2" PLYWOOD WAINSCOT TO 48" AFF. 15 PAINT EXPOSED ELECTRICAL PANELS TO MATCH WALLS. .ING IN 18 PROVIDE CAP & WOOD BASE (WB) AT STUD WALL. SEE DETAIL 16/A501 25 QUARRY TILE TO BE PLACED OVER EXISTING CONC. FLOOR 27 PROVIDE WATER RESISTANT GYP BD FLOOR TO CEILING. 51 SEE DETAILS 7/A601 & 8/A601 FOR ADDITIONAL BLOCKING AT DOOR FRAME 52 UNLESS HEAVY DUTY BASE IS INDICATED, PROVED SST COVED BASE ON COOLER /FREEZER WALL, SEE 1/A352, 5/A352 & 8/A352 53 SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION OF HEAVY DUTY BASES & DETAIL CALL OUTS 54 PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD AS REQUIRED. 55 PATCH AND REPAIR TILE AS REQUIRED. 56 NO WORK TO ROOM. 57 NEW CEILING TILE IN EXISTING GRID. CLEAN GRID. SEE SHEET A131 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES. 58 FINISH NEW CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE C 8 X 11.5 JAMB - ANCHOR TO SLAB W/ L 4X3X1/4X O' -6" LLV W /TWO %2" DIA X 3" EXP BOLTS TRAFFIC DOOR TRAFFIC DOOR JAMB (HEAD SIM) BEAR ANGLES CHANNEL. DO NOT WELD TO CHANNEL. C6 (E) JOIST BOTTOM CHORD (WEBS NOT SHOWN) —. VERTICAL SLIP CONNECTION @ DOOR JAMB DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DOOR 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 HDWR PERMIT SET I NO ROOM NAME DRAWN BY - - -- WIDTH HEIGHT THICK L -J! lL -J L6x3 L3x3 TYPE VERTICAL SLIP CONNECTION @ DOOR JAMB DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS DOOR 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 HDWR PERMIT SET NOTES NO ROOM NAME DRAWN BY MAT! QUANT WIDTH HEIGHT THICK TYPE R HAMLIN TYPE MAIL HEAD DTL JAMB DTL SILL DTL 130 CHECKED BY M HM 1 3' -8" ACT -1 d4" D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH 90 17 5 HM 4/A362 5/A362 ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 1,3 9' -0" 148 STOCK F HM 10-0285-01 i 3' -0" 8' -O" 1 3/4 - 60 79 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08:00 NOT TO SCALE OPENING SCHEDULE DOOR DOOR GLASS FIRE RATING HDWR FRAME NOTES NO ROOM NAME TYPE MAT! QUANT WIDTH HEIGHT THICK TYPE GROUP TYPE MAIL HEAD DTL JAMB DTL SILL DTL 130 COMPACTOR /BAILER M HM 1 3' -8" ACT -1 d4" GL -7 90 17 5 HM 4/A362 5/A362 3/A362 1,3 9' -0" 148 STOCK F HM 2 3' -0" 8' -O" 1 3/4 - 60 79 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 180 DAIRY COOLER - - 1 5' -0" 8' -0" - - - 91 - - - - 6/A352 17 180.1 ABOVE DAIRY COOLER H/C H/C 1 2' -0" 7' -0" 1 1/2" - - 96 2 WD 4/A601 SIM 4/A601 - DTL 181 FREEZER - - 1 5' -0" r' °" ' " - - 91 - - - - , 15/A352 17 182 MEAT COOLER - - 1 5' -0" 8' -0" - - - 91 - - - 6/A352 17 182.1 ABOVE MEAT COOLER H/C H/C 1 2' -0" 7' -0" 1 1/2" - - 96 2 WD 4/A601 SIM 4/A601 - - 183 PRODUCE COOLER - - 1 5' -0" 8' -0" - - - 91 - - - - 6/A352 17 184 DRY PRODUCE/ LABELING ROOM TD-2 INSUL 2 2' -6" 8' -0" - GL -5 - 91 4 . STL 5/A601 6/A601 6/A352 12 185 VACUUM PUMP ROOM F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -O" 1 3/4" - - 63VT 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 201 HRBP RELOCATED DOOR 64 RELOCATED FRAME 202 DTL RELOCATED DOOR 64 RELOCATED FRAME 203 DTL RELOCATED DOOR 64 RELOCATED FRAME 208 APBP RELOCATED DOOR 64 RELOCATED FRAME 209 CONFERENCE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 58 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 209.1 CONFERENCE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 68 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 210 INVESTIGATION CENTER F HM 1 3' -O" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 63 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 212 OFFICE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 64 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 213 OFFICE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 64 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 214 TTS F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 63 1 HM 1 /A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 216 ENCLAVE F HM 1 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" - - 58 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 - 3, 7 217 EVIDENCE LOCK -UP F HM 1 4' -0" 7' -O" 1 3/4" - - 63AVC 1 HM 1/A601 2/A601 1 3,7 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING NOTES NUMBER NAME MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL MATERIAL FINISH COLOR WAINSCOT MATERIAL FINISH COLOR HEIGHT 102 SALES CONC VARIES RB GYP BD IPS-1 VARIES VARIES _ ACT -1 - - 1,2,5,7,9 200 DISTRICT OFFICE SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 9' -0" 201 HRBP SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 202 DTL SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 203 SWING SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 204 CLOSET SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES EXP STRUCT - - 205 EQUIPMENT ROOM SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 206 DTL SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6 ". 207 DTL SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 208 APBP SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 209 CONFERENCE SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 9' -0" 210 INVESTIGATION CENTER SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 9' -0 ". 212 OFFICE SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 213 OFFICE SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 214 TTS SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES EXP STRUCT - - 216 ENCLAVE SEE SHEET A332 FOR FINISHES ACT -1 - - 8' -6" 217 EVIDENCE LOCK -UP CONC SEALER WB VARIES - - - EXP STRUCT - - - ' ' '° " " " 180 DAIRY COOLER CONC QT -1 SST COOLER PANEL - - - COOLER PANEL - - - 1,25, 52,53 181 FREEZER CONC SEALER SST FREEZER PANEL - - - FREEZER PANEL - - 9' -6" 1,52,53 182 MEAT COOLER CONC QT -1 SST COOLER PANEL - - - COOLER PANEL - - 9' -6" 1,25,52,53 183 PRODUCE COOLER CONC QT -1 SST COOLER PANEL - - - COOLER PANEL - - 9' -6" 1,25, 52,53 184 DRY PRODUCE/LABELING ROOM CONC QT -1 QT -5, SST VARIES WC -3 - - ACT -3 - - 9' -6" 1,27,52,53 185 VACUUM PUMP ROOM CONC SEALER WB VARIES - - PLYWD,WC -3 EXP STRUCT - - - 1,12,51 FINISH MATERIAL AND COLOR CODE NOTE: NOT ALL MATERIALS, SYSTEMS & COLORS ARE USED ON EVERY PROJECT COLORS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - SPEC SECTION BELOW C -1 RED C -5 BEIGE C -6 "OXFORD WHITE" C-8 OSHA YELLOW C -9 "NEON RED" C -19 FAIRWAY OAKS C -20 CHAMPAGNE C -31 FOLKSTONE IPS INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEM SPEC SECTION 09 9100 TILE & BASE - SPEC SECTION 09 3000 QT -1 QT-1S QT -5 QUARRY TILE - "SUMMITVILLE RED" 6X6 QUARRY TILE - "SUMMITVILLE RED" 6X6 SMOOTH TILE COVE BASE - "SUMMITVILLE RED" 6X5 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - D1 SPEC SECTION 09 5100 ACT -1 ACT -2 ACT -3 MINERAL FIBER TILE 24X48 NOT USED VINYL CLAD GYPSUM PANEL 24X48 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE - D3 SPEC SECTIONS 09 6500 RF -1 THRU PATTERN WHITE 12X12 RF -3 RED FEATURE STRIPE 6X24 RF -5 NOT USED RF -6 NOT USED RF -8 CENTIVA (VOLGA CS- 0618 -C) 36x 36 RB COVED VINYL BASE - BURNT UMBER 6" FLOOR TRANSITION STRIP SPEC SECTION 09 6500 & 09 6800 FTS -1 FTS -2 FTS -3 FTS-4 FTS -5 FTS -6 CARPET EDGE GUARD - "BURNT UMBER" NOT USED NOT USED CARPET TILE TO VINYL - "JET" ENTRY MATERIALS - "JET" TILE TO CONC REDUCER CARPET /FLOOR MAT & BASE 0 SPEC SECTION 09 6800 CPT -1 CPT-1A CPT -2 CPT -3 CPT-4 CPT -5 CPT -6 CPT -10 CPT -10A BROADLOOM CARPET (GREY) BROADLOOM CARPET (FURNITURE FLATS) NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED CARPET TILE (ENTRY, ELECTRONICS BOAT) BROADLOOM CARPET (BROWN) BROADLOOM CARPET (FURNITURE FLATS) WALL COVERING - SPEC SECTION 09 7200 K -3 ACRYLIC PVC PANEL - BEIGE K-4 ACRYLIC PVC PANEL - RED WC -3 FIBERGLASS PANEL (FRP) - WHITE WC -6A MARMOLEUM - RED D5 ROUGH CARPENTRY - SPEC SECTION 061000 H/C HARDWARE CLOTH WB 1X12 PINE WOOD BASE PAINTING NOTES EXTERIOR: A HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES. WHERE INTERIOR DOOR COLOR IS DIFFERENT, ALL EDGES EXCEPT STRIKE EDGE: EPS -2. WHERE INTERIOR SIDE OF FRAME IS DIFFERENT COLOR, PAINT INTERIOR WITH EPS -2 TO THE STOP. B NOT USED C NOT USED D ITEMS ON BUILDING WALLS: ELEC CONDUIT, PIPING, PTZ CAMERA HOUSING & MOUNTING BRACKETS AND OTHER MISC METAL ITEMS: EPS - 1 /COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE. E ITEMS ON ROOF: ROOFTOP MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IS FACTORY FINISHED OR UNPAINTED ALUMINUM PER SPECIFICATION. OSR TO DETERMINE WHICH EQUIPMENT IS VISIBLE AND REQUIRES PAINTING. INTERIOR: A HM DOORS AND FRAMES PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALLS, UNO. B ALL HM DOORS AND FRAMES ONTO SALES FLOOR TO BE PAINTED IPS -6, COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL. FRAMES AT TRAFFIC DOORS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH TRAFFIC DOORS. C DOORS: PAINT TOP, BOTTOM, ALL EDGES AND GLAZING STOPS TO MATCH FACE OF DOOR. ( 0 HARDWARE GROUP KEY INTERIOR & EXTERIOR DOORS: GROUPS 16 -30 GROUPS 56 -75 GROUPS 76 -90 GROUPS 91 -99 SUFFIXES: A C V T - EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS_SINGLE G1 - INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS_SINGLE G1 - INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS_PAIR G1 - INTERIOR SPECIAL DOORS (EXAMPLE - GROUP 20 -A) -ADD ARMOR PLATE EDGE PROTECTOR AND TRIM PROTECTOR BAR IN LIEU OF KICKPLATE -ADD "HOLDER" FUNCTION TO CLOSER - 4041H -ADD OVERHEAD STOP (GJ -90) IN LIEU OF SPECIFIED STOP -ADD TRIM PROTECTOR BAR GENERAL NOTES 1. ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM , HM FRAMES, HM DOORS, AND HARDWARE ARE OWNER FURNISHED GLAZING KEY- SPEC SECTION 08 8800 GL -5 EXTRUDED POLYCARBONATE GLASS GL -7 WIRE GLASS NOTE: SEE PROJECT MANUAL FOR GLAZING TYPES INCLUDED IN PROJECT RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR201008 086-10 TITLE PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL SCHEDULES & DETAILS SHEET A601 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA `-1 .LLLLLLL MIL i i a E 1k 3 3 3 3 3 3 11 11 11 iI II 11 11 22' -6' 20' -0' 89' -f0' C 20' -0' U r � I ■ i♦ FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION EX'G/ CLG. HT. Y 14' -0' AFF I I I 11 I1 In1 in, 11 rl IL •I IL 'I II II II I IPS -1, C -9 I-- MkIrl rl rl 1�- I Ili i I 1 1 1 'RFC i[7I 11 1 I TT TT I I I I I I I I I I I I I r � r � I 1-� r_l I_I ; I_I II r I I - I 1 I LARGE CLUSTER, CENTERED BETWEEN FOCALS, SEE r - 1 FOR PAINT TRANSITION I SEE 62' -1' I IKE=ME BWM I f1 I ',UT I TT in :_ II I- -. IL•1 IL�I I I I L J l LARGE CLU TER, CENTERED ETWEEN FOCALS, SE 57' -4' O IPS -1, C -9 VALANCE LIGHT SEE LEFT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION A] VALANCE LIGHT SEE E2 VALANCE LIGHT EXISTING TRAFFIC SEE A DOOR TO REMAIN HM DOOR /—\ AND FRAME \ / IPS -6, C -5 IPS -1, C -9 Y,6" =1' -0" FOR PAINT TRANSITION SEE IPS -1, C 9 VALANCE LIGHT SEE ' IPS -1, C -9 EX'G/ CLG. HT. 0, a 14' -0' AFF IPS -1, C -9 FOR PAINT TRANSITION SEE 10 1 SIGNAGE RAIL- VERIFY LOCATION I W /OWNER SEE IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 LARGE CLUSTER, CENTERED BETWEEN ' FOCALS, SEE 1 16' -8' 701 20' -011 LIGHT VALANCE - VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE IPS -1, C -9 76, -3' LIGHT VALANCE - I ( VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE 120' -0' 49' -5' I C - VALANCE LIGHT E2 REAR SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION T -WALL FIXTURE K -4� RB EXISTING TRAFFIC DOOR TO REMAIN PINT FRAME IPS -9, C -9 K -4 RB RB K -4 RB HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 C - 7 y6 " =1' -0" EX'G/ CLG. HT.q, a 14' -0' AFF _._±w te a!0 L-I161= L L L L ,L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L LI IPS -1, C -9 28' -6" /N / • 20' -0' LIGHT VALANCE -1 VERIFY LOCATION , W /OWNER SEE 54' -5' LIGHT VALANCE - VERIFY LOCATION , W /OWNER SEEQ 20' -0' REFRIG FALSE COLUMNS, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 K -4 RB K -4 RB HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 RIGHT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION EX'G/ CLG. HT.0 a 14' -0' AFF =1' -0„ 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a701.dgn 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 Mulvann yG2com I t 503223.8030 I f 503 223 -8381 Y6" =1' -0" FACE OF GYP BD PAINT IPS -11, C -9 1 x 6 SURFACE MOUNTED BLKG TAPCON SCREWS @ 241" OC -11/2° MIN EMBEDMENT INTO CMU WALL. AT STUD WALL, ANCHOR TO STUD WITH 3° DRYWALL SCREW VALANCE LIGHT MOUNTING BRACKET SURFACE MTD HARDLINES VALANCE LIGHT BLOCKING 13' -6' AFF SURFACE MOUNTED BLOCKING 1 12" = 1' -0" FACE OF GYP BD PAINT IPS -11, C -9 1 x 6 SURFACE MOUNTED BLKG TAPCON SCREWS @ 24' OC -11/2' MIN EMBEDMENT INTO CMU WALL. AT STUD WALL, ANCHOR TO STUD WITH 3' DRYWALL SCREW FOCAL RAIL NO SCALE 0 N 0 r- ti w EE L U- SOFTLINES LIGHTING VALANCE VALANCE LIGHT 0 GYP BD 1/2' PLYWOOD a SALES SEE PLAN FOR WALL TYPE NOTE: VERIFY LOCATION OF VALANCE WITH ELEC & OWNER'S FIXTURE PLAN AT SIM: SURFACE MOUNTED BLOCKING AT HARDLINES - SEE 7/A701 PAINT TRANSITION @ 6' -81" AFF 8' -4%2"" m N 0_ V CD A z I X N I w 1 12" =1' -0" PAINT TRANSITION ABOVE EX. HIGH VALANCE EXISTING HIGH SOFTLINES LIGHT VALANCE i CENTER PAINT BREAK ON FOCAL FIN II I I 1 I1 I1 I TYP SOFTLINES WALL I , SOFTLINES WALL PAINT DETAIL FOCAL AREA ADJUSTED LOW SOFTLINES LIGHT VALANCE CODE FOR DE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING wormy 16' -9"" 7' -9 ° 7' -8 ZD A.F.F. TO T/O BRACKET DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR2010_08 08- -06-10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 / PERMIT SET CONFIGURATION LL ELEVATIONS & DETAILS DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 _ . RobH 09 -NOV -2010 08:02 LARGE WALL CLUSTER BRACKET A.F.F. TO T/O BRACKET 00 • b(0 -317 12" =1' -0" RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER 12" =1' -0" INTERIOR ELEVATIONS GENERAL NOTES A. CONTROL JOINTS SHOWN ARE SPECIAL CONDITIONS ONLY. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL CRITERIA FOR LOCATION AND SPACING OF ALL OTHER CONTROL JOINTS B. FOR ADDITIONAL FINISH INFORMATION SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE — SHEET A601 C. RB SHOWN AT ALL EXPOSED WALLS AND EXTENDS 61" BEHIND FIXTURES RB IS ALSO PLACED IN AREAS WITH WC -6 AND AT JEWELRY BOAT FIXTURE D. ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS TO RECEIVE STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD — VERIFY REUSE OF EXISTING CORNER GUARD E. ALL 7' -1/41" OR GREATER WALL THICKNESSES TO HAVE (2) SEPARATE OUTSIDE STAINLESS CORNER GUARDS. IF WALL THICKNESS IS LESS THAN 7' -1/41" USE (1) FULL WALL THICKNESS STAINLESS STEEL END CAP 'F. PAINT TO EXTEND MIN 6" BEHIND FIXTURES. DO NOT SAND OR PAINT GYPSUM BOARD CONSTRUCTION THAT IS CONCEALED BY FIXTURES G. VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE LOCATIONS W/ OWNER H. FOR CONTROL JOINTS SEE TYP I. PROVIDE SLIP CONTROL JOINT AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE ROOF SUPPORTED BULKHEAD ABUTS FLOOR SUPPORTED WALL, SEE TYP J. ALL HM DOORS AND FRAMES ON SALES FLOOR TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACE UNO \ TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA STORE TO627 VERSION MR2010_08 08- -06-10 TITLE SALES FLOOR \ 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 / PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL ELEVATIONS & DETAILS i SHEET A701 T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA i 22' -6' 20' -0' 89' -I0' C3), 20' -0' ■ FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION u J EX'G/ CLG. HT.. • 14' -0' AFF xogasa }t l • -a-I .aaop FI -ii iIQ £' I * ii 1J. 7J:J.8 .. „ � ) IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 PS -1, C -9 1 IPS -1, C -9 HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS16, C -9 l SIGNAGE RAIL - VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE IPS -1, C -9 HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 LIGHT VALANCE - VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 Y16" =V -0" i I i I K -4 RB K -4 RB- FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION K -4 K -4 RB RB K -4 RB K -4 RB HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 1 W i z J =1 U I al I I ! ! C I#I! II III II II_ 1/8"=V-0" EXIST CLG HGTA 14' -0' AFF diJnd /dol 038 -'PC W __r:•••.I.•,.••••••• HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 I I II III III 1'i II I 1 'I III III III III 1!� III •• ••• L� HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -66, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9- g. 2I 1 LIGHT VALANCE - VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE I- - IM r i'113 Z 1 , 1 1 OM 1 Li131N3A3130Litii - - -7 1 HM DOOR AND 10 FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 II ••••••••••.••••••••M•••••• / C s II`I,J • I. •\ / --I 4 ' HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 E13 \ r - r: n r I K -4i K -4 ' RB RB I HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6 C -9 FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL rLEVATION K-4 RB 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 Ire v MU [VAN NY G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a702.dgn NO WORK— / \ VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 , \ CONFIGURATION LL e I 1 I 4,ii\V V / \ III \ , \ , \ �— \ \ I I I I 7/A / /m 1 f ` CHECKED BY t,,, K -4 RB K -4 RB- FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL ELEVATION K -4 K -4 RB RB K -4 RB K -4 RB HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 1 W i z J =1 U I al I I ! ! C I#I! II III II II_ 1/8"=V-0" EXIST CLG HGTA 14' -0' AFF diJnd /dol 038 -'PC W __r:•••.I.•,.••••••• HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 I I II III III 1'i II I 1 'I III III III III 1!� III •• ••• L� HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -66, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 IPS -1, C -9- g. 2I 1 LIGHT VALANCE - VERIFY LOCATION W /OWNER SEE I- - IM r i'113 Z 1 , 1 1 OM 1 Li131N3A3130Litii - - -7 1 HM DOOR AND 10 FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 IPS -1, C -9 II ••••••••••.••••••••M•••••• / C s II`I,J • I. •\ / --I 4 ' HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 E13 \ r - r: n r I K -4i K -4 ' RB RB I HM DOOR AND FRAME IPS -6 C -9 FRONT SALES FLOOR WALL rLEVATION K-4 RB 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 Ire v MU [VAN NY G2 601 SW SECOND AVENUE I SUITE 1200 PORTLAND, OR 1 97204 MulvannyG2.com I t 503.223.8030 I f 503.223.8381 0: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627a702.dgn NO WORK— / \ VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 , \ CONFIGURATION LL Iii DRAWN BY / \ III \ , ,/ \ / III , /. \ 'm' IPS -1, C-9 ABOVE 6' -8' 4 4. IPS -1, C -9 �-- NO WORK K -4 RB HM DOOR AND FRAME, IPS -6, C -9 838 N ER INGTON BRIAN R. FLEENER — ARCHITECT K -4 RB RB EXIST CLG HGT 14' -0' AFF PAINT TRANSITIONS EL =6' -8' AFF TARGET V8" =1' -0" • DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 8th NOVEMBER, 2010 11.8.10 CONFIGURATION LL PERMIT SET DRAWN BY R. HAMLIN CHECKED BY D. CONTRERAS M. NEISH ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 RobH 09 —NOV -2010 08 :03 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OVED MAY 05 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDIN(, I IVISION. NO17 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS GENERAL NOTES A. CONTROL JOINTS SHOWN ARE SPECIAL CONDITIONS ONLY. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL CRITERIA FOR LOCATION AND SPACING OF ALL OTHER CONTROL JOINTS B. FOR ADDITIONAL FINISH INFORMATION SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE - SHEET A601 C. RB SHOWN AT ALL EXPOSED WALLS AND EXTENDS 6' BEHIND FIXTURES RB IS ALSO PLACED IN AREAS WITH WC -6 AND AT JEWELRY BOAT FIXTURE D. ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS TO RECEIVE STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD - VERIFY REUSE OF EXISTING CORNER GUARD E. ALL 7' -1/4' OR GREATER WALL THICKNESSES TO HAVE (2) SEPARATE OUTSIDE STAINLESS CORNER GUARDS. IF WALL THICKNESS IS LESS THAN 7' -1/4' USE (1) FULL WALL THICKNESS STAINLESS STEEL END CAP F. PAINT TO EXTEND MIN 6' BEHIND FIXTURES. DO NOT SAND OR PAINT GYPSUM BOARD CONSTRUCTION THAT IS CONCEALED BY FIXTURES G. VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE LOCATIONS W/ OWNER H. FOR CONTROL JOINTS SEE © ®m TYP I. PROVIDE SLIP CONTROL JOINT AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE ROOF SUPPORTED BULKHEAD ABUTS FLOOR SUPPORTED WALL, SEE EI• TYP J. ALL HM DOORS AND FRAMES ON SALES FLOOR TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACE UNO FLOOR FINISH GENERAL NOTES A. SYMBOL INDICATES K -3 LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. B. SYMBOL INDICATES RB LOCATION. SEE PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. CONTINUE RB 6' BEHIND FIXTURE • SALES FLOOR DOORS. C. VYVY SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -3 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -3 TO BE 48' HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. SEE D. ALL CPT,RF, RB, CT, QT AND MT ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR E.---- SYMBOL INDICATES LOCATIONS WHERE QT -5 BASE IS LOCATED. TYPICALLY THIS BASE IS LOCATED IN THE DRY PRODUCE ROOM WHERE THE HEAVY DUTY BASE IS NOT CALLED OUT. F. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -2) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOOR ON ALL SIDES. G. FLOOR FINISH CHANGES BETWEEN ROOMS OCCUR AT DOOR CENTERLINES TYPICAL. SEE A601 FOR ADDITIONAL FLOOR FINISH INFORMATION K. FOR BASE CONDITIONS NOT SHOWN ON A121, SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ON A601 & A351 L. INSTALL CPT -1A ON FURNITURE FLATS. SEE FIXTURE PLAN FOR LOCATION. N. FOR SST CORNER GUARD / VERTICAL SST END CAPS TO RB CONNECTION SEE P. INSTALL REDUCER STRIP (FTS -1) AT TRANSITION BETWEEN RESILIENT FLOORING AND BROAD LOOM CARPET (CPT -1) R. ••••• SYMBOL INDICATES WALLS THAT RECEIVE BOTH K -4 AND RESILIENT BASE. K -4 TO BE 48' HIGH WAINSCOT APPLIED TO WALLS AND CORNERS. FOR K -4 WALL CAP AND CORNER GUARD / END CAP DETAILS, SEE r. ''' s INDICATES APPROX NEW QT -1 y =�G._ INDICATES APPROX RF -3 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX RF -1 REPLACEMENT EXCLUDING RF -1 PATCH /FILL AREAS INDICATES APPROX CPT -1 REPLACEMENT INDICATES APPROX CPT -6 REPLACEMENT RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 STORE T0627 VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 TITLE SALES FLOOR PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL ELEVATIONS & DETAILS SHEET A702 ■ T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA o 0 Q 44' -0° 44' -0° 101 . I SAWCUTIAND REMOVE EXIST SLAB At FREEZER COORD SIZE & LOC W/ SHT A351 7 —I NOTE: AT TRENCH INFILL FOR - PIPING OIL UTILITIES AND (E) SLAB DEPRESSIONS GREATER THAN 3' WHERE OCCURS. INFILL PER TYP UNO 0 FREEZER —o- r- 1— 1 17 EXIST 5' SLAB ON GRADE W/ '4 0 16'0C. TOP OF (E) SLAB ELEVATION (T /0 PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN (E) WALL 1/I6" = 1' -0" NOT USED (E) 6' -8'* OPENING 1' -4'± 4' -0' 1' -4't 61/2' CONC INFILL REINF W/ (2) -•5 VERT CLOSEST TO DR OPNG FULL HT EACH SIDE OF OPENING 84 0 10'OC HORIZ EA FACE REINF W/ ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM - 61/2' CONC INFILL REINF W/ (1)- 65x3' -9' 0 16.0C EA FACE ADHESIVE ANCHOR INTO EXIST FDN WALL (1) -' /4'0x4' HEADED STUD WELD TO EXIST STL PL EA SIDE OF OPENING A706 '3 DWLS 0 16' OC WELD TO EXIST STL JAMBS. CONTRACTOR OPTION: USE WELDABLE COUPLER TO ATTACH A615 BARS TO EXIST STL JAMB AND HEAD (E) COMPACTOR PIT INFILL DETAIL 1/4" = 1' -0" NOT USED (E) CONC FDN WALL BELOW GRADE NOTE: FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 moc000c0000cooccoocpatboopoc00000000poc000di lename 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy. . ■ Suite 100 Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS MHPJN 10- 0494 -001 (E) PARTITION WALL (E) SLAB T/0 (E) CONC $ SLAB EL: 100' -0' DO NOT UNDERCUT (E) SLAB FILL ANY INCIDENTAL UNDERCUT WITH CONCRETE '3 DOWELS 0 18'OC CTR ON (E) SLAB W/ ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM be-- U, I - -- - -- 1_ PI- - - - I- I I ILA 1 LL II SEE ARCH 1 I —I-- CENTERLINE COMPACTOR DOOR OPENING 18' DIAx4' -0' DEEP CONCRETE PIERS REINF W/ (4) +65 VERT 14-113 TIES 12' O Tiff. — — - -T /0— P-I€R- EL =TB - MCI -TC-H EL OF T/O (E) SLAB SUPPLIER TO ANCHOR COMPACTOR LEGS W TH (4) -34'o x 5' ONG HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ w/ '4' EMBED J 1 PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN FREEZER SLAB SYSTEM FOR ADDITIONAL INFO SEE NOTE 1. SEE SHT A352 FOR ADD'L INFO 2. FLOOR FINISH NOT SHOWN FREEZER SLAB DETAIL v '3 0 18'0C EA WAY SLAB REINF 4' BRICK VENEER PER ARCH 61/2' CONC WALL INFILL BEYOND 2' GAP DOWEL. CONTINUES AT WALL INFILL BEYOND 1 "E TL: /0 W F 100NE' -0' ND WALL . '4 0 16'0C DWL 2' -O• ;7,1- cr J 1' -6' CONC WALL INFILL W/ '4 0 10'OC HORIZ EA FACE ��>> T/0 (ABI • EL: 95' E) -1SL0'* 12" = 1' -0" 5' SLAB ON GRADE W/ '4 0 16'OC EW CTRD IN SLAB /2 /2 /4 12 OC L3' 'x3' 'x' ' CONT W/ WO x4' HEADED STUDS 0 (3-SIDES) 3/6 V 2 -12 (E) CONC SOG 111 INFILL (E) COMPACTOR PIT WITH SUITABLE SOIL AND COMPACT PER SPEC III (E) FDN WALL (E) COMPACTOR PIT INFILL DETAIL 12" = 1' -0" NOT USED (E) COMPACTOR PIT 1/I6" = 1'-0" 13 0 18'0C EW CENTERED IN DEPTH OF FREEZER SLAB THERMAL BLOCKING SEE SHT A352 NEW TO (E) SLAB DWLS SEE 1' -2' MIN RIGID INSULATION T/0 (E) $ CONC SLAB EL: 100' -0' .rte_ 11.11� v &∎,1 ∎14VAI� ∎1 " ∎• ∎••∎ ' 3 0 18'OC CONT B▪ AR 18' OC BENT NOTE 1. SEE SHT A352 FOR ADD'L INFO 2. FLOOR FINISH NOT SHOWN FREEZER SLAB DETAIL 3 0 18'OC EW COMPATED BASE PER V2„ = 1, -0„ NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE 4'/2 EMBED v 111111 -11111 NEW 4' CONC SLAB ON GRADE W/ '3 0 16'OC, EA WAY 0 MID -DEPTH '3x2' -0' DOWELS 0 16'OC CTR ON EXIST SLAB W/ ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM NEW TO EXISTING SLAB DETAIL 1" = 1' -0" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE , APPROVED MAY 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING nIVIRION NOT USED NOT USED ,'ATE I UED .UES D REVISI• S 8 NOVEMBER 2010 11 -08-10 PERMIT SET BRAWN BY GL HECKED BY KDW, TLF CHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 nameofpersonplotting xxxxdatexxxxtimex 3� STRUCTURAL SHEET INDEX S111 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES, PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN & DETAILS S141 PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES 1. DESIGN CODES A. THE 2009 EDITION OF INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS. B. ASCE 7 -05 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES C. AISC 360, 'SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN. FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS"— D. ACI- 318 -05, 'BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE' E. AISI NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD- FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS F. ACI 530-05/ASCE 5- 05 /TMS 402 -05 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES 2. DESIGN STRESSES A. STEEL: MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES (OTHER THAN WIDE FLANGE) STRUCTURAL TUBING STRUCTURAL PIPE B. CONCRETE /MASONRY: SLABS ON GRADE ALL OTHER REINFORCING 3. DESIGN LOADS Fy : 36 KSI (ASTM A36) Fy : 46 KSI (ASTM A500, GRADE B) Fy : 35 KSI (ASTM A53, GRADE B) f'c : 3000 PSI f'c : SEE SPECIFICATIONS Fy : 60 KSI (ASTM A615) UNO ROOF SNOW LOAD 20 PSF BASIC WIND SPEED 85 MPH WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY C WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.0 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D SEISMIC SITE CLASS D SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS SDS: 0.947, Si D : 0.491 SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR 1.0 4. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. ARRANGEMENT AND BENDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACI'MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCING CONCRETE STRUCTURES' B. PROVIDE SUITABLE WIRE SPACERS. CHAIRS AND TIES FOR SUPPORTING REINFORCING STEEL IN PROPER POSITION C. D. E. SPLICE REINFORCING 48 BAR DIAMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE CONCRETE COVERAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 7 OF AC1318 COORDINATE SIZES AND LOCATION OF SLEEVES. INSERTS AND BOX -OUTS REQUIRED 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE, MAKE WELDED CONNECTIONS USING E7OXX ELECTRODES OR BOLTED WITH 74' A325 -N BOLTS. STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTED ON DRAWINGS AS 'GALVANIZED' SHALL BE GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123. AFTER ERECTING TOUCH UP DAMAGED AREAS WITH ZINC RICH PAINT. 6. ROOF OPENINGS A. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL OPENINGS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. B. PATCH HOLES IN EXISTING ROOF DECK W/ 11/2' -22 GA MINIMUM TYPE B ROOF DECK. OVERLAY OPENINGS 3' MIN EA SIDE SCREW TO EXIST ROOF DECK W/ '10 TEK SCREWS 0 6' OC . POINT /HANGING LOADS ITEMS OTHER THAN CEILING GRID, THAT ARE TO BE HUNG FROM ROOF STRUCTURE. SHALL IMPART LOADS TO JOISTS AT TOP CHORD PANEL POINTS ONLY UNLESS DETAILED OR NOTED OTHERWISE. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOAD TO ANY JOIST PANEL POINT IS 100 POUNDS UNLESS APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. LOCATE PANEL POINT LOADS AT LEAST 6 FEET FROM ANY OTHER POINT LOAD ON THE SAME JOIST. IF THIS CONDITION CANNOT BE MET NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO START OF WORK. FOR JOIST REINFORCMENT AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS AT HANGING LOAD CONDITIONS SEE 8. POST INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS USE HILTIKWIK BOLT III(ICC ESR -1385, COLA RR 25577) OR HILTIHIT HY 150 MAX ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM (ICC ESR -1967. COLA RR 25652) FOR SOLID GROUTED CMU ONLY. USE HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR -1917. COLA RR 25701) OR HILT! HIT-RE 500 -SD ADHESIVE (ICC ESR -2322. COLA RR 25700) FOR CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE ONLY. OR USE POST INSTALLED ANCHORS AS SPECIFIED IN DRAWINGS. SUBMIT ALTERNATES WITH TECHNICAL TEST DATA AND ICC ESR NUMBER FOR APPROVAL BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO USE. 9. CONCRETE DEMOLITION AND REPLACEMENT NOTES A. CONTRACTOR TO DETERMINE EXTENT OF SLAB REMOVAL REQUIRED FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. COORD W/ ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL. ELECTRICAL AND TARGET OSR B. TYPICAL NEW CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE: 4- CONCRETE. C. TYPICAL NEW TO EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE SEE D. DURING DEMOLITION IF IT IS DISCOVERED THAT EXISTING FOOTING OR FOUNDATIONS WILL INTERFERE WITH THE PLACEMENT OF NEW UNDERFLOOR MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL CONTACT TARGET STORE DESIGN BEFORE PROCEEDING. E. PLACE CONTROL JOINTS FOR NEW CONCRETE SLABS TO MATCH EXISTING. 10. GENERAL A. (E) DENOTES 'EXISTING' B. INFORMATION ON THIS PLAN REGARDING EXISTING STRUCTURE WAS TAKEN FROM EXISTING STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ACTUAL FIELD CONDITION MAY VARY FROM WHAT IS SHOWN. ALL DIMENSIONS. ELEVATIONS. AND CONDITIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED. ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AND BE RESOLVED PRIOR TO START OF WORK. MODIFICATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT DETAILS SHALL NOT BE MADE WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. C. ELEVATIONS NOTED THUS '(E) [ ]' ARE EXISTING JOIST BEARING ELEVATIONS AT GRID INTERSECTIONS. BUILDING CORNERS OR ALONG WALLS. STRUCTURE SLOPES UNIFORMLY BETWEEN VARYING ELEVATIONS. 11. SHOP DRAWINGS A. SUBMIT STRUCTURAL STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS. B. CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. 12. SPECIAL INSPECTION A. SPECIAL INSPECTION TO BE PROVIDED FOR THE FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AS REQ'D BY THE BUILDING CODE: 1. FIELD WELDING - PERIODIC INSPECTION 2. ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLATION - CONTINUOUS INSPECTION 13. OMISSIONS OR CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE WORKING DRAWINGS AND /OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK INVOLVED. 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE WORK OF ALL TRADES AND SHALL CHECK ALL DIMENSIONS. ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE CALLED TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ENGINEER AND BE RESOLVED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 15. ALL INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS RELATIVE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS IS GIVEN AS THE BEST CURRENT KNOWLEDGE. BUT WITHOUT GUARANTEE OF ACCURACY. WHERE ACTUAL CONDITIONS CONFLICT WITH THE DRAWINGS. THEY SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER SO THAT THE PROPER REVISION MAY BE MADE. MODIFICATIONS OF CONSTRUCTION DETAILS SHALL NOT BE MADE WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. 16. THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED STRUCTURE AND DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OR SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION MEANS. METHODS. TECHNIQUES. SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BRACING. SHORING. AND LAYDOWN OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS. OBSERVATION VISITS TO THE SITE BY FIELD REPRESENTATIVES OF THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER SHALL NOT INCLUDE INSPECTIONS OF THE PROTECTIVE MEASURES OF THE CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES. ANY SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER DURING THE CONSTRUCTION. SHALL BE DISTINGUISHED FROM CONTINUOUS AND DETAILED SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES WHICH ARE FURNISHED BY OTHERS. THESE SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER, WHETHER OF MATERIAL OR WORK, AND WHETHER PERFORMED PRIOR TO, DURING OR AFTER COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION, ARE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASSISTING IN QUALITY CONTROL AND IN ACHIEVING CONFORMANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, BUT DO NOT GUARANTEE CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE. AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION. RECEIVED Nov 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER 0— !r• - -1 — — ,— — ;— r— - • —rT -- • 1 ,' : I. I I I I I�r l I II = = = =1 I,I 11 I!I 111 1 III �r - -1i- II{- - - - -IN - __ - -- III - I - - - — I— I I�I I I III III I 1 I I!I I I 111 111 I --- �►� 11 — -� - -o - -0 - - - -i I!I III 111 111 0- - - -- 0- - - -- o- -- - - -- 0- - - -- I I — II El ;iriff- 11 -i - II 11111 1 II!.I I IIiI i I11I 1 - - -T Iii I - - - Y? r - - 1tH r--T- 00 - -0 - -0 6 G 0 KEY PLAN AR ET ST•RE SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 RE T062 7 PROJECT CODE 270627 VERSI • N R2010 0 08-06-10 CONFIGURATION LL "GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES, PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN HEET sill T -0627 SOUTH CENTER, WA M 44'-0° 4' -8r , I JST GIRDER (E) 24' JOISTS a a a W M v M 0 0 a N a W z c� a N V) 0 W J a a H Q— — }-II- a (.7 0 N ICJ .1-11 IPAC ' ICI UNIT I I I s6-80't -�I ❑ i Ice �I; I1 U W 0 W a- II ICI II II II II I ,1I II PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN VI6" = 1' -0" NOT USED NOTE: 1. DO NOT RIP 6x6 TO ACHIEVE A LEVEL CURB. SHIM AS REQUIRED. SEE 2. FOR ADD'L INFO SEE GRID CU SEE PLAN ---- J------- ----- .-- - -4 (E) JOIST *-------6x6 DOUG -FIR NO.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER SPANNING 2 JOISTS MIN (WHEN 6x6 ARE ALIGNED PERPENDICULAR TO CU BASE RAILS ONLY 2 REQ'D) CU – -.- - – - z J a W W V) (E) ROOF DECK (E) DBE s SEE PLAN CU CURB PLAN CU BASE RAIL (2 OR 3 PER UNIT) .I \CU (E) JOIST NOTE: (E) ROOF DECK NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY (CU BASE RAIL PERPENDICULAR TO 6x6) CU BASE RAIL SHIM TO LEVEL w/ PRESERVATIV TREATED WOOD 3/8- GALV LAG SCREW w/ WASHER (2 PER 6x6 MIN) 6x6 -1/2"= V-0" rr CU cc w 0 0 w (E) 40" JST GIRDER 0 w 0 CJ DETAIL z W W TYP RTCR UNIT BASE AND FRAME C6x8.2x7' -10' AT EACH PIPE LOC SEE PLAN a 2 TYP >I /4 0 z rn • TYP EACH JOIST — AN= I_AAAAAA A M 3�1 • I NTS NOT USED NOT USED y8 V2 -12 <TYP HSS6x6x1/4' CONT W/ 1/4' PL AT zz-''.----- EA END SEE PLAN FOR EXTENTS. EXTEND HSS AT ENDS TO F/0 CAP PL T/O CURB TO BE FLAT & LEVEL .* II M - ∎ ice, rf 3y21 ` DIA STD PIPE AAA P TEACH JO T W/ /2 8x0 8 C L. LENGTH VARIES COORD W/ ROOF SLOPE & MIN HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS C6x8.2x0' -10' CTRD OVER JOIST ADD'L WEB ANGLE SEE L\\\ (E) JOIST SEE PLAN 4 HSS & i OF CURB TO ALIGN RTCR UNIT SUPPORT DETAIL (E) JST �'- GIRDER 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 xxx:000caccooccoomapath)000ccc0000000000Doccfilename 3/4" = 1' -0" • END I /4V3 \TYP 4 HSS & CURB TO ALIGN 4500 E. Pacific Coast Hwy. Suite 100 Long Beach, CA 90804 562.985.3200 P 562.985.1011 F STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS MHPJN IO- 0494 -OOI ADD'L WEB ANGLE SEE C6 C6x8.2x 0'-101G 0 z a I— I— N O N N 0 Ni i 0 0 a a a W ti} 0 w 0 LU H-- 2 0 2 !n ' RTCR UNIT 4800• LU w 0 LU I- LU 0 Q w RTCR UNIT 3000• a c7 0 (V w U w 0 JI w i 0_ 15' J I- / RTCR UNIT 3800• RTCR UNIT — 4800• / io LU H- 0 Q w RTCR PIPE BOX AND CHANNELS BELOW TYP SEE 0 2 w (E) 40" JST GIRDER o- w w PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN 146" = 1' -0" NOT USED (E) ROOF • SPAN (E) JST 1 3' MIN € (E) JST TYP T C6x8.2 I' )ECK I II I II I'I II I II I III t ' \ II I II , ' I4 II. I'I \ C6x8.2 GL 03-31-11 . A153378-000 -1 NECKED BY KDW, GDM CHITECTS PROJECT NO. POSITION C6 ALONG END OF CURB AS SHOWN. I FASTEN CURB TO CHANNEL w/ % DIA PUDDLE WELDS 0 6' OC OR 0.145' DIA POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS 0 6' OC. iCC H- 0 2 w PIPE BOX FRAME DETAIL AT RTCR V4" = 1' -0" NOT USED C6 TYP C6 TO JST PIPE BOX CURB AT RTCR UNIT. SEE SHT R141 FOR LOCATION SLOTTED ROOF DECK OPENING FOR REFRIGERATION PIPING SEE SHT A140 FOR ADD'L REQUIREMENTS C6 SEE SHEET A140 FOR CURB ATTCHMENT TO ROOF DECK NOT USED HANGER NOTES: 1 DUCTWORK. PIPES & OTHER EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE HUNG FROM THE ROOF DECK NO EXCEPTIONS, ALL SUCH ITEMS SHALL BE HUNG FROM JOIST TOP OR BOTTOM CHORDS AND BEAMS. 2 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO SEE TOP CHORD LOAD A ■v■ JOIST PANEL PT TYP >I /7 (E) ROOF DECK r---"----\T---1T--\/ \ BOTTOM CHORD LOAD A (E) JOIST SEE PLAN IF 'X' IS OVER 6' REINFORCE W/ L1'/2x1'/2x36 FIELD WELD TO JOIST TOP & BOT CHORDS 12 JOIST REINFORCING @ POINT/HANGING LOAD 3/4" = 1' -0" JOIS T PANEL PT I � 2' WELD EA SIDE OF JST CHORD RTU RTU CURB ALIGN W/ FIRST CHANNEL TO CLEAR DUCT C6 OOF DECK JOIST SEE PLAN TYPICAL RTU SUPPORT DETAIL HATE I E UE D 5 • 8 NOVEMBER 2010 11 -08-10 PERMIT SET 'RAWN BY 03 -31 -11 t ' \ A152881 -000-1 GL 03-31-11 A A153378-000 -1 NECKED BY KDW, GDM CHITECTS PROJECT NO. 10-0285-01 nameofpersonplotting xxxxdatexxxxtimex NOT TO SCALE NOTE: FASTEN CURB TO CHANNEL W/ 5/8 DIA PUDDLE WELDS 0 12'0C boo -3(v7 NOT USED NOT USED REVIEWED CODE ODE COMPLIANC E { APPROVED Mi4Y 0 5 2011 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION NOT USED 0- - - -- 0— 0— 0— 0— Q? 4 • - ,- 0 -r- - 0 - -0 — 0 0 - -0 - --0 —0 - —0 0 _0-- - - -0 b a o KEY PLAN 1 •t SOUTH CENTER WA 301 STRANDER BLVD TUKWILA WA 98188 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS F 0 RCCE D APR 21. 2011 PERMIT CENTER +HE S141 SOUTH CENTER, WA 1 HOUR FIRE BARRIER WALL ALONG GRID L TO SEPARATE HIGH PILED STORAGE AREAS PER SECTION 2306.3.2.1 OF 1 2007 CFC 15' BACK -TO -BACK SHELF STORAGE OF CLASS IV COMMODITIES ON 12' HIGH 24' DEEP SHELVING UNITS, 8 -14 SHELVES PER UNIT. STOCK ROOM AREA IS 6,136 SQ. FT. MAXIMUM CEILING HEIGHT IS 19' -11' MAXIMUM PILE VOLUME THIS AREA IS 28,839 CU. FT. , I USABLE STORAGE HEIGHT TO f 7II BOTTOM OF BAR JOIST IS 17' -11' --COMMODITY CLEARANCE BETWEEN TOP OF STORAGE AND THE SPRINKLER HEAD DEFLECTOR IS 4' -4' THIS AREA IS NOT HIGH PILED. THIS AREA IS NOT HIGH PILED. OUTLINE OF HIGH PILED STORAGE AREAS (TYP) MitIM 15' HIGH SINGLE AND DOUBLE ROW OPEN RACK STORAGE OF CLASS IV COMMODITIES, 2 -7 TIERS PER RACK. STOCK ROOM AREA IS 10,284 SQ. FT; MAXIMUM CEILING HEIGHT IS 20' -3° MAXIMUM PILE VOLUME THIS AREA I5 48,349 CU. FT. 'E1 (N) PRODU i j y 11•111111111M1111111111111111111111 USABLE STORAGE HEIGHT TO BOTTOM OF BAR JOIST 1S 18' -3° EXISTING STOCK ROOM. oral COMMODITY CLEARANCE BETWEEN TOP OF STORAGE AND THE SPRINKLER HEAD DEFLECTOR IS 4' -8' roxim off ezzAir EXISTING :STOCK ROOM. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF PLASTICS STORED IN 120 SQUARE FOOT AREAS, SEPARATED BY A f OI.MUM DISTANCE OF 25 = ='. (TYPICAL). R - -� I•�'��I1• I �111���r�l _•1. i i t i fI 7- GENERAL NOTES: A. MAXIMUM PILE VOLUME STORAGE THIS FLOOR I5 77,188 CU. FT. B. COMMODITY IS CLASSIFIED AS CLASS IV NON- BANDED AND NON- ENCAPSULATED GENERAL HOUSEHOLD MERCHANDISE (CLASS 1, 11, AND III CONTAINING AN APPRECIABLE AMOUNT OF GROUP A PLASTICS). C. DESIGNATION BASED ON ENGINEERING ANALYSIS: PER IFC 2009 CHAPTER 23 SECTION 2304.2, THE DESIGNATION OF A HIGH PILED COMBUSTIBLE STORAGE AREA IS ALLOWED TO BE BASED ON A LOWER HAZARD CLASS WHEN A LIMITED QUANTITY OF THE HIGHEST HAZARD COMMODITY HAS BEEN DEMOSTRATED TO BE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED BY THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM OVER A 900 SQ. FT. AREA. THE CONTIGUOUS AREA OCCUPIED BY THE HIGHER HAZARD SHALL NOT EXCEED 120 SQ. FT. AND SHALL BE SEPARATED FROM SIMILAR AREAS BY 25 FT. OR MORE. D. THE STORAGE OF ANY HIGH HAZARD PRODUCTS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 120 SQUARE FOOT AREAS. E. THE BUILDING AND THE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ARE EXISTING. F. THIS PLAN I5 FOR REFERENCE ONLY. G. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FIXTURE PLAN FOR DETAILS ON EXISTING VERSUS NEW SHELF AND RACK FIXTURES IN STOCK ROOMS. 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 • • MICHAUD COOLEY ERICKSON - ENGINEERING SOLUTIONS 1200 METROPOLITAN CENTRE 333 SOUTH SEVENTH STREET MINNEAPOLIS. MN 55402 FAX: 612- 339 -8354 TEL: E'2 -339 -494' T: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627f911.dgn HIGH PILED STOCK PLAN 2009 IFC Chapter 23 Table 2306.2 (Commodity Class- I -IV) 1/16" = 1' -0" SIZE OF HIGH -PILED STORAGE AREA (sq. ft.) Fire - detection System Draft Curtain Boards Max. Pile Dimension (feet) Max. Permissible Max. Pile Storage Volume Height (cubic feet) (feet) NR I NR 501 -2,500 100 40 NR 100,000 100 1 40 400,000 12,001 - 20,000 Yes NR 20,001 - 500,000 Greater Than 1500,000 100 1 30 100 I 40 100 1 40 200,000 400,000 400,000 Yes Yes Yes 100 1 40 i. Not required when an automatic fire - extinguishing system is designedand installed to protect the high -piled storage area in accordance with section 2307 and 2308. • = ■ DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS -_ -_.- NOVEMBER 8, 2010 11 -08-10 Storage Arrangements: CODE REVIEW Storage Height: 15' maximum storage height. Ceiling Sprinkler Density' DRAWN BY In -Rack Sprinkler: Commodity Class: Class IV non- banded and non - encapsulated general household merchandise (Class I, II and III products containing an appreciable amount of group A plastics in cardboard cartons). SHELF- CROSS SUPPORT - 5 /a" PARTICLE BOARD 3/4" x 14 GA TYPICAL OF 8 -14 ETAL STRAPPING Storage Arrangements: Rack Storage: Single and double row open (metal mesh) pallet racking with 7' -9" to 10'-4" aisles. Longitudinal flue space not present and not required per IFC table 2308.3. TES 15' maximum storage height. Ceiling Sprinkler Density: Marking and Receiving (Rack Storage) 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 Sq. Ft. Standard Spray Upright K-8.0 286 °F, maximum spacing 101x10' In -Rack Sprinkler: Not Required per table 16.2.1.3.2 of 2007 NFPA 13. .- CHECKED BY L II i� 40 I 1 1 I 1 r+ ' 1!11: x '1,1611'' d r!.n::t „!Jty, �4, +`�1 �,I1 h�� DCC/APM � -: ff _ I �_ ✓�'' Iy1ME: ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. :::r 1 n:5 ,.:: ,» .��;�: , �:1;�� ,rl, 1 r' e . Y'a'n' :. 4Rw iu1. � � dr , tyt�tt :: ,<.�: .. - ' WIRE MESH SHELVES T • u• : r ... :.'..f. .. 3�.:E.... ,. ,._. .. „,.. n_. .:, ., � .?. Y.':. � , � „,. jlIy.'xE1�{j �M•i� C�`:Yt't,61 t" ext w- I .t,:u'. .1.:...,, .., ::: : :.,:.,:.7:. ��. ,� nJ 1 1�, =� „�. x� II i 11:�yf I IiI19 I�Iti X11 If{ trytk� :. .: :�:x ,a�: }; ,�I 11 I/I II 1 ®I 11 I I I II I MEI MEI d lj } _'�:: MCE 11/52010 400,000 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANG APPROVED MY 05 2011 CityotTukwila UILD..... .- .. - RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER = = Target Store High Piled Rack Storage Fire Protection Analysis- 2007 NFPA 13 PROJECT CODE 301 STRANDER BLVD 1270627 TUKWILA WA 98188 -_ -_.- Commodity Class: ' Class IV non - banded and non - encapsulated general household merchandise (Class I, II and III products containing an appreciable amount of group A plastics in cardboard cartons). Storage Arrangements: Shelf Storage: 24 inch deep solid shelves, back -to -back shelving units with 22 gauge sheet metal barrier between. 37 inch aisle width between shelves. Shelving runs approximately 35 ft long. Storage Height: 15' maximum storage height. Ceiling Sprinkler Density' Stock (Shelf Storage) 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 Sq. Ft. Standard Spray Upright K -8.0 286 °F, maximum spacing 10'x10' In -Rack Sprinkler: Commodity Class: Class IV non- banded and non - encapsulated general household merchandise (Class I, II and III products containing an appreciable amount of group A plastics in cardboard cartons). SHELF- CROSS SUPPORT - 5 /a" PARTICLE BOARD 3/4" x 14 GA TYPICAL OF 8 -14 ETAL STRAPPING Storage Arrangements: Rack Storage: Single and double row open (metal mesh) pallet racking with 7' -9" to 10'-4" aisles. Longitudinal flue space not present and not required per IFC table 2308.3. Storage Height: 15' maximum storage height. Ceiling Sprinkler Density: Marking and Receiving (Rack Storage) 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 Sq. Ft. Standard Spray Upright K-8.0 286 °F, maximum spacing 101x10' In -Rack Sprinkler: Not Required per table 16.2.1.3.2 of 2007 NFPA 13. .- 1 , L II i� 40 I 1 1 I 1 r+ ' 1!11: x '1,1611'' d r!.n::t „!Jty, �4, +`�1 �,I1 h�� � � -: ff _ I �_ ✓�'' Iy1ME: ■ 1 k1, :�. .� 1 . .k FM i .., It ,..::hY.i�,l:.:nl tl 1 .�. nI.W.Ik::. nAi .::,:,.:: ,I .r ,:It u,Il,t , 1 k : � �„ ,1,.:, : � ::,: SIN �i��M 1':?�� .,� II 1C,•1;:�: 11 �I/ '�- 'z 11# "tty 11,.�Er,t?�, rx; ^'• :::r 1 n:5 ,.:: ,» .��;�: , �:1;�� ,rl, 1 r' e . Y'a'n' :. 4Rw iu1. � � dr , tyt�tt :: ,<.�: .. - ' WIRE MESH SHELVES T • u• : r ... :.'..f. .. 3�.:E.... ,. ,._. .. „,.. n_. .:, ., � .?. Y.':. � , � „,. jlIy.'xE1�{j �M•i� C�`:Yt't,61 t" ext w- I .t,:u'. .1.:...,, .., ::: : :.,:.,:.7:. ��. ,� nJ 1 1�, =� „�. x� II i 11:�yf I IiI19 I�Iti X11 If{ trytk� :. .: :�:x ,a�: }; ,�I 11 I/I II 1 ®I 11 I I I II I MEI MEI d lj } _'�:: : ' 11� '. f'. Y, ; kll `EI , '�1,�'YEI "3r 1 {:� 1T,} }„�!1ktk r:�ri#11Ii�4Lt i`*i kf �1y,/9 CND J7 k�5ry'�r j1ft lliK [111 Fe 1�+4 -� .'a 41 kt.;: # j::l �' }�.Y'a'GM (? 7,:.. : n. k i', g LX 14� �i f ( it fr ?+ +tx.k kiIk`k1 ISiI1IIt1111�114 i.' {I,1 #� 451114 jl1�i�4i i4t� ` IATai ,: r,N1 f . „,, ,.C1;�111u11i' ,.r�,d� �. I :,ll � ,1 .i1 .111 { 1 d�}i �.�! 1;' } 11 I 'i Id Pll a 1! '171i1 Yf�!l }' i�'' i •' 3 1 .:;:..,. 1-; „a 3 11 ji :.. ® rr• 1 11 Y'4 ! 1 1 } 1 " ?:a' 4 0 1'1 II I ®I II II II 1 I II I 0 t ,! I � 1. (C:Itl rf��;li!; O Lt7 1 { Ir1 t '1 1E: I 1"'I1Tkka�l��I `i'��CIE �Cy E.I M� w, �tfllxzxfll j a {�tF I'I )t�6", L ii ll�'lA A11 ��I. f "%r♦il } Il�nd:!�1�1 f 1.�' 4 t"i N ffl ]� ��F }I��'.17•ar r111t t1 X14 {Ilil ts:'�ffi/� i - kf� V f r w "- 4'-0" Gil 4, -01 I U t7- 1 II 17 1 II 171 II 1/I 11 I/ 1 IM ■/10 ' I. • N 8,_0 12'_0° STOCKROOM RACK STORAGE ELEVATION F911 NTS / I ∎I NFPA 13 (2007) Analysis- Single and Double Row Rack Storage From table 16.2.1.3.2 'Single or Doable RowRackg StorageHe/ght Over _ail up to andlncluding2Sfee4 Without SalklShelves ; no in -rack sprinkler system is required for non - encapsulated commodity if the ceiling sprinkler density and area in figure 16.2.1.3.2 (d) is achieved. Utilizing curve "E" for 286 °F rated sprinklers and 8 ft. aisles produces a density of 0.42 gpm/sq ft. over 4,000 sq. ft. for storage to 20 ft. Utilizing curve "G" for 4 ft. aisles produces a density of 0.49 gpm/sq. ft. over 4,000 sq. ft. Interpolating for 7' -9" aisles produces a density of 0.43 gpm/sq. ft. This density can be adjusted to 0.26 gpm /sq. ft. per figure 16.2.1.3.4.1 "Cei/ingsprinkler/lens /ty vs. Storage Height" for 15 ft storage height The sprinkler design of 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. of e;; the most remote 4,000 sq. ft. exceeds this standard by 30 %. NFPA 13 (2007) Analysis- Single and Double Row Rack Storage - Plastics Per section 17.2.1.2, figures 17.2.1.2 (a) through 17.2.1.2 (1) shall be used to determine ceiling protection for cartoned unexpanded stable Group A plastics. Per figure 17.2.1.2 (b) '13 storage; G9 to 1812 Clearane to Ceiling" a ceiling sprinkler density of 0.6 gpm/sq. ft. over 2,000 sq. ft. is required to adequately protect the commodity. Based on IFC section 2304.2, the sprinkler density of the higher hazard shall be capable of deliverying the higher density over a minimum area of 900 sq. ft. The sprinkler design of 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 sq. ft. delivers 1,320 gpm. The sprinkler design of 0.6 gpm/sq. ft. over 900 sq. ft. delivers 540 gpm. Field verify that existing - ,l1, ,11, :111 E E I •I•It , E l 1.1 . I I E Ulu •1 I I 'II E I i . REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANG APPROVED MY 05 2011 CityotTukwila UILD..... .- .. - RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER pp9ik? 19004* (10:1"? SCALE BAR: 1/16" = 1-0" 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111 0 4' 8' 12' 16' 20' 24' 28' 32' 36' 40' TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER \A/ 1A = = Target Store High Piled Shelf Storage Fire Protection Analysis- 2007 NFPA 13 PROJECT CODE 301 STRANDER BLVD 1270627 TUKWILA WA 98188 J Commodity Class: ' Class IV non - banded and non - encapsulated general household merchandise (Class I, II and III products containing an appreciable amount of group A plastics in cardboard cartons). Storage Arrangements: Shelf Storage: 24 inch deep solid shelves, back -to -back shelving units with 22 gauge sheet metal barrier between. 37 inch aisle width between shelves. Shelving runs approximately 35 ft long. Storage Height: 15' maximum storage height. Ceiling Sprinkler Density' Stock (Shelf Storage) 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 Sq. Ft. Standard Spray Upright K -8.0 286 °F, maximum spacing 10'x10' In -Rack Sprinkler: Not Required per section 20.3.4 of 2007 NFPA 13. SHELF- CROSS SUPPORT - 5 /a" PARTICLE BOARD 3/4" x 14 GA TYPICAL OF 8 -14 ETAL STRAPPING / BACK PANEL - MIN 22 GA � �) .- 1 , SHEETMETAL , ' 1!11: x '1,1611'' d r!.n::t „!Jty, �4, +`�1 �,I1 h�� ,1,,::-1i HORIZONTAL BRACE TYP. OF 4 ' -•_l id ' - ' - .� ]P`r!I �iryI117 w, ■ Pp � 1 1 1,I,t1,l Gal ;,:,1 MEI MEI 4B 1 : ' : / 1 I, :e1 1�IJ/ e 0 t ,! I � 1. (C:Itl rf��;li!; t 1 { Ir1 t '1 1E: i / OM 1 IM ■/10 ' I. N . / / %I MIN 1 mi. / I ∎I /I1 ∎I i . r r % /2' -0" . ' , 41 -0" 4' -0" - 1 4' -0" 4' -0" BACK 3 -TO -BACK STOCKROOM SINGLE ROW SHELF STORAGE ELEVATION F911 NTS NFPA 13 (2007) Analysis- Shelf Storage From figure 14.2.4.2, 'SprAvkler System llesign Curves, ZOfeeIBighStorage -High Temperature RRtedSprioklers ; a ceiling sprinkler density of 0.21 gpm/sq. ft. over 3,600 sq. ft. is required to adequately protect the storage arrangement. This density can be adjusted per figure 14.2.4.3 for 15 ft. storage height to 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. The sprinkler design of 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 sq. ft. exceeds this standard. NFPA 13 (2007) Analysis- Shelf Storage - Plastics Per section 15.2, group A plastics shall be protected as indicated in Figure 15.2.1, 'Decision Tree': From figure 15.2.1, column C in table 15.2.5 (a) shall be used for cartoned stable nonexpanded group A plastics. From column C, a design density of 0.5 gpm /sq. ft. over 2,500 is required for 15 ft. maximum storage height with up. to 20 ft. ceiling height and 0.6 gpm/sq. ft. for ceiling heights of 20 to 25 ft. Per section 15.2.7 (3), the area of operation is permitted to be reduced to 2,000 sq. ft. for closed arrays. Based on IFC section 2304.2, the sprinkler density of the higher hazard shall be capable of delivering the higher density over a minimum area of 900 sq. ft. The sprinkler design of 0.33 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 4,000 sq. ft. delivers 1,320 gpm. The sprinkler design of 0.6 gpm/sq. ft. over the most remote 900 sq. ft. delivers 540 gpm. Field verify that existing sprinkler system is capable of providing a sprinkler density of 0.6 gpm/ sq't. over 900 sq. ft. n_ pp9ik? 19004* (10:1"? SCALE BAR: 1/16" = 1-0" 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111 0 4' 8' 12' 16' 20' 24' 28' 32' 36' 40' TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER \A/ 1A STORE T0627 VERSION MR201008 08 -06-10 TITLE HIGH PILED STOCK PROJECT CODE 301 STRANDER BLVD 1270627 TUKWILA WA 98188 CONFIGURATION LLppF�0 PLAN s'�p�►C�' ' oD 4 eiloN F;e(11 \O SHEET F911 Hazard Class - - 1-------------------- - - - - -- II II II II FREEZERS 11111111 �5""l�I� MU II II .a.Mall ' I I--I I ._a.._.. 1 MI r 1r [E 1 i- I L -� LAS II L it I II L _ L STOCK '����-_-_�IIIIIII,IIIIIIII1�t ! I H. H. ki I ift 4 —_1 Target Quantity On Hand 2006 International Fire Code Maximum Storage Quantities of Hazardous Materials per Control Area* FL I-A 0.00 gal FL I-B FL 1-C CL II CLIIIA TOTAL COMBINED CLASSES: FLI -B, FLI-C, CL -II, & CL- ILIA 203.35 gal 115.69 gal 320.75 gal 693.63 gal 1 ,333.42 gal CL 111-B 1,25971 gal AEROSOL LEVEL 1 AEROSOL LEVEL 2 AEROSOL LEVEL 3 AEROSOL 2 &3 OXY1- LIQUID OXY1- SOLID O?.Y2 - Liquid OXY2- SOLID WR I - LIQUID CORR - LIQUID CORR - SOLID IRR- LIQUID IRR- SOLID IRR- GAS SENS- LIQUID SENS- SOLID - OHH- LIQUID OHH- SOLID 1,572.11 lbs 812.75 lbs 954.28 lbs 1,767.03 lbs 60 gal 120 gal 120 gal 240 gal 660 gal 7,500 gal Unlimited IFC 2006 Table 3404.3.4.1 *IFC 2006 Table 2703.1.1(1) - Footnote d *IFC 2006 Table 2703.1.1(1) - Footnote d *IFC 2006 Table 2703_1.1(1)- Footnote d *IFC 2006 Table 2703.1.1(1) - Footnote d *IFC 2006 Table 3404.3.4.1 supersedes 2703.1.1(1) quantities for Group M Occupancies. Maximum quantites on hand for combined classes is 7500 gal_ IFC 2006 Table 3404.3.4.1 Not Regulated IFC 2006 Section 2804.1 28.90 gal 600.16 lbs 0.00 lbs 3.94 lbs 12.40 gal 223.85 gal 8973 lbs 4,396.25 gal 8,835.75 lbs 0.00 CuFt 329.21 gal 918:13 Has 596.77 gal 1,278.51 lbs CAR 492.00 lbs 2,500 lbs 4,000 gal 4,000 lbs 500 lbs 500 lbs Not Limited 1,000 gal Not Regulated Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted Not Noted IFC 2006 Table 2806.2 (Ground Storage), Maximum quantities on hand for combined level is 2,500 lbs. IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 - Footnote d IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 - Footnote d IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 - Footnote d IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 - Footnote d IFC 2006 Table 2703.111 IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 IFC 2006 Table 2703.11.1 Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code Not Noted by the International Fire Code * - Please note that the maximum quantities are based upon a sprinklered building for a retail occupant Footnote #6(Table 8001.15 -A) - Quantities may be increased 100 percent in sprinklered buildings Footnote #5(Table 8001.1.5 -B) - Quantities may be increased 100 percent in sprinklered buildings LEGEND TYPE SYMBOL MISCELLANEOUS DESCRIPTION STORAGE TANK ABOVE GROUND CARBON DIOXIDE Hazardous Material Symbols AEROSOLS (LEVEL 1): AEROSOLS (LEVEL 2 & 3): FLAMMABLE GAS: FLAMMABLE LIQUID: CARCINOGEN: FLAMMABLE SOLID: NON -FLAM COMP. GAS: TBD OXIDIZER CLASS 1: OXIDIZER CLASS 2: OXIDIZER CLASS 3: WATER REACTIVE: SENSITIZER: IRRITANT: OTHER HEALTH HAZARD: CORROSIVE: TOXIC/HIGHLY TOXIC: COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID: 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 ERICKSON ENGINEERING SOLUTIONS 1200 METROPOLITAN CENTRE 333 SOUTH SEVENTH STREET MINNEAPOLIS. MN 55402 FAX: 612 - 339 -8354 TEL: 612- 339 -4941 ■ T:\Remodels\0627_WA_South_Center R \_ActiveCAD \0627f921.dgn 4 4 4 I 1 I 1 HI- '----- I - -I - -1 , 1 I 4 eEIBREEeMefe>s U l L- d IND imam. 1 I Hi If ■1 11 11 1111 11 HE I LTH A ID 41111111111111111 1111111111111.1111111 =nom rrrrlr _.. 1111111111111111 C HAZARDOUS MATERIAL 116" = V -0" DATE ISSUED ISSUES AND REVISIONS VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 08, NOVEMBER 2010 11 -08-10 PROJECT CODE 270627 CODE REVIEW PLAN DRAWN BY APG CHECKED BY DCC, APM ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. MCE 11B2010 OD 1)417 - - EWEWEp F R of COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAY 0 5 2 G i i CiyofTukwlla BUILDING ni111,41r)lu REcEI F-D NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER SCALE BAR: 1A6" = 1' -0'r 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111 0 4' 8' 12' 16' 20' 24' 28' 32' 36' 40' TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER W A STORE T0627 VERSION MR201008 08-06 -10 TITLE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL 301 STRANDER BLVD TUN/ILA WA 98188 PROJECT CODE 270627 CONFIGURATION LL PLAN SHEET F921 • BAY VARIES 8' -0" OR 12' -0" • W_ H- W z 0 • 00 110 00 Q0 00 0-0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0-g 00 00 00 00 00 6B 00 00 00 00 ,c..,p. `I 8 R51 BEAM V 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 nn 00 00 00 00 TYP. 4' -0" 0 0 0 0 O' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N. ❑ 2" WIDE x 21/2" TALL 16 GA BRACE TYP 0 0 0 0 • i SIM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 V V V V V V V V FRONT ELEVATION NOTE: FOR SPECIFIC CONFIGURATIONS SEE ELEVATIONS TO SIDE ELEVATION 10 TYPICAL PALLET RACK ELEVATIONS SEE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS 3/4 " =1' -0" FOR SITE SPECIFIC INFORMATION 1" WIDE x 14 GA CHANNEL @ 18" OC TYP W /WIRE DECKING BEAM SEE WIRE DECKING AND CHANNEL SUPPORT NOT TO SCALE 11 311 2" 14 GA TUBE PLATE CONNECTION 4 -11 /16 " � HOLES W /5/8" 0 BOLTS 3/8" PL /$V OVER CONVEYOR NOT TO SCALE FRAMES ONLY LENGTH VARIES L 3/6" BENT PL 13/32 RIVET 3 RIVET CLIP c 4" BEAMS NOT TO SCALE N 11/2" WELD ON SIDES 3/6" BENT PL 4 RIVET CLIP @ 6" BEAMS NOT TO SCALE LOCKING PIN/ FOR UPLIFT RESISTANCE 3/6 CONNECTION PL ON BEAM SEE BEAM SEE BEAWCOLUMN CONNECTION 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING _ 7 �n� � 1 0 00 PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES • o o. • 0 - in . 0 • 00 — OPTIONAL BEAM LOCATION. BEAM TO BE PLACED ON MAIN TRAFFIC AISLE. TWO BEAMS REQUIRED FOR BACK TO BACK APPLICATIONS. USED TO PROTECT LIGHT FEATURE IF PRESENT 00 8' -0" CLR ONE TIER PASS THRU PROFILE REF: DETAILS ® & ® NOT TO SCALE WY 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 NOT TO SCALE COLUMN THICKNESS: 14 GA COLUMN THICKNESS: 14 GA 1 LENGTH VARIES • 3" J 0 TYPICAL COLUMN 7-> APT NOT TO SCALE REINFORCED COLUMNS USED ON ALL RACKING LOCATIONS 2 -5/6" x 3' -0" TOP SET AT 3' -0" AFF DOUBLE ANGLE INSERT @ 3' -0" AFF TYPICAL REINFORCED COLUMN NOT TO SCALE COLUMN SECTIONS NOT TO SCALE 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING TWO TIER PROFILE REF: DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PROFILING NOTE: . ALL INSTALLATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE PROFILES SHOWN IN • MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHELVES (TIERS) SHALL BE FIVE. • MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN TIERS SHALL BE 5' -1 ". • MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM THE FLOOR TO THE BOTTOM TIER SHALL BE 8' -1 ". o:\Remodels\0627_WA_South_Center R \Strut Documents\ Structural_Fixture \0627sr51.dgn 10 GA COLUMN BAY • VARIES 8' -0" OR 12' -0" �n� � 0 0 00 PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING • 0 - in . 0 • 00 — TWO TIER PROFILE REF: DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PROFILING NOTE: . ALL INSTALLATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE PROFILES SHOWN IN • MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHELVES (TIERS) SHALL BE FIVE. • MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN TIERS SHALL BE 5' -1 ". • MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM THE FLOOR TO THE BOTTOM TIER SHALL BE 8' -1 ". o:\Remodels\0627_WA_South_Center R \Strut Documents\ Structural_Fixture \0627sr51.dgn 10 GA COLUMN BAY • VARIES 8' -0" OR 12' -0" �n� � 00 ■ • 0 0 • 00 PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES 00 • 0 00 o ' rn 00 00 — 00 00 o ;,-, 00 00 00 • 0 1 v 00 • 00 00 0 00 • 00 012 a0 00 3 9 00 00 DECK R51 SR51 BEAM o 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 V V V V V c,tWbk rum 4201 vtotore4 • TYP AV 21/2" EA SIDE TYP PL %" -10 GA COLUMN 4 -1/2" 0 FLOOR 7 ANCHORS. SEE GENERAL NOTE 3 3" 3" '/8 D C 11/2 " -12" PROVIDE 6" CONTINUOUS WELD AT ENDS OF BUILT -UP COMPRESSION MEMBERS OVER CONVEYOR RACK BASE PLATE (STD & SEISMIC) NOT TO SCALE ANCHORING NOTE: PROVIDE TWO 1/2" fi ANCHORS AT HOLES ADJACENT TO POST SIDES AS SHOWN. INSIDE BASE PLATE HOLES DO NOT NEED ADD'L ANCHORS IN OPEN HOLES UNLESS SLAB CONTROL JOINT INTERRUPTS PRIMARY LOCATIONS. - OPEN HOLES - NO FLOOR ANCHORS 1/2" 0 FLOOR ANCHOR. SEE GENERAL NOTE 3 TYPICAL PALLET RACK BASE PLATES 12 "WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE LENGTH VARIES DECKING - r�obvMe �n� � o ' '�' ■ • 0 0 • CONFIGURATION LI_ PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING • 0 o ' rn 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING — 0 • 0 o s- - o ;,-, THREE TIER RACK PROFILE REF: DETAIL 0 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE 3 "x3" POST 3 "x3" POST 11/2" WIDE x 11/2"- I ALL x 14 GA (DIAGONALS) BRACE @ SIM BRACE MEMBER IS HORIZONTAL I/8 TYPICAL BRACE NOT TO SCALE 2" x 21/2" x 16 GA BRACE @ SIM BRACE MEMBER IS HORIZONTAL TYPICAL BRACE NOT TO SCALE CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE 8' -6" SIM 11/2" WIDE x 11/4" TALL 16 GA STRUT TYP UNO 11/2" WIDE x 11/2" TALL 14 GA BRACE TYP UNO r ❑ 1/8 V3 ❑ "3" x 3" N x 14 GA TUBE TYP /8 /11/2 4 x 3 "x 14 G TUBE -%" 0 A307 BOLTS N- V 10' OVER CONVEYOR RACKS 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE LENGTH VARIES DECKING • z a D_ 0 1< N 0 U 3/4"= l'-0" 1/8 V 4 (6" @ 6" BM) FOUR TIER RACK PROFILE D� REF: DETAIL ■ NOT TO SCALE 25/ BEAMS %8 V 11/2 2% (4%" @ 6" BM) V END PL CONNECTOR SEE 5A. FOR 4" BEAM SEE 5B FOR 6" BEAM 1/8 V 1 -12 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES UNITS: INCHES UNO ate. 41311 NOT TO SCALE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAi 05 20 City of Tukwila BUILDING 1 H II InN 1 -12 TYP 3 "x3 "x10 GA POST 3" RACK POSTS -1/2" 0 THREADED BOLTS 14 GA ROW SPACER CHANNELS ONE TYPICAL EACH UPRIGHT ON BACK TO BACK RUNS SEE FIXTURE PLAN FOR LAYOUT TYPICAL PALLET RACK SPACER 4 "x3" x 14 GA SADDLE W/2-1/2"0 A307 BOLTS TYPICAL • 2 "x2" x 14 GA BRACE -. V NOT TO SCALE OVER CONVEYOR NOT TO SCALE BACK TO BACK ROW SPACER ELEVATION 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE LENGTH VARIES - DECKING r - r�obvMe �n� � • • • CONFIGURATION LI_ PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES ° • 0 c., ' 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING _ `,° N 0 o s- - o ;,-, 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING v ini • 0 1 v 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING --. 0 ao • FOUR TIER RACK PROFILE D� REF: DETAIL ■ NOT TO SCALE 25/ BEAMS %8 V 11/2 2% (4%" @ 6" BM) V END PL CONNECTOR SEE 5A. FOR 4" BEAM SEE 5B FOR 6" BEAM 1/8 V 1 -12 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES UNITS: INCHES UNO ate. 41311 NOT TO SCALE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAi 05 20 City of Tukwila BUILDING 1 H II InN 1 -12 TYP 3 "x3 "x10 GA POST 3" RACK POSTS -1/2" 0 THREADED BOLTS 14 GA ROW SPACER CHANNELS ONE TYPICAL EACH UPRIGHT ON BACK TO BACK RUNS SEE FIXTURE PLAN FOR LAYOUT TYPICAL PALLET RACK SPACER 4 "x3" x 14 GA SADDLE W/2-1/2"0 A307 BOLTS TYPICAL • 2 "x2" x 14 GA BRACE -. V NOT TO SCALE OVER CONVEYOR NOT TO SCALE BACK TO BACK ROW SPACER ELEVATION 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE LENGTH VARIES - DECKING r - r�obvMe �n� � o ' N • • CONFIGURATION LI_ PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING c., ' 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING _ `,° N 0 o s- - 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING v ini 12" WIRE STOP RISER CLIPPED ON TO WIRE DECKING --. 0 FIVE TIER RACK PROFILE REF: DETAIL 0 NOT TO SCALE GENERAL NOTES • 1. THIS DRAWING SHOWS TYPICAL COMPONENT ASSEMBLY AND ARRANGEMENTS. SEE TARGET FIXTURE PLAN SHEET SR11 FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 2. MATERIAL: STEEL ASTM A101 1 HSLA5 GRADE 50 CLASS 2 TARGET 3. FLOOR ANCHOR: SIMPSON TITEN HD 1/2" o x 3" LONG (21/2" EMBED) ICC ES REPORT ESR -2713 CITY OF LA RR # 25741 4. SPECIAL INSPECTION PERIODIC INSPECTION FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON FIXTURES OVER 8' -0 ". NO WELDING IN FIELD. 5. FOR BACK TO BACK ROW SPACERS SEE 6. THE COMPONENTS REPRESENTED HERE ARE MANUFACATURED BY SPACERAK, RMI CERTIFICATION 45170. 7. SHELVING COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS CONFORM TO RMI AND ARE DESIGNED TO AN IBC OR CBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D. DATE ISSUED 02 NOVEMBER 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS 11 -02 -2010 ISSUE FOR PERMIT DRAWN BY MKA CHECKED BY GJS Donna Miller 02 —NOV -2010 14:21 . NOT TO SCALE TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, \tfA 301 °�w "w` ^�����T °N 98180 r�obvMe �n� � �uSTRUCTURAL DETAILS & ANCHORAGE OF ° ° """ CONFIGURATION LI_ PALLET RACK & GENERAL NOTES RECEIVED NOV 19 2C10 PERMIT CENTE- SHEET S R51 A CO ONE SHELF ONE BAY 4' -0" 3 R52 TYP SHELF 964 " HOLE 6" OC TYP 237/8" 8 SR5 d El d e e d 11.4rir b H ES d c9 N d e V V V V V V (.0 i N 0 • • • • V FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION TYPICAL ELEVATIONS -LIGHT DUTY SHELVING 14 GA GALV SHELF BEAM 5/8" PARTICLE BOARD LIGHT DUTY SHELF & BEAM NOT TO SCALE 5R5 N� SR5 NOT TO SCALE II EII (C_ 1 I I \VI ILL V/ — • • • • — Erik b • O N N & & DRAWN BY MKA �`�� " ° °" C\I O N O • 371- • O V • O • CHECKED BY GJS O c-• PROFILE "A" (A -1) & "E" (E -8) FILE "A" (A -1) NOT TO SCALE NOTE: SINGLE RUNS OF SHELVING TO USE STEEL STRAP BRACING PER Aft BACK- 0 -BACK SHELVING TO USE STEEL SHEAR PANEL PER 3/4" x 15 GA BRACE WITH *10 x3/4 SMS © EACH END BACK BRACING NOT TO SCALE BACK BRACING MIN 24 GA PANEL WITH #8 SMS @ MAX 24" TO POSTS X —BRACE AT ALTERNATE BAYS. METAL PANEL AT EACH BAY SHELF BEAM TAB ENGAGES POST SLOT SHELF BEAM FRONT ELEVATION POST SIDE ELEVATION NOT TO SCALE 1/8")(7/8" SLOT TAB CONNECTION SEE s LIGHT DUTY SHELF BEAM TO POST CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE (.0 PROFILE "B" (B -1, B -2) NOT TO SCALE CO CO N OD is PROFILE "C" (C -1 to C -5) SR5 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 o: \Remodels \0627_WA South_Center R \Strut Documents\ Structural_Fixture \0627sr52.dgn • NOT TO SCALE • .125 ±;020" LIGHT DUTY POST 3/6" DIA TYP (2) PLS 9A6 " DIA TYP (2) PLS 0_ H- •TYP 7A6 134 2% PLAN VIEW NOT TO SCALE 15 GA LIGHT DUTY BACK BRACING N c0 Ca PROFILE "D" (D -1 • • NOT TO SCALE RIVET DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 2%" REAR ELEVATION NOTE: ONLY ONE 3/8" x 3" EXPANSION BOLT REQ'D PER BASE PL COORDINATE BOLT LOCATION W /SLAB CONTROL JOINT • 12 GA MTL 21/4" SIDE ELEVATION LIGHT DUTY POST BASE PLATE 16 GA POST #8 SMS @ 2' -0" OC INTO BOTH POSTS & PANEL OR BRACE BRACE OR BACK PANEL SEE BACK -TO -BACK CONNECTION 0 N O N 0 N CO CO aD CO O N O N PROFILE "F" (F -1 TARGET • NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE • • Co r VARIES A 4 SR52 TYP PERIMETER J (ANCHORAGE AT PERIMETER POSTS ONLY) NOTE: AT SINGLE RUNS, SECURE ALL POSTS WITH BASE PLATES PER TYP INTERIOR 5 LIGHT DUTY BACK -TO -BACK FLOOR ANCHORAGE NOT TO SCALE NOT USED (0 (0 PROFILE "G" (G -1, G -2) • NOT TO SCALE DATE ISSUED 02 NOVEMBER 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS • • • • 11 -02 -2010 O N ISSUE FOR PERMIT O N N & & DRAWN BY MKA �`�� " ° °" C\I O N O • 371- • O V • O • CHECKED BY GJS O c-• (.0 O • O • Donna Miller 02 —NOV -2010 14:20 O N • 0_ H PROFILE "H" (H -1, H -2) • • NOMINAL SIZE • 0 18 GA MATERIAL LIGHT DUTY HORIZONTAL BRACE NOT USED NOT TO SCALE PROFILE "K" (K -1 to K -3) NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE • SECTION NOT TO SCALE Mar o 5 2��1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAT City of Tukwila BUILDING OMSInN CO V— • • • • MR O N M O N N & & N �`�� " ° °" C\I O N O • 371- • O V • O • (9 • O c-• (.0 O • PROFILE "K" (K -1 to K -3) NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE • SECTION NOT TO SCALE Mar o 5 2��1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAT City of Tukwila BUILDING OMSInN PROFILE "S" S -1 to S -3) GENERAL NOTES 1. DETAILS 1 THRU 10 SHOW TYPICAL COMPONENT ASSEMBLY. 2. PROFILES 13 THRU 18 SHOW TYPICAL ELEVATIONS OF SHELVING UNITS. SEE TARGET FIXTURE PLAN SHEET SR11 FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 3. MATERIAL: STEEL ASTM A653 HSLA5 GRADE 50 CLASS 2 4. FLOOR ANCHORS: • SIMPSON TITEN HD 3/8" 0 X 3" LONG (21/2" EMBED) ICC ES REPORT ESR -2713 CITY OF LA RR # 25741 5. SPECIAL INSPECTION • PERIODIC INSPECTION FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON FIXTURES OVER 8' -0 "'PER 1707.6 • PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING PER 1707.4. • NO WELDING IN FIELD. 6. THE COMPONENTS REPRESENTED HERE ARE MANUFACTURED BY LOZIER. 7. PROFILES CAN VARY FROM THOSE SHOWN IN DETAILS 13 THRU 21 AS LONG AS MAXIMUM SHELVING SPACE OF 36" IS MAINTAINED. 8. SHELVING COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS ARE DESIGNED TO AN IBC OR CBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D. bto 3r7 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, row "wE�aLNGroN 98188 STORE T-0627 MR O N UTY O N • • & & O �`�� " ° °" O O O O • O O • O c-• O • O • PROFILE "S" S -1 to S -3) GENERAL NOTES 1. DETAILS 1 THRU 10 SHOW TYPICAL COMPONENT ASSEMBLY. 2. PROFILES 13 THRU 18 SHOW TYPICAL ELEVATIONS OF SHELVING UNITS. SEE TARGET FIXTURE PLAN SHEET SR11 FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 3. MATERIAL: STEEL ASTM A653 HSLA5 GRADE 50 CLASS 2 4. FLOOR ANCHORS: • SIMPSON TITEN HD 3/8" 0 X 3" LONG (21/2" EMBED) ICC ES REPORT ESR -2713 CITY OF LA RR # 25741 5. SPECIAL INSPECTION • PERIODIC INSPECTION FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON FIXTURES OVER 8' -0 "'PER 1707.6 • PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING PER 1707.4. • NO WELDING IN FIELD. 6. THE COMPONENTS REPRESENTED HERE ARE MANUFACTURED BY LOZIER. 7. PROFILES CAN VARY FROM THOSE SHOWN IN DETAILS 13 THRU 21 AS LONG AS MAXIMUM SHELVING SPACE OF 36" IS MAINTAINED. 8. SHELVING COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS ARE DESIGNED TO AN IBC OR CBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D. bto 3r7 NOT TO SCALE RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER SHEET SR52 TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, row "wE�aLNGroN 98188 STORE T-0627 MR TITLE STRUCTURAL NOGEDETAILS UTY S HELVING NOTES & & " " ° °° �`�� " ° °" LT D GENERAL NOT TO SCALE RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER SHEET SR52 FRONT ELEVATION GROCERY AREAS SIDE ELEVATION SEE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION IN STORE. NTS 0 vi 0 0 GONDOLA ARM 12 GA ARM / WOOD BLOCKING GONDOLA UPRIGHT SEE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 12 GA PLATE & SCREWS SEE NOT TO SCALE • 4' -0" 1' -6" OR 1' -10" • FRONT ELEVATION NON GROCERY AREAS SIDE ELEVATION SEE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION IN STORE. NTS 14 GA LOCKING HOOK 14 GA BASE SHOE 3/6" RIVET SRS SR5 THIS END SLOTS INTO MANUFACTURED HOLES IN UPRIGHT 5 -3 /g" 0��� ARC SPOT WELDS • 11 GA STRAP GONDOLA BASE • 3 3/8" 3/8" • • • • • ELEVATION NOT TO SCALE • THIS SIDE TO BE INSTALLED TO 1x6 BLOCKING W /MINIMUM OF 1 - I/4" 0 LAG SCREW. TWO MAY BE PROVIDED, BUT ONLY ONE IS REQUIRED. • - w • TOP VIEW NOTES: MAT'L 12 GA GLV WALL MOUNT BRACKET DETAIL SIDE VIEW 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 o: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \Struc_ Documents\ Structural_Fixture \0627sr53.dgn !ii:::iii- _r MIA11/■ ii Aoiiiiiiiiiii AA ii ■ii • 110 iii ■ ∎iiiisiiii MAI111iiii� ■iii i i■ i i i i iii i i i r i i i i i ii i� ■ r i 7/32" HARDBOARD TYP 1- =, ---- V- ---- V A A FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION OPP HAND TYPICAL GONDOLA ELEVATIONS 12 GA BENT TAB ENGAGING ANCHOR SLOT TYP - SEE NOT TO SCALE DOUBLE FACED GONDOLA POST SINGLE FACED GONDOLA BASE GONDOLA BASE SEE ONE 3/8" FLOOR ANCHOR THROUGH HOLES USING PATTERN SHOWN ANCHORAGE NOT REQUIRED FOR GONDOLAS LESS THAN 8'-0" TALL GONDOLA ANCHORAGE NOT TO SCALE NOT USED NOT USED TARGET TYP WHEN ADJACENT TO WALL NOT USED GONDOLA LEG (1) 3/8" FLOOR ANCHOR SEE GENERAL NOTE 43 BASE ANCHORAGE NOT USED 17 NOT USED 5/6" SLOT IN WEB OF BASE NOT TO SCALE GONDOLA BASE NOT USED 3 11 DETAIL 12 GA PLATE TOP OF CONCRETE FLOOR ANCHOR SEE GENERAL NOTE 43 FOR ANCHOR INFORMATION NOT USED SR5 DATE ISSUED 02 NOVEMBER 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS ARM d d1 1 & 4 POSITION 2.35" 3.41" 3 POSITION 3.86" 4.92" GONDOLA ARM 12 GA ARM / WOOD BLOCKING GONDOLA UPRIGHT SEE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 12 GA PLATE & SCREWS SEE NOT TO SCALE • 4' -0" 1' -6" OR 1' -10" • FRONT ELEVATION NON GROCERY AREAS SIDE ELEVATION SEE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION IN STORE. NTS 14 GA LOCKING HOOK 14 GA BASE SHOE 3/6" RIVET SRS SR5 THIS END SLOTS INTO MANUFACTURED HOLES IN UPRIGHT 5 -3 /g" 0��� ARC SPOT WELDS • 11 GA STRAP GONDOLA BASE • 3 3/8" 3/8" • • • • • ELEVATION NOT TO SCALE • THIS SIDE TO BE INSTALLED TO 1x6 BLOCKING W /MINIMUM OF 1 - I/4" 0 LAG SCREW. TWO MAY BE PROVIDED, BUT ONLY ONE IS REQUIRED. • - w • TOP VIEW NOTES: MAT'L 12 GA GLV WALL MOUNT BRACKET DETAIL SIDE VIEW 1000 NICOLLET MALL MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55403 o: \Remodels \0627 WA South_Center R \Struc_ Documents\ Structural_Fixture \0627sr53.dgn !ii:::iii- _r MIA11/■ ii Aoiiiiiiiiiii AA ii ■ii • 110 iii ■ ∎iiiisiiii MAI111iiii� ■iii i i■ i i i i iii i i i r i i i i i ii i� ■ r i 7/32" HARDBOARD TYP 1- =, ---- V- ---- V A A FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION OPP HAND TYPICAL GONDOLA ELEVATIONS 12 GA BENT TAB ENGAGING ANCHOR SLOT TYP - SEE NOT TO SCALE DOUBLE FACED GONDOLA POST SINGLE FACED GONDOLA BASE GONDOLA BASE SEE ONE 3/8" FLOOR ANCHOR THROUGH HOLES USING PATTERN SHOWN ANCHORAGE NOT REQUIRED FOR GONDOLAS LESS THAN 8'-0" TALL GONDOLA ANCHORAGE NOT TO SCALE NOT USED NOT USED TARGET TYP WHEN ADJACENT TO WALL NOT USED GONDOLA LEG (1) 3/8" FLOOR ANCHOR SEE GENERAL NOTE 43 BASE ANCHORAGE NOT USED 17 NOT USED 5/6" SLOT IN WEB OF BASE NOT TO SCALE GONDOLA BASE NOT USED 3 11 DETAIL 12 GA PLATE TOP OF CONCRETE FLOOR ANCHOR SEE GENERAL NOTE 43 FOR ANCHOR INFORMATION NOT USED SR5 DATE ISSUED 02 NOVEMBER 2010 ISSUES AND REVISIONS MR Cycle 07/11 11 -02 -2010 PROJECT CODE ISSUE FOR PERMIT SALES F LR GONDOLAS &GENERAL NOTES DRAWN BY MKA CHECKED BY GJS Donna Miller 02 —NOV -2010 14:20 NOT USED NOT TO SCALE 1" ti N 6 GONDOLA POST S R5 EL= 107' -6" 18 GA BENT PL MIN 3/6" CHANNEL NOT TO SCALE i i i •1 SR53 I 01 II al II III GONDOLA POST 12 WALL ANCHORAGE SR5 CODE Q DE COMPLIANCE APPROVED • (bier 0 D 2u11 7 RECEIVED NOV 19 2010 PERMIT CENTER Cityof Tukwila BUILDING DIVISInN lx BLOCKING BY BUILDING EOR EXTERIOR WALL INTERIOR WALL BY BUILDING EOR NOT TO SCALE GENERAL NOTES 1. THIS DRAWING SHOWS TYPICAL COMPONENT ASSEMBLY AND ARRANGEMENTS. SEE TARGET FIXTURE PLAN SHEET SR11 FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 2. MATERIAL: STEEL ASTM A101 1 HSLA5 GRADE 50 CLASS 2 • SHELF - Fy = 90 ksi • POST - Fy = 65 ksi • BASE - Fy = 45 ksi • BASE HOOK - Fy = 80 ksi 3. FLOOR ANCHORS: • SIMPSON TITEN HD 3/8" rz( X 3" LONG (21/2" EMBED) ICC ES REPORT ESR -2713 CITY OF LA RR 425741. 4. SPECIAL INSPECTION PERIODIC INSPECTION FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON FIXTURES OVER 8' -0°. NO WELDING IN FIELD. 5. SINGLE SIDED GONDOLAS ALONG PERIMETER WALLS MAY BE ANCHORED TO lx WOOD BLOCKING. SEE ® FOR ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT EACH UPRIGHT. 6. THE COMPONENTS REPRESENTED HERE ARE MANUFACTURED BY LOZIER CORPORATION, CITY OF LA CERTIFIED FABRICATOR #1644: OR SYNDICATE SYSTEMS, CITY OF LA CERTIFIED FABRICATOR #2043. 7. SHELVING COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS ARE DESIGNED TO AN IBC OR CBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D. TARGET STORE SOUTH CENTER, WA s,��pERa�� ���IL^,w�H1NGTON9818a T-0627 MR Cycle 07/11 TITLE STRUCTURAL DETAILS & ANCHORAGE OF PROJECT CODE CONFIGURATION LL SALES F LR GONDOLAS &GENERAL NOTES SHEET SR53